NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE OF INDIA

PART 1- GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS

Introduction-
Electrical installations require adequate planning right from concept stage to layout and
designing, selection of proper equipment, their installation and their maintenance. Fundamental
aspects of installation practice are common for most of the types of electrical installations. Part
1 of the National Electrical Code covers these aspects under its various Sections. An account
has been taken of the Indian Standards existing on different aspects of electrical installation
practice. However, some practices have changed over time and corresponding Codes of
practice either do not exist or are yet to be modified. An attempt has been made through this
Code to refer to the present good practices. A reference has also been made to product standards
in order to inform the user of the Code about the availability and desirability to use them.
Aspects concerning specific occupancies are covered in other Parts and Sections of this Code.
The fundamental principles of installation practice covered under Part 1 of this Code generally
apply, unless modified or supplemented by subsequent Parts. This Part 1 would also be a useful
reference for occupancies not explicitly covered by the scope of subsequent Parts of the Code.
Following are various sections covered under this part:

NEC Part Section Title

/Document
No
Part 1 1 Scope of the National Electrical Code
2 Definitions
3 Graphical Symbols for Diagrams, Letter Symbols and Signs
4 Guide for Preparation of Diagrams, Charts, Tables, and Marking
5 Units and Systems of Measurement
6 Standard Values
7 Fundamental Principles
8 Assessment of General Characteristics of Buildings
9 Wiring Installations
10 Protection for safety – Protection against Electric shock
11 Protection for safety – Protection against Thermal Effect and
Protection against Fire due to Arcing
12 Protection for safety – Protection against Over current and Fault
Current
13 Protection for safety – Protection against Voltage disturbance &
measures against Electromagnetic influences
14 Short-Circuit & Voltage Drop Calculations
15 Electrical Aspects of Building Services
16 Selection of Equipment
17 Erection and Pre-commissioning Testing of Installations
18 Earthing
19 Lightning Protection
20 Power quality
21 Energy Efficiency Aspects
22 Safety in Electrical Work
SECTION 1 SCOPE OF THE NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE
FOREWORD
Each Part/Section of the National Electrical Code covers the requirements relating to electrical
installations in specific occupancies. The fundamental and general principles governing electrical
installation practice together with common aspects applicable to all types of installations has been
brought out in a separate Part in order to serve as a reference document on such matters.
Effort has been made to make this part self-contained, so that users of the Code can derive utmost
advantage in using it for application in the field even for occupancies not explicitly covered by the
scope of subsequent Parts of the Code. Efforts have also been made to ensure that all the relevant
details required for the understanding of the Code are available to the extent possible within Part
1 and effort has been made to keep the references of individual standards to the minimum.
The details enumerated in this Part are generally applicable to all types of occupancies and are to
be read as modified or supplemented with the information provided in the relevant Parts of the
Code.

1 SCOPE
This (Part 1/Sec 1) of the Code describes the scope of the National Electrical Code.

2 REFERENCES
The National Electrical Code takes into account the stipulations in several Indian Standards dealing
with the various aspects relating to electrical installation practice. Several product standards also
exist, and compliance with relevant Indian Standards is desirable. It is therefore recommended that
individual Parts/Sections of the Code should be read in conjunction with the relevant Indian
Standards. List of such Indian Standards is given at relevant Part/ Section of the Code.
At the time of publication, the editions indicated were valid. All standards are subject to revision,
and parties to agreements based on this standard are encouraged to investigate the possibility of
applying the most recent editions of the standards.

3 SCOPE OF THE NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

3.1 The National Electrical Code covers the following:

a) Standard good practices for selection of various items of electrical equipment forming part
of power systems;
b) Recommendations concerning safety and related matter in the wiring of electrical
installations of buildings or industrial structures, promoting compatibility between such
recommendations and those concerning the equipment installed;
 c) General safety procedures and practices in electrical work; and
d) Additional precautions to be taken for use of electrical equipment for special environmental
conditions like explosive and active atmosphere.
3.2 The Code applies to electrical installations, such as those in:
a) Standby/emergency generating plants and building substations;
b) Domestic dwellings;
c) Office buildings, shopping and commercial centres and institutions;
d) Recreation and other public premises;
e) Medical locations;
f) Hotels;
g) Swimming pools;
h) Rooms containing sauna heaters;
j) Multi-storied buildings;
k) Supplies for electrical vehicles;
m) Sports buildings;
n) Industrial and non-industrial premises;
p) Temporary and permanent outdoor installations;
q) Agricultural premises;
r) Installations in hazardous areas; and
s) Solar photovoltaic installations.

NOTES:
1 Any type of installation not covered by the above shall be classified in the group which most nearly resemble
its existing or proposed use.
2 Where change in the occupancy places it under the scope of a different Section of the Code, the same
installation shall be made to comply with the requirements of the Code for the new occupancy.

3.3 The Code applies to circuits other than the internal wiring of apparatus.

3.4 The Code does not apply to traction, motor vehicles, and installations in rolling-stock, on
board-ships, aircraft or installations in underground mines.

3.5 The Code covers only electrical aspects of lightning protection of buildings and in so far as
the effects of lightning on the electrical installations are concerned. It does not cover lightning
protection aspects from structural safety point of view.

3.6 The Code is also not intended to apply to,:

a) Systems of distribution of energy to public; and
b) Power generation and transmission for such systems.
3.7 The Code also does not cover guidelines on the payment for electrical work done in
installations.
 SECTION 2 DEFINITIONS

FOREWORD
Each Part of the Code gives, where necessary, definitions of terms and phrases relevant for the
comprehension of the requirements stipulated therein. Users may find it convenient to refer to a
detailed list of terms and their definitions contained in this section that are relevant to electrical
installation practice. It may however be noted that for further guidance, recourse should be made to IS
1885 (series) on electrotechnical vocabulary containing a compendium of terms in the field.
The definitions contained in the Code are based on the current international terminology as far as
possible. Some definitions are based on the terminology drawn up by the relevant expert groups under
the Electrotechnical Division Council with the object of striking a correct balance between absolute
precision and simplicity. The principal object of this exercise is to provide definitions which are
sufficiently clear so that each term is understood with the same meaning by all concerned. It may
sometimes be felt that the definitions are not identical with those which may be found in other
publications designed with different objectives and for other readers. Such differences are inevitable
and should be accepted in the interest of clarity.

1 SCOPE
This Indian Standard (Part 1/Sec 2) of the Code covers definitions of terms.

2 REFERENCES
The standards listed in Annex A contain provisions, which through reference in this text, constitute
provisions of this standard. At the time of publication, the editions indicated were valid. All standards are
subject to revision, and parties to agreements based on this standard are encouraged to investigate the
possibility of applying the most recent editions of the standards.

3 TERMINOLOGY
For the purpose of the National Electrical Code, the following definitions shall apply, in addition to
those contained in individual Parts/Sections and relevant Indian Standards.

3.1 Fundamental Definitions

3.1.1 Arc — A luminous discharge of electricity across a gas, characterized by a large current and a
low voltage gradient, often accompanied by partial volatilization of the electrodes.

3.1.2 Capacitor — A system of two conductors (plates) separated over the extent of their surfaces by
an insulation medium which is capable of storing electrical energy as electrical stress.

3.1.3 Conductor — A substance or body which allows current of electricity to pass continuously.

3.1.4 Connection of Circuits

3.1.4.1 Series — An arrangement of elements so that they all carry the same current or flux.
3.1.4.2 Parallel — An arrangement of elements so that they all carry a portion of total current or
flux.
3.1.4.3 Series parallel — An arrangement of elements of which some are connected in series and
others in parallel.
3.1.5 Current — The elementary quantity of electricity flowing through a given section of a conductor
divided by the corresponding indefinitely small time.
3.1.6 Dielectric — A material medium in which an electric field can exist in a stationary state.

3.1.7 Earth Fault — Accidental connection/contact of a conductor to earth. When the impedance is
negligible, the connection is called a dead earth.

3.1.8 Earth Leakage Current — The current flowing to earth on account of imperfect insulation.
3.1.9 Electric Circuit ( abb. Circuit) — An assembly of electrical equipment supplied from the same
origin and protected against overcurrent by the same protective devices. Certain types of circuit
are categorized as follows:

a) Category 1 Circuit — A circuit (other than a fire alarm or emergency lighting circuit)
operating at low voltage and supplied directly from a mains supply system.
b) Category 2 Circuit — With the exception of fire alarm and emergency lighting circuits, any
circuit for telecommunication (for example, radio, telephone, sound distribution, intruder
alarm, bell, call and data transmission circuits) which is supplied from a safety source.
c) Category 3 Circuit — A fire alarm circuit or an emergency lighting circuit.

3.1.10 Electric Current — The movement of electricity in a medium or along a circuit. The direction of
the current is accepted as opposite to that of the motion of negative electricity.

3.1.11 Electrode — A conducting element used for conveying current to and from a medium.

3.1.12 Functional Extra-low Voltage (FELV) — An extra-low voltage system in which not all of the
protective measures required for SELV or PELV have been applied.

3.1.13 Flashover — The passage of a disruptive discharge round in insulating material.

3.1.14 Insulation Fault — An abnormal decrease in insulation resistance.

3.1.15 Overload — Operating conditions in an electrically undamaged circuit which causes an

overcurrent.

3.1.16 PELV (Protective Extra-low Voltage) — An extra-low voltage system which is not electrically
separated from earth, but which otherwise satisfies all the requirements for SELV.

3.1.17 SELV (Separated Extra Low-Voltage) — An extra low-voltage system which is electrically
separated from earth and from other system in such a way that a single fault cannot give rise to the
risk of electric shock.

3.1.18 Short-circuit — The intentional or accidental connection of two points of a circuit through a
negligible impedance. The term is often applied to the group of phenomena which accompany a
short circuit between points at different potentials.

3.1.19 Spark — A brilliantly luminous phenomenon of short duration which characterized a disruptive
discharge.

3.1.20 Voltage, Potential Difference — The line of integral from one point to another of an
electric field, taken along a given path.

3.2 Equipment
3.2.1 Apparatus — Electrical apparatus including all machines, appliances and fittings in which
conductors are used for of which they may form a part.

3.2.2 Appliance — An item of current-using equipment other than a luminaire or an independent motor

3.2.3 Auto-transformer — A transformer in which the primary and secondary windings have common
part or parts.

3.2.4 Bimetallic Connector — A connector designed for the purpose of connecting together two or
more conductors of different materials (normally copper and aluminium) for preventing
electrolytic corrosion.

3.2.5 Circuit-Breaker (Mechanical) — A mechanical switching device capable of making, carrying

and breaking currents under normal circuit conditions and also of making, carrying for as
 specified, and breaking currents under specified abnormal circuit conditions such as those of short
circuit.
NOTE — A circuit breaker is usually intended to operate infrequently, although some types are
suitable for frequent operation.

3.2.6 Circuit Breaker Linked — A circuit breaker the contacts of which are so arranged as to make or
break all poles simultaneously or in a definite sequence.

3.2.7 Class I Equipment — Equipment in which protection against electric shock does not rely on
basic insulation only, but which includes an additional safety precaution in such a way that means
are provided for the connection of exposed conductive parts to a protective conductor in the
fixed wiring of installation in such a way that accessible conductive parts may not become live in
the event of a failure of basic installation.

NOTE — For information on classification of equipment with regard to means provided for
protection against electric shock, see IEC 61140

3.2.8 Class II Equipment — Equipment in which protection against electric shock does not rely on
basic insulation only, but in which additional safety precautions, such as double or reinforced
insulation are provided, there being no provision for the connection of exposed metal work of the
equipment to a protective conductor, and no reliance upon precautions to be taken in the fixed
wiring of the installation.

3.2.9 Class III Equipment — Equipment in which protection against electric shock relies on supply at
SELV and in which voltages higher than those of SELV are not generated.

3.2.10 Current Using Equipment — Equipment which converts electrical energy into another form of
energy, such as light, heat, or motive power.

3.2.11 D-Type Fuse — A non-interchangeable fuse comprising a fuse-base a screw type fuse-carrier, a
gauge piece and a fuse-link.

3.2.12 Disconnector — A mechanical switching device which, in the open position, complies with
the requirements specified for the isolation function.
NOTES:
1 A disconnector is otherwise known as isolator.
2 A disconnector is capable of opening and closing a circuit when either a negligible current is
broken or made, or when no significant change in the voltage across the terminals of each pole of
the disconnector occurs. It is also capable of carrying currents under normal circuit conditions and
carrying for a specified time, current under abnormal conditions such as those of short-circuit

3.2.13 Distribution Pillar — A totally enclosed structure cubicle containing bus-bars connected to
incoming and outgoing distribution feeders controlled through links fuses.

3.2.14 Electrical Equipment (abb: Equipment) — Any item for such purposes as generation,
conversion, transmission, distribution or utilization of electrical energy, such as machines,
transformers, apparatus, measuring instruments, protective devices, wiring, materials,
accessories, and appliances.

3.2.15 Electric Motor — A machine for converting electrical energy into mechanical energy

3.2.16 Electrode Boiler (or Electrode Water Heater) — Equipment for the electrical heating of water or
electrolyte by the passage of an electric current between electrodes immersed in the water or
electrolyte.

3.2.17 Isolator — A mechanical switching device which, in the open position, complies with the
requirements specified for the isolating function. An isolator is otherwise known as a
disconnector
3.2.18 Enclosed Distribution Fuse-board — An enclosure containing bus-bars, with fuses, for the
purposes of protecting, controlling or connecting more than one outgoing circuit fed from one or
more incoming circuits.

3.2.19 Enclosed Fuse-link — Fuse-link in which the fuse-element is totally enclosed, so that during
operation within its rating it cannot produce any harmful external effects, for example, due to
development of an arc, the release of gas or the ejection of flame or metallic particles

3.2.20 Fixed Equipment — Equipment fastened to a support or otherwise secured

3.2.21 Fuse — A device which, by melting of one or more of its specially designed and proportioned
components, opens the circuit in which it is inserted by breaking the current when this exceeds a
given value for a sufficient time. The fuse comprises all the parts that form the complete device.

NOTE — The fuse comprises all the parts that form the complete device.

3.2.22 Fuse-base (Fuse-mount) — The fixed part of a fuse provided with contacts and terminals for
connection to the system. The fuse-base comprises all the parts necessary for insulation.

3.2.23 Fuse-carrier — The movable part of a fuse designed to carry a fuse link.

3.2.24 Fuse-element — A part of a fuse designed to melt when the fuse operates.

3.2.25 Fuse-link — A part of fuse, including the fuse element(s), which requires replacement by a new
or renewable fuse link after the fuse has operated and before the fuse is put back into service.

3.2.26 Fuse-switch — A switch in which a fuse-link or a fuse-carrier with fuse-link forms the moving
contact of the switch.

3.2.27 Generator — A machine for converting mechanical energy into electrical energy.

3.2.28 Hand-held Equipment — Portable equipment intended to be held in the hand during normal use,
in which the motor, if any, forms an integral part of the equipment.

NOTE — A hand held equipment is an item of equipment, the functioning of which requires
constant manual support or guidance

3.2.29 Induction Motor — An alternating current motor without a commutator in which one part only,
the rotor or a stator, is connected to the supply network, the other working by induction.

3.2.30 Interconnecting Bus-bar — A conductor other than cable, used for external connection between
terminals of equipment.

3.2.31 Lightning Arrester (Surge Diverter) — A device designed to protect electrical apparatus from
high transient to protect electrical apparatus from high transient voltage and to limit the duration
and frequently the amplitude of follow-current. The term ‘lightning arrester’ includes any
external series gap which is essential for the proper functioning of the device as installed for
service, regardless of whether or not it is supplied as an integral part of the device.

3.2.32 Low-Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear Assembly — A combination of one or more low voltage
switching devices together with associated control, measuring, signalling, protective, regulating
equipment etc, completely assembled under the responsibility of the manufacturer with all the
internal electrical and mechanical inter-connections and structural parts. The components of the
assembly may be electromechanical or electronic

3.2.33 Luminaire — Equipment which distributes, filters or transforms the light from one or more
lamps, and which includes any parts necessary for supporting, fixing and protecting the lamps, but
not the lamps themselves, and, where necessary, circuit auxiliaries together with the means for
connecting them to the supply.

NOTE — For the purposes of this code a batten lampholder, or a lampholder suspended by
flexible cord, is a luminaire.
3.2.34 Luminaire Supporting Coupler (LSC) — A means comprises of LSC outlet and an LSC connector,
providing mechanical support for a luminaire and the electrical connection to and disconnection
from a fixed wiring installation.

3.2.35 Miniature Circuit-breaker — A compact mechanical device for making and breaking a circuit
both in normal conditions and in abnormal conditions such as those of overcurrent and short-
circuit.

3.2.36 Mobile Equipment — Electrical equipment which is moved while in operation or which can be
easily moved from one place to another while connected to the supply.

3.2.37 Motor Generator Set — A machine which consists of an electric motor mechanically coupled to a
generator.

3.2.38 Plug — A device, provided with contact pins, which is intended to be attached to a flexible cable,
and which can be engaged with a socket outlet or with a connector.

3.2.39 Portable Equipment — Equipment which is moved while in operation or which can easily be
moved from one place to another while connected to the supply.

3.2.40 Relay (Including Gas-operated Relay) — A device designed to produce sudden pre-determined
changes in one or more physical systems on the appearance of certain conditions in the physical
system controlling it

3.2.41 Residual Current Device (RCD) — A mechanical switching device or association of devices
intended to cause the opening of the contacts when the residual current attains a given value under
specified conditions.

3.2.42 Residual Current Operated Circuit-Breaker with Integral Overcurent Protection (RCBO) —A
residual current operated switching device designed to perform the functions of protection against
overload and/or short-circuit.

3.2.43 Residual Current Operated Circuit-Breaker without Integral Overcurrent Protection (RCCB) —
A residual current operated switching device not designed to perform the functions of protection
against overload and/or short-circuit.

3.2.44 Stationary Equipment — fixed equipment or equipment not provided with a carrying handle and
having such a mass that it cannot easily be moved.

3.2.45 Switch — A mechanical switching device capable of making, carrying and breaking current under
normal circuit conditions, which may include specified operating overload conditions, and also of
carrying for a specified time currents under specified abnormal circuit conditions such as those of
short circuit.

NOTE — A switch may also be capable of making, but not breaking, short-circuit currents

3.2.46 Switch, Linked — A switch, the contacts of which are so arranged as to make or break all poles
simultaneously or in a definite sequence.

3.2.47 Switch-disconnector — A switch which, in the open position, satisfies the isolating
requirements specified for a disconnector.

NOTE — A switch-disconnector is otherwise known as an isolating switch.

3.2.48 Switch-fuse — A switch in which one or more poles have a fuse in series in a composite unit.

3.2.49 Switchboard — An assembly of switchgear with or without instruments, but the term does not apply
to a group of local switches in a final circuit.
 NOTE — The term ‘switchboard’ includes a distribution board.

3.2.50 Switchgear — An assembly of main and auxiliary switching apparatus for operation,
regulation, protection or other control of electrical installations.

3.2.51 Switchgear and Controlgear — A general term covering switching devices and their combination
with associated control, measuring, protective and regulating equipment, also assemblies of such
devices and equipment with associated inter-connections, accessories, enclosures and supporting
structures intended in principle for use in connection with generation, transmission, distribution
and conversion of electric energy. Controlgears are switching devices intended in principle for
the control of electrical energy consuming equipment.

3.2.52 Surge Protective Devices (SPD) — A device that is intended to limit transient overvoltages and
divert surge currents. It contains at least one non-linear component

3.2.53 Transformer — A piece of apparatus, without continuously moving parts, which by

electromagnetic induction transforms variable voltage and current in one or more other windings
usually at different values of voltage and current and at the same frequency.

3.3 Wiring Practice

3.3.1 Accessory — A device, other than current-using equipment, associated with such equipment or with
the wiring of an installation..

3.3.2 Aerial Conductor — Any conductor which is supported by insulators above the ground and is
directly exposed to the weather.

NOTE — The following four classes of aerial conductors are recognized:

a) Bare aerial conductors,

b) Covered aerial conductors,
c) Insulated aerial conductors, and
d) Weatherproof neutral-screened cable.
3.3.3 Back-up Protection — Protection which is intended to operate when a system fault is not
cleared or abnormal condition not detected in the required time, because of failure or inability of
other protection to operate or failure of appropriate circuit-breaker to trip.
3.3.4 Barrier V — A part providing a defined degree of protection against contact with live parts, from
any usual direction of access.
3.3.5 Basic Insulation — Insulation applied to live parts to provide basic protection against electric shock
and which does not necessarily include insulation used exclusively for functional purpose.
3.3.6 Basic Protection — Protection against electric shock under fault-free condition.
NOTE — For low voltage installations, systems and equipment, basic protection generally
corresponds to protection against direct contact that is “contact of persons or live parts”.
3.3.7 Bonding Conductor — A protective conductor providing equipotential bonding.
3.3.8 Bonding Network (BN) — A set of interconnected conductive parts that provide a path for
current at frequencies from direct current (d.c.) to radio frequency (RF) intended to divert, block or
impede the passage of electromagnetic energy.
3.3.9 Bonding Ring Conductor (BRC) —A bus earthing conductor in the form of a closed ring.
NOTE — Normally the bonding ring conductor, as part of the bonding network, has multiple
connections to the common bonding network (CBN) that improves its performance.

3.3.10 Bunched — Cables are said to be ‘bunched’ when two or more are contained within a single
conduit, duct or groove or, if not enclosed, are not separated from each other.

3.3.11 Buried Direct — A cable laid in the ground in intimate contact with the soil.
3.3.12 Busbar Trunking System — A type-tested assembly, in the form of an enclosed conductor system
comprising solid conductors separated by insulating materials. The assembly may consist of units
such as:
a) Busbur trunking units, with or without tap-off facilities;
b) Tap-off units where applicable; and
c) Phase-transposition, expansion, building- movement, flexible, end-feeder and adaptor units.

3.3.13 Bypass Equipotential Bonding Conductor — Bonding conductor connected in parallel with the
screens of cables.

3.3.14 Wire — Wires are a single aluminium /copper conductor, solid / stranded . Usually wires are bare
and often twisted. Some wires are coated with thin coloured PVC / insulated layer.

3.3.15 Cable — A length of single-insulated conductor (solid or stranded), or two or more such
conductors, each provided with its own insulation, which are laid up together. The insulated
conductor or conductors may or may not be provided with an overall mechanical protective
covering.

3.3.16 Cable, Armoured — A cable provided with a wrapping of metal (usually in the form of tape or
wire) serving as a mechanical protection.

3.3.17 Cable, Flexible — A cable containing one or more cores, each formed of a group of wires, the
diameters of the cores and of the wires being sufficiently small to afford flexibility.

3.3.18 Cable Bracket — A cable support consisting of single devices fixed to elements of building or
plant construction.

3.3.19 Cable Channel — An enclosure situated above or in the ground, open or ventilated or closed, and
having dimensions which do not permit the access of persons but allow access to the conductor
and/or cables throughout their length during and after installation.

NOTE — A cable channel may or may not form part of the building construction.

3.3.20 Cable Cleat — A component of a support system which consists of elements spread at intervals
along the length of the cable or conduits and which mechanically retains the cable or conduit.

3.3.21 Cable Coupler — A means enabling the connection, at will, of two flexible cables. It consists of
a connector and a plug.

3.3.22 Cable Ducting — A manufactured enclosure of metal or insulating material, other than conduit or
cable trunking, intended for the protection of cables which are drawn-in after erection of the
ducting, but which is not specifically intended to form part of a building structure.

3.3.23 Cable Ladder — A cable support occupying less than 10 percent of the plan area and consisting of
a series of supporting elements rigidly fixed to each other or to a main supporting member or
members.

3.3.24 Cable Tray — A cable support consisting of a continuous base with raised edges and no covering.
A cable tray is considered to be non-perforated, where less than 30 percent of the material is
removed from the base.

3.3.25 Cable Trunking — A factory made closed support and protection system into which conductors
and/or cables are laid after removal of the cover.

3.3.26 Cable Tunnel — An enclosure (corridor) containing supporting structures for conductors and/or
cables and joints and whose dimensions allow free access to persons throughout the entire length.

3.3.27 Cartridge Fuse Link — A device comprising a fuse element or several fuse elements connected in
parallel enclosed in a cartridge usually filled with an arc-extinguishing medium and connected
 to terminations. The fuse link is the part of a fuse which requires replacing after the fuse has
operated.

3.3.28 Circuit, Final, Sub — An outgoing circuit connected to one-way distribution fuse-board and
intended to supply electrical energy at one or more points to current-using appliances, without the
intervention of a further distribution fuse-board other than a one-way board. It includes all branches
and extensions derived from that particular way in the board.

3.3.29 Cold Tail — The interface between the fixed installation and a heating unit.
3.3.30 Combustible — Capable of burning.

3.3.31 Common Equipotential Bonding System, Common Bonding Network — Equipotential bonding
system providing both protective equipotential bonding and functional equipotential bonding

3.3.32 Conductor, Bare — A conductor not covered with insulating material.

3.3.33 Conductor, Earthed — A conductor with no provision for its insulation from earth.

3.3.34 Conductor, Insulated — A conductor adequately covered with insulating material of such quality
and thickness as to prevent danger.

3.3.35 Conductor for Portable Appliances — A combination of a plug and socket arranged for attachment
to a portable electrical appliance or to a flexible cord.

3.3.36 Confined Conductive Location — Allocation having surfaces which are mainly composed of
extraneous conductive parts and which are of such dimensions that movement is restricted to such an
extent that contact with surfaces is difficult to avoid (for example in a boiler).

3.3.37 Connector — The part of a cable coupler or of an appliance coupler which is provided with female
contact and is intended to be attached to the flexible cable connected to the supply.

3.3.38 Connector Box or Joint Box — A box forming a part of wiring installation provided to contain
joints in the conductors of cables of the installation.

3.3.39 Consumer Unit (May also be Known as a Consumer Control Unit or Electricity Control Unit) —
A particular type of distribution board comprising a type- tested coordinated assembly for the
control and distribution of electrical energy, principally in domestic premises, incorporating manual
means of double-pole isolation on the incoming circuit(s) and an assembly of one or more fuses,
circuit-breakers, residual current operated devices or signalling and other devices proven during the
type-test of the assembly as suitable for such use.

3.3.40 Consumer’s Terminals — The ends of the electrical conductors situated upon any consumer’s
premises and belonging to him at which the supply of energy is delivered from the service line.

3.3.41 Cord, Flexible — A flexible cable having conductor of small cross-sectional area. Two flexible
cords twisted together are known as ‘Twin Flexible Cord’.
NOTE — For the maximum diameter and minimum number of wires for flexible cord, see relevant
standard.

3.3.42 Cut-out — Any appliance for automatically interrupting the transmission of energy through any
conductor when the current rises above a predetermined amount, for example, fusible cut-out.

3.3.43 Dead — At or about earth potential and/or disconnected from any live system.

3.3.44 Direct Contact — Contact of persons or livestock with live parts which may result in electric
shock.
.
3.3.45 Direct Earthing System — A system of earthing in which the parts of an installation are so earthed
as specified but are not connected within the installation to the neutral conductor of the supply
system or to earth through the trip coil of an earth leakage circuit-breaker.

3.3.46 Discrimination — Ability of a protective device to operate in preference to another protective device
in series.

3.3.47 Distribution Circuit (of Buildings) — A circuit supplying a distributing board.

3.3.48 Distribution Fuse-board — An assemblage of parts including one or more fuses arranged for the
distribution of electrical energy to final sub-circuits.

3.3.49 Double Insulation — Insulation comprising both basic insulation and supplementary insulation.

3.3.50 Duct — A closed passage way formed under ground or in a structure and intended to receive one
or more cables which may be drawn in.

3.3.51 Ducting (see 3.3.50)

3.3.52 Earth — The conductive mass of the earth, whose electric potential at any point is conventionally
taken as zero.

3.3.53 Earth Continuity Conductor — The conductor, including any clamp, connecting to the earthing
lead or to each other those parts of an installation which are required to be earthed.

3.3.54 Earth Electrode — A metal plate, pipe or other conductor electrically connected to the general
mass of the earth.

3.3.55 Earthing — Connection of the exposed conductive parts of an installation to the main earthing
terminal of that installation.

3.3.56 Earthing Lead — The final conductor by which the connection to the earth electrode is made.

3.3.57 Earthed Concentric Wiring — A wiring system in which one or more insulated conductors are
completely surrounded throughout their length by a conductor, for example a sheath, which acts as
a PEN conductor.
3.3.58 Earthing Conductor — A protective conductor connecting the main earth terminal (or equipotential
bonding conductor of an installation when there is no earth bus) to an earth electrode or to other
means of earthing.

3.3.59 Earth Electrode Network — Part of an earthing arrangement comprising only the earth electrodes
and their interconnections.

3.3.60 Electric Shock — A dangerous patho-physiological effect resulting from the passing of an
electric current through a human body or an animal

3.3.61 Electrical Installation (of a Building) — An assembly of associated electrical equipment to fulfil a
specific purpose or purposes and having coordinated characteristics.

3.3.62 Electrically Independent Earth Electrodes — Earth electrodes located at such a distance from one
another that the maximum current likely to flow through one of them does not significantly affect the
potential of the other(s).

3.3.63 Electrical Source for Safety Services — Electrical source intended to be used as part of an
electrical supply system for safety services.

3.3.64 Electrical Supply System for Safety Services — A supply system intended to maintain the operation
of essential parts of an electrical installation and equipment:
a) For health and safety of persons and livestock, and
b) To avoid damage to the environment and to other equipment.
 NOTE — The supply system includes the source and the circuit(s) up to the terminals of the
electrical equipment.

3.3.65 Emergency Switching — Rapid cutting off of electrical energy to remove any hazard to persons,
livestock, or property which may occur unexpectedly

3.3.66 Equipotential Bonding — Electrical connection putting various exposed conductive parts and
extraneous conductive parts at a substantially equal potential.
NOTE — In a building installation equipotential bonding conductors shall interconnect the
following conductive parts:
a) Protective conductor,
b) Earth continuity conductor, and
c) Risers of air-conditioning system and heating systems (if any).

3.3.67 Exposed Conductive Part — A conductive part of electrical equipment, which can be touched and
which is not normally live, but which may become live under fault conditions.

3.3.68 External Influence — Any influence external to an electrical installation which affects the design
and safe operation of that installation

3.3.69 Flammable — A material capable of being easily ignited.

3.3.70 Extraneous Conductive Part — A conductive part got forming part of the electrical installation and
liable to introduce a potential, generally the earth potential.

3.3.71 Factory Built Assembly (of LV Switchgear and Controlgear) — See IS 8623 (Part 1).

3.3.72 Fault — A circuit condition in which current flows through an abnormal or unintended path. This
may result from an insulation failure or a bridging of insulation. Conventionally the impedance
between live conductors or between lives conductors and exposed or extraneous conductive parts at
the fault position is considered negligible.

3.3.73 Flammability — Ability of a material or product to burn with a flame under specified test condition.

3.3.74 Fire
a) A process of combustion characterized by the emission of heat and effluent accompanied by smoke,
and/or flame and/or glowing.
b) Rapid combustion spreading uncontrolled in time and space.

3.3.75 Fitting, Lighting — A device for supporting or containing a lamp or lamps (for example,
fluorescent or incandescent) together with any holder, shade, or reflector, for example, a bracket, a
pendant with ceiling rose, or a portable unit.

3.3.76 Functional Bonding Conductor — Conductor provided for functional equipotential bonding.

3.3.77 Functional Earthing — Connection to earth necessary for proper functioning of electrical
equipment.

3.3.78 Gas Installation Pipe — Any pipe, not being a service pipe or pipe comprised in a gas appliance,
for conveying gas for a particular consumer and including any associated valve or other gas fitting.

3.3.79 Indirect Contact — Contact of persons or livestock with exposed conductive parts made live by a
fault and which may result in electric shock.
3.3.80 Insulation — Suitable non-conductive material enclosing surrounding or supporting a
conductor.NOTE — See also the definitions for basic insulation, double insulation, reinforced
insulation and supplementary insulation.
3.3.81 Insulation Co-ordination — The selection of the electric strength of equipment in relation to the
voltages which can appear on the system for which the equipment is intended, taking into account
the service environment and the characteristics of the available protective devices.
3.3.82 Ignitability — Measure of the ease with which a specimen can be ignited due to the influence of an
external source, under specified test condition.
3.3.83 Ignition — Initiation of combustion.
3.3.84 Installations (see 3.3.61).
3.3.85 Isolation — Cutting off an electrical installation, a circuit, or an item of equipment from every source
of electrical energy

3.3.86 Live or Alive — Electrically charged so as to have a potential difference from that of earth.

3.3.87 Main Earthing Terminal — The terminal or bar which is the equipotential bonding conductor of
protective conductors, and conductors for functional earthing, if any, to the means of earthing.

3.3.88 Meshed Bonding Network (MESH-BN) — Bonding network in which all associated equipment
frames, racks and cabinets and usually the d.c. power return conductor are bonded together as well
as at multiple points to the CBN and may have the form of a mesh.

3.3.89 Minimum Illumination — Illumination for emergency lighting at the end of rated operating time.

3.3.90 Minor Works — Additions and alterations to an installation that do not extend to the provision of a
new circuit
3.3.91 Mechanical Maintenance — The replacement, refurbishment or cleaning of lamps and non-
electrical parts of equipment, plant and machinery.
3.3.92 Multiple Earthed Neutral System — A system of earthing in which the parts of an installation,
specified, to be earthed are connected to the general mass of earth and, in addition, are connected
within the installation to the neutral conductor of the supply system.

3.3.93 Neutral or Neutral Conductor (Symbol N) — A conductor connected to the neutral point of a system
and capable of contributing to the transmission of electrical energy.
The term also means the equivalent conductor of an IT or d.c. system unless otherwise specified
in the regulations and also identifies either the mid-wire of a three-wire d.c. circuit or the earthed
conductor of a two- wire earthed d.c. circuit.

3.3.94 Non-flame Propagating Component — Component which is liable to ignite, as a result of an

applied flame, but in which the flame does not propagate and which extinguishes itself within a
limited time after the flame is removed.

3.3.95 Origin of an Electrical Installation — The point at which electrical energy is delivered to an
installation.
NOTE — An electrical installation may have more than one origin.

3.3.96 Overcurrent — A current exceeding the rated value. For conductors, the rated value is the current
carrying capacity.

3.3.97 Overcurrent Detection —A method of establishing that the value of current in a circuit (or
wall) such that in the event of direct contact exceeds a predetermined value for a specified time with
a live part, a person standing on the floor (or touching the wall) cannot be traversed by a shock
current flowing to the floor (or wall).

3.3.98 PEL Conductor —A conductor combining the function of both a protective earthing and a line
conductor.

3.3.99 PEM Conductor — A conductor combining the function of both a protective earthing conductor and
a midpoint conductor.
3.3.100 PEN Conductor — A conductor combining the functions of both protective conductor and
neutral conductor.

3.3.101 Phase Conductor — A conductor of an a.c. system for the transmission of electrical energy, other
than a neutral conductor.
NOTE — The term also means the equivalent conductor of a d.c. system unless otherwise specified
in this code.
3.3.102 Point (in Wiring) — A termination of the fixed wiring intended for the connection of current
using equipment.
3.3.103 Powertrack — A system component, which is generally a linear assembly of spaced and
supported busbars, providing electrical connection of accessories.
3.3.104 Powertrack System (PT System) — An assembly of system components including a powertrack
by which accessories may be connected to an electrical supply at one or more points
(predetermined or otherwise) along the powertrack.
NOTE — The maximum current rating of a powertrack system is 63A.
3.3.105 Protective Conductor — A conductor used for some measures of protection against electric shock
and intended for connecting together any of the following parts:
a) Exposed conductive parts,
b) Extraneous conductive parts,
c) The main earthing terminal, and
d) The earthed point of the source, or an artificial neutral.
3.3.106 Protective Earthing —Earthing of a point or points in a system or in equivalent for the purposes
of safety.
3.3.107 Protective Euqipotential Bonding — Equipotential bonding for the purpose of safety.
3.3.108 Protective Multiple Earthing (PME) — An earthing arrangement, found in TN-C-S systems, in
which the supply neutral conductor is used to connect the earthing conductor of an installation with
Earth.
3.3.109 Protective Separation — Separation of one electric circuit from another by means of:
a) Double insulation,
b) Basic insulation and electrically protective screening (shielding), or
c) Reinforced insulation.

3.3.110 Service — The conductors and equipment required for delivering energy from the electric supply
system to the wiring system of the premises served.

3.3.111 Socket-outlet and Plug — A device consisting of two portions for easily connecting portable
lighting fittings or other current-using appliances/devices to the supply. The socket-outlet is an
accessory having socket contacts designed to engage with the pins of a plug and having terminals
for the connection of cable(s).
The plug portion has pins designed to engage with the contacts of a socket-outlet, also
incorporating means for the electrical connection and mechanical retention of flexible cable(s).
NOTE — A luminaire track system is not regarded as a socket outlet system.
3.3.112 Reinforced Insulation — Single insulation applied to live parts, which provides a degree of
protection against electric shock equivalent to double insulation under the conditions specified in the
relevant standard.
NOTE — The term ‘single insulation’ does not imply that the insulation must be one-
homogeneous piece. It may comprise several layers which cannot be tested singly as supplementary
or basic insulation.
3.3.113 Resistance Area (for an Earth Electrode only) — The surface area of ground (around an earth
electrode) on which a significant voltage gradient may exist.
3.3.114 Response Time — The time that elapses between the failure of the normal power supply and the of
the auxiliary power supply to energize the equipment
3.3.115 Ring Final Circuit —A final circuit arranged in the form of a ring and connected to a single point
of supply.
3.3.116 Safety Service —An electrical system for electrical equipment provided to protect or warn
persons in the event of a hazard, or essential to their evacuation from a location.

3.3.117 Simple Separation — Separation between circuits or between a circuit and earth by means of
basic insulation.

3.3.118 Space Factor — The ratio (expressed as a percentage) of the sum of the overall cross-sectional
areas of cables (including insulation and sheath) to the internal cross-sectional area of the conduit or
other cable enclosure in which they are installed. The effective overall cross-sectional area of a
non-circular cable is taken as that of a circle of diameter equal to the major axis of the cable.

3.3.119 Spur — A branch cable connected to a ring or radial final circuit.

3.3.120 Standby Supply System — A system intended to maintain supply to the installation or part thereof,
in case of interruption of the normal supply, for reasons other than safety of persons.
NOTE — Standby supplies are necessary, for example, to avoid interruption of continuous
industrial processes or data processing.

3.3.121 Supplementary Insulation — Independent insulation applied in addition to basic insulation in

order to provide protection against electric shock in the event of a failure of basic insulation.

3.3.122 System — An electrical system consisting of a single source or multiple sources running in
parallel of electrical energy and an installation. Types of system are identified as follows,
depending upon the relationship of the source, and of exposed-conductive parts of the
installation, to Earth:
a) TN system — A system having one or more points of the source of energy directly earthed, the
exposed conductive-parts of the installation being connected to that point by protective
conductors.
b) TN-C system — A system in which neutral and protective conductors are combined in a
single conductor throughout the system.
c) TN-S system — A system having separate neutral and protective conductor throughout the
system.
d) TN-C-S system — A system in which neutral and protective conductors are combined in a
single conductor in part of the system.
e) TT system — A system having one point of the source of energy directly earthed, the
exposed-conductive-parts of the installation being connected to the earth electrodes
electrically independent of the earth electrodes of the source.
f) IT system — A system having no direct connection between live parts and Earth, the
exposed-conductive-parts of the electrical installation being earthed.
NOTE — The types of systems depending upon the relationship to the source and of the exposed
conductive parts of the installation to earth are defined in IS 3043.

3.3.123 Voltage, Low — The voltage which does not normally exceed 250 V.

3.3.124 Voltage, Medium — The voltage which normally exceeds 250 V but does not exceed 650 V.

3.3.125 Voltage, High — The voltage which normally exceeds 650 V (but less than 33 kV).

3.3.126 Voltage, Extra-High — The voltage exceeding 33 kV under normal conditions.

 NOTE — The Indian Electricity Rules, 1956 define four ranges of voltages, namely, low (up to 250
V), medium (250-650 V), high (650 V-33 kV) and extra-high (greater than 33 kV). The definitions
given in 3.3.37 to 3.3.40 are based on the provisions of IE Rules. It may however, be noted that
voltage ranges as defined internationally are at variance with the above definitions .

.
.

3.4 Miscellaneous Terms

3.4.1 Agricultural and Horticultural Premises — Rooms, location or areas where live stocks are kept;
feed, fertilizers, vegetable and animal products are produced, stored, prepared or processed; plants
are grown, such as greenhouse.

3.4.2 Ambient Temperature — The temperature of the air or other medium where the equipment is to be
used.
3.4.3 Arm’s Reach — A zone extending from any point on a surface where persons usually stand or move
about, to the limits which a person can reach with the hand in any direction without assistance.
NOTE — This space is by convention, limited as shown in Fig. 1.

FIG . 1 --------------------Arm’s Reach --

3.4.4 Barrier — A part providing protection against direct contact from any usual direction of access
3.4.5 Basin of Fountain — A basin not intended to be occupied by persons and which cannot be
accessed (reached by persons) without the use of ladders or similar means. For basins of fountains
which may be occupied by persons, the requirement of swimming pools applies.

3.4.6 Booth — Non-stationary unit intended to accommodate equipment generally for pleasure or
demonstration purpose.

3.4.7 Building — Any structure for whatsoever purpose and of whatsoever materials constructed and
every part thereof whether used as human habitation or not and includes foundation, plinth, walls,
floors, roofs, chimneys, plumbing and building services, fixed platforms, verandah, balcony,
cornice or projection, part of a building or any thing affixed thereto or any wall enclosing or
intended to enclose any land or space and signs and outdoor display structures. Tents, shamianahs ,
tarpaulin shelters, etc, erected for temporary of the Authority shall not be considered as building.

3.4.8 Building Voids, Accessible — Space within the structure or the components of a building accessible
only at certain points.

NOTES: Examples are:

 1 Space within partitions, suspended floors, ceilings and certain types of window frame, door
frame and architraves
2 Specially formed building voids are also as ducts.

3.4.9 Building Void, Non-accessible — A space within the structure or the components of building which
has no ready means of access.

3.4.10 Clearance — The distance between two conducting parts along a string stretched the shortest way
between these conducting parts

3.4.11 Competent Person —A person who possesses sufficient technical knowledge, relevant practical
skill and experience for the nature of the electrical work undertaken and is able at all the time to
prevent danger and, where appropriate, injury to him/herself and others.

3.4.12 Connected Load — The part of the installed load of consumer supplied by the supply undertaking.

3.4.13 Consumer or Customer — The party who receives electricity from the supply or distribution
undertaking for his own needs or for further distribution

3.4.14 Continuous Operating Voltage (Uc) — Maximum r.m.s voltage which may be continuously
applied to an SPD’s mode of protection. This is equal to rated voltage.

3.4.15 Conventional Impulse Withstand Voltage — The peak value of an impulse test voltage at which
insulation does not show any disruptive discharge, when subjected to a specified number of
applications of impulses of this value, under specified condition.

3.4.16 Conventional Touch Voltage Limit — Maximum value of the touch voltage which is permitted to be
maintained indefinitely in specified conditions of external influences.

3.4.17 Conventional Operating Current (of a Protective Device) — A specified value of the current
which causes the protective device to operate within a specified time, designated conventional time.
NOTES:
1 For fuses this current is called the conventional fusing current. For circuit breakers this current
is called the conventional operating current
2 The conventional operating current is greater than the rated current or current setting of the
device and the conventional time varies according to the type and rated current of the protective
device
3.4.18 Creepage Distance — The shortest distance between two conducting parts along the surface of
the insulating material or along the joint of two insulating bodies.

3.4.19 Impulse — Usually an aperiodic transient voltage or current which rises rapidly to a peak value and
then falls, generally more slowly, to zero. Ideally it approximates a double exponential form. Other
forms are sometimes used for special purposes
3.4.20 Current Carrying Capacity of a Conductor — The maximum current which can be carried by a
conductor under specified conditions without its steady state temperature exceeding a specified
value.

3.4.21 Danger — Danger to health or danger to life or limb from shock, burn or injury from mechanical
movement to persons (and livestock where present), or from fire attendant upon the use of
electrical energy.

3.4.22 Demand — The magnitude of electricity supply, expressed in kW or kVA

3.4.23 Design Current (of a Circuit) — The magnitude of the current intended to be carried by the circuit
in normal service Distribution Undertaking — The party supplying electricity to consumers
entirely from external sources of power via a distribution network.
3.4.24 Domestic Tariff — A tariff applicable particularly or exclusively to domestic consumers.

3.4.25 Earth Fault Current — A current resulting from a fault of negligible impedance between a line
conductor and an exposed conductive part or a protective conductor

3.4.26 Earth Electrode Resistance — The resistance of an earth electrode to earth.

3.4.27 Earth Fault Loop Impedance — The impedance of the earth fault current loop (phase to earth loop)
starting and ending at the point of earth fault. This impedance is denoted by the symbol Z. The earth
fault loop comprises the following, starting at the point of fault:
a) the circuit protective conductor;
b) the consumer’s earthing terminal and earthing conductor, and for TN systems, the metallic
return path;
c) for TT and IT systems, the earth return path;
d) the path through the earth neutral point of the transformer;
e) the transformer winding; and
f) the line conductor from the transformer to the point of fault.

3.4.28 Earth Leakage Current — A current which flows to earth, or to extraneous conductive parts, in a
circuit which is electrically sound.

NOTE — This current may have a capacitive component including that resulting from the
deliberate use of capacitors.

3.4.29 Earthing Resistance, Total — The resistance between the main earthing terminal and the earth

3.4.30 Enclosure — A part providing protection of equipment against certain external influences and, in
any direction, protection against direct contact.

3.4.31 Fault Current — A current resulting from a fault.

3.4.32 Fault Protection — Protection against electric shock under single fault conditions
NOTE — For low voltage installation, systems and equipment, fault protection generally
corresponds to protection against in direct contact, mainly with regards to failure of basic insulation.
Indirect contact is “contact of persons or livestock with exposed- conductive parts which have
become live under fault conditions.”

3.4.33 Final Circuit — A circuit connected directly to current using equipment, or to socket outlets or
other outlet points for the connection of such equipment.

3.4.34 Hazardous-Live Part — A live part which can give, under certain condition of external influence,
an electric shock

3.4.35 Heating Tariff — A tariff applicable to electricity supplies taken for space heating or for thermal
applications or for both.

3.4.36 Impulse Current — A parameter used for the classification test for SPDs; it is defined by three
elements, a current peak value, a charge Q and a specific energy W/R.

3.4.37 Impulse Withstand Voltage — The highest peak value of impulse voltage of prescribed form and
polarity which does not cause breakdown of insulation under specified condition.

3.4.38 Installed Load — The sum of the rated inputs of the electrical apparatus installed on the consumer’s
premises.

3.4.39 Kilowatthour Rate (kWh Rate) — The amount to be paid per unit of energy (kWh) consumed.

3.4.40 Industrial Tariff — A tariff applicable exclusively to industrial consumers.

3.4.41 Leakage Current — Electric current in an unwanted conductive path under normal operating
conditions.

NOTE — This current may have a capacitive component including that resulting from the
deliberate use of capacitors.

3.4.42 Lighting Protection Zone — Zone where the lightning electromagnetic environment is defined.

3.4.43 Lighting Tariff — A tariff applicable to electricity supplies taken mainly for lighting and other
small appliances, for example, fans and radios

3.4.44 Line Conductor — A conductor of an a.c. system for the transmission of electrical energy other than a
neutral conductor or a PEN conductor. This also means the equivalent conductor of a d.c. system
unless otherwise specified in the Regulations.
3.4.45 Live Part — A conductor or conductive part intended to be energized in normal use including a
neutral conductor but, by convention, not a PEN conductor

3.4.46 Load Factor — The ratio, expressed as a numerical value or as a percentage, of the energy
consumption within a specified period (year, month, day, etc) to the energy consumption that
would result from continuous use of the maximum kW demand occurring within the same period.
NOTE — The load factor for a given demand is also equal to the ratio of the utilization time to the
time in hours within the same period

3.4.47 Mechanical Maintenance — The replacement, refurbishment or cleaning of lamps and non-
electrical parts of equipment, plant and machinery.

3.4.48 Meter Rent — An amount to be paid for a specified period for metering, and associated equipment
installed.

3.4.49 Monitoring — Observation of the operation of a system or part of a system to verify correct
functioning or detect incorrect functioning by measuring system variables and comparing the
measured value with the specified value.

3.4.50 Nominal Voltage (of an Installation) — Voltage by which an installation or part of an installation
is designated.
NOTE — The actual voltage may differ from the nominal voltage by a quantity within permitted
tolerances.

3.4.51 Obstacle —Apart preventing unintentional contact with live parts but not preventing deliberate contact

3.4.52 Occupancy or Use Group — The principal occupancy for which a building or a part of a building is
used or intended to be used; for the purposes of classification of a building according to occupancy,
an occupancy shall be deemed to include the subsidiary occupancies which are contingent upon it.

3.4.53 Overcurrent — A current exceeding the rated value. For conductors the rated value is the current
carrying capacity.

3.4.54 Overcurrent Detection — A method of establishing that the value of current in a circuit exceeds a
predetermined value for a specified length of time.

3.4.55 Overload Current (of a Circuit) — An overcurrent occurring in a circuit in the absence of an
electrical fault.

3.4.56 Power Factor Clause — A clause setting out increase in charges to be applied if the ratio of the
kWh to kVAh consumed by a consumer during a specified period below a set limit; the same
clause may provide for a decrease in charges in the opposite case.
NOTE — The power factor is generally measured by the ratio of kWh to kVAh consumed during
the specified period
3.4.57 Prospective Fault Current (Ipf) — The value of overcurrent at a given point in a circuit resulting
from a fault of negligible impedance between live conductor having a difference of potential under
normal operating conditions, or between a live conductor and an exposed conductive part.

3.4.58 Prospective Touch Voltage — The highest touch voltage liable to appear in the event of a fault of
negligible impedance in the electrical installation
3.4.59 Protective Conductor Current — Electric current appearing in a protective conductor, such as
leakage current or electric current resulting from an insulation fault.

3.4.60 Rated Current —Value of current used for specification purposes, established for a specified set of
operating conditions of a component, device, equipment or system.

3.4.61 Rated Impulse Withstand Voltage Level (Uw) — The level of impulse withstand voltage assigned by
the manufacturer to the equipment, or to part of it, characterizing the specified withstand capability
of its insulation against overvoltages

3.4.62 Residual Current — The algebraic sum of the instantaneous values of current flowing through all
live conductors of a circuit at a point of the electrical installation.

3.4.63 Residual Operating Current — Residual current which causes the residual current device to
operate under specified conditions

3.4.64 Room Height — The vertical distance measured from the finished floor surface to the finished
ceiling surface. Where a finished ceiling is not provided, the underside of the joints or beams or tie
beams shall determine the upper point of measurement for determining the head room.

3.4.65 Service Line, Service — A line for connecting a current consuming installation to the distribution
network.

3.4.66 Shock Current —A current passing through the body of a person or an animal and having
characteristics likely to cause dangerous patho- physiological effects.

3.4.67 Short-Circuit Current — An overcurrent resulting from a fault of negligible impedance between
live conductors having a difference in potential under normal operating conditions.

3.4.68 Simultaneously Accessible Parts — Conductors or conductive parts which can be touched
simultaneously by a person or, where applicable by livestock.
NOTE — In the context of protection against direct contacts a live part may be accessible with:
a) another live part,
b) an exposed conductive part,
c) an extraneous conductive part,
d) a protective conductor,
e) The following may constitute simultaneously accessible parts in the context of protection
against indirect contacts:
1) Exposed conductive parts,
2) Extraneous conductive parts,
3) Protective conductors, and
4) It should be noted that the word touched signifies any contact with any part of the body
(hand, foot, head, etc).

3.4.69 Skilled Person —A person with technical knowledge or sufficient experience to enable him/her
to avoid dangers which electricity may create.
3.4.70 Supply Terminals — The point at which a consumer received energy.
3.4.71 Surge Current — A transient wave appearing as an overcurrent caused by a lightning
electromagnetic impulse.
3.4.72 Tariff — A statement setting out the components to be taken into account and the methods to be
employed in calculating the amounts to be charged by the supply/distribution undertaking to the
consumer, according to the characteristics of the supply.

3.4.73 Temporary Overvoltage (UTOV) — A fundamental frequency overvoltage occurring on the

network at a given location, of relatively long duration.
NOTES:
1 TOVS may be caused by faults inside the LV system or inside the HV system.
2 Temporary overvoltages, typically lasting up to several seconds, usually originate from
switching operations or faults (for example, sudden load rejection, single-phase faults, etc.)
and/or from non-linearity (ferroresonance effects, harmonics, etc).

3.4.74 Touch Voltage — The potential difference between the ground potential rise (GPR) of a
grounded metallic structure and the surface potential at the point where a person could be
standing while at the same time having a hand in contact with the grounded metallic structure.
Touch voltage measurements can be “open circuit”(without the equivalent body resistance
included in the measurement circuit) or “closed circuit” ( with the equivalent body resistance
included in the measurement circuit) voltage by which an installation or part of an installation
is designated.

3.4.75 Voltage Nominal (of an Installation) — Voltage by which an installation or part of an installation is
designated
 ANNEX A
(Clause 2)
LIST OF INDIAN STANDARDS ON ELECTROTECHNICAL VOCABULARY

IS No. Title
732 : 2019 Code of practice for Electrical wiring Installations
1885 Electrotechnical vocabulary:
CODE OF PRACTICEFOR
(Part 1) : 1961 Fundamental definitions
Electrical relays (second revision)
(Part 9) : 1992/IEC 60050 (446) :
1983

(Part 10) : 2008/IEC 60050 (448) :

1995 Power system protection (first revision)
(Part 11) : 1966 Electrical measurements
(Part 14) : 1967 Nuclear power plants

(Part 15) : 2008 Primary cells and batteries (first revision)

Lighting, Section 1 General aspects
(Part 16/Sec 1) : 1968

Lighting, Section 2 General illumination, lighting fittings and lighting for traffic and
(Part 16/Sec 2) : 1968 signalling

(Part 16/Sec 3) : 1967 Lighting, Section 3 Lamps and auxiliary apparatus

(Part 17) : 1979
Switchgear and controlgear (first revision)

(Part 27) : 2008/IEC 60050 (551) :

1982 Power electronics (second revision)

(Part 28) : 1993/IEC 60050 (321) :

1986 Instrument transformers (first revision)
(Part 29) : 1971 Mining terms
(Part 30) : 1971
Overhead transmission and distribution of electrical energy

(Part 32) : 1993/IEC 60050 (461) :

1984 Electric cables (first revision)
(Part 34) : 1972 Cinematography

(Part 35) : 1993/IEC 60050 (411) :

1996 Rotating machinery (first revision)

(Part 37) : 1993/IEC 60050 (691) :

1973 Part 37 Tariffs for electricity (first revision)

(Part 38) : 1993/IEC 60050 (421) :

1990 Power transformers and reacto (second revision)

(Part 43) : 1977 Electrical equipment used in medical

(Part 51) : 2012/IEC 60050 (841) :

1983 Industrial electro-heating
(Part 53) : 1980 Mica
(Part 54) : 1993/IEC 60050 (471) :
1984 Insulators (first revision)
(Part 55) : 1981 Electric fans
(Part 57) : 2008/IEC 60050 (131) :
1978 Electric and magnetic circuits (first revision)

(Part 60) : 1993/IEC 60050 (426) :

1990 Electrical apparatus for explosive atmospheres (first revision)
(Part 61) : 1985 Nuclear medical instruments

(Part 62) : 1993/IEC 60050 (212) :

1990 Solid insulating materials (first revision)

(Part 69) : 1993/IEC 60050 (602) :

1993 Generation, transmission and dis- tribution of electricity — Generation

(Part 70) : 1993/IEC 60050 (604) :

1987 Generation, transmission and dis- tribution of electricity — Operation

(Part 71) : 1993/IEC 60050 (605) :

1983 Generation, transmission and distribution of electricity — Substations

(Part 72) : 2008/IEC 60050 (101) :

1977 Mathematics

(Part 73) : 2012/IEC60050 (111) :

1996 Physics and chemistry, Section 1 Physical concepts

(Part 74) : 2012/IEC 60050 (151) :

1978 Electrical and magnetic devices

(Part 75) : 2012/IEC 60050 (351) :

1975 Automatic control

(Part 77) : 1993/IEC 60050 (466) :

1990 Overhead lines

(Part 78) : 1993/IEC 60050 (601) :

1985 Generation, transmission and distribution of electricity — General

(Part 79) : 1993/IEC 60050 (603) : Generation, transmission and distribution of electricity — Power system planning
1986 and management

(Part 80) : 1994/IEC 60050 (301) :

1983 General terms on measurements in electricity

(Part 81) : 1993/IEC 60050 (302) :

1983 Electrical measuring instruments

Voltage bands for electrical installations including preferred voltages and frequency
12360 : 1988
SECTION 3 GRAPHICAL SYMBOLS FOR DIAGRAMS, LETTER
SYMBOLS AND SIGNS
FOREWORD
Several graphical symbols are used for installation diagrams. Considerable amount of standardization has
been achieved in the field of symbols for electrotechnology that it is now possible to device electrical
network schematics using them so that these schematic diagrams could be uniformly understood by all
concerned.
The symbols contained in this Section of the Code have been drawn up by individual expert groups under
the Electrotechnical Division Council. They represent a consensus of opinion in the discipline and are
recommended for direct adoption. Assistance has also been drawn from International Electrotechnical
Commission (IEC), database IS : 12032 /IEC 60617 ‘Graphical symbols for diagrams'.
It has also been felt essential for the purposes of this Section to draw the attention of practicing engineers
to standardized letter symbols and signs.
1 SCOPE
This Indian Standard (Part 1/Sec 3) of the Code covers graphical symbols for diagrams, letter symbols and
signs which may be referred to for further details.
2 REFERENCES
The standards listed in Annex A contain provisions, which through reference in this text,
constitute provisions of this standard. At the time of publication, the editions indicated were valid.
All standards are subject to revision, and parties to agreements based on this standard are
encouraged to investigate the possibility of applying the most recent editions of the standards.
3 GRAPHICAL SYMBOLS

For the purposes of the Code, the graphical symbols given below shall apply.
NOTE — A list of Indian Standards on graphical symbols used in electrotechnology relevant to the Code
is given in Annex A.

3.1 Fundamental Symbols

3.1.1 Direct Current

3.1.2 Alternating Current, General Symbol

a) Alternating current, single-phase, 50 Hz

b) Alternating current, three-phase, 415 V. 50 Hz

c) Alternating current, three-phase with neutral. 50 Hz

3.1.3 Neutral

3.1.4 Positive Polarity

3.1.5 Negative Polarity

3.1.6 Direct Current, 2 Conductors 110 V

3.1.7 Direct Current, 3 Conductors including Neutral, 220 V

3.1.8 Underground Cable

3.1.9 Overhead Line

3.1.10 Winding, Delta

3.1.11 Winding, Star

3.1.12 Terminals
3.1.13 Resistance/Resistor

3.1.13.1 Variable resistor

3.1.14 Impedance

3.1.15 Inductance/Inductor

3.1.16 Winding

3.1.17 Capacitance, Capacitor

3.1.18 Earth

3.1.19 Fault

3.2 Equipment

3.2.1 Flexible Conductor

3.2.2 Generator

3.2.2.1 AC generator
3.2.2.2 DC generator

3.2.3 Motor

3.2.4 Synchronous Motor

3.2.5 Mechanically Coupled Machines

3.2.6 Induction Motor, Three-Phase, Squirrel Cage

3.2.6.1 Induction motor with wound rotor

3.2.7 Transformers with Two Separate Windings

3.2.8 Auto-Transformer
3.2.9 3-Phase Transformer with Three Separate Windings—Star—Star—Delta

3.2.10 Starter

3.2.11 Direct-on-Line Starter for Reversing Motor

3.2.12 Star-delta Starter

3.2.13 Auto-transformer Starter

3.2.14 Rheostatic Starter

3.2.15 Switch

3.2.16 Contactor
3.2.17 Relay

3.2.18 Circuit-breaker

3.2.19 Isolator

3.2.20 Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker

3.2.21 Residual Current Circuit Breaker

3.2.22 Surge Protective Device

3.2.23 Fuse
3.2.24 Signal Lamp

3.2.25 Link

3.2.26 Distribution Board, Cubicle Box, Main Fuse Board with Switches

3.2.27 Socket Outlet, 5A

Socket Outlet, 15A

3.2.28 Plug

3.2.29 Voltmeter

3.2.30 Ammeter

3.2.31 Wattmeter
3.2.32 Varmeter

3.2.33 Power Factor Meter

3.2.34 Ohmmeter

3.2.35 Indicating Instrument (General Symbol)

3.2.36 Recording Instrument (General Symbol)

3.2.37 Integrating Meter

3.2.38 Watthour Meter

3.2.39 Clock

3.2.40 Master Clock

3.2.41 Current Transformer

3.2.42 Voltage Transformer

3.2.43 Wiring on the Surface

3.2.44 Wiring in Conduit

3.2.45 Lamp

3.2.46 Lamp Mounted on a Ceiling

3.2.47 Emergency Lamp

3.2.48 Spot Light

3.2.49 Flood Light

3.2.50 Heater

3.2.51 Storage Type Water Heaters

3.2.52 Bell

3.2.53 Buzzer

3.2.54 Ceiling Fan

3.2.55 Exhaust Fan

3.2.56 Fan Regulator

3.2.57 Aerial

3.2.58 Radio Receiving Set

3.2.59 Television Receiving Set

3.2.60 Manually Operated Fire Alarm

3.2.61 Automatic Fire Detector Switch

4 LETTER SYMBOLS AND SIGNS

4.0 General
4.0.1 Quantities and units used in electrotechnology cover in addition to electricity and magnetism other
subjects, such as radiation and light, geometry, kinematics, dynamics and thermodynamics. Several
disciplines interact with the result that terminology used in one discipline becomes closely interrelated with
that of the other. In order to enable uniform understanding of the meaning they represent, the letter symbols
and signs used in abbreviations for denoting quantities, their functions and units shall conform to those
recommended in IS 3722 (Part 1) and IS 3722 (Part 2).
4.0.2 Guidance on the choice of alphabet and their type, representation of vector quantities, symbols of
units, numerical values, and guidance on the use of subscripts are covered in IS 3722 (Part 1).
Ready reference tables for symbols and subscripts are contained in IS 3722 (Part 2). For the purposes of
this Code, a list of symbols, names of quantities and of constants and subscripts referred to frequently is
given in 4.1.
4.1 Symbols and Subscripts
4.1.1 Table 1 of IS 3722 (Part 2) gives a reference list of symbols and subscripts used in electrotechnology.

ANNEX A
(Clause 2)
 LIST OF INDIAN STANDARDS ON GRAPHICAL SYMBOLS

IS No. Title
2032 Graphical symbols used in electrotechnology:
(Part 19) : 1977
Electrical equipment used in medical practice

3722 Letter symbols and signs used in electrical technology:

(Part 1) : 1983
General guidelines on symbols and subscripts
(Part 2) : 1983
Reference tables for symbols and subscripts
10381 : 1982
Terms (and their Hindi equivalents) commonly used for name
plates and similar data of electrical power equipment
11353 : 1985
Guide for uniform system of marking and identification of
conductors and apparatus terminals
Graphical symbols for diagrams in the field of
12032 (Part 1): 1987/IEC electrotechnology: Part1 General information, general index,
60617-1 (1985) cross reference tables

Graphical symbols for diagrams in the field of

12032 (Part 2): 1987/IEC electrotechnology: Part 2 Symbols elements, qualifying
60617-2 (1983) symbols and other symbols having general application
12032 (Part 3) :
Graphical symbols for diagrams in the field of
electrotechnology: Part 3 Conductors and connecting devices

12032 (Part 4) : 1987/IEC Graphical symbols for diagrams in the field of

60617-4 (1984) electrotechnology: Part 4 Passive components
Graphical symbols for diagrams in the field of
12032 (Part 6) : 1987/IEC electrotechnology: Part 6 Production and conversion of
60617-6 (1983) electrical energy
Graphical symbols for diagrams in the field of
12032 (Part 7) : 1987/IEC electrotechnology: Part 7 Switchgear, controlgear and
60617-7 (1983) protective
Graphical symbols for diagrams in the field of
12032 (Part 8) : 1987/IEC electrotechnology: Part 8 Measuring instruments, lamps and
60617-8 (1983) signalling devices
Graphical symbols for diagrams in the field of
12032 (Part 11) : 1987/IEC electrotechnology: Part 11 Architectural and topographical
60617-11 (1983) installation plans and diagrams
 SECTION 4 GUIDE FOR PREPARATION OF DIAGRAMS,
CHARTS, TABLES AND MARKING
FOREWORD
Various types of diagrams and charts are required to be prepared during the planning and execution stages
of an electrical installation work. It is therefore necessary to define the different types of diagrams, charts
and tables, their purposes and format and the guiding principles for preparing them for the sake of
uniformity.
This Section 4 of the Code covers general guidelines on the subject. A list of relevant Indian Standards is
given at Annex A.
The guidelines for marking of conductors given in 3.6. Table 1 are in line with the guidelines accepted
internationally on such matters. They provide for a common basis for understanding and identifying
conductors and apparatus terminals, but more important, ensure safety to operating, maintenance personnel.
1 SCOPE
This Indian Standard (Part 1/Sec 4) of the Code covers guidelines for preparation of diagrams, charts and tables in
electrotechnology and for marking of conductors.

2 REFERENCES
The standards listed in Annex A contain provisions, which through reference in this text,
constitute provisions of this standard. At the time of publication, the editions indicated
were valid. All standards are subject to revision, and parties to agreements based on this
standard are encouraged to investigate the possibility of applying the most recent editions
of the standards.
3 PREPARATION OF DIAGRAMS, CHARTS AND TABLES
3.0 General
3.0.1 Diagram
A diagram may show the manner in which the various parts of a network, installation, group of apparatus
or items of an apparatus are interrelated and or interconnected.
3.0.2 Chart
A chart may show the interrelation between:
a) different operations,
b) operations and time,
c) operations and physical quantities, and
d) states of several items.
3.0.3 Table
A table replaces or supplements a diagram or a chart.
3.1 Classification According to Purpose
The main classifications are:
a) Explanatory diagrams,
b) Explanatory charts or tables,
c) Wiring diagrams or wiring tables, and
d) Location diagrams or tables.
3.1.1 Explanatory Diagrams
Explanatory diagrams are intended to facilitate the study and understanding of the functioning of an
installation or equipment. Three types are defined below:
a) Block Diagram — Relatively simple diagram to facilitate the understanding of the principle of
operation. It is a diagram in which an installation or equipment together with its functional interrelationships
are represented by symbols, block symbols or pictures without necessarily showing all the connections.
b) Circuit Diagram — Explanatory diagram intended to facilitate the understanding of the functioning
in detail. It shows by symbols an installation or part of an installation and the electrical connections and
other links concerned with its operation.
c) Equivalent Circuit Diagram — Special type of circuit diagram for the analysis and calculation of
circuit characteristics.
3.1.2 Explanatory Charts or Tables
Explanatory charts or tables are intended to facilitate the study of diagrams and to give additional
information. Two examples are given below:
a) Sequence Chart or Table — Gives the successive operation in a specified order.
b) Time Sequence Chart or Table — Is one which in addition takes account of the time intervals
between successive operations.
3.1.3 Wiring Diagrams or Wiring Tables
Wiring diagrams are intended to guide the making and checking of the connection of an installation or
equipment. For an equipment, they show the internal or external connections or both. The diagrams may
sometimes show the layout of the different parts and accessories, such as terminal blocks and the wiring
between them.
3.1.3.1 Unit wiring diagram
Diagram is representing all connections within a unit of an installation.
3.1.3.2 Interconnection diagram
Diagram representing the connections between the different units of an installation.
3.1.3.3 Terminal diagram
Diagram showing the terminals and the internal and/or external conductors connected to them.
NOTE — Any of the wiring diagram may be replaced or supplemented by a table.
3.1.4 Location Diagrams or Tables
A location diagram or table contains detailed information about the location of parts of the equipment, for
example, terminal blocks, plug-in units, sub-assemblies, modules, etc. It shows the item designations used
in related diagrams and tables.
NOTES:
1 A location diagram need not necessarily be to scale.
2 Several types of diagrams may be combined into a single diagram, forming a mixed diagram. The same
drawing may form both an explanatory and wiring diagram.
3.2 Classification According to Method of Representation
3.2.1 The method of representation is distinguished by:
a) the number of conductors, devices or elements represented by a single symbol (see 3.2.1.1);
b) the arrangement of the symbols representing the elements or parts of an item of apparatus (for
example, detached or assembled) (see 3.2.1.2); and
c) the placing of the symbols to correspond with the topographical layout of the devices (see 3.2.1.3).
3.2.1.1 Number of conductors
According to the number of conductors, devices or elements represented by a single symbol, the two
methods of representation as given below may be distinguished.
a) Single-line Representation — Two or more conductors are represented by a single line.
In particular, a single line may represent:
1) circuits of a multi-phase system,
2) circuits which have a similar electrical function,
3) circuits or conductors which belong to the same signal path,
4) circuits which follow the same physical route, and
5) conductor symbols which would follow the same route on the diagram.
Several similar items of apparatus may accordingly be represented by a single symbol.
b) Multi-line Representation — Each conductor is represented by an individual line.
3.2.1.2 Arrangement of symbols
According to the arrangement of the symbols representing the elements or parts of an item of apparatus on
the diagram, the methods of representation are given below:
a) Assembled Representation — The symbols for the different parts of an item of apparatus or of an
installation or equipment are drawn in close proximity on the diagram.
b) Semi-assembled Representation — The symbols for the different parts of an item of apparatus or of
an installation are separated and arranged in such a way that the symbols for mechanical linkages between
the parts which work together may be drawn easily.
c) Detached Representation — The symbols for the different parts of an item of apparatus or of an
installation are separated and arranged in such a way that the circuits may easily be followed.
3.2.1.3 Topographical representation
The positions of the symbols on the diagram correspond wholly or partly to the topographical (physical)
location of items represented.
The following are examples where topographical representation may be used.
a) Wiring diagrams,
b) Architectural diagrams, and
c) Network diagrams.
NOTE — Several of these methods of representation may be used on the same diagram.
3.3 Item Designation
3.3.1 Item is a term used for component equipment, plant, unit, etc, which is represented by a graphical
symbol on a diagram. The item designation is shown at an appropriate place near the graphical symbol of
the item. This designation correlates the item on different diagrams, parts list, circuit descriptions and in
the equipment.
3.3.2 An item designation may be used for general or special purposes depending on the kind of information
required. Guidelines on assignment of item designation, groups together with standard letter codes for the
same are covered in IS 8270 (Part 2).
3.4 General Rules for Diagrams
3.4.1 Paper sizes for drawings shall preferably be according to the international A-series (see IS 1064).
The choice of drawing sizes should be decided after taking into account the necessary factors enumerated
in 2.2 of IS 8270 (Part 2).
3.4.2 In IS 2032 series, different kinds of symbols as well as symbols of different forms are shown. All the
possible examples are also not covered there. Any symbol may be composed using the guidance from
relevant Part of IS 2032 and Part 1/Section 3 of the Code. The basic rules for the choice of symbols shall
be:
a) to use the simplest form of symbol adequate for the particular purpose,
b) to use a preferred form wherever possible, and
c) to use the chosen form consistently throughout the same set of documentation.
3.4.3 Specific guidelines on the application of IS 2032 (All parts) from the point of view of choice of
alternative symbols, symbol sizes, line thickness, orientation of symbols and methods of indicating symbol
location are covered in IS 8270 (Part 3).
3.5 Interconnection Diagrams and Tables
3.5.1 Interconnection diagrams and tables provide information on the external electrical connections
between equipment in an installation. They are used as an aid in the fabrication of wiring and for
maintenance purposes. Information on the internal connections of units are normally not provided but
references to the appropriate circuit diagram [see IS 8270 (Part 4)] may be provided.
3.5.2 The diagrams may employ single or multiple representation and may be combined with or replaced
by tables, provided clarity is maintained. Tables are recommended when the number of interconnections is
large.
3.5.3 Guidance on layout, identification and types of interconnection diagrams and tables are given in IS
8270 (Part 5).
3.6 Marking and Arrangement of Conductors
3.6.0 General
3.6.0.1 The purpose of marking is to provide a means whereby conductors can be identified in a circuit and
also after they have been detached from the terminals to which they are connected. Main marking is a
system of marking characterizing each conductor or group of conductors irrespective of their electrical
function. Supplementary marking is used as supplement to a main marking based on the electrical function
of each conductor or group of conductors.
3.6.0.2 The various methods of marking applicable to electrical installations and the equipment which form
part of them are covered in IS 5578.
3.6.1 Identification of Insulated and Bare Conductors
For the purposes of this Code, the provisions of Table 1 shall apply for the general application of marking
conductors in installation. The rules also apply for marking conductors in assembles, equipment and
apparatus. Reference is also drawn to the provision contained in relevant Indian Standard.
3.6.2 Arrangement of Conductors
Bus-bars and main connections which are substantially in one plane shall be arranged in the order given in
either 3.6.2.1 or 3.6.2.2 according to the system. The relative order remains applicable even if any poles of
the system are omitted.
3.6.2.1 AC systems
The order of phase connection shall be red, yellow and blue:
a) When the run of the conductors is horizontal, the red shall be on the top or on the left or farthest away as
viewed from the front.
b) When the run of the conductors is vertical, the red shall be on the left or farthest away as viewed from
the front.
c) When the system has a neutral connection in the same place as the phase connections, the neutral
shall occupy an outer position.
d) Unless the neutral connection can be readily distinguished from the phase connections, the order
shall be red, yellow, blue and black.
3.6.2.2 DC systems
The arrangement shall be as follows:
a) When the run of the conductors is horizontal, the red shall be on the top or on the left or farthest away as
viewed from the front.
b) When the run of the conductors is vertical, the red shall be on the left or farthest away as viewed from
the front.
c) When the system is 3-wire with the conductors in the same place, the neutral shall occupy the
middle position.
 Table 1 Alphanumeric Notation, Graphical Symbols and Colours
(Clause 3.6.1)

Sl No. Designation of Conductors Identification by

^Alphanumeric Graphical Colour
Notation Symbol
(1) (3) (4) (5)
(2)
Phase 1 L1 Red
i) Supply ac system Phase 2 L2 Yellow
Phase 3 L3 Blue
Neutral N Black
Phase 1 U Red
Phase 2 V Yellow
ii) Apparatus ac system Phase 3 W Blue
Neutral N Black
Positive L+ + Red
iii) Supply dc system Negative L- - Blue
Midwire M Black
Phase L Red
iv) Supply dc system Neutral N Black
v) (single phase)
Protective conductor PE Green and Yellow
vi) Earth E No colour other than the
colour of the bare conductor.
If insulated, the colour for
insulation so chosen to avoid
those
Underlisted above for
consideration
vii) Noiseless (clean earth) TE
viii) Frame or chassis MM —
—
ix) Equipotential terminal CC

ANNEX A
(Clause 2)
LIST OF INDIAN STANDARDS ON DIAGRAMS, CHARTS, TABLES AND MARKING
IS No. Title IS No. Title
Guide for the preparation of
1064 : 1980 Specification for paper standard sizes diagrams, charts and tables for
Graphical symbols used in 8270 electrotechnology:
2032 (Part 15) : electrotechnology: Part 15 (Part 1) : 1976 Definitions and classification
1976 Aircraft electrical symbols (Part 2) : 1976 Item designation
Electrical equipment used in medical (Part 3) : 1977 General requirements for diagrams
(Part 19) : 1977 practice (Part 4) : 1977 Circuit diagram
(Part 25) : 1980 Electrical installations in ships
Guide for marking of insulated (Part 5) : 1976 Interconnection diagrams and tables
5578 : 1984 conductors (Part 6) : 1983 Unit wiring diagrams and tables
 SECTION 5 UNITS AND SYSTEMS OF MEASUREMENT

FOREWORD
The International System of Units (SI) have received worldwide acceptance and are accepted in most of the
countries. It had been introduced in India under the Weights and Measures Act, 1976. Use of SI Units in
matters relating to electrical engineering practice has many advantages.
This Section 5 of the Code for reasons of brevity is restricted to electrical units only.

1 SCOPE
This Indian Standard (Part 1/Sec 5) of the Code covers units and systems of measurement in
electrotechnology.

2 REFERENCE
The IS/ISO 80000-2: 2009 ‘Quantities and units — Mathematical signs and symbols to be used in the natural sciences
and technology’ contain provisions, which through reference in this text, constitute provisions of this standard. At the time
of publication, the edition indicated were valid. This standard is subject to revision, and parties to agreements based on this
standard are encouraged to investigate the possibility of applying the most recent editions of the standards.
3. UNITS AND SYSTEMS OF MEASUREMENT
3.1 Absolute Units
3.1.1 Ampere (Unit of Electric Current)
A constant current which, maintained in two parallel straight conductors of infinite length, of negligible
circular cross-section an placed at a distance of one metre apart in a vacuum will produce a force of 2 x 10-
7
Newton per metre length between the conductors.
3.1.2 Coulomb (Unit of Quantity of Electricity)
The quantity of electricity conveyed in one second by a current of one ampere.
3.1.3 Farad (Unit of Electric Capacitance)
The capacitance of an electric capacitor having a difference of electric potential of one volt between the
plates, when it is charged with a quantity of electricity of one coulomb.
3.1.4 Henry (Unit of Electric Inductance)
The inductance of a closed circuit in which an emf of one volt is produced when the current in the circuits
varies at the uniform rate of one ampere per second.
3.1.5 Ohm (Unit of Electrical Resistance)
The electrical resistance between two points of a conductor when a constant potential difference of one
volt, applied to these points, produces a current of one ampere in the conductor, provided no emf is
generated in the conductor.
3.1.6 Volt (Unit of Electric Potential Difference)
The difference of electric potential which exists between two points of a conductor carrying a constant
current of one ampere, when the power dissipated between these points is one watt.
3.1.7 Weber (Unit of Magnetic Flux)
The magnetic flux which, linked with a circuit composed of a single turn produces in it an emf of one volt
if it is uniformly reduced to zero in one second.
3.1.8 Watt (Unit of Electric Power)
The power which results in the production of energy at the rate of 1 J/s.
3.1.9 Siemens (Unit of Electric Conductance)
The conductance of a conductor of resistance 1 ohm and is numerically equal to 1 ohm-1.
3.1.10 Tesla
The tesla is a magnetic flux density of 1 Wb/m2.
3.2 The electrical units defined in 3.1, together with their expression in terms of other units,
recommendations on the selection of their multiples and submultiples and supplementary remarks (if any)
are enumerated in Table 1.
 Table 1 Electrical Units of Measurement
(Clause 3.2)
Expression in Expression in Selection of
Quantity Name Symbo Terms of Other Terms of SI
Sl Multiples
l Units Base Units
No. (2) (3)
(5) (6) (7)
(1) (4)
i) Electric current ampere A —
— kA, mA, µA, nA, pA
ii) Power watt W J/s 2
m .kgs
-3 GW, MW, kW, mW,
iii) Quantity of coulomb C s.A µ WµC, nC, pC
kC,
—
electricity,
electric charge
iv) Electric volt V W/A m2.kgs-3.A-1 MV, kV, mV, µ V
potential,
potential
difference,
electromotive
force
v) Capacitance farad F C/V 2. -1 -1
m kg.s .A mF, µF, nF, pF
Electrical G Ω, M Ω. K Ω, m
vi) ohm Ω V/A
resistance 2. -1 -2
m kg.s .A Ω, ... µ Ω
-2. -1 -1 kS, mS, µS
vii) Conductance siemens S A/V m kg .s
2. -2 -1
viii) Magnetic flux weber Wb V.s m kg.s .A mWb
magnetic flux Wb/m2 mT, µT. nT
ix) density tesla T kg.s-1.A-1
x) Inductance henry H Wb/A m2.kg.s-2.A-2 mH, µH, nH, pH
siemens/met S/m — MS/m, kS/m
xi) Conductivity m1.kg-1.S1, A1
xii) Electric field re
volt/metre V/m — m.kg.s-1.A-1 MV/m, kV/m or
strength V/mm, V/m, mV/m,
xiii) Permeability henry/metre H/m — -2 -2 µV/m
µH/m, nH/m
m.kg.s .A
xiv) Permittivity farad per F/m — m .kg .s .A2
-1 -1 4
µF/m, nF/m, pF/m
xv) Reluctance metre
1 per henry H-1 — -2. -1 2 2
m kg .s .A
—

xvi) Resistivity ohm/metre Ω.m — 1. -1 -2 G Ω m, M Ω m, k Ω

m kg.s .A
m, Ω cm, m Ω m, v Ω
m, n Ω m
 SECTION 6 STANDARD VALUES
FOREWORD
Standardization of basic parameters, such as voltage, currents and frequency is one of the primary exercises
undertaken at the national level. This standardization helps in laying a sound foundation for further work
relating to product or installation engineering. The values of voltages recommended as standard in this
Section are based on the contents of IS 12360 : 1988 ‘Voltage bands for electrical installations including
preferred voltages and frequency'.
This history of standardization of system voltages particularly those of systems operating below medium
voltage levels is enumerated in IS 12360. Reference to Indian Electricity Rules may also be made.
1 SCOPE
This Part 1/Section 6 of the Code covers standard values of ac and dc distribution voltages, preferred values
of current ratings and standard system frequency.
2 REFERENCES
The standards listed in Annex A contain provisions, which through reference in this text, constitute provisions of this
standard. At the time of publication, the editions indicated were valid. All standards are subject to revision, and parties to
agreements based on this standard are encouraged to investigate the possibility of applying the most recent editions of the
standards.

IS No Title
IS 1076 (Part 1):1985 / ISO 3:1973 Preferred numbers: Part 1 Series of preferred numbers
IS12360:1988 Voltage bands for electrical installations including preferred
voltages and frequency
IS 16711:2017 48 V ELVDC Distribution System - Guidelines

3 STANDARD VALUES OF VOLTAGES

3.0 General
3.0.1 For the sake of completeness, all the standard values of voltages given in IS 12360 relating to ac
transmission and distribution systems are reproduced in this Section. However, it is noted that for most of
the types of installations covered in subsequent parts of the Code, only the lower voltage values would be
relevant.
3.0.2 For medium and low voltage of distribution system, the original recommended standard values of
nominal voltages were 230 V for single-phase and 230/400 V for three-phase system. However, during
1959, to align with IEC recommendations and in view of the economic advantages they offered, values of
240 V single-phase and 240/415 V three- phase had been adopted with a tolerance of ± 6 percent. IS 12360
may be referred for the latest values.
3.0.3 In the case of voltages above 1 kV, the importance of highest system voltage, which are generally 10
percent above the corresponding nominal voltages given in 3.0.2 is recognized and product standards relate
the voltage rating of equipment with respect to highest system voltages only.
3.1 Standard Declared Voltage
3.1.1 Single-phase, Two-wire System
The standard voltage shall be 240 V (see 3.0.2).
3.1.2 Three-phase System
3.1.2.1 The standard voltages for three-phase system shall be as under:
415 V (see 3.0.2) (Voltage to neutral—
240 V) (see 3.0.2)
3.3 kV 66 kV
6.6 kV 110 kV
11 kV 132 kV
22 kV 220 kV
33 kV 400 kV
NOTES:
1 IS 12360 may be referred for the latest provisions
2 These voltages refer to the line-to-line voltage.
3 110 kV is not a standard voltage for transmission purposes but this value has been included for the sake of equipment
that are required for use on the 110 kV systems already in existence. It is realized that because of economic and other
considerations, extensions to existing systems at this voltage may have to be made at the same voltage.
3.1.3 The direct current (d.c) of 60V is firmly established internationally as the upper limit for a Safety
Extra Low Voltage circuit (SELV), that is, safe enough to touch directly under dry conditions. Considering,
both safety and distribution losses, 48V is chosen as the distribution voltage for d.c.
3.1.4 For ELVDC and LVDC, IS 16711 may be referred.
3.2 Voltage Limits for ac Systems
3.2.1 The voltage at any point of the system under normal conditions shall not depart from the declared
voltage by more than the values given below:
a) 6 percent in the case of low or medium voltage (see 3.0.2); or
NOTE —IS 12360 may be referred for the latest provisions.
b) 6 percent on the higher side or 9 percent on the lower side in the case of high voltage; or
c) 12.5 percent in the case of extra high voltage.
NOTE — The permissible variations given above are in accordance with Indian Electricity Rules, and are
applicable to the supply authorities.

3.2.2 For installation design purposes, the limits of voltage between which the system and the equipment
used in the system shall be capable of operating continuously are as follows:
System Voltage (Un) Highest Voltage (Um) Lowest Voltage
(1) (2)
(3)
240 V 264 V 216 V
415 V 457 V 374 V
3.3 kV 3.6 kV 3.0 kV
6.6 kV 7.2 kV 6.0 kV
11 Kv 12 kV 10 kV
22 kV 24 kV 20 kV
 33 kV 36 kV 30 kV
66 kV 72.5 kV 60 kV

132 kV 145 kV 120 kV

220 kV 245 kV 200 kV
400 kV 420 kV 380 kV
Notes:
1. This variation in voltage should not be confused with the permissible variation from the
declared voltage as given in 3.2.1.
2. IS 12360 may be referred for the latest provisions

4 PREFERRED CURRENT RATINGS

The preferred current ratings shall be selected from the R5 series. If intermediate values are required, the
same shall be selected from R10 series [see IS1076 (Part 1)].

5 STANDARD SYSTEM FREQUENCY

5.1 The standard system frequency shall be 50 Hz.
5.2 The limits within which the frequency is to be maintained are governed by the Indian Electricity Rules.
 PART 1/SECTION 7

FUNDAMENTAL PRINCIPLES

FOREWORD
The basic criteria in the design of electrical installation are enumerated in this s ection
which could be taken note of in the planning stages. The specific nature of each occupancy
calls for additional information, which are summarized in the respective Sections of the
Code.
Assistance has been derived for this Section from IS 732:2019, Code of practice for wiring
installation. It may be added that subsequent requirements of the Code would, however,
provide adequate guidelines in respect of achieving the desired levels of specific planning,
work execution, workmanship and safety.

1 SCOPE
This I n d i a n S t a n d a r d ( Part 1/Sec 7) of the Code enumerates the fundamental
principles of design and execution of electrical installations.

2 REFERENCES
Statutory Provisions as amended to date:
Central Electricity Authority (measures related to Safety and Electric Supply) Regulations,
2010.
Central Electricity Authority (Safety Requirements for Construction, Operation and
Maintenance of Electric Plants and Lines) Regulations, 2011.
Central Electricity Authority (Technical Standards for Construction of Electrical Plants and
Electric Lines) Regulations, 2010.
Indian Standards, Codes:
IS No. Title
IS 732 : 2019 Code of practice for electrical wiring installations
SP 7: 2016 National Building Code
SP 72 : 2010 National Lighting Code

3 FUNDAMENTAL PRINCIPLES

3.1General
For any electrical installation to be a functional, easy to use, augmentable, having minimal
breakdowns requiring zero or minimum down time and most important to be safe, conforming
all Statutory Provisions, mandates in that regard. Electrical Installation being part of Building
Service consideration shall also be given to related recommendations under National Building
Code. Design shall be based on fundamental principles as given under this section.
 3.2 Green Building Concept
Under environmental and energy conservation aspects, the mandates, ensuing regulations in
this regard; all related provisions must be considered under fundamental principles, which
mainly comprise natural light, ventilation, thermal insulation, solar systems, etc.
3.3 Design
3.3.1 Planning
It is an initial important step which will help the work to get completed smoothly and in time
with minimum changes, reworking and without conflicts with the work of other utility
services.
3.3.2 Exchange of Information and Coordination
Proper coordination and collaboration between the user, architect, civil a n d electrical
engineer, suppliers of electricity, water, telephone, cable / internet, shall be ensured from the
planning stage of the installation. Compiling requirements of such various building services
providers, establishing a common platform amongst the team leaders of various agencies
working on these services, is an important part anticipated under planning.
3.3.3 Electrical Aspects of Building Services
Depending on type of utility, various electrical aspects which will involve shall be considered
and discussed on common platform at planning stage amongst stake holders. For example,
air-conditioning system may have requirements in respect with limits of heat transmittance
from walls, roof, fenestration, lifts have requirements in respect of size of lift shaft, pit,
overhead, machine room, etc. Their requirements shall be complied (Refer Part 1/Sec 16).
3.3.4 Architectural Plan
It is necessary to consider following points in preparation od plans with mutual consent of
related agencies of building / utility service providers, for smooth and timely completion of
work without conflicts between various service providers.
3.3.4.1 Site plan /layout
Following points shall be considered in preparation of site plan / layout:
a) In case of any overhead / underground line/s on the proposed site, it is important to check
mandated clearances (see Annex A) from any proposed structure, as per CEA
Regulations and NOCs from the concerned authorities.
NOTE — Refer Reg. Nos. 58, 60, 61, 63, 65 CEA (measures related to Safety and Electric Supply)
Regulations 2010.

b) Earthing stations/ pits to have an access for testing, maintenance / watering and
requirement of minimum clearance from other underground system.
c) Ducts/trenches/chambers, as per routes of UG systems with required depth / clearance
from other underground utility service.
3.3.4.2 Building plan
a) Provision of Spaces / Room
Requirement in respect of spaces such as length width and height for plant of the system,
sub-station, generator, panels, control rooms, shafts etc.; to accommodate related
equipment with mandated clearances around, shall be considered.
b) Doors / Openings
Doors / openings (width, height), of rooms shall be suitable to size of equipment for in
/out movement during installation / maintenance.
c) Location
Locations of spaces / room shall be suitable to concerned building / utility service
provider from the point of view of minimizing system losses, easy access and facility to
repair and maintain.
d) Routes
Allocating space and providing civil work such as ducts, shafts, openings, space above
false ceiling and below the beam soffit, along the routes of building / utility services shall
also be considered at planning stage with required sizes.
e) Ventilation
Specific ventilation requirement if any, in respect of particular equipment, shall be taken
care of, for example, battery rooms, equipment requiring proper dissipation like
transformers.
f) External Influences
External influences for example, climatic factors like rains, sunlight, air quality like
humidity, coastal area, corrosive, dusty environment etc; affecting safety, service life,
supply quality, continuity and functionality of electrical installation shall also be
considered to adopt required preventive measures.
g) Natural light / sunlight
This requirement shall be considered from the point of view of energy conservation, solar
panels of water heating system, PV systems, which requires shadow less area, usually on
terrace.
NOTE — Use of renewable energy is counted under credit points while evaluating Green Building

h) Future Expansion
Building/utility service provider shall envisage future requirement and get the required
provisions done accordingly.
3.4 Electrical Safety
Electrical safety shall be treated as point of prime importance considering hazards related to
human life and Fire. References shall be taken from Part 1 (Sec 22) Safety in Electrical Work
4 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION DESIGN
4.1 General
Appropriate design is a foundation of safe, trouble free and convenient to use installation
throughout service life. It shall be based on following principles:
a) Compliance with statutory norms;
b) Safety as topmost priority;
c) Functionality;
d) Quality and continuity of supply;
e) User friendly; and
f) Anticipation of future requirements.

4.2 Electrical Load

4.2.1 General Assessment
Depending on type / use of building and premises assessment of load shall be done considering
area in m2 as a base. This will decide requirement of electrical supply LT or HT, and sub-
station if needed and its capacity.
4.2.2 Connected Load and Contract Demand
Connected load shall be worked out and assessment of contract demand shall be done. This
step is necessary for approaching electrical supply provider.
4.2.3 Emergency and Critical Load
Further electrical load of important services like lifts, water pumps, emergency services like
fire pumps, fire lift, critical services requiring supply integrity during fire and evacuation shall
be worked out.
4.3 Electrical Supply
4.3.1 Design shall comprise following source/s of electrical supply as per requirement:
a) Raw power — Electrical supply Co.,
b) Back-up supply — Gen-set / battery based, and
c) Solar PV system — Grid connected / non grid connected.
4.3.2 Required capacity in kW / kVA shall be assessed and decided from 4.2.
4.3.3 Conditions of Supply
Electrical Supply Co. publishes ‘Conditions of Supply’, which are approved by respective
Electricity Regulatory Commission. Compliance shall be checked for availing supply from
Electric Supply Co.
4.4 Electrical Drawings / Layouts
Detailed electrical drawings are important to plan and schedule execution of work in
coordination with other agencies. Electrical drawings shall include:
a) Location of light, fans, 6A power outlets, generally categorized under lighting
load;
b) Location of power outlets for electrical systems / load generally 16A and above;
c) Location of switch-boards, distribution boxes, electrical panels;
d) Routes of cabling / bus ways;
e) Single line diagrams showing switchgears, DBs, with their capacities, connected
load, cable sizes, protections, etc.; and
f) Layouts of panel rooms, meter rooms, sub-stations, Gen-sets with allied
equipment; required clearances.
NOTES:
1 Where prior approval to drawings is necessary, same shall be taken from concerned authority.
2 Where necessary supporting specifications, calculations sheets shall be attached to justify capacity of
switchgear / cable, etc.
3 Coordination with other the drawings of other utility services shall be checked and agreed mutually.

4.5 Lighting Design

4.5.1 National Lighting Code
Lighting design shall be as per recommended lux levels, CCT, Glare Index, and shall be in
accordance with National Lighting Code (SP 72 : 2010 or as amended).
4.5.2 Energy Conservation Building Code (ECBC)
In lighting design guidelines / recommendations shall also be taken into consideration in
respect of efficacy (Lumen / watt), lighting power density, mentioned under ECBC.
4.6 Wiring Installation Design
Wiring installation design shall be as per IS 732. Wiring sizes, class, types, method of
installation shall be as per the situation, type of load, etc.
4.7 Protections
Reference for protections to be provided shall be taken from following Sections of Part 1
under this code:

Section 10 Protection for safety — Protection against electric shock

Section 11.1 Protection for safety — Protection against thermal effect
Section 11.2 Protection against fire due to arcing.
Section 12 Protection for safety — Protection against over current and fault current
Section 13 Protection for safety — Protection against voltage disturbance and measures
against electromagnetic influences
 4.8 Materials
All materials, fittings, equipment and their accessories, appliances, etc., used in an electrical
installation shall conform to Indian Standards wherever they exist. In case an Indian
Standard does not exist, the materials and other items shall conform relevant International
Standard.
5 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION WORK
5.1 License, Certificate of Competency, Permit
Under the consideration of risk and hazard to human life involved under electrical work;
requiring special knowledge, experience and skill; Central Electricity Authority Reg. 3 and
29 gives mandate in respect of an authority for persons to work on electrical installation.
Under the context, work on electrical installations shall be carried out under the
supervision of a person holding a certificate of competency issued by the appropriate
government. The workmen shall also hold the appropriate certificate of competency.
NOTE — Helpers / trainees may assist licensed person on the installation strictly under supervision of
licensed person who shall allow him to work within the limited the area, which has not been connected to
source of electrical supply.

5.2 Planning and Coordination in execution of work

For quality safe and time bound completion of work works shall be planned in coordination
with other concerned agency working on site. Modern tools, bar-chart, CPM, PERT in project
planning may be used as per the scope and magnitude of project.
5.3 Layout
Proper layout and marking of work shall be given to workmen at proper stage of work by
engineer / electrical supervisor. Locations where other services are also proposed, and
coordination is necessary from the point of view of sequence of construction work, shall also
be explained.
5.4 Workmanship
Good workmanship is an essential requirement for compliance with this Code. With the
best quality material in hand, if not used and constructed with proper method of construction
requiring skilled workmanship, will not result into a good quality work.
5.5 Supervision
Strict supervision of work throughout execution of work is important. The work going to be
hidden shall be certified and record be maintained by work supervising authority. Observation
of safety parameters with proper use is also an important task under supervision.
6 COMPLETION, TESTING AND HANDINGOVER
The person who executes the work shall treat following points as his responsibility.
6.1 After completion, installation shall be tested as per norms. Installation may be permitted
for use subject to satisfactory test results and compliance with statutory requirements.
6.2 Test Results, Certifications, NOCs, electrical layouts, wiring diagrams shall be
maintained as record.
6.3 Handing over of installation to the owner shall be with proper set of record documents,
instruction manuals, service requirements in respect of equipment.
 ANNEX A

CENTRAL ELECTRICITY AUTHORITY (MEASURES RELATED TO SAFETY

AND ELECTRIC SUPPLY) REGULATIONS 2010

Reference: Electricity Act 2003, section 177 read with section 53

Regulation 58
Clearance above ground of the lowest conductor of overhead lines.-

(1) No conductor of an overhead line, including service lines, erected across a street shall at
any part thereof be at a height of less than-
(i) for lines of voltage not exceeding 650 Volts - 5.8 m
(ii) for lines of voltage exceeding 650 Volts but
not exceeding 33 kV - 6.1 m

(2) No conductor of an overhead line, including service lines, erected along any street shall at
any part thereof be at a height less than-
(i) for lines of voltage not exceeding 650 Volts - 5.5 m
(ii) for lines of voltage exceeding 650 Volts but
not exceeding 33 kV - 5.8 m

(3) No conductor of an overhead line including service lines, erected elsewhere than along or
across any street shall be at a height less than -
(i) for lines of voltage up to and including - 4.6 m
11 000 Volts if bare
(ii) for lines of voltage up to and including - 4.0 m
11 000 Volts, if insulated
(iii) for lines of voltage exceeding 11 000 Volts - 5.2 m
but not exceeding 33 kV

(4) For lines of voltage exceeding 33 kV the clearance above ground shall not be less than 5.2
m plus 0.3 m for every 33 000 Volts or part thereof by which the voltage of the line exceeds
33 000 Volts;

(5) For High Voltage Direct Current (HVDC) lines, the clearance above ground shall not be
less than:-
Sl No. DC Voltage (kV) Ground Clearance
(m)
1 110 kV 6.1
2 200 kV 7.3
3 300 kV 8.5
4 400 kV 9.4
5 500 kV 10.6
6 600 kV 11.8
7 800 kV 13.9
Regulation 60
Clearance from buildings of lines of voltage and service lines not exceeding 650Volts

(1) An overhead line shall not cross over an existing building as far as possible and no building
shall be constructed under an existing overhead line.

(2) Where an overhead line of voltage not exceeding 650 V passes above or adjacent to or
terminates on any building, the following minimum clearances from any accessible point, on
the basis of maximum sag, shall be observed, namely:

a) for any flat roof, open balcony, varandah roof and lean-to-roof-

i) when the line passes above the building a vertical clearance of 2.5 m from The highest
point, and
ii) when the line passes adjacent to the building a horizontal clearance of 1.2 m from the
nearest point, and

b) for pitched roof-

i) when the line passes above the -building a vertical clearance of 2.5 m immediately
under the line, and
ii) when the line passes adjacent to the building a horizontal clearance of 1.2 m

c) Any conductor so situated as to have a clearance less than that specified above shall be
adequately insulated and shall be attached at suitable intervals to a bare earthed bearer
wire having a breaking strength of not less than 350 kg.

d) The horizontal clearance shall be measured when the line is at a maximum deflection
from the vertical due to wind pressure.

e) Vertical and horizontal clearances shall be as specified in schedule-X.

Explanation: - For the purpose of this regulation, the expression "building" shall be deemed to
include any structure, whether permanent or temporary.

Regulation 61

Clearances from buildings of lines of voltage exceeding 650 V.-

a) An overhead line shall not cross over an existing building as far as possible and no
building shall be constructed under an existing overhead line.
 b) Where an overhead line of voltage, exceeding 650 V passes above or adjacent to any
building or part of a building it shall have on the basis of maximum sag a vertical
clearance above the highest part of the building immediately under such line, of not less
than-

i) for lines of voltages exceeding 650Volts up to and including 33,000Volts - 3.7

m
ii) for lines of voltages exceeding 33 kV - 3.7 m plus 0.30 m for every additional
33,000Volts or part thereof.

c) The horizontal clearance between the nearest conductor and any part of such building
shall, on the basis of maximum deflection due to wind pressure, be not less than-
i) for lines of voltages exceeding 650 V up to and including 11,000 Volts - 1.2 m
ii) for lines of voltages exceeding 11,000V and up to and including 33,000V - 2.0
m
iii) for lines of voltages exceeding 33 kV - 2.0 m plus 0. 3metrefore every additional
33kVor part thereof

d) For High Voltage Direct Current (HVDC) systems, vertical clearance and horizontal
clearance, on the basis of maximum deflection due to wind pressure, from buildings
shall be maintained as below:

Horizontal
Sl.No DC Voltage (kV) Vertical Clearance(m)
Clearance (m)
1 100 kV 4.6 2.9
2 200 kV 5.8 4.1
3 300 kV 7.0 5.3
4 400 kV 7.9 6.2
5 500 kV 9.1 7.4
6 600 kV 10.3 8.6
7 800 kV 12.4 10.7

e) Vertical and horizontal clearances shall be as specified in schedule X.

Explanation: - For the purpose of this regulation the expression "building" shall be deemed to
include any structure, whether permanent or temporary.

Regulation 63
Erection or alteration of buildings, structures, flood banks and elevation of roads.-
a) If at any time subsequent to the erection of an overhead line, whether covered With
insulating material or not, any person proposes to erect a new building or Structure or
flood bank or to raise any road level or to carry out any other type of Work whether
permanent or temporary or to make in or upon any building, or Structure or flood bank
or road, any, permanent or temporary addition or alteration, he and the contractor whom
he employs to carry out the erection, addition or alteration, shall give intimation in
writing of his intention to do so, to the supplier or owner and to the Electrical Inspector
and shall furnish therewith a scale drawing showing the proposed building, structure,
flood bank, road or any addition or alteration and scaffolding thereof required during
the construction.

b) On receipt of such intimation, the supplier or owner shall examine,-

i) whether the line under reference was laid in accordance with the provisions of these
regulations and any other law;
ii) whether it is technically feasible;
iii) whether it meets the requirement of Right of Way (ROW);
iv) whether such person was liable to pay the cost of alteration of the overhead line and if
so, send a notice without undue delay, to such person together with an estimate of the
cost of the expenditure likely to be incurred to so alter the overhead line and require
him to deposit, within thirty days of the receipt of the notice, with the supplier or owner,
the amount of the estimated cost.

c) If such person disputes the cost of alteration of the overhead line estimated by die
supplier or owner or even the responsibility to pay such cost, the dispute may be referred
to the Electrical Inspector whose decision thereof shall be final.

d) The Electrical Inspector shall estimate the cost of alteration of overhead line on the
following basis, namely:-

i) the cost of material used on the alteration after crediting the depreciated" cost of the
material which shall be available from the existing line;
ii) the wages of labour employed in affecting the alteration;
iii) supervision charges to the extent of-fifteen per cent of the wages mentioned in sub
clause (ii); and charges incurred by the supplier or owner in complying with the
provisions of section 67 of the Act, in respect of such alterations.

e) Any addition or alteration to the building or structure shall be allowed only after the
deposit of such estimated cost to the supplier or owner.

f) No work upon such building, structure, flood bank, road and addition or alteration
thereto shall be commenced or continued until the Electrical Inspector has certified that
the provisions of regulation 58, 60 and 61 should not be contravened either during or
after the aforesaid construction:
 Provided, that the Electrical Inspector may, if he is satisfied that the overhead line has
been so guarded as to secure the protection of persons or property from injury, certify
that the work may be executed prior to the alteration of the overhead line or in the case
of temporary addition or alteration, without alteration of the overhead line.

g) The supplier or owner shall, on receipt of such deposit, alter the overhead line in such
a way that it does not contravene the provisions regulation 58, 60 and 61 either during
or after such construction within two months from the date of such deposit or within
such longer period as the Electrical Inspector may allow.

Regulation 64
Transporting and storing of material near overhead lines.-

a) No rods, pipes or similar materials shall be taken below, or in the vicinity of, any bare
overhead conductors or lines if these contravene the provisions of regulations 60 and
61 unless such materials" are transported under the direct supervision of a person
designated in this behalf by the owner of such overhead conductors or lines.
b) No rods, pipes or other similar materials shall be brought within the flash Over distance
of bare live conductors or lines.
c) No material or earth work or agricultural produce shall be dumped or stored, no trees
grown below or in the vicinity of, bare overhead conductors, or lines to contravene the
provision of regulations 60 and 61.
d) No flammable material shall be stored under the electric supply line.
e) No fire shall be allowed above underground cables.
f) Firing of any material below electric lines shall be prohibited.
Regulation 65
General clearances. –

a) For the purpose of computing the vertical clearance of an overhead line, the maximum
sag of any conductor shall be calculated on the basis of the maximum sag in still air and
the maximum temperature as specified under regulations 57, and computing any
horizontal clearance of an overhead line the maximum deflection of any conductor shall
be calculated on the basis of the wind pressure specified under regulations 57.
b) No blasting for any purpose shall be done within 300 m from the boundary of a sub-
station or from the electric supply lines of voltage exceeding 650 V or tower structure
thereof without the written permission of the owner of such sub-station or electric
supply lines or tower structures and in case of mining lease hold area, without the
written permission of the Inspector of Mines.
c) No cutting of soil within ten meters from the tower structure of 132 kV and above
voltage level shall be permitted without the written permission of the owner of tower
structure.
d) No person shall construct brick kiln or other polluting units near the installations or
transmission lines of 220 kV and above within a distance of 500 m.
 PART 1
SECTION 8
ASSESSMENT OF GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS
OF BUILDINGS

FOREWORD
An assessment of the general characteristics of buildings is essential for designing electrical
infrastructure, selecting type and method of electrical installation adhering to safety norms and
required functionality listed under Part 1/Sec 15 Electrical Aspects of Building Services. This
Part 1/Section 8 covers a checklist of various factors that require assessment. It follows the
internationally recommended method of identification of the external influences on the
electrical installation, such as environment, utilization and method of construction of the
building. Out of these influences, those which are specifically important for specific
occupancies are listed at the relevant Sections of the Code. However, it is hoped that this
Section 8 would also enable understanding of installations not explicitly covered by the Code.
The contents of this Part 1/Section 8 are primarily intended for installations inside buildings
though to the extent possible they could be utilized for outdoor sites. However, more severe
conditions may prevail at outdoor sites and these require special considerations.

1 SCOPE
This Indian Standard (Part 1/Sec 8) of the Code covers guidelines for assessing the
characteristics of buildings and the electrical installation therein.
2 ASSESSMENT OF GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS OF BUILDINGS
An assessment of the general characteristics of buildings as enumerated below is essential from
the point of view of design and protection for safety of the electrical installation. These
characteristics when assessed shall also be taken into consideration in the selection and erection
of equipment.

2.1 Identification of General Characteristics

The following points form characteristics of building, part of which is treated as external
influences required to be considered in electrical design:

a) Geography
It gives an idea about environmental aspects, climatic conditions under which an
electrical installation will have to sustain (for details see Sl No. (i) from Table 1 below).
The condition of earth / soil is important factor of earthing design purpose /utilisation.

b) Purpose of building from the point of view of utilization is also an important factor.
Use of building as residential premises, commercial premises, hospital, public
gathering, industrial etc; sets different parameters for electrical design. It also gives
idea of class of user who will be using the electrical installation and allied equipment.
The design of electrical installation also needs to consider user if ordinary, child, aged,
 handicap etc. or an instructed person having knowledge of risk and hazards of
electricity (for details see Sl No. (ii) from Table 1 below).

c) Structure
To decide material specifications and method of electrical installation, height, area of
building / civil structure and material method of its construction, concrete, brickwork,
wooden, steel, sheet-metal permanent / temporary / hutments is important
consideration. (for details see Sl No. (iii) from Table 1 below).

2.2 Identification of External Influences on the Electrical Installation in the Building

2.2.1 Consideration of following factors is important which externally influence and form
characteristics of building:
a) Environments
1) Ambient temperature,
2) Atmospheric humidity,
3) Altitude,
4) Presence of water,
5) Presence of foreign solid bodies,
6) Presence of corrosive or polluting substances,
7) Mechanical stresses,
8) Presence of flora and/or mould growth,
9) Presence of fauna,
10) Electromagnetic, electrostatic or ionizing influences,
11) Solar radiation,
12) Seismic effects,
13) Lighting, and
14) Wind.
b) Utilization
1) Capability of persons,
2) Electrical resistance of human body,
3) Contact of persons with earth potential,
4) Conditions of evacuation in an emergency, and
5) Nature of processed or stored material.
c) Construction of Buildings
1) Constructional materials, and
2) Building design.
2.2.2 Table 1 elaborates classification and codification of external influences which require
assessment in the design and erection of electrical installation.

Table 1 Assessment of General Characteristics of Buildings

 (Clause 2.2.2)

Sl Class Designation Characteristics Application and Code

No. (2) (3) Examples (5)
(1) (4)
I) Environment

1) Ambient temperature The ambient temperature to be considered

for the equipment is the temperature at the
place where the equipment is to the
installed resulting from the influence of all
other equipment in the same location, when
operating, not taking into account the
thermal contribution of the equipment to be
installed. Lower and upper limits of range
of ambient temperature: AA1
Lower Limits Upper Limits AA2
a) -60℃ +5℃ + AA3
b) -40℃ +5℃ AA4
c) -25℃ +5℃ AA5
d) -5℃ +40℃ AA6
e) +5℃ +40℃
f) -5℃ +60℃
The average temperature over A 24 h
period must not exceed 5℃ below the upper
limits. Combination of two ranges to define
some environments may be necessary.
Installation subject to temperatures outside
the ranges require special consideration.
2) Atmospheric humidity Under consideration

3) Altitude ≤ 2 000 m AC1

> 2 000 m AC2
4) Presence of water:

a) Negligible Probability of presence of water is Locations in which the AD1

negligible walls do not generally
show traces of water but
may do so for short
periods , for example, in
the from of vapour
which good ventilation
dries rapidly

b) Free-falling drops Possibility of vertically falling drops Locations in which AD2

water vapour
occasionally condenses
as drops or where stem
may occasionally be
c) Sprays Possibility of water falling as spray present
at an angle up to 60ºC from the AD3
vertical Locations in which
sprayed water forms a
continuous film on
d) Splashes Possibility of splashes from any floors and/or walls
direction AD4
Locations where
equipment may be
subjected to splashed
water, this applies, for
example, to certain
external lighting
fittings, construction
site equipment, etc

e) Jets Possibility of jets of water from any Locations where AD5

direction hosewater is used regularly
(yards, car-washing bays)
Seashore locations such as
f) Waves Possibility of water waves piers, beaches quays, etc AD6
Locations which may be
flooded and or where water
g) Immersion Possibility of intermittent partial or may be at least 150 mm AD7
total covering by water above the highest point of
equipment, the lowest part
of equipment being not
more than 1 m below the
water surface
Locations, such as
swimming pools where
electrical equipment is
h) Submersion Possibility of permanent and total permanently and totally AD8
covering by water covered with water under a
pressure greater than 0.1
bar

5) Presence of foreign
solid bodies:
 a) Negligible The quantity of nature of dust or foreign AE1
solid bodies is not significant
b) Small objects Presence of foreign solid bodies where the Tools and small objects of AE2
smallest dimension is not less than 2.5 mm which the smallest
dimension is at least 2.5
mm
c) Very small objects Presence of foreign solid bodies where the Wires are examples of AE3
smallest dimension is not less than 1 mm foreign solid bodies of
which the smallest
dimension is not less than 1
mm
NOTE — In conditions AE1 and AE3, dust
may be present but is not significant to
operation of the electrical equipment

d) Dust Presence of dust in significant quantity AE4

6) Presence of corrosive
or polluting
substances:

a) Negligible The quantity or nature of corrosive or AF1

polluting substances is not significant
b) Atmospheric The presence of corrosive or polluting Installation situated by the AF2
substance of atmospheric origin is sea or industrial zones
significant producing serious
atmospheric pollution, such
as chemical works and
cement works; this type of
pollution arises
especially in the production
of abrasive,
insulating or conductive
dusts

c) Intermittent or Intermittent or accidental subjection to Location where some AF3

accidental corrosive or polluting chemical substances chemical products are
being used or produced handled in small quantities
and where these
products may come only
accidentially into contact
with electrical equipment;
such conditions are found
in factory, laboratories,
other laboratories or in
locations where hydro-
carbons are used (boiler-
rooms, garages, etc)
d) Continuous Continuously subject to corrosive or For example, chemical AF4
polluting chemical substances in works
substantial quantity
7) Mechanical stresses:

a) Impact
Low severity Household and similar AG1
Medium severity conditions
High severity Usual industrial conditions AG2
Severe industrial conditions AG3
 NOTE — Provisional classification.
Quantitative expression of impact
severities is under consideration.
b) Vibration
Low severity Household and similar AH1
Medium severity conditions where the effects
High severity of vibration are generally AH2
negligible
Usual industrial conditions AH3
NOTE — Provisional classification. Industrial installations
Quantitative expression of vibration subject to severe conditions
severities is under consideration.
c) Other mechanical Under consideration AJ
stresses

8) Presence of fungus
and/or mould growth:
a) No hazard No hazard of fungus and/or mould growth AK1
b) Hazard hazard of fungus and/or mould growth The hazard depends on AK2
local conditions and
the nature of fungus.
Distinction should the
made between harmful
growth of vegetation
or conditions for promotion
of mould growth
9) Presence of vermin:
a) No hazard No hazard AL1
b) Hazard Hazard from fauna (insects, birds, small The hazard depends on the AL2
animals) nature of the vermin.
Distinction should be made
between:
a) presence of insects in
harmful quantity or of an
aggressive nature.
b) presence of small anim
als or birds in
harmful quantity or of an
aggressive nature

10) Electro magnetic,

Electrostatic or
ionizing influences:
a) Negligible No harmful effects from stay currents, AM1
electromagnetic radiation, electrostatic
fields, ionizing radiation or induction
b) Stray currents Harmful hazards of stray currents AM2
c) Electromagnetics Harmful presence of electromagnetic AM3
radiation
d) Ionization Harmful presence of ionizing radiation AM4
e) Electrostatics Harmful presence of electrostatic fields AM5
f) Induction Harmful presence of induced currents AM6

11) Solar radiation:

a) Negligible AN1
b) Significant Solar radiation of harmful intensity and/or AN2
duration
12) Seismic effects:
a) Negligible Up to 30 gal (1 gal = 1 cm/𝑠 2 AP1
 b) Low severity Over 30 up to and including 300 gal AP2
c) Medium severity Over 300 up to and including 600 gal AP3
d) High severity Greater than 600 gal Vibration which may cause AP4
the destruction of the
building is outside the
classification. Frequency is
not taken into account in the
classification; however, if
the seismic wave resonates
with the building, seismic
effects must be specially
considered. In general, the
frequency of seismic
acceleration is between 0
and 10 Hz
13) Lightning:
a) Negligible AQ1
b) Indirect exposure Hazard from supply arrangements Installations supplied by AQ2
overhead lines.
c) Direct exposure Hazard from exposure of equipment Part of installations located AQ3
outside buildings. The risks
AQ2 and AQ3 relate to
regions with a particularly
high level of thunderstorm
activity
14) Wind
(Under consideration)

(II) Utilization
1) Capability of persons:
a) Ordinary Uninstructed persons BA1
b) Children Children in locations intended for their Nurseries BA2
occupation.
NOTE — This class does not necessarily
apply to family dwellings
c) Handicapped Persons not in command of all their Hospitals BA3
physical and intellectual abilities (sick
persons, old persons)
d) Instructed Persons adequately advised or supervised Electrical operating areas BA4
by skilled persons to enable them to avoid
dangers which electricity may create
(operating and maintenance staff)

Sl. Class Designation Characteristics Application and CodeFormatted: Strikethrough

No. (2) (3) Examples (5)
(1) (4)
e) Skilled Persons with technical knowledge or Closed electrical operating BA5
sufficient experience to enable them to areas
avoid dangers which electricity may create
(engineers and technicians)
2) Electrical resistance of BB
the human body
classification (Under
consideration)
3) Contact of persons with
earth potential:
a) None Persons in non-conducting situations Non-conducting locations BC1
b) Low Persons do not in usual conditions make BC2
contact with extraneous conductive parts or
stand on conducting surfaces
 c) Frequent Persons are frequently in touch with Locations with extraneous BC3
extraneous conductive parts or stand on conductive parts,
conducting surfaces either numerous or of large
area
d) Continuous Persons are in permanent contact with Metallic surroundings such BC4
metallic surroundings and for whom the as boilers and
possibility of interrupting contact is limited tanks
4) Conditions of Low density occupation, easy conditions of Buildings of normal or low BD1
evacuation in an evacuation height used for habitation
emergency Low density occupation, difficult High-rise buildings BD2
conditions of evacuation Locations open to the
High density occupation, easy conditions of public (theatres, cinemas) BD3
Evacuation High-rise buildings open to
High density occupation, difficult the public (hotels, BD4
conditions of evacuation hospitals, etc)
5) Nature of processed or
stored materials
a) No significant risks BE1
b) Fire risks Manufacture, processing or storage of Barns, wood-working BE2
flammable materials including presence of shops, paper factories
dust
c) Explosion risk Processing or storage of explosive or low Oil refineries, hydrocarbon BE3
flashpoint materials including presence of stores
explosive dusts
d) Contamination Presence of unprotected foodstuffs, Foodstuff industries,
risks pharmaceutics, and similar products kitchen
without protection
NOTE — Certain
precautions may be
necessary in the event of
fault, to prevent processed
materials being
contaminated by electrical
equipment, for example, by
broken lamps
III) Constructions of
Building

1) Constructional
materials:
a) Non-combustible — — CA1
b) Combustible Buildings mainly constructed of Wooden buildings CA2
combustible materials
2) Building Design:
a) Negligible risk — — CB1
b) Propagation of fire Buildings of which the shape and High-rise buildings, Forced CB2
dimensions facilitate the spread of fire (for ventilation
example, chimney effects systems
c) Movement Risks due to structural movement (for Buildings of considerable CB3
example, displacement between a building length or erected on
and the ground, or settlement of ground or unstable ground.
building foundations) Contraction or expansion
joints
d) Flexible or unstable Structures which are weak or subjects to Tents, air-support CB4
movement (for example, oscillation) structures, false ceilings,
removable partitions
Flexible wiring,
Installations needing
support
NOTES:
1Each condition of external influence is designated by a code comprising a group of two capital letters and a number as follows:
The first letter relates to the general category of external influence
A = environment
B = utilization
C = construction of buildings
The second letter relates to the nature of the external influence
A…
B…
C…
The number relates to the class within each external influence
1…
2…
3…
For example, the code AC2 signifies:
A = environment
AC = environment altitude, and
AC2 = environment altitude > 2 000 m.
The Code given here is not intended to be used for marking equipment.
2The characteristics defined for electrical installations are those accepted by the IEC and as applicable for electrical installations in
buildings. Influences on outdoor installations are separately defined in the respective parts of the Code

2.3 Maintainability
An assessment shall be made for easy accessibility to the portion of electrical installation for
maintenance of the installation reasonably be expected to receive during its intended life.
 PART1 SECTION 9
WIRING INSTALLATIONS
FOREWORD

In electrical project work major portion in buildings relates to wiring installation. This section
of National Electrical Code is primarily intended to cover related guidelines for wiring
installations in all type of buildings. These guidelines also cover reliability, maintenance and
safety of installation.

The generic guidelines for wiring installation need to be carefully considered depending on
type of occupancy, local conditions, material selection standards and relevant points considered
in respective sections of this code.

Assistance for this code had been derived from IS 732 : 2019 Code of practice for wiring
installations.

1 SCOPE

Section 9 of the Code covers the essential design and constructional requirements, installation,
material selection, testing of Wiring Installations.

1.1 General
The guidelines of this section of code can be generally applied to wiring installation of all
types of premises except those specifically excluded from the scope.

1.2 Design

1.2.1 The design scope covers wiring installations up to and including 1 000 V AC and 1 500
V DC with standard frequencies of supply.

1.2.2 Fixed wiring for information and communication technology signaling, control etc.
excluding internal wiring of equipment used in such system.

1.2.3 Earthing / protective conductor provisions.

1.2.4 Compliance of the requirements related to design, installation where licensing or other
government authorities have statutory controls.

1.2.5 Electrical provisions in relation with local fire safety requirements

1.2.6 Requirements in respect of Architectural design and civil work from the point of view of
wiring installation.

1.2.7 Testing and Commissioning

Testing commissioning in this section includes testing and commissioning of wiring
installation. Individual equipment, cables wires need to be tested separately as per relevant
sections and standards applicable to such parts.

Note: For complete testing of the installation refer clause 6 of IS732

1.2.8 Maintenance
Maintenance and periodic inspection required for the installation is covered in this section

1.2 Exclusions from Scope

This standard does not cover electrical installations in:

a) Internal wiring of machinery / equipment;

b) Wiring/ circuits for equipment operating at voltages exceeding 1 000 volts internally
like X-ray machines, discharge lamps, electrostatic precipitators, scanning apparatus
etc. Internal wiring of such apparatus is not covered;
c) Construction sites, exhibition area, fairgrounds which are for temporary purpose;
d) Mobile and transportable units;
e) Railway traction equipment, rolling stock and signaling;
f) Ships and off shore installations;
g) Aircrafts;
h) Lightning protection system of buildings; and
j) Control cabling, trailing cables, and all cabling in the scope of work of lift manufacturer
after point of supply provided in machine room / near machine / controller.

2 REFERENCES
The Indian Standards given in Annex K contain provisions which through reference in this text, constitute
provision of this standard. At the time of publication, the editions indicated were valid. All standards are subject
to revision, and parties to agreements based on this standard are encouraged to investigate the possibility of
applying the most recent editions of the standards.

3 TERMINOLOGY

For the purpose of section 9 of NEC, the definition given in part 1 / Section 2 of this code and
following shall apply.

3.1 Busbar —Low impedance conductor to which several electric circuits can be separately
connected.

3.2 Cable Ducting System — A system of closed enclosure of non-circular sections for
insulated conductors, cable and cords in electrical installations, allowing them to be
drawn in and replaced.
 3.3 Cable Trunking System — A system of closed enclosures comprising a base with a
removable cover intended for the complete surrounding of insulated conductors, cables,
cords and/or for the accommodation of other electrical equipment.

3.4 Conduit Fitting — A device designed to join or terminate one or more components of
a conduit system, or change direction.

3.5 Conduit Joint — An interface between two or more components of a conduit system,
or between a conduit system and other equipment.

3.6 Conduit System — A closed wiring system consisting of conduits and conduit fittings
for the protection and management of insulated conductors and/or cables in electrical or
communication installations, allowing them to be drawn in and/or replaced, but not
inserted laterally.

3.7 Distribution Board — A unit comprising isolation and one or more protective devices
against over current, short circuit, earth leakage protection and ensuring the distribution
of electrical energy to the circuits.

3.8 Luminaire — Apparatus which distributes, filters or transforms the light transmitted
from one or more lamps / light emitting device and which includes all the parts necessary
for supporting, fixing and protecting the lamps, but not the lamps themselves, and where
necessary circuit auxiliaries together with the means for connecting them to the supply.

3.9 Wiring System — assembly made up of bare or insulated conductors or cables or

busbars and the parts which secure and if necessary, enclose the cables or busbars

4 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS OF ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN,

PLANNING AND CIVIL CONSTRUCTION WORK FROM THE PERSPECTIVE OF
WIRING INSTALLATIONS

4.1 Architectural design, planning and construction of civil work have an important role in
compliance of safety norms, statutory requirements, convenience and ease installation of
electrical work, which also helps maintaining quality parameters, complete reliability, full
functionality, trouble free working throughout the standard life expectancy.

4.2 Right from the initial stage, required provisions in architectural design, planning and
construction of civil work from the perspective of electrical work shall be considered. Progress
and dependability of various electrical tasks in installation, safety and further maintenance shall
be pointed out in joint meetings. Accordingly, electrical activities shall have place in project
planning and bar-charts.

4.3 Related requirements of design and planning can stage-wise be divided into:
 a) Architectural design, and
b) Civil construction.

NOTE — Under this portion, though many guidelines are generic, the scope mentioned under 4.4 and 4.5
below is mainly from the point of view of work of wiring installations and does not cover requirements
related to transformer substation, generator room, etc.

4.4 Architectural Design Requirements

In consultation with Electrical agency, such as Electrical Consultant, following points shall be
considered in architectural drawings:

NOTE — See also electrical architecture of wiring installations under 12.

4.4.1 Routes and Service Entry Points

Architectural drawings shall clearly mark electrical service entry points, cable routes below
ground, through the building structure, so that detailing in shop drawings will restrict the work
within specified route and no conflict shall occur with other building utility service. The
drawings shall specify required horizontal and vertical clearance to be maintained between
other utility services.

4.4.2 Locations of Electrical Panels

Locations and position for main and sub electrical panels shall be marked, and adequate space
/ room shall be allocated considering size of panel, clearance in front, side and back.
Consideration shall be given to space required for opening of the panel doors / racking out
breakers, and approach boundaries (see section 22 Safety in Electrical Work), and accessibility.
Floor mounting panels may be located in separate electrical panel rooms, having outside door
opening, required fire rating, ventilation arrangement.

4.4.3 Electrical Meter Rooms

Meter rooms shall be separate. It shall be planned to have sufficient head room and clear space
in front of meters, control switches (at least 1 m). Space on wall shall be sufficient to
accommodate required number of meters at such height that readings can be taken without aid
of any tackle. Also, the switchgears shall be at least 0.5 m above floor level and within such
height to have an easy access for operation. The meter room shall be well ventilated, protected
from external influences like sun, rain, water seepages, entry of rodents. Location of meter
room shall be suitably adjacent or nearest to cable duct / shaft / vertical route of mains.

NOTE — Meter rooms shall not be located below stair cases where above requirements could not be complied
with.

4.4.4 Movement of Heavy / Bulky Electrical Equipment

For installation of electrical equipment within building which is likely to be heavy / bulky in
size or removing it for maintenance, provision of adequate passages, stairways or any alternate
provision for its shifting / movement shall be taken in to account.

4.4.5 Shafts / Ducts

There shall be provision of shafts for vertical electrical distribution which shall preferably be
adjacent to electrical panels. Shafts shall be separate for electrical HT cables, LT power cables
/ bus-bar trunking and cable work of extra low voltage systems like telephones, security
system, fire alarm, signaling, BMS or data networking etc. If independent shaft is not possible,
there shall be an arrangement for segregation in between which shall have required fire rating.
No other utility service shall run through these shafts. Shafts shall be accessible at all levels
and shall not open in fire escape staircase. All shafts shall have fire prevention provision as per
National Building Code and fire safety requirements of local statutory authorities.

NOTE — As per CEA Reg. 36 above provisions are mandatory for all buildings above 15 m height.

4.4.6 Interior Design

It is important prepare interior layouts so as to plan electrical points, locations of switch boards
to suite the aesthetics, functionality as well as for comfort and ease of operation.

4.4.7 Aesthetics and Electrical Safety

To avoid conflicts between Architect from perspective of aesthetic and person executing
electrical installation work from the point of view of safety requirements of electrical work,
convenience and ease of installation and further maintenance depending on type of wiring
(concealed / surface / hybrid), location of distribution boxes, requirement of under-floor
trunking / false flooring / false ceiling, wall partitions and openings to enter into / work within
as per the need. These points shall be decided at planning stage.

4.4.8 Illumination
Within interior work number, type, size, location of luminaries shall be decided and agreed
upon mutually between Architect and Electrical Agency, considering technical parameters of
lux level, CCT, heat dissipation, accessibility and maintainability.

4.4.9 Ceiling Fans

Location of ceiling fans shall suite requirement of clearance between ceiling / false ceiling and
fan blade, floor level and fan blade. Sweep of fan blades shall not obstruct light source.
Location and size of fan shall also suite utility from the point of view of users and aesthetically
match with false ceiling design.

NOTE — Sometimes due to afterthought provision of false ceiling, it creates problems affecting required
clearances. Under some cases replacement of down rod with suitable length may solve problem but in case
of limited ceiling height it is not possible.

4.4.10 Exhaust Fans

Wherever provision of exhaust fans is there, cross ventilation shall be considered to allow
sufficient fresh air entry in to particular envelop, for example, toilets where exhaust fans are
proposed, door undercuts or louvres preferably at lower level for cross ventilation shall be
provided.

NOTE — Non provision of entry for fresh air creates negative pressure within the envelope increasing load on
exhaust fan resulting into heating and subsequent failure.

4.4.11 Location of earthing pits shall be shown on drawings so that those shall always remain
open and accessible for testing and maintenance throughout the service period.

4.4.12 Areas requiring restricted access to designated person authorized to carry out electrical
work therein shall be provided with necessary arrangements

4.5 Civil Planning and Constructional Requirements

It is important to plan activities of civil construction and electrical works in detail on bar chart
or similar tools available in project planning. The bar chart shall be updated, and coordination
be monitored to avoid conflicts, breakages and reworking. Following points give general
guidelines.

4.5.1 Fire Rating

The electrical panel rooms, doors, segregation arrangement within shaft shall have fire rating
of 2 h or as per requirements mentioned under NBC, Central Electricity Authority (measures
related to Safety and Electric Supply) Regulations, 2010 and further amendments.

4.5.2 Shafts / Ducts / Chambers

Design and location of cable ducts, shafts, chambers, their covers and entry points, shall be as
per shop drawings provided by electrical agency and shall be in consultation with, considering
further aspects of maintenance / repairs / replacement. Size of chambers shall be in
consideration with bending radii of cables. At every flooring level, there shall be a provision
to seal these shafts, so that in case of fire, it shall not spread, or smoke shall not pass from one
floor to other.

4.5.3 Openings and Covers

Manholes / opening of chambers shall not be less than 650 mm x 550 mm or 650 mm in dia.,
where opening is intended for entry of person. Covers of manholes, chambers shall bear
sufficient strength to withstand loads likely to be imposed on the structure. Covers shall be
marked with the name of the service.
Openings / covers of junction boxes / draw-in boxes / accessories in conduit systems with
inspection openings shall always be accessible.

4.5.4 Enclosures for Underground Cables

Pipes to be used for cable as enclosures shall be of required diameter so that cable can pass
through or removed from easily and have sufficient mechanical strength and shall be erected
at required depth to suite requirements of IS 1255.
Following requirements shall generally be followed for protection of underground cables:

Sl Protective Element Specifications

No. (2) (3)
(1)
i) Bricks a) 100 mm minimum
width
b) 25 mm thick
c) sand cushioning
100 mm and sand
cover 100 mm.

ii) Concrete slabs At least 50 mm thick

iii) Plastic slabs (polymeric cover strips) Fiber At least 10 mm thick,
reinforced plastic depending on properties
and has to be matched
with the protective
cushioning and cover
iv) PVC conduit or PVC pipe or stoneware pipe or hume The pipe diameter
pipe should be such so that
the cable is able to easily
slip down the pipe
v) Galvanized pipe The pipe diameter
should be such so that
the cable is able to easily
slip down the pipe.
The trench shall be backfield to cover the cable initially by 200 mm of sand fill; and then a plastic
marker strip shall be put over the full length of cable in the trench. The marker signs shall be
provided where any cable enters or leaves a building. This will identify that there is cable located
underground near the building. The trench shall then be completely filled. If the cables rise above
ground to enter a building or other structure, a mechanical protection such as a GI pipe or PVC pipe
for the cable from the trench depth to a height of 2.0 m above ground shall be provided.

4.5.5 Wall Thickness

Walls shall be of sufficient thickness to accommodate concealed boxes / switch boards /
distribution boxes. So that installation of boxes will not affect strength of wall. Additional
strengthening shall be considered if necessary.

NOTE — Depth of box may be 60mm or vary depending on manufacturer’s design. Under circumstances in
4”/100 mm wall it is not possible to accommodate these boxes back to back. Staggering may solve problem
to certain extent.
4.5.6 Structural Strength
In wiring installation where cable ladder, trey system is used for cable management, its
structure along with the load of cables which it is going to support, is likely to impose load on
the primary structure of building. This situation occurs when supports of this system are fixed
on building structure. For this building structure shall have capacity to bare the load.

At some locations there are chances of conduits getting crowded endangering structural
strength due to number of circuits entering / passing out from the particular DB / panel. This
situation may occur in beam, slab, and wall. If such situation is unavoidable necessary
measures may be required take to retain structural strength.

4.5.7 Sleeves / Core Cutting

As far as possible sleeves shall be got erected for entry of wires / cables through wall, flooring,
RCC structure during construction to avoid core cutting, damages and reworking at finishing
stage. Sometimes core cuttings may be required which shall be done with the consent of
structural engineer and under supervision of civil engineer.

4.5.8 Water Leakages / Seepages

Design shall take in to consideration possible seepages, leakages, accumulation, and ground
in-surge of water, which is hazardous to electrical installation. Required provisions shall be
made at such locations to prevent and work shall be executed with due care.

4.5.9 Bathrooms /Washrooms

Within bathrooms / washrooms, location of showers, faucets shall be such that during use water
shall not splash on switch boards / electrical outlets / fittings.

4.5.10 Tandems in Flat Slab Post Tension Structures

For flat slab post tension structures locations of tandems marking shall be made to avoid
puncture of / damage to tandems during electrical construction activity.

4.5.11 Earthing
Any construction work, including excavation, subsequent to construction of earthing
electrode/s, it shall not disturb any part of earthing system. Any civil work on construction site
shall not cause cover-up / concealing of any portion of electrical earthing system without notice
and consent of person In-charge of electrical work.

5 ELECTRICAL DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OF WIRING INSTALLATIONS

Proper initial design to suit the estimated load, its pattern, type of occupancy, class of users
and accordingly desired functionality with a vision of possible future requirements will help
achieve reliability, long term safe and trouble- free operation.
 Prior to execution of work detailed drawings showing electrical layouts, single line diagrams
is primary step. It also is an important part of documentation. Symbols used in the drawing
shall conform to IS 12032 series.

NOTE — It is most important to observe norms, method of construction and appropriate material for use
on site at various steps during the progress of work. Especially for work which is going to be hidden must
be checked and certified prior to get it concealed. For this responsibility must be assigned to a Supervisor
or such qualified and competent person in that regard.

5.1 Statutory Requirements

5.1.1 Regulation 12(1) of CEA Safety Regulations 2010

All electric supply lines and apparatus shall be of sufficient rating for power, insulation and
estimated fault current and of sufficient mechanical strength, for the duty cycle which they may
be required to perform under the environmental conditions of installation, and its design shall
facilitate construction, installation, protection, working-on and maintenance in such a manner
as to ensure safety of human beings, animals and property.

5.1.2 Regulation 29(1) of CEA Safety Regulations 2010

No electrical installation work, including additions, alterations, repairs and adjustments to
existing installations, except such replacement of lamps fans, fuses, switches, domestic
appliances of voltage not exceeding 250V and fittings as in no way alters its capacity or
character, shall be carried out upon the premises of or on behalf of any consumer, supplier,
owner or occupier for the purpose of supply to such consumer, supplier, owner or occupier
except by an Electrical Contractor licensed in this behalf by the State Government and under
the direct supervision of a person holding a certificate of competency and by a person holding
a permit issued or recognized by the State Government.

5.2 Coordination with Architectural and Civil Agencies

5.2.1 According to proposed design and layout of wiring installation requirement of spaces,
clearances, accessibilities, approach ways, raceways, shafts, recommended wall thickness,
required provisions for prevention from fire hazard coming under purview of Architect / Civil
agency shall be intimated to architect at planning stage.

5.2.2 In line with stages of civil work as below, shop drawings / working drawings involving
civil work and related electrical installation work shall be given to civil construction agency
stage wise in due time before footings, RCC structure, walls, doors and windows, plastering,
flooring, interior, painting etc
Table 1 Correlation and Dependability between Stages of Civil and Electrical Works
(Clause ---------------)
 Sl Stage of Civil Work Electrical Work Involved
No. (2) (3)
(1)
(i) Footings Erection of pipes for underground cables as
per proposed routes

(ii) RCC structure Laying and fixing conduits, concealed fan

boxes, fixing sleeves after steel work,
checking displacement during fixing of
covers below steel work, supervising and
confirming rigidity of conduits during
casting

(iii) Walls Chasing and fixing conduit drops, fixing

boxes, drawing fish wires if needed

(iv) Door and windows Drawing of wires

(v) Plastering Terminating wires, fixing switchboard

accessories, cover plates over junction
boxes like ,

(vi) Flooring Under floor raceways

(vii) Interior, false ceiling Related wiring, erecting fan down rods
Fixing lighting fixtures, fans

(viii) Painting Fixing switch board cover plates, light

fixtures, fans
Electrical Testing

5.3 Types of Wiring Systems

On the broader aspect wiring systems are conventionally divided into surface wiring and
concealed wiring. Under each of above, variation occurs on the basis of material and situation.
IS 732 elaborates on this aspect. Accordingly wiring systems have been categorized in to
different types considering basic material, accessories necessary for installation considering its
electrical and mechanical aspects and situation where it is going to be installed. Wiring system
shall accordingly be selected to suit and survive that particular location and maintain
functionality, reliability and safety.
 NOTE — Under surface wiring conventional wooden casing and capping, CTS wiring on hard wood batten have
now become obsolete. Use of cleat wiring is also rarest and not recommended for fixed wiring, hence, not covered
under scope of this section.

5.3.1 Wiring Systems

Wiring systems excluding bus-bar trunking system and power track system can be categorized
depending on:

a) Method of installation in relation to type of conductor / cable for example, bare conductor,
insulated conductor, sheathed conductor, single core / multicore. It basically considers
accessories required for protection of conductor / cable and those accessories if required
for fixing / installing. Categories are as under:

1) Without fixing,
2) Clipped direct,
3) Conduit system,
4) Trunking / raceways – skirting / flooring,
5) Ducting,
6) Ladder, tray, brackets,
7) On insulators, and
8) Support wire.

These methods of installation shall be in accordance with Table A-1: Methods of

installation in relation to conductors and cables, under Annex A (Ref. Annex R of IS 732
: 2019).

NOTES:
1 Conduit system shall comply with IS 14930 series (see 5.9).

2 Trunking system (for cables) shall comply IS 14927 series (see 5.10).

3 Cable ducting / trunking system shall comply with IS 14927 series.

4 Cable ladder / trey system shall comply with IS/IEC 61537.

b) Method of installation in relation to the situation concerned for example, location where
wiring is to be installed, the base on / under / within which the conductor / cable is to be
installed. Situations are classified as under:

1) Building voids- accessible / non-accessible,

2) Cable channel,
3) Buried in ground,
4) Embedded in structure,
5) Surface mounted,
 6) Overhead / free in air,
7) Window frames,
8) Architraves, and
9) Immersed.

These methods shall be in accordance with Table A-2: Erection of wiring systems and
Table A-3: Examples of methods of installation providing instructions for obtaining
current-carrying capacity under Annex A (Ref. Annex R of IS 732 : 2019).

NOTES:
1 Last column of Table A-3 indicates reference method to be used to obtain current carrying capacity (see
5.5).
2 Reference methods have been categorized in to 10 parts; A1, A2, B1, B2, C, D1, D2, E, F, G; (see 5.5.2).

5.3.2 Bus-bar Trunking System (BTS) / (BBT)

BTS shall comply with IS/IEC 61439-1, IS/IEC 61439-6. Installation shall be done as per the
manufacturer’s instructions. It can be used for primary distribution (main switchboard to DBs)
and also for secondary distribution (DB onwards) comprising power outlets, lighting.

5.3.2.1 Selection may be done considering following limitations in conventional cable

distribution:

a) Where ampacity is higher, conventional cable system requires number of parallel runs
making it cumbersome.

b) Cables have restrictions of bending radii.

c) Erection of cables with clamps, treys, ladders is a time consuming and laborious job
which requires particular skill and good workmanship.

FIG. 1 BUS-BAR TRUNKING (BTS) AND TAP-OFF BOXES

d) Terminations, jointing of cables again have same issues.

 5.3.2.2 BTS can be considered as convenient alternative having following attributes, which are
helpful from designing aspect:

a) It comes prefabricated in sections;

b) All accessories are factory made and precisely designed, hence, lesser chance of human
error;
c) The installation including jointing, terminations, tap-offs is convenient and much faster,
do not requiring special skills and workmanship as that for cables;
d) Additions / alteration are not complex;
e) Predefined electromagnetic induction values - lower electromagnetic interference;
f) Lesser voltage drop;
g) Better heat dissipation;
h) Good earth continuity;
j) Higher short-circuit withstand capacity;
k) Higher impulse voltage withstand capacity;
m) BTS may reduce number of switchgears and hence panel size and space required for it;
n) Important attribute of BTS is that it is halogen free, no risk of toxic smokes in case of
fire, no flame propagation, hence fire hazard wise it is safer than cables; and
p) Ingress protection prevents possible damages due to rodents which may happen in cable
system.

5.3.2.3 In high-rise buildings for vertical distribution and in huge complexes for horizontal
distribution above attributes* are most desirable.

* Check manufacturer’s specifications

5.3.2.4 BTS can be sandwich or air insulated. Generally, air insulated bus is manufactured for
lower current ranges in comparison with sandwich bus. Air-insulated bus is bigger in size
requiring more space. It may cause chimney effect unless made provision of fire barriers.

FIG. 2 AIR-INSULATED BUS-BAR TRUNKING

5.3.2.5 Sandwich bus is compact. Requires less space and there is no risk of chimney effect
attributing added fire safety.
 FIG. 3 SANDWICH BUS TRUNKING

5.3.2.6 BTS of lower current range is also available for secondary distribution like utility plug-
in power outlets and lighting bus bar trunking. It may come with duel circuits. Its use could be
suitable for above applications in commercial establishments, shopping centers, IT parks, work
benches in workshops / assembly lines in industries, hospitals, laboratories, warehouses /
godowns. Controlling is easier. It can reduce trouble shooting and maintenance issues. Lighting
bus-bar trunking is convenient for high-bay illumination.

FIG. 4 LIGHTING BUS-BAR TRUNKING

5.3.3. Power Track System (PT)

PT system shall comply with IEC 61534 series. Installation shall be done as per the
manufacturer’s instructions.

5.3.3.1 PT system technology is a good option for conventional fixed power / data / telephone
sockets. It is prefabricated and hence can be installed easily and in very short time. It allows
addition, repositioning, removal of power and data / telephone sockets safely as and when one
requires. The locations where detailed interior layouts are not finalized and some shifting is
likely to occur, this system provides great flexibility.
 FIG. 5 POWER TRACK SYSTEM

5.3.3.2 PT system is used for rated voltage not exceeding 277V for single phase and 480 V for
three-phase with rated current not exceeding 63A. These systems can be used for distributing
electricity in household, commercial and industrial installations. Installation of this system shall
be done as per the manufacturer’s instructions. IEC 61534-1 specifies general requirements and
tests.

5.3.3.3 It can be used on walls, skirting, and ceiling. They may be installed flush or semi-flush,
surface mounted, suspended or spaced away from surface using fixing devices complying norms
specified in IEC 61534-21.

5.3.3.4 PT system may also be installed on floor / under floor which shall satisfy requirement
and tests as specified in IEC 61534-22.

5.4 Selection and Erection in Relation to External Influences

In reference with Table 1 of Part 1/Section 8 of this code following external influences
depending on location / environment shall be taken into account so that protection against the
expected external influences is ensured in selection and erection of wiring system:

a) Ambient temperature (AA);

b) External heat sources;
c) Humidity (AB);
d) Water (AD);
e) Presence of solid foreign bodies (AE);
f) Presence of corrosive / polluting substances (AF);
g) Impact (AG);
h) Vibration (AH);
j) Mechanical stresses (AJ);
k) Flora, mould (AK);
 m) Fauna (AL);
n) Solar radiation (AN);
p) Seismic effects (AP);
q) Wind (AR);
r) Nature of processed or stored materials (BE); and
s) Building design (CB).

For further detailed classification Table under Annex L from IS 732 : 2019 may be referred

5.4.1 Ambient Temperature (AA)

Depending on geographical location wiring system shall be suitable for the range limiting
highest and lowest temperature in normal operation and limiting temperature which is maximum
continuous operating temperature in case of fault is not exceeded (Refer Table-5.2).
Conventionally AA4 (-5 to 400C), is regarded as normal.

Table 2 Maximum Operating Temperature for Types of Insulation of Cables

(Clause 5.5.1)

Sl No. Type of Insulation Temperature Limit 0C1

(1) (2) (3)

(i) Thermoplastic (PVC) 70 at conductor

(ii) Thermosetting (XPLE / EPR rubber) 90 at conductor2

(iii) Mineral (Thermoplastic PVC) covered or bare 70 at sheath

exposed to touch

(iv) Mineral (bare exposed to touch but not in 105 at sheath2,3

contact with combustible material)

1
Current carrying capacities are based on temperatures mentioned above or where certified conductor
or cable may have maximum operating temperature limits in accordance with the manufacturer’s
specifications.
2
Where conductor operates exceeding 700C it shall be ascertained that the equipment connected to
the conductor is suitable for the resulting temperature at the connection
3
For mineral insulated cables higher operating temperature may be possible depending upon the
temperature rating of cable, its terminations, environmental conditions and external influences
NOTES:
1 Table does not include all types of cables.
2 This does not apply to bus-bar trunking system or power- track system or lighting track system for
which current carrying capacity is provided by manufacturer.
3 For temperature limit of other types of cable please refer cable specifications or manufacturer.

5.4.2 External Heat Sources

Where wiring installation is likely to get exposed to external heat sources it shall be protected
with heat shielding / heat resisting insulated sleeving or segregating / placing sufficiently away
from such heat source.

NOTE — Heat from external sources may be radiated, convected or conducted for example, from hot water
system, appliances, manufacturing process, plant etc.

5.4.3 Humidity (AB)

Under humid environment condensation shall not cause any damage. Insulation or insulation
and sheath shall not allow penetration of moisture. Under this category, AB4 (RH 5 percent to
95 percent and AH 1 to 29g/m3) is treated as normal.

5.4.4 Water (AD)

Wiring system shall comply relevant ingress protection class. And if water gets accumulated
provision of draining shall be provided.

NOTE — In general, the sheaths and insulation of cables for fixed installations may be regarded, when
intact, as proof against penetration by moisture. Special considerations apply to cables liable to frequent
splashing, immersion or submersion.

5.4.5 Presence of Solid Foreign Bodies (AE)

Wiring system shall comply with relevant ingress protection class depending on location. Where
dust in significant quantities is present, additional measures may be taken so that heat dissipation
doesn’t get affected, or doesn’t cause creepage between conductors for example, mining work,
stone crushers.

5.4.6 Presence of Corrosive / Polluting Substances (AF)

Where presence of corrosive or polluting substance is there, for example, water, chemical zones,
coastal areas and also dissimilar material causing electrolyte action, all material and installation
shall have additional provisions to resist such environment, for example, protective tapes, paint,
grease, bimetallic accessories etc., or as recommended by manufacturer

5.4.7 Impact (AG)

Selection of wiring system shall take into consideration possible impact, penetration,
compression etc. during installation, use or maintenance for example, drilling a hole in wall
where concealed wiring exists, digging where underground cable exists. Provisions may be
trunking ducting, conduit system

5.4.8 Vibration (AH)

Wiring system supported by or fixed to structures shall sustain possible vibrations. Such
situation for example, occurs during casting of RCC work, within which conduits of concealed
wiring are fixed to steel and vibrators are used for proper settlement of concrete. Vibrations may
be of medium severity (AH2) or High severity (AH3). Precautionary measure may include
making conduit system rigid, using flexible wires, conduits etc.

5.4.9 Mechanical Stresses (AJ)

Sufficient care shall be taken to prevent mechanical stresses to affect reliability and safety of
wiring installation, for example, unsupported heavy cable at the creating stress at terminals due
to its own weight, pulling / threading of cables through conduit systems, bending of cables,
underground / under floor cables, electro-dynamic forces resulting from short circuit currents,
etc.

5.4.10 Flora, Mould (AK)

Where conditions experienced or expected to constitute hazard for example, due to growth of
vegetation or fungus (AK2) special protective measures shall be adopted with facility to clean
regularly.

5.4.11 Fauna (AL)

Where conditions are anticipated to constitute hazard (AL2) caused for example, due to insects,
birds, lizards, rodents suitable measures shall be adopted by providing mechanical protection /
suitable pest control (which shall not cause adverse effect on installation by way of any of the
above- mentioned external influences).

5.4.12 Solar Radiation (AN)

Adequate shielding shall be provided where solar radiation (AN2) or UV radiation is expected.
Special precaution may need to be taken for equipment subject to ionizing radiation.

5.4.13 Seismic Effects (AP)

Wiring system shall sustain seismic hazard identified for respective geographical location.

5.4.14 Wind (AR)

Refer 5.2.5.13 of IS 732

5.4.15 Nature of Processed or Stored Materials (BE)

This point shall be considered from the point of view of material having fire potential and
provided with adequate fire prevention measures.

5.4.16 Building Design (CB)

Where structural movement is anticipated wiring system shall permit relative movement (CB3),
(CB4) so that conductors, cables are not subjected to excessive mechanical stress, for example,
expansion joints in the building structure, bridges, etc.

5.5 Current Carrying Capacities

5.5.1 The current to be carried by any conductor for sustained periods during normal operation
shall be such that the temperature limit depending on type of insulation is not exceeded as given
under Table 2. Other than normal operation, consideration shall also be in regard with the ability
to sustain effective operation of protection against electric shock, over-current, voltage drop (see
5.7), thermal effect and limiting temperature of conductor and terminals. All these
considerations form basis of cross-section of conductor.

5.5.2 Reference Method of Installation

5.5.2.1 To assess current carrying capacity of cable depending on 73 various situations given
under Table A-3, these methods of installation have been classified under 10 groups under
following references:

a) Reference Method A1
Insulated conductors in conduit in thermally insulated wall* / in mouldings / architraves
/ window frames.

b) Reference Method A2
Multi-core cable in conduit in thermally insulated wall*.

*Wall consisting of outer weatherproof skin, thermal insulation and inner skin of wood or similar material
having thermal conductance at least 10 W/m2. Conduit is fixed so as to be close to inner wall but not
necessarily touching inner skin. Heat from cables is assumed to escape through the inner skin only. The
conduit can be metal or PVC

c) Reference Method B1
Insulated conductors in conduit / trunking on wooden wall / on or concealed in masonry
wall*, suspended in trunking / in building void
 d) Reference Method B2
Multi-core cable in conduit / trunking on wooden wall / on or concealed in masonry
wall* / flooring, suspended in trunking, / in building or ceiling void / duct in void / in
masonry / open or closed cable channel

*Conduit mounted on a wooden wall so that the gap between the conduit and the surface is less than 0.3
times the conduit diameter. The conduit can be metal or plastic. Where the conduit is fixed to a masonry
wall the current-carrying capacity of the cable or insulated conductors may be higher. This subject is
under consideration.

e) Reference Method C
Single-core or multi-core cable on a wooden wall imperforated trey / on or directly in
masonry wall / ceiling.

NOTE — Cable mounted on a wooden wall so that the gap between the cable and the surface is less
than 0.3 times the cable diameter. Where the cable is fixed to or embedded in a masonry wall the current-
carrying capacity may be higher. This subject is under consideration.

f) Reference Method D1
Single core cable / multi-core cable in conduits / ducts in the ground.

NOTE — Cables drawn into 100 mm diameter plastic, earthenware or metallic ducts laid in direct contact
with soil having a thermal resistivity of 2.5 K∙m/W and a depth of 0.75 m. For higher soil resistivity apply
correction factor as per Table B-16.

g) Reference Method D2
Multi-core cables designed to be buried directly in the ground with or without added
mechanical protection, for example, half round RCC pipe.

NOTE — Cables laid in direct contact with soil having thermal resistivity of 2.5 K∙m/W and a depth
of 0.75 m. For higher soil resistivity apply correction factor as per Table B-16.

h) Reference Method E
j) Reference Method F
k) Reference Method G

Reference method E, F, G is for single or multi-core cables in free air / spaced from
surface / on perforated or wire-mesh trey / ladder / brackets / on insulators.

NOTE — A cable so supported that the total heat dissipation is not impeded. Heating due to solar
radiation and other sources shall be taken into account. Care shall be taken that natural air convection
is not impeded. In practice, a clearance between a cable and any adjacent surface of at least 0.3 times
the cable external diameter for multi-core cables or 1 time the cable diameter for single-core cables is
sufficient to permit the use of current-carrying capacities appropriate to free air conditions.

5.5.2.2 Other methods

 a) Cable on a Floor or Under a Ceiling:
This is similar to reference method C except that the current-carrying capacity for a cable
on a ceiling is slightly reduced (see Table B-17) from the value for a wall or a floor
because of the reduction in natural convection.

b) Cable Tray System:

A perforated cable tray has a regular pattern of holes so as to facilitate the use of cable
fixings. The current-carrying capacity for cables on perforated cable trays have been
derived from test work utilizing trays where the holes occupied 30 percent of the area
of the base. If the holes occupy less than 30 percent of the area of the base, the cable
tray is regarded as imperforated. This is similar to reference method C.

c) Cable Ladder System:

This construction offers a minimum of impedance to the air flow around the cables, that
is, supporting metal work under the cables occupies less than 10 percent of the plan
area.

d) Cable Cleats, Cable Ties:

It is a device for fixing cables to cable tray or bundling cables together.

e) Cable Hangers:
Cable supports which hold the cable at intervals along its length and permit substantially
complete free air flow around the cable.

f) Cables in a Ceiling:
This is similar to reference method A. It may be necessary to apply the correction factors
due to higher ambient temperatures that may arise in the junction boxes, heat dissipating
luminaries and similar mounted in the ceiling. Correction factor as per Table B 52.14
Annex B shall be applied.

5.5. Depending on Reference Method (see 5.5.2) and insulation (seeTable 2), Table B -1 States
from which Table (B -2 to B-13)current carrying capacity for respective cross section and type
of conductor (Cu / Al)can be taken for design consideration. Tables B-14 to B-16state the further
Correction Factors and Tables B-17 to B-21 state Reduction Factors to be applied. These Tables
are given under Annex B(Ref. Annex S of IS 732).Particulars are tabulated as below:

Table 3 Reference Tables for Assessing Current Carrying Capacity

(Clause --------)
Table Particulars Use
B-1 Installation reference methods for forming Gives Table Nos. to be
basis of tabulated current carrying referred (from B-2 to B-13)
capacities and column from which to get
current carrying capacity for
particular cross section and
conductor Cu / Al

B-2 Current carrying capacities in amperes for Gives current carrying

PVC insulated, two loaded conductors capacities under methods of
copper (1.5 to 300 mm2) / aluminium (2.5 installation A1, A2, B1, B2,
to 300 mm2) conductor temperature 700C C, D1, D2
with ambient temperature 300C in air and
200C in ground
B-3 --”—for XLPE / EPR insulation two
loaded conductors at temperature 900C –”- --”--
-

B-.4 --”—for PVC insulation three loaded

conductors at temperature 700C –”-- --”--

B-5 --”—for XLPE / EPR insulation three

loaded conductors at temperature 900C –”- --”--
-

B-6 --”—for mineral insulation copper Gives current carrying

conductor and sheath / PVC covered or capacities for copper
bare, two / three loaded conductors at conductor (1.5 to 4 mm2 at
metallic sheath exposed to touch 500V and 1.5 to 240 mm2 at
temperature 700C with ambient 750V) under C methods of
temperature 300C installation.

B-7 --”— at metallic sheath not exposed to

touch at temperature 1050C --”-- --”--

B-8 --”— at metallic sheath exposed to touch -- ” -- under E, F and G

temperature 700C – ” -- methods of installation.

B-9 --”— at metallic sheath not exposed to -- ” -- under E, F and G

touch at temperature 1050C --”-- methods of installation.
B-10 Current carrying capacities in amperes for Gives current carrying
PVC insulated, single / multi core cables capacities under methods of
copper (1.5 to 630 mm2) conductor installation E, F and G
temperature 700C with ambient
temperature 300C

B 11 --”-- aluminium (2.5 to 630 mm2)

conductor temperature 700C with ambient --”--
temperature 300C

B 12 -- ” – XLPE / EPR insulation copper

conductor (1.5 to 630 mm2), temperature --”--
900C, reference ambient temperature 300C

B 13 -- ” – aluminium conductor – ” --
--”--
B14 Correction factor for ambient air Values given under Tables
temperature other than 300C B-2 to B-13 shall be used
after applying correction
factor in respect with the air
ambient temperature

B-15 -- ” – ambient ground temperature other than 200C Values given under Tables B-2 to
B-5 shall be used after applying
correction factor in respect with
the ground ambient temperature

B 16 Correction factors for cables buried Values given under Tables

directly in ground / ducts for soil thermal B-2 to B-5 for reference
resistivity other than 2.5 K-m/W method D shall be used after
applying correction factor
 B 17 Reduction factor for one circuit / more Values mentioned under
than one circuit or one multi-core cable / Tables B-2 to B-13 shall be
more than one multi-core cable other than used after applying the
underground reduction factor

B 18 -- ” -- cable laid directly underground Values mentioned under

Tables B-2 to B-5 shall be
used after applying the
reduction factor for
installation method D2

B 19 -- ” -- cable laid in duct in ground -- ” – for installation method

D1

B-20 Reduction factor for group of more than Values given under Tables
one multi-core cable to be applied to B-8 to B-13 for reference
reference current carrying capacities for method E shall be used after
multi-core cable in free air applying correction factor.

B-21 Reduction factor for group of more than Values given under Tables
one circuit of single-core cables to be B-8 to B-13 for reference
applied to reference current carrying method F shall be used after
capacities for one circuit of single-core applying reduction factor.
cable in free air

NOTE – Tables B -1 to B-21 may be referred from Annex B

5.5.4 Guidelines to Use Tables to Assess Required Current Carrying Capacity

To assess the required current carrying capacity it will be seen that there are multiple factors
which are requiring permutations and combinations to arrive to the value of current carrying
capacity of particular cross section of conductor under respective situation. Following guide
lines may help in this regard

Step 1
Check location
Decide type of wiring – surface / flush to the surface / concealed / underground / in air
Check situation – walls (masonry / wooden,/ insulated), flooring (masonry / raised),
ceiling, ducts, shafts, voids, ground where wiring is to be installed.

Step 2
Check under which Reference Method of Installation (see 5.5.2.1) or other methods (see
5.5.2.2) the wiring decided as per step 1 fits in.
 Step 3
Select / decide type of insulation of cable to be used from column 1 of Table 2.
Thermoplastic (PVC) / Thermosetting (XLPE – cross-linked polyethylene / EPR –
ethylene propylene rubber) / mineral

NOTES:
1 Table 2 gives temperature withstand capacity depending on type of insulation. Wiring system
components including cables and wiring accessories shall only be installed or handled at
temperatures within the limits stated in the relevant product standard or as given by the
manufacturer.
2 In absence of specific instructions from manufacturer, insulation having FR / FRLSH grade shall
be treated under PVC, thermoplastic category to consider temperature withstand capacity.
3 In respect of FS cables manufacturer’s specifications shall be considered.

Step 4
Check / decide number of cores.

Step 5
Refer Table B-1 and find Table and column from where to refer current carrying
capacities.

Step 6
For reference methods A1, A2, B1, B2, C, E, F, G apply ambient temperature factor from
Tables B 14 and for reference methods D1 and D2 Table.15 as mentioned under column
8 of Table B.1.

Step 7
For reference method D1, D2 apply correction factor if soil resistivity is other than 2.5 K-
m/W, from Table B 16.

Step 8
Apply reduction factor depending on the number of circuits from Table B 17 for above
ground, B 18 for below ground and for duct in ground B 19.

Step 9
Apply group reduction factor from applicable Tables (B-20 / B-21) for reference method
of installation E, F as mentioned under column 9 of Table B-1.

NOTE — If the same circuit (continuous conductor between terminations) passes through different
situations requiring different methods of installation, for example, portion of wiring in void above false
ceiling and wiring embedded in walls (concealed drops), the lowest current carrying capacity shall be
considered.

5.5.5 Simplified Method to Assess Current Carrying Capacity

Alternatively, to assess current carrying capacity of cable, a simplified version is given under
Annex C, Tables C-1, C-2 and C-3 (Ref. Annex T of IS 732:2016). References can be taken
from in lieu of Tables B-2 to B-5, B-10 to B-13, B-17 to B-21,

5.6 Effects of Harmonic Currents

5.6.1 Neutral Current

Where the neutral conductor carries current without a corresponding reduction in load of the line
conductors, the current flowing in the neutral conductor shall be taken into account in
ascertaining the current-carrying capacity of the circuit. The magnitude of neutral current due to
third harmonic causes significant effect on current carrying capacity of the cables in the circuit.

5.6.2 Equipment Causing Harmonic Effect

The equipment likely to cause harmonic current are fluorescent luminaries, LED luminaries,
computers, VVVF drives, inverter technology based electrical gadgets.

5.6.3 Effect of Harmonic Current on Size of Cable

5.6.3.1 Where the neutral current is likely to be higher than the line current then cable size shall
be selected on the basis of neutral current.

5.6.3.2 Where the cable size selection is based on a neutral current which is not significantly
higher than the line current it is necessary to reduce the tabulated current-carrying capacity for
three loaded conductors.

5.6.3.3 If the neutral current is more than 135 percent of the line current and the cable size is
selected on the basis of the neutral current, then the three line conductors will not be fully loaded.
The reduction in heat generated by the line conductors offsets the heat generated by the neutral
conductor to the extent that it is not necessary to apply any reduction factor to the current-
carrying capacity for three loaded conductors.

5.6.4 Reduction Factors

5.6.4.1 In balanced three-phase circuits, neutral currents due to the line currents, having a
harmonic content does not get cancelled. Under the circumstances, reduction factors shall be
applied. If only two of the three phases are loaded, the neutral conductor will carry the harmonic
currents in addition to the unbalanced current. Such a situation can lead to overloading of the
neutral conductor.

5.6.4.2 If significant, that is, more than 15 percent, higher harmonics, for example, 9th, 12th,
etc. are expected then lower reduction factors are applicable. Where there is an unbalance
between phases of more than 50 percent then lower reduction factors may be applicable.
5.6.4.3 The tabulated reduction factors, when applied to the current-carrying capacity of a cable
with three loaded conductors, will give the current-carrying capacity of a cable with four loaded
conductors where the current in the fourth conductor is due to harmonics. The reduction factors
also take the heating effect of the harmonic current in the line conductors into account.

Table 4 Reduction Factors for Harmonic Currents

in Four-core and Five-Core Cables
(Clause --------------)
Sl No. Reduction Factor
Third Harmonic Size Selection is Size sSlection is
Content Based Based
of Line Current on Line Current on Neutral
(1) % (3) Current
(2) (4)
1. 0-15 1.0 --
2. 15-33 0.86 --
3. 33-45 -- 0.86
4. 45 -- 1.0

NOTES:
1The third harmonic content of the line current is the ratio of the third harmonic and the fundamental (first
harmonic), expressed in percent.
2 The reduction factors only apply to cables where the neutral conductor is within a four-core or five-core
cable and is of the same material and cross-sectional area as the line conductors. These reduction factors
have been calculated based on third harmonic currents.

5.6.5 Examples of Applying Reduction Factors

Consider a three-phase circuit with a design load of 39 A to be installed using four-core PVC
insulated cable clipped to a wall, installation method C.

From Table B-.4, a 6 mm2 cable with copper conductors has a current-carrying capacity of 41A
and hence is suitable if harmonics are not present in the circuit.

Example 1 If 20 percent third harmonic is present, then a reduction factor of 0.86 is applied
and the design load becomes:

39
─── = 45A
0.86

For this load a 10 mm2 cable is necessary.

Example 2 If 40 percent third harmonic is present; the cable size selection is based on the neutral
current which is:

39 * 0.4 * 3 = 46.8 A
and a reduction factor of 0.86 is applied, leading to a design load of:

46.8
─── = 54.4A
0.86

For this load a 10 mm2 cable is suitable.

Example 3 If 50 percent third harmonic is present; the cable size is again selected on the basis
of neutral current which is:

39 * 0.5 * 3 = 58.5 A

In this case, the reduction factor is 1 and a 16 mm2 cable is required.

NOTE — All the above cable selections are based on the current-carrying capacity of the
cable; voltage-drop and other aspects of design have not been considered.

5.7 Voltage Drop in Consumers Installation

The voltage drop between origin of an installation and any load point shall have limitations as
given in the f Table 5.

Table 5 Voltage Drop Limitation

(Percentage to the nominal voltage as per IS 12360)
(Clause 5.7)
Sl Type of installation Lighting Other
No. (2) (3) (3)
(1)
i) A – low voltage installation supplied directly from public low
voltage distribution system 3 5
percent percent

ii) B – low voltage installation supplied from private LV supply

a 6 8
percent percent
a
as far as possible it is recommended that voltage drop within final circuits do not exceed
those indicated in installation type A.

When the main wiring system of installation is longer than 100 m these voltage drops may be
increased by 0.005 percent per meter exceeding 100m, without this supplement being greater
than 0.5 percent.

Voltage drop is determined from the demand by the current using equipment, applying
diversity factor where applicable, or from the values of the design current of circuits.

NOTES:
1 Greater voltage drop may be accepted:
a) for motor during starting period; and
b) for other equipment having high inrush current.
2 Following temporary conditions are excluded:
a) voltage transients, and
b) voltage variation due to abnormal operation
3 For extra low voltage circuits, it is not necessary to fulfill the voltage drop limits mentioned in this table
for uses other than lighting (for example, bell, control, door opening, etc.) provided that check is made that
the equipment is operating correctly.

5.8 Conductor and Cross-sectional Area

5.8.1 Conductor
While selecting conductor for size less than or equal to 16 mm2, type 1 or type 2 copper conductor
shall be used. As over the period of time, possibility of contacts getting loose, oxide formation
leading to generation of heat and sparking are more when aluminium conductor is used.

NOTE — Loose contacts are major cause heat generation leading to sparking and fire. Under
routine maintenance checking of contacts in switchboards of lighting circuits may not
happen. Under the circumstances to mitigate the possibilities of fire hazard due to loose
contacts, copper conductor is recommended.

5.8.2 Cross-sectional Area

Cross-sectional areas of conductor shall be selected considering following factors:

a) requirement of maximum current depending on designed / estimated load (including

anticipated future requirement) under normal conditions;
b) fault level withstand capacity;
c) allowable voltage-drop (see 5.7);
d) harmonic disturbances (see 5.6);
(v) current carrying capacity* of the conductor under the respective situation and method
of installation (see 5.5).
 *It shall be noted that for the same cross section of conductor, variation in current carrying capacity is quite
large. Typically, it will be seen that under Table C.1, current carrying capacity of 1.5 mm2 copper conductor
varies from 13A to 26A, depending on situation & method of installation.

5.8.3 Without prejudice to the above recommendations, the nominal cross section area of phase
conductors in A.C. circuits and live conductor in D.C. circuit shall not be less than values
specified in Table 6 due to mechanical reasons.

Table 6 Minimum Nominal Cross-Sectional Area of Conductors

(Clause 5.8.3)
Sl Type of Wiring Use of Circuit Conductor and Cross
No. (2) (3) Section
(1) (4)
i) Fixed installation Lighting circuits1 1.5 mm2 Cu
cables and insulated Power outlet2 6A
conductors

ii) Power circuits /, 2.5 mm2 Cu

Power outlet3 6A
Power outlet4 16A
Appliance5 < 2kW
iii)

iv) Appliance6 < 3kW 4.0 mm2 Cu

V) Appliance7 < 6kW 6.0 mm2 Cu

Signaling and controlling **0.5 mm2 Cu

Vi) circuits

vii) Flexible For specific appliance As specified by IS

connections with Cu
insulated conductors
and cables For any other application **0.5 mm2 Cu
 Extra low voltage 0.5 mm2
circuits

** In multi-core flexible cables containing 7 or more cores and in signaling control

circuits intended for electronic equipment a minimum nominal cross-sectional area of
0.1 mm2 is permitted.
1
Maximum looping - 2 boards, subject to load < 1 kW / 24 points
2
Maximum 4 Nos., subject to total load < 1 kW
3
Maximum 8 Nos., subject to total load < 2 kW
4
Maximum 2 Nos., subject to total load < 2 kW
5
1 No, subject to total load < 2 kW / AC < 1TR
6
1 No, subject to total load < 3 kW / AC < 2 TR/3TR(3-PH)
7
1 No, subject to total load < 6 kW / AC < 3 TR (1-PH)

5.8.4 Cross-sectional Area of Neutral Conductor

5.8.4.1 In single phase circuits with two conductors, in three phase circuit with line conductor
up to 16 mm2 Cu or 25 mm2 Al or where harmonic distortion is likely and THD is not exceeding
33 percent; cross sectional area of neutral conductor shall be at least equal to the area of line
conductor.

5.8.4.2 If THD exceeds 33 percent cross-sectional area of neutral conductor shall be increased
(see 5.6).

5.8.4.3 For poly phase circuits where cross sectional area of line conductor is greater
than 16 mm copper or 25 mm2 aluminium cross sectional area of neutral conductor may be
2

lower (but not less than 50 percent) than cross sectional area of the line conductors if following
conditions are fulfilled simultaneously:

a) the load carried by the circuit in normal service is balanced between the phases;
b) third harmonics and the odd multiple of third harmonics current do not exceed 15
percent of the line conductor current;
c) the neutral conductor is protected against over currents; and
d) cross sectional area in not less than 16mm2 Cu or 25 mm2 Al.

5.8.5 Cross Sectional Area of Protective Conductor

Cross sectional area of protective conductor shall not be less than the appropriate value shown
in Table 7.

Table 7 Cross Section Area of Protective Conductor

(Clause 5.8.5)
 Sl No. Cross section Area of Phase Minimum Cross Section
(1) Conductor S mm2 (Cu) Area of Protective
(2) Conductor mm2
(3)
(i) S<16 S
(ii) 16<S<35 16
(iii) S>35 Refer Clause 12.2.2.1 of IS
3043
NOTES:
1 Applicable for same metal. If different metal used shall have same ampacity. If exact size not available choose
nearest next size.
2 The values shown above are generally applicable. For precise size, 12.2.2.1 of IS 3043 or 5.4.3.1.3 of IS 732
may be referred. It may be economical leading to small cross section compared to phase conductor. For IT and
TT system of earthing compatibility may be verified in consideration with earth fault loop impedance

5.9 Conduits and Conduit Systems

5.9.1 Conduits shall comply IS 9537 series and conduit systems shall comply IS 14930 series.
For conduits to be buried in ground, Part 2 of IS 14930 shall be referred (see clause 5.9.6)

5.9.2 Classification and Coding of Conduits

Basic function of conduits is to provide mechanical, environmental and Fire protection.

Depending on the characteristics Conduits are classified and coded as in Table 8.

NOTE — For conduits to be buried underground also refer 5.9.6

a) material – metal / insulating / composite;

b) connecting – threadable / non-threadable
c) mechanical properties (stresses) – very light / light (LMS) / medium (MMS) / heavy
(HMS) / very heavy;
d) bending – rigid / flexible / pliable / self-recovering;
e) flame propagation – propagating / non-propagating;
f) electrical – insulating / non-insulating;
g) external influences – temperature / ingress of water / corrosion;
h) solar radiation – unprotected / protected;

Table 8 Classification Coding for Conduit Systems

(Clause 5.9.2)
Sl No. Digit Code Class
(1) (2) (3) (4)
(i) 1st 1 Very light
 Resistance 2 Light
to 3 Medium
compressio 4 Heavy
n 5 Very heavy
(ii) 2nd 1 Very light
Resistance 2 Light
to impact 3 Medium
4 Heavy
5 Very heavy
(iii) 3rd 1 +50C
Lower 2 -50C
temperatur 3 -150C
e range 4 -250C
5 -450C
(iv) 4rd 1 +600C
Upper 2 +900C
temperatur 3 +1050C
e range 4 +1200C
5 +1500C
6 +2500C
7 +4000C
(v) 5th 1 Rigid
Resistance 2 Pliable
to bending 3 Pliable / self-
4 recovering
Flexible
(vi) 6th 0 None
Electrical 1 Electrically
characterist 2 continuous
ic 3 Electrically
insulating
Electrically
continuous and
insulating
(vii) 7th 3 > 2.5mm
Ingress to 4 > 1.0mm
solid 5 Dust protected
objects 6 Dust tight
(viii) 8th 0 None
Resistance 1 Vertical drops
to ingress 2 Drops on conduit
of water 3 @150
 4 Spray
5 Splash
6 Jets
7 Powerful jets
Temporary
immersion
(ix) 9th 1 Low - In and out
Resistance 2 Medium - In and out
against 3 Medium-In, High-out
corrosion 4 High – In and out
(x) 10th 0 None
Tensile 1 Very light
strength 2 Light
3 Medium
4 Heavy
5 Very heavy
(xi) 11th 1 Non flame
Resistance 2 propagating
to flame Flame propagating
propagatio
n
(xii) 12th 0 None
Suspended 1 Very light
load 2 Light
capacity 3 Medium
4 Heavy
5 Very heavy

5.9.3 Selection of Conduit*

5.9.3.1 Selection of conduit from above classification shall be done precisely considering
suitable characteristics of conduit systems for protection and management of insulated
conductors / cables and survival under respective site conditions, external influences and
situation. However, broadly conduits can be divided in to metal and non-metal.

5.9.3.2 Metal conduits

Metal conduits provide good mechanical protection. Usually these conduits are available in
Electric Resistance Welded (ERW), Electric Metal Tubing (EMT) and Galvanized. ERW
conduits are welded longitudinally, EMT is seamless. Metal conduits are better option from
point of view of Fire, as they do not catch fire and do not produce toxic smoke. However, metal
conduits are susceptible to corrosion. Under moist, humid atmosphere, where condensation is
likely and also under chemical zones, decision about its use shall be taken judiciously. Hot
dipped Galvanised Conduits as better option under corrosive environment.
 FIG. 6 HOT DIPPED GALVANIZED CONDUIT AND EMT

NOTES:
1 Table D.1 shows suggested characteristics of conduits under Annex D of this section (Ref. Annex W of IS
732) which may be used as guideline in this regard.
2 *For the selection of conduits to be buried underground see 5.9.4.

5.9.3.3 PVC conduits

PVC conduits offer good properties against corrosion, offer moderate mechanical protection,
Comes in different colours, have insulating properties. PVC conduits are cost effective and
much easier to install. Depending on situation, selection may be made.

NOTES:
1 If for a situation two or more options are available, further criteria shall be time required for installation,
workmanship, available labour having required skill and cost thereof along with material component. For
example, installation of metal conduits requires cutting, bending, threading, requiring specialized skill,
workmanship, labour and much more time. Material handling and Installation of PVC conduit is much easier
requiring less labour, time and cost of labour and material.

2 PVC conduits with its advancement in technology has replaced metal conduits, however use of metal
conduits may be predominant under the situation where risk of mechanical damages is high and such
protection is priority under the situation like industrial installation

5.9.3.4 Fire prevention, FR / FRLS properties

Without prejudice to the above conditions electrical conduit system shall be non-flame
propagating. Depending on fire hazard, public gathering places, other sensitive installations
use of PVC conduits with fire retardant / fire retardant with low smoke, halogen, and lead
dissipating properties is recommended.

5.9.3.5 uPVC conduits

Un-plasticized PVC conduits*compromise on the property of flexibility but offer high
resistance to corrosion, UV effect, fire. These conduits have smooth surface which helps in
drawing of wires.

NOTE — *Conformity shall be checked with IS 9537-3.

5.9.3.6 Size of conduit
Size of conduit shall be decided on the basis of number of cables which can be easily and safely
drawn within, without exceeding the limit of temperature rise (see Table 2) at full load under
normal conditions and in relation with that respective situation. To decide size of conduit,
inside cross-sectional area of conduit and cross-sectional area of cable/s (calculated from the
maximum overall diameter) and number of cables, form basis of area allowed to be occupied /
filled by cables. Fill factor shall not exceed values as given below:

a) One cable 53 percent

b) Two cables 31 percent
c) Three or more cables 40 percent

References may be taken from; Table D-2: Dimensions of Rigid Steel Conduits for inside cross
section of metal conduits [Ref. 7.1 of IS 9537 (Part 2)], Table D-3 Dimensions of Non-
metallic conduits (PVC) (Ref. clause 7.1 IS 9537-3) and Table D-4: Dimensions of Single
Core Non-Sheathed Cables with Rigid Conductor Class 1 or Class 2 for maximum overall
diameter of cables (Ref. 16.1.2 and 16.1.3 of IS 694) given under Annex D.

NOTE — Between pull boxes, for every two deviations in direction of up to 900, area of conduit shall be
considered less by 15 percent. And there shall be no further deviation.

FIG. 7 BENDS IN CONDUITS

Upper part of figure shows 900 bend and lower part of figure shows four bends each of 450
aggregating to 1800.

Example:
To find suitable Heavy PVC conduit for:
Number of cables (stranded): 2*1.5mm2 1 runs
2* 4.0 mm2 1 run
1* 1.5 mm2 1 run
Number of bends 2 Nos. of 900
To find Size of conduit:
Cross sectional area of cables from Table D-3 Annex D
Class 2 - 1.5 mm2 - 8.55 mm2
Class 2 - 4.0 mm2 - 16.62 mm2

Fill area = (5*8.55) + (2*16.62)

= 75.99mm2
Since number of cables are 7, Fill factor – 40 percent
75.99 / 0.4 = 189.98 say 190

Nearest and next cross sectional. area of conduit from Table D-2 Annex D and since there
are 2 bends of 900 area to be reduced by 15 percent
96 mm2 20 mm conduit
333mm2 25mm conduit
Less 15
196* .85 = 166.6mm2 - It is less than 190mm2
Next size
333* .85 = 283.5 mm2 - It is more than 190mm2.
So suitable conduit will be 25mm

5.9.4 Installation of Conduits

Mainly installation of conduit systems can be divided in to surface type and concealed type.
Its choice shall be made depending of level of pre planning, aesthetics, cost, maintenance,
additions / alteration.

Surface wiring facilitates changes at any point of time. Concealed type wiring suites aesthetic
requirements but needs pre-planning and costs comparatively higher. Clearing fault, carrying
out changes in concealed wiring is difficult compared to surface type wiring. Whether surface
of concealed installation shall be safety shall be a priority.

NOTE — Installation of conduit systems shall be done as per the manufacturer’s instructions, which is part
of his responsibility (IS 14930) and when so assembled accordingly shall be safe and shall have resistance
to external influences with minimum requirement of IP 67.

5.9.4.1 Conduit layouts

a) Layouts shall be precisely planned and marked in coordination with other services so
that for example, other service like gas pipeline in close vicinity will not endanger
safety.
b) Depending on layout, sequence of installation activity shall also be in coordination and
shall not conflict works related to other services.
c) Conduits for wiring systems which are rigidly fixed and concealed in the walls shall
be run horizontally, vertically or parallel to the room edges. Wiring systems in ceilings
or in floors may follow the shortest practical route. Sharp bends shall be avoided. In
 straight length between two pull-on /junction boxes maximum bends shall not be more
than two.
d) When there are several conduits running in parallel, they must be arranged to avoid
crossing at the point where they take different directions.
e) Layouts shall take in to consideration bending radii of cables.

5.9.4.2 Fixing of conduits

Fixing of conduit on surface may be done with saddle / saddle with spacer / clips. For spacing
between supports:

FIG. 8 METHODS OF FIXING CONDUIT WITH CLIP, SADDLE/S, SADDLE AND

SPACER

of conduits refer Table D-5 under annex D.

Screws, clamps / attaching component or joints to conduits shall not cause damage to the
insulation of wire. The screws shall be fixed with plugs and shall have adequate length
depending on the consistency of the base on which conduits are fixed. On stone walls fixing
may need wooden wedges / gutty in addition to hold the screw firmly. In concealed type of
wiring in walls conduits may be fixed with ‘U’ nails.

5.9.4.3 Conduit fittings and installation

Conduit fittings shall comply IS 3419. Provision of suitable fittings, junction / draw-in boxes,
inspection.

FIG. 9 CONDUIT
FITTINGS
Elbows / tees (for use in surface wiring) shall be made at the locations where there are sharp
changes in direction, to facilitate drawing of wires. Provision shall be made after every 3 m.

Fig. 10 Draw in Box in Metal Conduit System

5.9.4.4 General points to be observed in installation

a) Within conduit system there shall not be sharp edges, burrs or surface projections
which are likely to damage insulated conductor / cable or inflict injury to the installer
or user.

NOTE — Often burr forms while cutting, threading the conduit and is more significant in
case of metal conduits. It shall be carefully removed, and rubber bushes be used at open
ends of the conduits, before drawing of cables so that the insulation doesn’t get
damaged.

b) Expansion joints
At expansion joints necessary care shall be taken to use suitable flexible conduit /
necessary fittings to sustain anticipated movement which will not cause damage to the
electrical equipment.

c) Entry points
All penetrations / entries through civil work like walls, slabs, floor, roofs etc. shall be
sealed such that the planned fire resistance of all shall elements is not compromised.

d) Earth continuity in metal conduit system

To ensure safety in electrical installations use of metal conduits as earth continuity
conductor shall not be permitted generally.

NOTE — If circumstances require conduit system to be used as protective conductor,

the system shall be tested after final installation and also further periodically to confirm
its suitability for that purpose.

e) Joints in PVC conduit system

All joints of conduits with fittings and accessories shall be made rigid with the resin /
PVC solvent cement as recommended by the manufacturer. Such solvent shall be
 applied on the portions of conduit / fittings to be joined. Then such portions shall be
pushed in and held for 30 - 60 s. Or follow the instructions of manufacturer. This part
of installation procedure is important from the point of view of degree of ingress
protection (IP), where it is so desired.

f) Joints in Metal conduit system

To make Metal Conduit System rigid, fittings with draw-in / inspection boxes shall be
secured with check-nuts (see Fig. 5.10). Exposed portion of threading shall be coated
with anti-corrosive paint. Sealants shall be applied at all joints as per desired Ingress
Protection (IP)

g) Bending of conduits
Bending of metal conduits shall be done with proper pipe benders, a tool which allows
bending of pipe at right angle / off-set at any required angle (see Fig. 5.6). Pipe bending
of PVC conduits shall be done with spring as specified by the manufacturer. A person
shall be acquainted with the technique to calculate required lengths of conduits
considering gains / shrinks occurring in conduits due to bending. Typical manual pipe
benders for metal conduit and spring for PVC conduit is shown below.

FIG. 11 METAL PIPE BENDER

FIG. 5.12 PVC CONDUIT BENDING SPRINGS

Bending of conduits requires skill hence shall be done by person competent for it.

h) Concealed conduit system in RCC work of slab or other- Conduits

The conduits shall be fixed to steel with binding wire especially at the points of joints.
Multiple crossings are avoided in the slabs to allow proper concreting thickness.

j) Concealed conduit system in RCC work of slab or other - Deep junction / draw-in boxes
Deep junction / draw-in boxes of 65mm depth or as per required shall be used,
depending on thickness of concreting. They shall be filled with dry sand or stuffed with
 some material and fixed with removable cover, so that the slurry will not enter and
block / choke the routes of cabling and stuffed material may later be removed easily.

k) Concealed conduit system in RCC work of slab or other - at the time of concreting
Before concreting covers are put below the steel to raise it and prevent its direct touch
with the centering, which provides space to settle concrete between steel and centering
material to avoid steel getting exposed. While putting these covers there are chances
that conduit system erected which is above steel work may get disturbed / shifted,
losing rigidity especially at joints. Secondly while pouring concrete in beams /
columns, the conduits erected within, may also disturbed due to use of vibrators. Hence
supervision and vigil at this point is necessary till the concreting work completes.

m) Concealed conduit system – in walls

Proper care shall be taken while making chases of walls so as to avoid wakening of walls.
Conduits shall be fixed with clamps / U nails or by some other means if necessary. Care
shall be taken for work in internal walls to avoid back to back boxes and conduits,
particularly in 4” walls.

5.9.5 Conduit System Buried Underground

Conduit system to be buried in ground shall conform IS 14930-2, which states few changes for
the clauses given under IS 14930 Part 1. Some of the changes in respect with particular
requirements for the conduits to be buried under ground are:

a) Multiwall conduit category is added for underground use;

b) Under classification there are few changes; in respect of Resistance to Impact, there are
only two categories, normal duty (N) and light duty (L);
c) Under external influences resistance to chemical attack is added; and
d) Minimum inside diameter shall be: nominal outside diameter divided by 1.33.

5.10 Trunking and Ducting System

5.10.1 Trunking /ducting system shall conform to IS 14927. Trunking is meant to provide
mechanical, environmental and fire protection at different levels for insulated conductors /
cables. These systems are used for surface type wiring.

FIG. 13 PVC TRUNKING ALSO CALLED CASING CAPPING

 FIG. .14 SLOTTED TRUNKING / DUCTING

5.10.2 Classification of Trunking / Ducting

Depending on the characteristics Conduits are classified and coded as below:

a) material – metal / insulating / composite;

b) mechanical properties – very light / light / medium / heavy / very heavy;
c) temperature – states operative temperature range;
d) flame propagation – propagating / non-propagating;
e) electrical – without electrical continuity, with electrical continuity, insulating;
f) external influences – temperature / ingress of solid / water / corrosion;
g) solar radiation – unprotected / low, medium, high protection; and
h) cover retention – cover removable with tools / without tools.

5.10.3 Fire Prevention

Without prejudice to the above characteristics trunking and ducting system shall be flame
retardant. Depending on fire hazard, public gathering places, other sensitive installations use
of trunking / ducting having fire retardant /fire retardant with low; smoke, halogen, and lead
dissipating properties is recommended.

5.10.4 Dimensions

Table 9 Dimensions of Trunking / Ducting

Sl No. Size (outer) Wall Approximate

(1) mm Thickness Internal
(2) mm Cross Section
(3) mm2
(4)
1. 12x12 1.2 119.5
2. 16x12 1.2 153.0
3. 16x16 1.2 196.0
4. 25x12 1.2 239.1
5. 25x16 1.2 307.4
6. 25x25 1.2 510.8
7. 38x16 1.3 474.4
8. 38x25 1.3 793.0
 9. 50x16 1.5 611.0
10. 50x50 1.5 2209
11. 75x75 1.8 5098
12. 100x50 1.8 4473
13. 100x40 2.5 3333
14. 200x30 2.5 5000
15. 225x25 1.6 4687
16. 225x38 1.6 7125
17. 250x25 1.6 5103
18. 250x38 1.6 7916
19. 300x25 1.6 6250
20. 300x30 2.5 7500
21. 300x38 1.6 9500

NOTE — The sizes other than those specified in above Table are also acceptable within any combination
of width and height from 12 to 300 mm from above. Provided wall thickness above 50 mm width or height
shall be at least 1.8 mm for trunking / ducting of insulating material and 1.6 mm for trunking /ducting of
metal.

5.10.4 Construction
5.10.4.1 Construction shall be such that any surface, edge, screws, stud or other securing
device does not damage conductor or cables.

5.10.4.2 Fixing
Trunking / Ducting system may be fixed with suitable contact adhesive or mounting device.
Fixing screws and small spring clips of insulating trunking fitting need not be of insulating
material, if they do not come into contact with the conductors, cables or isolated from live parts
and are not capable of transmitting a fault current. Where there is such possibility fixing may be
done with screws, however such screws shall be used with PVC plugs and shall be so designed
to withstand the mechanical stresses occurring during installing and normal use.

5.10.4.3 Segregation
If there is provision of segregation of circuits, same shall be adequately secured.

5.10.4.4 Accessible metal parts of system components which are liable to become alive in event
of failure of insulation, shall have provision to connect with earth.

5.11 Cable Trey / Ladder System

5.11.1 Applicability /Use

Cable trey, ladder system is an assembly of units or sections along with associated fittings
forming a structural system used to securely fasten or support cables and may also Raceways.
It is one of the efficient cable management tools, where routing of large quantum of cables are
to be handled. This system can be used both for power and LV systems like communication,
data, control and signaling. It helps ruling out possibility of disorganized mass of cables which
may become difficult to trace at times. This system carries cables mostly in open state hence
is advantageous for thermal management. In high-rise buildings it can be one of the best
options, suited for vertical distribution through shafts / ducts.

NOTE — Since cable ladder, Trey system is not fully enclosed it does not offer complete mechanical and
environmental protection. Therefore, this system is suitable for sheathed and armoured cables. Single
insulated cables shall not be installed on system.

5.11.2 Conformity with Standards

It shall conform to IS/IEC 61537.

5.11.3 Structure

FIG. 15 CABLE LADDER , TREY SYSTEM

The ladder cable tray has two side rails connected by cross members, or rungs. The rungs
provide convenient
anchors for tying down the cables. A trough cable tray is a prefabricated structure consisting
of a ventilated bottom with side rails. The ventilated trough cable tray supports cables better
than the ladder type.
NOTE — Cable trey and ladder system is designed for use as support for cable. It is not an enclosure to
give mechanical protection. It is not intended to be used as cat walk or support for a person working on.
Trying so may damage the system and cause injury to person.

5.11.4 Types, Material

These are available in wide variety of sizes, styles and material metal / non-metal; for
example, hot-dip galvanized, zinc electroplated, epoxy powder coated, fiber optic, GRP, FRP.
Selection can be made on the basis of mechanical properties, sffects of external influences
like corrosion*. Fiber-optic cable installations frequently go with solid-bottom cable trays
because the drooping of fiber-optic cables may degrade system performance. However, the
main argument for selecting solid-bottom trays is to reduce electromagnetic/radio-frequency
interference or for sensitive circuitry.

NOTE — Corrosion in metallic cable ladder, Trey system may occur due to climatic conditions, pollution
/ chemical environment, electrochemical reaction resulting out of two different metals coming in contact.
When such damage occurs, it is very difficult to repair. Hence appropriate selection of material is key
issue.

5.11.5 Construction
5.11.5.1 Structural design aspects
Construction of cable ladders, treys shall be done considering those to be fully loaded.
Distance between supports / span can be decided depending on load pattern. Proper structural
analysis shall be made considering horizontal structure as beams, vertical supports as columns
and brackets fixed on walls / vertical surfaces as eccentric load considering them as a
cantilever arm. Depending on gravity design may be got approved from Structural Engineer.
Regarding supports safe working load data may be called from the manufacturer*.

NOTE — *IS/IEC 61537 states that manufacturer must publish SWL (safe working load) details of their
product.

5.11.5.2 Allowable deflection

Allowable deflection of cable ladder, trey along the length and deflection of supports shall be
restricted within limit as mentioned in IS/IEC 61537.

5.11.5.3 Bending radii

There shall be correlation between bending radii of cable and radius of cable ladder, trey
fittings shall not be less than minimum bending radius of largest size of cable.

5.11.5.4 Expansion joints

Provision shall be made for the cable and the cable ladder, trey system to expand and contract
by providing expansion joints and loops of cable at these points.

5.11.6 Electrical Continuity

Metal /electrically conductive cable ladder, trey system shall retain adequate electrical
continuity to ensure equi-potential bonding and connection to earth.

5.11.7 Electromagnetic Compatibility

Cable ladder, trey system do not support electromagnetic influences, however installation of
current carrying cable may cause electromagnetic effects. This may cause disturbance in data
networking cables. Necessary precautions may be taken as recommended in EN 50174-2.

5.11.8 Fastening of Cables

Cables shall be fastened to ladder / trey with correct size cable ties / cleats or suitable fixture
so as to sustain electro mechanical effects.
5.11.9 Segregation
See 5.17.2

5.12 Cable Duct / Channel System

5.12.1 Application / Use
This is enclosed system of metallic non-metallic material to provide protection for cables
against external influences Selection of system in metal or non-metal and installing method;
concealed, flush to the surface or on surface shall be done depending on situation. Typical
methods of installation can be seen under Annex A, Table A-3, (methods 43 to 46, 54 to 56,
70, 71)

5.13 Installation of Wires / Cables

While installing it shall be checked that:

a) where the wiring system is designed to be withdrawable, there shall be adequate means
of access for drawing cable in or out;
b) if buried in the structure, a conduit or cable ducting system for each circuit is
completely erected before cable is drawn in;
c) radius of every bend in a wiring system is such that conductors and cables shall not
suffer damage;
d) where a conductor or a cable is not continuously supported it is supported by suitable
means at appropriate intervals in such a manner that the conductor or cable does not
suffer damage by its own weight;
e) every cable or conductor used as fixed wiring is supported in such a way that it is not
exposed to undue mechanical strain and so that there is no appreciable mechanical
strain on the terminations of the conductors, account being taken of mechanical strain
imposed by the supported weight of the cable or conductor itself;
f) the conduits / treys, ladders, ducts, channels, raceways from where cables are to be
pulled are cleared of burrs and sharp edges / covered properly;
g) flexible wiring system shall be installed so that excessive tensile and torsion stresses
to the conductors and connections are avoided; and
h) to facilitate pulling of heavy cables provision of cable pulling equipment / tools is
made.

Fig. 16 Some Cable Pulling Tools

 j) data cables, OFCs and other LV system cables having similar mechanical properties
shall be handled and installed with special care. Selection and fixing of Cable Ties shall
be such that it will not damage the cable, for example, very thin tie or very tightly
fastened tie may pierce through the shield of cable.
k) continuity of protective conductor shall not depend on its intermediate connections with
enclosures / system of wiring enclosures, equipment, armouring.

5.13.1 Insulation of Wires / Cables

During installation of wires / cables in any type of system / method, utmost care shall be taken
to prevent damages to insulation. Bush shall be provided on open end of conduit at the time of
drawing of wires. Twisting and bending is within permissible limits and there is no risk at the
time of installation and possibilities in future of External Influences which may affect
insulation properties

5.13.2 Number of Wires/ Cables

Number of wires / cables shall be restricted within the allowable fill factor / space factor
specified for the respective system.

5.13.3 Spacing Between Cables

Care shall be taken to install and maintain design conditions related to spacing on which current
carrying capacity of cable is considered.

5.13.4 Colour Coding

For identification of Cables and Conductors IS 11353 gives guidance on uniform system of
marking and identification of conductors and apparatus terminals (see Table E-1 under Annex
E).

5.13.4.1 Every single core non-flexible cable and every core of twin or multicore non-flexible
cable used as fixed wiring shall be identifiable throughout its length.

5.13.4.2 In case of MI cables and bare conductors colour sleeves may be used.

5.13.4.3 Colour coding of fixed wiring cables applies to all wiring up to the final distribution
board, and also for circuit wiring, except that red may be used for any phase.

5.13.4.4 For lighting the red wire will always feed the switch, and a red wire must be used from
the switch to the lighting point.

5.13.4.5 For flexible cables and cords the distinctive colours are not the same as for fixed
wiring. The colours of these are given in Table E-2 under Annex E.

5.13.5 Electro Magnetic Effects

Single-core cables armoured with steel wire or tape shall not be used for ac circuits. Conductors
of ac circuits installed in ferromagnetic enclosure shall be arranged so that the conductors of
all phases and the neutral conductor (if any) and the appropriate protective conductor of each
circuit are contained in the same enclosure. Where such conductors enter a ferrous enclosure,
they shall be arranged so that the conductors are not individually surrounded by a ferrous
material, or other provision shall be made to prevent eddy (induced) currents. (also see 5.11.7)

5.13.6 Electro Mechanical Effects

Under Fault conditions the huge amount of current flowing through cable can last fraction of
seconds to few seconds depending on protection and setting. Such currents create high
magnetic field which can interact to produce large mechanical forces, causing displacement,
sometimes leading to damage of cable. Under the circumstances proper type of fixtures will
help transfer these forces are transferred to the base where cable is installed. Such fixture shall
also not cause damage to the cable.

5.13.7 Connections, Termination of Wires

It shall be checked that the size of conductor and terminal match properly and every connection
between conductors and between a conductor and terminal of electrical accessory, equipment
is providing:

a) durable electrical continuity by making connections sufficiently tight so that no

charring or hot spot could be created;
b) all strands are properly inserted in terminal, where necessary use of appropriate type
of lugs and metal (copper / aluminium / bimetal) is made;

FIG. 17 CABLE FIG. 18 CABLE

LUGS GLANDS
c) adequate mechanical strength, so that self-weight of cable do not put strain on
terminals, where necessary clamps are provided, appropriate type of glands are used;
d) temperature attained by terminal within permissible range so that the effectiveness of
the insulation of the conductors connected to them is not impaired; and
e) connections, terminations are done in suitable enclosures providing mechanical
protection and protection against external influences.

5.14 Fire Prevention – Lifesaving and Restricting Damages to the Property

5.14.1 Selection of Wires: FR / FRLSH / HFFR

Selection of wires have important role under fire conditions. Depending on degree of hazard,
the type of premises / usage / occupancy etc. In order to prevent fire situation, flame
propagation, wires / cables shall have proper class FR / FRLSH / HFFR. Design of electrical
installation shall recommend proper type and class of wire considering following
characteristics:

a) non propagation of flame - self-extinguishing;

b) low generation of smoke – which causes opaqueness, impairing visibility during fire;
and
c) low or zero halogen – which causes toxic fumes / smoke directly affecting respiration
leading to suffocation and endangering life. Also, formation of acids after coming into
contact with water which leads to adverse effects on metal structures including steel
embedded in concrete.

5.14.2 Selection of Wires: FS1 – Circuit Integrity

Use of FS cables shall be made where electric supply integrity is important for example, cabling
related to PA system, emergency lighting and luminous signs of escape routes, fire alarm
system, operation of fire fighting, sprinklers system, control cabling of protective devices, and
may also include installations with high importance involving security of occupants and assets.
Such wires are intended to withstand high temperature for the required time period2 and retain
integrity of supply to serve emergencies / critical services.

1
FS cable depending on voltage level, shall meet test requirement under the different criteria depending
on environment, which shall be as per Doc ETD 9(15371) (ISS under preparation) to maintain circuit Commented [BE1]: Kindly provide the IS NUMBER of this
integrity under fire to withstand temperature as recommended in this standard referred Indian Standard.

5.14.3 Spread of Fire

Where a wiring system such as conduit, cable ducting, cable trunking, bus-bar trunking etc;
penetrates through elements of building construction such as floors, walls, roofs, ceilings,
partitions or cavity barriers, the openings remaining after installation of the wiring system shall
be sealed according to the degree of fire resistance required of the element concerned, so that
fire doesn’t get spread A part of a wiring system which complies with the requirements of the
relevant Indian Standard, which standard has no requirement for testing for resistance to the
propagation of flame, shall be completely enclosed in non-combustible building material having
the ignitability characteristic “P”.

5.15 Underground Cable Work

5.15.1 Depth of Cables

Cables, conduits or ducts that are buried in the ground shall either be at 750 mm depth* and 1
000 mm depth* for road crossing as per IS 1255, which minimizes risk of damage or be
provided with protection against mechanical damage / impact.
 NOTES:
1* Depth shall be measured between finished ground level and top edge of circumference of cable laid
underground.
2 The depth mentioned is for LT and control cables

5.15.2 Method of Construction

Cable shall be laid on bedding of minimum 75 mm riddled soil or sand at bottom of trench and
covered with additional riddled soil or sand of 75 mm and covered with bricks / tiles / half
round RCC pipes to provide mechanical protection. Cables across the roads / railway tracks
shall be laid through ducts / conduits of sufficient mechanical strength.

5.15.3 Identification and Route Marking

Buried cables shall be marked by cable covers or a suitable marking tape and an indicator
above ground showing route and voltage level so that buried conduits / ducts are identified
during excavation.

5.15.4 Cable supports and enclosures shall not have sharp edges liable to damage the cable or
insulated conductor.

5.15.5 Clearances
Clearances between cables, for example, power, telecommunication, data/ IT related, internet
etc., shall be as in Table 10 or as per the standards mentioned under respective service,
whichever is higher (see 5.16, 5.17, 5.18).

Table 10 Clearances for Underground Cables

(Clause 5.15.5)
Sl No. Category of Cable / Service Clearance
(1) (2) (3)
(i) Power cable to power cable Not specific but
shall suite de-rating
factor
(ii) Power cable to control cable 200 mm
(iii) Power cable to communication cable 300 mm
(iv) Power cable to gas / water main 300 mm
NOTE — Inductive influence of power cable on sensitive control cable shall be checked

5.16 Proximity to Other Services - Electrical

5.16.1 Precaution in Respect of Circuits of Different Voltage Levels

Neither an extra-low voltage (Band I) SELV / PELV nor a low voltage (Band II) circuit shall
be contained within the same wiring system as a circuit of nominal voltage exceeding that of
low voltage unless every cable is insulated for the highest voltage present or one of the
following methods is adopted:
a) each conductor in a multicore cable is insulated for the highest voltage present in the
cable, or is enclosed within an earthed metallic screen of current-carrying capacity
equivalent to that of the largest conductor enclosed within the screen, or
b) the cables are insulated for the respective system voltages and installed in a separate
compartment of a cable ducting or cable trunking system or have an earthed metallic
covering.

NOTES:
1 IS 12360 defines voltage bands for AC. Band I voltage is; up to 50V between line and earth / line to
line or between phases / isolated earth, on the same line Band II voltage is above 50V up to 600V
between line and earth, up to 1000V line to line / isolated earth.
2 For DC. Band I voltage is up to 120V between pole and earth / pole to pole / isolated earth, on the
same line Band II voltage is above 120V up to 600V between pole and earth, up to 1 000 V pole to pole
/ isolated earth.

5.16.2 A low voltage circuit shall be separated from an extra-low voltage circuit.

5.16.3 Where an installation comprises circuits for fire-alarm or emergency lighting systems
as well as circuits operating at low voltage and connected directly to a mains supply system,
appropriate precautions shall be taken to prevent electrical contact between the cables of the
various types of circuit.

5.16.4 Fire alarm and emergency lighting circuits shall be segregated from all other cables and
from each other.

5.16.5 Where a common conduit, trunking, duct or ducting is used to contain cables of category
1 and category 2 circuits, all cables of category 1 circuits shall be effectively partitioned from
the cables of category 2 circuits, or alternatively the latter cables shall be insulated in
accordance with the requirements of the clauses for the highest voltage present in the category
1 circuits (see also 5.16.8).

5.16.6 Where a category 3 circuit is installed in a channel or trunking containing a circuit of

any other category, the circuits shall be segregated by a continuous partition such that the
specified integrity of the category 3 circuit is not reduced. Partitions shall also be provided at
any common outlets in a trunking system accommodating a category 3 circuit and a circuit of
another category. Where mineral-insulated cable, or cable whose performance complies with
appropriate Indian Standard relating to specification for performance requirements for cables
required to maintain circuit integrity under fire conditions, is used for the category 3 circuit
such a partition is not normally required.
5.16.7 In conduit, duct, ducting or trunking systems, where controls or outlets for category l
and category 2 circuits are mounted in or on a common box, switch plate or block, the cables
and connections of the two categories, of circuit shall be segregated by a partition which, if of
metal, shall be earthed.

5.16.8 Where cores of a category 1 and a category 2 circuit are contained in a common
multicore cable, flexible cable or flexible cord, the cores of the category 2 circuit shall be
insulated individually or collectively as a group, in accordance with the requirements of this
Code, for the highest voltage present in the category 1 circuit, or alternatively shall be separated
from the cores of the category 1 circuit by an earthed metal screen of equivalent current-
carrying capacity to that of the cores of the category 1 circuit. Where terminations of the two
categories of circuit are mounted in or on a common box, switch-plate, or block, they shall be
segregated in accordance with 5.16.7.

5.16.9 Telecommunication Cables

In event of crossing or proximity of underground telecommunication cables and underground
power cables minimum clearance of 100mm shall be maintained or requirement according to
a) or b) shall be fulfilled:

a) a fire retardant partition shall be provided between cables, for example, bricks, cable
protecting caps (clay, concrete), shaped blocks (concrete), or additional protection
provided by cable conduit or troughs made of fire retardant material; or
b) for crossing mechanical protection between the cables shall be provided, for example,
cable conduit, concrete cable protecting caps or shaped blocks.

FIG. 19 SEPARATION OF CABLES IN WIRING SYSTEMS

5.16.10 IT Networking / Data Cables

Where power and data cables are installed within the same containment system or within close
proximity to each other, suitable segregation shall be used. Guidance on segregation can be
found from EN 50174-1 : 2018.

NOTE — Category 1 Circuit — A circuit (other than a fire alarm or emergency lighting circuit) operating
at low voltage and supplied directly from a mains supply system.
 Category 2 Circuit — With the exception of fire alarm and emergency lighting circuits, any circuit for
telecommunication (for example, radio, telephone, sound distribution, intruder alarm, bell, call and data
transmission circuits) which is supplied from a safety source.
Category 3 Circuit — A fire alarm circuit or an emergency lighting circuit.

5.17 Proximity to Other Services – Non-Electrical

5.17.1 Where a wiring system is located in close proximity to a non-electrical service both the
following conditions shall be met:

a) the wiring system shall be suitably protected against the hazards likely to arise from
the presence of the other service in normal use; and

b) protection against indirect contact shall be provided.

5.17.2 A wiring system shall not be installed in the vicinity of a service which produces heat,
smoke or fume likely to be detrimental to the wiring, unless protected from harmful effects by
shielding arranged so as not to affect the dissipation of heat from the wiring.

5.17.3 Where a wiring system is routed near a service liable to cause condensation (such as
water, steam or gas services) precautions shall be taken to protect the wiring system from
deleterious effects.

5.17.4 Where a wiring system is to be installed in proximity to a non-electrical service it shall

be so arranged that any foreseeable operation carried out on either service will not cause
damage to the other.

5.17.5 Any metal sheath or armour of a cable operating at low voltage, or metal conduit, duct,
ducting and trunking or bare protective conductor associated with the cable which might make
contact with fixed metalwork of other services shall be either segregated from it, or bonded to
it.

5.18 Electrical Installation for Lifts

Electrical Installation for lifts shall conform to statutory requirements of respective state / UT.

NOTES:
1 Scope is limited to provision of point of supply to lift machine related equipment and illumination with
power outlet at every floor level in lift shaft.
2‘Lift’ and ‘Elevator’ shall be treated as synonymous.

5.18.1 Size and Type of Electrical Supply Cables

Cables shall be armoured, except for the flexibility requirement from operational purpose and
size of cables shall be as recommended by the lift manufacturer.
5.18.2 Fire Protection

For fire lift, cables shall survive fire (FS) and conform ISS (under preparation Doc ETD 9-
15371). For other lifts cables* may be FS or FRLS.

*For the sake of safety for passenger lifts other than Fire lift, preference to FS cables shall be given.

5.18.3 Circuits

Electrical supply for the lifts shall be on separate circuits one for machine with its control panel
and second for lighting within shaft both taken from main electrical supply panel controlled
through switchgears of adequate rating.

5.18.4 Cable Routes

Both power cable for machine and equipment and lighting load (light and power outlet points
at each floor) cable shall be routed through lift shaft to the machine location first. Supply to
the system of both cables shall be controlled from the location of machine, so cable providing
supply for shaft lighting shall return down wards again through shaft for light and power
outlets.

NOTE — Lift shaft shall not be used for electrical installation of any other service.

6 DESIGN AND INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION

To avail safety, ease of operation, trouble free service, power quality, and redundancy of
electric supply, appropriate sectionalizing of electrical distribution from point of source of
supply to utility points is absolutely necessary. Following points will give guidance in this
regard.

6.1 Single Line Diagram (SLD)

It is important tool and basic requirement in electrical design to coordinate various components
of distribution system of wiring installation for satisfactory and safe working. It is also
important to trace faults, carry out modifications, additions and alteration in the existing
installation. Therefore, it shall form inherent part of documentation of any electrical
installation, possessed by owner and maintained as a record. It shall be duty of electrical
contractor to handover this record to the user.

6.1.1 Sequence of Preparation of SLD

It is always convenient to start preparation of SLD from the utility points and ending to main
supply source. This facilitates deciding capacities of different components.

6.1.2 Components of SLD

SLD shall show following components:

a) Switch-board;
b) Circuit-Main outgoing from DB providing supply to switch board;
c) Distribution board (DB) where outgoing circuit main terminates;
d) Sub-Main supplying DB;
e) Control switch / intermediate / sub-DB where outgoing sub-main terminates
f) Mains; and
g) Main control panel and switchgears.

6.1.3 Details of Components - Ratings, Specifications

Switch Board- Total No. of points and load
for example, 10 pts 240W

Circuit main- Size and number of conductors

for example, 2x2.5 + 1x1.5E

DB- Single (SP) / three phase (TP) and ways

Power / Lighting
MCB B/C/D, No. of poles and Amp
RCD- Poles, Amp, sensitivity mA
for example, 8 way SPN LDB
1 No. 16A DPMCB B series in coming
5 Nos. 6A SPMCBs B series outgoing
2 Nos. spare ways
Load on each circuit
Total load on DB
Sub-main- Size and number of conductors
e.g. 2x4.0 + 1x2.5E
Control switch- SP / TP and ways
MCB B/C/D, No. of poles and Amp
32A DP MCB B series
Mains- Size and number of conductors
e.g. 4x6.0 + 1x4.0E
Main switch- No. of poles, Amp B/C/D
e.g. 32A TPN C series MCB

6.1.4 Identification / Numbering

Alphanumeric Identification shall be assigned and shall be explicitly shown on SLD for:

a) Switch-boards;
b) Distribution boxes;
 c) Circuit-mains, sub-mains, mains; and
d) Electrical panel boards and switchgears on SLD.

6.2 Labeling / Tagging and Traceability

6.2.1 It is important to label the components of wiring installation with the appropriate
Identification assigned to them as per SLD (see 6.1.3).

6.2.2 This step shall be executed in such a way that at every point a particular point of
distribution system could be traced with incoming source and outgoing destination, for
example, within switch board of point wiring, circuit number shall be labeled, which circuit is
feeding supply to the switch-board, the particular circuit is coming from which DB, which
sub-main is feeding supply to the DB, sub-main shall show from which panel or intermediate
switch-board a supply is coming from.

6.2.3 The step shall be completed before the installation is handed over for use.

6.3 Point Wiring – Lighting and Power

6.3.1 Scope

6.3.1.1 Lighting
Part of wiring starting from Switch-Board (including switch-board and accessory) and
terminating into outlet accessory of utility point like lamp-holder, ceiling-rose, plug-outlet up
to 6A capacity is generally treated as point wiring for lighting.

NOTE — For the purpose of lighting fixtures, point wiring may be extended from first outlet to further
required number as per design but termination / extension must be done through an appropriate accessory.

6.3.1.2 Power
Final circuit starting from DB feeding supply to power outlet 16A plug socket is generally
treated as power point.

6.3.2 Size of Wires

Size of wires shall not be less than 1.5 mm2 copper for lighting and 2.5 mm2 for power (see
Table 6). This includes earth wire wherever it is mandatory (see 6.3.3).

6.3.3 Provision of Earth / Protective Conductor

Proviso under Regulation 41(xiv) of CEA Safety Regulations 2010 gives relaxation from
providing earth for apparatus consisting of wall tubes, light-brackets, ceiling-fans etc.,
excluding Hand-Lamps or portable apparatus unless provided with earth terminal and to class-
II apparatus / appliance having voltage less than 250V.
 NOTE — Without prejudice to above provision, if earth terminal is provided on the apparatus / appliance
by the manufacturer, provision of suitable accessory having terminal of earth to terminate protective
conductor shall be made, for example, 3-plate ceiling rose, 3-pin plug socket, to which such apparatus con
be connected.

6.3.4 Switch Boards

6.3.4.1 Load on switch-board-lighting
Considering not more than one circuit shall feed supply to Switchboard/s the total load of
number of light, Fan, 6A plug outlets shall not exceed 30% of the maximum current carrying
capacity of the circuit main as per 5.5 read with Annex C or 1000W or 24 points, whichever
reaches its limit first.

Table 11 may be referred for assessing load on a lighting switch-board.

Table 11 Determination of Load of Lighting Points

(Clause 6.3.4.1)
Sl No. Connected Device on Load
the outlet of point consideration
(1) wiring (3)
(2)
(i) Light point * 50W
(ii) Fan point 75W
(iii) Power outlet 6A 100W
Notes
1*Conventional light point considered which includes incandescent lamps / Tube light
with ballast of any types. For energy saving LED or equivalent, wattage may be
considered less. In non-residential establishments where series of lights are controlled
by single switch, actual load shall be taken into consideration.
2 Fan shall include all types / sweeps / exhaust
3 If actual rating of appliance is known, it may be taken into consideration subject to
envisaged changes.

6.3.4.2 Load on switch-board – power

Table 12 Determination of Load of Power Points

(Clause 6.3.4.2)
Sl No. Commonly Connected Devices on Load
(1) the Outlet of Power Point Consideration in
(2) W
 (3)
1) Bathroom
a) Storage type water heater 2000
b) Instant hot water geyser 3000
2) Dry balcony
a) Washing machine 2000
b) Dish washer 1500
3) Kitchen
a) Electric hot plate 2000
b) Induction hot plate 2000
c) Electric oven 2000
d) Microwave 2000
e) Mixer / grinder 500
f) Fridge 500
g) Toaster / kettle 800
h) Air Fryer 1500
j) Kitchen exhaust hood 700 / 1000
4) Other
a) A.C 1TR /1.5 TR / 2 TR 1250 / 1500 / 2000
b) Room heater 1000
c) Computer 150
d) TV 100
e) Iron 800

6.3.4.3 Connections within switch-board

Following points shall be observed while making connections within switch boards:

a) Switches shall be provided on line conductor / phase wires only.

b) Supply of line conductor to the plug socket on board shall be given through switch and
in right side terminal (seen from front) as per convention and neutral shall be connected
in left terminal directly.
c) Care shall be taken so that neutral doesn’t get isolated anywhere else, other than two
pole switch (SPN) which operates simultaneously on both terminals.
d) No part of exposed live part of conductor solid or stranded (stripped off insulation)
shall remain open outside the area of terminal.
e) Cross sectional area of conductor used for inter connections within board shall not be
less than cross sectional area of circuit mains.
f) Within switch-board there shall not be any joint except at terminals.

6.3.4.4 Labeling
See 6.2

6.4 Circuit Mains Final / Sub-circuit

It is a circuit from DB protected by over-current short circuit protective device and feeding
supply to current using appliance, power outlet, directly or through branches without further
disconnecting arrangement by any fuse / MCB, for example, cables providing supply to
switch-board from DB.

6.4.1 Lighting Load Curcuits – Residential Premises

For the sake of convenience and redundancy in supply it is recommended that there shall be
separate / independent circuit/s of lighting load for:

a) each room having door and when closed entry within can be restricted (attached
balcony / terrace may be included);
b) common areas like passage, verandah; and
c) Toilets.

Switch board providing supply exclusively for plug outlets may be provided with separate
circuit.

6.4.2 Lighting Load Circuits – Non-residential Premises

Circuit design of non-Residential premises may be done considering following factors:

a) enclosed area considering access;

b) maximum allowable load to suite the assessed current carrying capacity of circuit
mains;
c) utility - light / fan / power outlets; and
d) routes – ceiling / false ceiling, walls / partitions / under floor raceways

6.4.3 Power Load Circuits – Residential Premises

There shall be separate circuit for each area as mentioned in 6.4.1. For every A.C. and Water-
heater there shall be provision of independent circuit. Load on any single power circuit shall
not exceed 3kW and number of 16A power outlets on a circuit shall not be more than two.
This means if it is likely that an equipment having load 3kW, for example, instant hot water
geyser, is going to be connected on a power outlet, there shall not be second power out let on
the same circuit.

6.4.4 Power Load Circuits – Non-residential Premises

Design of circuits shall be done depending on portion of premises (a circuit shall not enter in
to another portion of premises for which entrance is through another door / area). Other factors
to be considered shall include load of appliance / equipment, supply redundancy with
minimum outage in case of fault.
 6.4.5 Essential Loads - Emergency Supply UPS / Inverter
Essential loads shall be sorted out so that the circuits for same could be bifurcated to avail
standby source of supply. Depending on necessity further categorization and sorting shall be
done on required back-up time period. See Table G-1 under Annex G.

6.5 Mains, Sub-mains

6.5.1 Load Diversity / Simultaneous Demand
Size of conductor shall depend on the installed load and diversity / simultaneous demand. For
general guide lines Table F-1 from Annex F may be referred to assess simultaneous demand.

6.5.2 Type of Load – Inductive / Resistive

Depending on type of load and the power factor, VA shall be considered to assess required
current carrying capacity.

6.5.3 Cross Sectional Area

Cross sectional area shall be worked out as per the guidelines under 5.5 to 5.8.

6.5.4 Ring Circuits

For availing supply redundancy use of ring circuit may be made with due precaution of
particular phase and appropriate protection.

6.5.5 Balancing the Load

In single phase distribution, care shall be taken to optimize the balance of load on three phases,
to avoid current in neutral.

6.5.6 Terminations
While terminating care shall be taken that no part of conductor core solid / stranded shall
escape outside the cross section of terminal. Generally, conductors up to 32A current carrying
capacity need not specially prepared (leads soldered / lug crimped on it). However, if
conductor is considered to carry current above 32A its leads shall be specially prepared for it.

6.5.7 Battery Based Inverter / UPS Wiring

While installing UPS/Inverter, it shall be provided with back-feed protection as per IS 16242-
1:2014/ IEC 62040-1:2008 and following points shall be observed

(i) There shall be provision of two pole transfer switch preferably solid state, in the
UPS/Inverter to isolate both Line and Neutral, so that after power supply interruption
from the utility’s distribution network, it shall remain totally isolated from the UPS /
inverter power output and no back-feed / hazardous energy gets transferred to the input
power terminals of UPS / Inverter and no shock hazard shall exist after 1 s at this point.

(ii) For every outgoing wiring circuit, connected to the output supply of UPS / Inverter; the
neutral shall be separately run and utmost care shall be taken that no looping shall occur
 at any point with the neutral of any other load circuit, not forming a part of inverter load.
The figures given below show the incorrect and correct methods to use UPS / Inverter
system with battery back-up as per IS 732:2019.

(iii) When UPS systems have galvanic isolation using Isolation transformer or by some other
methods, output neutral of UPS shall be earthed. with separate protective conductor. This
is usually done to avoid stray noise in the earth and neutral affecting the sensitive loads.
The output A.C circuit shall be referenced to the protective earth of the equipment in
which UPS is intended to operate. The bonding of protective earth and neutral conductors
applies to all modes of operation of the unit. The physical bonding point may be external
to the UPS as per IS 16242.

(iv) Body earthing (protective earthing of UPS) - Extraneous conductive parts of UPS which
might assume a hazardous voltage in the event of a single insulation fault, shall be
reliably connected to a protective earthing terminal within the UPS.

(v) It will be advisable to consider neutral conductor of adequate cross section as most of the
loads on UPS are SMPS or electronic loads to cater to harmonics.

Fig A: block diagram of wrong connection of Inverter leading to back feed of opuput power towards
the input
Fig B: As per IS732
Output side of the inverter neutral earthed
inside the inverter to the earth terminal.
Correct way of using inverter with 2 pole
isolation in inverter output and bypass circuit
(for line and neutral)

6.6 Distribution Boxes

Distribution box is an important component of electrical installation which streamlines
electrical power from its source to utility point with an arrangement for protections for wiring
at different levels. Electrical design shall comprise distribution boxes of appropriate type and
with appropriate location.

6.6.1 Types – Phases, Ways

Depending on source of electrical supply single phase or three phase and quantum of electrical
load, area of and plan of building / premises, distribution boxes of single pole neutral (SPN) /
three pole neutral (TPN), with required number of ways, two, four, eight, twelve, twenty four,
etc. are available. Options of three phase incoming and single phase outgoing or three-phase
incoming and three-phase / single phase outgoing are available.

6.6.2 DB Types – Fuse, MCB, MCCB

Distribution boxes are available comprising protection provided in the form of fuses /
miniature circuit breakers (MCB) / moulded case circuit breaker (MCCB). Both types of DBs
(Fuse and MCB /MCCB) are available in single phase (SPN) as well as three-phase. (TPN).
In MCB DBs there is provision to incorporate MCB / MCCB for incoming supply. However,
traditional for DB with fuses it is necessary to install separate switchgear for incoming supply,
usually Metal Clad / Iron Clad DP / TP switch with fuse/s and neutral link.

NOTES:
1 Distribution of old conventional fuse box DB is not recommended.

2 Possible high risk in replacement of fuses.

Though replacement of fuse wire is an easy cheap option on the parameter of cost of replacing MCB, use
of appropriate size of fuse wire cannot be promised on account of its availability on hand and also the
availability of qualified electrician who can choose the correct size to suit wiring installation. There is also
a point to note CEA Regulations do not allow person other than that qualified and having permit issued by
government to do such task. Under the circumstances of non-availability of correct fuse wire, non-
availability of qualified person to the task, there is possibility of unqualified person taking up the work in
hand making situation prone to accident.

6.6.3 Types – Enclosure Designs

6.6.3.1 MCBDBs shall conform to IS 13032. They are available with various designs, flush
mounted, surface mounted, with covers or hinged doors of different types, material to suite
situation, accessibility, visibility of MCBs, Variations are also there in the method of mounting
of MCBs – vertical / horizontal.

6.6.3.2 In TPN DBs individual phase isolation facility is also available, where two pole RCDs
/ RCBOs can be fixed for each phase, so that in case of fault in one of the phases, supply of
only that phase will get isolated without affecting supply of other phases.

6.6.3.3 DBs are available with facility to fix MCB / MCCB / RCD / RCBO and with required
number of ways on incoming side. DBs are also available with provision to fix MCCB both
on incoming and outgoing side

6.6.3.4 The bus-bar, neutral link and earth link shall be of sufficient capacity and not less than
rated capacity of bus bar of line conductors, to carry current under normal and fault condition
and links shall have sufficient number and size of terminals to accommodate number of cables
with their different cross sections.

6.6.3.5 Bus bar shall be 100A or 200A capacity.

6.6.3.6 Space within the DB shall be sufficient to accommodate the number and size of cables
with required loop without getting overcrowded.

6.6.4 Location
Following points shall be taken into consideration while fixing location of distribution box:

a) shall be a load center to limit length of circuit mains and voltage drop;
 b) shall be in common areas where there is no hindrance to reach and operate especially
in emergency; and
c) suggested height above ground shall be such that, it shall be beyond the reach of
children but in accessible position without aid of any tackle, for example, average
between 1.8 m and 2.1 m.

6.6.5 Selection
6.6.5.1 Stages of distribution
DBs may be selected as e.g. primary / sub-DB, which most likely are TPN type, through which
supply is given to local / secondary / final DB which may be TPN or SPN, depending on the
scope and stages of distribution design.

6.6.5.2 Features to be considered for selection

While selecting DB following points may be taken into consideration:

a) Safety, which shall always be treated on priority, (also see NOTE 2 below 6.6.2);
b) 6.6.1 - Phases, ways;
c) 6.6.2 - Fuse, MCB;
d) 6.6.3 - Enclosure designs;
e) 6.6.4 - Location;
f) the sustainability under respective environment;
g) External Influences, IP class (see 5.4); and
h) ease to work with while installing, making connections within, for example, sufficient
space to accommodate wires, terminal adequate with minimum contact resistance and
size to allow connection of aluminium conductor also;

6.6.6 Labeling / Marking

DB and each circuit on it shall labeled with appropriate identification mark, (see 6.2).

6.7 Switchgears, Protective Devices

Every circuit shall be provided with basic protection to safe guard it from over-current and
short-circuit which shall be provided at its source, for example, DB. It is important and
mandatory to provide protection against leakages with RCDs. There may also be a need to
provide adequate protection against over-voltages / surge. Within wiring installations, the
number, rating, and locations shall be so chosen that it will provide safety mainly against
Shock and Fire to safe guard Life and Property, with a care to avoid nuisance tripping and
outages.

NOTE — It is most important to provide the protective device according to safe current carrying capacity
assessed in respect of cross sectional area of conductor under particular Situation and Reference Method
of Installation (see Annex B / Annex C), For example under Table B-1 current carrying capacity of 2.5
mm2 Cu conductor is 18.5 A for a cable to be installed as per Reference Method A2, for the same size of
cable if installed as per Reference Method D1, its safe current carrying capacity is 29A. This means the
overload rating of protection shall be different for Method of Construction A2 and D1.
6.7.1 Fuse and Switch-fuse Units
Fuses shall conform to IS 13703 series.

6.7.1.1 Re-wireable fuse

Fuse wire embedded between two terminals in porcelain cutout has been an old, conventional
and cost wise cheaper option. It is important to use correct size / gauge

FIG. 20 PORCELAIN CUT-OUT WITH FUSE WIRE

of fuse wire made of correct material / alloy having required characteristics to heat and melt /
fuse in short time usually fraction of second when current exceeds nominal value (see also
note below 6.6.2).

6.7.1.2 HBC fuses

FIG. 21 BLADE / BOLT / CARTRIDGE TYPE HBC FUSES

High breaking capacity (HBC) type fuses also called high rupturing capacity fuses are suited
to work where high fault energy is required to be restricted along with the electromagnetic
stresses, which may cause mechanical damage to the current carrying components. Such types
of fuses are required to be replaced once it blows. Some HBC fuses are provided with an
indicator to show condition of fuse, blown or working. These fuses operate very fast and have
very high short circuit current handling capacity compared to breakers. Such fuses are
therefore also used as backup / secondary protection.

6.7.1.3 Switch and fuse units

Linked switches DP or SPN / TP / TPN along with suitable fuse/s on phase/s and a link for
neutral have been used traditionally since long to provide protection against overload and
short-circuit along with isolation. These are available with re-wireable and HBC fuses.

Such types of control switches are available in different varieties, with iron clad / metal clad
enclosure, suitable to mount on fabricated frame / skeleton type panels and without enclosure
suitable for fabricated cubical panels.

While using such type of control switch gears, it shall be kept in mind that such types are
manually operated. There is no tripping mechanism. During fault, only fuse/s of faulty phase/s
will blow. Remaining phase/s will continue to supply power. This may lead to unbalance of
load which could be undesirable at sometimes.

6.7.2 MCBs
Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) have largely replaced traditional fuse based protections.
MCBs have many fold advantages like compactness, ease of resetting, identical sizes for large
range of current capacities up to 125A, ease of erection and maintenance, facility to choose
suitable tripping characteristics depending on type of load, etc. MCBs shall conform to IS /
IEC 60898-1.

Fig. 22 MCBs

6.7.2.1 Number of poles

MCBs are available in single pole (SP), double-pole (DP), single-pole neutral (SPN), triple
pole (TP), triple-pole neutral (TPN), four pole (FP). It shall be noted that wherever ‘N’ has
appeared, that pole is not meant to give any protection against overload or short circuit. It
provides isolation which operates simultaneously being linked mechanically with the pole of
line conductor. Double pole in place of SPN or Four pole in place of TPN are used when there
are chances of large current flowing in neutral due harmonics or unbalanced load.

6.7.2.2 Tripping characteristics

MCBs are available with different instantaneous tripping as shown in Table 13 characteristics
to suit a type of load having inrush of current / surge and avoid nuisance tripping.

Table 13 Ranges of Instantaneous Tripping

(Clause 6.7.2.2)
 Sl No. Type Range
(1) (2) (3)
(i) B Above 3 In up to and including 5 In
(ii) C Above 5 In up to and including 10 In
(iii) D Above 10 In up to and including 20
In a
a
For special cases value up to 50 In may also be used

Generally, for domestic dwellings / resistive type loads ‘B’ type MCBs are suited, but for
appliances like A.C., water pump motor, ‘C’ type MCB shall be provided. For inductive loads,
commercial /industrial places ‘C’ type MCB may be used. Devices with very high inductive
load, SMPS power supply units, UPS, etc., ’D’ type MCB will be suited.

Table 14 Time Operating Characteristics

Sl No. Type Curr Time (t) Result
(1) (2) ent (4) (5)
(In)
(3)
(i) B, C, D 1.13 In t < 1h (In < No trip
63A) when cold
t < 2h (In >
63A)
(ii) B, C, D 1.45 In t < 1h (In < Trip when
63A) not cold
t < 2h (In <
63A)
(iii) B, C, D 2.55 In 1 s < t < 60 s (In Trip when
< 32A) cold
1 s < t < 120 s
(In > 32A)
(iv) B 3 In No trip
C 5 In t < 0.1 s when cold
D 10 In
(v) B 5 In Trip when
C 10 In t > 0.1 s cold
D 20 In
The term cold means without previous loading

NOTE — Conventional non-tripping current of circuit breaker is 1.13 In and conventional tripping
current is 1.45 In Precise selection shall be done considering these points, overloading and in-surge of
current

6.7.2.3 Short-circuit current rating of MCB

MCBs are generally available at 3kA, 6kA, 10kA short-circuit current rating. If the details are
available to work out fault current rating, suitable MCB shall be selected. However, when the
details of suppliers’ distribution network are not available it is recommended that MCB of
10kA short-circuit current rating shall be selected.

NOTE — Electrical installation which is next to / very near to the distribution transformer of
higher capacity may have higher fault level. Under such cases it may be necessary to increase
size of cable. For such cases MCB though matching rated current may not match requirement of
fault level / terminal size. Under the circumstances in place of MCB use of MCCB will be
suitable.

6.7.3 Isolators – Use, Limitations

Isolators and MCBs look similar, but it shall be kept in mind it is just an isolating device,
required to be operated manually and do not provide any protection against overload and short-
circuits. Its use is not advisable especially when the back-up circuit protection is not nearby.
Under such circumstances there are chances to get the contacts welded leading to Fire.

6.7.4 SPDs
Surge Protective Devices (SPD) shall conform to IEC 61643-11.

6.7.4.1 Use
SPDs are used to provide protection from over-voltages. It has application in wiring
installations related to electric power supply systems, telephone networks / communication
systems and automatic control bus.

6.7.4.2 Lightning
Wherever transient over voltages are likely originating from climatic conditions like lightning,
SPDs will limit its amplitude to a non-hazardous value.

6.7.4.3 Connections
SPDs are connected after the main supply. Its connections are made in parallel.

6.7.4.4 Types
a) Type 1 — It protects electrical installations against direct lightning. It prevents current
originating from lightning stroke in to spreading from earth conductor to wiring
network.

b) Type 2 — It is installed at low voltage electrical DBs to prevent over voltage surge
spreading in downstream Wiring Installation.

c) Type 3 — These are used to install near sensitive equipment, which act as a secondary
protection to Type 2.
6.7.4.5 Selection of SPD
Selection of type 1/2/3 SPD or combination and location depends on various factors. Typically
consider following arrangement:

a) If there is no lightning conductor on building nor in the vicinity of 50m :

1) provide Type 2 SPD at incoming circuit breaker

b) If lightning conductor is provided on building or it is nearby within 50m:

1)provide Type 1 and Type 2 SPDs at incoming circuit breaker

c) distance between incoming circuit breaker and sensitive equipment is more than 30m
:
1) provide Type 3 SPD near sensitive equipment

6.7.5 RCDs- RCCBs

Residual current device (RCD) / residual current circuit breaker (RCCB) shall conform IS
12640 (Part 1) : 2016 / IEC 61008-1. These devices are intended to be operated by uninstructed
persons and designed not to require any maintenance.

6.7.5.1 Use
Earth leakages, electric shock are major cause of electrical accidents to human beings and life
stock, leading to serious effects and may be fatality. Under the context RCD is a most
important life saving device. This device is intended to protect person against indirect contact,
exposed conductive parts of the installation being connected to an appropriate earth electrode.
This device may also be used to provide protection against fire hazards due to persistent earth
fault current, without operation of over current protective device.
These devices are intended to be used for household and similar uses.

6.7.5.2 Statutory provision

Reg. 42 of CEA (Measures related to Safety and Electric Supply) Regulations1 give mandate
in respect of provision of protective device against the hazard of Earth Leakages depending on
load. Accordingly, it is obligatory to make provision of RCD2 for installations not exceeding3
250 V, with a limit of sensitivity4 and type of installation domestic and other.

1
Under the Amendments 2015, this provision was made applicable for 2kW and above (from previous
threshold of 5kW as per CEA Reg. 2010). Further amendments are on way in respect of sensitivity,
voltage level, load and nomenclature of the device.

2
The present nomenclature of the device under CEA Regulations Amendments 2015, is named Earth
Leakage Protective Device. Under the draft of further Amendments this nomenclature is proposed to be
replaced with Residual Current Device (RCD). Earlier a term ‘ELCB’ was used for the device which
was voltage operated type and could be distinguished with two earth terminals; one for connection of
earthing terminal of installation and other for connection to earth electrode, which carried some
drawbacks. The present version is current operated hence contextually closer to RCD.
 3
Under the draft of further amendments the applicability to voltage level of 250V is proposed to be
deleted as IS12640 Part 1:2016/IEC 61008:2012 is applicable also to voltage level 440V

4
Sensitivity mentioned under CEA Reg. 2015 is 30 mA for Domestic Installations and 100mA for other
installations, which, considering safe limit for human is proposed to be retained as 30mA and 300mA
to safeguard from fire hazard, under the proposed amendments.

6.7.5.3 Applicability /use

Under the background of 6.7.5.2 and the Notes below; in wiring installations, provision RCCB
having sensitivity 30mA shall be made for all household and similar installations for load*
1kW and above, having voltage levels up to 440V and current 125A. However, its use for all
household and similar Wiring Installations is recommended irrespective of the threshold
mentioned in CEA safety Regulations, from the point of view of safety.

* As per CEA Reg. 2015, existing threshold exempt limit for load is up to 2kW, which is proposed to be
revised with 1kW as per amendments underway. In the above clause exempt limit in respect of load is
recommended to be removed in total from the point of view of additional safety towards complete
elimination of shock hazard.

6.7.5.4 Locations / sectionalizing

Provision of RCCBs shall be made at suitable locations within wiring installations so that in
case of fault, supply of only that particular section / limited portion of wiring installation will
suffer outage and investigate to clear the fault will be restricted to limited portion making
procedure faster and easy.

NOTE — Individual phase Isolation type DBs shall be of help which will trip the supply of
particular phase only

RCDs having 300mA sensitivity intended for Fire protection may be placed at main
switchboards / incoming source of supply or at such a location to suit Fire prevention and
spread.

For electrical loads exceeding 125A sectionalizing shall be done considering maximum current
rating of 125A.

6.7.5.5 Nuisance tripping

Proper sectionalizing is necessary to avoid nuisance tripping. Where RCCBs are installed in
series, discrimination shall be such that nearest one shall trip first. To achieve such condition
S type RCCBs having facility of time delay setting may be used. Increasing sensitivity level
shall not be permitted

NOTE — Accumulated currents in protective conductor may cause RCD to operate under non fault
condition, for example, current developed by SMPS of computers, when too many computers are
connected on a circuit. Under the circumstances proper sectionalizing is necessary.
6.7.6 RCDs - RCBOs
Residual current breaker with overload (RCBO) shall conform to IS 12640 (Part 2) / IEC
61009-1. This device is intended to be operated by uninstructed persons and designed not to
require maintenance.

6.7.6.1 Use
It is a residual current device with integral protection against over-current. It is useful for
Wiring installations in household and similar places, to protect people against indirect contact,
exposed conductive parts of installation being connected to an earth electrode from leakages
of current 30mA and above, harmful to persons leading to shock and to protect against over
currents. This device performs both functions simultaneously and are suitable for voltages up
to 440V, rated current 125A and short circuit capacities up to 25kA.

6.7.6.2 Locations
This device can be located suitably in DBs within distribution network requiring both functions
at that particular location. The location at main supply source may be done only after due
consideration of possibility of going the premises in complete blackout.

6.7.6.3 Suitability
Before making its use following points shall be considered:

a) It is easier to use single device for two functions instead of two separate devices, as it
will save on space and cost;
b) Terminations and connections will be required to be done on only one device which
will save contact losses and reduce inspection points;
c) Device will trip the supply, may be due to either of the fault but will affect complete
portion which in some cases will be undesirable;
d) Where possibility and frequency of either of the fault is more than the other, in such
cases combined device will become nuisance; and
e) Tripping of device will not indicate on which fault it has tripped, earth leakage or
overload / short-circuit, which otherwise would have been helpful for fault finding.

6.7.7 Circuit Breakers

In the wiring Installations of industrial or similar purposes, where there is requirement of
making breaking a circuit with higher current rating and higher short-circuit current rating,
Circuit breakers shall be used. Circuit breakers shall conform to IEC 60947 series. The
breakers also have adjustable setting for overload and short-circuit.

6.7.7.1 Category A or B
According to IS/IEC 60947-2 category A breakers do not have deliberate time delay in the
operation of the instantaneous short-circuit magnetic tripping device. The breaking occurs
before reaching first peak of the current waveform. Category B breaker have ability to
withstand and hence allows one or more cycles to discriminate and maintain tripping sequence.
6.7.7.2 Suitability
Circuit breakers must be capable of safely interrupting the maximum potential of short circuit
current at their location in the circuit, hence shall have breaking capacity higher than potential
short circuit current. They shall be suitable for add-on auxiliary functions if required.

NOTE — Correct fault level calculations are important which help choose breaker with precise breaking
capacity. It shall be noted that cost of breaker increases with breaking capacity.

6.7.7.3 Use
In Wiring Installations breakers are used prior to downstream LV distribution comprising
MCBDBs; MCCBs and ACBs. It is recommended to check manufacturer’s specifications and
the design requirements prior to use of MCCBs and ACBs in Wiring Installation.

6.7.7.4 MCCBs
Moulded case circuit breakers (MCCB) generally come under category A. They are preferred
in downstream applications. Now-a-days technology has improved ratings, breaking capacities
of MCCBs though do not meet higher limits of ACB are improving and hence up to particular
range, design parameters match both with ACBs and MCCBs.

Cost wise MCCBs are cheaper than ACBs. Its compactness may advantageous but from the
point of view of termination of higher size of cables it may cause some inconvenience and
may require spreaders increasing contact resistance.

MCCBs are typically available up to 3200A, but its use at lower current rating is found to be
more effective. Frame size of MCCBs may not be identical and hence point shall be considered
while designing panel.

It shall be noted that feature of rated short time withstand current (category B) is generally not
available in MCCB.

Capacity to clear number of faults is less in respect of MCCB as compared to ACB.

Since there is no internal maintenance recurring cost is negligible.

6.7.7.5 ACBs
Air Circuit Breakers (ACB) come with wide range of rated current (In) typically starting from
630A and may be up to 6300A. ACBs come under category B and have high short-circuit
withstand capacity (ICW) and rated breaking capacity (ICU) hence are suited upstream / on
incoming side. Short-circuit withstand time of up to 1 s, helps providing discrimination in the
system.

ACBs can be fixed or draw-out type. The racking-out can be mechanical or electrical.
 Service life of ACBs is higher compared to MCCBs but ACBs need maintenance which
involve cost.

6.7.7.6 Selection
Selection of breaker shall be done considering the features in above clauses. Rating shall suit
ambient temperature, maximum current carrying capacity of cable. It will be preferable to have
variable settings to suit load pattern and any changes. Other auxiliary protections shall be
provided as per requirement of system and equipment to be connected.

6.7.8 Switchboards
A switchboard is an assembly consisting of switching devices along with associated control,
measuring, indicating, and protective equipment for distribution of electric power.

Based on area of application, switchboards are classified into different types and shall conform
to IS/IEC 61439 series for voltage upto 1000 V a.c. or 1500 V d.c.

Switchboards can be of wall-mounted or floor-mounted structures clad in metallic or non-

metallic enclosure. The one or more incoming/outgoing feeders are either of fixed or
withdrawable type.

These are designed to meet the required dielectric withstand properties and insulation co-
ordination based on location of the installation as per the over-voltage category and pollution
degree of the installation environment.

These are meant to be commissioned in both indoor and outdoor environments meeting the
required climatic conditions like ambient air temperature, relative humidity, altitude,
condensation and effects of UV radiation.

Switchboards shall have a minimum degree of protection of IP 2X with ‘forms of internal

separation’ ranging from ‘form 2a to form 4b’.

Typical switchboards come with rated current of the assembly (InA) from 63 A to 6300 A and
short-circuit withstand strength between 10 kA and 100 kA.

7 MATERIAL

7.1 All material used in wiring installation shall conform relevant standards.

7.2 Selected material shall have property to sustain under respective environmental, working
conditions, effects of external influences and be safe and functional throughout its desired
service life.
7.3 Adequate precautions related to transportation, handling and storage shall be taken. In case
if any damage occurs, such material shall not be used before confirming its technical
parameters.

7.4 It is advised that in project works, sample/s from the material brought on site may be got
tested from the accredited test laboratory and record be maintained.

7.5 It is recommended that the basic material and its accessories / different components
forming a unit of wiring system shall be of same manufacturer, Also there shall not be use of
multiple brands of same manufacturer for any material component which is to be used on the
site. For example:

a) in conduit system, conduits and its accessories like junction boxes, elbows, tees etc;
b) in PVC trunking system, trunking and its accessories;
c) in cable ladder and trey system all sections, supports, accessories;
d) for switchboards, switches, sockets, fan regulators, dimmers, blanking plates, boxes,
and cover-plates; and
e) for distribution boxes; MCBs, isolators, RCDs, SPDs, blanking plates etc. and the
boxes where they fit in.

8 WIRING ACCESSORIES

All accessories unless and otherwise mentioned shall be rated for 250V, 6A. All accessories
shall be designed and constructed so as to conform to relevant standards and suitable1 under
particular environment / location to sustain external influences. The material used may be
plastic2, metal or combination which suits the characteristics of application.

1
Under hazardous conditions material shall conform respective norms to sustain under possible hazard,
for example, fire prone sites, locations exposed to flammable / explosive dust, accessories along with their
enclosures shall be flame proof, and shall have ingress protection

2
Plastic is a broad term and under family of ‘Plastics’ categorization is made depending on specific
properties required, for example, thermoplastics, phenolic moulded resins, thermosetting resins etc., in
respect with the particular function.

In wiring installations these accessories shall be so installed to suit the requirements of user*,
function with reliability without causing any danger to persons or surroundings.

*See 11 Electrical Architecture of Wiring Installations.

Various accessories used generally are:

a) lamp holders;
b) Ceiling roses;
 c) Connectors;
d) switches – 6A / 16A;
e) plug sockets – 6A / 16A or combination;
f) Plug tops – 6A / 16A;and
g) Boards /boxes / plates.

8.1 Lamp Holders

Lamp holder is a means of supplying current to a lamp from fixed wiring and provides
mechanical support to the lamp. Lamp holders shall conform to IS 1258.

8.1.1 Types
Lamp holders basically come with two types Bayonet type / Bayonet Connector (BC) IS 1258
/ IEC 61184 and Edison Screw (ES) IEC 60061-2.

FIG. 23 BC TYPE PENDENT, ANGLE, BATTEN & METAL LAMP HOLDER WITH
EARTH TERMINAL

These holders are identified by BXX for Bayonet type and EXX for Edison type. The ‘XX’ is
for the diameter in mm of the lamp cap, for example, B22 or E27 (in case of Edison type,
across the peaks of the thread on the male)

8.1.2 Suitability / Use

Standard rated current for B15 and B22 holders shall be taken as minimum 2A. In case of
requirement of higher ratings manufacturer’s specification shall be checked. Lamp holders
shall not be used for external electrical installation without confirming IP class.

FIG. 24 EDISON SCREW TYPE LAMP

HOLDERS
 8.1.3 Selection
Before installation are shall be taken to select lamp holder suitable to lamp cap. The style
Batten / Angle / Pendent type or other types given under Standard may be selected depending
on the location or required position of lamp. B15 lamp holders shall not be used in circuits with
ignitors and B22 shall be used subject to approval by the manufacturer. Exterior material of
Lamp Holder may be Plastic, Ceramic or Metal. Usually in fixed wiring installations plastic
material is used. For plastic lamp holders a protective shield similar to skirt shall be provided
to avoid accidental contact with lamp cap. Metal lamp holders are used in decorative lamp
fixtures. For such holders, earth terminal or other means of earthing shall be in effective
electrical contact with all exposed non-current carrying metal parts. Lamp holders with
integrated switch shall conform to requirements specified in the Standard

8.2 Ceiling Roses

FIG. 25 CEILING ROSES

8.2.1 Use
Ceiling Rose is a means of supplying current from fixed wiring to a pendent lamp holder or
other movable accessory like bell push or a lighting fixture, ceiling fan, bell / buzzer or similar
apparatus with a flexible wire cord. It shall conform to IS 371.

8.2.2 Earth terminal

All ceiling roses shall be provided with earth terminal and it shall be visibly distinguishable.

8.2.3 Location
Location of ceiling rose shall be close to the intended location of appliance to avoid loose
hanging wires.

8.2.4 Connections
Ceiling roses are intended for use with cables complying IS 694. In three-plate ceiling rose,
third plate may be used for looping the wire. Ceiling-roses may be intended to sustain
mechanical load by means of flexible cord complying IS 694. But before using the ceiling-rose
for such application, manufacturer’s specifications regarding safe working mechanical loads
and method of fixing to mounting surfaces shall be checked (see 9.1.2.6).

8.3 Switches
Switch is a wiring accessory which is used for making or breaking the current supply to the
outlet / utility point shall comply IS 3854

8.3.1 Types
Switches generally used in wiring installations can be broadly classified depending on:
a) Poles — Single pole / two pole;
b) Ways — One way / two way;
c) Activation — Tumbler / rocker / push button / totary / cord-operated;
d) Application — Surface type / flush type / modular;
e) Method of Installation — Cover removable by disturbing conductors / without
disturbing conductors;
f) Operation — Manual / remote; and
g) With / without indicator.

8.3.2 Suitability, Installation and Use

Switches are generally available for current rating 6A / 10A / 16A / 32A, single-pole / two-
pole to suit the requirement as per the design and load.

8.3.3 Current Rating

Current rating of switch shall suit load, its type and size of conductor. For point wiring of light,
fan circuits 6A, for plug points on board or independent plug point switch may be of capacity
6A / 10A. For power points minimum 16A switch shall be used.

1 2 3
1. 6A Piano
2. 6A
Modular
3. 16A
indicator
4 5 4. Tumbler
5. Toggle
FIG. 26 DIFFERENT TYPES OF
SWITCHES

8.3.4 Precaution - Phase, Neutral Isolation

Installation of switches shall always be on phase / line conductor. Switch shall not disconnect
neutral wire unless it is a two pole switch where neutral gets disconnected simultaneously with
phase conductor of the same circuit and that neutral is not looped anywhere further to other
circuit / point.
8.3.5 Precaution – Safety
Depending on type of switch its mounting on plate / board may be press fit type or may be
done with screws and nuts. After the switches are mounted and wired, no live parts shall remain
open and accessible to the user.

8.3.6 Two Way Points

Points requiring control from two locations, where two way switches are used, it shall be
observed that neutral wire is not fed from either side and the phase wire used from both ends
is of the same circuit.

8.3.7 Switches of Power Points

For power points 16A and above, switches with indicator are recommended as one can notice
that the supply is ON or OFF and sends alert signal.

8.3.8 Marking on Switches

Switches with marking help to identify switch for light or fan or bell especially where there are
number of switches are more and switches are required to be operated with trial and error.

8.4 Plug and Socket Outlets

Plug and sockets with without earth* contact shall conform to IS 1293 : 2005, which is intended
for household and similar purposes and applicable to 250V and rated current up to 16A.

* In view of greater prevalence of the use of two pin plugs and socket out lets in every household it has
become necessary to standardize such plugs. However, the user must ensure proper earthing practices in
their installation in line with IS 732 and IS 3043. Two pin plugs are intended to be used only for class II
appliances.

8.4.1 Plug

FIG. 27THREE-PIN PLUG TYPE D AND

TWO-PIN PLUG TYPE C
It is an accessory having pins designed to engage with the contacts of socket outlet, also
incorporating means for the electrical connection and mechanical retention of flexible cables.

8.4.2 Plug Types

Plugs are classified according to provision of earthing, as with earth pin for appliances of Class
I / without earth pin, for appliances of Class II; according to method of connecting cable, re-
wirable, non-re-wirable (moulded); according to type of terminals, screw type, screw-less;
current rating; 2.5A – 2 pin non-rewirable, 6A – 2 pin re-wireable, 6 / 10 / 16A – 3 pin

NOTE — In case of re-wirable plugs there shall be provision of grommet which helps prevent cutting /
damaging insulation of wire at the point where it comes out of plug.

8.4.3 Socket Outlet

FIG. 28 6A 3 PIN, 6/16 A 6PIN

SOCKETS

It is an accessory having socket contacts designed to engage with the pins of a plug and having
terminals for the connection of cable/s

8.4.4 Types
Plug sockets are classified as with earth / without earth terminal, rating - 6A / 10A / 16A or
combined 6/16A, shuttered / non shuttered, mounting - flush / surface; fixing - screwed / press-
fit / modular etc.

NOTES:
1 It shall not be possible to engage a plug for appliance of Class I with socket outlets exclusively designed
to accept plugs for Class II appliances, rating; for Class I distance between terminals is 19.1 mm and for
Class II it is 16.5 mm
2 International practices provide for 10A socket outlets for all appliances up to and including 10A, whereas
in India the socket of 6A is still in use. Preference to 10A socket shall therefore be given if available.
3 Generally shuttered plug sockets shall be used. In case of un-shuttered sockets its location shall not be
within the reach of children. Plug boards at skirting level shall always be shuttered type.

8.4.5 Wiring Connection to Plug Socket

Supply to plug socket shall be given through a switch of current rating not less than that of
socket, which shall be placed at adjacent position in the switch board. Plug socket provided on
lighting circuit switch board shall not be over 6A. For power circuits 16A or combined 6/16A
plug sockets shall be used.

8.4.6 Control of Supply to Multiple Sockets

Where multiple 6A sockets are to be controlled with single switch, they shall be located on
single board and a permanent marking shall be done on such sockets to identify such situations.
Considering total possible load rating of switch shall be selected. Circuit to such type of board
shall be independent and not looped from any other lighting switch board.

NOTE — As far as possible such situation shall be avoided, but where demand is there for number of
equipment forming part of single system and such equipment need to be operated simultaneously and
equipment to be connected have individual built in switch on it, such method of may be adopted, for
example, computer CPU, monitor, add-on speakers, printer

8.5 Enclosures for Accessories for Household and Similar Purposes

The enclosure which is integral part of electrical accessory and provides protection to it in the
form of boxes including covers, cover-plates, boxes intended for mounting or suspension of
luminaries shall conform to IS 14772.

8.5.1 Types
Enclosures can be classified according to material – metallic / insulating; method of installation
– flush / surface; location of installation – walls / ceiling / flooring; base of installation; in / on
– masonry wall / concrete / insulated wall / hollow wall; protection class, etc.

8.5.2 Suitability
Enclosure shall be suitable to use under the particular situation to provide mechanical
protection, ingress protection, fire protection, shock protection, protection against corrosion /
rusting as per requirement. Boxes shall be of suitable size to accommodate accessories leaving
required clearance between terminals of accessories and rear plate of box, wire leads. There
shall be provision for earth terminal on the metal box.

8.5.3 Selection
Selection of enclosure shall be done considering 8.5.1 and 8.5.2 and on basis of number of
accessories / modules.

8.5.4 Installation
All boxes shall be rigidly fixed. No gap shall be left between enclosure and the surface on
which it is fixed. Electrical continuity wherever expected, in case of metal conduits and boxes
shall be in respective accordance and confirmed after installation.

9 FIXTURES / FANS / APPLIANCES

This section gives guidelines from the point of view of design, purpose, utility and safety within
the premises in respect of lighting fixtures for providing sufficient illumination, Fans for
providing adequate ventilation for human comfort and hygiene and other fixed appliance
forming a part of Wiring Installation being integrated with the system.

9.1 Lighting Fixtures / Luminaries

Functionally to provide adequate illumination, lighting fixtures are used. Lighting fixtures and
its integrated parts shall conform to IS 10322 series.

9.1.1 Selection
Lighting fixture shall basically be selected from the point of view of required functionality.
Number and wattage of fitting shall be selected depending on required illumination level given
in Table 4 of Section 1 Part 8 of NBC 2016), and efficacy (Lumen / Watt) of the lighting
fixture. While selecting lighting fixture energy conservation aspect shall be taken into
consideration.

NOTE — For further selection of Luminaries Section 1 from Part 4 of SP 72 National Lighting Code may
also be referred.

9.1.2 Installation
The fixing means shall be capable of supporting a mass of not less than 5 kg. Where the mass
of the luminaire is greater than 5 kg, the installer shall ensure that the fixing means is capable
of supporting the mass of the luminaire.

9.1.2.1 Location
Installation of fitting shall as far as possible be near to the outlet point. So that there shall not
be a hanging cord connecting point and Luminaire. If unavoidable shall be clipped properly so
that it will not hinder light.

9.1.2.2 Connections
Connection with lighting fixture shall be done with two core or three core cord, when the
fixture has been provided with earth terminal (see 6.3.3). Proper tightening of wire leads shall
be done at terminals. No live part shall remain exposed and accessible.

NOTE — Cords which are going to be concealed in hollow portions, for example, false ceiling shall be
provided additional protection of flexible conduits to protect it from external influences like rodents.

9.1.2.3 Grouping
Depending on design parameters more than one lighting fixtures may be grouped on one
controlling switch.

9.1.2.4 Precaution against possible heat dissipation

Heat dissipation factor of Luminaire and its integral part shall be taken into consideration while
positioning Luminaire, especially in false ceiling, on wooden furniture or alike base.

9.1.2.5 Fittings in false ceiling

In case of flush type fitting cutout to be made in the false ceiling or similar base shall be done
with proper template of precise size. There shall be proper coordination in positioning with the
sweep of fan so that no shadows occur.
 NOTE — It very important to check the compatibility of the base on which fitting is to be installed, to
bear the weight of fitting. Generally false ceilings are suitable for light weight fittings. In case of heavy /
bigger size fittings, arrangement shall be made to support the fitting with by wire rope or similar material
anchored in the structural part of ceiling above false ceiling.

9.1.2.6 Suspended type Luminaire shall be fixed with proper accessories, for example, ball
suspension plates, down rods / chain / bracket etc; having sufficient strength to bear the weight
of Luminaire. If fitting is to be suspended on wire cord Table 16 shall be used to check
allowable weight.

Table 16 Maximum Permissible Weight on Cord

(Clause 9.1.2.6)

Sl No. Nominal Cross- Maximum

(1) sectional Permissible
Area of Twin Cord Weight
mm2 kg
(2) (3)

(i) 0.5 2.0

(ii) 0.75 3.0
(iii) 1.0 5.0
(iv) 1.5 5.3
(v) 2.5 8.8
(vi) 4.0 14.0

9.2 Fans

9.2.1 Ceiling Fans

Functionally to provide adequate ventilation, use of ceiling fans is made in wiring installation.
Ceiling fans shall conform to IS 374.

9.2.1.1 Selection
Selection of the fans shall be done on the basis of technical parameters such as:

a) Sweep in mm (900/1 050/1 200/1400/1 500);

b) Air delivery, in m3/min;
c) Maximum input in W; and
d) Service value in m3/min/W.

For proper ventilation there shall be provision of adequate number of fans depending upon area
with appropriate location. For reference see Table I.1 under Annex I

NOTE — In respect with the ‘Star Rating’ decided by Bureau of Energy Efficiency (BEE), updated specific
norms shall be referred from the web site of BEE https://www.beeindia.gov.in/

Star rating index as per amendment 2 in 08/08/2019 is as given in Table 17.

 Table 17 Star Rating Index as per BEE Guidelines
(Clause 9.2.1.1)
Sl No. Star Rating Index Calculation for Ceiling
(1) Fans
Star Rating Service Value for
(1) Ceiling Fans
(2)
(i) 1 Star > 3.1 to < 3.6
(ii) 2 Star ≥ 3.6 to < 4.1
(iii) 3 Star ≥ 4.1 to < 4.6
(iv) 4 Star ≥ 4.6 to < 5.1
(v) 5 Star ≥ 5.1

9.2.1.2 Installation
a) Suspension System — The suspension of ceiling fan shall withstand tensile load
of 1 000 kg and torsion load of 500 kg both without breakage.

Some of the arrangements for suspension of fan to ceiling are shown below. Concealed
type fan box is shown in Fig. 29. It shall be fixed in RCC slab by entangling the rod in
the steel and embedding it in RCC slab during casting. Alternatively, where concealed
type box is not needed, a bar without box as shown below shall be fixed. In case
suspension arrangement is to be done post casting of slab with the consent of civil
engineer S type hook may be entangled in the bar of steel by making a small opening in
slab and refinishing with cement mortar.

Alternatively, this work may be done with the U clamp or Q bolt as shown in Fig. 30.
This clamp shall be fixed with anchoring bolt/s.

In Fig. 31 Rubber shackle with clamp and nut bolts is shown for suspension of fan down
rod. Below a fan clamp rectangular in shape is shown which fits on truss. Its shape may
be changed in to circular or any other as per the cross section of truss member.

FIG. 29 FAN HOOK BOX FIG. 30 TYPE OF FIG. 31 SHACKLE AND

CONCEALED TYPE HOOKS TO BE BOLT TYPE
AND BAR TO BE GROUTED WITH ARRANGEMENT FOR
 FASTENED / ANCHOR BOLTS IN FAN SUSPENSION, FAN
ENTANGLED WITH RCC SLAB CLAMP
STEEL IN RCC

Rod shall be of 10mm diameter and M.S. flat of clamp shall not be less than 30 x 5 mm

It shall be noted that electrical continuity is broken with rubber shackle from fan to the
metallic part of ceiling, Rubber shackle also helps dampen torsion forces.

Down Rod — Down rod or suspension rod of ceiling fan comes with standard length
usually of 225 mm as per the manufacturers design and with necessary holes for nut
bolts, wire to pass through and cut for clamping fan shaft with proper grip (see Fig. 32).
It shall have appropriate mechanical strength correlating those mentioned under a). In
case of ceilings having height more than 3 m, need of down rod having extra length may
be felt. Under the circumstances check with the manufacturer’s specifications for
recommended maximum height of blades from floor level for optimum output / useful
air delivery.
Down rods with extra lengths shall be continuous without joint and carry same
mechanical properties.

NOTE — If joints are unavoidable then such joints shall be screwed to special couplers of 50 mm
minimum length and both ends of the pipes shall touch together within the couplers and shall in
addition be secured by means of split pins; alternatively, the two pipes may be welded.

FIG. 32 DOWN ROD WITH ARRANGEMENT FOR

WIRES AND SUSPENSION

Alternatively, screwed type suspension may be allowed subject to condition that the threads
tend to tighten when the fan is in motion

1) Clearances — Recommended clearances of fan blades from finished level of flooring

and ceiling shall not be less than 2 400 mm and 300 mm respectively.

2) Connections — Connection shall be made with twin core copper wire of size not less
than 1.5 mm2 qualifying under class II appliances or three core 1.5 mm2 qualifying under
class I appliances. Earth wire of three core cord shall be terminated on the earth terminal
of fan provided by the manufacturer.
 Wiring connections on switch board shall be from switch to the fan speed Regulator in
series providing further supply to fan

3) Canopies — Canopies on top and bottom of suspension rods shall be so positioned that
it will conceal suspension and connections to fan motor. However, care shall be taken to
maintain sufficient gap between motor body and bottom rim of canopy so that it will not
touch while rotating

9.2.2 Exhaust Fans

Where air changes are required to replace existing air with the fresh air as a part to maintain
air quality, provision of exhaust Fans is made. Exhaust fans shall conform to IS 2312. Exhaust
fan are also available with reversible flow (fresh air intake) facility which can be availed with
a toggle switch.

9.2.2.1 Selection
Selection of exhaust fans can be done on the basis of:

a) size which is blade sweep, in mm;

b) air changes, in CFM or m3/min;
c) service value, m3/min/W; and
d) voltage level 240V / 415V.

Recommended values of air changes depending on application are given under 5.2.2.1 of
Section 1 Part 8 of NBC 2016. Some of the common applications are as in the Table 17.

Table 17 Recommended Air-Changes

(Clause 9.2.2.1)
Sl No. Application Air Changes /
(1) (2) Hour*
(3)
(i) Bathrooms 6-10
(ii) Bed rooms 2-4
(iii) Canteens 8-12
(iv) Garages 6-8
(v) Lavatories 6-15
(vi) Offices 6-10
(vii) Restaurants 8-12
(viii) Shower baths 15-20
(ix) Stores and 3-6
warehouses
 (x) Toilets 6-10
* Volume of air to be replaced contained in a room / envelope in an hour

Example:

To find required cfm (cubic feet per minute – imperial measure) or m3/min (System of
International units, SI) for a bathroom:

Bath room size > 4’ x 7’ x 10’ or 1.2 m x 2.1 m x 3m

Volume = 280 cu. ft or 7.56 m3

Number of air changes considered = 8

Volume of air is to be replaced in an hour
= 280 x 8 or 7.56 x 8
= 2440 cu.ft or 60.48 m3

Required cfm or m3/min capacity of fan

= 2440 / 60 or 60.48 / 60
= 40.67 cfm or 1.008 m3/min

Accordingly, size of fan having capacity not less than calculated above shall be selected.
Details in respect with cfm if not available on name plate, may be called from the manufacturer.

9.2.2.2 Installation
a) Related Civil Work
Installation of exhaust fan needs coordination with civil work agencies. A recess /
opening is necessary suiting the required size of exhaust fan with mounting arrangement.
This opening may be on wall / window frame. There shall be protection from ingress of
water. There shall be arrangement for entry of fresh air so that negative pressure doesn’t
get developed within the area (see 4.4.10).

b) Mounting
Mounting shall be done with suitable measures to reduce vibrations. Suitably designed
guard shall be fixed to prevent entry of flora / fauna.

c) Connections
Connections from ceiling rose shall be made with twin core copper wire of size not less
than 1.5 mm2 for fan qualifying under class II appliances or three core 1.5 mm2
qualifying under class I appliances. Earth wire of three core cord shall be terminated on
the earth terminal of fan provided by the manufacturer.

9.3 Other Fixed Appliances

In respect of other fixed appliances cord connecting power outlet shall be insulated and
sheathed. Its core shall contain colour coded earth wire. Cord shall be so arranged that it shall
not get entangled into any other object and damage. It shall remain away from heat. For water
heater, washing machine, dishwasher which gets connected with the water pipes may be
provided with independent RCD.
10 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
Before making beneficial use of the installation it is recommended that following steps shall
be followed.

10.1 Visual Check

Before switching on supply following check points shall be observed.

10.1.1 Finishing Works- Civil

Finishing in respect civil works carried out for electrical installation work, e.g. openings in
wall, false ceiling, core cutting, concealing, under floor raceways have been finished in
approved manner. Ducts, shafts are provided with appropriate doors, at flooring level sealing
is done with fire resistant material.

10.1.2 Hindrance to Other Services

Electrical Installation will not cause inconvenience, hindrance to any other utility service
installed in the vicinity for its operation and maintenance activities and vice versa.

10.1.3 Electrical Cables, Wires

Installation of cables, wires is as per design and after completion it is suitable to survive under
effects of external influences. Class / grade, sizes are correct. Bunching within enclosure for
example, conduits, trunking satisfy space/fill factor. Colour coding, ferruling to identify circuit
number is done in approved manner. There is no overcrowding within any switch board, DB,
panel and there are no visible damages to insulation.

10.1.4 Terminations
Terminations are firm, no loose contacts, all strands properly inserted, lugs, where necessary,
are of right material and crimped properly.

10.1.5 Bus Ways, Race Ways

Adequate care has been taken from the point of view of external influences. Supporting, joints,
crossings fixing of accessories, is firm and done satisfactorily. See also 10.1.2

10.1.6 Earth / Protective Conductor

Sizes, material, connections with earth terminals are in proper manner so as to maintain
continuity.

10.1.7 Switch-boards
Position, location, accessibility is appropriate from the point of view of operation, safety and
maintenance. In case of modular accessories vacant modules are plugged with blanking plates.
Plug sockets at lower level are shuttered.

10.1.8 DBs, Switchgears, Panels

Locations, positions, accessibility satisfy required conditions from point of view of operation,
safety clearances, maintenance. Ratings, class / category, types, setting facilities of MCBs,
RCDs, SPDs, MCCBs, other switchgears, breakers, fuses are as per design. Identification
marking is done. SLD in respect of major panel boards are affixed. ‘Danger’ sign board
affixed. Boundaries in front of panels marked.

10.1.9 Fans, Luminaries

Suspension of Fans with nut-bolt, split-pin is appropriately done. Clearance from ceiling and
flooring is satisfactory.

10.1.10 Appliances / Equipment

Location, position is safe. Cords are shielded, and in place. Earth connections are done
properly.

10.1.11 Fire Prevention

Requirements as per fire prevention Regulations if any are complied, for example, sealing
openings through floors, walls, Fire rated doors, Fireman’s switch at supply source (for high-
rise buildings), etc.

10.1.12 Maintenance Facility, Tools, Safety

In major installations, especially non-residential and where applicable, provision of necessary
tools and tackles, safety devices, instruction charts is made. Where access is restricted to
designated person, necessary arrangement is done.

10.2 Testing
a) Inspection and testing of the installation shall be carried out as per clause 6 of IS732.
Documents for inspection and testing included in IS732 (annex QQ, RR and SS) shall
be followed. More information are included in section 18 (or 17) of NEC

11 MAINTENANCE, PERIODIC INSPECTION

Periodic inspection shall confirm IS732 clause 6.3

12 ELECTRICAL ARCHITECTURE OF WIRING INSTALLATIONS

This part will give a different angle to think about Wiring Installation from the point of view
of ergonomics, utility, ease and comfort of operation, aesthetics, and ambience which
influence layouts, selection of material without parting safety aspect.
Following points are under consideration:

Concealed / surface / under floor / hybrid;

Location of switch boards DBs, room wise, utility points;
Painting issues;
Lighting illumination and ambiance;
Position of lighting fixtures for example, bedroom;
Lighting fixtures can be classified on the basis of technical parameters like correlated colour
temperature (CCT), colour rendering index (CRI), efficacy, glair index;
AC point;
Study table;
Kitchen’
Bed;
Balcony;
Glare;
Reading lights
Two way points
CRI
CCT
Circuits
Cover plates
Placement of switches on board
LV utilities
Telephone wiring EPABX
Cable tv
LAN, Servers, switch, Racks
CCTV
Looping/ extended points
Night lamp / path light
Heat dissipation
Sound boxes / speakers
Computer and accessories
Lights in showcases
Spot lights
Study table
Mosquito repellants
Bell
Arrangements for festive lightings
Task lighting
Flush / surface lights
glare
 Emergency load

ANNEX A
(Clause 5.3)

METHODS OF INSTALLATIONS

Table A-1 Methods of Installation in Relation to Conductors and Cables

(Ref. Annex R IS 732:2016)

Sl No. Method of Installation

(1) Cable
trunking
Systems
Cable
(includin Cable
Conductors Condui Ladder,
Witho Clippe g Ductin On In- Supp
and Cables t Cable
ut d Skirting g sulator ort
(2) System Tray,
Fixings Direct Trunkin System s Wire
s Cable
(3) (4) g, Flush s (9) (10)
(5) Brackets
Floor (7)
Trunkin (8)
g)
(6)
1. Bare conductors – – – – – – + –
2. Insulated – – + + a
+ – + –
conductorsb
3. Sheathed Mult + + + + + + 0 +
cables i-
(including core
armoured
4. Sing 0 + + + + + 0 +
and
le-
mineral
core
insulated)
+ Permitted.
– Not permitted.
0 Not applicable, or not normally used in practice.
a
Insulated conductors are admitted if the cable trunking systems provide at least the degree of protection IP4X or
IPXXD and if the cover can only be removed by means of a tool or a deliberate action.
b
Insulated conductors which are used as protective conductors or protective bonding conductors may use any
appropriate method of installation and need not be laid in conduits, trunking or ducting systems.

Table A-2 – Erection of Wiring Systems

(Ref. Annex R IS 732)

Sl Method of Installation
No.
Cable
(1) trunking
Cable
Systems
Ladder,
Situations (including Cable
Without Clipped Conduit Cable On Support
Skirting Ducting
(2) Fixings Direct Systems Tray, Insulators Wire
Trunking, Systems
(3) (4) (5) Cable (9) (10)
Flush (7) Brackets
Floor
Trunking) (8)
(6)
1. Building Accessible 30, 31,
6, 7, 8, 9,
voids 40 33 41, 42 43, 44 32, 33, – 0
12
34
Not
40 0 41,42 0 43 0 0 0
accessible
2. Cable channel 30, 31,
56 56 54, 55 0 – –
32, 34
3. Buried in ground 72, 73 0 70, 71 – 70, 71 0 – –
4. Embedded in 1, 2, 59, 50, 51, 52,
57, 58 3 46, 45 0 – –
structure 60 53
5. Surface mounted 20, 21,
6, 7, 8, 9, 6, 7, 8, 30, 31,
– 22, 23, 4, 5 36 –
12 9 32, 34
33
6. Overhead/free in air 30, 31,
– 33 0 10, 11 10,11 36 35
32,34
7. Window frames 16 0 16 0 0 0 - -
8. Architrave 15 0 15 0 0 0 – –
9. Immersed 1 + + + – + 0 – –
– Not permitted.
0 Not applicable or not normally used in practice.
+ Follow manufacturer’s instructions.
NOTE The number in each box, e.g. , 40, 46, refers to the number of the method of installation in Table A.52.3.

Table A-3 – Examples of Methods of Installation Providing Instructions

for Obtaining Current-carrying Capacity
(Ref. Annex R IS 732:2016)

Reference Method of
Methods of Installation Installation to be Used to
Item
Description Obtain Current-carrying
No. (2)
(3) Capacity
(1) (see Annex S)
(4)

Insulated conductors or single-

1 core cables in conduit in a A1
thermally insulated walla,c
>Room

Multi-core cables in conduit

2 in a thermally insulated wall A2
a,c

>Room

Multi-core cable direct in a

3 A1
thermally insulated wall a,c

Insulated conductors or single-

core cables in conduit on a
4 wooden or masonry wall or B1
spaced less than
0.3x conduit diameter from itc
Multi-core cable in conduit on
a wooden or masonry wall or
5 B2
spaced less than 0.3 x conduit
diameter from it c
Insulated conductors or single-
core cables in cable trunking
6 (includes multi-compartment
trunking) on a wooden or B1
7 6 7 masonry wall
– run horizontallyb
– run verticallyb, c
 Multi-core cable in cable
trunking (includes multi-
8
compartment trunking) on a Under considerationd
wooden or masonry wall Method B2 may be used
9
8 9 – run horizontallyb
– run verticallyb, c
NOTE:1) The illustrations are not intended to depict actual product or installation practices
but are indicative of the method described.
2) All footnotes can be found on the last page of Table A.52.3.

Table A-3 (continued)

Reference Method of
Installation to be
Item Methods of Installation Used to Obtain
Description
No. (2) Current-carrying
(3) Capacity
(1)
(see Annex S)
(4)

Insulated conductors or single-

10 core cable in suspended cable B1
trunkingb

11 10 11 Multi-core cable in suspended

B2
cable trunkingb

Insulated conductors or single-

12 A1
core cable run in mouldingsc, e

Insulated conductors in conduit

15 or single-core or multi-core cable A1
in architravec, f

Insulated conductors in conduit

16 or single-core or multi-core cable A1
in window framesc, f
20 Single-core or multi-core cables: C
 – fixed on, or spaced less than
0.3x cable diameter from a
wooden or masonry wallc
Single-core or multi-core cables:
C, with item 3 of
21 – fixed directly under a Table B.52.17
wooden or masonry ceiling

Under consideration
Single-core or multi-core cables:
22 Method E may be
– spaced from a ceiling
used

Fixed installation of suspended C, with item 3 of

23
current- using equipment Table B.52.17

Table A-3 (continued)

Reference Method of
Methods of Installation Installation to be Used
Item
Description to Obtain Current-
No. (2)
(3) carrying Capacity
(1) (see Annex S)
(4)
Single-core or multi-core
30 cables: C with item 2
On unperforated tray run of Table B.52.17
horizontally or verticallyc, h

31 Single-core or multi-core E or F
cables:
On perforated tray run
horizontally or verticallyc, h

NOTE: Refer to B.6. Column

2 for description.
32 E or F
Single-core or multi-core
cables:
On brackets or on a wire
mesh tray run horizontally or
verticallyc, h

Single-core or multi-core E or F
33 cables: or method Gg
On wall Spaced more than 0.3
times
cable diameter from a wall

34 Single-core or multi-core E or F
cables:
On ladder c

35 Single-core or multi-core cable E or F

suspended from or
incorporating
a support wire or harness

36 Bare or insulated conductors G

on insulators

Table A-3 (continued)

Reference Method of
Methods of Installation to be
Item Installation Used to Obtain
Description
No. Current-carrying
(2) (3) Capacity
(1)
(see Annex S)
(4)
1.5 De≤V<De
40 Single-core or multi-core cable in a B2
building voidc, h, i 5 De≤V<20 De
B1
 1.5 De≤V<20 De
41 Insulated conductor in conduit in a B2
building voidc, i, j, k V 20 De
B1

Single-core or multi-core cable in Under consideration

42 conduit in a building voidc, k The following may be
used:
1.5 De V<20 De
B2
V 20 De
B1
1.5 De≤V<20 De
Insulated conductors in cable ducting B2
43 in a building voidc, i, j, k V 20 De
B1
Under consideration
Single-core or multi-core cable in The following may be
44 cable ducting in a building voidc, k used:
1.5 De≤V<20 De
B2
V 20 De
B1
1,5 De≤V<5 De
Insulated conductors in cable ducting B2
45 in masonry having a thermal 5 De≤V<50 De
resistivity not greater than 2 K∙m/Wc, B1
h, i

Under consideration
Single-core or multi-core cable in The following may be
cable ducting in masonry having a used
46 thermal resistivity not greater than 1,5 De≤V<20 De
2 K∙m/Wc B2
V 20 De
B1
1,5 De V< 5 De
Single-core or multi-core cable: B2
47 – in a ceiling void 5 De≤V<50 De
– in a raised floorh, i B1
 Table A-3 (continued)

Reference Method of
Methods of Installation Installation to be Used
Item
Description to Obtain Current-
No. (2)
(3) carrying Capacity
(1) (see Annex S)
(4)
Insulated conductors or single- B1
50 core
cable in flush cable trunking in
the floor

Multi-core cable in flush cable B2

51 trunking
in the floor
Insulated conductors or single-
52 core cables in flush cable B1
trunkingc

Multi-core cable in flush

53 B2
52 53 trunkingc

Insulated conductors or single- 1,5 De≤V <20 De

core cables in conduit in an B2
54 unventilated cable channel run V  20 De
horizontally or verticallyc, i, l, n
B1
Insulated conductors in conduit
in
55 an open or ventilated cable B1
channel
in the floorm, n

Sheathed single-core or multi-

core cable in an open or
56 B1
ventilated cable channel run
flush horizontally or verticallyn
 Single-core or multi-core cable
direct in masonry having a
thermal resistivity not greater
57 than 2 K∙m/W C
Without added mechanical
protectiono, p

Table A-3 (continued)

Reference Method of
Methods of Installation Installation to be Used
Item
Description to Obtain Current-
No. (2)
(3) carrying Capacity
(1) (see Annex S)
(4)

Single-core or multi-core cable

direct in masonry having a thermal
58 resistivity not greater than 2 K∙m/W C
With added mechanical protectiono, p

Insulated conductors or single-core

59 B1
cables in conduit in masonryp

Multi-core cables in conduit in

60 B2
masonryp

Multi-core cable in conduit or in

70 D1
cable ducting in the ground
 Single-core cable in conduit or in
71 D1
cable ducting in the ground

Sheathed single-core or multi-core

72 cables direct in the ground D2
– without added mechanical
protectionq

Table A-3 (continued)

Reference Method of
Installation to be
Item Methods of Installation Used to Obtain
Description
No. (2) Current-carrying
(3) Capacity
(1)
(see Annex S)
(4)

Sheathed single-core or multi-

73 core cables direct in the D2
ground
– with added mechanical
protection q

a The inner skin of the wall has a thermal conductance of not less than 10 W/m2∙K.
b Values given for installation methods B1 and B2 in Annex B are for a single circuit. Where
there is more than one circuit in the trunking the group reduction factor given in Table B.52-
17 is applicable, irrespective of the presence of an internal barrier or partition.
c Care shall be taken where the cable runs vertically and ventilation is restricted. The ambient
temperature at the top of the vertical section can be increased considerably. The matter is
under consideration.
d Values for reference method B2 may be used.
e The thermal resistivity of the enclosure is assumed to be poor because of the material of
construction and possible air spaces. Where the construction is thermally equivalent to
methods of installation 6 or 7, reference method B1 may be used.
f The thermal resistivity of the enclosure is assumed to be poor because of the material of
construction and possible air spaces. Where the construction is thermally equivalent to
methods of installation 6, 7, 8, or 9, reference methods B1 or B2 may be used.
g The factors in Table B-17 may also be used.
h De is the external diameter of a multi-core cable:
- 2.2 x the cable diameter when three single core cables are bound in trefoil, or
- 3 x the cable diameter when three single core cables are laid in flat formation.
i V is the smaller dimension or diameter of a masonry duct or void, or the vertical depth of a
rectangular duct, floor or ceiling void or channel. The depth of the channel is more important
than the width.
j De is the external diameter of conduit or vertical depth of cable ducting.
l De is the external diameter of the conduit.
m For multi-core cable installed in method 55, use current-carrying capacity for reference
method B2.
n It is recommended that these methods of installation are used only in areas where access is
restricted to authorized persons so that the reduction in current-carrying capacity and the fire
hazard due to the accumulation of debris can be prevented.
o For cables having conductors not greater than 16 mm2, the current-carrying capacity may be
higher.
p Thermal resistivity of masonry is not greater than 2 K∙m/W, the term “masonry” is taken to
include brickwork, concrete, plaster and the
like (other than thermally insulating materials).
q The inclusion of directly buried cables in this item is satisfactory when the soil thermal
resistivity is of the order of 2.5 K∙m/W. For lower soil resistivities, the current-carrying
capacity for directly buried cables is appreciably higher than for cables in ducts.
 ANNEX B
(Clause 5.5: Current Carrying Capacities)

Table B-1 – Installation Reference Methods Forming Basis of Tabulated Current-Carrying

Capacities
(Ref. Annex S of IS 732:)

Table and column

Current-carrying capacities
for single circuits
Reference method of installation Ambient Group
temperat reducti
ure on
factor factor
Thermopl Thermosetti Miner
astic ng al
insulated insulated insula
ted
Number of cores

2 3 2 3 2 and
3
1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9)
Insulated
conductors A1 B-2 B-4 B-3 B-5 – B-14 B-17
(single- core Col. Col. 2 Col. 2 Col. 2
cables) in 2
conduit in a
thermally
insulated wall
Multi-core
cable B-2 B-4 B-3 B-5 – B-14 B-17
in conduit in A2 Col. Col. 3 Col. 3 Col. 3 except
a thermally 3 D
insulated wall (Table
B-19
applies)
Insulated
conductors B1 B-2 B-4 B-3 B-5 – B-14 B-17
(single- core Col. Col. 4 Col. 4 Col. 4
cables) in 4
 conduit on a
wooden wall
Multi-core
cable in B2 B-2 B-4 B-3 B-5 – B-14 B-17
conduit Col. Col. 5 Col. 5 Col. 5
on a wooden 5
wall
Single-core
or multi-core C B-2 B-4 B-3 B-5 70 °C B-14 B-17
cable on a Col. Col. 6 Col. 6 Col. 6 Sheat
wooden wall 6 h
B-6
105 °C
Sheat
h
B.-7
Multi-core
cable in ducts D B-2 B-4 B-3 B-5 – B-15 B-19
in the ground Col. Col. 7 Col. 7 Col. 7
7

Table B-52.1 (continued)

Table and column

Current-carrying capacities
for single circuits
Reference method of installation Ambient Group
temperat reductio
ure n
factor factor
Thermoplasti Thermosettin Miner
c g al
insulated insulated insulat
ed
Number of cores
 2 3 2 3 2 and 3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Sheathed D2 Col 8 Col 8 Col 8 Col 8 Col 8

single-core or
multi-core
cables direct in
the ground.
Multi-core
cable in free E Copper Copper 70 °C B-14 B-20
air B-10 B-12 Sheath
Clearance to wall Aluminium Aluminium B-8
not less than 0,3 B-11 B-13 105 °C
times Sheath
cable diameter B-9
Single-core
cables, F Copper Copper 70 °C B-14 B-21
touching in B-10 B-12 Sheath
free air B-8
Clearance to wall Aluminium Aluminium 105 °C
not less than one B-11 B-13 Sheath
cable diameter B-9
Single-core
cables, spaced G Copper Copper 70 °C B-14 –
in free air B-10 B-12 Sheath
B-8
Aluminium Aluminium 105 °C
B-11 B-13 Sheath
B-9
 Table B-2 – Current-carrying Capacities in Amperes for Methods of Installation in Table
B-1 – PVC Insulation/two Loaded Conductors, Copper or Aluminium – Conductor
Temperature: 70 °C, Ambient Temperature: 30 °C in air, 20 °C in Ground
(Ref. Annex S of IS 732:2016)

Installation Methods of Table B-1

Nominal
Cross- A1 A2 B1 B2 C D1 D2
sectional
Area of
Conductor
mm2

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

Copper
1.5 14.5 14 17.5 16.5 19.5 22 22
2.5 19.5 18.5 24 23 27 29 28
4 26 25 32 30 36 37 38
6 34 32 41 38 46 46 48
10 46 43 57 52 63 60 64
16 61 57 76 69 85 78 83
25 80 75 101 90 112 99 110
35 99 92 125 111 138 119 132
50 119 110 151 133 168 140 156
70 151 139 192 168 213 173 192
95 182 167 232 201 258 204 230
120 210 192 269 232 299 231 261
150 240 219 300 258 344 261 293
185 273 248 341 294 392 292 331
240 321 291 400 344 461 336 382
300 367 334 458 394 530 379 427
Aluminium
2.5 15 14.5 18.5 17.5 21 22
4 20 19.5 25 24 28 29
6 26 25 32 30 36 36
10 36 33 44 41 49 47
 16 48 44 60 54 66 61 63
25 63 58 79 71 83 77 82
35 77 71 97 86 103 93 98
50 93 86 118 104 125 109 117
70 118 108 150 131 160 135 145
95 142 130 181 157 195 159 173
120 164 150 210 181 226 180 200
150 189 172 234 201 261 204 224
185 215 195 266 230 298 228 255
240 252 229 312 269 352 262 298
300 289 263 358 308 406 296 336
NOTE — In columns 3, 5, 6, 7 and 8, circular conductors are assumed for sizes up to and including 16 mm2. Values for
larger sizes relate to shaped conductors and may safely be applied to circular conductors.

Table B-3– Current-carrying Capacities in Amperes for Methods of Installation in Table

B-1 – XLPE or EPR Insulation, Two Loaded Conductors/copper or Aluminium –
Conductor Temperature: 90 °C, Ambient Temperature: 30 °C in Air, 20 °C in Ground
(Ref. Annex S of IS 732:2016)

Installation Methods of Table B-1

Nominal
Cross- A1 A2 B1 B2 C D1 D2
Sectional
Area of
Conductor
mm2

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

Copper
1.5 19 18.5 23 22 24 25 27
2.5 26 25 31 30 33 33 35
4 35 33 42 40 45 43 46
6 45 42 54 51 58 53 58
10 61 57 75 69 80 71 77
16 81 76 100 91 107 91 100
25 106 99 133 119 138 116 129
35 131 121 164 146 171 139 155
50 158 145 198 175 209 164 183
70 200 183 253 221 269 203 225
95 241 220 306 265 328 239 270
120 278 253 354 305 382 271 306
 150 318 290 393 334 441 306 343
185 362 329 449 384 506 343 387
240 424 386 528 459 599 395 448
300 486 442 603 532 693 446 502
Aluminium
2.5 20 19.5 25 23 26 26
4 27 26 33 31 35 33
6 35 33 43 40 45 42
.10 48 45 59 54 62 55
16 64 60 79 72 84 71 76
25 84 78 105 94 101 90 98
35 103 96 130 115 126 108 117
50 125 115 157 138 154 128 139
70 158 145 200 175 198 158 170
95 191 175 242 210 241 186 204
120 220 201 281 242 280 211 233
150 253 230 307 261 324 238 261
185 288 262 351 300 371 267 296
240 338 307 412 358 439 307 343
300 387 352 471 415 508 346 386
NOTE — In columns 3, 5, 6, 7 and 8, circular conductors are assumed for sizes up to and including 16 mm2. Values for
larger sizes relate to shaped conductors and may safely be applied to circular conductors.

Table B-4 – Current-carrying Capacities in Amperes for Methods of Installation in Table

B-1– PVC insulation, Three Loaded Conductors/copper or Aluminium – Conductor
Temperature: 70 °C, Ambient Temperature: 30 °C in Air, 20 °C in Ground
(Ref. Annex S of IS 732:2016)

Installation Methods of Table B-1

Nominal
Cross- A1 A2 B1 B2 C D1 D2
Sectional
Area of
Conductor
mm2

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

Copper
1.5 13.5 13 15.5 15 17.5 18 19
 2.5 18 17.5 21 20 24 24 24
4 24 23 28 27 32 30 33
6 31 29 36 34 41 38 41
10 42 39 50 46 57 50 54
16 56 52 68 62 76 64 70
25 73 68 89 80 96 82 92
35 89 83 110 99 119 98 110
50 108 99 134 118 144 116 130
70 136 125 171 149 184 143 162
95 164 150 207 179 223 169 193
120 188 172 239 206 259 192 220
150 216 196 262 225 299 217 246
185 245 223 296 255 341 243 278
240 286 261 346 297 403 280 320
300 328 298 394 339 464 316 359
Aluminium
2.5 14 13.5 16.5 15.5 18.5 18.5
4 18.5 17.5 22 21 25 24
6 24 23 28 27 32 30
10 32 31 39 36 44 39
16 43 41 53 48 59 50 53
25 57 53 70 62 73 64 69
35 70 65 86 77 90 77 83
50 84 78 104 92 110 91 99
70 107 98 133 116 140 112 122
95 129 118 161 139 170 132 148
120 149 135 186 160 197 150 169
150 170 155 204 176 227 169 189
185 194 176 230 199 259 190 214
240 227 207 269 232 305 218 250
300 261 237 306 265 351 247 282
NOTE — In columns 3, 5, 6, 7 and 8, circular conductors are assumed for sizes up to and including 16 mm2. Values for
larger sizes relate to shaped conductors and may safely be applied to circular conductors.
 Table B-5– Current-carrying Capacities in Amperes for Methods of Installation in Table
B-1–XLPE or EPR Insulation Three Loaded Conductors/copper or Aluminium –
Conductor Temperature: 90 °C, Ambient Temperature: 30 °C in Air, 20 °C in Ground
(Ref. Annex S of IS 732 : 2016)

Installation Methods of Table B-1

Nominal
Cross- A1 A2 B1 B2 C D1 D2
Sectional
Area of
Conductor
mm2

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

Copper
1.5 17 16.5 20 19.5 22 21 23
2.5 23 22 28 26 30 28 30
4 31 30 37 35 40 36 39
6 40 38 48 44 52 44 49
10 54 51 66 60 71 58 65
16 73 68 88 80 96 75 84
25 95 89 117 105 119 96 107
35 117 109 144 128 147 115 129
50 141 130 175 154 179 135 153
70 179 164 222 194 229 167 188
95 216 197 269 233 278 197 226
120 249 227 312 268 322 223 257
150 285 259 342 300 371 251 287
185 324 295 384 340 424 281 324
240 380 346 450 398 500 324 375
300 435 396 514 455 576 365 419
Aluminium
2.5 19 18 22 21 24 22
4 25 24 29 28 32 28
6 32 31 38 35 41 35
10 44 41 52 48 57 46
 16 58 55 71 64 76 59 64
25 76 71 93 84 90 75 82
35 94 87 116 103 112 90 98
50 113 104 140 124 136 106 117
70 142 131 179 156 174 130 144
95 171 157 217 188 211 154 172
120 197 180 251 216 245 174 197
150 226 206 267 240 283 197 220
185 256 233 300 272 323 220 250
240 300 273 351 318 382 253 290
300 344 313 402 364 440 286 326
NOTE — In columns 3, 5, 6, 7 and 8, circular conductors are assumed for sizes up to and including 16 mm2. Values for
larger sizes relate to shaped conductors and may safely be applied to circular conductors.

Table B-6 Current-carrying Capacities in Amperes for Methods of Installation C of Table

B-1 – Mineral Insulation, Copper Conductors and Sheath –
PVC Covered or Bare Exposed to Touch (see Note 2) –
Metallic Sheath Temperature: 70 °C, Reference Ambient Temperature: 30 °C
(Ref. Annex S of IS 732 : 2016)

Number and Arrangement of Conductors for Method C of Table B-1

Two Loaded Three Loaded Conductors
Conductors Twin or
Single-core
Multi-core or Single- Single-core in Flat
Nominal
core Formation
Cross-Sectional Area
in Trefoil Formation
of Conductor mm2

(1) (2) (3) (4)

500 V
1.5 23 19 21
2.5 31 26 29
4 40 35 38
750V
1.5 25 21 23
 2.5 34 28 31
4 45 37 41
6 57 48 52
10 77 65 70
16 102 86 92
25 133 112 120
35 163 137 147
50 202 169 181
70 247 207 221
95 296 249 264
120 340 286 303
150 388 327 346
185 440 371 392
240 514 434 457
NOTES:
1) For single-core cables the sheaths of the cables of the circuit are connected together at both ends.
2) For bare cables exposed to touch, values should be multiplied by 0.9.
3) The values of 500 V and 750 V are the rated voltage of the cable.

Table B-7– Current-carrying Capacities in Amperes for Methods of Installation C of

Table B-1 – Mineral Insulation, Copper Conductors and Sheath –
Bare Cable not Exposed to Touch and not in Contact with Combustible Material
Metallic Sheath Temperature: 105 °C, Reference Ambient Temperature: 30 °C
(Ref. Annex S of IS 732:2016)

Number and Arrangement of Conductors for Method C of Table B-1

Two Loaded Three Loaded Conductors
Conductors Twin or
Single-core
Multi-core or Single- Single-core in Flat
Nominal
core Formation
Cross-Sectional Area
in Trefoil Formation
of Conductor mm2

1 2 3 4
 500 V
1.5 28 24 27
2.5 38 33 36
4 51 44 47
750 V
1.5 31 26 30
2.5 42 35 41
4 55 47 53
6 70 59 67
10 96 81 91
16 127 107 119
25 166 140 154
35 203 171 187
50 251 212 230
70 307 260 280
95 369 312 334
120 424 359 383
150 485 410 435
185 550 465 492
240 643 544 572
NOTE:1) For single-core cables, the sheaths of the cables of the circuit are connected together
at both ends.
2) No correction for grouping need be applied.
3) For this table reference method C refers to a masonry wall because the high sheath temperature
is not normally acceptable for a
wooden wall.
4) The values of 500 V and 750 V are the rated voltage of the cable.
Table B-8– Current-carrying Capacities in Amperes for Methods of Installation E, F and
G of Table B-1 –
Mineral Insulation, Copper Conductors and Sheath /PVC Covered
or Bare Exposed to Touch (see Note 2) –
Metallic Sheath Temperature: 70 °C, Reference Ambient Temperature: 30 °C
(Ref. Annex S of IS 732:2016)

Number and Arrangement of Conductors for Methods E, F and G of

Table B-1
Two Loaded Three Loaded Conductors
Conductors
Twin or
Single-core
Nominal Method E
cross- and F
sectional
area of Multi-core or
Single-core
conductor single-core in Single-core Single-core
flat vertical
trefoil touching horizontal
mm2 spaced
formation spaced
Method E or Method F Method G
Method G
F

1 2 3 4 5 6
500 V
1,5 25 21 23 26 29
2,5 33 28 31 34 39
4 44 37 41 45 51
750 V
1.5 26 22 26 28 32
2.5 36 30 34 37 43
4 47 40 45 49 56
6 60 51 57 62 71
10 82 69 77 84 95
16 109 92 102 110 125
25 142 120 132 142 162
35 174 147 161 173 197
50 215 182 198 213 242
70 264 223 241 259 294
95 317 267 289 309 351
 120 364 308 331 353 402
150 416 352 377 400 454
185 472 399 426 446 507
240 552 466 496 497 565
NOTES:
1) For single-core cables the sheaths of the cables of the circuit are connected together at
both ends.
2) For bare cables exposed to touch, values should be multiplied by 0.9.
3) De is the external diameter of the cable.
4) The values of 500 V and 750 V are the rated voltage of the cable.

Table B-9– Current-carrying Capacities in Amperes for Methods E, F and G of Table B-1
Mineral Insulation, Copper Conductors and Sheath –
Bare Cable not Exposed to Touch (see Note 2) –
Metallic Sheath Temperature: 105 °C, Reference Ambient Temperature: 30 °C
(Ref. Annex S of IS 732:2016)

Number and arrangement of cables for methods E, F and G of Table B-1

Two Loaded Three Loaded Conductors
Conductors
Twin or
Single-core
Method E
Nominal and F
cross-
sectional Multi-core or
Single-core
area of single-core in Single-core Single-core
flat vertical
conductor trefoil touching horizontal
spaced
formation spaced
mm2
Method E or Method F Method G
Method G
F

1 2 3 4 5 6
500 V
1.5 31 26 29 33 37
2.5 41 35 39 43 49
 4 54 46 51 56 64
750 V
1.5 33 28 32 35 40
2.5 45 38 43 47 54
4 60 50 56 61 70
6 76 64 71 78 89
10 104 87 96 105 120
16 137 115 127 137 157
25 179 150 164 178 204
35 220 184 200 216 248
50 272 228 247 266 304
70 333 279 300 323 370
95 400 335 359 385 441
120 460 385 411 441 505
150 526 441 469 498 565
185 596 500 530 557 629
240 697 584 617 624 704
NOTES:
1) For single-core cables the sheaths of the cables of the circuit are connected together at
both ends.
2) No correction for grouping need be applied.
3) De is the external diameter of the cable.
4) The values of 500 V and 750 V are the rated voltage of the cable.

Table B-10– Current-carrying capacities in amperes

for installation methods E, F and G of Table B-1–
PVC insulation, copper conductors –
Conductor temperature: 70 °C, reference ambient temperature: 30 °C
(Ref. Annex S of IS 732:2016)

Nominal Installation methods of Table B-1

cross- Multi-core cables Single-core cables
 sectional Three Three loaded conductors, flat
area of loaded
conductor conducto
mm2 rs trefoil
Two
Two Three Touching Spaced
loaded
loaded loaded Horizontal Vertical
conducto
conductor conducto
rs
s rs
touching

Method E Method E Method F Method F Method F Method G Method G

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1.5 22 18.5 – – – – –
2.5 30 25 – – – – –
4 40 34 – – – – –
6 51 43 – – – – –
10 70 60 – – – – –
16 94 80 – – – – –
25 119 101 131 110 114 146 130
35 148 126 162 137 143 181 162
50 180 153 196 167 174 219 197
70 232 196 251 216 225 281 254
95 282 238 304 264 275 341 311
120 328 276 352 308 321 396 362
150 379 319 406 356 372 456 419
185 434 364 463 409 427 521 480
240 514 430 546 485 507 615 569
300 593 497 629 561 587 709 659
400 – – 754 656 689 852 795
500 – – 868 749 789 982 920
630 – – 1 005 855 905 1 138 1 070
NOTES:
1) Circular conductors are assumed for sizes up to and including 16 mm2. Values for larger sizes
relate to shaped conductors and may safely be applied to circular conductors.
2) De is the external diameter of the cable.

Table B-11– Current-carrying capacities in amperes

for installation methods E, F and G of Table B-1 –
PVC insulation, aluminium conductors –
Conductor temperature: 70 °C, reference ambient temperature: 30 °C
(Ref. Annex S of IS 732:2016)

Installation methods of Table B-1

Multi-core cables Single-core cables
Three Three loaded conductors, flat
loaded
conducto
rs trefoil
Two
Two Three Touching Spaced
loaded
Nominal loaded loaded Horizontal Vertical
conducto
cross- conducto conducto
rs
sectional rs rs
touching
area of
conductor
mm2

Method E Method E Method F Method F Method F Method G Method G

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
2,5 23 19,5 – – – – –
4 31 26 – – – – –
6 39 33 – – – – –
 10 54 46 – – – – –
16 73 61 – – – – –
25 89 78 98 84 87 112 99
35 111 96 122 105 109 139 124
50 135 117 149 128 133 169 152
70 173 150 192 166 173 217 196
95 210 183 235 203 212 265 241
120 244 212 273 237 247 308 282
150 282 245 316 274 287 356 327
185 322 280 363 315 330 407 376
240 380 330 430 375 392 482 447
300 439 381 497 434 455 557 519
400 – – 600 526 552 671 629
500 – – 694 610 640 775 730
630 – – 808 711 746 900 852
NOTES:
1) Circular conductors are assumed for sizes up to and including 16 mm2. Values for larger sizes
relate to shaped conductors and may safely be applied to circular conductors.
2) De is the external diameter of the cable.

Table B-12 – Current-carrying capacities in amperes

for installation methods E, F and G of Table B-1 –
XLPE or EPR insulation, copper conductors –
Conductor temperature: 90 °C, reference ambient temperature: 30 °C
(Ref. Annex S of IS 732:2016)

Installation methods of Table B-1

Nominal Multi-core cables Single-core cables
cross-
sectional Three Three loaded conductors, flat
Two Three Two loaded
area of loaded conductor
loaded loaded
conductor
conductor conductor conductor s trefoil
mm2 s s s
Touching Spaced
 touching Horizontal Vertical

Method E Method E Method F Method F Method F Method G Method G

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1.5 26 23 – – – – –
2.5 36 32 – – – – –
4 49 42 – – – – –
6 63 54 – – – – –
10 86 75 – – – – –
16 115 100 – – – – –
25 149 127 161 135 141 182 161
35 185 158 200 169 176 226 201
50 225 192 242 207 216 275 246
70 289 246 310 268 279 353 318
95 352 298 377 328 342 430 389
120 410 346 437 383 400 500 454
150 473 399 504 444 464 577 527
185 542 456 575 510 533 661 605
240 641 538 679 607 634 781 719
300 741 621 783 703 736 902 833
400 – – 940 823 868 1085 1008
500 – – 1083 946 998 1253 1169
630 – – 1 254 1 088 1 151 1 454 1 362
NOTES:
1) Circular conductors are assumed for sizes up to and including 16 mm2. Values for larger sizes
relate to shaped conductors and may safely be applied to circular conductors.
2) De is the external diameter of the cable.
 Table B-13 – Current-carrying capacities in amperes
for installation methods E, F and G of Table B-1–
XLPE or EPR insulation. aluminium conductors –
Conductor temperature: 90 °C, reference ambient temperature: 30 °C
(Ref. Annex S of IS 732:2016)

Installation methods of Table B-1

Multi-core cables Single-core cables
Three Three loaded conductors, flat
loaded
conductor
s trefoil
Two Three Two Touching Spaced
Nominal loaded loaded loaded
cross- conductor conductor conductor Horizontal Vertical
sectional s s s touching
area of
conducto
r
mm2

Method E Method E Method F Method F Method F Method G Method G

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
2.5 28 24 – – – – –
4 38 32 – – – – –
6 49 42 – – – – –
10 67 58 – – – – –
16 91 77 – – – – –
25 108 97 121 103 107 138 122
35 135 120 150 129 135 172 153
50 164 146 184 159 165 210 188
70 211 187 237 206 215 271 244
95 257 227 289 253 264 332 300
120 300 263 337 296 308 387 351
 150 346 304 389 343 358 448 408
185 397 347 447 395 413 515 470
240 470 409 530 471 492 611 561
300 543 471 613 547 571 708 652
400 – – 740 663 694 856 792
500 – – 856 770 806 991 921
630 – – 996 899 942 1 154 1 077
NOTE: 1) Circular conductors are assumed for sizes up to and including 16 mm2. Values for
larger sizes relate to shaped conductors and may safely be applied to circular conductors.
2) De is the external diameter of the cable.

Table B-14– Correction factor for ambient air temperatures other than 30 °C
to be applied to the current-carrying capacities for cables in the air
(Ref. Annex S of IS 732:2016)

Insulation
XLPE and Minerala
Ambient EPR
temperaturea
PVC PVC covered
°C Bare not
or bare and
exposed to
exposed to
touch 105 °C
touch 70 °C
10 1.22 1.15 1.26 1.14
15 1.17 1.12 1.20 1.11
20 1.12 1.08 1.14 1.07
25 1.06 1.04 1.07 1.04
30 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
35 0.94 0.96 0.93 0.96
40 0.87 0.91 0.85 0.92
45 0.79 0.87 0.78 0.88
50 0.71 0.82 0.67 0.84
55 0.61 0.76 0.57 0.80
60 0.50 0.71 0.45 0.75
65 – 0.65 – 0.70
70 – 0.58 – 0.65
75 – 0.50 – 0.60
80 – 0.41 – 0.54
85 – – – 0.47
 90 – – – 0.40
95 – – – 0.32
a For higher ambient temperatures, consult the manufacturer.

Table B-15 – Correction factors for ambient ground temperatures other than 20 °C
to be applied to the current-carrying capacities for cables in ducts in the ground
(Ref. Annex S of IS 732:2016)

Ground Insulation
temperature
°C PVC XLPE and EPR
10 1.10 1.07
15 1.05 1.04
20 1.00 1.00
25 0.95 0.96
30 0.89 0.93
35 0.84 0.89
40 0.77 0.85
45 0.71 0.80
50 0.63 0.76
55 0.55 0.71
60 0.45 0.65
65 – 0.60
70 – 0.53
75 – 0.46
80 – 0.38

Table B-16 – Correction factors for cables buried direct in the ground
or in buried ducts for soil thermal resistivities other than 2.5 K∙m/W
to be applied to the current-carrying capacities for reference method D
(Ref. Annex S of IS 732)

Thermal resistivity, K∙m/W 0.5 0.7 1 1.5 2 2.5 3

Correction factor for cables in buried 1.28 1.20 1.18 1.1 1.05 1 0.96
ducts
 Correction factor for direct buried 1.88 1.62 1.5 1.28 1.12 1 0.90
cables
NOTES:
1) The correction factors given have been averaged over the range of conductor sizes and
types of installation included in Tables B-2 to B-5.. The overall accuracy of correction factors
is within 5 percent.
2) The correction factors are applicable to cables drawn into buried ducts; for cables laid
direct in the ground the correction factors for thermal resistivities less than 2.5 K∙m/W will
be higher. Where more precise values are required they may be calculated by methods given
in the IEC 60287 series.
3) The correction factors are applicable to ducts buried at depths of up to 0.8 m.
4) It is assumed that the soil properties are uniform. No allowance had been made for the
possibility of moisture migration which can lead to a region of high thermal resistivity around
the cable. If partial drying out of the soil is foreseen, the permissible current rating should be
derived by the methods specified in the IEC 60287 series.

Table B-17– Reduction factors for one circuit or one multi-core cable
or for a group of more than one circuit, or more than one multi-core cable,
to be used with current-carrying capacities of Tables B-2 to B-13
(Ref. Annex S of IS 732)

To be used
Number of circuits or multi-core cables with
Ite Arrangement current-
m (cables touching) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 12 16 20 carrying
capacities,
reference
1 Bunched in air, 1.00 0.80 0.70 0.65 0.60 0.57 0.54 0.52 0.50 0.4 0.41 0.38 B-2
on a surface, 5 to B-13
embedded or Methods A to
enclosed F
2 Single layer on 1.00 0.85 0.79 0.75 0.73 0.72 0.72 0.71 0.70
wall, floor or
unperforated
cable tray B-2
No further to B-7
systems reduction Method C
3 Single layer fixed 0.95 0.81 0.72 0.68 0.66 0.64 0.63 0.62 0.61 factor for more
directly under a than nine
wooden ceiling circuits or
4 Single layer on a 1.00 0.88 0.82 0.77 0.75 0.73 0.73 0.72 0.72 multicore
cables B-8
perforated
to B-13
horizontal or
 vertical cable tray Methods E
systems and F
5 Single layer on 1.00 0.87 0.82 0.80 0.80 0.79 0.79 0.78 0.78
cable ladder
systems or cleats
etc.,
NOTES:
1) These factors are applicable to uniform groups of cables, equally loaded.
2) Where horizontal clearances between adjacent cables exceeds twice their overall diameter, no reduction
factor need be applied.
3) The same factors are applied to:
a) groups of two or three single-core cables; and
b) multi-core cables.
4) If a system consists of both two- and three-core cables, the total number of cables is taken as the number
of circuits, and the corresponding factor is applied to the tables for two loaded conductors for the two-core
cables, and to the tables for three loaded conductors for the three-core cables.
5) If a group consists of n single-core cables it may either be considered as n/2 circuits of two loaded
conductors or n/3 circuits of three loaded conductors.
6) The values given have been averaged over the range of conductor sizes and types of installation included
in Tables B-2 to B-13 the overall accuracy of tabulated values is within 5 percent.
7) For some installations and for other methods not provided for in the above table, it may be appropriate
to use factors calculated for specific cases, see for example Tables B-20 and B-21.

Table B-18 – Reduction factors for more than one circuit,

cables laid directly in the ground –
Installation method D2 in Tables B-2 to B-5 –
Single-core or multi-core cables
(Ref. Annex S of IS 732)

Cable to cable clearance

Number Nil
of circuits One cable
(cables 0.125 m 0.25 m 0.5 m
diameter
touching)
2 0.75 0.80 0.85 0.90 0.90
3 0.65 0.70 0.75 0.80 0.85
4 0.60 0.60 0.70 0.75 0.80
5 0.55 0.55 0.65 0.70 0.80
6 0.50 0.55 0.60 0.70 0.80
7 0.45 0.51 0.59 0.67 0.76
 8 0.43 0.48 0.57 0.65 0.75
9 0.41 0.46 0.55 0.63 0.74
12 0.36 0.42 0.51 0.59 0.71
16 0.32 0.38 0.47 0.56 0.38
20 0.29 0.35 0.44 0.53 0.66
a Multi-core cables

a Single-core cables

NOTES:
1) Values given apply to an installation depth of 0.7 m and a soil thermal resistivity
of 2.5 K∙m/W. They are average values for the range of cable sizes and types quoted
for Tables B-2 to B-5. The process of averaging, together with rounding off, can result
in some cases in errors up to 10percent. (Where more precise values are required they
may be calculated by methods given in IEC 60287-2-1.)
2) In case of a thermal resistivity lower than 2.5 K∙m/W the corrections factors can,
in general, be increased and can be calculated by the methods given in IEC 60287-2-1.
3) If a circuit consists of m parallel conductors per phase, then for determining the
reduction factor, this circuit should be considered as m circuits.

Table B-19– Reduction factors for more than one circuit,

cables laid in ducts in the ground –
Installation method D1 in Tables B-2 to B-5
(Ref. Annex S of IS 732)

A) Multi-core cables in single-way ducts

Number of
Duct to duct clearancea
cables
 Nil
0.25 m 0.5 m 1.0 m
(ducts touching)
2 0.85 0.90 0.95 0.95
3 0.75 0.85 0.90 0.95
4 0.70 0.80 0.85 0.90
5 0.65 0.80 0.85 0.90
6 0.60 0.80 0.80 0.90
7 0.57 0.76 0.80 0.88
8 0.54 0.74 0.78 0.88
9 0.52 0.73 0.77 0.87
10 0.49 0.72 0.76 0.86
11 0.47 0.70 0.75 0.86
12 0.45 0.69 0.74 0.85
13 0.44 0.68 0.73 0.85
14 0.42 0.68 0.72 0.84
15 0.41 0.67 0.72 0.84
16 0.39 0.66 0.71 0.83
17 0.38 0.65 0.70 0.83
18 0.37 0.65 0.70 0.83
19 0.35 0.64 0.69 0.82
20 0.34 0.63 0.68 0.82

Table B-19 – (Continued)

B) Single-core cables in non-magnetic single-way ducts

Number of
single-core
Duct to duct clearance
circuits of two
or three cables
Nil
0.25 m 0.5 m 1.0 m
(ducts touching)
2 0.80 0.90 0.90 0.95
3 0.70 0.80 0.85 0.90
4 0.65 0.75 0.80 0.90
5 0.60 0.70 0.80 0.90
6 0.60 0.70 0.80 0.90
7 0.53 0.66 0.76 0.87
8 0.50 0.63 0.74 0.87
9 0.47 0.61 0.73 0.86
 10 0.45 0.59 0.72 0.85
11 0.43 0.57 0.70 0.85
12 0.41 0.56 0.69 0.84
13 0.39 0.54 0.68 0.84
14 0.37 0.53 0.68 0.83
15 0.35 0.52 0.67 0.83
16 0.34 0.51 0.66 0.83
17 0.33 0.50 0.65 0.82
18 0.31 0.49 0.65 0.82
19 0.30 0.48 0.64 0.82
20 0.29 0.47 0.63 0.81
a Multi-core cables

b Single-core cables

NOTES:
1) Values given apply to an installation depth of 0.7 m and a soil thermal resistivity of
2.5 K∙m/W. They are average values for the range of cable sizes and types quoted for
Tables B-2 to B-5. The process of averaging, together with rounding off, can result in some
cases in errors up to 10 percent. Where more precise values are required they may be
calculated by methods given in the IEC 60287series.
2) In case of a thermal resistivity lower than 2.5 K∙m/W the corrections factors can, in
general, be increased and can be calculated by the methods given in IEC 60287-2-1.
3) If a circuit consists of n parallel conductors per phase, then for determining the
reduction factor this circuit shall be considered as n circuits.

Table B-20 – Reduction factors for group of more than one multi-core cable
to be applied to reference current-carrying capacities for multi-core cables in free air –
Method of installation E in Tables B-8 to B-13
(Ref. Annex S of IS 732)

Numbe Number of Cables per Tray or Ladder

r of
Trays
Method of Installation in Table A-3
or 1 2 3 4 6 9
Ladder
s
31 Touching 1 1.00 0.88 0.82 0.79 0.76 0.73
 2 1.00 0.87 0.80 0.77 0.73 0.68
3 1.00 0.86 0.79 0.76 0.71 0.66
6 1.00 0.84 0.77 0.73 0.68 0.64
Perforated
cable tray
systems
Spaced
(Note 3) 1 1.00 1.00 0.98 0.95 0.91 –
2 1.00 0.99 0.96 0.92 0.87 –
3 1.00 0.98 0.95 0.91 0.85 –

Touching

1 1.00 0.88 0.82 0.78 0.73 0.72

31
2 1.00 0.88 0.81 0.76 0.71 0.70
Vertical
perforated
cable tray
systems Spaced
(Note 4)
1 1.00 0.91 0.89 0.88 0.87 –
2 1.00 0.91 0.88 0.87 0.85 –

Touching
1 0.97 0.84 0.78 0.75 0.71 0.68
Unperforate 31 2 0.97 0.83 0.76 0.72 0.68 0.63
d cable tray 3 0.97 0.82 0.75 0.71 0.66 0.61
systems 6 0.97 0.81 0.73 0.69 0.63 0.58

Touching
Cable ladder 32 1 1.00 0.87 0.82 0.80 0.79 0.78
systems, 2 1.00 0.86 0.80 0.78 0.76 0.73
cleats, etc. 33 3 1.00 0.85 0.79 0.76 0.73 0.70
(Note 3) 34
6 1.00 0.84 0.77 0.73 0.68 0.64

Table B-20 (continued)

Numbe Number of cables per tray or ladder

r of
Method of installation in Table A.3
trays or 1 2 3 4 6 9
ladders
 Spaced
1 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 –
2 1.00 0.99 0.98 0.97 0.96 –
3 1.00 0.98 0.97 0.96 0.93 –

NOTES:
1) Values given are averages for the cable types and range of conductor sizes considered in
Tables A--8 to A-13. The spread of values is generally less than 5 percent.
2) Factors apply to single layer groups of cables as shown above and do not apply when cables
are installed in more than one layer touching each other. Values for such installations may be
significantly lower and has to be determined by an appropriate method.
3) Values are given for vertical spacing between cable trays of 300 mm and at least 20 mm
between cable trays and wall. For closer spacing the factors should be reduced.
4) Values are given for horizontal spacing between cable trays of 225 mm with cable trays
mounted back to back. For closer spacing the factors should be reduced.

Table B-21 Reduction factors for groups of one or more circuits of single-core cables to be
applied to reference current-carrying capacity for one circuit of single-core cables in free
air – Method of installation F in Tables B-8 to B-13
(Ref. Annex S of IS 732 )

Number of Three- Use as a

Number
Phase Circuits per Multiplier to
of Trays
Method of Installation in Table A-3 Tray or Ladder Current-
or
1 2 3 carrying
Ladders
Capacity for
Touching
Perforated 1 0.98 0.91 0.87
cable tray Three cables
systems 31 2 0.96 0.87 0.81 in horizontal
3 0.95 0.85 0.78 formation
(Note 3)

Vertical Touching
perforated Three cables
1 0.96 0.86 –
cable tray 31 in vertical
systems 2 0.95 0.84 – formation
(Note 4)
 Touching
Cable
ladder 32 1 1.00 0.97 0.96 Three cables
systems, 33 2 0.98 0.93 0.89 in horizontal
cleats, etc. 34 3 0.97 0.90 0.86 formation
(Note 3)

Perforated 1 1.00 0.98 0.96

cable tray
systems 31 2 0.97 0.93 0.89
(Note 3) 3 0.96 0.92 0.86

Vertical Spaced
perforated Three cables
1 1.00 0.91 0.89
cable tray 31 in trefoil
systems 2 1.00 0.90 0.86 formation
(Note 4)

Cable
ladder 32 1 1.00 1.00 1.00
systems, 33 2 0.97 0.95 0.93
cleats, etc. 34 3 0.96 0.94 0.90
(Note 3)

Table B-21 (continued)

NOTES:
1) Values given are averages for the cable types and range of conductor sizes considered in
Table B-8 to B-13. The spread of values is generally less than 5 percent.
2) Factors are given for single layers of cables (or trefoil groups) as shown in the table and do
not apply when cables are installed in more than one layer touching each other. Values for such
installations may be significantly lower and should be determined by an appropriate method.
3) Values are given for vertical spacing between cable trays of 300 mm and at least 20 mm
between cable trays and wall. For closer spacing the factors should be reduced.
4) Values are given for horizontal spacing between cable trays of 225 mm with cable trays
mounted back to back. For closer spacing the factors should be reduced.
 5) For circuits having more than one cable in parallel per phase, each three phase set of
conductors should be considered as a circuit for the purpose of this table.
6) If a circuit consists of m parallel conductors per phase, then for determining the reduction
factor this circuit should be considered as m circuits.

ANNEX C
(Clause 5.5.5)
Table C-1 Current-carrying Capacity in Amperes
(Ref. Annex T of IS 732)

Reference
Methods
Number of Loaded Conductors and Type of Insulation
in Table
B-1
A1 3 2 3 2
PVC PVC XLPE XLPE
A2 3 2 PVC 3 2
PVC XLPE XLPE
B1 3 2 3 2
PVC PVC XLPE XLPE
B2 3 2 3 2
PVC PVC XLPE XLPE
C 3 2 3 2
PVC PVC XLPE XLPE
E 3 2 3 2
PVC PVC XLPE XLPE
 F 3 2 3 2
PVC PVC XLPE XLPE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Size
(mm2)
Copper
1.5 13 13.5 14.5 15.5 17 18.5 19.5 22 23 24 26 –
2.5 17.5 18 19.5 21 23 25 27 30 31 33 36 –
4 23 24 26 28 31 34 36 40 42 45 49 –
6 29 31 34 36 40 43 46 51 54 58 63 –
10 39 42 46 50 54 60 63 70 75 80 86 –
16 52 56 61 68 73 80 85 94 100 107 115 –
25 68 73 80 89 95 101 110 119 127 135 149 161
35 – – – 110 117 126 137 147 158 169 185 200
50 – – – 134 141 153 167 179 192 207 225 242
70 – – – 171 179 196 213 229 246 268 289 310
95 – – – 207 216 238 258 278 298 328 352 377
120 – – – 239 249 276 299 322 346 382 410 437
150 – – – – 285 318 344 371 395 441 473 504
185 – – – – 324 362 392 424 450 506 542 575
240 – – – – 380 424 461 500 538 599 641 679
Aluminiu
m
2.5 13.5 14 15 16.5 18.5 19.5 21 23 24 26 28 –
4 17.5 18.5 20 22 25 26 28 31 32 35 38 –
6 23 24 26 28 32 33 36 39 42 45 49 –
10 31 32 36 39 44 46 49 54 58 62 67 –
16 41 43 48 53 58 61 66 73 77 84 91 –
25 53 57 63 70 73 78 83 90 97 101 108 121
35 – – – 86 90 96 103 112 120 126 135 150
50 – – – 104 110 117 125 136 146 154 164 184
70 – – – 133 140 150 160 174 187 198 211 237
95 – – – 161 170 183 195 211 227 241 257 289
120 – – – 186 197 212 226 245 263 280 300 337
150 – – – – 226 245 261 283 304 324 346 389
185 – – – – 256 280 298 323 347 371 397 447
240 – – – – 300 330 352 382 409 439 470 530
NOTE — The appropriate table of current-carrying capacity given in Annex B should be
consulted to determine the range of conductor sizes for which the above current-carrying capacities
are applicable, for each installation method.

Table C-2 Current-carrying Capacities in Amperes

(Ref. Annex T of IS 732:2016)

Installation Size Number of Loaded Conductors and Type of

Method mm2 Insulation
2 PVC 3 PVC 2 XLPE 3 XLPE

Copper
1.5 22 18 26 22
2.5 29 24 34 29
4 38 31 44 37
6 47 39 56 46
10 63 52 73 61
16 81 67 95 79
25 104 86 121 101
D1/D2 35 125 103 146 122
50 148 122 173 144
70 183 151 213 178
95 216 179 252 211
120 246 203 287 240
150 278 230 324 271
185 312 258 363 304
240 361 297 419 351
300 408 336 474 396
Aluminium
2.5 22 18.5 26 22
4 29 24 34 29
6 36 30 42 36
10 48 40 56 47
D1/D2 16 62 52 73 61
25 80 66 93 78
35 96 80 112 94
50 113 94 132 112
70 140 117 163 138
95 166 138 193 164
 120 189 157 220 186
150 213 178 249 210
185 240 200 279 236
240 277 230 322 272
300 313 260 364 308

Table C-3 Reduction Factors for Groups of Several Circuits or of Several Multi-core
Cables (To be used with current-carrying capacities of Table C-1)
(Ref. Annex T of IS 732:)

Arrangement Number of Circuits or Multi-core Cables

Item 1 2 3 4 6 9 12 16 20

Bunched in air, on a
1 surface, embedded or 1.00 0.80 0.70 0.65 0.55 0.50 0.45 0.40 0.40
enclosed
Single layer on walls,
2 floors or on 1.00 0.85 0.80 0.75 0.70 0.70 – – –
unperforated trays
Single layer fixed
3 directly under a 0.95 0.80 0.70 0.70 0.65 0.60 – – –
ceiling
Single layer on
perforated horizontal
4 1.00 0.90 0.80 0.75 0.75 0.70 – – –
trays or on vertical
trays
Single layer on cable
5 ladder supports or 1.00 0.85 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.80 – – –
cleats, etc.
 ANNEX D
(Clause 5.9)

CONDUIT SYSTEMS

Table D-1 Suggested characteristics for conduit

(Ref. Annex W, IS 732)
(classification according to IS 14930 part 1 part 2)

Resistance Resistan Minimum Maximu

to ce Operatin m
Compressi to g Operatin
Situation
on Impact Temperat g
ure Temperat
ure
Outdoor Exposed installation
installati 3 3 2 1
on
Indoors Exposed installation 2 2 2 1
use
Under floor installations (floor
2 3 2 1
screed)
Embedd Concrete 3 3 2 1
ed
 Hollow wall/on
wood (inflammable 1
material)
In masonry

Building voids 2 2 2

Ceiling voids

Overhead mounting 4 3 3 1
NOTES:
1) These values are only a sample of the characteristics for conduit given in IS 14930 (Part 1
and 2).
2) According to resistance to flame propagation, conduit systems of orange colour are only
permitted when embedded in concrete.
3) For other methods for installation all colours are permitted with the exception of yellow,
orange or red.

Table D-2 Dimensions of Rigid Steel Conduits

(Ref. clause 7.1 of IS 9537:1981 Part 2)

Nominal size of Maximum wall Internal cross sectional

Outside diameter
Conduit thickness area of conduit

mm mm mm mm2
16 16 1.8 121
20 20 1.8 211
25 25 1.8 360
32 32 1.8 633
40 40 2.2 995
50 50 2.2 1633
63 63 2.2 2697
 Table D-3 Dimensions of Non-metallic Conduits (PVC)
( Clause 5.9.3.6 )
(Ref. clause 7.1 of IS 9537:1983 Part 3)
Light (LMS ) Medium (MMS ) Heavy (HMS )
Nominal Outside Min. Cross Min. Cross Min. cross
size diameter inside sectional inside sectional inside sectional
diameter area diameter area diameter area
2 2 2
mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm
16 16 13.7 147 13.0 133 12.2 117
20 20 17.4 238 16.9 224 15.8 196
25 25 22.1 384 21.4 360 20.6 333
32 32 28.6 642 27.8 607 26.6 556
40 40 35.8 1007 35.4 984 34.4 929
50 50 45.1 1598 44.3 1541 43.2 1466
63 63 57.0 2552

Table D-4 Dimensions of Single Core Non-Sheathed Cables with Rigid Conductor Class
1 or Class 2
( Ref. Clauses 16.1.2 and 16.1.3 of IS 694 : 2010 )
Nominal Cross
Thickness of Maximum overall Cross sectional
Sectional Area of Class of Insulation Diameter Area of Cable
Conductor Conductor
mm2 mm mm mm2
0.5 1 0.6 2.3 4.15
0.75 1 0.6 2.5 4.91
1 1 0.6 2.7 5.73
1.5 1 0.7 3.2 8.04
1.5 2 0.7 3.3 8.55
2.5 1 0.8 3.9 11.95
2.5 2 0.8 4 12.57
4 1 0.8 4.4 15.21
4 2 0.8 4.6 16.62
6 1 0.8 5 19.64
6 2 1 5.2 21.24
10 1 1 6.4 32.17
10 2 1 6.7 35.26
16 1 1.2 7.8 47.78
25 1 1.2 9.7 73.90

NOTE — Class 1 is Solid Conductor and class 2 is Stranded Conductor

 Table D-5 Spacing of Supports for Conduits
( Clause 5.9.6.2 )

Sl.No Nominal size of Maximum distance between supports

conduit
(1) mm

Rigid metal Rigid insulation Pliable

(2)
Horizo Vertical Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Vertical
ntal m m m m m
m (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
(3)
(i) Not exceeding 16 0.75 1.0 0.75 1.0 0.3 0.5
(ii) Exceeding 16 and 1.75 2.0 1.5 1.75 0.4 0.6
not 25
(iii) Exceeding 25 and 2.0 2.25 1.75 2.0 0.6 0.8
not exceeding 40

(iv) exceeding 40 2.25 2.5 2.0 2.0 0.8 1.0

NOTE — A flexible conduit is not normally required to be supported in its run.
 ANNEX E
(Clause 5.13.4)

COLOUR CODING FOR CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

Table E-1 Colour Identification of Cores of Non-flexible Cables and Bare Conductors for
Fixed Wiring
( Ref. Table 3, IS 11353:1985 )

Sl Colour Identification of Core of

No. Function Rubber or PVC
Insulated Non-flexible Cable, or of
Sleeve or Disc to
be Applied to Conductor or Cable
Code
(1) (2) (3)

i) Protective or earthing Green and yellow

Red [or yellow or blue (see
ii)Phase of ac single-phase circuit Note 1)]
iii) Neutral of ac single or three-phase circuit Black
iv) Phase R of 3-phase ac circuit Red
v) Phase Y of 3-phase ac circuit Yellow
vi) Phase B of 3-phase ac circuit Blue
vii) Positive of dc 2-wire circuit Red
viii) Negative of dc 2-wire circuit Black
Outer (positive or negative) of dc 2-wire circuit
ix) derived from 3 wire Red
system
x) Positive of 3-wire system (positive of 3-wire dc
circuit) Red
xi) Middle wire of 3-wire dc circuit Black
xii) Negative of 3-wire dc circuit Blue
xiii) Functional earth-telecommunication Cream
NOTES:
1 As alternative to the use of red, if desired in large installations, up
to the final distribution board.
2 For armoured PVC-insulated cables and paper-insulated cables,
see relevant Indian Standard.
 Table E-2 Colour, Identification of Cores of Flexible Cables and Flexible Cords
(Clause 5.13.4.5)

(Ref. Table 4 IS11353:1985)

Sl No. Number of Cores Function of Core Colour(s) of Core

(1) (2) (3) (4)

i) 1 Phase Brown1)
Neutral (Light) Blue
Protective or earthing Green and yellow
ii) 2 Phase Brown
Neutral (Light) Blue1)
iii) 3 Phase Brown
Neutral (Light) Blue1)
Protective or earthing Green and yellow
iv) 4 or 5 Phase Brown or black1)
Neutral (Light) Blue1)
Protective or earthing Green and yellow
1)
Certain alternatives are allowed in Wiring Regulations.
 ANNEX F
( Clause 6.5.1 )
Table F-1 Typical Allowances for Diversity

Sl Purpose of Final Type of Premises

No. Circuit Fed from
Conductors or Individual house- Small shops, Small hotels,
Switchgear to which hold installations, stores offices boarding houses
Diversity Applies including and business etc.
individual dwelling premises
of a block
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
i) Lighting 66 Percent of total 90 Percent of 75 Percent of total
current demand total current current demand
demand

ii) Heating and power 100 Percent of total 100 Percent of 100 Percent of full
current demand up
[see also Sl. No. (iii) to 10A full load of load of largest
and (iv) below largest appliance appliance
+ 50 Percent of any +75 Percent of +80 Percent of
current demand in
excess of 10A remaining second largest
appliances appliance
+60 Percent of
remaining
appliances
iii) Cooking appliances 10A 100 Percent of 100 Percent of full
full load of load of largest
largest appliance appliance
+ 30 Percent of full + 80 Percent of + 80 Percent of full
load of connected
cooking appliances full load of load of second
in excess of 10A second largest largest appliance
appliance
+ 6A if outlet + 60 Percent of + 60 Percent of full
socket is
incorporated in unit full load of load of remaining
remaining appliances
appliances
iv) Motors other than lift 100 Percent of 100 Percent of full
motors which are full load of load of largest
subject to special largest motor motor
considerations
+ 80 Percent of + 50 Percent of full
full load of load of remaining
second largest motors
motor
+ 60 Percent of
full load of
remaining
motors
 v) Water heater 100 Percent of full 100 Percent of 100 Percent of full
load of largest full load of load of largest
instantaneous type 1 appliance largest appliance appliance
+100 Percent of +100 Percent of +100 Percent of
full load of second full load of full load of second
largest appliance second largest largest appliance
appliance
+25 Percent of full +25 Percent of +25 Percent of full
load of remaining full load of load of remaining
appliances remaining appliances
appliances
vi) Water heater No diversity
allowable 2
thermostatically
controlled

vii) Floor warming No diversity

allowable 2
installations

viii) Water heaters thermal No diversity

allowable 2
storage space heating
installations

ix) Standard 100 Percent of 100 Percent of

current demand of current demand
arrangements of final largest circuit of largest circuit
circuits n accordance +40 Percent of +50 Percent of
with IS 732 current demand of current demand
every other circuit of every other
circuit
x) Socket outlets other 100 Percent of 100 Percent of 100 Percent of
current demand of current demand current demand of
than those included in largest point of largest point largest point
Sl. No. (ix) above and 40 Percent of 75 Percent of 75 Percent of
stationary equipment current demand of current demand current demand of
other than those listed every other point of every other every point in main
point rooms (dining
above rooms, etc.)
40 Percent of
current demand of
every other point
1)
For the purpose of the table an instantaneous water heater is deemed to be a water heater
of any loading which heats water only while the tap is turned on and therefore uses
electricity intermittently.
2)
It is important to ensure that the distribution boards are of sufficient rating to take the
total load connected to them without the application of any diversity.
 ANNEX G
GUIDANCE FOR EMERGENCY LIGHTING
Table G-1 – Guidance for emergency lighting
(Ref. Table HH-1 under Annex HH IS 732:2016)

Requirements
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Moto
Exte
Moto r-
nded Moto
Escap r- gener
dura r-
e sign gener ator
Examples of tion Centr Self- gener Dual
lumin Low ator unit
Applications or al contai ator supp
aires power unit with
remo power ned unit ly
in supply with medi
te supply batter with syste
maint system short um
contr system y unit no m
ained break brea
olled break
mode (< 0.5 k
circu (0 s)
s) (< 15
it
s)

✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Assembly halls,
**
assembly rooms
Exhibition halls ** ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Theatres, cinemas ** ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Sports arenas ** ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Sales areas ** ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Restaurants ** ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓

✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Hospitals, treatment
**
centres

✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Hotels, guest houses
**
*

✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Residential care
**
homes *

✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
High-rise buildings
**
*
Schools ** ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Enclosed car parks ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓

✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Escape routes in
–
workplaces
High risk task areas – ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Stages ** ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
✓ denotes suitable systems.
* In premises (guest houses, hotels, residential care homes and high-rise buildings) used the
whole day, the rated operating time for the emergency lighting should be 8 h or shall be
switchable with illuminated push buttons for a fixed time by the occupants. In this case, the
push buttons and their timing equipment should also run in the emergency mode.
** Denotes applications which require either extended duration or a circuit like the remote-
controlled circuit to ensure protection for longer than 60 min.

ANNEX H

TYPICAL 2 BHK FLAT CONDUIT LAYOUT

TERRACE TERRACE

JUL.BALCONY ABOVE /BELOW 2120x1650

3075x575 L04

P04
BEDROOM

2885x3075

SB05
P03

F04 L03 F01

LIVING/DINING
L11 BEDROOM L02
DWG. 4375x3100
3075x3475
SB07
514

SB03

L05 CUT OUT

(200X300) SB02
TV01 P02
TEL01

SB08
VOID ParapetSB04
WallPP01
TOILET TOILET
1410x
SB06
900MM High.
2150x1250 2150x1250
1175
B02 B01 DRY
KITCHEN
BALC.
PB
2200x2425 F02
1000X
2350

PP03
 1200MM CEILING FAN

CEILING LIGHT POINT.

WALL LIGHT POINT
SWITCH BOARD WITH LIGHT SWITCHES
SWITCH BOARD WITH LIGHT SWITCHES
FAN REGULATOR
SWITCH BOARD WITH LIGHT & BOILER
SWITCHES
5A SOCKET WITH SWITCH.
5A/15A SOCKET WITH SWITCH
T.V. ANTENNA SOCKET OUTLET
SINGLE TELEPHONE SOCKET OUTLET
BELL PUSH
BUZZER
20A SOCKET ONLY FOR BOILER
DISTRIBUTION BOARD (DB)
Ø25 mm FRPVC 2mm THICK CONDUIT
FOR TEL/DATA WIRING
Ø25mm FRPVC 2mm THICK CONDUIT
FOR MAINS/SUBMAINS
Ø25mm FRPVC 2mm THICK CONDUIT
FOR POINT WIRING
CEILING LIGHT POINT ON TIMER 2.

SWITCH BOARD SCHEDULE - 2BHK EVEN FLOOR FLATS

ROOM NAME SWITCH HEIGHT FROM POINT COMMENTS MODULE REQUIRED STANDARD
BOARD FFL in mm MODULES MODULES
ENTRANCE
1250 PB 1 NO. OF 5A SWITCH FOR BELL PUSH 1 1 1
LOBBY
PB 1 NO. OF 5A SWITCH FOR CONTROL OF BELL PUSH 1
L01 1 NO. OF 5A LIGHT SWITCH FOR WALL LIGHT POINT 1
SB01 1250 6 6
L02 1 NO. OF 5A LIGHT SWITCH FOR WALL LIGHT POINT 1
LIVING/ F01 1 NO. OF 5A SWITCH WITH FAN REGULATOR 3
DINING TV01 1 NO. SOCKET FOR TV 1
ROOM TEL1 1 NO. SOCKET FOR TELEPHONE 1
SB02 900 8 8
+ P01 1 NO. OF 5A SOCKET & SWITCH ON BOARD 3
LOBBY P02 1 NO. OF 5A SOCKET & SWITCH ON BOARD 3
L03 1 NO. OF 5A LIGHT SWITCH FOR WALL LIGHT POINT 1
SB03 1250 L04 1 NO. OF 5A LIGHT SWITCH FOR WALL LIGHT POINT 1 3 3
L05 1 NO. OF 5A LIGHT SWITCH FOR WALL LIGHT POINT 1

F02 1 NO. OF 5A SWITCH WITH FAN REGULATOR 3

KITCHEN SB04 1250 L06 1 NO. OF 5A LIGHT SWITCH FOR WALL LIGHT POINT 1 5 6
+ L07 1 NO. OF 5A LIGHT SWITCH FOR WALL LIGHT POINT 1
DRY 1250 PP01 1 NO. OF 5/15A SOCKET & SWITCH FOR REFRIGERATOR 3 3 3
BALCONY 1200 PP02 1 NO. OF 5/15A SOCKET & SWITCH FOR AQUAGUARD 3 3 3
1250 PP03 1 NO. OF 5/15A SOCKET & SWITCH FOR WASHING M/C 3 3 3

L08 1 NO. OF 5A LIGHT SWITCH FOR WALL LIGHT POINT 1

BEDROOM - 1 SB05 1250 P03 1 NO. OF 5A SOCKET & SWITCH ON BOARD 3 7 7
F03 1 NO. OF 5A SWITCH WITH FAN REGULATOR 3
L09 1 NO. OF 5A LIGHT SWITCH FOR WALL LIGHT POINT 1
SB06 1350 2 2
TOILET-1 B01 1 NO. OF 20A SWITCH FOR GEYSER WITH INDICATOR 1
2100 B01 1 NO. OF 20A SOCKET OUTLET FOR GEYSER 2 2 2

L10 1 NO. OF 5A LIGHT SWITCH FOR WALL LIGHT POINT 1

L11 1 NO. OF 5A LIGHT SWITCH FOR WALL LIGHT POINT 1
SB07 1250 6 6
BEDROOM - 2 L12 1 NO. OF 5A LIGHT SWITCH FOR WALL LIGHT POINT 1
F03 1 NO. OF 5A SWITCH WITH FAN REGULATOR 3
600 P04 1 NO. OF 5A SOCKET & SWITCH INDIPENDANT 3
L12 1 NO. OF 5A LIGHT SWITCH FOR WALL LIGHT POINT 1
SB08 1250 2 2
TOILET-2 B01 1 NO. OF 20A SWITCH FOR GEYSER WITH INDICATOR 1
2100 B01 1 NO. OF 20A SOCKET OUTLET FOR GEYSER 2 2 2

ON BEAM BA BELL ANNOUNCER -

PASSAGE
2100 DB DISTRIBUTION BOARD -
 ANNEX I
(Clause 9.2.1)

Table I.1 – Optimum Size /Number of Fans for Rooms of Different Sizes
(Ref. Table 13 Clause 5.7.4 of NBC Section 1 Part 8)
Sl Room Optimum Size, mm / Number of Fans for Room Length
No. width 4m 5m 6m 7m 8m 9m 10m 11m 12m 14m 16m
m
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13)
i) 3 1200/1 1400/1 1500/1 1050/2 1200/2 1400/2 1400/2 1400/2 1200/3 1400/3 1400/3
ii) 4 1200/1 1400/1 1200/2 1200/2 1200/2 1400/2 1400/2 1500/2 1200/3 1400/3 1500/3
iii) 5 1400/1 1400/1 1400/2 1400/2 1400/2 1400/2 1400/2 1500/2 1400/3 1400/3 1500/3
iv) 6 1200/2 1400/2 900/4 1050/4 1200/4 1400/4 1400/4 1500/4 1200/6 1400/6 1500/6
v) 7 1200/2 1400/2 1050/4 1050/4 1200/4 1400/4 1400/4 1500/4 1200/6 1400/6 1500/6
vi) 8 1200/2 1400/2 1200/4 1200/4 1200/4 1400/4 1400/4 1500/4 1200/6 1400/6 1500/6
vii) 9 1400/2 1400/2 1400/4 1400/4 1400/4 1400/4 1400/4 1500/4 1400/6 1400/6 1500/6
viii) 10 1400/2 1400/2 1400/4 1400/4 1400/4 1400/4 1400/4 1500/4 1400/6 1400/6 1500/6
ix) 11 1500/2 1500/2 1500/4 1500/4 1500/4 1500/4 1500/4 1500/4 1500/6 1500/6 1500/6
x) 12 1200/3 1400/3 1200/6 1200/6 1200/6 1400/6 1400/6 1500/6 1200/7 1400/9 1400/9
xi) 13 1400/3 1400/3 1200/6 1200/6 1200/6 1400/6 1400/6 1500/6 1400/9 1400/9 1500/9
xii) 14 1400/3 1400/3 1400/6 1400/6 1400/6 1400/6 1400/6 1500/6 1400/9 1400/9 1500/9
 ANNEX J
(Clause 11.0)

FORMS OF INSPECTION REPORT

(Ref. Schedule-IV of CEA (measures related to Safety and Electric Supply) Regulations
2010 and amendments 2015, See subs regulation (3) of regulation 30)

FORM I
(Installations of voltage up to and including 250V)

Report No. ____ Date of inspection by Electrical Inspector or self certification by owner -
--------
Date of Last inspection or self certification ________

1. Consumer No. ---------

2. Volt age and system of supply:

(i) Volts -----------------
(ii) No. of Phases ------
(iii) AC/DC -------------

3. Type of wiring ---------------------------------------

4 Name of the consumer or owner ------------------
5 Address of the consumer or owner ----------------
6 Location of the premises----------------------------

7 Particulars of the installations: Number Connected

Load in kW
(a) (i) Light Points
(ii) Fan Points
(iii) Plug Points

State type of wiring whether casing capping, lead covered of teak wood batten,
concealed conduit, Tough Rubber Sheathed and any other type.

(b) Other equipments (complete details to be furnished):

(i)
(ii)

Total connected load in kW -----------------------

Maximum current demand in Amps -------------- (on the basis of total connected load)

(c) Generators details i.e. Make, S. No, kVA rating and Voltage:
(i)
 (ii)

General conditions of the installation

Sl Regulatio Requirements Report
No. · n Nos.
8 Regulation (i) Is/Are there any visible sign(s) of Yes/No
- 12 overloading in respect of any apparatus
wiring?
(ii) Condition of flexible cords sockets, Satisfactory/Not
switches, plug-pins, cut-outs and lamp . Satisfactory
holders and such .other fittings.
(iii) General condition of wiring. Satisfactory/Not
Satisfactory
(iv) Whether any unauthorised temporary Yes/No
installation exists?
(v) State if sockets are controlled by Yes/N
individual
switches. · o
(vi) Any other defect or condition which
may·
Yes/N
Be a source of danger. If yes give
details. o
9. Regulation Give report on condition of service lines, Satisfactory/Not
- 13 cables, wires, apparatus and such other Satisfactory
fittings placed by the supplier or owner of the
premises. If not satisfactory give details.
10 Regulation · Whethersuitable cut-outs provided by the Yes/No
- 14 supp1ier at the consumer's premises are
within enclosed fire proof receptacle?
11 Regulation (ii) State if switches are provided on live Yes/No
- 15 Conductors
(ii) State if indication of permanent nature is Yes/No
provided as per Regulation so as to
distinguish
neutral conductor from the live conductor. Yes/No
(iii) Whether a direct line is provided on the
neutral in case of single phase double
pole
iron clad switches instead of fuse
12 Regulation (i) State if earthed terminal is provided by Yes/No
- 16 the supplier
(ii) Have three pin plugs been provided for Yes/No
plug points?
(iii) General visible conditions of the earthing Satisfactory/Not
arrangement satisfactory
13 Regulation Are the live parts in accessible position? Yes/No
- 17
14 Regulation Leakage on premises:
- 34 State insulation resistance between conductors ------M-Ohms
and earth in Mega Ohms
15 Regulation (i) State if linked switch of requisite Yes/No
- 35 capacity are provided near the point of
commencement of supply.
(ii) State if wiring is divided in suitable Yes/No
number of circuits and each such
circuit is protected by suitable cut-out
(iii) State if supply to each motor or Yes/No
apparatus is controlled by suitable
linked switch
16 Regulation (i) Have frames of every generator, stationary Yes/No
- 41 motor and so far as practicable portable
motor and the metallic parts (not intended
as conductors) of all other
apparatus used for regulating or
controlling electricity been earthed by two
separate and distinct connections with
earth? Yes/No
(ii) Is the earth wire free from mechanical
damage?
Yes/No
(iii) In the case of conduit; or lead covered
wiring, has the conduit or lead-cover been
efficiently earthed?
(iv) If the consumer has his own earth- Yes/No
electrode, state if it is properly executed ------- ohms
and has been tested. If yes give value of
earth resistance.
17 Overhead (i) State if the consumer has any overhead Yes/No
lines lines. Yes/No
(ii) Does the overhead line near the premises
of consumer meets the requirement of
regulation 58, 60 and 61? If not, give
 details. Yes/No
(iii) Is, guarding provided for overhead lines at
road crossings?
(i) Any other remarks.

Date: Signature of the Inspecting Officer / Self-certifying supplier or

owner

Name -------------------------------------------------------------------------
--

Designation -----------------------------------------------------------------
--

File No. ----------------------------------------------------------------------

--

Copy forwarded to Electrical Inspector / Chief Electrical Inspector for -----------------------

---
 FORM II
(Installations of voltage level more than 250V up to and including 650V)

Report No. ____ Date of inspection by Electrical Inspector or self certification by owner -
--------
Date of Last inspection or self certification ________

1. Consumer No. ---------

2. Volt age and system of supply:

(i) Volts -----------------
(ii) No. of Phases ------
(iii) AC/DC -------------

3. Type of wiring ---------------------------------------

4 Name of the consumer or owner ------------------
5 Address of the consumer or owner ----------------
6 Location of the premises----------------------------

7 Particulars of the installations:

(a) Motors:

Motors No. H.P. Amps. Voltage

(i) --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------
(ii) -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------

(b) Other equipments (complete details to be furnished):

(i) --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------
(ii) -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------
Total connected load h.p./ kVA -----------------------

(c) Generators details i.e. Make, S. No, kVA rating and Voltage:
(i) --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------
(ii) -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------

General conditions of the installation

Sl Regulatio Requirements Report
No. n Nos.
7 Regulation- Is register of designated persons properly Yes/No
3 made and kept up to date duly attested?
8 Regulation (i) Is/Are there any visible sign(s) of Yes/No
- 12 overloading in respect of any apparatus
wiring?
(ii) Whether any unauthorised temporary Yes/No
installation exists?
(iii) Are electric supply lines and apparatus Yes/N
so installed, protected, worked and
maintained as to prevent danger?. · o
(iv) Any other general remark?
9. Regulation Give report on condition of service lines, Satisfactory/Not
- 13 cables, wires, apparatus and such other Satisfactory
fittings placed by the supplier or owner of the
premises. If not satisfactory give details.
10 Regulation · Whether suitable cut-outs provided by the Yes/No
- 14 supp1ier at the consumer's premises are
within enclosed fire proof receptacle?
11 Regulation (i) Whether switches are provided on live Yes/No
- 15 Conductors
(ii) Whether indication of permanent nature is Yes/No
provided as per Regulation so as to
distinguish
neutral conductor from the live Yes/No
conductor?
(iii) Whether a direct line is provided on the
neutral in case of single phase double
pole
iron clad switches instead of fuse
12 Regulation (i) Whether earthed terminal is provided by Yes/No
- 16 the supplier?
(ii) General visible conditions of the earthing Satisfactory/Not
arrangement satisfactory
13 Regulation (i) Are bare conductors in building Yes/No
- 17 inaccessible?
(ii) Whether readily accessible switches Yes/No
have been provided rendering them dead
14 Regulation Whether Danger notice in Hindi and the Yes/No
- 18 Local Language of the district and of a
design as per relevant Indian Standard is
affixed permanently in conspicuous position?
15 Regulation (i) Whether insulating floor or mats Yes/No
- 19 conforming to IS 15652:2006 have been
provided?
(ii) Whether identification of panel has been Yes/No
provided on the front and rear of the
panel?
16 Regulation Whether flexible cables used for portable or Yes/No
- 21 transportable equipment covered under the
regulation are heavily insulated and
adequately protected from mechanical
injury?
17 Regulation State the condition of metallic coverings Satisfactory/Not
-22 provided for various conductors satisfactory
18 Regulation Whether circuits or apparatus intended for Yes/No
- 24 operating at different voltages are
distinguishable by means of indications of
permanent nature?
19 Regulation Whether all circuits and apparatus are so Yes/No
- 26 arranged that there is no danger of any part
becoming accidently charged to any voltage
beyond the limits of voltage for which it/they
is/are intended?
20 Regulation (i) In case of generating stations, whether Yes/No
- 27 fire buckets filled with clean dry sand
have been conspicuously marked and kept
in convenient situations in addition to fire
extinguishers suitable for dealing with
electric fires? Yes/No
(ii) Whether first aid boxes or cupboards
conspicuously marked and properly
equipped are provided and maintained? Yes/No
(iii)Is adequate staff trained in First Aid
Treatment and fire fighting?

21 Regulation (i) Whether instructions in English or Hindi Yes/No

- 28 and the local language of the district and
where Hindi is local language, in English
and Hindi, for the resuscitation of persons
suffering from electric shock have been
affixed in conspicuous place?
(ii) Are the designated persons able to apply Yes/No
instructions for resuscitation of person
suffering from electric shock?
22 Regulation Leakage on premises:
- 34 State insulation resistance between conductors ------M-Ohms
and earth in Mega Ohms
23 Regulation (i) Whether a suitable linked switch or circuit Yes/No
- 35 breaker is placed near the point of
commencement of supply so as to be
readily accessible and capable of being
easily operated to completely isolate
supply? Yes/No
(ii) Whether every distinct circuit is protected
against excess electricity by means of
suitable circuit breaker or cut-out? Yes/No
(iii) Whether suitable linked switch or circuit
 breaker is provided near each motor or
apparatus is controlling supply to the
motor or apparatus? Yes/No
(iv) Whether adequate precautions are taken to
ensure that no live parts are so exposed as
to cause danger?
24 Regulation (i) Whether clear space of 1m is provided in Yes/No
- 37 front of main switch board?
(ii) Whether the space behind switch board Yes/No
exceed 75cm in width or is less than 20cm
(iii)In case of clear space behind switch board Yes/No
exceed 75cm, state whether a passage way
from either end of the switch board to the
height of 1.8m is provided?

25 Regulation (i) Has the neutral point at the transformer and Yes/No
- 41 the generator been earthed by two separate
and distinct connections with earth?
(ii) Have frames of every generator, stationary Yes/No
motor and so far as practicable portable
motor and the metallic parts (not intended
as conductors) of all transformer and any
other
apparatus used for regulating or
controlling electricity and all apparatus
consuming electricity at voltage exceeding
250V but not exceeding 650V been earthed
by two separate and distinct connections
with earth? Yes/No
(iii) Have the metal castings or metallic
coverings containing or protecting any
electric supply line or apparatus been
properly earthed and so joined and
connected across all junctions boxes as to
make good mechanical and electrical Yes/No
connection? ------- ohms
(iv) Whether consumer’s earth­ electrode, is
properly executed and has been tested. If Yes/No
yes give value of earth resistance.
(v) Is the earth wire free from mechanical
damage?
26 Regulation Have the protections and interlocks for the Yes/No
- 45 generating units been provided? If not
give details.
27 Overhead (i) State if the consumer has any overhead Yes/No
lines lines. Yes/No
(ii) Does the overhead line near the premises
of consumer meets the requirement of
regulation 58, 60 and 61? If not, give Yes/No
details.
(iii) Is, guarding provided for overhead lines at
road crossings?
Any other remarks.
 Date: Signature of the Inspecting Officer / Self-certifying supplier or
owner

Name -------------------------------------------------------------------------
--

Designation -----------------------------------------------------------------
--

File No. ----------------------------------------------------------------------

--

Copy forwarded to Electrical Inspector / Chief Electrical Inspector for -----------------------

---
 ANNEX K
(Clause 2)
LIST OF STANDARDS

IS 732 : 2019 Code of practice for wiring installations

IEC 60364-5-52 : 2009-10 Low voltage electrical installations — Selection and erection of
electrical equipment — wiring systems
IS 1255 : 1983 Code of practice for installation and maintenance of cables up to
and including 33kV rating
NBC 2016 National Building Code
IS 12032: 1987 Graphical symbols in the field of electro-technology
IEC 61386-1 Conduit systems for electrical installations — General
requirements
IEC 61386-21 Conduit systems for cable management — Particular requirements
— Rigid conduit systems
IS 14930-1 : 2001 Conduit systems for Electrical Installations — Particular
requirements
IS 14930-2 : 2001 Conduit systems for Electrical Installations — Particular
requirements — Buried underground
IEC 61084 : 2017 Cable trunking systems and cable ducting systems for electrical
installation
IS 14927 Cable trunking systems and cable ducting systems for electrical
installation
IEC 61537 Cable management — Cable trey system and cable ladder
systems
IEC 61439-1 Low voltage switchgears and control gear assemblies — General
rules
IEC 61439-6 Low voltage switchgears and control gear assemblies — Busbar
trunking systems
IEC 61534-1 Powertrack systems — General requirements
IEC 61534-21/22 Powertrack systems — For wall and ceiling mounting /on floor,
under floor mounting
IS 9537-1/2/3 Conduits for electrical installations
IS 694 : 2010 PVC insulated unsheathed and sheathed cables/cords with rigid
and flexible conductors
IS 3419 Fittings for rigid non metallic conduits
IS 12360 Voltage bands for electrical installations
IS 13032 AC MCB Boards for voltage not exceeding 1 000 V
IS 13703 Low voltage fuses for voltage not exceeding 1 000 VAC or 1
500VDC
IS 12640-1:2016 Residual current operated circuit breakers for household and
similar purposes
IEC 61008-1 Residual current operated circuit breakers without integral over
current protection — General rules
IS 12640-2 Residual current operated circuit breakers with integral over
current protection (RCBOs)
IEC 61009-1 Residual current operated circuit breakers with integral over
current protection (RCBOs) — General rules
IS 1258 Bayonet lamp holders
IEC 61184 Bayonet lamp holders
IEC 60061-2 Lamp cap and holders — Holders
IS 371 Ceiling roses
IS 3854 Switches for domestic and similar purposes
IS 14772 Enclosures for accessories for household and similar fixed
electrical installations
IEC 60670 Boxes and enclosures for electrical accessories for household and
similar fixed electrical installations
IS 10322 Luminaires
IS 374:2019 Electrical ceiling fans and regulators
 PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS
SECTION 10 PROTECTION AGAINST ELECTRIC SHOCK

FOREWORD

Electrical shock is a physiological reaction caused by electric current passing through the
human body. Usually electrical shock occurs when body part comes in contact with a live
conductor. The severity of the shock depends on the magnitude of the current, the parts of the
body through the current flows and the duration of the current flow.

IS/IEC 60479-1: 2005 defies four zones of current-magnitude/

time-duration, in each of which the pathophysiological effects are described
(see Fig. 1). Any person coming into contact with live conductive part risks an electric shock.
Curve C1 shows that when a current greater than 40 mA passes through a human
being from one hand to feet, the person concerned is likely to be killed, unless the
current is interrupted in a relatively short time.

NOTE — In fact, the asymptote of curve C1 is 40 mA. So the value in Fig. 1 should be corrected
(40 mA instead of 30 mA). The RCDs of 30 mA trip at 30 mA maximum, and therefore have a safety
margin compared to the maximum dangerous value

The point 500 ms/100 mA close to the curve C1 corresponds to a probability of heart
fibrillation of the order of 0.14 percent.
 FIG. 1 PATHOPHYSIOLOGICAL EFFECTS IN FOUR ZONES OF CURRENT-
MAGNITUDE/TIME-DURATION

1 SCOPE

This section deals with protection against electric shock as applied to electrical installations. It
is based on Clause 4.2 of IS 732, which is a basic safety standard that applies
to the protection of persons and livestock. The fundamental rule of protection against electric
shock, according to Clause 4.2 of IS 732, is that hazardous live parts must not be accessible
and accessible conductive parts must not be hazardous live, neither under normal conditions
nor under single fault conditions. The protection under normal conditions is provided by basic
protective provisions and protection under single fault conditions is provided by fault
protective provisions. Alternatively, protection against electric shock is provided by an
enhanced protective provision, which provides protection under normal conditions and under
single fault conditions.

2 TERMINOLOGY

2.1 Direct Contact — When a person comes in contact with a conductor which is live, it is
called electric shock by direct contact.
2.2 Indirect Contact — When a person comes in contact with an exposed conductive-part,
which is normally not live but has become live mainly due to insulation failure, is called electric
shock by indirect contact.

3 PROTECTION AGAINST ELECTRIC SHOCK

Three steps described in details in IS 732 (Ref. Clause 4.2 of IS 732) are:

a) Basic protection (protection against direct contact);

b) Fault protection (protection against indirect contact); and
c) Additional protection.

3.1 Basic Protection

3.1.1 Basic protection is provided by basic insulation of live parts or by barriers or enclosures.

3.1.2 Additional measure of protection against direct contact. According to IS 732 (4.2.11.3.3),
additional protection by means of 30 mA RCD must be provided for circuits supplying socket-
outlets with a rated current y 20 A in all locations, and for circuits supplying mobile equipment
with a rated current 32 A for use outdoors.

3.2 Fault Protection

Fault protection is provided by protective equipotential bonding and automatic disconnection

in case of a fault. Exposed-conductive-parts of an electrical equipment is separated from the
live parts of the equipment by the “basic insulation”. Failure of the basic insulation will result
in the exposed-conductive-parts being alive. Touching a normally dead part of an electrical
equipment which has become live due to the failure of its insulation, is referred to as an indirect
contact.

In each part of an installation one or more protective measures shall be applied, considering of
the conditions of external influence. The following protective measures generally are
permitted:

a) automatic disconnection of supply,

b) double or reinforced insulation,
c) electrical separation for the supply of one item of current-using equipment, and
d) extra-low-voltage (SELV and PELV).
 a) Automatic Disconnection for Fault Protection:

1st. step: The earthing of all exposed-conductive-parts of electrical equipment in

the installation with an equipotential bonding network.

2nd step: Automatic disconnection of the supply of the section of the installation
concerned, in such a way that the touch-voltage/time safety requirements
are respected for any level of touch voltage.

3.2.1 Selection of Devices for Automatic discussion of supply.

As per IS 732 every circuit is provided with a means of overcurrent protection. If the earth fault
loop impedance is low enough to cause these devices to operate within the specified times,
(that is, sufficient current can flow to earth under fault conditions), such devices may be relied
upon to give the requisite automatic disconnection of supply. If the earth fault loop impedance
does not permit the overcurrent protective devices to give automatic disconnection of the
supply under earth fault conditions, the first option is to reduce that impedance. It may be
permissible for this to be achieved using protective multiple earthing or by additional earth
electrodes. There are practical limitations to both approaches.

In case of impedance/arcing faults, series protective devices may be ineffective to clear the
faults. automatic disconnection of supply shall be provided by residual current devices, with a
sensitivity adapted to the earth loop impedance (e.g. 300 mA or 500 mA RCDs).

Another option is to be adopted as per IS 732, that is, in AC circuit provide additional protection
with 30 mA RCD.

For TT and TN earthing system, Table 1 of IS 732 specifies tripping time for each system for
safe protection.

b) Double or Reinforced Insulation

Refer clause 4.2.12 of IS 732.

c) Electrical Separation for the Supply of One Item of Current-using Equipment

Refer clause 4.2.13 of IS 732.

d) Extra-low-voltage (SELV and PELV)

Refer clause 4.2.14 of IS 732.

3.3 Additional Protection

In a.c. system, additional protection by means of a 30 mA residual protective device (RCD)

in accordance with clause 4.2.15.1 of IS 732 and shall be provided for:
 a) At the incomer of every sub-distribution board having one or more outgoing circuits
with fixed installation and socket-outlets to safety of users from earth leakage.
b) Mobile.

System voltage independent RCD not exceeding 30 mA shall be used for domestic and
similar application.

4 TYPES OF RCD DEFINED BY THE STANDARDS

IEC 60755: 2017 defines four types of RCDs, for AC applications, aiming at covering
the various type of residual current waveshape. These types are known as type AC, type
A, type F and type B. All these devices are intended to be used on AC supply systems.
NOTE — A new International Document for RCD for DC supply system was recently published
(IEC/TS 63053: 2017). Such devices are known as DC-RCD. The topic of DC-RCD will not be
discussed in detail in this paper.

4.1 Residual Current Devices of Type AC

In most cases, the expected fault current is of the same frequency and waveshape as the
supply (i.e. sinusoidal 50 Hz), either because the fault may occur only on the supply
conductors themselves (for example if the appliance itself is of class 2), or because the
load is resistive.
Residual current devices intended to detect sinusoidal residual currents are defined by
IEC 60755: 2017 as type AC, and are marked with a following standard symbol.

“An RCD for which tripping is ensured for residual sinusoidal alternating cur rents,
whether suddenly applied or slowly rising.” Excerpt of IEC 60755:2017 § 5.2.10.1
RCDs of type AC are used for general purposes applications.
4.2 Residual Current Devices of Type A
The expected fault current may contain pulsating DC waveshape, (for example, the
fault current flows through a rectifier, as shown in Fig. 2). This is the case where the
RCD supplies a load which contain rectifiers, and where a first fault could create such
residual current. The waveshape of the fault current is then defined as pulsating DC residual
current. Residual current devices able to detect such waveshape are known as type A RCD.

FIG 2. EXAMPLE OF APPLICATION WHICH MAY CREATE TYPE A FAULT CURRENT

AND CORRESPONDING WAVESHAPE (IF)

In addition, such devices are able to “withstand” smooth DC residual current of 6 mA

superimposed on the residual current. It is important to note that an RCD of type A is
able to detect pulsating DC residual current and in addition sinusoidal residual current.
Residual current devices of type A are defined in IEC 60755: 2017; they are marked
with the following standard symbol.

RCD of type A shall be used in case the application may create pulsating DC residual
current. For example single phase Class 1 devices with rectifying circuit like cooking
plates.

4.3 Residual Current Devices of Type F

The expected fault current may contain composite residual currents, with frequencies from
a few hertz up to 1000 Hz, as shown in Fig 3. This is the case where the RCD supplies
a load with single phase motor drive. The waveshape of the fault current is then defined as
composite residual current. Residual current devices able to detect such waveshape are known
as type F RCD.
Such devices are also able to withstand smooth DC residual current of 10 mA
superimposed on the residual current. In addition an RCD of type F is also able to detect
all the residual currents detected by a type A RCD. Therefore, a type F RCD can also
be used when a type A RCD (or type AC RCD) is required by installation standards.
 FIG. 3 EXAMPLE OF APPLICATION WHICH MAY CREATE TYPE F FAULT CURRENT
AND CORRESPONDING WAVESHAPE (IF2)

Residual current devices of type F are defined in IEC 60755: 2017; they are marked
with one of the following standard symbol, showing that an RCD of type F complies
also with the requirements for type A.

or
RCDs of type F shall be used in the cases where the application may create composite
residual current. For example single phase Class 1 devices containing a motor controlled
by a variable speed drive. This is the case of heat pump or air conditioner.
4.4 Residual Current Devices of Type B
The waveshape of the residual current may contain various other components such as:
frequencies higher than 50 Hz or 60 Hz, non-sinusoidal waveshape, waveshape resulting
from rectifying circuits with six diodes bridge, or even smooth DC, as shown in Fig. 4.
This is the case when the RCD supplies, for example, a motor with three phase speed -
drive. Residual current devices able to detect such waveshape are known as type B RCD.
Such devices are also able to withstand smooth DC residual current of 10 mA
superimposed on the residual current. In addition an RCD of type B is also able to detect
all the residual currents detected by a type F RCD. Therefore, a type B RCD can be
used when a type F RCD (or type A or type AC RCD) is required by installation
standards.

FIG. 4 EXAMPLE OF APPLICATION WHICH MAY CREATE TYPE B FAULT CURRENT

AND CORRESPONDING WAVESHAPE (IF)
Residual current devices of type B are defined in IEC 60755: 2017.
An RCD for which tripping is ensured as for type F and, in addition:
a) for residual sinusoidal alternating currents up to 1 000 Hz;
b) for residual alternating currents superimposed on a smooth direct current of 0,4
times the rated residual current (I Δn ) or 10 mA whichever is the highest value;
c) for residual pulsating direct currents superimposed on a smooth direct current of
0,4 times the rated residual current (I Δn ) or 10 mA, whichever is the highest
value;
d) for residual direct currents which may result from rectifying circuits, that is,
1) two-pulse bridge connection line to line for two-, three- and four-pole
devices; and
2) three-pulse star connection or six-pulse bridge connection for three- and
four-pole devices.
e) for residual smooth direct currents.
The above specified residual currents may be suddenly applied or slowly increased
independently of polarity.” Excerpt of IEC 60755:2017, § 5.2.10.4
RCDs of type B are marked with one of the following standard symbol.

or
RCDs of type B shall be used in case the application may create smooth DC residual
current, or contain frequencies higher than 50 Hz. For example, three-phase Class 1
devices containing a motor controlled by a three phase variable speed drive. This is the
case of certain types of three phase air conditioner, or pumps, or when supplying an
electric vehicle.
4.5 Time-delay and Selective RCDs
For RCDs with rated residual current strictly higher than 30 mA, the RCD standards
define a selective RCD, also known as type S. Such devices are delayed, they are able
to withstand a residual current during a specified time, without tripping. Type S residual
current device can withstand 2 times I n during 60 ms without tripping.
 PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS

SECTION 11
PROTECTION FOR SAFETY
PROTECTION AGAINST THERMAL EFFECTS

1 FOREWORD

Accidents from electricity especially ignition of fire from electricity in buildings is a major
electrical safety hazard which require careful design, selection and erection of an electrical
installation. This part of NBC explains the methods which need to be implemented to reduce
such accidents.

2 Scope

This section deals with protection against thermal effect. It is based on Clause 4.3 of IS 732,
which is a basic safety standard that applies to the protection of an installation from thermal
effects. The fundamental rule of protection against thermal effect, according to Clause 4.3 of
IS 732 is applicable for protection against thermal effect.

Additional measures required are explained in this section.

This section also applies to arc fault detection devices (AFDDs) for household and similar uses,
intended to be used in a.c. circuits, for rated voltages not exceeding 440 V a.c, with rated
frequencies of 50 Hz, 60 Hz or 50/60 Hz and rated currents not exceeding 63 A.

An AFDD is designed by the manufacturer:

a. either as a single device having opening means able to open the protected circuit in
specified conditions;
b. as a single device integrating a protective device; or
c. as a separate unit, according to Annex D assembled on site with a declared protective
Device.
Note: Refer IS 17121: 2019 for further details

3 REFERENCES

The standards listed below contain provisions which, through reference in this text, constitute
provision of this standard. At the time of publication, the edition indicated were valid. All
standards are subject to revision and parties to agreement based on this standard are encouraged
to investigate the possibility of applying the most recent editions of the standards.

IS/IEC No. Title

IS 732: 2019 Code of practice for electrical wiring installations
IS 17121: 2019 General requirements for arc fault detection devices

4 TERMS AND DEFINITIONS

For the purposes of this standard, the terms and definitions given in IEC/TR 60755, IS/IEC
60898-1, IS 12640(Part 1 & 2):2016, IEC 62423 and the following apply.

NOTE — Where the terms "voltage" or "current" are used, they imply r.m.s. values, unless
otherwise specified.

4.1 Arc Arcing - Luminous discharge of electricity across an insulating medium, usually
accompanied by the partial volatilization of the electrodes.

Note 1 to entry: A complete sinusoidal current half cycle is not considered to be an arcing half
cycle.

4.2 Arc Fault Arcing Fault - Dangerous unintentional arc.

4.3 Arc Fault Detection Device (AFDD) - Device intended to mitigate the effects of arcing
faults by disconnecting the circuit when an arc fault is detected.

4.4 Arc Fault Detection Unit (AFD Unit) - Part of the AFDD ensuring the function of
detection and discrimination of dangerous earth, parallel and series arc faults and initiating the
operation of the device to cause interruption of the current

4.5 Detection - Function consisting in sensing the presence of an arc fault current.

4.6 Interruption - Function consisting in bringing automatically the main contacts of the
AFDD from the closed position into the open position, thereby interrupting the arc fault
current(s) flowing through them.

4.7 Earth Arc Fault - Arc fault where the current is flowing from active conductor to the earth
Note 1 to entry: The earth arc current may have a value close to the parallel arc current in some
installations (for example,
TN installation).

4.8 Parallel Arc Fault - Arc fault where the arc current is flowing between active conductors
in parallel with the load of the circuit.

4.9 Series Arc Fault — Arc fault where the current is flowing through the load(s) of the final
circuit protected by an AFDD.

4.10 Closed Position - Position in which the predetermined continuity of the main circuit of
the AFDD is secured.

5. PROTECTION AGAINST FIRE CAUSED BY ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

5.1 General requirement:

5.1.1 Persons, livestock and property shall be protected against damage or injury caused by heat
or fire which may be generated or propagated in electrical installations by considering the
requirements of this code and the instructions of equipment manufacturers.
5.1.2 The heat generated by electrical equipment shall not cause danger or harmful effects to
adjacent fixed material or to material which may foreseeable be in proximity to such equipment.
Electrical equipment shall not present a fire hazard to adjacent materials.

Damage, injury or ignition may be caused by effects, such as:

a) heat accumulation, heat radiation, hot elements,

b) reduction of the safe function of electrical equipment, for example, protective devices, such as
protective switchgear, thermostats, temperature limiters, seals of cable penetrations and wiring
systems,
c) overcurrent,
d) insulation faults and/or arcs causing interference,
e) harmonic currents,
f) lightning strikes (see the IS/ IEC 62305 series),
g) over voltages (see 4.5.3 of IS 732), and
h) inappropriate selection or erection of equipment.

5.2 PRECAUTIONS WHERE PARTICULAR RISKS OF FIRE EXIST

5.2.1 General

5.2.1 Electrical equipment shall be restricted to that necessary for the use of these locations.

5.2.2 Electrical equipment shall be so selected and erected that its temperature in normal use
and foreseeable temperature rise during a fault cannot cause a fire.

These arrangements may be affected by the construction of equipment or its conditions of

installation.

5.2.3 Thermal cut-out devices shall have manual resetting only.

5.3 PROTECTION AGAINST FIRE DUE TO LEAKAGE CURRENT

Laboratory experiment shows that a leakage current above 250 mA cause fire ignitions. IS 732
have recommended for protection against such high leakage current.

Final circuits and current-using equipment shall be protected against insulation faults as follows:

a) In TN and TT systems, RCDs with a rated residual operating current I∆n 300 mA shall be used.
Where resistive faults may cause a fire, for example, for overhead heating with heating film
elements, the rated residual operating current shall be I∆n 30 mA.
b) In IT systems, insulation monitoring devices monitoring the whole installation or RCMs
(residual current monitoring devices) in the final circuits, both with audible and visual signals,
shall be provided. Alternatively, RCDs with a rated residual operating current as specified in
a) may be used. In the event of a second fault, see 4.2.11 of IS 732 for disconnection times.

Mineral insulated cables and busbar trunking systems are not considered likely to cause a fire from
insulation faults and therefore need not be protected.
NOTE - Cables with metallic coverings are recommended. The metallic covering should be connected to the protective conductor.
5.4 PROTECTION AGAINST BURNS
Accessible parts of electrical equipment within arm’s reach shall not attain a temperature likely to
cause burns to persons and shall comply with the appropriate limit stated in Table 1. All parts of
the installation likely in normal service to attain, even for short periods, temperatures exceeding
the limits stated in Table 1 shall be guarded so as to prevent any accidental contact. However, the
values in Table 1 do not apply to equipment complying with IS standards for the type of equipment
concerned.
NOTE — Lower temperatures may be applicable where condition BA2 (children) applies.

Table 1 Temperature limits in Normal Service for Accessible

Parts of Equipment Within Arm’s Reach

SL no Accessible part Material of accessible Maximum

(1) surface Temperature 0C
(2) (3)
1 Hand-held means of operation Metallic 55
Non metallic 65
2 Parts intended to be touched but not Metallic 70
hand-held Non metallic 80
3 Parts which need not be touched for Metallic 80
normal operation Non metallic 90

5.5 PROTECTION AGAINST OVERHEATING

5.5.1 Forced Air Heating Systems
Forced air heating systems shall be such that their heating elements, other than those of central
storage heaters, cannot be activated until the prescribed air flow has been established and are
deactivated when the air flow is less than the prescribed value. In addition, they shall have two
temperature limiting devices independent of each other which prevent permissible temperatures
from being exceeded in air ducts.
Supporting parts, frames and enclosures of heating elements shall be of non-combustible material.
5.5.2 Appliances Producing Hot Water or Steam
All appliances producing hot water or steam shall be protected by design or erection against
overheating in all service conditions. Unless the appliances comply as a whole with the appropriate
IS standards, the protection shall be by means of an appropriate non-self-resetting device,
functioning independently of the thermostat.
If an appliance has no free outlet, it shall also be provided with a device which limits the internal
water pressure.
5.5.3 Space Heating Appliances
The frame and enclosure of space heating appliances shall be of non-combustible material.
NOTE — In operating areas with a fire risk, space heating appliances may not be operated if the air from these
areas is guided through the appliance.
The side walls of radiant heaters which are not touched by the heat radiation should have a
sufficient distance from flammable parts. In case of a reduction of the distance by a non-flammable
partition, this partition should have a distance of at least 1 cm to the enclosure of the radiant heater
and to flammable parts.
Unless otherwise declared by the manufacturer, radiant heaters should be mounted so that in the
direction of radiation a safety distance of at least 2 m from flammable parts is ensured.

6.0 PROTECTION AGAINST ARC FAULT

6.1 ARC FAULT

Fires by electrical installations are often initiated by arc faults that result from parallel arcs, or
series arcs caused by insulation defects between active conductors or loose terminal
connections.

During a series arc fault, there is no leakage current to earth therefore RCDs cannot detect,
such a fault. Moreover, the impedance of the series arc fault reduces the load current, in such
case, and the current remains below the tripping threshold of a circuit-breaker or a fuse.

In the case of a parallel arc between line and neutral conductor, the current is limited by the
impedance of the installation and the arc itself, therefore, the resulting fault current could be
lower than the operating current of the overcurrent protective device.

6.2 ARC FAULT DETECTION DEVICES (AFDD)

Arc fault detection devices are capable of detecting fault conditions that result from a sustained
arcing junction that could be either limited by the available current from the distribution wiring
(considered as parallel arc faults) or limited by a load within the protected circuit (considered
as series arc faults).
In a.c. circuits, the use of arc fault detection devices (AFDD) in compliance with IS 17121
could further contribute to the reduction of risk to persons, livestock and property resulting
from extensive fires being propagated from electrical installations and appliances.

6.3 CLASSIFICATION

The following three devices are specified in IS 17121:

a) AFDD as one single device, comprising an AFD unit and opening means and intended
to be connected in series with a suitable short-circuit protective device declared by the
manufacturer as complying with one or more of the following standards IS/IEC 60898-
1 ,IS 12640(Part 2) or the IEC 60269 series [34];

b) AFDD as one single device, comprising an AFD unit integrated in a protective device
complying with one or more of the following standards IS/IEC 60898-1, IS 12640(Part
2) or IEC 62423; and

c) AFDD comprised of an AFD unit and a declared protective device, intended to be

assembled on site.

NOTE — Refer IS1712 : 2019 for further details of classifications of AFDD.

6.4 SPECIAL MEASURES

Special measures shall be taken to protect against the effects of arc fault in final circuits:

Arc fault detection devices (AFDDs) shall be provided for single-phase a.c systems with an
operating current not higher than 32A:

a) in premises with sleeping accommodation;

b) In bedrooms and habitable rooms in kindergarten and day care centers for children,
disabled and elderly people (for example, nurseries for children or ole people’s homes)
c) In bedrooms or habitable rooms in barrier-free accommodations for handicapped
persons;
d) In locations

i. With risks of fire due to the nature of processed or stored materials, that is,
BE2 locations, (for example, barns, wood-working shops, stores of
combustible material.
ii. With combustible constructional material, that is, CA2 locations (for
example, wooden buildings).
iii. with endangering of irreplaceable good.

In a.c. circuits, the use of arc fault detection devices (AFDD) in compliance with IS 17121 will
satisfy the above-mentioned recommendation.

If used, an AFDD shall be placed at the origin of the circuit to be protected.

The use of AFDDs does not obviate the need to apply one or more measures provided in
other clauses in this standard.

Family rooms, dining rooms, living rooms, parlors, libraries, dens, sunrooms, recreation rooms,
closets, hallways or other rooms in which movement or placement of furniture or movement
by persons has increased the likelihood of damaging exposed cables.
 PART 1

SECTION 12

PROTECTION FOR SAFETY

PROTECTION AGAINST OVERCURRENT AND FAULT CURRENTS

FOREWORD IS/IEC 61439-6: Low-voltage switchgear and

controlgear assemblies: Part 6
Safe and reliable electrical network is possible through Busbar trunking systems (busways)
the protection against overcurrent. This Section
provides requirements for the protection of live IS 17345 (Part 1): 2020 Powertrack systems: Part 1
conductors from the effects of overcurrent. This General requirements
section describes how live conductors are protected by
one or more devices for the automatic disconnection 3 GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS
of the supply in the event of overload and short-circuit
except where the conditions described in omission of 3.0 GENERAL
devices for protection are met.
Protective devices shall be provided to disconnect any
overcurrent in the circuit conductors before such a
Assistance for this section has been derived from
clause 4.2 of IS732 Protection for safety - Protection current could cause danger due to thermal or
mechanical effects detrimental to insulation, joints,
against overcurrent.
terminations or material surrounding the conductors.
1 SCOPE

This section deals with protection against overcurrent. 4 Requirements as per the nature of the circuits
It is based on Clause 4.4 of IS 732, which is a basic 4.1 Protection of Line Conductors
safety standard that applies to the protection of an
installation from over current (overload and short 4.1.1 Detection of overcurrent shall be provided for all
circuit current). The fundamental rule of protection line conductors, and it shall cause the disconnection of
against over current, according to Clause 4.4 of IS 732 the conductor in which the overcurrent is detected but
is applicable for protection against over current. not necessarily other live conductors; except where,
disconnection of a single phase may cause danger, for
Additional measures required are explained in this
example in the case of a three-phase motor.
section.
4.1.2 In a TT or TN system, with not distributed
2 REFERENCES neutral conductor, overcurrent detection need not be
provided for one of the line conductors, provided that
The standards listed below contain provisions which, on the same circuit protection intended to detect
through reference in this text, constitute provision of unbalanced loads and cause disconnection of all the
this standard. At the time of publication, the editions line conductors exists.
indicated were valid. All standards are subject to
revision and parties to agreement based on this 4.2 Protection of the Neutral Conductor
standard are encouraged to investigate the possibility
of applying the most recent editions of the standards. 4.2.1 TT or TN Systems
IS/IEC No. Title protection of the neutral conductor in TT and TN
systems shall be as per table 1
IS 732: 2019 Code of practice for electrical wiring
installations

Table 1 Protection of the Neutral Conductor in TT and TN Systems

Neutral conductor Over current Short circuit
Cross section area Current Detection protection
`=Line conductor <= Line conductor Not necessary Required
 < Line conductor <= Line conductor Necessary(1) Required
All possibility > Line conductor(4)(5) Necessary(1) Required
Note
(1) Appropriate to the cross-sectional area of that conductor; this detection shall cause the disconnection of the line
conductors, but not necessarily of the neutral conductor
(2) If Protection is achieved by overcurrent protective devices in the line conductors, it is not necessary to provide overcurrent
disconnecting device for the neutral conductor.
(3) PEN conductor should never be disconnected
(4) Caused due to harmonic content in line current.
(5) Current in the neutral conductor is expected to exceed the Iz of that conductor.

4.2.2 IT Systems 4.4.4 The characteristics of overcurrent

protective devices shall comply with relevant
In IT systems, it is strongly recommended that the product standards, for example, IS/IEC 60898,
neutral conductor should not be distributed. If the IS/ IEC 60947-2, IS12640-2, IEC 60269-2,
neutral conductor is distributed and no protection IEC 60269-3 etc.,
is provided on the supply side/ origin of the
installation, overcurrent detection shall be 4.5 Protection Against Overload Current
provided for the neutral conductor of every
circuit and this shall cause the disconnection of 4.5.1 Coordination between Conductors and
all the live and neutral conductors of the Overload Protective Devices
corresponding circuit. A device protecting a cable against overload shall
satisfy the two following conditions:
This measure is not necessary if the particular
circuit is protected by a residual current device IB  In  I Z (1)
(RCD) with a rated residual current not exceeding
0.20 times Iz of the neutral conductor. I 2  1,45  I Z (2)

4.3 Disconnection and Reconnection of the Where,

Neutral Conductor in Multi-phase Systems I B = design current for that circuit; (the line or neutral
The neutral conductor shall not be disconnected current in case of harmonic after applying
before the line conductors and shall be correction factors);
reconnected at the same time as or before the line IZ = continuous current-carrying capacity of the
conductors. cable;

4.4 Nature of Protective Devices In = is the rated current or current setting selected
of the protective device; and
4.4.1 Devices providing protection against both I2 = is the current ensuring effective operation in
overload and short-circuit current shall be
the conventional time of the protective device.
capable of breaking and, for a circuit-breaker,
making any overcurrent up to and including the
prospective short-circuit current at the point
where the device is installed. A cable with larger cross-sectional area shall be
used where sustained overcurrent < I 2 occurs.
4.4.2 Devices ensuring overload current
protection only may have an interrupting capacity
below the prospective short-circuit current.

4.4.3 Devices with short-circuit current

protection only shall comply with requirements of
4.4.1 where in overload protection is achieved by
other means or as per 5 overload protection to be
dispensed with.
 t  (k * S / I)2 (3)

Where,
t = is the duration, in s;
S = is the cross-sectional area, in mm 2 ;
I = is the effective short-circuit current, in A,
expressed as an r.m.s. value; and
k = is a factor taking account of the resistivity,
temperature coefficient and heat capacity of
the conductor material, and the appropriate
initial and final temperatures.
4.7 Position of Devices for Overload and Short-
circuit Protection
4.7.1 A device ensuring protection against
overcurrent shall be placed at the point where a
change, such as a change in cross-sectional area,
Fig 1 Illustration of Condition 1 & 2 nature, method of installation or in constitution,
causes a reduction in the value of current-
4.6 Protection Against Short-circuit Currents
carrying capacity of the conductors.
4.6.1 The prospective short-circuit current at
4.7.2 The protection device may be placed other
every relevant point of the installation shall be
than 4.7.1, under the following conditions,
determined by calculation or by measurement.
NOTE — The prospective short-circuit current at the In the part of the conductor between the point of
supply point may be obtained from the supply utility . reduction of cross-sectional area or other change
and the position of the protective device there
4.6.2 Characteristics of Short-circuit Protective shall be no branch circuits nor socket-outlet
Devices circuits and that part of the conductor shall :
4.6.2.1 The rated breaking capacity shall be not
less than the prospective maximum short-circuit a) not exceed 3 m in length, and
current at the place of its installation, except b) be installed in such a manner as to reduce the
where the following paragraph applies. risk of a short-circuit to a minimum, and to
reduce risk of fire or danger to person.
4.6.2.2 A lower rated breaking capacity is
permitted if another protective device having the
necessary breaking capacity is installed on the
supply side. In that case energy let through by
these two devices does not exceed the withstood
limit of the device & conductor on the load side.

4.6.2.3 For cables and insulated conductors,

short-circuit current interruption time shall not
exceeding the permitted limit temperature of the
insulation of the conductor. NOTE — S – Cross section area of conductor
For operating times of protective devices <0,1 s Fig. 2 Limited Change of Position of Short-circuit
where asymmetry of the current is of importance Protective Device (P2) on the Branch Circuit
and for current-limiting devices k 2 S 2 > I 2 t (let-
c) not be placed close to combustible material.
through energy) of the protective device.
4.7.3 A protective device may be placed on the
For short-circuits of duration up to 5 s, the time t,
supply side provided that it protects the wiring
in which short-circuit current will raise the
situated on the load side against short-circuit.
insulation of the conductors from the highest
permissible temperature to the limit temperature 5 OMISSION OF DEVICE FOR
shall be calculated from the formula: PROTECTION AGAINST OVERCURRENT
5.1 Cases where omission of devices for 5.6 Alternative position or omission of devices
overcurrent protection shall be considered for for protection against overload are not applicable
safety reasons for circuits supplying current- to IT systems unless each circuit not protected
using equipment where unexpected disconnection against overload is protected by RCD or by
of the circuit could cause danger or damage. permanently supervised systems only use of
Examples: insulation monitoring which either disconnect the
circuit for the first fault or gives a signal
a) exciter circuits of rotating machines;
indicating a fault.
b) supply circuits of lifting magnets;
6 OVERCURRENT PROTECTION OF
c) secondary circuits of current transformers; CONDUCTORS IN PARALLEL
d) circuits which supply fire extinguishing 6.1 Where a single protective device protects
devices; several conductors in parallel, there shall be no
e) circuits supplying safety services (burglar branch circuits or devices for isolation or
alarm, gas alarms, etc.); and switching in the parallel conductors. This sub-
clause does not preclude the use of final ring
f) Certain measuring circuits, signalling, circuits.
telecommunication, control and similar.
6.2 If parallel conductors shares equal currents
the value of I z is the sum of the I z of the various
NOTE — In such cases, consideration should be
given to the provision of an overload alarm. conductors.
5.2 Omission of protective device shall be 6.3 In case of unequal current sharing between
permitted at the origin of an installation where the parallel conductors overload protection for each
distributor provides an overcurrent device and conductor shall be considered individually.
agrees that it affords protection between the
origin and the main distribution point of the NOTE — Currents in parallel conductors are
considered to be unequal if the difference between any
installation where further overcurrent protection
currents is more than 10 percent of the design current
is provided . for each conductor.
5.3 For considering omission of short circuit 6.4 For short circuit protection, if operation of a
protection as per 4.7.2 and 4.7.3 the wiring single protective device is not effective, then for
installation shall be in such a way to reduce the two conductors in parallel, a short-circuit
risk of short-circuit to a minimum and wiring is protective device shall be provided at the supply
not placed close to combustible material. end of each parallel conductor or For more than
5.4 For conductor not likely to carry overload two conductors in parallel, short-circuit
current, overload protection shall be omitted protective devices shall be provided at the supply
provided that this conductor is protected against and load ends of each parallel conductor.
short-circuit.
7 For busbar trunking systems complying with IS/
5.5 In IT systems without a neutral conductor, the IEC 61439-6 and powertrack complying with the
overload protective device may be omitted in one IS 17345 (Part 1), one of the following
of the phase conductors if a RCD is installed in requirements in Table 2 shall apply:
each circuit.
Table 2 Protection for Busbar Trunking or Powertrack System
(Clause 6.5)
Busbar Trunking or Powertrack System Condition Protective Device
The rated short-time withstand current (ICW) > prospective short-circuit current (r.m.s.)
The rated peak withstand current > Prospective short-circuit current (peak)
The maximum time for the ICW > Maximum operating time of the protective device
The rated conditional short-circuit current > Prospective short-circuit current

8 COORDINATION OF OVERLOAD AND SHORT-CIRCUIT PROTECTION WHEN

PROTECTION IS AFFORDED BY SEPARATE DEVICES
The requirements of 4.4, 4.5 and 4.6 apply, to the overload protective and short-circuit protective device.

The characteristics of the devices shall be coordinated so that the energy let through by the short -circuit
protective device does not exceed that which can be withstood without damage by the overload protect ive
device.

NOTE — This requirement does not exclude the type of coordination specified in IS/ IEC 60947 series.

9 LIMITATION OF OVERCURRENT BY CHARACTERISTICS OF SUPPLY

Conductors are considered to be protected against overcurrent when they are supplied from a source
incapable of supplying a current exceeding the I z of the conductors (for example, certain bell transformers,
certain welding transformers and certain types of thermoelectric generating sets).
 PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASCEPTS

SECTION 13 PROTECTION AGAINST VOLTAGE DISTURBANCES,

ELECTROMAGNETIC DISTURBANCES AND VOLTAGE SURGES

1 SCOPE
This section deals with protection against requirements for the safety of electrical installations in
the event of voltage disturbances, electromagnetic disturbances and voltage surges generated for
different specified reasons. It is based on Clause 5.5 of IS 732, which is a basic safety standard that
applies to the safety of persons, livestock and property against dangers and damage which may arise in
the reasonable use of electrical installations and to provide for the proper functioning of those
installations.

2 PROTECTION OF LOW-VOLTAGE INSTALLATIONS AGAINST TEMPORARY

OVER VOLTAGES DUE TO EARTH FAULTS IN THE HIGH-VOLTAGE SYSTEM
AND DUE TO FAULTS IN THE LOW-VOLTAGE SYSTEM

Refer clause 4.5.2 of IS 732.

3 PROTECTION AGAINST TRANSIENT OVERVOLTAGES OF ATMOSPHERIC

ORIGIN OR DUE TO SWITCHING

Refer clause 4.5.3 of IS 732.

3.1 Risk Assessment to determine protection against transient over voltage of

atmospheric origin.

3.1.1 Terms and Definitions

3.1.1.1 Urban Environment — Area with a high density of buildings or densely populated
communities with tall buildings (for example, A town centre is an example of an urban
environment).

3.1.1.2 Suburban Environment — Area with a medium density of buildings (for example, Town
outskirts are an example of a suburban environment).

3.1.1.3 Rural Environment — Area with a low density of buildings.

3.1.1.4 Surge Protective Device (SPD) — Device that contains at least one non-linear
component that is intended to limit surge voltages and divert surge currents.

3.1.1.5 Calculated Risk Level (CRL) — Calculated value of risk used to evaluate the need for
transient overvoltage protection.

3.1.1.6 Rated Impulse Voltage (UW) — Impulse withstand voltage value assigned by the
manufacturer to the equipment or to a part of it, characterizing the specified withstand
capability of its insulation against transient over voltages.
3.1.1.7 Overvoltage Control — Protection against transient overvoltage shall be provided
where the consequence caused by overvoltage affects:

a) human life, for example, safety services, medical care facilities;

b) public services and cultural heritage, for example, loss of public services, IT centers,
museums; and
c) commercial or industrial activity, for example, hotels, banks, industries, commercial
markets, farms.

For all other cases, a risk assessment according to 3.2.8 shall be performed in order to determine
if protection against transient overvoltage is required. If the risk assessment is not performed,
the electrical installation shall be provided with protection against transient overvoltage.

Protection against switching over voltages should be considered in the case of equipment likely
to produce switching over voltages or disturbances exceeding the values according to the
overvoltage category of the installation for example, where a LV generator supply the
installation or where inductive or capacitive loads (for example, motors, transformers,
capacitor banks, etc.), storage units or high current loads are installed.

NOTE
Annex C provides guidance for overvoltage control where utility provided SPDs are installed on overhead lines.

For a low-voltage installation supplied from a high-voltage distribution network through a

separate transformer (i.e. an industrial application), additional means for protection against
overvoltages due to lightning should be installed on the high-voltage side of the transformer.

3.2 Risk Assessment Method — Calculated risk level (CRL) is used to determine if protection
against transient overvoltages of atmospheric origin is required.

NOTE — For protection of a structure and its electrical systems against lightning and surges of atmospheric origin,
IS/IEC 62305 applies.

The CRL is found by the following formula:

CRL = fenv/(Lp x Ng)

where
a) fenv is an environmental factor and the value of fenv shall be calculated according to
Table 3.
Table 3 Calculation of fenv
[Clause 3.2.8 a)]

Sl No. Environment fenv

(1) (2) (3)
i) Rural and suburban environment 85 x F
ii) Urban Environment 850 x F

The value of coefficient F shall be taken equal to 1 for all installations. However, National
Committees may adjust the value of coefficient F from 1 to 3 for dwellings.

b) Ng is the lightning ground flash density (flash per km2 per year) relevant to the location
of the power line and connected structure;
 NOTE — According to IS/IEC 62305-2:, Clause A-1, 25 thunderstorm days per year are equivalent to a value
of 2.5 flashes per km2 per year. This is derived from the formula Ng = 0.1 × Td, where Td is the number of
thunderstorm days per year (keraunic level).

c) the risk assessment length LP is calculated as below:

LP = 2 LPAL + LPCL + 0.4 LPAH + 0.2 LPCH

Where,
LPAL = the length (km) of low-voltage overhead line;
LPCL = the length (km) of low-voltage underground cable;
LPAH = the length (km) of high-voltage overhead line; and
LPCH = the length (km) of high-voltage underground cable.

The total length (LPAL + LPCL + LPAH + LPCH) is limited to 1 km or by the distance from the first
overvoltage protective device installed in the power network to the entrance of the installation,
whichever is the smaller.

If the distribution networks lengths are totally or partially unknown then LPAL shall be taken
equal to the remaining distance to reach a total length of 1 km.

For example, if only the distance of underground cable is known (for example, 100 m), then
the LPAL shall be taken equal to 90 m. An illustration of an installation showing the lengths to
consider is given in Fig. 3.

Key
1 — Origin of the installation
2 — LV/HV transformer
3 — Surge arrestor (overvoltage protective device)
Fig. 1: illustration of an installation showing the lengths to consider

If CRL ≥ 1 000, no protection against transient overvoltages of atmospheric origin is needed;

If CRL < 1 000, protection against transient overvoltages of atmospheric origin is required.

NOTE — Examples of calculations of CRL are given in Annex B.

4.0 Measures against electromagnetic influences

 Refer clause 4.5.4 of IS 732.

4.1: Segregation of circuits

4.1.1 General

Power supply cables (or conductors) and information and communication technology cables
which share the same cable management system or the same route, shall be installed according
to the requirements of 4.1.

NOTE For the purposes of this subclause, cable management systems are considered to include
busbar trunking systems.

Electrical safety and electromagnetic compatibility may produce different requirements for
electrical segregation and electrical separation. Electrical safety always has the higher priority.

4.2 Design requirements

The following requirements apply unless 4.3 applies.

Where the specification and/or intended application of the information and communication
technology cable is not available, the cable separation distance between the power and
information and communication technology cables shall be not less than 200 mm in free air,
provided:

− the total current in a LV cable or in a bundle of LV cables does not exceed 600 A,
− the applications supported by the cabling are designed to operate using the information
and communication technology cabling installed or to be installed, and
− the information and communication technology cables are: balanced cables having
electromagnetic immunity performance in accordance with IEC 61156 (all parts) for
Category 5 and above, or coaxial cables having electromagnetic immunity performance
in accordance with IEC 61196-7.

In all other cases, the requirements and recommendations of ISO/IEC 14763-2:2012, 7.9.2,
apply.

The 200 mm separation distance may be reduced according to Table 4.1.

Where a screened power cable is used, the separation distance may be reduced in accordance
with the specification provided by the screened power cable manufacturer, provided that the
screen is earthed at both ends.

Power cables that also carry information and communication technology applications are not
considered to be information and communication technology cables.

Table 4.1 – Summary of minimum separation distances where the specification and/or intended
application of the information and communication technology cable is not available

Containment applied to the power supply cabling

Separation without Open metallic Perforated metallic Solid metallic
 electromagnetic Containment containment containment
barrier A B C
200 mm 150 mm 100 mm 0 mm
A. Applicable to containment with screening performance (DC-100 MHz) equivalent to
welded mesh steel basket of mesh size 50 mm x 100 mm. This screening performance is
also achieved with steel tray even if the wall thickness is less than 1,0 mm and/or the
evenly distributed perforated area is greater than 20 %.
B. Applicable to containment with screening performance (DC-100 MHz) equivalent to
steel tray of at least 1,0 mm wall thickness and no more than 20 % evenly distributed
perforated area. The screens or armouring of power cables are considered to act as
perforated metallic containment if they do not meet this constructional equivalent of
solid metallic containment.
C. Applicable to containment with screening performance (DC-100 MHz) equivalent to a
steel conduit of at least 1,5 mm wall thickness.

The minimum separation between the information and communication technology cables and
power supply cables shall include all allowances for cable movement between their fixing
points or other restraints (see example in Figure 2).

Fig. 2 – Example of cable separation distance

The minimum separation requirement applies in three dimensions. However, where

information and communication technology cables and power supply cables are required to
cross and required minimum separation cannot be maintained then the angle of their crossing
shall be maintained at approximately 90° on either side of the crossing for a distance no less
than the applicable minimum separation requirement.

4.3 Conditions for zero segregation

No segregation is required between information and communication technology cabling and

power supply cabling (other than clause 5.2 of IS732) provided that the information and
communication technology cabling is application(s)-specific and the application(s) support(s)
a zero segregation relaxation.

No segregation is required between information and communication technology cabling and

power supply cabling where all the following conditions are met:
 − the information and communication technology cables are in accordance with IEC
61156 (all parts) for Category 5 and above, or are coaxial cables having electromagnetic
immunity performance in accordance with IEC 61196-7,
− the environmental classification of the space containing the information and
communication technology cabling complies with electromagnetic classification E1 of
ISO/IEC TR 29106 (or ISO/IEC 11801-1), and
− the power supply conductors comprising a circuit are either:
 within an overall sheath and provide a total current no greater than 100 A, or
 twisted, taped or bundled together and provide a total power no greater than 10 kVA.

5 PROTECTION AGAINST UNDERVOLTAGE

5.1 General Requirements
5.1.1 Where a drop in voltage, or a loss and subsequent restoration of voltage could imply
dangerous situations for persons or property, suitable precautions shall be taken. Also,
precautions shall be taken where a part of the installation or current-using equipment may
be damaged by a drop in voltage.
An undervoltage protective device is not required if damage to the installation or to current-
using equipment is considered to be an acceptable risk, provided that no danger is caused to
persons.
5.1.2 The operation of undervoltage protective devices may be delayed if the operation of
the appliance protected allows without danger a brief interruption or loss of voltage.
5.1.3 If use is made of contactors, delay in their opening and reclosing shall not impede
instantaneous disconnection by control or protective devices.
5.1.4 The characteristics of the undervoltage protective device shall be compatible with the
requirements of the relevant standards for starting and use of equipment.
5.1.5 Where the reclosure of a protective device is likely to create a dangerous situation, the
reclosure shall not be automatic.
6 PROTECTION AGAINST VOLTAGE SURGES

Refer clause 5.3.5 of IS 732.

6.1 SPD location and SPD test class

SPDs shall at least be installed as close as possible to the origin of the installation. For
protection against effects of lightning and against switching overvoltages, class II tested SPDs
(Type T2) shall be used.

Where the structure is equipped with an external lightning protection system or protection
against effects of direct lightning is otherwise specified, class I tested SPDs (Type T1) shall be
used.

Where the structure is not equipped with an external lightning protection system and where the
occurrence of direct lightning strike to the overhead lines between the last pole and the entrance
of the installation is to be taken into consideration, class I tested SPDs at or near the origin of
the electrical installation may be also selected according to Annex D.
NOTE:
− The origin of the installation could be the location where the supply enters the
building or the main distribution board.
− Following the product standard, the marking of the product is as follows:
 for test class I: "test class I" and/or Type "T1" (T1 in a square);
 for test class II: "test class II" and/or Type "T2" (T2 in a square);
 for test class III: "test class III" and/or Type "T3" (T3 in a square).

Additional class II tested or class III tested SPDs may be needed to sufficiently protect the
installation according to 534.4.4.2 and shall be located downstream in the fixed electrical
installation, for example in the sub-distribution boards or at the socket outlets. These SPDs
shall not be used without SPDs being installed at the origin of the installation and shall be
coordinated with SPDs located upstream.

If a class I tested SPD is not able to provide voltage protection to an equipment lower than its
rated impulse withstand (UW), it shall be accompanied by a coordinated class II tested or class
III tested SPD to ensure the required voltage protection level.

Additional class II tested SPDs or class III tested SPDs may be needed close to sensitive
equipment to sufficiently protect the equipment and shall be coordinated with SPDs located
upstream.

Additional SPDs may be necessary to provide transient overvoltage protection regarding

threats coming from other sources such as:

– switching overvoltages produced by current using equipment located within the

installation;
– overvoltages on other incoming services such as telephone lines, internet connections;
– overvoltages on other services feeding other structures such as secondary buildings,
– external installations/lighting, power lines feeding external sensors;

in which case one should consider installing SPDs located as close as possible to the origin of
such threats. More information may be found in IS 16463-12.

At or near the origin of the Distribution circuits Close to sensitive equipment

installation e.g. sub-distribution board
e.g. Main distribution board
 Type 1 T1 Type 2 T2 Type 2 T2
And/or or or
Type 2 T2 Type 3 T3 Type 3 T3
Fig. 3 – Example of installation of Type 1, Type 2 and Type 3 SPDs

The presence of SPDs installed downstream of a distribution board (e.g. in a socket-outlet)

shall be permanently indicated (e.g. by a label) in this distribution board.

6.2 Transient overvoltage protection requirements

Protection against transient overvoltages may be provided:

– between live conductors and PE (common mode protection);

– between live conductors (differential mode protection).

NOTE
− Connection type CT1 provides primarily common mode protection. If differential mode
protection is also necessary, this will in most cases require additional SPDs between
live conductors.
− Connection type CT2 provides a combination of common mode protection and
differential mode protection.

Protection between live conductors and PE (including neutral to PE if there is a neutral

conductor) is compulsory.

Protection between line conductors and neutral (if there is a neutral conductor) is recommended
to ensure equipment protection.

Protection between line conductors (in the case of multiple phases) is optional.

Some equipment may require both common mode protection (for impulse withstand) and
differential mode protection (for impulse immunity).

NOTE
− For example, electronic class I equipment or class II equipment with FE-connection
requires common mode as well as differential mode protection to ensure overall
protection against transient overvoltages due to switching or from atmospheric origin.
Fig. 4 – Connection type CT1 Fig. 5 – Connection Fig. 6 – Connection type CT2
(4+0-configuration) for a three- type CT1 (3+0- (e.g. 3+1-configuration)
phase system with neutral configuration) for a for a three-phase system with
three-phase system neutral
 ANNEX A
(Clause 2)
LIST OF STANDARDS
IS No./Other Publication Title
1. IS 732: 2019 Code of practice for electrical wiring installations
2. IEC 60364-4-44: Low-voltage electrical installations - Part 4-44: Protection for safety —
Protection against voltage disturbances and electromagnetic disturbances
3. IS 1885 (Part 70): International electrotechnical vocabulary - Chapter 604: Generation,
transmission and distribution of electricity – Operation.
4. IS/IEC 60479-1: Effects of current on human beings and livestock - Part 1: General aspects.
5. IEC 60664-1: 2007 Insulation co-ordination for equipment within low-voltage systems – Part
1: Principles, requirements and tests.
6. IS 13252 (Part 1) /IEC 60950-1: Information technology equipment - Safety - Part 1: General
requirements.
7. IEC 61000-2-5: Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 2: Environment - Section 5:
Classification of electromagnetic environments - Basic EMC publication
8. IS 14700 (Part 6 / Sec 1): 2019/ IEC 61000-6-1: Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)- Part
6-1: Generic standards - Immunity for residential, commercial and light-industrial
environments
9. IS 14700 (Part 6 / Sec 2): 2019 IEC 61000-6-2: Electromagnetic compatibility EMC: Part 6
Generic standards, Section 2 Immunity standard for industrial environments (first revision)
10. IS 14700 (Part 6 / Sec 3): 2018 Electromagnetic compatibility EMC: Part 6 Generic standards,-
Section 3 Emission standards for residential commercial and light-industrial environments(first
revision)
11. IEC 61000-6-4: 2018 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 6-4: Generic standards -
Emission standard for industrial environments
12. IEC 60050- 195: 1998 International Electrotechnical Vocabulary (IEV) - Part 195: Earthing
and protection against electrical shock
13. IEC 60050-826: International Electrotechnical Vocabulary - Chapter 826: Electrical
installations of buildings
14. IEC 61000-2 (all parts) Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 2: Environment
15. IEC 61000-5 (all parts) Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 5: Installation and
mitigation guidelines
16. IS 14493 (all parts) Multicore and symmetrical pair/quad cables for digital communication
17. IS16205 series, Conduit systems for electrical installations
18. IEC 62066: Surge overvoltages and surge protection in low-voltage a.c. power systems -
General basic information
19. IS/IEC 62305-1 to 4: Protection against lightning – (All parts)
20. IS16463 (Part 11): 2016 and IS 16463 (Part 12)): SPD’s connected to low voltage power system
21. IEC 61663-1: 1999 Lightning protection - Telecommunication lines - Part 1: Fibre optic
installations
22. IEC 61936-1: Power installations exceeding 1 kV a.c. - Part 1: Common rules
23. IEC 62020: Electrical accessories - Residual current monitors for household and similar uses
(RCMs)
24. ISO/IEC 30129: Information technology - Telecommunications bonding networks for buildings
and other structures
 ANNEX B
(Informative)
Examples of Calculated Risk Level CRL for the Use of SPDs

A-1 EXAMPLE 1 – BUILDING IN RURAL ENVIRONMENT

Ground flash density Ng = 1

Environmental factor fenv = 85

Risk assessment length LP = 2 LPAL + LPCL + 0.4 LPAH + 0.2 LPCH

= (2 × 0.4) + (0.4 × 0.6)
= 1.04
Where,

LPAL = the length (km) of low-voltage overhead line= 0.4;

LPAH = the length (km) of high-voltage overhead line= 0.6;
LPCL = the length (km) of low-voltage underground cable = 0; and
LPCH = the length (km) of high-voltage underground cable = 0.
CRL = fenv / (LP × Ng) = 85 / (1.04 × 1) = 81.7

In this case, SPD protection shall be installed as the CRL is less than 1 000.

A-2 EXAMPLE 2 – BUILDING IN RURAL ENVIRONMENT POWERED IN HV

Ground flash density Ng = 0.4

Environmental factor fenv = 85

Risk assessment length LP = 2 LPAL + LPCL + 0.4 LPAH + 0.2 LPCH

= 0.2 × 1
= 0.2
Where,

LPAL = the length (km) of low-voltage overhead line = 0;

LPAH = the length (km) of high-voltage overhead line = 0;
LPCL is the length (km) of low-voltage underground cable = 0; and
LPCH is the length (km) of high-voltage underground cable = 1.

CRL = fenv / (LP × Ng) = 85 / (0.2 × 0.4) = 1 062.5

In this case, SPD protection is not mandatory as the CRL is greater than or equal to 1 000.

A-3 EXAMPLE 3 – BUILDING IN URBAN ENVIRONMENT POWERED BY OVERHEAD LINES

Ground flash density Ng = 1

Environmental factor fenv = 850

Risk assessment length LP = 2 LPAL + LPCL + 0.4 LPAH + 0.2 LPCH

= 2 × 0.4 + 0.4 × 0.6
= 1.04
Where,
LPAL = the length (km) of low-voltage overhead line = 0.4;
LPAH = the length (km) of high-voltage overhead line = 0.6;
LPCL = the length (km) of low-voltage underground cable = 0; and
LPCH = the length (km) of high-voltage underground cable = 0.

CRL = fenv / (LP × Ng) = 850 / (1 × 1.04) = 817

In this case, SPD protection shall be installed as the CRL is less than 1 000.

A-4 EXAMPLE 4 – BUILDING IN URBAN ENVIRONMENT POWERED BY UNDERGROUND CABLES

Ground flash density Ng = 0.5

Environmental factor fenv = 850
Risk assessment length LP = 2 LPAL + LPCL + 0.4 LPAH + 0.2 LPCH
=1
Where,

LPAL = the length (km) of low-voltage overhead line = 0;

LPAH = the length (km) of high-voltage overhead line = 0;
LPCL = the length (km) of low-voltage underground cable= 1; and
LPCH = the length (km) of high-voltage underground cable = 0.

CRL = fenv / (LP × Ng) = 850 / (1 × 0.5) = 1 700.

In this case, an SPD is not mandatory as the CRL is greater than or equal to 1 000.
 ANNEX C
(informative)

GUIDANCE ON OVERVOLTAGE CONTROL BY SPDS APPLIED TO OVERHEAD

LINES
Where an installation is supplied by, or includes, an overhead line and an SPD is required for
over voltage control, the protective control of the overvoltage level may be obtained either by
installing surge protective devices directly in the installation close to the origin of installation,
or with the consent of the network operator, in the overhead lines of the supply distribution
network.

As an example, the following measures may be applied:

a) in the case of overhead supply distribution networks, overvoltage protection is erected
at network junction points and especially at the end of each feeder longer than 0.5 km.
Surge protective devices should be erected at every 0.5 km distance along the supply
distribution lines. Nevertheless, the distance between surge protective devices should
in no case exceed 1 km;

b) if a supply distribution network is erected partly as overhead network and partly as

underground network, overvoltage protection in the overhead lines should be applied
in accordance with a) at each transition point from and overhead line to an
underground cable;

c) in a TN distribution network supplying electrical installations, where the protective

measure automatic disconnection of supply is applied, the earthing conductors of the
surge protective devices connected to the line conductors are connected to the PEN
conductor or to the PE conductor; and

d) in a TT distribution network supplying electrical installations, where the protection

measure automatic disconnection of supply is applied, surge protective devices are
provided for the line conductors and for the neutral conductor. At the place where the
neutral conductor of the supply network is effectively earthed, a surge protective
device for the neutral conductor is not necessary.
 Annex D
(informative)

Installation supplied by overhead lines

Where overvoltage protection according to Clause 4.5.3 of IS732 is required, where the lines
entering the building are overhead and where the case of lightning strike to the last pole of the
overhead lines close to the building is taken into account, SPDs at the origin of the installation
shall be selected according to Table D.1.

Further information can be found in IS/IEC 62305 (all parts).

Table D.1 – Selection of impulse discharge current (Iimp)

Iimp (kA)
Supply system
Connection Single phase Three phase
CT1 CT2 CT1 CT2
L-N 5 5
L-PE 5 5
N-PE 5 10 5 20
NOTE This table refers to lightning protection levels III and IV.
 PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS
SECTION 14 SHORT-CIRCUIT AND VOLTAGE DROP CALCULATIONS

FOREWORD
Circuit calculations are performed for checking the adequacy of the electrical equipment for any
electrical system that is characterized by the type of distribution system comprising of
transformers, bus, cables etc.

The essential requirements and methods associated with following calculations are covered in this
Section:
a) Short circuit calculations in 3 phase ac systems,
b) Calculation of the effects of short circuit currents, and
c) Current carrying capacity and voltage drop calculation for cables and flexible cords

Assistance for this Section has been derived from the following standards:

IS No./Other Publication Title

IS 13234 (Part 0) : 2017/IEC Short-circuit currents in three-phase a.c. systems: Part 0
60909-0 : 2016 Calculation of Currents (first revision)
IS 13235 (Part 1) : 2019/IEC Short-circuit currents — Calculation of effects: Part 1
60865-1 : 2011 Definitions and calculation methods (first revision)
IS 13235 (Part 2) : 2019/IEC Short-Circuit Currents — Calculation of effects: Part 2
60865-2 : 2015 Examples of calculation (first revision)
IEC 60364-5-52 : 2009 Low-voltage electrical installations — Part 5-52: Selection
and erection of electrical equipment — Wiring systems

1 SCOPE
This Indian Standard (Part 1/Sec 14) covers guidelines and general requirements associated with
circuit calculations, namely, short circuit current calculations, short circuit impedance,
electromagnetic and thermal effects of short circuit currents and voltage drop calculations for
cables and flexible cords.

NOTE — Information on cascading, limitation and discrimination is given at Annex A.

2 REFERENCES

The standards listed below contain provisions, which through reference in this text, constitute
provisions of this standard. At the time of publication, the editions indicated were valid. All
standards are subject to revision, and parties to agreements based on this standard are encouraged
to investigate the possibility of applying the most recent editions of the standards.
 IS No./Other Title
Publications
2086 : 1993 Carriers and bases used in rewirable type electric fuses for voltages up
to 650V— Specification (third revision)
9926 : 1981 Specification for fuse-wire used in rewirable type electric fuses up to
650 volts
IS 12640 (Part 1) : Residual current operated circuit breakers without integral overcurrent
2016/IEC 61008-1 : protection for household and similar uses (RCCBs): Part 1 General
2012 rules (second revision)
IS 12640 (Part 2) : Residual current operated circuit-breakers with integral overcurrent
2016/IEC 61009-1 : protection for household and similar uses (RCBOs): Part 2 General
2012 rules (second revision)
13703 (Part 2/ Sec 1) : Specification for low-voltage fuses for voltages not exceeding 1000 V
1993/IEC Pub 269-2 a.c. or 1500 V d.c.: Part 2 Fuses for use by authorized persons, Section
(1986) 1 Supplementary requirements
13703 (Part 2/ Sec 2) : LV fuses for voltages not exceeding 1000 V a.c. or 1500 V d.c.: Part
1993/IEC Pub 269-2-1 2 Fuses for use by authorized persons, Section 2 Examples of
(1987) standardized fuses
13234 (Part 0) : 2017/ Short circuit currents in three-phase a.c. systems: Part 0 Calculation of
IEC 60909 – 0 : 2016 currents (first revision)
13235 (Part 1) : 2019/ Short-circuit currents — Calculation of effects: Part 1 Definitions and
IEC 60865-1 : 2011 calculation methods (first revision)
IS/IEC 60898-1 : 2015 Electrical accessories — Circuit breakers for overcurrent protection for
household and similar installations: Part 1 Circuit breakers for a.c.
operation (first revision)
IEC 60364-5-52 : 2009 Low-voltage electrical installations — Part 5-52: Selection and
erection of electrical equipment — Wiring systems

3 GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS

3.1 This subject of circuit calculations covers the guidelines relating to the short circuit withstand
capability of the electrical equipment and to check permissible voltage drop in cables and flexible
cords upto the equipment terminals.

3.2 The objective of the circuit calculation is to ensure that the selection of equipment under
consideration is designed for safe and reliable long period of operation.

4 CIRCUIT CALCULATIONS

4.1 Short Circuit Calculations

4.1.1 Design Considerations

4.1.1.1 A complete calculation of the short-circuit currents should give the currents as a function
of time at the short circuit location from the initiation of the short circuit up to its end,
corresponding to the instantaneous value of the voltage at the beginning of the short-circuit.

4.1.1.2 In most of the practical cases, it is sufficient to determine the r.m.s value of symmetrical
AC component and the peak value 𝑖𝑝 of short-circuit current following the occurrence of a short
circuit. The value of 𝑖𝑝 depends on time constant of the decaying aperiodic component 𝑖𝐷𝐶 with
frequency depending on the X/R ratio of the short-circuit impedance.

4.1.1.3 For determination of asymmetrical short–circuit breaking current, the decaying aperiodic
component 𝑖𝐷𝐶 may be calculated with sufficient accuracy by:
𝑖𝐷𝐶 = √2 𝐼𝑘" 𝑒 −2𝜋𝑓𝑡𝜏 — (1)

Where,
𝐼𝑘" = initial symmetrical short circuit current (A);
f = nominal system frequency (Hz);
t = time duration of fault(s); and
τ = time constant based on system X/R.

4.1.1.4 The calculations of maximum and minimum short circuit current are based on the following
considerations:
a) For the duration of the short-circuit there is no change in the number of circuits involved,
that is, a three phase short-circuit remains as three phase and similarly a line-to-earth short-
circuit remains line-to-earth during the short circuit;
b) Tap changers of the transformer are at nominal position; and
c) Arc resistances are not taken into account.

4.1.1.5 In situations where there will be no significant change in ac component decay due to far
distance from generator (see Fig. 1), short-circuit current can be considered as the sum of the
following two components:
a) The ac component with constant amplitude during the whole short-circuit; and
b) The aperiodic component beginning with initial value A and decaying to zero.

4.1.1.6 For the systems where there will be significant change in ac component decay due to close
location near generator (see Fig. 2), short circuit-current can be considered as the sum of the
following two components:
a) The a.c. component with decaying amplitude during the whole short circuit; and
b) The aperiodic component beginning with initial value A and decaying to zero.
4.1.2 Calculation Methods

4.1.2.1 General
Equivalent circuits are to be drawn for the system before calculation of short circuit currents with
example as per Fig. 3.
4.1.2.1.1 Balanced short-circuit

The balanced three-phase short-circuit of a three-phase ac system (see Fig. 4a) often leads to the
highest values of prospective (available) short-circuit current and the calculation becomes
particularly simple on account of the balanced nature of the short circuit.

In calculating the short-circuit current, it is sufficient to take into account only the positive
sequence short-circuit impedance, Z(1) = Zk as seen from the fault location.

4.1.2.1.2 Unbalanced short-circuit

The following types of unbalanced (asymmetrical) short-circuits are to be considered:

a) line-to-line short-circuit without earth connection (see Fig. 4b);
b) line-to-line short-circuit with earth connection (see Fig. 4c); and
c) line-to-earth short-circuit (see Fig. 4d).
Normally, the three-phase short-circuit current is the largest among the above listed type of faults.
In the event of short-circuit near to a transformer with neutral earthing or a neutral earthing
transformer, the line-to-earth short-circuit current may be greater than the three-phase short-circuit
current. This applies in particular to transformers of vector group Yz, Dy and Dz when earthing
the y-winding or z-winding on the low voltage side of the transformer.

4.1.2.1.3 Application of symmetrical components

In three-phase systems the calculation of the current values resulting from unbalanced short-
circuits is simplified by the use of the method of symmetrical components which requires the
calculation of three independent system components, avoiding any coupling of mutual
impedances. Using this method, the currents in each line are found by superposing the currents of
three symmetrical component systems:

a) positive-sequence current I(1);

b) negative-sequence current I(2); and
c) Zero-sequence current I(0).

Taking the line L1 as reference the currents IL1, IL2 and IL3 are given by:

IL1 = I(1) + I(2) + I(0) — (2a)

IL2 = 𝑎2 I(1) + a I(2) + I(0) — (2b)
IL3 = a I(1) + 𝑎2 I(2) + I(0) — (2c)
1 1 1 1
Where, 𝑎 = − + 𝑗 √3 ; 𝑎2 = − − 𝑗 √3
2 2 2 2

Each of the three symmetrical component systems has its own impedance.

The method of the symmetrical components postulates that the system impedances are balanced,
for example in the case of transposed lines. The results of the short-circuit calculation have an
acceptable accuracy also in the case of un-transposed lines.

4.1.2.1.4 Maximum and minimum short – circuit currents

When calculating maximum and minimum short circuit currents voltage factor cmax or cmin from
Table 1 shall be applied to compute maximum or minimum short circuit currents respectively.
 Commented [B1]: Type Table 1 in IS 12 format.

4.1.3 Calculation of Short Circuit Currents

4.1.3.1 Three phase short circuit

In general, the initial symmetrical short-circuit current 𝐼𝑘" shall be calculated using the below
𝐶𝑈
equation with the equivalent voltage source 𝑛 at the short-circuit location and the short-circuit
√3
impedance 𝑍𝑘 = 𝑅𝑘 + 𝑋𝑘 .
𝑐𝑈𝑛 𝑐𝑈𝑛
𝐼𝑘" = = — (3)
√ 3𝑍𝑘 √ 3(𝑅𝑘 +𝑋𝑘 )

4.1.3.2 Single fed short circuit

For a far-from-generator short circuit fed from a single source (see Fig.1 la), the short-circuit
current is calculated using equation (3).

𝑅𝑘 = 𝑅𝑄𝑡 + 𝑅𝑇𝑘 + 𝑅𝐿 — (4)

𝑋𝑘 = 𝑋𝑄𝑡 + 𝑋𝑇𝑘 + 𝑋𝐿 — (5)
Where,
𝑅𝑘 and 𝑋𝑘 are the sum of the series-connected resistances and reactance of the positive- sequence system respectively,
in accordance with Fig. 5. RL is the line resistance for a conductor temperature of 20 ⁰C, when calculating the
maximum short-circuit currents. Subscript Q and T refer feeder connecting point and transformer respectively.

4.1.3.3 Short circuits fed from non-meshed networks

When there is more than one source contributing to the short-circuit current, and the sources are
unmeshed, as shown for instance in Fig. 6, the initial symmetrical short-circuit current 𝐼𝑘" at the
short-circuit location F is the sum of the individual branch short-circuit currents.

Each branch short-circuit current can be calculated as an independent single-source three-phase

short-circuit current in accordance with equation (3) and the information given in 4.1.3.2. The
initial short-circuit current at the short- circuit location F is the phasor sum of the individual partial
short-circuit currents (see Fig. 6).

𝐼𝑘" = ∑𝑖 𝐼𝑘" — (6)

4.1.3.3 Peak short-circuit current 𝑖𝑝

For three-phase short circuits fed from non-meshed networks as in Fig. 5 and 6, the contribution
to the peak short-circuit current from each branch can be expressed by:

𝑖𝑝 = 𝜅√2𝐼𝑘" — (7)

The factor k for the R/X or X/R ratio shall be obtained from Fig. 7 or calculated by following
expression:

𝜅 = 1.02 + 0.98𝑒 −3𝑅/𝑋 — (8)

4.1.4 Short-circuit Impedances

In network feeders, transformers, overhead lines, cables, reactors and similar equipment, positive-
sequence and negative-sequence short-circuit impedances are equal: 𝑍(1) = 𝑍(2) .

The zero-sequence short-circuit impedance 𝑍(0) = 𝑈(0) /𝐼(0) is determined by assuming an a.c.
voltage between the three paralleled conductors and the joint return (for example, earth, earthing
arrangement, neutral conductor, earth wire, cable sheath, and cable armouring). In this case, the
three-fold zero-sequence current flows through the joint return.

While calculating the impedances, there shall be clear distinction between short-circuit
impedances at the short-circuit location and short-circuit impedances of individual electrical
equipment (see Table 2).

4.2 Effects due to Short Circuit

4.2.1 Electromagnetic Effect on Rigid and Slack (Line) Conductors

With the calculation methods, forces on insulators, stresses in rigid conductors and tensile forces
in slack conductors are to be estimated.

4.2.1.1 Mechanical forces due to short-circuit Currents

Currents in parallel conductors will induce electromagnetic forces between the conductors. When
the parallel conductors are long compared to the distance between them, the forces will act evenly
distributed along the conductors.

When the currents are in opposite directions the electromagnetic force is a repulsion which tends
to induce deformations that would increase inductance of the circuit.
𝜇0 𝑙
𝐹= 𝑖 𝑖 — (9)
2𝜋 1 2 𝑎

Where,
a) 𝑖1 and 𝑖2 are the instantaneous values of the currents;
b) 𝑙 Center-line distance between the supports; and
c) 𝑎 Center-line distance between the conductors.

The value of the force in a given direction can be calculated by considering the work done in the
case of a virtual displacement in the actual direction. As the work is done by the electromagnetic
force, it must be equal to the change in the energy in the magnetic field caused by this virtual
displacement.

The force between two conductors is proportional to the square of the current, or to the product of
the two currents. As the current is a function of time, the force will also be a function of time. In
the case of a short-circuit current without a dc component the force will vary with twice the
frequency of the current. A dc component in the short-circuit current will give rise to an increase
of the peak value of the force and to a component of force varying with the same frequency as the
current. The peak value of the force is of particular interest in the case of mechanically rigid
structures.

The force will result in bending stress on rigid conductors, tension stress and deflection in flexible
conductors and bending, compression or tension loads on the supports.
 Table 2 Short-circuit Impedances of Various Electrical Power Supply Components Commented [B2]: Type Table 2 in IS 12 format
(Clauses 4.1.4 and 4.2.1.2)

4.2.1.2 Stresses in rigid conductors and forces on supports

The conductors may be supported in different manners, either fixed or simple or in a combination
of both, and may have two, three, four or several supports. Depending on the kind of support and
the number of supports, the stress in the conductors and the forces on the supports will be different
for the same short-circuit current.

The stresses in the conductors and the forces on supports also depend on the ratio between the
natural frequency of the mechanical system (𝑓𝑐 ) and the frequency of the electromagnetic force
(𝑓). Especially in the case of resonance, or near to resonance, the stresses and forces in the system
may be amplified. If 𝑓𝑐 ⁄𝑓 < 0.5 the response of the system decreases and the maximum stresses
are in the outer phases.

Bending stress caused by the forces between main conductors is given by:
𝐹𝑚 𝑙
𝜎𝑚 = 𝑉𝜎 𝑉𝑟 𝛽 — (10)
8𝑍

Bending stress caused by the forces between sub-conductor is given by:

𝐹𝑠 𝑙𝑠
𝜎𝑠 = 𝑉𝜎𝑠 𝑉𝑟𝑠 16𝑍 — (11)
𝑠

The dynamic force 𝐹𝑑 shall be calculated from:

𝐹𝑑 = 𝑉𝐹 𝑉𝑟 𝛼𝐹𝑚 — (12)

Where,
a) 𝐹𝑚 and 𝐹𝑠 are Forces according to equation (9);
b) Z and 𝑍𝑠 are section modulus of main and sub conductor;
c) 𝑉𝜎 𝑉𝑟 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑉𝜎𝑠 𝑉𝑟𝑠 𝑉𝐹 are factor which take into account the dynamic phenomena referred from Table 3; and
d) 𝛽 & 𝛼 are factor depending on type and number of supports taken from Table 4.

4.2.1.3 Tensile forces in slack conductors (line conductors)

A short-circuit current in a slack conductor will cause a tensile force in the conductor which will
affect insulators, support structures and apparatus. It is necessary to distinguish between the tensile
force during short-circuit and the tensile force after short circuit, when the conductor falls back to
its initial position.

4.2.2 Thermal Effect on Bare Conductors

The heating of conductors due to short-circuit currents involves several phenomena of a non-linear
character and other factors that have to be either neglected or approximated in order to make a
mathematical approach possible. For the purpose of this calculation, the following assumptions
can be made:
a) Proximity-effect (magnetic influence of nearby parallel conductors) has been disregarded;
b) Resistance-temperature characteristic has been assumed linear;
c) The specific heat of the conductor is considered constant; and
d) The heating is generally considered adiabatic.
4.2.2.1 Calculation of temperature rise

The loss of heat from a conductor during the short-circuit is very low, and the heating can generally
be considered adiabatic. Hence the calculation for this can also be based on adiabatic conditions.

When repeated short-circuits occur with a short-time interval between them (that is rapid auto-
reclosure) the cooling down in the short dead-time is of relatively low importance, and the heating
can still be considered adiabatic. In cases where the dead-time interval is of longer duration (that
is delayed auto-reclosure) the heat loss may be taken into account.

The calculation need not take into account the skin effect that is the current is regarded as evenly
distributed over the conductor cross-section area. This approximation is not valid for large cross-
sections, and therefore for cross-sections above 600 mm² the skin effect shall be taken into account.

NOTE — If the main conductor is composed of sub-conductors, uneven current distribution between the sub-conductors
will influence the temperature rise of sub-conductors.

Table 3 Maximum Possible Values of 𝑽𝝈 𝑽𝒓 , 𝑽𝝈𝒔 𝑽𝒓𝒔 , 𝑽𝑭 𝑽𝒓 Commented [B3]: Type Table 3 in IS 12 format
(Clause 4.2.1.2)
4.2.2.2 Calculation of thermal equivalent short-circuit current

The thermal equivalent short-circuit current is to be calculated using the short-circuit current rms
value and the factors m and n for the time-dependent heat effects of the dc and ac components of
the short-circuit current.

The thermal equivalent short-circuit current can be expressed by:

𝐼𝑡ℎ = 𝐼𝑘" √𝑚 + 𝑛 — (13)

Where,
a) m and n are numerical factors, and
b) 𝐼𝑘" the r.m.s. value of the initial symmetrical short-circuit current.
In a three-phase system, the balanced three-phase shortcircuit is decisive. The values m and n are
usually defined as functions of the duration of the short-circuit current. For a distribution network
usually n = 1.

NOTE — The relation 𝐼𝑘" /𝐼𝑘 is dependent on the impedance between the short-circuit and the source.

When a number of short-circuits occur with a short time interval in between, the resulting thermal
equivalent short-circuit current is obtained from:

1
𝐼𝑡ℎ = √ ∑𝑛𝑖=1 𝐼𝑡ℎ𝑖
2
𝑇𝑘𝑖 — (14)
𝑇 𝑘

and

𝑇𝑘 = ∑𝑛𝑖=1 𝑇𝑘𝑖 — (15)

4.2.2.3 Calculation of temperature rise and rated short-time current density for conductors

The temperature rise in a conductor caused by a short-circuit is a function of the duration of the
short-circuit current, the thermal equivalent short-circuit current and the conductor material.

NOTE — The maximum permitted temperature of the support has to be taken into account.

4.2.2.4 Calculation of the thermal short-circuit strength for different durations of the short-circuit
current

Electrical equipment has sufficient thermal short- circuit strength as long as the following relations
hold for the thermal equivalent short-circuit current Ith:

𝐼𝑡ℎ ≤ 𝐼𝑡ℎ𝑟 𝑓𝑜𝑟 𝑇𝑘 ≤ 𝑇𝑘𝑟 — (16)

𝑇𝑘𝑟
𝐼𝑡ℎ < 𝐼𝑡ℎ𝑟 √ 𝑓𝑜𝑟 𝑇𝑘 > 𝑇𝑘𝑟 — (17)
𝑇𝑘

where 𝐼𝑡ℎ𝑟 is the rated short-time current and 𝑇𝑘𝑟 the rated short-time.

The thermal short-circuit strength for a bare conductor is sufficient when the thermal equivalent
short-circuit current density 𝑆𝑡ℎ satisfies the following relation:

𝑇𝑘𝑟
𝑆𝑡ℎ < 𝑆𝑡ℎ𝑟 √ — (18)
𝑇𝑘

With 𝑇𝑘𝑟 = 1 s and for all 𝑇𝑘 , the rated short time current density Sthr is shown in Fig 4.

Below equation shall be used instead of equation (18) :

 2
∫ 𝑖 2 𝑑𝑡 = 𝐼𝑡ℎ . 𝑇𝑘 ≤ 𝐾 2 . 𝐴2 — (19)

Where
a) 𝐼𝑡ℎ shall be taken from equation (13) or (14)
b) 𝑇𝑘 shall be taken from equation (15)

𝐾 = 𝑆𝑡ℎ𝑟 √𝑇𝑘𝑟 — (20)

4.3 Calculations for Current Carrying Capacity and Voltage Drop for Cables and Flexible
Cords

4.3.1 Conductor Operating Temperature

The current to be carried by any conductor for sustained periods during normal operation shall be
such that the conductor operating temperature given in the appropriate table of current-carrying
capacity in this section is not exceeded.

Where a conductor operates at a temperature exceeding 70°C it shall be ascertained that the
equipment connected to the conductor is suitable for the conductor operating temperature.

4.3.2 Cables Connected in Parallel

Except for a ring final circuit, cables connected in parallel shall be of the same construction, cross
sectional area, length and disposition, without branch circuits and arranged so as to carry
substantially equal currents.

4.3.3 Cables Connected to Bare Conductors or Bus Bars

Where a cable is to be connected to a bare conductor or busbar its type of insulation and/or sheath
shall be suitable for the maximum operating temperature of the bare conductor or busbar.

4.3.4 Cables in Thermal Insulation

Where a cable is to be run in a space to which thermal insulation is likely to be applied, the cable
shall wherever practicable be fixed in a position such that it will not be covered by the thermal
insulation. Where fixing in such a position is impracticable the cross-sectional area of the cable
shall be appropriately increased.

For a single cable likely to be totally surrounded by thermally insulating material over a length of
more than 0.5 m, the current-carrying capacity shall be taken, in the absence of more precise
information, as 0.5 times the current-carrying capacity for that cable clipped direct to a surface and
open.
Where a cable is to be totally surrounded by thermal insulation for less than 0.5 m the current-
carrying capacity of the cable shall be reduced appropriately depending on the size of cable, length
insulation and thermal properties of the insulation. The de-rating factors have to be appropriate to
conductor sizes.

4.3.5 Metallic Sheaths and/or Non-Magnetic Armour of Single-Core Cables

The metallic sheaths and/or non-magnetic armour of single-core cables in the same circuit shall
normally bonded together at both ends of their run (solid bonding). Alternatively the sheaths or
armour of such cables having conductors of cross-sectional area exceeding 50 mm2 and a non-
conducting outer sheath may be bonded together at one point in their run (single point bonding)
with suitable insulation at the un-bonded ends, in which case the length of the cables from the
bonding point shall be limited so that, at full load, voltages from sheaths and/or armour to earth:
a) do not exceed 25 V;
b) do not cause corrosion when the cables are carrying their full load current; and
c) do not cause danger or damage to property when the cables are carrying short-circuit
current.
 FIG. 8 RELATION BETWEEN RATED SHORT-TIME CURRENT DENSITY (𝑻𝒌𝒓 = 𝟏 𝐒) AND
CONDUCTOR TEMPERATURE

4.3.6 Correction Factors for Current-Carrying Capacity

The current-carrying capacity of cable for continuous service is affected by various environmental
conditions. This clause provides correction factors in these respects as follows.
4.3.6.1 Ambient temperature

In practice the ambient air temperatures may be determined by thermometers placed in free air as
close as practicable to the position at which the cables are installed or are to be installed, subject
to the provison that the measurements are not to be influenced by the heat arising from the cables;
thus if the measurements are made while the cables are loaded, the thermometers should be placed
about 0.5 m or ten times the overall diameter of the cable whichever is the lesser, from the cables,
in the horizontal plane, or 150 mm below the lowest of the cables.

Where cables are subject to such radiation due to solar or other infra-red, the current-carrying
capacity may need to be specially calculated.

4.3.6.2 Grouping

Appropriate correction factors to be applied to the manufacture declared current-carrying capacity

where cables or circuits are grouped.

4.3.7 Effective Current-Carrying Capacity

The current-carrying capacity of cable corresponds to the maximum current that can be carried in
specified conditions without the conductors exceeding the permissible limit of steady state
temperature for the type of insulation concerned.

The values of current calculated represent the effective current-carrying capacity only where no
correction factor is applicable. Otherwise the current-carrying corresponds to the value multiplied
by the appropriate factors for ambient temperature, soil thermal resistivity, grouping and thermal
insulation, as applicable.

Irrespective of the type of over current protective device associated with the conductors concerned,
the ambient temperature correction factors to be used when calculating current-carrying capacity
(as opposed to those used when selecting cable size).

4.3.8 Overload Protection

Where overload protection is required, the type of protection provided does not affect the current-
carrying capacity of a cable for continuous service (Iz) but it may affect the choice of conductor
size. The operating conditions of a cable are influenced not only by the limiting conductor
temperature for continuous service, but also by the conductor temperature which might be attained
during the conventional operating time of the overload protection device, in the event of an
overload.

This means that the operating current of the protective device must not exceed 1.45Iz. Where the
protective device is a fuse as per IS 13703 (Part 2/Sec 1) and IS 13703 (Part 2/Section 2) or IS
2086 or a miniature circuit breaker as per IS/IEC 60898, this requirement is satisfied by selecting
a value of Iz not less than In.
In practice, because of the standard steps in nominal rating of fuse and circuit breakers, it is often
necessary to select a value of In exceeding Ib. In that case, because it is also necessary for Iz in turn
to be not less than the selected value of In, the choice of conductor cross-sectional area maybe
dictated by the over load conditions and the current-carrying capacity (Iz) of the conductors will
not always by fully used.

The size needed for a conductor protected against overload by a IS 9926 fuse fix in rewire able
type fuse can be obtained by the use of a correction factor, 1.45/2 = 0.725 which results in the
same degree of protection as that afforded by other overload protective devices. This factor is to
be applied to the nominal rating of the fuse as a divisor, thus indicating the minimum value of It
required of the conductor to be protected. In this case also, the choice of conductor size is dictated
by the overload conditions and the current carrying capacity (Iz) of the conductors cannot be fully
used.

4.3.9 Determination of the Size of Cable to be Used

Having established the design current (Ib) of the circuit under consideration, the conductor size has
to be sized necessarily from consideration of the conditions of normal load and overload is then
determined. All correction factors affecting Iz (that is, the factor for ambient temperature, grouping
and thermal insulation) can, if desired, be applied to the values of It as multipliers. This involves a
process of trial and error until a cross-sectional area is reached which ensures that Iz is not less
than Ib and not less than In of any protective device it is intended to select. In any event, if a
correction factor for protection by a semi-enclosed fuse is necessary, this has to be applied to In as
a divisor. It is therefore more convenient to apply all the correction factors to In as divisors.

In polyphase circuits carrying balanced currents, the associated neutral conductor need not be
taken into consideration. Where the neutral conductor in a multi-core cable carries current as a
result of an unbalance in the phase currents, conductor shall have a cross-section area adequate to
afford the current to be carried by any conductor for sustained periods during normal operation.

If the neutral conductor carries current without corresponding reduction in load of the phase
conductors, the neutral currents may be caused by a significant harmonic current in three-phase
circuits. If the harmonic content is greater than 10 percent the neutral conductor shall not be smaller
than the phase conductors. Thermal affects due to the presence of harmonic currents and the
corresponding reduction factors for higher harmonic currents to be considered.

4.3.10 Voltage Drop in Consumers Installations

4.3.10.1 Acceptable values of voltage drop

Under normal service conditions the voltage at the terminals of any fixed current-using equipment
shall be greater than the lower limit corresponding to the Indian Standard relevant to the
equipment.
Where the fixed current-using equipment concerned is not the subject of Indian Standard the
voltage at the terminals shall be such as not to impair the safe functioning of the equipment.

The voltage drop between the origin of an installation and any load point should not be greater
than the values in Table 5 expressed with respect to the value of the nominal voltage of the
installation as per IEC 60364-5-52 .

Table 5 Voltage Drop Commented [B4]: Type Table 5 in IS 12 format

(Clause 4.3.10.1)

NOTES:
1 A greater voltage drop may be accepted
a) for motor during starting periods; and
b) for other equipment with high inrush current;
provided that in both cases, it is ensured that the voltage variations remain within the limits specified in
the relevant equipment standard.
2 The following temporary conditions are excluded:
a) voltage transients; and
b) voltage variation due to abnormal operation.

4.3.10.2 Calculation of voltage drop

If the tables of voltage drop are known for a current of one ampere for a meter run, that is, for a
distance of 1m along the route taken by the cables, and represent the result of the voltage drops in
all the circuit conductors. Then, to calculate the voltage drop (mV/A/m) for a given run, the value
for the cable concerned has to be multiplied by the length of the run in meters and by the current
the cable is intended to carry, namely the design current of the circuit (𝐼𝑏 ) in amperes.

For three-phase circuits the calculated mV/A/m values relate to the line voltage and balanced
conditions have to be assumed.

The direct use of the calculated resistive component (mV/A/m)r or reactive component
(mV/A/m)x or (mV/A/m)z impedance values, as appropriate may lead to pessimistically high
calculated values of voltage drop or, in other words, to unnecessarily low values of permitted
circuit lengths.
Where the design current of a circuit is significantly less than the effective current-carrying
capacity of the cable chosen, the actual voltage drop would be less than the calculated value
because the conductor temperature (and hence its resistance) will be less than that on which the
calculated mV/A/m had been based.

In some cases, it may be advantageous to take account of the load power factor when calculating
voltage drop.

Voltage drops may be determined using the following formula:

𝐿
𝑢 = 𝑏 (𝜌1 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝜑 + 𝜆𝐿𝑠𝑖𝑛𝜑) 𝐼𝐵 — (21)
𝑆
Where,
a) u is the voltage drop in volts;
b) b is the coefficient equal to 1 for three-phases circuits, and equal to 2 for single-phase circuits;
NOTE — Three-phase circuits with the neutral completely unbalanced (a single phase loaded) are considered a single-phase
circuits.
c) ρ1 is the resistivity of conductors in normal service, taken equal to the resistivity at the temperature in normal
service, that is, 1.25 times the resistivity at 20°C, or 0.0225 Ωmm2/m for copper and 0.036 Ωmm2/m for
aluminum;
d) L is the straight length of the wiring systems, in meters;
e) S is the cross-sectional area of conductors, mm²;
f) cos  is the power factor; in the absence of precise details, the power factor is taken as equal to 0.8 (sin 
= 0.6);
g) λ is the reactance per unit length of conductors, which is taken to be 0.08 mΩ/m in the absence of other
details; and
h) IB is the design current (in amps);

The relevant voltage drop in per cent is equal to:

𝑢
△ 𝑢 = 100 𝑈 — (22)
0

U0 is the voltage between line and neutral, in volts.

4.3.10.3 Correction Factor for operating temperature

For cables having conductors of cross-sectional area 16 mm² or less the design value of mV/A/m
is obtained by multiplying the calculated value by a factor Ct, given by
𝐼 2
230+𝑡𝑝 −(𝐶𝑎2 𝐶𝑔2 − 𝑏2 )(𝑡𝑝 −30)
𝐼𝑡
𝐶𝑡 = 230+𝑡𝑝
— 

Where,
𝑡𝑝 = maximum permitted normal operating temperature, in ° C.

NOTE — For convenience, the above formula is based on the resistance-temperature coefficient of 0.004 per °C at 20°C
for both copper and aluminum conductors.

For very large conductor sizes where the resistive component of voltage drop is much less than the
corresponding reactive part (that is when 𝑥/𝑟 ≥ 3) this correction factor need not be considered.
4.3.10.4 Correction for load power factor

For cables having conductors of cross-sectional area of 16 mm² or less the design value of mV/A/m
is obtained approximately by multiplying the calculated value by the power factor of the load, cos
.

For cables having conductors of cross-sectional area greater than 16 mm² the design value of
m/V/A/m is approximately:

Cos [Calculated (mV/A/m)r] + sin [Calculated (mV/A/m)x]

For single-core cables in flat formation the calculated values apply to the outer cables and may
under- estimate for the voltage drop between an outer cable and the center cable for cross-sectional
areas above 240 mm² and power factors greater than 0.8.

4.3.10.5 Combined correction for both operating temperature and load power factor

Where it is considered appropriate to correct the calculated mV/A/m value so for both operating
temperature and load power factor, the design values of mV/A/m are given by:

a) for cable having conductors of 16 mm² or less cross-sectional area:

Ct cos (Calculated mV/A/m)
b) for cables having conductors of cross-sectional area greater than 16 mm²:
Ct cos (Calculated mV/A/m)r) + sin 
 ANNEX A

CASCADING, DISCRIMINATION AND LIMITATION

A-1 CASCADING
The utilization of the current limiting capacity of a circuit-breaker at a given point to enable
installation of lower-rated circuit-breakers in branch is known as ‘cascading' or ‘back-up
protection'. The main (upstream) circuit-breakers acts as a barrier against short-circuit currents and
branch (downstream) circuit breakers with lower breaking capacities than the prospective short-
circuit (at their point of installation) operate under their normal breaking conditions. The limiting
circuit-breaker helps the circuit-breaker placed downstream by limiting high short-circuit currents
thus enabling use of downstream circuit-breaker with a breaking capacity lower than the short-
circuit current calculated at its installation point thus enabling economical selection of circuit-
breakers.
Cascading concerns all devices installed downstream of the circuit-breaker, and can be extended
to several consecutive devices, even if they are used in different switchboards. The upstream
device must have an ultimate breaking capacity greater than or equal to the assumed short-circuit
current at the installation point. For downstream, circuit-breakers, the ultimate breaking capacity
to be considered is the ultimate breaking capacity enhanced by coordination.
The association of the upstream and downstream circuit breakers allows an increase in
performance of the breakers. Thus, the electromagnetic, electrodynamic and thermal effects of
short-circuit currents are reduced. Installation of a single limiting circuit-breaker along with lower
rated circuit-breakers results in considerable economy and simplification of installation work.
D1 and D2 are the two circuit-breakers (see Fig. A-1). As soon as the two circuit-breakers trip (as
from point IB), an arc voltage UAD1 on separation of the contacts of D1 is added to voltage UAD2
and helps, by additional limitation, circuit-breaker D2 to open.
The association D1 + D2 allows an increase in performance of D2 as shown in Fig. A-2, which
depicts,
limitation curve of D2,
enhanced limitation curve of D2 by D1,
Icu D2 enhanced by D1.
Annex A of IS/IEC 60947-2 defines coordination under short-circuit conditions between circuit-
breaker and another short-circuit protective device (SCPD) associated in the same circuit and the
tests to be performed. Cascading is normally verified by tests for critical points. The tests are
performed with an upstream circuit-breaker D2 with a maximum overcurrent setting and a
downstream circuit-breaker D2 with a minimum setting.

A-2 LIMITATION
A-2.1 The technique of limitation allows the circuit breaker to considerably reduce short-circuit
currents. It ensures attenuation of the harmful electromagnetic, thermal and mechanical effects of
short-circuits and is the basis of the cascading technique.
The assumed fault current Isc is the short-circuit current that would flow at the point of the
installation where the circuit-breaker is placed, if there were no limitation. Since the fault current
is eliminated in less than one half-period, only the first peak current (asymmetrical peak I) is
considered. This is a function of the installation fault cos 0. Reduction of this peak I to limited IL
characterizes circuit-breaker limitation. Limitation consists of creating a back-electromotive force
opposing the growth of the short-circuit current. Effectiveness of limitation depends on
intervention time, that is the time ts when the back-electromotive force (bemf) appears, the rate at
which bemf increases and the value of bemf. The back-electromotive force is the arc voltage Ua due
to the resistance of the arc developing between the contacts on separation. Its speed of development
depends on the contact separation speed. As shown in Fig. A-3, as from the time ts when the
contacts separate, the back less than the assumed fault current flow through when a short-circuit
occurs.

FIG. A-1 OPERATION OF CIRCUIT-BREAKERS IN CASCADE

FIG. A-2 LIMITATION CURVES FOR CIRCUIT-BREAKERS

 Fig. A-3 Effect of limitation on fault current

A-2.2 Circuit-Breaker Limitation Capacity

The circuit-breaker limitation capacity defines the way how it reduces the let through current in
short-circuit conditions (see Fig. A-4 and A-5). The thermal stress of the limited current is the area
(shaded) defined by the curve of the square of the limited current Is2c(t). If there is no limitation,
this stress would be the area, far larger, that would be defined by the curve of the square of the
assumed current. For an assumed short-circuit current I, limitation sc of this current to 10 percent
results in less than 1 percent of assumed thermal stress. The cable temperature rise is directly
proportional to the thermal stress.

NOTE — On a short-circuit, adiabatic temperature-rise of conductors occurs (without heat exchange with the outside due
to the speed of the energy supply). The increased temperature for a conductor with a cross-section S is:

where I2 dt is the thermal stress (A2s)

 FIG. A-4 CURRENT LIMITATION

FIG. A-5 THERMAL STRESS LIMITATION

Limitation considerably attenuates the harmful effects of short-circuits on the installation.

Consequently, limitation contributes to the durability of electrical installations. Due to limitation,
the harmful effects of short-circuits on a motor feeder are greatly attenuated. Proper limitation
ensures easy access to a Type 2 coordination as per IS/IEC 60947-4-1, without oversizing of
components. This type of coordination ensures optimum use of their motor feeders.
A-2.3 Limitation Curves
A circuit-breaker's limiting capacity is expressed by limitation curves that give:
a) the limited peak current as a function of the rms current of the assumed short-circuit current.
For example, on a 160 A feeder where the assumed lsc is 90 kA rms, the non-limited peak lsc
is 200 kA (asymmetry factor of 2.2) and the limited Isc is 26 kA peak.
b) the limited thermal stress (in A2s) as a function of the rms current of the assumed short-
circuit current. For example, on the previous feeder, the thermal stress moves from more than
100 x 106 A2s to 6 x 106 A2s.
A-3 DISCRIMINATION
A-3.1 Discrimination is the co-ordination of the operating characteristics of two or more over-
current protective devices such that, on the incidence of over-currents within stated limits, the
device intended to operate within these limits does so, while the other(s) does (do) not (see Fig.
A-6).
Distinction is made between series discrimination involving different over-current protective
devices passing substantially the same over-current and network discrimination involving identical
protective devices passing different proportions of the overcurrent. In LV networks, discrimination
is recommended in order to obtain higher levels of supply continuity and protection, ensuring
better safety of installations and minimum cost overruns.
Cascading principle in limiting CBs can enhance the discrimination levels. It is recommended that
the manufacturer provide the relevant data in terms of discrimination charts and cascading levels
for various combination of CBs (upstream and downstream) and fault current as per the laboratory
test results.
A discrimination current Is is defined, such that if:
a) Ifault > Is: both circuit-breakers trip; and
b) Ifault < Is: only D2 eliminates the fault.

FIG. A-6 DISCRIMINATION AND SEQUENCE OF TRIPPING

A-3.2 Discrimination Quality

The value Is is compared with assumed Isc (D2) at point D2 of the installation.
a) total discrimination: Is > Isc(D2); discrimination is qualified as total, that is whatever the
value of the fault current, D2 only will eliminate it.
b) partial discrimination: Is < Isc (D2); discrimination is qualified as partial, that is up to Is,
only D2 eliminates the fault. Beyond Is, both D1 and D2 open.
Where,
Isc (D1): short-circuit current at the point where D1 is installed,
Icu D1: ultimate breaking capacity of D1.

A-3.3 Types of Discriminations

A-3.3.1 Current Discrimination
This technique is directly linked to the staging of the
Long Time (LT) tripping curves of two serial-connected circuit-breakers (see Fig. A-7).

FIG. A-7 CURRENT DISCRIMINATION

The discrimination limit Is is:

a) Is = Isd2 if the thresholds Isd1and Isd2 are too close or merge; and
b) Is = Isd1if the thresholds Isd1 and Isd2 are sufficiently far apart.
Current discrimination is achieved when:
a) Ir1 / Ir2 < 2
b) Isd1 / Isd2 > 2
The discrimination limit being:
Is = Isd1

A-3.3.1.1 Discrimination quality

Discrimination is total, if Is > Isc(D2), that is Is d1 > Isc(D2).
This normally implies,
a relatively low level Isc(D2),
a large difference between the ratings of circuit-breakers D1 and D2.
Current discrimination is normally used in final distribution.

A-3.3.2 Time Discrimination

This is the extension of current discrimination and is obtained by staging over time of the tripping
curves. This technique consists of giving a time delay of t to the Short Time (ST) tripping of D1
(see Fig. A-8).
 FIG. A-8 TIME DISCRIMINATION

The thresholds (Ir1, Isd1) of D1 and (Ir2, Isd2) comply with the staging rules of current discrimination.
The discrimination limit Is of the association is at least equal to Ii1, the instantaneous threshold of
D 1.

A-3.3.2.1 Discrimination quality

For discrimination on final and/or intermediate feeders, A category circuit-breakers can be used
with time- delayed tripping of the upstream circuit-breaker. This allows extension of current
discrimination up to the instantaneous threshold Ii1 of the upstream circuit-breaker: Is > Ii1. If
Isc(D2) is not too high (case of a final feeder) total discrimination can be obtained.
On the incomers and feeders of the MSB, as continuity of supply takes priority, the installation
characteristics allow use of B category circuit-breakers designed for time-delayed tripping. These
circuit-breakers have a high thermal withstand (Icw > 50 percent Icn for t = Is): Is > Icw1. Even for
high Isc(D2), time discrimination normally provides total discrimination: Icw1 > Isc(D2).

NOTE — Use of B category circuit-breakers means that the installation must withstand high electrodynamic and thermal
stresses. Consequently, these circuit-breakers have a high instantaneous threshold Ii that can be adjusted and disabled in
order to protect the busbars if necessary.

A-3.4 Enhancement of Current and Time Discrimination

A-3.4.1 Enhancement by Limiting Downstream Circuit-Breakers
Use of a limiting downstream circuit-breaker enables the discrimination limit to be pushed back.
 FIG. A-9 ENHANCEMENT OF DISCRIMINATION

On referring to Fig. A-9, a fault current Id will be seen by D1,

equal to Id for a non-limiting circuit-breaker, and equal to ILd < Id for a limiting circuit-breaker.
The limit of current and time discrimination Is of the association D1 + D2 is thus pushed back to a
value that increases when the downstream circuit-breaker is rapid and limiting.

A-3.4.2 Discrimination Quality

Use of a limiting circuit-breaker is extremely effective for achievement of total discrimination
when threshold settings (current discrimination) and/or the instantaneous tripping threshold (time
discrimination) of the upstream circuit-breaker D1 are too low with respect to the fault current Id
in D2- Isc(D2).

A-3.4.2.1 Logic discrimination or “Logic Discrimination Zone (ZSI)”

This type of discrimination can be achieved with circuit-breakers equipped with specially designed
electronic trip units. Only the Short Time Protection (STP) and Ground Fault Protection (GFP)
functions of the controlled devices are managed by Logic Discrimination. In particular, the
Instantaneous Protection function (inherent protection function) is not concerned.
 FIG. A-10 LOGIC DISCRIMINATION (ZSI)

A-3.4.2.2 Settings of controlled circuit-breakers:

a) Time delay: staging (if any) of the time delays of time discrimination to be applied (t D1 >
tD2 > t D3), and
b) Thresholds: natural staging of the protection device ratings must be complied with (IcrD1 >
IcrD2 > IcrD2).
NOTE — This technique ensures discrimination even with circuit-breakers of similar ratings.

A-3.4.2.3 Principles
Activation of the logic discrimination function is via transmission of information on the pilot wire
for ZSI input:
a) Low level (no downstream faults) — The protection function is on standby with a reduced
time delay (< 0.1).
b) High level (presence of downstream faults) — The relevant protection function moves to
the time delay status set on the device.
Activation of the logic discrimination function is via transmission of information on the pilot wire
for ZSI output:
a) Low level — The trip unit detects no faults and sends no orders.
b) High level — The trip unit detects a fault and sends an order.

A-3.4.2.4 Operation
A pilot wire connects in cascading form the protection devices of an installation (see Fig. A-10).
When a fault occurs, each circuit-breaker upstream of the fault (detecting a fault) sends an order
(high level output) and moves the upstream circuit-breaker to its natural time delay (high level
input). The circuit breaker placed just above the fault does not receive any orders (low level input)
and thus trips almost instantaneously.

A-3.4.2.5 Discrimination quality

This technique enables easy achievement as standard of discrimination on 3 levels or more, easy
achievement of downstream discrimination with non-controlled circuit-breakers, elimination of
important stresses on the installation, relating to time-delayed tripping of the protection device, in
event of a fault directly on the upstream busbars. All the protection devices are thus virtually
instantaneous.
A-3.5 Discrimination Rules
A-3.5.1 Overload Protection
For any overcurrent value, discrimination is guaranteed on overload if the non-tripping time of the
upstream circuit-breaker D1 is greater than the maximum breaking time of circuit-breaker D2.
The condition is fulfilled if the ratio of Long Time (LT) and Short Time (ST) settings is greater
than 2. The discrimination limit Is is at least equal to the setting threshold of the upstream Short
Time (ST) time delay.

A-3.5.2 Short-circuit Protection

A-3.5.2.1 Time discrimination
Tripping of the upstream device D1 is time delayed by t, the conditions required for current
discrimination must be fulfilled and the time delay t of the upstream device D1 must be sufficient
for the downstream device to be able to eliminate the fault. Time discrimination increases the
discrimination limit Is up to the instantaneous tripping threshold of the upstream circuit-breaker
D1 (see Fig. A-11).
Discrimination is always total if circuit-breaker D1 is of category B, has an Icw characteristic equal
to its Icu. Discrimination is total in the other cases if the instantaneous tripping threshold of the
upstream circuit-breaker D1 is greater than the assumed Isc in D2.
A-3.5.2.2 Logic discrimination
Discrimination is always total.
A-3.5.2.3 General case
There are no general discrimination rules. The time/ current curves clearly supply a value of Isc
(limited or assumed) less than the Short Time tripping of the upstream circuit-breaker;
discrimination is then total. If this is not the case, only tests can indicate discrimination limits of
coordination, in particular when circuit-breakers are of the limiting type. The discrimination limit
Is is determined by comparison of curves:
a) in tripping energy for the downstream circuit breaker, and
b) in non-tripping energy for the upstream circuit-breaker.
The potential intersection point of the curves gives the discrimination limit Is. The manufacturers
indicate in tables the tested performance of coordination.

A-3.6 Earth Leakage Protection Discrimination

A-3.6.1 According to the earthing system, discrimination only uses coordination of overcurrent
protection devices. When the insulation fault is treated specifically by earth leakage protection
devices (for example, in the TT system), discrimination of the residual current devices (RCDs)
with one another must also be guaranteed. Discrimination of earth leakage protection devices must
ensure that, should an insulation fault occur, only the feeder concerned by the fault is de-energized.
The aim is to optimize energy availability.
 FIG. A-11 DISCRIMINATION AT VARIOUS FAULT CURRENTS

A-3.6.2 Types of Earth Leakage Protection Discrimination

A-3.6.2.1 Vertical discrimination
In view of requirements and operating standards, discrimination must simultaneously meet both
the time and current conditions (see Fig. A-12).
A-3.6.2.1.1 Current condition
The RCD must trip between In and In /2, where In is the declared operating current. There must
therefore exist a minimum ratio of 2 between the sensitivities of the upstream device and the
downstream device. In practice, the standardized values indicate a ratio of 3.
A-3.6.2.1.2 Time condition
The minimum non-tripping time of the upstream device must be greater than the maximum
tripping time of the downstream device for all current values.
NOTE — The tripping time of RCDs must always be less than or equal to the time specified in the installation standards to
guarantee protection of people against indirect contacts.
 FIG. A-12 VERTICAL DISCRIMINATION

For the domestic area, standards IS 12640 (Part 1) (residual current circuit-breakers) and IS 12640
(Part 2) (residual current devices) define operating times. The values in the table correspond to
curves G and S. Curve G (General) correspond to non-delayed RCDs and S (Selective) to those
that are voluntarily delayed (see Fig. A-13).

FIG. A-13 OPERATING TIME CURVES

A-3.6.2.2 Horizontal discrimination

Sometimes known as circuit selection, it allows savings at the supply end of the installation of an
RCD placed in the cubicle if all its feeders are protected by RCDs. Only the faulty feeder is de-
energized, the devices placed on the other feeders do not see the fault (see Fig. A-14).

FIG. A-14 HORIZONTAL DISCRIMINATION

Type In /A n Standardized Values of Operating Time and Non-
operating Time (in s) at:
I
an 2Ian 5Ian 500A
General All values All values 0.3 0.15 0.04 0.04 Maximum operating time
instantaneous
Selective >25 >0.030 0.5 0.2 0.15 0.15 Maximum operating time
0.13 0.06 0.05 0.04 Maximum operating time
 PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS
SECTION 15 ELECTRICAL ASPECTS OF BUILDING SERVICES

FOREWORD

No building can be treated as complete and ready to occupy without the infrastructure of
services. Out of total capital expenditure of building, share of services may go up to 40 percent,
from which its value and importance can be envisaged. Under Part 8 of National Building Code
(NBC) following services have been enlisted under sections:

Section 1 Lighting and natural ventilation,

Section 2 Electrical and allied installation
Section 3 Air-conditioning and heating, and mechanical ventilation
Section 4 Acoustics, sound insulation and noise control
Section 5 A Lifts
5B Escalators and moving walks
Section 6 Information and communication enabled installations

There are some services, which have not appeared clearly in above list but can form part of
Section 6 of Part 8 of NBC. These systems are basically considered as extra low voltage
systems. These are:
a) Audio video / sound systems,
b) Telephone systems,
c) Computer / data networking,
c) Security systems – CCTV, access control systems,
d) Building management systems (BMS),

Apart from these, following services are related to life safety:

e) Fire-fighting, and
f) Fire alarm.

1 SCOPE
This Indian Standard (Part 1/Sec 15) of the code covers electrical aspects (including
electronics) required to be considered in respect of installation / construction, working /
operation of building services.
NOTE — Each of these services may require statutory approval, details of which are covered in the respective
sections

2 REFERENCES
The standards listed in Annex A contain provisions, which through reference in this text,
constitute provisions of this standard. At the time of publication, the editions indicated were
valid. All standards are subject to revision, and parties to agreements based on this standard are
encouraged to investigate the possibility of applying the most recent editions of the standards.
3 ORIENTATION OF BUILDING
Next to geographical region, the factor influencing need and scope of building services is
orientation of building. Orientation of building help utilize natural resources to provide
physically and psychologically comfortable living inside the buildings by creating conditions
which suitably and successfully ward off the undesirable effects of severe weather to a
considerable extent by judicious use of the recommendations and knowledge of climatic
factors.

IS 7662 (Part 1) gives recommendations on orientation of buildings.

4 LIGHTING AND NATURAL VENTILLATION

From the point of view of lighting and ventilation, the following climatic factors influence
orientation of the buildings and desired fenestration to optimize use of natural resources:
a) Solar radiation and temperature,
b) Relative humidity, and
c) Prevailing winds.

4.1 Lighting - Natural

During the daytime, use of natural light to the possible extent shall form one of the principles
of Good Lighting. It is nature’s call and conserving energy is today’s need to save and protect
environment. Good visibility and other parameters are easily met with natural light source.

4.2 Lighting – Artificial

4.2.1 When the daylight starts diminishing or there are limitations to use daylight, artificial
lighting becomes inevitable. Illumination Engineering is a specialized branch which gives
inputs for good lighting design. For detailed aspects of illumination SP 72 and IS 3646 (Part 1)
shall be referred. Important aspects of lighting are:

a) Lux Level — A functional requirement from the point of view of visibility.

(Lux=Lumen/m2). Depending on application; uniform, task oriented, average and
allowable maximum and minimum lux levels are taken in to consideration while
designing.
b) CRI — Colour Rendering Index, is a parameter used to measure ability of light
source to reveal natural colour of object it is measured in percentage. 100 indicates
accurate, 90 indicate good colour rendering.
c) CCT — Correlated colour temperature measured in Kelvin helps indicate colour
appearance, for example, cool white 5 000 K, yellowish warm-light 3000K which
are selected to create required ambiance.
d) Glare — It is measured as Glare Index which relates to the discomfort / difficulty of
seeing.
4.2.2 Following applications decide design parameters and selection of light source:

a) Indoor — Functional requirement:

1) Dwellings,
2) Commercial,
3) Industrial,
4) Educational,
5) Auditoriums / theaters, and
6) Exhibition centers, art galleries, museums.
7) Sports
b) Indoor — Aesthetic:
1) Mood,
2) Ambiance, or
3) Spot
c) Outdoor — Functional requirement
1) Streets / paths, or
2) Garden.
d) Outdoor / external — Aesthetic
1) Façade, or
2) Ceremonial.

4.3 Electrical Aspects of Lighting

4.3.1 Wiring Installation

Illumination design of required artificial lighting, which considers various factors mentioned
under 4.2 above decides selection of type, wattage and required number of light fittings. The
layouts are prepared locating positions of lighting fixtures not conflicting with the sweep of
fan blades. It is one of the basic requirements for design of wiring installation.

4.3.2 Safety
Light sources dissipating heat shall be carefully wires, located and installed so that they shall
not cause hazard during their service life.

4.3.3 Emergency Lighting

Important areas where visibility during emergency is necessary and mandatory, lighting fixture
shall be suitable to sustain under such situation and shall be provided with standby source of
electric supply.

4.3.4 Energy Conservation

a) Lighting fixtures shall be selected which have good efficacy (Lumen/watt). LED
lights are giving improved efficacy day by day.
b) Circuits shall be so designed that portion of lighting where daylight is available can
be switched off.
c) Occupancy sensors help automatic switching off lights when the particular portion
is not occupied / used by persons.
 d) Under green building concept lighting power density is one of parameter in deciding
rating.

4.4 Ventilation
4.4.1 Ventilation of buildings is required to supply fresh air for respiration of occupants, to
dilute inside air to prevent vitiation by body odours and to remove any products of combustion
or other contaminants in air and to provide such thermal environments as will assist the
maintenance of heat balance of the body in order to prevent discomfort and injury to health of
the occupants.
4.4.2 The following govern design considerations:
a) Supply of fresh air for respiration,
b) Removal of combustion products or other contaminants and to prevent vitiation by
body odours,
c) Recommended schedule of values of air changes for various occupancies, and
d) The limits of comfort and heat tolerance of the occupants.

4.5 Methods of Ventilation

General ventilation involves providing a building with relatively large quantities of outside air
in order to improve general environment of building. This may be achieved in one of the
following ways:
a) Natural supply and natural exhaust of air,
b) Natural supply and mechanical exhaust of air,
c) Mechanical supply and natural exhaust of air, and
d) Mechanical supply and mechanical exhaust of air.

4.5.1 Ventilation – Natural / Artificial

Adequate fenestration with due consideration to wind directions help avail natural resource of
ventilation. Design considering natural air circulation cross ventilation, convection currents
saves electrical energy cost. Renewable natural resources shall hence be explored to optimum
level to conserve energy and protect environment.

For human comfort artificial ventilation is needed which is provided with various types of fans.

4.5.2 Ventilation – Mechanical

Ventilation is integrated in Airconditioning system where concern is human comfort. However,

forced / mechanical ventilation is needed in specific areas and purposes. It is important where
dust free environment, positive pressure, smoke evacuation is needed. Reference should be
made to IS 3103 and IS 3362 which cover methods of mechanical ventilation.

4.6 Electrical Aspects of Mechanical Ventilation

4.6.1 As per the design equipment requiring electrical supply shall be provided with electrical
installation of required specifications and guidelines given under Section 9 of Part 1.

4.6.2 When mechanical ventilation system relates with human life safety, in emergency,
electrical supply integrity must be ensured for its operation till certain predetermined time. The
electrical installation and material shall be of such grade, specifications and quality.

4.6.3 In case of ducting provision of dampers shall there to restrict spread of fire.

5 ELECTRICAL AND ALLIED INSTALLATION

5.1 General

Electrical Installation is a prime utility service to become any building functional. Many other
building services also depend on electrical supply for its operation. It has some architectural
and civil work requirements. Reference is made to all other sections from different parts of this
code and especially Section 9 of Part 1, where various aspects have been elaborated in detail.

5.2 Design

Design shall be based on basic principles of:

a) Safety,
b) Quality, or
c) Integrity and continuity.

Safety is of prime importance and statutory requirement. Supply quality and continuity are also
basic needs of building service. Prolonged failure of electrical supply may bring life to
standstill especially in high-rise buildings. Standby supply source of required capacity, shall
therefore be designed, installed and maintained. Depending on capacity and time duration it
may be battery based or a Generating set.

5.3 Risk of Fire

Electrical supply and installation, apart from its need and use, carries high risk of fire
endangering safety of life and property. Stringent norms are required to be followed. Improper
installation, use, handling, operation and maintenance may lead to serious hazards. Reference
is made to Section 10 to 13 and Section 22 from Part 1 of this code.

5.4 Supply Integrity

Supply integrity under emergency conditions and evacuation operation is most important
requirement. Electrical installation supplying critical load, shall be of such material, which will
withstand under fire conditions till desired time of 2 or more hours anticipated for evacuation
operation. It shall also be backed up with required capacity of standby supply arrangement.

6 AIR-CONDITIONING AND HEATING

6.1 General
Air conditioning is process of treating air to:
a) Cool / heat to regulate temperature;
b) Humidify / dehumidify to regulate moisture;
c) Filter to reduce contaminants;
d) Ventilate to regulate fresh air requirement, air quality and odour; and
e) Circulate to regulate air motion-no drafts, no suffocation.

Its application can be divided in to two categories, comfort air-conditioning and process air-
conditioning. Comfort air-conditioning relates to human comfort. Process air conditioning is
to provide above controlled parameters of air suitable for a process, for example, preservation
of food items, controlled temperature may be 40C or -200C, for operation theatres cleanliness
of air shall be of prime importance, textile mill needs higher humidity.

NOTE — Under ‘air-conditioning’, heating and ventilation form a part of the system and are referred as Heating, Ventilation, and Air-
Conditioning (HVAC).

6.2 Design

6.2.1 For the design of the system studying existing situation and set target of desired level of
Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) for required application, in possible climatic condition all around the
year is of prime importance. IAQ if not monitored and maintained properly, may lead to
discomfort, sickness loss of efficiency or loss of product under process air-conditioning.

6.2.2 In design of the system assessment of following factors is important:

a) Climatological data;
b) Outdoor air quality and properties of air;
c) Psychometry;
d) Orientation, of building;
e) Use, occupancy
f) Heat load / Cooling load; and
g) Air distribution.

6.2.3 Systems

Depending on requirement, worked out on area, use and Tonnage of Refrigeration (TR) system
may be:
a) Unitized, window, split for small areas;
b) Packaged, VRF for medium areas; and
 c) Central; for large areas.

Window, split units are factory assembled and are generally available up to 3TR capacity. Split
types which are more popular due to very low noise levels comprises indoor and outdoor unit
connected with refrigerant piping. It requires additional condensate piping. It shall be noted
that; like window type unit, there is no provision of fresh air intake for split type units.

Packaged / VRF systems are generally available up to 15 / 20 TR or more capacity depending

on manufacturer’s design. These systems require arrangements of refrigerant piping,
condensate piping and ducting.

Central Air conditioning systems are usually used for large areas, TR may extend to required
capacity. System comprises chillers, refrigerant / chilled water and condenser water pumps and
piping, Air Handling Units (AHU), Fan Coil Units (FCU) / Cassette units, cooling tower.
Location of plant room comprising chillers is usually away from area to be airconditioned.
AHUs are closer and FCUs within conditioned space. Cooling tower is installed in open air
preferably near chillers, to restrict length of condenser water piping.

Proper selection and design of system is a job of air conditioning expert where type of use, load
conditions, quality, efficiency, economy in installation and running cost are important factors.

6.3 Electrical Aspects of a.c. Systems and Heating

Two main aspects are:

a) required electrical installation, and

b) electrical consumption.

6.3.1 Electrical Installation

Electrical Installation shall suite the manufacturer’s requirements.

6.3.1.1 Load

On broad basis electrical load per TR varies between 1 to 1.5 kW. Under advanced technologies
it may reduce further. Nature of load mainly being inductive involving in-rush of current, shall
be considered for selecting size of cable and protections.

6.3.1.2 Harmonics

With the increased use of inverters, variable frequency drives harmonic distortion may occur
if adequate filters are not designed and provided. Manufacturer’s specifications shall be
checked for provision of inbuilt filters and necessary additional provision shall be made
checking actual requirements depending on site tests.

6.3.1.3 Window / Split type

Separate circuit with C type MCB with required ampere capacity generally 16/20/25 A or as
per manufacturer’s recommendation, depending on TR rating shall be provided for window /
split type units. Though most of the units are controlled with remote control, and location of
indoor unit sometimes inaccessible, a controlling switch shall be available in accessible
position with a power outlet near indoor unit. Generally wiring between indoor unit and outdoor
unit is done by the service provider / installing agency. However, efficient earthing shall be
ensured at the point of supply outlet.

6.3.1.4 Packaged type

Electrical Supply point with adequate size and type cable, earthing and controlling switchgears
shall be made available as per manufacturer’s requirement. Controlling switchgear shall be
provided near the individual equipment in accessible position. Rated current capacities shall be
adequate. Many times, such locations are in open. Appropriate ingress protection from external
influences shall be provided to guard from adverse climatic effects and an arrangement for ease
and safety to operating / maintaining personnel.

6.3.1.5 Central plant

As per equipment layout of AC system comprising compressors / chillers, chilled water,

condenser water pumps, cooling tower, AHUs, FCUs; electrical supply arrangement shall be
done in consultation with the concerned agency. Cable sizes, types, routes, controlling
switchgears and protections shall be as per the guidelines given under Part 1, Section 9 and
related clauses from Section 10 to 13 of this part of this code.

6.3.1.6 Conduits

Where conduits are used for carrying insulated electrical conductors and when such conduits
pass from a non-air-conditioned area into an air-conditioned area or into a fan chamber of duct,
a junction box shall be installed or other means shall be adopted to break the continuity of such
conduit at the point of entry or just outside, and the conduit should be sealed round the
conductors to prevent air being carried from one area into the other through the conduit and
thereby giving rise not only to leakage and inefficiency but also to the risk of condensation of
moisture inside the conduits.

6.3.2 Heating

In case of air-conditioning plants where re-heating is used, a safety device shall be incorporated
in the installation to cut off automatically the source of heating, by means of some device, as
soon as the temperature reaches a predetermined high level
6.3.3 In case of air-conditioning plants where heating by means of an electric heater designed
to operate in an air current , a safety device shall be incorporated in the installation to cut off
the supply of electricity to the heating device whenever there is failure of the air current in
which the heater is required to operate. Serious harm to the plant and sometimes fires may be
caused by negligence in this respect.

6.3.4 Air-conditioning and ventilating systems circulating air to more than one floor or fire
area shall be provided with dampers designed to close automatically in case of fire and thereby
prevent spread of fire or smoke. Such system shall also be provided with automatic controls to
stop fans in case of fire, unless arranged to remove smoke from a fire, in which case these shall
be designed to remain in operation.

6.3.5 Air-conditioning system serving large places of assembly (over 1 000 persons), large
departmental stores or hotels with over 100 rooms in a single block shall be provided with
effective means for preventing circulation of smoke through the system in the case of a fire in
air filters or from other sources drawn into the system even though there is insufficient heat to
actuate heat sensitive devices controlling fans or dampers. Such means shall consist of suitable
photo-electric or other effective smoke sensitive controls, or may be manually operated control

6.3.6 Electrical Consumption

Air conditioning being major guzzler of electricity involving huge running cost, needs precise
design and selection of equipment. For human comfort, 22 to 240C temperature is considered
as standard as per ASHRAE. However, considering average range of maximum to minimum
temperature in Indian Tropical region setting upper limits will not affect comfort. Considerable
power saving can be achieved with setting the temperature at 10 higher.

6.3.6.1 Small capacity, Room air conditioners

Based on Energy Efficiency, Bureau of Energy Efficiency (BEE) issues star rating, from 1 star
to 5 stars. A unit with 5 stars has maximum energy efficiency. It is denoted by EER (Energy
Efficiency Ratio). EER is mentioned as ratio in W/W that is heat removed in watts (3412 BTU
= 1 kW/hr) to power used in watts within that hour. For EER fixed parameters are considered
as base As per recent modification ISEER (Indian Seasonal Energy Efficiency Ratio) is
considered, which is more precise as it considers seasonal power consumption with the
variation in temperatures in different seasons, summer, winter. Room air- conditioners are
available as fixed speed and variable speed with Inverter technology. Efficiency of Inverter
type room air conditioners is very good as input power is precisely controlled as per actual
requirement.

6.3.6.2 Medium capacity

Advanced technology with variable refrigerant flow (VRF) systems give very good results in
reducing electricity bills.

6.3.6.3 Large capacity

In major systems having central plant, location of various equipment like compressors/ chillers,
AHUs, allied piping and ducting design, lengths, cross section aspect ratio (perimeter: cross
section ratio) play important role in deciding efficiency of the system. Selection of proper
compressor and drives also contribute power saving.

6.3.6.4 Heat recovery systems

These systems help to conserve energy and reduce heating / cooling demands. Scope shall be
checked from the experts.

6.3.6.5 Thermal storage

Such system utilizes power in off-peak period to create chilled product under low tariff (energy
charges) zone of the day. This thermal storage is utilized in peak demand period reducing
resultant aggregate demand and give good savings.

7 LIFTS, ESCALATORS AND MOVING WALKS SERVICES

7.1 General

With the trend of horizontal and vertical expanse of buildings; lifts, escalators and at places
like air ports where there is huge horizontal spread. Horizontal walks are becoming inherent
part of the building services. These services require architectural planning and civil work
provisions along with electrical work. These points therefore come within the scope of primary
planning.
7.2 Lifts

7.2.1 Design of lifts is done on the basis of anticipated / available / assessed data of human
traffic at peak time, number of floors and vertical travel, round trip time and application. These
factors decide persons carrying capacity of lift, number of lifts (weight considered per person
is 68 kg) and speed. For safety aspects, design requirements, installation, operation,
maintenance and inspection requirements IS 14665 series shall be referred.

7.2.2 Civil Work

Depending on type, construction of lift requires shaft which is RCC construction. As per
designed speed and capacity of number of passengers, it requires pit of required depth (below
lowermost floor level), overhead (vertical clearance from topmost floor level to bottom of
machine room slab), a machine room on top of slab. In case of Machine Room Less (MRL)
lift, there is no need of machine room and in case of Capsule Lift, requirement and
specifications of shaft may vary or can be eliminated. Door openings (width x height), landing
sill shall be as per manufacturer’s requirement. All details shall be taken from manufacturer in
advance at planning stage. Adequate provisions as per norms shall be made in respect of
ventilation, positive pressure.

7.2.3 Fire Lift

Provision of fire lift is mandatory. This lift and related structure shall have rated fire withstand
rating and shall perform and sustain desired operation, function during fire/ emergency.

7.3 Escalators

Need and provision of escalator is seen usually at public places where service to the quantum
of public is to be given. Hence, the installations are seen in cinemas, malls, railway stations,
offices with higher occupancy, etc. Civil work infrastructure needs to be provided as per
manufacturer’s requirements. For safety aspects, design requirements, installation, operation,
maintenance and inspection requirements IS 4591 series shall be referred.

7.4 Moving Walk Ways

Places where walking distance (horizontal) within building is more and time taking, provision
of walkways is done. It is usually seen at airports.

7.5 Manufacturers Responsibilities

7.5.1 Reference is drawn to Lift Act and Rules made there under by respective state
governments and IS 14665 series. Manufacturer shall coordinate with architect, civil
construction agency and electrical contractor to see all structural, electrical requirements are
met and shall construct the lift, escalator, walk-ways complying statutory requirements, and
standards, norms.

7.5.2 Work related to all safeties, control cabling, telephone, alarm, automatic rescue device
and battery backup and electrical cabling after point of supply to machine, lift car, protections
comes in the purview of lift manufacturer. He shall adhere to all norms.

7.5.3 Testing Commissioning, getting inspected and permission from concerned authority to
operate lift is manufacturer’s responsibility. Manufacturer shall handover lift with all
documentation, guarantees / warranties, maintenance schedule to the owner. He shall provide
information in respect of obligations of owner especially in respect of maintenance of lifts.

7.6 Electrical Aspects of Lifts, Elevators, Walks

7.6.1 General

The requirements for main switches and cabling with reference to relevant regulations may be
adhered to. The manufacturer should specify, on a schedule, particulars of full load current,
starting current, maximum permissible voltage drop, size of switches and other details to suit
requirements. For multiple lifts a diversity factor may be used to determine the cable size and
should be stated by the lift manufacturer.

7.6.2 Electrical Wiring and Apparatus

7.6.2.1 All electrical supply lines and apparatus forming part of point of supply to be provided
to manufacturer for his further work in connection with the lift / escalator / moving walks
installation shall be so constructed and shall be so installed, protected, worked and maintained
as per relevant sections of this code.
7.6.2.2 All metal casings or metallic coverings containing or protecting any electric supply
lines of apparatus shall be efficiently earthed. Earthing system shall conform provisions of IS
3043 and CEA measures related to safety and electric supply regulations 2010.

7.6.2.3 All cables and other wiring in connection with the lift installation shall be armoured
(except where flexible cable required for operational purpose) of Fire Survival grade to provide
supply integrity with resistance to fire with mechanical impact and water jet as per category
FWS 120 as per BIS Doc ETD 09 (15371) (under development).

a) Power Supply Mains — The lift sub-circuit from the intake room should be separate
from other building service. Each lift should be capable of being isolated from the mains
supply.
b) For banks of interconnected lifts, a separate sub-circuit is required for the common
supervisory system, in order that any car may be shut down without isolating the
supervisory control of the remainder.
c) Lighting — Machine rooms and all other rooms containing lift equipment should be
provided with adequate illumination and with a switch fixed adjacent to the entrance.
At least one socket outlet and light point, should be provided at each floor level in the
lift shaft including pit.
d) 3 phase power supply cable for machine and 1 phase power supply cable for lighting
shall be routed through lift shaft and first terminated in machine room, (when provision
of machine is there). 1 phase supply cable shall again be re-routed through shaft for
lighting and power supply outlet. No cables, which are not part of lift installation, shall
be run in the lift well. The lift cables shall be run in respective lift wells. Wiring in
machine room shall be run in rigid metallic trunking. The trunking in machine room
floor shall be flush with the finished floor.
e) Residual current devices shall be of appropriate type and sensitivity. It shall:
1) have 10 times the maximum leakage current (300 mA maximum) as tripping
current and be suitable for frequency converters with a 3-phase supply.
2) be sensitive for sinusoidal currents up to 1 000 Hz, insensitive for currents more
than 1000 Hz.
NOTE — These kinds of RCDs are generally classified as ‘Type B’.
3) never be protected with a 30 mA residual current device (RCD). The 30 mA
RCD may trip when the lift starts and stall the operation. If the construction-time
power supply is for some reason protected with a 30 mA residual current device
 (RCD), suitably sized isolation transformer needs to be provided.

8 SOUND SYSTEM / AUDIO VIDEO SYSTEM

8.1 Sound System

Sound system is used for public announcement /address, entertainment, alerts, crowd, visitors,
vehicle management. It is an important tool in emergency situation / disaster management. It
comprises one or more basic components from following:

a) Speaker (indoor / outdoor),

b) Amplifier,
c) Mixer,
d) Microphone,
e) Microphone cables, or
f) Speaker cables.

8.2 Conference System (Audio)

Usually installed in meeting halls. Comprises set of microphones, speakers, controller unit and
optional amplifier for external speakers. Microphones / delegate units are installed on meeting
table. They have individual on / off control which a person using it is supposed to operate.
There is also chairman unit with master control which can disable delegate units speakers may
be integral part or installed separately. Different components of system are interconnected by
copper cables of high purity to minimize drop. Microphones are generally looped. For
convenience and redundancy microphones may be grouped to form number of loops and
connected to controller. For audience, additional separate speakers may be connected through
amplifier.

8.3 Audio-Video or Audio-Visual (AV) System

Installation of audio visual system may be done for entertainment, public announcement, board
meetings, presentations, video conference / web meeting. Basic components used are speakers,
microphones, DVD players, video camera, electronic video screen or video projector and wall
/ screen. Display units may be single or multiple located at different locations. It may have
recording facility.

8.4 Design and Layouts

Design and layouts of system shall be preplanned with the help of experts. Acoustical
requirements if any shall be checked and met with. In case. If the number of the equipment is
large, they shall be mounted on racks of suitable dimensions of metal or wood, in such a manner
that the controls are within easy reach. The patch cords shall be neatly arranged. For outdoor
installations, the line-matching transformers shall be mounted in weather-proof junction boxes.
In large open grounds such as an outdoor stadium, care shall be taken to ensure that the sound
heard from different loudspeakers do not have any noticeable time lag.

NOTE — Many times requirement of system is not envisaged / considered at initial stage. Under circumstances anticipatory provision
for cabling between possible / planned locations of equipment and provision of power outlets shall be made. This helps avoid breakages
especially in case of concealed wiring

8.5 Electrical Aspects

8.5.1 Cabling Material

Special types of copper cables shielded, braided, tinned, flat, twisted, coaxial, recommended
by system designer, suitable for particular task and application with high purity shall be used.

8.5.2 Installation

Cables shall be enclosed in separate and independent conduits / trunking for each system and
shall be installed 200 mm away from power cables / or as specified by system provider.
Crossings shall be done in right angle. Terminations shall be proper and rigid as per
recommended method prescribed by equipment manufacturer. The positioning of equipment
shall be such that the lengths of the interconnecting cables is kept to the minimum to avoid
drops losses in transmission.

8.5.3 Electric Supply

Electric supply shall be provided at amplifier / control equipment rack of audio system, through
power outlet with efficient earth terminal. Supply shall be stable without voltage fluctuations,
UPS / battery based supply may be used considering sensitive electronic equipment. This
battery based supply is also necessary where any interruption is not desirable. Use of SPD may
be made to prevent equipment damage from possible voltage surge. For video system separate
power supply outlets close to display units electronic screen / video projector will be necessary.

8.6 For guidance on selection of equipment of public address system and their installation
and maintenance, reference shall be made to IS 1881 and IS 1882.

9 TELEPHONE SYSTEMS
9.1 General
Intercom system is important private internal communication system forming one of the
building services. It may integrate with external public network.

9.2 Design

Requirements shall be assessed at planning stage, with the exchange of information within
concerned users and architect / consultant. Design and layouts of equipment showing locations
and routes of cabling shall be planned, in advance. It shall form a coordinated activity with
construction and other building services.

9.3 Main Components of the System

Main components of the system are:

a) Telephone instrument,
b) Patch cord,
c) Socket /registered jack (RJ series),
d) MDF /junction boxes of required sizes,
e) Krone modules,
f) EPABX exchange,
g) Power supply, and
h) Telephone cables 2-4 pairs, jelly filled armoured / un-armoured cable 10 to 100 pairs.

9.3.1 EPABX

Electronic private branch exchanges (EPABX) may be connected to the public exchanges
through exchange lines or limited to internal communication. EPABX permit internal
communication between the extensions of a system and external communication, for approved
branch systems. EPABX is specified with number of incoming lines and outgoing lines of
internal communication. For example, 3/8 means exchange having facility to connect three
incoming lines from other private or public network and 8 lines of internal network.

9.3.2 Backbone Cabling

Generally, the inter-floor/inter-building backbone cabling is included in the scope of main

building design. The backbone cabling should accommodate analog voice signal alone or
analog and data signals simultaneously, as the case may be. It is the speed of data transmission
and bandwidth, which matter most in the design of the communication backbone.

9.4 Exchange of Information

9.4.1 The exact requirement of the subscribers shall be assessed before drawing out the
specification of the EPABX system. This means that information on number of subscribers in
the building, distribution of the phones in the floors and other areas, nature of traffic etc. are to
be collected.

9.4.2 The initial and final requirements of the installations should be ascertained as accurately
as possible by prior consultations. Plans shall show:

a) details of the installations proposed;

b) the accommodation and location of the EPABX console, monitor, etc; and
c) the ducts and cable routing required for wiring.
9.5 Design Requirements

9.5.1 The basic architecture and performance requirements of the modern day
communication system is microprocessor-based pulse code modulated (PCM)/ Time Division
Multiplexing (TDM) technology.

9.5.2 The environmental conditions for the EPABX should preferably be controlled so that the
room air temperature is maintained between 10o C and 40o C and relative humidity between 50
percent and 95 percent.

9.5.3 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) is commonly required for commercial
buildings since it is possible to handle simultaneous calls of different types namely voice, data
and images transfer (tele and video conferencing) without any loss of data, at a minimum speed
of 64 kBps, which can be increased further depending on requirement. EPABX system shall
be capable of interfacing with other EPABX system through appropriate protocol.

9.6 Hardware Requirement

9.6.1 Electronic Private Automatic Branch Exchange

In EPABX system the individual call stations are connected, each by a twisted pair of wires to
the automatic exchange (see Fig. 1). This is also the termination for the exchange lines.

9.6.2 Features

There are various features available with the present day EPABX with introduction of
concerned cards. Features to be incorporated shall be decided depending on functional
requirement. Some of the most common features included are, abbreviated dialing, recorded
announcement system, last number redial, executive override, multi-party conference, call
forwarding, direct inward dialing (DID), automatic alarm make-up call, STD barring, group
hunting, networking facility.
 FIG. 1 EXAMPLE OF THE ARRANGEMENT OF A BASIC EPABX SYSTEM IN LARGE BUILDING

9.6.3 Power Supply

Depending on the size and type of installation, the telephone system requires for its operation
a dc power supply of 24 V or 48 V, which is obtained from the power mains through a rectifier.
The rectifiers, provided with closed-loop control and for small and medium sized systems, are
accommodated in the exchange housing. For large systems rectifiers (controlled) are supplied
in separate cabinets.

9.6.4 Standby Batteries

Standby batteries can be provided as an adjunct to the rectifier. These are necessary for
important installations such as police stations, fire stations, etc., to cover possible main supply
failures.

9.7 Space Requirements

9.7.1 The switching equipment for the telephone systems and small EPABX’s takes up little
room. Apart from the telephones, only relatively small wall-mounted junction boxes or
exchange units are required. The exchanges, furthermore, produce little or no noise, so that
they can be accommodated in an office if desired.
9.7.2 For large systems a separate room should be provided for the exchange equipment, and
similarly for the answering panel. Space should be allowed in planning for additional cabinets
or racks, exchange equipment platforms etc. that may be necessitated by future enlargement of
the systems. The size of the battery room depends upon the type of power supply equipment
used.

9.8 Installation

9.8.1 Wiring Installation

9.8.1.1 For wiring within buildings, wire is mainly installed in embedded PVC conduit, or
wiring cables with conductors of 0.6 mm or 0.8 mm diameter for surface wiring.

9.8.1.2 For cabling it is important to maintain a separation of at least 10 mm between the

communications wiring and power cables.

9.8.1.3 If conductors belonging to different communications systems are run together, for
example, telephone wires and loudspeaker wires, or heavily loaded slave clock circuits, there
is a risk of mutual interference between them. In such cases it is advisable to use screened
cables.

9.8.1.4 In communication cables the cores are twisted together either in pairs or in star quad
formation. For speech transmission to avoid crosstalk either a twisted pair or, in the case of the
star quad a pair of opposite cores should be used.

9.8.2 Ducts, Apertures and Channels

9.8.2.1 In the course of constructing the shell of the building the appropriate channels and ducts
should be formed in the masonry and lead-through apertures provided in walls, ceilings, joists
and pillars. Suitable accommodation should be provided for the distribution boards in large
communications system (for example, recesses, shafts etc.).

9.8.2.2 For riser cables the ducts and ceiling apertures for the riser cables should be sufficiently
large to permit the later addition of cables or PVC conduits without great expense.

9.8.3 Conduits

PVC conduit can be used for the individual sections of conduit networks in residential buildings
for the riser conduit from floor to floor, horizontal branches in the floors up to the distribution
boxes in the apartments, and between the distribution boxes in the apartments and the flush-
type junction boxes.

In addition, at least one extra conduit should be provided from one floor distribution board to
the next.

9.8.4 Wiring in Residential Building

In residential buildings a concealed wiring arrangement is most conveniently and economically

installed in an adequately dimensioned conduit network. It has been found satisfactory to
provide riser conduits or cable ducts and horizontal branch conduits to the apartments, with
distribution boxes at the junctions. With a concealed installation of this kind it is possible at
any time to alter the wiring or add to it without inconvenience to the occupier.

9.8.5 Wiring in Non-residential Buildings

In office buildings, manufacturing plants, department stores etc. particular importance is

attached to flexible arrangement and utilization of the accommodation. To this end the,
communication wiring can be run in underfloor trunking systems or window-sealed trunking
rather than on the walls.

9.8.6 Main Distribution Board

All the lines are collected in the main distribution board. The main distribution board should
be located in the same part of the building in the immediate vicinity of the telephone equipment.
If the telephone equipment extends over several buildings, each building is connected to the
main distribution board by a main cable.

9.8.7 Floor Distribution Board

The floor distribution boards should be accommodated close to the stair well. The rising mains
are run vertically to the floors.

9.8.8 Connection of Telephones

9.8.8.1 At the positions allocated for the telephones the conduit should be terminated in flush-
type boxes. For junction boxes and socket outlets for the connection of telephones, flush-type
boxes (switch boxes) to standards are adequate. A maximum of two telephones can be
connected to a junction box.

9.8.8.2 In most cases the telephone is connected permanently to the subscriber’s line through
a junction box. If it is required to be able to use it in a number of rooms, socket outlets and
plugs should be provided. Units for flush and surface mounting are available for both methods
of connection.

9.8.9 Preventive Measures

Preventive fire precautions (for example, fireproof barriers) should be considered at an early
stage of planning.

9.8.10 Inspection and Testing

The completed installation shall be inspected and simulation testing to be done to ensure that
all the designed functions are available as per the standards and norms of specified by the
manufacturer.

10 COMPUTER NETWORKING

10.1 General

Computer networking is an inherent part of building service in most of the offices, commercial
and industrial establishments. Networking is an independent and specialized subject. Speed of
development, advancement and upgradations in this field are very fast. With the increased
demand of transmission speed, band width; new product is replacing current products every
now and then and making them obsolete. The scope under this section do not cover technology,
but consider infrastructural provisions to be made in planning, and installation, basically
limited to wired networks and its aspects related to building and other building services.

This branch of technology is developing very fast, every now and then, improved versions are
replacing old ones. A note shall be taken that, components mentioned in this section may
become obsolete with the availability of new ones.

10.2 Design and Layout

In networking, different topologies exist which is decided by network designer. Physical

network correlates with actual setup of various components. Locations of these components
and cabling routes is part of planning, especially when cabling is concealed type, underfloor.
Layouts shall be finalized jointly in consultation with network designer. To avoid conflicts
between different service providers it shall be mutually agreed by Architect / MEP consultant
and other service providers. Main components of networking are:

a) Information outlets,
b) Network switch(s),
c) Transceiver,
d) Router(s),
e) Patch panels,
f) LIU with adapter pigtails etc.,
g) Rack,
h) Patch cords, cross cords,
j) Cables – STP/UTP category (Cat6, Cat7),
1) Optical fibre
k) Connectors.
10.3 Installation

10.3.1 Selection of Cables

Selection of cables shall be as per recommendations of system designer. Cat5, Cat5e cables are
becoming obsolete with the advancement in technologies. There is continued improvement in
capacity of cable to support bandwidth and handle data transmission speed. At present Cat6
cables are widely used which can transmit 1 GBps over 100 m length and Cat7 can transmit 10
GBps over 100m length. To be on safer side the length shall not exceed 90m. Unshielded
Twisted Pair (UTP) cables are most widely used however in the locations where
electromagnetic interferences are likely to be predominant or where power cables are in close
vicinity; Shielded Twisted Pair (STP) shall be preferred. To overcome restriction of length,
OFC shall be used. Single mode Fibre optic cables do not have limitation of length. Multimode
OFC can support higher speed but may have limitation of length above 500m.

10.3.2 Method of Laying

Depending on location, and number of cables; conduits, trunking, raceways of adequate cross
section shall be selected. Clearances from other services as recommended by system designer
shall be maintained. Depending on circumstances provision of raised floors may be necessary
in certain areas to facilitate routing of cables. While installing restriction of bending radii of
cables shall be observed.

10.3.3 Structured Cabling

In large setups, data centers, very large number of cables are required to be handled. If cabling
is not planned and installed as per protocols, may lead to mess, create difficulties in
maintaining, augmenting. It will also disturb aesthetics. To resolve this issue, instead of point
to point, preference shall be given to structured cabling. It helps maintain neatness, facilitates
move / shift, add, change in existing network, in a very convenient and easy way. It saves time,
tracing is easier, chances of human error are less.

10.3.4 Terminations

Terminations are done with a connector. This device terminates a segment of cabling or
provides a point of entry for networking devices, such as computers, hubs, and routers.
Connectors can be distinguished according to their physical appearance and mating properties,
such as jacks and plugs (male connectors) or sockets and ports (female connectors). There are
many types of connectors. Most commonly used connectors in cable networking are RJ 45 (RJ-
Registered Jack).

10.4 Testing
Installation shall be tested for desired performance. Network performance test shall be carried
out to quantitatively or qualitatively measure the performance of a computer network. A
network performance test primarily tests the uplink and downlink speed of a network. It defines
how quick and responsive a network is to user / data communication. It is done by uploading
and downloading a data object from the network and measuring both upload and download
speeds, throughput, successful message delivery rate and more.

10.5 Electrical Aspects

10.5.1 Network Cabling

Clearance of 200mm shall be maintained between network cables and electric power cables.
Crossings shall be at right angle.

10.5.2 Electric Supply

LAN equipment is sensitive and vulnerable to voltage fluctuations / surges. SPDs shall be
installed on the circuits providing electrical supply equipment. Distribution of Electric Supply
to all computer networking shall be through UPS with required backup depending on situation.
Electrical distribution and layouts shall be so designed that circuits and routes supplying
computer system equipment will be distinct from other services.

10.5.3 Earthing System

Earthing system is an important aspect of network reliability. It shall be efficient. There shall
not be difference in ground potential between supply sources to different equipment, within
same network. Earthing inefficient to dissipate surge properly to earth, may lead to electrical
noise, faulty data signals, dropped packets, thus decreasing throughput and overall efficiency
of network in data cables in the system. It has been diagnosed that many times cause of damage
to network equipment, such as switches, routers, storage devices, etc., is improper earthing. All
equipment in the rack shall be properly earthed with paint piercing washers, bonding cords /
jumpers and nut-bolts to connect body of equipment to frame of rack and rack to, common
bonding earthing bus. High purity copper backbone bus and other spares used for earthing
system in network will mitigate risk of failures.

11 SURVELLIENCE / SECURITY SYSTEMS

11.1 Foreword

Surveillance and security systems, as the name suggests, are designed to keep an eye and cover
blind spots in building and premises, monitoring authentication and vigil on persons entering
and exiting, etc. These systems primarily consist of security cameras and automated access
control mechanism.
11.2 CCTV

11.2.1 Function

Close Circuit Television (CCTV) has many fold applications. It is important tool of
surveillance and can be linked with security system of building like access control, employees
monitoring, life safety and evacuation under emergency condition, and can be integrated with
BMS for other various aspects. With computer controlled analytics and identification software
it is possible to analyse specific object / identity / action from the video streaming or for
forensic application. Depending on need retention, storage, preservation of recorded data is
possible. The preservation may be set for pre-set time period, and quality from which capacity
of storage device is decided. CCTV system can be wired or wireless. Scope considered under
this section is not going into the details of technology but the factors to be considered in respect
of layouts, installation of CCTV system and coordination with other services including
electrical aspect.

11.2.2 Design and Layout

Design and selection of cameras and equipment comes in purview of system designer /
provider. The locations of cameras, equipment and if necessary, control room, shall be marked
on drawing, in consultation with architect and other service providers so that conflicts will not
occur during installation, functioning will not be disturbed and maintenance in future can be
attended with ease.

11.2.3 Components

Depending on scope / expanse, system may comprise following components for which
location, routes need to be decided and marked on drawings:

a) IP Based CCTV
IP Based Network Camera
CAT6 Cables
PoE Network Switch
Network Video Recorder (NVR) with Surveillance HDD /NAS system/Video Servers
etc.
LED Monitors/Display
Network Rack
RJ 45 Connectors
Optical Fiber Cable (OFC)
Transceiver
LIU with adaptor pigtails etc.

b) Analog CCTV
CCTV Camera
 3+1/ 4+1 CCTV Cables
DVR (Digital Video Recorder with Surveillance HDD
LED Monitors/Display
DVR Rack
BNC Connectors and Power Connectors
Power Supply

11.2.4 Electrical Aspects

11.2.4.1 Cabling

Cabling shall be done by maintaining required clearances from other services and run through
independent enclosers. Conduits of distinct colour coding may be used for identification. In
case of electrical power cables, distance 200mm shall be maintained.

11.2.4.2 Electric supply

Supply for CCTV system shall be provided through independent circuit. All necessary
measures may be considered to maintain supply quality and integrity. Provision of UPS with
adequate backup shall be done as a security measure so that recording doesn’t get interrupted
by malicious act. Electrical supply panels of important nature may be kept under CCTV
surveillance.

11.3 Access Control

11.3.1 Function

Access Control System makes it possible to watch and control entry and exit of person in
building. It can identify, authenticate, record timings of entry and exit and hence presence of
person in the building. Premises requiring security use different types of access control systems
with varied levels of security depending on type of use; residential, commercial, institutional,
or places of high security. The data available may be of use for security, administrative purpose,
crime investigation, etc.

11.3.2 Design and Layout

11.3.2.1 Access point may be decided by building administration / management, security

personnel, depending on size, expanse, level of security. Access control may comprise
biometric, RFID, door controllers with electromagnetic locks and card readers, integrated with
CCTV for identification of person, intrusion detection etc. A wired security system is
connected by low-voltage wires and a wireless security system may employ tiny radio
transmitters which transmits signals to the central control unit. Uninterrupted power supply is
an important requirement for these systems.
11.3.2.2 Emergency considerations
While designing, most important part of access control system is its operation during
emergency, like fire; where fast evacuation is of prime importance. Under the circumstances if
the egress is hindered by locked doors, it is going to be fatal. There are many ways and methods
through which the behavior of Access control system under fire conditions can be designed.
Centralized / individual door access control, power supply to magnetic locks, provision of pull
stations near the doors, location of control panel, power supply, access to these points have
important role in this regard.

11.3.2.3 Integration of fire alarm system

The door access control reader and the electric lock may be wired to the fire alarm in a number
of different ways. A system may be designed to drop power to the electric lock or use an IP
device that drops power using the network connection or add a power control box that drops
power when the fire alarm system detects a fire.

NOTE — Point shall be noted that it is a prime liability of concerned owners / administrators of building and system provider to make
and maintain all necessary provisions in respect of emergency conditions.

11.3.3 Electrical Aspects

The system shall be provided with Uninterrupted Power Supply with backup for assessed or
mandated time period but not less than 2 h. The power circuits shall be independently controlled
with FS grade wires. The wiring used in access control system shall observe all fire related
parameters in respect of selection of material and installation method to maintain supply
integrity for assessed time period of not less than 2 h.

NOTE — It is important to note that occupants shall be trained to handle Access Control system installed at entrance, and exit doors and
shall form a apart of drill.

12 BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

12.1 General

Building Management System (BMS), a computer-based automation to control / monitor

various building services, is a very important tool and general need especially in projects
having expanse of medium to large extent. It is possible to control, operate monitor building
services through a central control station integrating various services as given below:

a) Illumination
b) HVAC
c) Security systems
1) Access control
2) CCTV
3) Alarm
4) Motion detectors
5) PA system
d) Fire alarm
 e) Fire fighting
f) Elevators

12.2 Design

12.2.1 At planning stage architect in consultation with owner / stake holders shall enlist various
services which are going to be incorporated in the building. Further it shall be decided about
adoption of BMS and its scope single or multi-task.

12.2.2 A BMS consists of software and hardware; the software program, usually configured in
a hierarchical manner, can be proprietary or IP based with open standards. Design and
integration of different building services shall consider following aspect which are achievable
through limited human resources, eliminating possibilities of human error.

12.2.2.1 Electric supply and energy consumption

Effective monitoring and targeting of electric supply quality and continuity within internal
distribution. Optimising energy consumption with the use of various types of sensors, PLCs,
actuators, to allow automatic setback override during unoccupied periods as well as adaptive
occupancy scheduling.

12.2.2.2 Illumination
Lighting controls programmed to turn on / off, dim by integrating occupancy / motion sensors,
photo sensors, timers, on time of day / work time scheduling in system, to reduce unnecessary
artificial lighting via motion sensors and as well as by controlling daylight harvesting louvers.

12.2.2.3 HVAC
Climate control by monitoring HVAC system to avoid waste, suit precise requirements Indoor
Air Quality (IAQ), Demand controlled Ventilation for human comfort and health. For example,
controlling mix of fresh air with returned air, by placing sensors in room / duct, monitoring air
dampers, chilled / hot water line valves in Constant Air Volume (CAV) or VFDs in Variable
Air Volume (VAV) system by adjusting CFM.

12.2.2.4 Maintenance
Follow and monitor maintenance schedules for improved equipment / plant reliability, minimal
breakdowns / outages and increased service life.

12.2.2.5 Water management

Save water and energy by monitoring water storage through pumping, rainwater harvesting,
sewage treatment plant (STP), Water treatment plant, etc.

12.2.2.6 Emergency / fire situation

In case of fire, isolating electrical supply other than involving emergency services, automated
operation of fire-fighting system by integrating fire alarm, CCTV system. Automated
operations in HVAC system like closing of dampers in the ventilation system to control smoke
spreading, shut down air handlers, start smoke evacuation fans, and send all the elevators to
the ground floor and park them to prevent people from using them.

12.2.3 Main components of BMS system are:

a) Work station(s)
b) Computer / server
c) Back-up arrangements
d) Control units
e) Various types sensors
f) Actuators
g) Cable network, LAN
h) Required software
j) Internet connection

12.3 Benefits

BMS system benefits in many ways and is recommended in major projects. The main points
are given below:

a) Data can be consolidated onto a single system, which helps reporting, managing
information, decision-making and record keeping.
b) Comprehensive reporting with functionality for customizable reports delivers greater
transparency into system history and promotes compliance.
c) Integrating and managing various building services functionality of which may be
interdependent.
d) Control can be achieved from single workstation which allows facility-wide insight and
control for better performance.
e) Efficient resource deployment can result in reduced operational costs, empowering
operators, simplifying training and decreasing false alarms.
f) Real-time view into facility operations and deep trend analysis provide data-driven
insight to optimize your energy management strategies and minimize operational costs,
targeting energy efficiency.
g) BMS can help support growth and expansion of the system in the future.
h) With help of information from BMS it is easy to observe maintenance schedules with
optimum use of maintenance staff. It helps predictive maintenance and avoid
breakdowns.
j) Strategic mobile or desktop control, exceptional alarm management and integrated
security solutions helps to see the big picture, helping to speed up response time and
mitigate risks for the property, people and business.

12.4 Electrical Aspects

12.4.1 Energy Conservation

BMS deals with energy demand management (EDM). Controls waste and reduces electrical
energy consumption. It helps to improve and maintain quality of supply, supports energy
efficiency.

12.4.2 Cabling

Network topology, bus, cables; their type; twisted, shielded, screened, CAT 6; core material
high purity copper / fibre optic; shall be as per recommendation of system designer. Length
shall be restricted in accordance with cross section, maximum allowable drop to restrict data
loss and speed. Separate conduits shall be used with adequate spacing between cabling of other
services.

12.4.3 Electrical Supply

Electrical Supply to control room shall be through UPS with adequate backup time to suite
specific requirement. Use of Fire Survival cables shall be done from source of main supply to
UPS and further distribution to power outlets for related equipment

12.5 Precautions

Following points shall be considered as precautionary measures:

a) Administrative control shall be well defined with responsibilities;
b) Considering risk of hacking necessary measures shall be taken to prevent it;
c) Data shall be backed up. Access rights shall be kept as record; and
d) System shall be maintained, primarily it shall be performance based, critical items shall
be identified and checked periodically.

13 FIRE ALARM / DETECTION AND FIGHTING SYSTEMS

13.1 General

Fire-fighting and alarm system is most important building service related to life safety of the
occupants in the building This service comes under purview of legal provisions made under
the Act and Rules notified by respective State Governments. Table 7 under Part 4 of National
Building Code categorizes various types of buildings depending on occupancy and height and
prescribes provisions to be made in respect of fire prevention and life safety. Provisions of part
4 from NBC has been adopted by most of the states and UTs and made it mandatory. For details
Part 4 of SP 7 may be referred. The portion under this section is to overview the systems
installed to detect the fire, prevent from spreading and save the lives under fire situation and
electrical aspects related to these systems. Fire alarm system and fire-fighting system are
interdependent but based on different engineering aspects.

13.2 Fire Alarm System

13.2.1 The fire alarm includes fire detection and alarm notification. It helps to detect fire at an
early stage, send alerts so that appropriate action can be taken to help evacuation of occupants,
calling fire-fighting tender, initiating operation of installed fire-fighting system and hence
control spread of fire. The integrated PA system help occupants guide to escape routes and
mitigate situation of panic. IS 2189 prescribes selection, installation and maintenance of
automatic fire detection and alarm system.

13.2.2 Design and Layout

13.2.2.1 The system mainly comprises of following components:

a) Detectors — Smoke, heat, beam, multi sensor, flame, spark, etc.
b) Hooters
c) Manual call points
d) Fire alarm panels — Local / repeater /main
e) Hooter cum strobes
f) Appropriate cable

.
13.2.2.2 Design of fire alarm system shall be done by accredited or authorized agency or
person. Selection of type of system addressable and non-addressable, design and layout
(number, location, route of cables) shall comply guideline given under IS 2189 which
prescribes selection, installation and maintenance of automatic fire detection and alarm system
and Part 4 of SP 7.

13.2.2.3 Circuits controlled and powered by fire alarm system may include circuits for control
of building systems safety functions like elevator control, shut down, door release, smoke
doors, fire doors and damper control, mechanical ventilation / pressurization system. This helps
to monitor the fire prevention and life safety operations.

13.2.3 Electrical Aspects

13.2.3.1 Cabling

Cables shall be 1.5 mm2 copper. Depending on situation, the selection of cable shall be FRLSH
/ HFFR / FS (Circuit Integrity) from amongst IS 7098 (Part 1), IS 17048, BIS Doc ETD 9
(15371), Supply Integrity of required period shall be assessed evacuation period /
recommended by CFO. These cables shall be identifiable when erected on common treys,
raceways. The grade of insulation shall not be less than the other cable running along. The
routes of cables shall be such that the situation will not make adverse effect on it. The
equipment and wiring of the fire alarm system shall be independent of any other equipment or
wiring and shall preferably be spaced at least 5 cm away from each other. Depending on
requirement of mechanical protection / level above ground 2.1 m or less /riser or horizontal on
wall /ceiling / on plenum, fire alarm cables may be armored, shielded. Installation of unshielded
the fire alarm systems, shall be in metallic conduits.
13.2.3.2 Electric supply

Electrical supply for fire alarm system shall have 100 percent standby arrangement. There shall
be a provision of secondary battery continuously trickle/float charged from ac mains, with
facilities for automatic recharging in 8 h sufficiently to supply the maximum alarm load at an
adequate voltage for at least 2 h. The capacity of battery shall be such that it is capable of
maintaining the maximum alarm load on the system at an adequate voltage for at least 1 h plus
the standing load or losses for at least 48 h. Suitable overload protective devices shall be
provided to prevent discharging of the batteries through the charging equipment.

13.3 Fire-Fighting
13.3.1 General
Fire-fighting system comprises fire extinguishers of various types, water-based system with
hydrants, sprinklers, etc. The choice of fire-fighting equipment and their installation details
shall be governed by the requirements specified in Part 4 of SP 7 and statutory provisions
adopted by local bodies.

13.3.2 Design and Layout

13.3.2.1 Depending on rules the design and drawings of system showing details of
locations of fire-fighting pump room, equipment, routes of piping, storage water tank and pump
capacity, type of system, dry, wet risers, down comers, sprinklers shall be got approved from
Chief fire officer/ concerned authority at an early stage as aftermath corrections are difficult to
make. Type and capacity of pumps is based on number of hydrants, area, minimum pressure at
farthest point, head losses and accordingly lpm and HP. There is requirement of standby
arrangement, may be diesel engine driven pump, or gen-set to run electrical motor driven pump
in case of power failure.

13.3.2.2 Main components of fire fighting system are:

a) Main fire pump;
b) Jockey pump;
c) Booster pumps;
d) Control panel;
e) Piping – UG ring main, wet / dry risers;
f) Hydrants;
g) Hose pipe, hose reel drum;
h) Branch pipes;
j) Inlet connection;
k) Sprinklers;
m) Deluge valve; and
n) Diesel pump /gen-set.

13.3.3 Electrical Aspects

13.3.3.1 Electric supply

Sufficient power shall be made available for the purpose and the power source shall be entirely
independent of all other equipment in the premises and shall not be interrupted at any time by
the main switch controlling supply to the building. An indicator lamp shall continuously glow
in a prominent position to indicate status of power in the substation and in the fire-pump room.

13.3.3.2 Standby power source

In case of failure of power from main supply there shall be provision of gen-set run fire-fighting
system. Gen-set shall be of adequate capacity to bear starting load of motors.

Depending on local authority power source from feeder coming from different sub-station is
accepted as alternate source of supply.

13.3.3.3 It is important to note that electric supply and distribution layouts, routes of cables,
location of pump room and control panels shall be so designed that under fire situation supply
to the fire-fighting equipment will remain uninterrupted.

13.3.3.4 All motors and electrical equipment shall be continuously rated, drip-proof with
air inlets and outlets protected with meshed wire panels where required motors shall have a
suitable fixed warming resistance to maintain them in dry condition.
13.3.3.5 The starting equipment of the set shall incorporate an ammeter and clearly
marked to show full load current. They shall not incorporate no-volt trips.

13.3.3.6 The electric circuit for fire-fighting system shall be provided at its origin with a
suitable switch for isolation, but overload and no-volt protection shall not be provided in the
switch.
 ANNEX A
(Clause 2)
LIST OF INDIAN STANDARDS RELATED TO BUILDING SERVICES

IS No. Title
Code of practice for indoor installation of public address systems
1881 : 1998 (first revision)
Outdoor installation of public address system — Code of practice (first
1882 : 1993 revision)
Selection, installation and maintenance of automatic fire detection and alarm
2189 : 2008 system — Code of practice (fourth revision)

3103 : 1975 Code of practice for industrial ventilation (first revision)

3043 : 2018 Code of practice for earthing (second revision)
Code of practice for natural ventilation of residential buildings (first
3362: 1977 revision)
3646 (Part 1): Code of practice for interior illumination: Part 1 General requirements
1992 and recommendations for welding interiors (first revision)

4591 : 1968 Code of practice for installation and maintenance of escalators

Specification for crosslinked polyethylene insulated PVC sheathed
7098 (Part 1) : cables: Part 1 for working voltages up to and including 1100 volts (first
1988 revision)
7662 (Part 1): Recommendations for orientation of buildings: Part 1 Non-industrial
1974 buildings

14665 series Electric traction lifts

Halogen free flame retardant HFFR cables for working voltages up to and
17048 : 2018 including 1 100 Volts — Specification
SP 7: 2016 National Building Code of India

SP 72 : 2010 National Lighting Code

Doc. ETD 09 Specification for Thermosetting Insulated Fire Survival Cables for Fixed
(15371) Installation having Low Emission of Smoke and Corrosive Gases when
Affected by Fire for Working Voltages upto and including 1100V
 PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS
SECTION 16 SELECTION OF EQUIPMENT

FOREWORD

Several Indian Standards exist, which cover details of selection, installation, and maintenance
of electric power equipment. This Part 1/Section 16 of the Code is formulated in such a manner
as to bring out only the essential criteria for selection of equipment, and users of the Code are
recommended to make reference to individual product codes for detailed guidelines.

1 SCOPE

This Indian Standard (Part 1/Sec 16) of the Code covers general criteria for selection of
equipment.

NOTE — This Part 1/Section 16 shall be read in conjunction with the Indian Standard/Codes on individual equipment.

2 SELECTION OF EQUIPMENT

2.1 Conformity to Indian Standards

Every item of electrical equipment used in the installation shall conform to the relevant Indian
Standards, wherever available.

2.2 Characteristics

Every item of electrical equipment selected shall have suitable characteristics appropriate to
the values and conditions on which the design of the electrical installation (Part 1/Sec 9) is
based and shall, in particular, fulfil the requirements given at 2.2.1 to 2.2.4.

2.2.1 Voltage

Electrical equipment shall be suitable with respect to the maximum steady voltage (r.m.s value
for a.c.) likely to be applied, as well as over-voltages likely to occur.

NOTE — For certain equipment, it may be necessary to take account of the lowest voltage likely to occur.

2.2.2 Current

All electrical equipment shall be selected with respect to the maximum steady-state current
(r.m.s value for a.c.) which it has to carry in normal service, and with respect to the current
likely to be carried in abnormal conditions and the period (for example, operating time of
protective devices, if any) during which it may be expected to flow.

2.2.3 Frequency

If frequency has an influence on the characteristics of electrical equipment, the rated frequency
of the equipment shall correspond to the frequency likely to occur in the circuit.

2.2.4 Load Factor

All electrical equipment which is to be selected on the basis of its power characteristics, shall
be suitable for the duty demanded of the equipment, taking into account the design service
conditions.

2.3 Conditions of Installation

All electrical equipment shall be selected so as to withstand safely the stresses and the
environmental conditions (see Table 1 of Part 1/Section 8 of this Code) characteristic of its
location to which it may be subjected. The general characteristics of building installations are
assessed according to the guidelines given in Part 1/ Section 8 of this Code. If, however, an
item of equipment does not have by design the properties corresponding to its location, it may
be used on condition that adequate additional protection provided as part of the completed
electrical installation.

2.4 Prevention of Harmful Effects

All electrical equipment shall be selected so that it will not cause harmful effects on, other
equipment or impair the supply during normal service including switching operations. In this
context, the factors which may have an influence include:

a) Power factor,
b) Inrush current,
c) Asymmetrical load,
d) Harmonics, and
e) Transient over-voltages generated by equipment in the installation.

2.5 Guidelines on the selection of specific equipment are covered in the relevant Indian
Standards. Guidelines on selection of protective devices are given at Part 1/ Section 18 of this
Code.
 PART 1
SECTION 17
ERECTION AND PRE-COMISSIONING TESTING
OF INSTALLATION
FOREWORD
Testing and ensuring that the installation conforms to the predetermined conditions before the
installation could be energized, is a necessary prerequisite under the statutory provisions. Several
aspects/parameters are required to be verified before an installation could be certified as ready for
energizing and use.
While a general check list of items to be checked and necessary tests to be done are included in
this Section, individual product standards and individual Codes of practice cover more detailed
guidelines on pre-commissioning checks for individual equipment. Verification shall be done as
per 6 of IS 732.
In addition to initial testing, ‘periodic testing and preventive maintenance checks’ are necessary.
The nature and frequency of such measures depends on the nature of the electrical installation in
subject. Guidelines on such aspects are outside the purview of the Code. However, a reference
could be made to individual equipment codes which cover maintenance schedules.
1 SCOPE
This Indian Standard (Part 1/Sec 17) of the Code covers general principles of erection of
installation and guidelines on initial testing before commissioning and shall be used for electrical
safety audits.
2 REFERENCES

2.1 The standards listed in Annex A contain provisions, which through reference in this text,
constitute provisions of this standard. At the time of publication, the editions indicated were valid.
All standards are subject to revision, and parties to agreements based on this standard are
encouraged to investigate the possibility of applying the most recent editions of the standards.

2.2 It must be ensured that all required type test certificates for important equipment like breakers,
transformers, switchboards and switchgear within and all bought out items are checked for
correctness. All test certificates for routine tests done on relevant equipment done during shop
testing are in order and checked for correctness.
3 ERECTION
3.1 To ensure a safe, good quality and excellent installation, erection of the electrical installation
should commence with the best workmanship by appropriately qualified personnel having valid
electrical contracting license issued by the government, use of proper and correct materials,
appropriate tools, tackles and equipment.
3.2 The characteristics of the electrical equipment, as determined in accordance with Part 1/Sec
12 shall not be impaired in the process of erection.
3.3 Protective (earthing) conductors and neutral conductors shall be identifiable at least at their
terminations by separate colours other than those of live conductors or other means. These
conductors in flexible cords or flexible cables shall be identifiable by colours or other means
throughout their length (see 3.6 of Part 1/Sec 4).
3.4 Connections, ‘between conductors’ and ‘between conductors and other electrical equipment’
shall be made in such a way that safe and reliable contacts are ensured. For electrical wiring
installation, IS 732 should be followed.
3.5 All electrical equipment shall be installed in such a manner that the designed cooling
conditions are not impaired and space between individual equipment complements the natural
cooling process providing allowance to move air around freely as well as restricts the heat radiation
to adjacent equipment using air within space as insulation.
3.6 All electrical equipments likely to cause high temperatures or electric arcs shall be placed or
guarded so as to eliminate the risk of ignition of flammable materials. A proper shielding /
barricading should be provided around such equipment / ‘vicinity containing such equipment’ to
avoid transfer of excess heat till flash point though any possible mean. Where the temperature of
any exposed parts of electrical equipment is likely to cause injury to persons, these parts shall be
so located as to prevent accidental contact therewith. Appropriate personnel with suitable
protective gear shall be deployed within such vicinities. In case the work execution happens to be
in close vicinity of live electric conductor then the protection gear should be of sufficient capability
to avoid any transfer of electricity directly /residually / leakage to human body. All safety
provisions specified in Indian Electricity Rules, 2003 and CEA Guidelines must be followed during
erection of equipment.
3.7 Several Indian Standards exist on installation of specific electrical equipment. These shall be
adhered to during erection of the installation.
4 INSPECTION AND TESTING
4.1 General Requirements
4.1.1 Before and during the completion of the installation, or a modification to the existing
installation, inspection and testing shall be carried out in accordance with IS 732. Model forms
provided in Annex D (IS 732) shall be used during inspection and testing to ensure that the defects
are rectified before putting this into service.
4.1.2 After performing all requisite pre-commissioning tests mentioned vide various specifications
of individual equipment and subsequently putting the installation into service, periodic inspection
and testing shall be carried out in order to maintain the installation in a sound condition.
4.1.3 Where an addition is to be made to the fixed wiring of an existing installation the latter shall
be examined for compliance with recommendations of this Code.
4.2 Inspection of the Installation
4.2.0 General
At the completion of wiring, a general inspection shall be carried out by competent personnel to
verify that the provisions of this Code and that of Indian Electricity Rules, 2003 have been
complied with. This, among other things, shall include checking whether all equipment, fittings,
accessories, wires and cables, used in the installation are of adequate rating and quality to meet the
requirements of the load. General workmanship of the electrical wiring with regard to the layout
and finish shall be examined for neatness that would facilitate easy identification of circuits of the
system, adequacy of clearances, soundness of termination with respect to tightness, contact
pressure and contact area and natural or arranged similarity in type of material / metal surfaces
coupled in contact with each other. A complete check shall also be made of all the protective
devices, with respect to the rating, range & upward / downward variation in settings of devices in
sequence.
4.2.1 Substation Installations
In substation installation it shall be checked whether:
a) Verification of characteristics of the equipment (including rated values) for the given
operating conditions;
b) Verification of minimum clearances between live parts and between live parts and
earth;
c) Power frequency voltage test for switchgear;
d) Voltage test for cables;
e) Verification of minimum heights and of protective barrier clearances;
f) Visual inspections and/or functional tests of electrical equipment and parts of
installation;
g) Functional tests and/or measuring of protective, monitoring, measuring and controlling
devices;
h) Inspection of markings, safety signs and safety devices;
j) Verification of correct fire ratings for buildings/enclosures;
k) Verification that emergency exits are operational;
m) Verification of the earthing system;
n) Suitable fencing is provided with gate with lockable arrangements;
p) The required number of caution boards, firefighting equipment, operating rods, rubber
mats etc, are kept in the substation;
q) In case of indoor substation, sufficient ventilation and draining arrangements are made;
r) All cable trenches are provided with nonflammable covers;
s) Free accessibility is provided for all equipment for normal operation;
t) All name-plates are fixed and the equipment are fully painted;
u) All construction materials and temporary connections are removed;
v) Oil levels, bus bar tightness, transformer tap position, etc, are in order;
w) Panels and switchgears are all vermin and damp proof and all unused openings or holes
are blocked properly and it should be ensured that appropriate IP protection is provided to
switchgear / panel / equipment depending on location of installation
y) The earth bus bars for tightness and for corrosion free joint surface;
z) Control switch fuses are provided at an accessible height from ground;
aa) Adequate head room is available in the transformer room for easy topping up of oil,
maintenance, etc;
ab) Clearances in the front, rear and sides of the switchboards, are adequate;
ac) The gap in the horngap fuse and the size of fuse adequate;
ad) The switch operates freely, all the blades make contact at the same time. The arcing
horns contact in advance, and the handles are provided with locking arrangements;
 ae) Insulators are free from cracks, and are clean;
af) In the case of transformers, there is any oil leak;
ag) Connections to bushings in transformers are tightened and have good contact;
ah) Bushings are free from cracks and are clean;
aj) Accessories of transformers like breathers, vent pipe, buchholz relay, etc, are in order;
ak) Connections to gas relay in transformers are in order;
am) Oil and winding temperature are set for specific requirements in transformers;
an) In case of cable cellars /trenches, adequate arrangements to pump out water that has
entered due to seepage or other reason is provided; and all entries points below ground
level are firmly plugged to avoid probable entry of rodents /reptiles /insects and water; and
ap) All incoming and outgoing circuits of panels are clearly and indelibly labelled for
identifications both at the front and at the rear and all entry points below ground level are
firmly plugged to avoid probable entry of rodents /reptiles /insects and water.

4.2.2 Low Voltage System (up to 1 000 V a.c. and 1 500 V d.c.)
4.2.2.1 Inspection shall precede testing and shall normally be done prior to energizing the
installation.

4.2.2.2 The inspection shall be made to confirm that electrical equipment which is part of the fixed
installation is:

a) In compliance with the safety requirements of the relevant equipment standards;

NOTE — This can be ascertained by examination of the manufacturer’s information, marking or certification.

b) Correctly selected and erected according to IS 732 taking into account the manufacturer’s
instructions; and
c) Not visibly damaged or defective so as to impair safety.

4.2.2.3 Inspection shall include at least the checking of the following, where relevant:
NOTE — For clause wise compliance of various inspection requirements, refer 6 of IS 732.

a) Method of protection against electric shock;

b) Presence of fire barriers and other precautions against propagation of fire &protection
against thermal effects;
c) Selection of conductors for current-carrying capacity;
d) Choice, setting, selectivity and coordination of protective and monitoring devices;
e) Selection, location and installation of suitable overvoltage protective devices (SPD) where
specified;
f) Selection, location and installation of suitable isolating and switching devices;
g) Selection of equipment and protective measures appropriate to external influences and
mechanical stresses
h) Identification of neutral and protective conductors;
j) Presence of diagrams, warning notices or similar information;
k) Identification of circuits, overcurrent protective devices, switches, terminals etc.;
m) Adequacy of termination and connection of cables and conductors;
 n) Selection and installation of earthing arrangements, protective conductors and their
connections;
p) Accessibility of equipment for convenience of operation, identification and maintenance;
q) Measures against electromagnetic disturbances;
r) Exposed-conductive-parts are connected to the earthing arrangement; and
s) Selection and erection of the wiring systems.

It shall also be checked whether:

1) All blocking /packaging materials that are used for safe transportation in switchgears,
contractors, relays, etc, are removed;
2) All connections to the earthing system are feasible for periodical inspection;
3) Sharp cable bends are avoided and cables are taken in a smooth manner in the trenches or
alongside the walls and ceilings using suitable support clamps at regular intervals and all power
/control cables laid, dressed and connected properly using "appropriate termination materials
including inhibiting compounds /pastes" , to equipment /busbars and using appropriate nut bolts
/washers /spring washers etc. All control cables should be separated from HT /LT power cables by
means of separate raceway / trough /tray at a suitable distance;
4) Suitable linked switch or circuit-breaker or lockable push button is provided near the
motors/apparatus for controlling supply to the motor apparatus in any easily accessible location
5) Control switchgear is provided at an accessible height from ground for controlling supply to
overhead travelling crane hoists, overhead bus bar trunking;
6) The metal rails on which the crane travels are electrically continuous and earthed and bonding
of rails and earthing at both ends are done;
7) Trailing cables of three core should be used for overhead travelling cranes and portable
equipment having single phase loads including one core for earthing, and 6 core trailing cables
should be used in case of three phase loads 5th core is used for protective earthing & 6th core for
functional earthing.
8) If flexible metallic hose is used for wiring to motors and equipment, the wiring is enclosed to
the full lengths, and the hose secured properly using end coupling;
9) The cables are not taken through areas where they are likely to be damaged due to mechanical
impact or affected due to chemical environment;
10) The screens and armour of the cables are connected to earthing system properly;
11) The belts of the belt driven equipment are properly guarded;
12) Ammeters and voltmeters are tested and calibrated;
13) Relays are inspected visually by moving covers for deposits or dusts or other foreign matter
and their operations and accuracies should be checked using suitable primary /secondary injection
equipment;
14) Flat washers backed up by spring washers are used for making end connections; and
15) Number of wires in a conduit confirm to provisions of this Code.
4.3 Testing of Installation
4.3.0 General
After inspection, the following tests shall be carried out, before an installation or an addition to the
existing installation is put into service, any testing of the electrical installation in an already
existing installation shall commence after obtaining permit to work from the engineer-in-charge
and after ensuring the safety provisions.
NOTE — List of some functional tests are listed under Annex C.

4.3.1 System more than 1 kV a.c.

4.3.1.1 Verification of specified performances

Tests should, in general, be carried out on various equipments under installation at appropriate
stages of work, ultimately to verify performance of the installation. This may include
determination of procedure of installation based on stringent technical norms, test methods
including confirmation of technical competency of site services, personnel, etc.

4.3.1.2 Tests during installation and commissioning

The user and supplier shall agree on the requirements (methods and acceptance criteria) for tests
during installation and commissioning, together with a listing of the testing standards to be applied.
This may include functional tests to demonstrate the ability of the equipment to satisfy the
operational requirements, such as automatic start-up and shutdown.

The test equipment for demonstration of achievement of design requirements should be agreed
between the user and supplier.

The user and supplier shall agree on a schedule of tests for components and systems during the
installation and commissioning period. The necessary services to allow the tests to be carried out
should be agreed between both the parties.

NOTE — The contractual consequences of the outcome of the tests during installation and commissioning should be
stated in the enquiry, as and where felt appropriate.

4.3.1.3 Trial running

When agreed between the user and supplier, a trial run shall be performed post all pre-
commissioning tests as mutually agreed upon. The purpose of the trial run is to prove the functional
capability and assurance of operational safety of the high-voltage installation. During the run,
therefore, all significant components should be in operation. The agreement should define under
what circumstances a breakdown of a significant component constitutes an interruption of the trial.
The user may also define criteria of exceptions for breakdowns of a very short period, for example
simply extending the period of the trial by the outage time.

The conditions that have to be met for the successful completion of the trial run should be
defined in the enquiry.
NOTE — The contractual consequences of the outcome of the trial run should be stated in the enquiry, as and where
appropriate.

4.3.1.4 Operation and maintenance manual

Each installation should have an operation manual describing the normal, emergency, and
maintenance procedures as well as safety instructions for the operation of the high-voltage
electrical installation. For the preparation of manuals and instructions, IEC/IEEE 82079-1 shall
apply.

Each installation should have at least three sets of good for construction as well as up-to-date
drawings (as built drawings) and operating diagrams “on the operational premises” as well as in
“independent safe custody”. These drawings and diagrams should allow operation and
maintenance personnel to provide safe and efficient interventions in the installation when need be.
Manufacturers of major components of an installation should provide operation and maintenance
manuals and test and in-service reports. These documents should be readily available for use when
necessary. Emergency routes to the nearest hospital and emergency phone numbers should be
displayed in a visible location in the installation.

4.3.1.5 Measurements of earthing system

Measurements shall be carried out after construction, where necessary, to verify the adequacy of
the design. Measurements may include the earthing system impedance, prospective touch and step
voltages at relevant locations and transferred potential, if appropriate. When measuring touch and
step voltages under test conditions, for example, current injection test, two choices are possible.
Either measure the prospective touch and step voltages using a high impedance voltmeter or
measure the effective touch and step voltages appearing across an appropriate resistance which
represents the human body.

4.3.2 Switchboards
Switchboards shall be tested in the manner indicated below:
a) All switchboards shall be tested for di-electric test in the manner recommended in IS/IEC
61439-1;
b) All earth connections shall be checked for continuity;
c) The operation of all protective devices shall be tested by means of secondary or primary
injection tests;
d) The operation of the circuit-breakers shall be tested from all control stations;
e) Indication/signaling lamps shall be checked for working;
f) The operation of the circuit-breakers shall be tested for all interlock;
g) The closing and opening timings of the circuit breakers shall be tested wherever required
for auto transfer schemes;
h) Contact resistance of main and isolator contacts shall be measured; and
j) The specific gravity of the electrolyte and the voltage of the control battery shall be
measured.

4.3.3 Transformers
All commissioning tests as listed in IS 10028 (Part 2) shall be carried out.
4.3.4 Cables
Cable installations shall be checked as laid down in IS 1255.

4.3.5 Motors and Other Equipment

The following tests are made on motor and other equipment:
a) The insulation resistance of each phase winding against the frame and between the windings
shall be measured. (Insulation Resistance Tester) of 500 V / 1 000 V rating shall be used. Star
points should be disconnected. Minimum acceptable value of the insulation resistance varies with
the rated power and the rated voltage of the motor.

The following relation may serve as a reasonable guide:

Where,
Ri = insulation resistance in MQ at 25°C,
En = rated phase-to-phase voltage, and
P = rated power kW.

If the resistance is measured at a temperature different from 25°C, the value shall be corrected to
25°C.

b) The insulation resistance as measured at ambient temperature does not always give a reliable
value, since moisture might have been absorbed during shipment and storage. When the
temperature of such a motor is raised, the insulation resistance will initially drop considerably,
even below the acceptable minimum. In case of any doubt under such circumstances, motor
winding shall be dried out.

4.3.6 Energy meters

IS 15707 should be followed in case of energy meters.

4.3.7 Low Voltage System (up to 1000 V a.c. and 1500 V d.c.)

4.3.7.1 General

The test methods described in 4.3 are reference methods only; other method if any, may be
followed provided they give no less reliable and trustworthy results. Measuring instruments and
monitoring equipment and methods shall be chosen in accordance with the relevant parts of the
IS/IEC 61557 series. If other measuring equipment is used, it shall provide no less a degree of
performance and safety. The test and measuring equipment /instruments should periodically (as
specified by relevant standards) be calibrated in authorized Test Laboratories for their accuracy.

4.3.7.2 Some of the tests specified shall be done in live condition. Fault loop impedance tests
require designed source in live condition.

4.3.7.3 The following tests shall be carried out where relevant and should preferably be made in
the following sequence:
NOTE — Refer IS 732 for more information and methods for measuring the insulation resistance / impedance of floors and
walls to earth or to the protective conductor, measurement of earth electrode resistance:

a) continuity of conductors;
b) insulation resistance;
c) insulation resistance testing to confirm the effectiveness of protection by SELV, PELV or
electrical separation;
d) insulation resistance testing to confirm the effectiveness of floor and wall
resistance/impedance;
e) polarity test;
f) testing to confirm effectiveness of automatic disconnection of supply;
g) testing to confirm the effectiveness of additional protection;
h) test of phase sequence;
j) functional tests; and
k) voltage drop.

4.3.7.4 In the event of any test indicating failure to comply, that test and any preceding test, the
results of which may have been influenced by the fault indicated, shall be repeated after the fault
has been rectified. When testing in a potentially explosive atmosphere appropriate safety
precaution in accordance with IS/IEC 60079-17 are necessary.

4.3.7.5 Portable appliance test (PAT)

This test is mainly performed in respect of Class I appliances to test earth continuity of appliance
from available source at power outlet to avoid risk and ensure safe working. With the help of
PAT tester insulation resistance of the appliance can also be checked. Depending on test results
it can be decided whether appliance is safe for use. For continuity 0.1 ohm and Insulation
resistance of 1M-ohm and above shall be considered safe.

4.4 Testing of Lightning Protection System of Buildings

4.4.0 General

Lightning protection shall be done as per IS/IEC 62305. For industrial/commercial and multi
storied buildings, suitable lightning protection levels are selected based on risk assessment
calculations provided in IS/IEC 62305-2. The effectiveness of any LPS depends on its adoption of
design, installation, maintenance, and testing methods explained in IS/IEC 62305-2. Inspections,
testing and maintenance shall not be conducted during threat of thunderstorms.

4.4.1 Application of Inspections

The objective of the inspections is to ascertain that:

a) the LPS conforms to the design based on IS/IEC 62305,

b) all components of the LPS are in good condition and capable of performing their designed
functions, and that there is no corrosion, and
c) any recently added services or constructions are incorporated into the LPS.

4.4.2 Order of Inspections

Inspections should be made according to 4.4.1 as follows:

a) during the construction of the structure, in order to check the embedded electrodes;
b) after the installation of the LPS;
c) earthing resistance value for the earth-termination system; and
d) condition of connections, equipotential bonding and fixings.

4.4.3 Testing

Inspection and testing of the LPS includes visual inspections and should be completed by the
following actions:

a) performing continuity tests, especially continuity of those parts of the LPS which were not
visible for inspection during the initial installation and are not subsequently available for
visual inspection;
b) conducting earth resistance tests of the earth-termination system. The following isolated
and combined earth measurements and checks should be made and the results recorded in
an LPS inspection report.
NOTE — High-frequency or impulse measurements are possible and useful to determine high frequency or
impulse behaviour of the earth-termination system. Such measurements may be performed at the stage of
installation of the earthing system to check adequacy between the designed earthing system and the need.

c) The resistance to earth of each local earth electrode and where reasonably practical, the
resistance to earth of the complete earth-termination system. Each local earth electrode
should be measured in isolation with the test joint between the down-conductor and earth
electrode in the disconnected position (isolated measurement).
NOTE — For earth networks incorporating both vertical earth rods and a partial or full ring earth electrode,
disconnection and testing should be performed at the earth inspection pit. If such inspection is difficult to
perform, routine test should be completed by high frequency or impulse tests.

d) If the resistance to earth of the earth-termination system as a whole exceeds 10 ohm, a

check should be made to ascertain that the electrode conforms to 5.4 of IS/IEC 62305.
 For earth electrodes in rocky soil, the requirements of IS/IEC 62305-3 should be followed.
The 10 ohm requirement is not applicable in this case.

e) The results of a visual check of all conductors, bonds and joints or their measured electrical
continuity. If the earth-termination system does not conform to these requirements, or
checking the requirements is not possible because of a lack of information, the earth-
termination system should be improved by installing extra earth electrodes or installing a
new earth-termination system in parallel connectivity to existing one.

f) SPDs need to be tested, preferably using the guidelines or equipment provided by the
manufacturer.

4.4.4 Documentation of Inspection

LPS inspection guides should be prepared to facilitate LPS inspections. They should contain
sufficient information to guide the inspector through the inspection process so that all areas of
importance are documented such as the method of LPS installation, the type and condition of the
LPS components, test methods and the proper recording of the test data obtained.

The inspector should compile an LPS inspection report, which should be kept together with the
LPS design report and the previously compiled LPS maintenance and inspection reports.

The LPS inspection report should contain the following information:

a) general conditions of air-termination conductors, and other air-termination components;

b) general level of corrosion and the condition of the corrosion protection;
c) security of attachment of the LPS conductors and components;
d) earth resistance measurements of the earth-termination system;
e) any deviation from the requirements of this standard; and
f) documentation of all changes and extension of the LPS and any changes to the structure.

In addition, the LPS construction drawings and the LPS design description should be reviewed,
the results of the tests performed.

4.5 On completion of an electrical installation (or an extension to an installation) a certificate shall

be furnished by the appropriate person in the prescribed forms in Annex D, countersigned by the
appropriate authority under whose direct supervision the installation was carried out. This
certificate in the prescribed forms of IS 732 can be used by the local electric supply authority
(subject to acceptance) and form a base for electrical safety audits.
 ANNEX A
(Clause 2.1)
LIST OF STANDARDS ON INSTALLATION

IS No./Other Publications Title

IS 732 : 2019 Code of practice for electrical wiring installations
IS/IEC 61439-1 : 2011 Low-Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear Assemblies : Part 1
General Rules
IS 10028 (Part 2) : 1981 Code of practice for selection, installation and maintenance of
transformers: Part 2 Installation
IS 1255 : 1983 Code of practice for installation and maintenance of power cables
upto and including 33 kV rating (second revision)
IS 15707 : 2006 Testing, evaluation, installation and maintenance of a.c. electricity
meters — Code of practice
IS/IEC 61557 series Electrical safety in low voltage distribution systems up to 1 000 V
a.c. and 1 500 V6155 d.c.
IS/IEC 60079-17 : 2013 Explosive Atmospheres : Part 17 Electrical Installations
Inspection and Maintenance (first revision)
IS/IEC 62305 series Protection Against Lightning62305
IEC/IEEE 82079-1:2019 Preparation of information for use (instructions for use) of
products — Part 1: Principles and general requirements
 ANNEX B
ESTIMATION OF THE RESISTANCE VALUE LIKELY TO BE OBTAINED DURING
CONTINUITY TESTING

Table B-1 Specific Conductor Resistance R for Copper Wiring at 30 °C Dependent on the
Nominal Cross-sectional Area S for Rough Calculation of Conductor Resistances

Nominal Cross-sectional Area S Specific Conductor Resistance R at 30◦C

mm2 mΩ/m
1.5 12.5755
2.5 7.5661
4 4.7392
6 3.1491
10 1.8811
16 1.1858
25 0.7525
35 0.5467
50 0.4043
70 0.2817
95 0.2047
120 0.1632
150 0.1341
185 0.1091

The specific conductor resistance values are related to a conductor temperature of 30◦C. For other
temperatures Ꝋ the conductor resistances RꝊ can be calculated by the use of the following formula:
R Ꝋ = R30◦C[1+α(Ꝋ - 30◦C )]

Where: Ꝋ is temperature at which desired specific conductor resistance is to be calculated,

α is the temperature coefficient (for copper α = 0.00393 K -1)

Example of calculate SCR of 16 mm² copper conductor @ 40° C the derivative will be:
R40 = 1.1858[1+0.00393(40-30)] =1.2324
 ANNEX C
(Clause 4.3.0)
LIST OF FUNCTIONAL TESTS

C-1 HT SWITCH BOARD

a) Current Transformer

1) Physical inspection checks;

2) Terminal marking identification as per schematic diagram;
3) Insulation resistance test;
4) Winding resistance test;
5) Polarity test;
6) Knee point voltage test (for PS class only);
7) Current ratio test;
8) Tan delta and capacitance measurement (applicable for rated voltage above 66kV);
9) Interposing CT testing (if present);
10) Summation CT testing (if present);
11) Metering circuit checks;
12) Protection circuits checks;
13) Test terminal block link checks;
14) Secondary lead resistance checks (applicable for switch yard only);
15) Burden test/ secondary injection test; and
16) Primary injection checks (including core identification checks).

b) Potential Transformer / Capacitive Voltage Transformer

1) Physical inspection checks;

2) Terminal marking identification as per schematic diagram;
3) Insulation resistance test ;
4) Winding resistance test;
5) Polarity test;
6) Voltage ratio test;
7) Tan delta and capacitance measurement (applicable for rated voltage above 66kV);
8) Metering circuit checks;
9) Protection circuits checks;
10) Primary and secondary PT fuses check; and
11) Test terminal block link checks secondary injection test

c) Circuit Breaker

1) Physical inspection checks;

2) Breaker internal wiring checks;
3) AC and DC circuit checks;
4) Mechanical and electrical operation (OPEN/CLOSE) checks;
5) Spring charge motor insulation resistance, winding resistance and current checks;
 6) Insulation resistance test;
7) Static contact resistance / milli volt drop measurement test;
8) Timing operation test (close, open and close open);
9) Dynamic contact resistance measurement (applicable for 220kV and above);
10) Coil resistance test;
11) Coil current test;
12) Trip circuit supervision checks;
13) Closing and tripping circuit checks;
14) Anti-pumping checks;
15) Pole discrepancy checks (if applicable);
16) SF6 gas alarm/trip checks (if applicable);
17) Auxiliary contact multiplication circuit checks (feedback/status contact); and
18) Auxiliary contact change over checks (potential free/ spare contacts).

d) Isolator/ Disconnector and Earth Switch

1) Physical inspection checks;

2) Isolator internal wiring checks;
3) AC and DC circuit checks;
4) Isolator and earth switch motor insulation resistance, winding resistance and current
checks;
5) Mechanical and electrical operation (OPEN/CLOSE) checks;
6) Interlock checks between isolator and earth switch both electrical and mechanical (if
applicable);
7) Insulation resistance test;
8) Static contact resistance for isolator (earth switch if applicable);
9) Closing and opening circuit checks;
10) Pole discrepancy checks (if applicable);
11) Auxiliary contact multiplication circuit checks (feedback/status contact); and
12) Auxiliary contact change over checks (potential free/ spare contacts).

e) Surge/ Lightning Arrestor

1) Physical inspection checks;

2) Insulation resistance test;
3) Surge counter operation checks (if applicable);
4) High voltage test (up to 30kV AC); or
5) Tan Delta, Capacitance and Watt measurement (applicable for rated voltage above
66kV).

f) Protection Relays

1) Directional over current and earth fault relays;

2) Non-directional over current and earth fault relays;
 3) Under voltage and over voltage relays;
4) Residual over voltage or neutral displacement relays;
5) Distance protection relays (line protection relays);
6) Differential protection relays (transformer, motor, line / cable, busbar, reactor,
generator and overall generator);
7) Check synch relay;
8) Automatic voltage regulation relay in RTCC;
9) Reverse power relay;
10) Negative sequence protection relay; and
11) Over and under frequency protection relay:
i) Physical inspection checks,
ii) Insulation resistance test,
iii) Protection checks based on IEC standard curves, or
iv) Binary input and output checks.

g) Auxiliary Relays

1) Tripping relay;
2) Lock out relay;
3) Trip circuit supervision relays;
4) Contact multiplication relay;
5) ON/OFF delay timer:
i) Physical inspection checks,
ii) Insulation resistance test,
iii) Coil and contact resistance checks, or
iv) Pick up and drop off voltage checks.

h) Busbar/ Busduct

1) Physical inspection checks;

2) Insulation resistance test;
3) Contact resistance / milli volt drop measurement test;
4) High voltage withstand test; and
5) Differential stability checks (if applicable).

j) Switchboard Scheme Checking

1) Inter-panel wiring checks;

2) Bus wiring checks;
3) Insulation resistance checks;
4) AC and DC circuit checks;
5) On load transfer checks;
6) Auto change over scheme checks;
7) Synchronizing scheme checks;
8) Breaker failure and LBB initiation checks (if applicable);
 9) Binary input and output checks;
10) Local/remote (DCS/SCADA/BCU) operation checks (if applicable); and
11) Trip matrix checks (if applicable).

k) HT Cable

1) Physical inspection checks;

2) Phase identification checks;
3) Insulation resistance test; and
4) High voltage withstand test.

m) Distribution Transformers

1) Physical inspection checks;

2) OLTC scheme and operation checks (if applicable);
3) Insulation resistance test;
4) Magnetizing current test at all taps;
5) Open circuit /voltage ratio test at all taps;
6) Magnetic balance test at Min, Max and normal tap;
7) Vector group / polarity test at normal tap;
8) Short circuit test at all taps (wherever possible);
9) Winding resistance test at all taps;
10) Polarisation index test at normal tap;
11) Transformer marshalling box scheme and wiring checks;
12) Testing of accessories (Bucholz relay, OTI, WTI and PRV);
13) Testing of cable (continuity and IR) from accessories to MB; and
14) RTCC operation checks (if applicable).

n) Motors / Diesel Generators

1) Physical inspection checks;

2) Insulation resistance test;
3) Winding resistance test;
4) Neutral side current transformer test (if applicable);
5) High voltage withstand test (up-to 50mA);
6) Differential stability checks (if applicable);
7) Start /stop operation checks at local/ remote; and
8) No load / load trial for 4 h.

p) Earthing System

1) Continuity of earthing conductor;

2) Continuity of main bonding conductor;
3) Continuity of supplementary bonding conductor;
4) Earth conductor joint resistance measurement; and
5) Earth electrode resistance measurement (individual and with grid).
 ANNEX D
MODEL FORMS FOR REPORTING
(Clause 4.1.1 and 4.5)
NOTE — For guidance on the application of the rules initial verification, refer IS 732.

Table D-1 Electrical Installation Verification Report (New or Altered Installation) Commented [u1]: Table needs to be re-typed. This is a
Electrical Installation Verification report (New or Altered Installation) snapshot of the original table.
(IS 732 Code of Practice for Electrical Wiring System)
Table D-2 Electrical Installation Conditioning Report (Existing Installation) Commented [u2]: Table needs to be re-typed. This is a
snapshot of the original table.
D-1 NOTES FOR THE PERSON PRODUCING THE REPORT: (TABLE D-2)

a) This report should only be used for the reporting on the condition of an existing electrical
installation.
b) The report, normally comprising at least six pages, should include schedules of both the
inspection and the test results. Additional pages may be necessary for other than a simple
installation. The number of each page should be indicated, together with the total number
of pages involved.
c) The reason for producing this report, such as change of occupancy or landlord’s periodic
maintenance, should be identified in section.
d) The maximum prospective fault current (Ipf) recorded should be the greater of either the
short-circuit current or the earth fault current.
e) Those elements of the installation that are covered by the report and those that are not
should be identified in section D (extent and limitations). These aspects should have been
agreed with the person ordering the report and other interested parties before the inspection
and testing is carried out. Any operational limitations, such as inability to gain access to
parts of the installation or an item of equipment, should also be recorded in section D.
f) The summary of condition of the installation in terms of safety should be clearly indicated
in section E. Observation(s), if any, should be categorized in section M using the coding
C-1 to C-3 as appropriate. Any observation given a C-1 or C-2 classification should result
in the overall condition of the installation being reported as unsatisfactory.
g) Where an installation has an alternative source of supply a further schedule of supply
characteristics and earthing details based upon Section I of this report should be provided.
h) Where an observation requires further investigation because the inspection has revealed an
apparent deficiency which could not, owing to the extent or limitations of this inspection,
be fully identified, this should be indicated in the column headed “Further investigation
required” within section M.
j) The date by which the next electrical installation condition report is required should be
given in Section F. The interval between inspections should take into account the type and
usage of the installation and its overall condition.
k) If the space available for observations in Section M is insufficient, additional pages should
be provided as necessary.
m) Wherever practicable, items classified as ‘Danger present’ (C1) should be made safe on
discovery. Where this is not practical the owner or user should be given written notification
as a matter of urgency.

D-2 GUIDANCE FOR RECIPIENTS (Table D-2) (to be appended to the report)

This report is an important and valuable document which should be retained for future
reference.

This report form is for reporting on the condition of an existing electrical installation.

a) The purpose of this condition report is to confirm, so far as reasonably practicable, whether
or not the electrical installation is in a satisfactory condition for continued service (see
 section E). The report should identify any damage, deterioration, defects and/or conditions
which may give rise to danger (see section M).
b) The person ordering the report should have received the original report and the inspector
should have retained a duplicate.
c) The original report should be retained in a safe place and be made available to any person
inspecting or undertaking work on the electrical installation in the future. If the property is
vacated, this report will provide the new owner /occupier with details of the condition of
the electrical installation at the time the report was issued.
d) Section D (extent and limitations) should identify fully the extent of the installation covered
by this report and any limitations on the inspection and testing. The inspector should have
agreed these aspects with the person ordering the report and with other interested parties
(licensing authority, insurance company, mortgage provider and the like) before the
inspection was carried out.
e) Some operational limitations such as inability to gain access to parts of the installation or
an item of equipment may have been encountered during the inspection. The inspector
should have noted these in Section D.
f) For items classified in Section M as C1 (“Danger present”), the safety of those using the
installation is at risk, and it is recommended that a competent person undertakes the
necessary remedial work immediately.
g) For items classified in Section M as C2 (“Potentially dangerous”), the safety of those
using the installation may be at risk and it is recommended that a competent person
undertakes the necessary remedial work as a matter of urgency.
h) Where it has been stated in Section M that an observation requires further investigation the
inspection has revealed an apparent deficiency which could result in a code C1 or C2 item
that could not, due to the extent or limitations of the inspection, be fully identified. In such
cases a further examination of the installation will be necessary, without delay, to
determine the nature and extent of the apparent deficiency. (see Section F).
j) For safety reasons, the electrical installation will need to be re-inspected at appropriate
intervals by a competent person. The recommended date by which the next inspection is due
is stated in Section F of the report under ‘Recommendations’.
D-3 MODEL FORMS FOR INSPECTION OF ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS

D-3.1 Model Schedule for Items Requiring Inspection for Initial Verification of an Electrical
Installation.

All items inspected in order to confirm compliance with the relevant clauses in the IS 732. The list
of items is not exhaustive.

D-3.1.1 Electrical Intake Equipment

a) Service cable;
b) Service cut-out / fuse;
c) Meter tails – Distributor;
d) Meter tails – Consumer;
e) Metering equipment; and
f) Isolator.

D-3.1.2 Parallel or Switched Alternative Sources of Supply

a) Dedicated earthing arrangement independent to that of the public supply;

b) Presence of adequate arrangements where generator to operate in parallel with the public supply
system;
c) Correct connection of generator in parallel;
d) Compatibility of characteristics of means of generation;
e) Means to provide automatic disconnection of generator in the event of loss of public supply
system or voltage or frequency deviation beyond declared values;
f) Means to prevent connection of generator in the event of loss of public supply system or
voltage or frequency deviation beyond declared values; and
g) Means to isolate generator from the public supply system.

D-3.1.3 Automatic Disconnection of Supply

Main earthing / bonding arrangements

a) Presence and adequacy of:

1) Distributor’s earthing arrangement or installation earth electrode arrangement;

2) Earthing conductor and connections;
3) Main protective bonding conductors and connections; and
4) Earthing / bonding labels at all appropriate locations.

b) Accessibility of:

1) Earthing conductor connections;

2) All protective bonding connections; and
3) FELV – requirements satisfied.
D-3.2 Other Methods of Protection

NOTE — Where any of the methods listed below are employed details should be provided on
separate pages.

D-3.2.1 Basic and Fault Protection

Where used, confirmation that the requirements are satisfied:

a) SELV,
b) PELV,
c) Double insulation, or
d) Reinforced insulation.

D-3.2.2 Basic Protection

a) Insulation of live parts,

b) Barriers or enclosures,
c) Obstacles, or
d) Placing out of reach.

D-3.2.3 Fault Protection

a) Non-conducting location – earth-free local equipotential bonding, and

b) Electrical separation.

D-3.2.4 Additional Protection

a) RCDs not exceeding 30 mA as specified; and

b) Supplementary bonding.

D-4 SPECIFIC INSPECTION EXAMPLES

As appropriate to the installation

D-4.1 Distribution Equipment

a) Adequacy of working space / accessibility to equipment;

b) Security of fixing;
c) Insulation of live parts not damaged during erection;
d) Adequacy / security of barriers;
e) Suitability of enclosures for IP and fire ratings;
f) Enclosures not damaged during installation;
g) Presence and effectiveness of obstacles;
h) Placing out of reach;
j) Presence of main switch(es), linked where required;
k) Operation of main switch(es) (functional check);
m) Manual operation of circuit-breakers and RCDs to prove functionality;
n) Confirmation that integral test button / switch causes RCD(s) to trip when operated (functional
check);
p) RCD(s) provided for fault protection, where specified;
q) RCD(s) provided for additional protection, where specified;
r) Confirmation over-voltage protection (SPDs) provided where specified;
s) Confirmation of indication that SPD is functional;
t) Presence of RCD quarterly test notice at or near the origin;
u) Presence of diagrams, charts or schedules at or near each distribution board, where required;
and
v) Presence of non-standard (mixed) cable colour warning notice at or near the appropriate
distribution board, where required.

D.4.2 Presence of Alternative Supply Warning Notice at or Near

a) The origin,
b) The meter position, if remote form origin,
c) The distribution board to which the alternative/additional sources are connected,
e) All points of isolation of ALL sources of supply,
f) Presence of next inspection recommendation label,
g) Presence of other required labelling,
h) Selection of protective device(s) and base(s); correct type and rating,
j) Single-pole protective devices in line conductor only,
k) Protection against mechanical damage where cables enter equipment,
m) Protection against electromagnetic effects where cables enter ferromagnetic enclosures, and
n) Confirmation that all conductor connections, including connections to busbars are correctly
located in terminals and are tight and secure.

D-4.3 Circuits

a) Identification of conductors;
b) Cables correctly supported throughout;
c) Examination of cables for signs of mechanical damage during installation;
d) Examination of insulation of live parts, not damaged during erection;
e) Non-sheathed cables protected by enclosure in conduit, ducting or trunking;
f) Suitability of containment systems (including flexible conduit);
g) Correct temperature rating of cable insulation;
h) Cables correctly terminated in enclosures;
j) Adequacy of cables for current-carrying capacity with regard for the type and nature of
installation;
k) Adequacy of protective devices: type and fault current rating for fault protection ;
m) Presence and adequacy of circuit protective conductors;
n) Coordination between conductors and overload protective devices;
p) Wiring systems and cable installation methods / practices with regard to the type and nature of
installation and external influences; and
q) Cables concealed under floors, above ceilings, in walls adequately protected against damage by
contact with fixings.

D-4.4 Provision of Additional Protection by RCDs Having Residual Rated Operating

Current (IΔn) Not Exceeding 30mA

a) For circuits used to supply mobile equipment not exceeding 32 A rating for use outdoors in all
cases;
b) For all socket-outlets of rating 20 A or less provided for use by ordinary persons unless exempt;
c) For cables concealed in walls at a depth of less than 50 mm;
d) Provision of fire barriers, sealing arrangements so as to minimize the spread of fire;
e) Band II cables segregated / separated from Band I cables; and
f) Cables segregated / separated from non-electrical services.

D-4.5 Termination of Cables at Enclosures

a) Connections under no undue strain;

b) No basic insulation of a conductor visible outside enclosure;
c) Connections of live conductors adequately enclosed;
d) Adequately connected at point of entry to enclosure (glands, bushes etc.);
e) Suitability of circuit accessories for external influences;
f) Circuit accessories not damaged during erection;
g) Single-pole devices for switching in line conductor only;
h) Adequacy of connections, including CPCs, within accessories and fixed and stationary
equipment; and
j) Presence, operation and correct location of appropriate devices for isolation and switching.

D-5 ISOLATION AND SWITCHING

D-5.1 Isolators

a) Presence and location of appropriate devices;

b) Capable of being secured in the OFF position;
c) Correct operation verified (functional check);
d) The installation, circuit or part thereof that will be isolated is clearly identified by location and
/ or durable marking; and
e) Warning label posted in situations where live parts cannot be isolated by the operation of a
single device.

D--5.2 Switching Off for Mechanical Maintenance

a) Presence of appropriate devices;

b) Acceptable location – state if local or remote from equipment in question;
c) Capable of being secured in the Off position;
d) Correct operation verified (functional check); and
e) The circuit or part thereof that will be disconnected clearly identified by location and / or durable
marking.

D-5.3 Emergency Switching /Stopping

a) Presence and location of appropriate devices;

b) Readily accessible for operation where danger might occur;
c) Correct operation verified (functional check); and
d) The installation, circuit or part thereof that will be disconnected clearly identified by location
and / or durable marking.

D-5.4 Functional Switching

a) Presence and location of appropriate devices; and

b) Correct operation verified (functional check).

D-6 CURRENT–USING EQUIPMENT (PERMANENTLY CONNECTED)

a) Suitability of equipment in terms of IP and fire ratings;

b) Enclosure not damaged / deteriorated during installation so as to impair safety;
c) Suitability for the environment and external influences;
d) Security of fixing;
e) Cable entry holes in ceilings above luminaires, sized or sealed so as to restrict the spread of fire;
f) Provision of under-voltage protection, where specified; and
g) Provision of overload protection, where specified.

D-6.1 Recessed Luminaires (Downlighters)

a) Correct type of lamps fitted; and

b) Installed to minimize build-up of heat by use of “fire rated” fittings, insulation displacement
box or similar.

D-7 SPECIAL INSTALLATIONS OR LOCATIONS (see Part 3 of this code)

If any special installations or locations are present, list the particular inspections applied.

D-7.1 Model Inspection Schedule of Items Requiring Inspection for an Existing Electrical
Installation

A visual inspection should firstly be made of the external condition of all electrical equipment
which is not concealed.
Further detailed inspection, including partial dismantling of equipment as required, should be
carried out as agreed with the person ordering the work.

The list of items is not exhaustive.

D-7.2 Electrical Intake Equipment

a) Service cable;
b) Service cut-out / fuse;
c) Meter tails – Distributor;
d) Meter tails – Consumer;
e) Metering equipment; and
f) Isolator.

Where inadequacies in distributor’s equipment are encountered, it is recommended that the person
ordering the report informs the appropriate authority.

D-7.3 Presence of Adequate Arrangements for Parallel or Switched Alternative Sources

D-7.4 Automatic Disconnection of Supply

a) Main earthing / bonding arrangements;

b) Presence of distributor’s earthing arrangement or presence of installation earth electrode
arrangement;
c) Presence and adequacy of earthing conductor;
d) Main protective earthing conductor connections;
e) Accessibility of earthing conductor connections;
f) Presence and adequacy of main protective bonding conductors;
g) Main protective bonding conductor connections;
h) Accessibility of all protective bonding connections;
j) Provision of earthing / bonding labels at all appropriate locations; and
k) FELV.

D-7.5 Other Methods of Protection

Where any of the methods listed below are employed, details should be provided on separate
sheets.

D-7.5.1 Basic and Fault Protection

a) SELV;
b) PELV;
c) Double insulation; or
d) Reinforced insulation.

D-7.5.2 Basic Protection

a) Insulation of live parts;

b) Barriers or enclosures;
c) Obstacles; and
d) Placing out of reach.
D-7.5.3 Fault Protection

a) Non-conducting location – earth-free local equipotential bonding; and

b) Electrical separation.

D-7.5.4 Additional Protection

a) RCDs 30 mA or less as specified; and

b) Supplementary bonding.

D-7.6 Specific Inspection Examples

D-7.6.1 Distribution Equipment

a) Adequacy of working space / accessibility to equipment;

b) Security of fixing;
c) Condition of insulation of live parts;
d) Adequacy / security of barriers;
e) Condition of enclosure(s) in terms of IP and fire ratings;
f) Enclosure not damaged / deteriorated so as to impair safety;
g) Presence and effectiveness of obstacles;
h) Placing out of reach;
j) Presence of main switch(es), linked where required;
k) Operation of main switch(es) (functional check);
m) Manual operation of circuit-breakers and RCDs to prove disconnection;
n) Confirmation that integral test button / switch causes RCD(s) to trip when operated (functional
check);
p) RCD(s) provided for fault protection;
q) RCD(s) provided for additional protection, where required;
r) Confirmation of indication that over-voltage protection (SPDs) is functional, where installed;
s) Presence of RCD quarterly test notice at or near equipment, where required;
t) Presence of diagrams, charts or schedules at or near equipment, where required;
u) Presence of non-standard (mixed) cable colour warning notice at or near equipment, where
required;
v) Presence of alternative supply warning notice at or near equipment, where required;
w) Presence of next inspection recommendation label;
y) Presence of other required labelling (please specify);
z) Examination of protective device(s) and base(s); correct type and rating (no signs of
unacceptable thermal damage, arcing or overheating);
aa) Single-pole protective devices in line conductor only;
ab) Protection against mechanical damage where cables enter equipment;
ac) Protection against electromagnetic effects where cables enter ferromagnetic enclosures; and
ad) Confirmation that all conductor connections, including connections to busbars are
correctly located in terminals and are tight and secure.
D-7.6.2 Circuits

a) Identification of conductors;
b) Cables correctly supported throughout;
c) Condition of cables;
d) Condition of insulation of live parts;
e) Non-sheathed cables protected by enclosure in conduit, ducting or trunking;
f) Suitability of containment systems for continued use (including flexible conduit);
g) Cables correctly terminated in enclosures;
h) Examination of cables for signs of unacceptable thermal or mechanical damage / deterioration;
j) Adequacy of cables for current-carrying capacity with regard for the type and nature of
installation;
k) Adequacy of protective devices: type and rated current for fault protection;
m) Presence and adequacy of circuit protective conductors;
n) Coordination between conductors and overload protective devices;
p) Wiring systems and cable installation methods / practices with regard to the type and nature of
installation and external influences;
q) Where exposed to direct sunlight, cable of a suitable type; and
r) Cables concealed under floors, above ceilings, in walls adequately protected against damage by
contact with fixings.

D-7.6.3 Provision of Additional Protection by RCDs having Residual Rated Operating Current
(IΔn) not Exceeding 30 mA

a) For circuits used to supply mobile equipment not exceeding 32 A rating for use outdoors in all
cases;
b) For all socket-outlets of rating 20 A or less provided for use by ordinary persons unless
exempt;
c) For cables concealed in walls at a depth of less than 50 mm;
d) Provision of fire barriers, sealing arrangements and protection against thermal effects;
e) Band II cables segregated / separated from Band I cables;
f) Cables segregated / separated from non-electrical services; and
g) Condition of circuit accessories.

D-7.6.4 Termination of Cables at Enclosures – Identify /Record Numbers and Locations of Items
Inspected

a) Connections under no undue strain;

b) No basic insulation of a conductor visible outside enclosure;
c) Connections of live conductors adequately enclosed;
d) Adequately connected at point of entry to enclosure (glands, bushes etc.);
e) Suitability of circuit accessories for external influences;
f) Condition of accessories including socket-outlets, switches and joint boxes;
g) Single-pole devices for switching in line conductor only;
h) Adequacy of connections, including CPCs, within accessories and fixed and stationary
equipment;
j) Presence, operation and correct location of appropriate devices for isolation and switching;
k) General condition of wiring systems; and
m) Temperature rating of cable insulation.

D-7.7 Isolation and Switching

D-7.7.1 Isolators

a) Presence and condition of appropriate devices;

b) Acceptable location – state if local or remote from equipment in question;
c) Capable of being secured in the OFF position;
d) Correct operation verified;
e) Clearly identified by position and /or durable marking; and
f) Warning label posted in situations where live parts cannot be isolated by the operation of a single
device

D-7.7.2 Switching Off for Mechanical Maintenance

a) Presence and condition of appropriate devices;

b) Acceptable location – state if local or remote from equipment in question;
c) Capable of being secured in the OFF position;
d) Correct operation verified; and
e) Clearly identified by position and /or durable marking.

D-7.7.3 Emergency Switching /Stopping

a) Presence and condition of appropriate devices;

b) Readily accessible for operation where danger might occur;
c) Correct operation verified; and
d) Clearly identified by position and /or durable marking.

D-7.7.4 Functional Switching

a) Presence and condition of appropriate devices; and

b) Correct operation verified.

D-7.8 Current–Using Equipment (Permanently Connected)

a) Condition of equipment in terms of IP and fire ratings;

b) Enclosure not damaged / deteriorated so as to impair safety;
c) Suitability for the environment and external influences;
d) Security of fixing;
e) Cable entry holes in ceiling above luminaires, sized or sealed so as to restrict the spread of fire;
f) Condition and provision of under-voltage protection, where required; and
g) Condition and provision of over-load protection, where required.
D-7.9 Recessed Luminaires (Downlighters)

a) Correct type of lamps fitted;

b) Installed to minimise build-up of heat by use of “fire rated” fittings, insulation displacement
box or similar;
c) No signs of overheating to surrounding building fabric; and
d) No signs of overheating to conductors / terminations.
D-8 MODEL SCHEDULE OF CIRCUIT DETAILS AND TEST RESULTS

Table D-3 Model Schedule of Circuit Details and Test Results Commented [u3]: Table needs to be re-typed. This is a
snapshot of the original table.
 PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS
SECTION 18 EARTHING

FOREWORD
Earthing provides safety of persons and apparatus against earth faults. Any system is
characterized by the type of distribution system, which include types of systems of live
conductors and types of system earthing. The different types of earthing systems are also
covered under this Part 1/Section 18 of the Code.

1 SCOPE
This Indian Standard (Part 1/Sec 18) of the Code covers general requirements associated with
earthing in electrical installations. Specific requirements for earthing in individual installations
are covered in respective Parts of the Code.
NOTE — This Section shall be read in conjunction with the provisions of IS 3043.

2 REFERENCES
The standards listed below contain provisions, which through reference in this text, constitute
provisions of this standard. At the time of publication, the editions indicated were valid. All
standards are subject to revision, and parties to agreements based on this standard are
encouraged to investigate the possibility of applying the most recent editions of the standards.

IS No./International
publications Title
732: 2019 Code of practice for electrical wiring installations (fourth revision)
3043: 2018 Code of practice for earthing (second revision)
Protection against lightning: Part 3 Physical damage to structures and life
IS/IEC 62305-3: 2010 hazard

3 GENERAL REMARKS
NOTES
1 Only AC systems is considered in this section.
2 For information on functional earthing system please refer 4.5.4.5.5 of IS 732.

3.1 Basic Purpose of Earth Fault Protection

The occurrence of an earth fault in an installation creates two possible hazards:

a) Firstly, voltages appear between exposed conductive parts and extraneous conductive
parts, and if these parts are simultaneously accessible, these voltages constitute a shock
hazard, this condition being known as indirect contact.
b) Secondly, the fault current that flows in the phase and protective conductors of the
circuit feeding the faulty equipment may be of such a magnitude as to cause an
excessive temperature rise in those conductors, thereby creating a fire hazard.

3.2 The protective measure known as earthed equipotential bonding and automatic
disconnection of the supply is intended to give a high degree of protection against both hazards.
The choice of protective device used to give disconnection is influenced by the type of system
of which the installation is part, because either:
 a) the earth fault loop impedance has to be low enough to allow adequate earth fault
current flow to cause an overcurrent protective device (for example, a fuse or circuit
breaker) in the faulty circuit to operate in a sufficiently short time; or

b) where it is not possible to achieve a low enough earth fault loop impedance,
disconnection may be initiated by fitting a residual current device (RCD) of 30 mA
rating.
3.3 The subject of earthing covers the problems associated with connection of exposed
conductive part of installations to the main earthing terminal of that installation and achieving
automatic disconnection of supply before the fault voltage creates a shock hazard. The terms
earth and earthing have been used in this Code, irrespective of reliance being placed on the
earth itself, to denote a low impedance return path of the fault current. As a matter of fact, the
earth now rarely serves as a part of the return circuit but is being used mainly for fixing the
voltage of system neutrals.

3.4 Earthing shall generally be carried out in accordance with the requirements of latest Central
Electricity Authority (Measures relating to Safety and Electric Supply) Regulations, 2010 as
amended from time to time, and the relevant regulations of the electricity supply authority
concerned.

3.5 In cases where direct earthing may prove harmful rather than provide safety (for example,
high frequency and mains frequency coreless induction furnaces), relaxation may be obtained
from the competent authority.

3.6 All connections shall be carefully made. If they are poorly made or inadequate for the
purpose for which they are intended, loss of life or serious personal injury may result. It is
recommended that the value of any earth fault loop impedance shall be such as to conform to
the degree of shock protection desired.

3.7 It is recommended that a drawing showing the earthing system be prepared for each
installation.
3.8 No addition to the current-carrying system either temporary or permanent, shall be made,
which will increase the maximum available earth fault current or its duration until it has been
ascertained that the existing arrangement of earthing system are capable of carrying the new
value of earth fault current which may be obtained by this addition.

3.9 No cut-out, link or switch other than a linked switch arranged to operate simultaneously on
the earthed or earthed neutral conductor and the live conductors shall be inserted on any supply
system. This however, does not include the case of a switch for use in controlling a generator
or a transformer or a link for test purposes.

3.10 As far as the value of the earth resistance is concerned, the objective from the point of
safety consideration is not to attain minimum value of the earth resistance as is sometimes
understood. But the consideration should be whether there is adequate co-ordination between
the practically obtainable value of the earth fault loop and setting of the protective relays.

3.11 Independent Earthing

An earthing arrangement may be considered electrically independent of another earthing
arrangement if a rise of potential with respect to earth in one earthing arrangement does not
cause an unacceptable rise of potential with respect to earth in the other earthing arrangement.

4 DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
4.1 System Earthing

4.1.1 Earthing of system is designed primarily to preserve the security of the system by
ensuring that the potential on each conductor is restricted to such a value as is consistent with
the level of insulation applied. From the point of view of safety, it is equally important that
earthing should ensure efficient and fast operation of protective gear in the case of earth faults.

Commonly used system earthing are TN, TT and IT.

First letter – Relationship of the power system to earth:

T = direct connection of one point to earth;
I = all live parts isolated from earth, or one point connected to earth through a high impedance.

Second letter – Relationship of the exposed-conductive-parts of the installation to earth:

T = direct electrical connection of exposed-conductive-parts to earth, independently of the earthing of any point
of the power system;

N = direct electrical connection of the exposed-conductive-parts to the earthed point of the power system (in a.c.
systems, the earthed point of the power system is normally the neutral point or, if a neutral point is not available,
a line conductor).

Subsequent letter(s) (if any) – Arrangement of neutral and protective conductors:

S = protective function provided by a conductor separate from the neutral conductor or from the earthed line (or,
in a.c. systems, earthed phase) conductor.
C = neutral and protective functions combined in a single conductor (PEN conductor).

NOTES
1 TN/TT system, safety is achieved by Automatic disconnection of supply.
2 IT system ensure continuity of supply during first fault. This can be used for application such as hospitals, control system, safety
supplies, etc. Monitoring of insulation and rectification of first fault as quick as possible is essential.
3 TN system – A system having one or more points of the source of energy directly earthed, the exposed conductive-parts of the
installation being connected to that point by protective conductors.
4 TN-C system – A system in which neutral and protective conductors are combined in a single conductor throughout the system.
5 TN-S system – A system having separate neutral and protective conductor throughout the system.
6 TN-C-S system – A system in which neutral and protective conductors are combined in a single conductor in part of the system.
7 TT system – A system having one point of the source of energy directly earthed, the exposed conductive-parts of the installation
being connected to the earth electrodes electrically independent of the earth electrodes of the source.
8 IT system – A system having no direct connection between live parts and earth, the exposed conductive parts of the electrical
installation earthed independently or collectively.

4.1.2 In a TN/TT system, neutral shall be earthed only at one place except in a TN-C-S system
with PME. In a TN-C-S system with PME, combined neutral and PE conductor (called as PEN
conductor) shall be earthed at the source, at the distribution and at origin of installation. Neutral
shall not be earthed downstream the origin of installation.
NOTES
1 Origin of installation is also called as point of commencement of supply.
2 Distribution means the points in between the source and origin of installation.
3 In a.c. systems, the earthed point of the power system is normally the neutral point or, if a neutral point is not available, a
 line conductor

4.2 Equipment Earthing

4.2.1 The objective of equipment earthing is to ensure effective operation of the protective gear
in the event of leakage through such metal work, the potential of which with respect to
neighboring objects may attain a value which would cause danger to life or risk of fire.

4.2.2 The earth fault loop impedance should be such that when any fault occurs against which
earthing is designed to give protection, the protective gear will operate to make the faulty
portions of circuit harmless. In most cases such operation involves isolation of the faulty circuit
by circuit-breaker or fuses.

4.3 Earthing of Installations in Buildings

4.3.1 Disconnection time for earth fault: The maximum allowed disconnection time (t in
seconds) during fault derived from IS 3043 are given in Table 1 below.

Table 1 Maximum Allowed Disconnection Times

(Clause 4.3.1)

Sl no. Prospective Condition 1 (DRY) Condition 2 (WET)

Touch
Z1 I t Z2 I t
Voltage Uc
(Ω) (mA) (s) (Ω) (mA) (s)
(V)
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
i) 50 1725 29 5.000 925 54 0.470
ii) 110 1535 72 0.360 730 151 0.180
iii) 220 1375 160 0.170 575 383 0.035
1 Dry or moist locations, dry skin and significant floor resistance.
2 Wet locations, wet skin and low floor resistance.

4.4 Safety by Protective Equipotential Bonding and Automatic Disconnection of the

Supply

4.4.1 The two aims of this protective measure are to:

a) ensure that when an earth fault occurs, the voltages appearing between exposed
conductive parts and extraneous conductive parts in the location are minimized; and
b) ensure rapid disconnection of the circuit in which that earth fault occurs.

4.4.2 In order to reduce voltage appearing between exposed and extraneous conductive parts,
protective equipotential bonding zones are created by connecting exposed and extraneous
conductive parts to the MET of the zone.

4.4.3 An installation may consist of number of zones for instance, when an installation supplies
number of buildings, equipotential bonding is necessary in each building so that each
constitutes a zone having a reference point to which the exposed conductive parts of the circuits
and extraneous conductive parts in that building are connected. Large buildings shall have
several zones with in the building
4.4.4 Rapid disconnection of the circuit in which the earth fault occurs is met by limiting the
upper value of the earth fault loop impedance of each circuit to a value determined by the type
and current rating of the protective device concerned such that, on the occurrence of an earth
fault (assumed to be of negligible impedance), disconnection will occur before the prospective
touch voltage reaches a harmful value.

4.4.5 It is recommended that the maximum sustained voltage developed under fault conditions
between exposed metal required to be earthed and the consumer’s earth terminal shall not
exceed 32 V rms.

4.5 TN System (Earth Fault Loop Impedance is Important for Automatic Disconnection
of Supply During Earth Fault)

4.5.1 The characteristics of the protective devices and the cross-sectional area of conductors
shall be so chosen that if a fault of negligible impedance occurs anywhere between a phase
conductor and a protective conductor or exposed conductive part, automatic disconnection of
the supply will occur within the minimum possible safe time. The time of operation would
depend on the magnitude of the contact potential. As a general rule, 65 V may be cleared within
10 s and voltages of the order of 240 V and above shall be cleared instantaneously

This requirement is met if:

Zs × Ia < Uo
Where,
Zs = fault loop impedance,
Ia = current ensuring the automatic operation of disconnecting device, and
Uo = conventional voltage limits.

4.5.2 In order that the devices will give thermal protection to the protective conductor &
considering the tolerance requirement in IS 732, the condition of automatic disconnection is
met if the fault loop impedance satisfies

2 𝑈𝑜
𝑍𝑠(𝑚) = ∗
3 𝐼𝑎
Where,
Zs(m) = the measured impedance of the fault current loop starting and ending at the point of fault (Ω);
Uo = the line conductor to earthed neutral voltage (V); and
Ia = the current causing the automatic operation of the protective device within the stipulated
disconnection time.

4.5.3 Where the measured value of the fault loop impedance exceeds 2Uo/3Ia, a more precise
assessment of compliance with IS 732 is recommended.

4.5.4 Recommended Maximum Earth Fault Loop Impedance Values for MCB’s - Zs(m)
(see Table 2)

Table 2 Maximum Allowed Earth Fault Loop Impedance for MCB’s

(Clause 4.5.4)

MCB rating in
6 10 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125
Amps
 ZS in Ω (Type B
5.11 3.07 1.92 1.53 1.23 0.96 0.77 0.61 0.49 0.38 0.31 0.25
MCB)
ZS in Ω (Type C
2.56 1.53 0.96 0.77 0.61 0.48 0.38 0.31 0.24 0.19 0.15 0.12
MCB)
ZS in Ω (Type D
1.28 0.77 0.48 0.38 0.31 0.24 0.19 0.15 0.12 0.10 0.08 0.06
MCB)

4.6 TT system (Resistance of earthing system is important for automatic disconnection

of supply during earth fault)

All exposed conductive parts collectively protected by the same protective device shall be
interconnected by protective conductors with an earth electrode common to all those parts.
Where several protective devices are used in series, this requirement applies separately to all
the exposed conductive parts protected by each device. For compliance with the requirement,
the following shall be fulfilled:

RA × Ia < UC

Where,

R = resistance of the earthed system for exposed conductive parts,

A

Ia = operating currents of the disconnecting series device or settings of shunt relays, and
Uc = conventional voltage limit (50 V in general case and 32 V in case of relays with time lag).

NOTES
1 Earth fault loop impedance explained in 4.5 of this section cannot be fulfilled in TT system. Series disconnecting devices or
shunt relays (for example, RCCB / ELCB / CBCT and ELR) shall be used for earth fault protection.
2 The maximum allowed residual current of these protective device is 30 mA for human protection and 300 mA for protection
against fire due to earth fault.

4.6.1 Maximum earth electrode resistance in TT system protected by RCD’s and limit touch
voltage < 50 V (refer Table 14 and 24.4 of IS 3043).

a) 30 mA RCD = 1666 Ω
b) 300 mA RCD = 166 Ω

4.7 IT System

The IT power system has all live parts isolated from earth or one point connected to earth
through an impedance. The exposed-conductive-parts of the electrical installation are earthed
independently or collectively.

The fault current is then low in the event of a single fault to an exposed conductive part or to
earth and automatic disconnection in accordance is not imperative provided the condition in
4.7.1 is fulfilled. Provisions shall be taken, however, to avoid risk of harmful
pathophysiological effects on a person in contact with simultaneously accessible exposed
conductive parts in the event of two faults existing simultaneously.

4.7.1 Exposed conductive parts shall be earthed individually, in groups, or collectively. The
following condition shall be fulfilled:
 RA ×ΔId ≤ 50 V
Where,

RA is the sum of the resistance in Ω of the earth electrode and protective conductor for the exposed
conductive parts.
Id is the fault current in A of the first fault of negligible impedance between a line conductor and an exposed
conductive part. The value of Id takes account of leakage currents and the total earthing impedance of the
electrical installation.

4.7.2 If IT system is used for continuity of supply, an insulation monitoring device (IMD) shall
be provided to indicate the occurrence of a first fault from a live part to exposed conductive
parts or to earth. This device shall initiate an audible and/or visual signal which shall continue
as long as the fault persists. It is recommended that a first fault be eliminated with the shortest
practicable delay.

NOTE — For other conditions on IT system, refer 4.2.11.6 of IS 732 and Fig. 6 of this Part/section of NEC.

4.8 Selection of Devices for Automatic Disconnection of Supply

In general, every circuit is provided with a means of overcurrent protection. If the earth fault
loop impedance is low enough to cause these devices to operate within the specified times (that
is, sufficient current flows earth under fault conditions), such devices may be relied upon to
give the requisite automatic disconnection of supply. If the earth fault loop impedance does not
permit the overcurrent protective devices to give automatic disconnection of the supply under
earth fault conditions, the first option is to reduce that impedance. It may be permissible for
this to be achieved by the use of protective multiple earthing system (PME).

4.9 Exposed conductive parts to be earthed are:

a) all metalwork associated with wiring system (other than current-carrying parts)
including cable sheaths and armour, conduit, ducting, trunking, boxes and catenary
wires,
b) the exposed metalwork of all Class I fixed and portable current-using equipment, and
c) the exposed metalwork of transformers used in the installation other than those that are
an integral part of equipment.

NOTE — Exposed conductive parts that (because of their small dimensions or disposition) cannot be gripped or contacted by a
major surface of the human body (that is, a human body surface not exceeding 50 mm × 50 mm) need not be earthed if the
connection of those parts to a protective conductor cannot readily be made and reliably maintained. Typical examples of such parts
are screws and nameplate, cable clips and lamp caps. Fixing screws for non-metallic accessories need not be earthed provided there
is no appreciable risk of the screws coming into contact with live parts.

4.10 Extraneous conductive parts to be earthed are:

a) metallic pipes supplying services into the building (for example, gas, water);
b) metallic central heating and air-conditioning systems;
c) structural extraneous conductive parts, if accessible in normal use;
d) metallic reinforcements of constructional reinforced concrete, if reasonably practical;
and
e) lighting protection system as per IS/IEC 62305-3.

4.11 Minimum Cross-sectional Areas of Protective Conductors

The cross-sectional area of every protective conductor shall satisfy the conditions for automatic
disconnection of supply and be capable of withstanding mechanical and thermal stresses caused
by the prospective fault current.
NOTE — Sizing of protective conductors refer 5.4.3 of IS 732.

4.12 Types of Protective Conductors

Protective conductors may consist of one or more of the following:

a) conductors in multicore cables;

b) insulated or bare conductors in a common enclosure with live conductors;
c) fixed installed bare or insulated conductors; and
d) metallic cable sheath, cable screen, cable armour, wirebraid, concentric conductor,
metallic conduit, subject to their electrical continuity shall be assured by construction
or by suitable connection so as to ensure protection against mechanical, chemical or
electrochemical deterioration.

NOTE — Where overcurrent protective devices are used for protection against electric shock, the protective conductor shall be
incorporated in the same wiring system as the live conductors or be located in their immediate proximity.

4.13 Following metal parts are not permitted for use as protective conductors or as protective
bonding conductors:

a) metallic water pipes;

b) metallic pipes containing potentially flammable materials such as gases, liquids,
powder;
c) constructional parts subject to mechanical stress in normal service;
d) flexible or pliable metal conduits, unless designed for that purpose;
e) flexible metal parts; and
f) support wires; cable trays and cable ladders.
NOTE — Examples of a protective conductor include a protective bonding conductor, a protective earthing conductor and an
earthing conductor when used for protection against electric shock.

4.14 Electrical Continuity of Protective Conductors

Protective conductors shall be suitably protected against mechanical damage, chemical or

electrochemical deterioration, electrodynamic forces and thermodynamic forces. Every
connection (for example, screwed connections, clamp connectors) between protective
conductors or between a protective conductor and other equipment shall provide durable
electrical continuity and adequate mechanical strength and protection. Screws for connecting
protective conductors shall not serve any other purpose. Joints shall not be made by soldering.

NOTE — All electrical connections should have satisfactory thermal capacity and mechanical strength to withstand any
combination of current/time which may occur in the conductor or in the cable/enclosure with the largest cross-sectional area.

4.15 Protective Equipotential Bonding

Protective equipotential bonding is made by connecting extraneous conductive parts in a

building to the main earthing terminal of the installation by protective bonding conductors.
Where such conductive parts originate outside the building, they shall be bonded as close as
practicable to their point of entry within the building.
 EC - exposed conductive part (Panel board body)
MET - main earthing terminal
SS - structural steel (extraneous conductive part)
W - metallic water pipe (extraneous conductive part)
TT - earth electrode in a TT or IT system
TN - other means of earthing in a TN system eg.
connection to earthed point of the power system

1 - circuit protective conductor

2 - main protective bonding conductor
3 - earthing conductor
4 - supplementary protective bonding conductors
(additional bonding if required)

1,2,3,4 - protective conductors

FIG. 1 ILLUSTRATION OF EARTHING AND PROTECTIVE CONDUCTORS

FIG. 2 MAIN AND ADDITIONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPOTENTIAL BONDING

4.16 Examples of earth electrodes which may be used are:

a) concrete-embedded foundation earth electrode;
NOTE — For more information, see Annex C.
b) soil-embedded foundation earth electrode;
c) metallic electrode embedded directly in soil vertically or horizontally (for example,
rods, wires, tapes, pipes or plates);
d) metal sheath and other metal coverings of cables according to local conditions or
requirements;
e) other suitable underground metalwork (for example, pipes) according to local
conditions or requirements; and
f) welded metal reinforcement of concrete (except pre-stressed concrete) embedded in the
earth.
4.17 When selecting the type and embedded depth of an earth electrode, consideration shall be
given to possible mechanical damage and to local conditions to minimize the effect of soil
drying and freezing.

4.18 Consideration shall be given to electrolytic corrosion when using different materials in an
earthing arrangement. For external conductors (for example, earthing conductor) connected to
a concrete-embedded foundation earth electrode, the connection made from hot-dip galvanized
steel shall not be embedded in the soil (galvanised steel earth electrodes in soil are subjected
to accelerated corrosion when connected with steel in reinforcement).

4.19 The earthing arrangement shall not rely on a metallic pipe for flammable liquids or gases
as the earth electrode and their buried length shall not be considered when dimensioning the
earth electrode.

4.20 Earth electrodes shall not be directly immersed in water of a stream, river, pond, lake or
Protection against electric shock, as stated in 4.2 of IS 732, shall not be adversely affected by
any foreseeable change of the earth electrode resistance (for example, due to corrosion, drying
or freezing).

4.21 Where the supply to an installation is at high voltage, requirements concerning the
earthing arrangements of the high voltage supply and of the low-voltage installation shall also
comply with 4.5.2 of IS 732.

4.22 The requirements for earthing arrangements are intended to provide a connection to earth
which:
a) is reliable and suitable for the protective requirements of the installation;
b) can carry earth fault currents and protective conductor currents to earth without danger
from thermal, thermo-mechanical and electromechanical stresses and from electric
shock arising from these currents;
c) if relevant, is also suitable for functional requirements;
d) is suitable for the foreseeable external influences, for example, mechanical stresses and
corrosion.

4.23 The connection of various conductors in an earthing system shall be soundly made and
electrically satisfactory. The connection shall be by exothermic welding, pressure connectors,
clamps or other suitable mechanical connectors. Mechanical connectors shall be installed in
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Where a clamp is used, it shall not damage
the electrode or the earthing conductor.

5 EARTHING OF INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL PREMISE

5.1 Earthing system in the premises of consumers at voltages above 230 V should be designed
as a PME system with separate protective conductor (TN-S). Protective multiple earthing
system is made in order to reduce the earth fault loop impedance and to ensure reliable
disconnection of supply during an earth fault by the OCPD. In PME system, neutral of the
supply transformer and the non-current carrying metal parts in the system are interconnected
by the common earth grid in addition to the separate protective conductor.
5.2 There is no need to design the vertical earth electrodes (such as rods and plates) in soil for
the appropriate thermal withstand capacity, assuming the total fault current to be passing
through these earth electrodes. System recommended in IS 3043 is a TN-S system with PME,
where the neutral of the source and exposed conductive parts in the installation are solidly
connected to the MET and an earthing grid. In this interconnected system, earth fault current
is returned to the neutral mostly through the interconnected system consisting of the PE
conductor and earth grid.

5.3 The disposition of the earth electrodes and the extent and size of earth grid will always
depend upon the disposition of plant electrics. The layout should be done in such a manner as
to keep the earth continuity resistance to within the stipulated figure. Depending upon the
disposition of the plant electrics, an optimum number of earth electrodes are provided as
anchorages for the earth grid.

5.4 Protective Earth (PE) conductor shall run as close as possible and parallel to line conductors

5.5 The continuity resistance of the earth return path through the earth grid should be
maintained as low as possible (depending up on the fault loop impedance of that part of the
circuit) and in no case greater than one ohm.

5.6 In case of EHT substations, where there is possibility of the ground potential attaining very
high values (of the order of 5 kV and above) in the event of an earth fault, the earth grid design
should be based on the tolerable limits of the potential gradient in the substation area, and the
step and touch potential due to fault conditions.

FIG. 3 SYSTEM WITH SEPARATE EARTH CONDCUTOR (TN-S) PROTECTIVE MULTIPLE

EARTHING (PME).
6 EARTHING OF LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRIC SUPPLY BY SUPPLIER (PUBLIC
ELECTRICITY SUPPLY FROM A COMMON TRANSFORMER)

6.1 TN-C-S with Protective Multiple Earthing

Commonly used system in low voltage electricity supply system of electricity suppliers, is TN-
C-S with protective multiple earthed (PME) system (Fig 4). In this system the neutral and
protective conductors of electrical supply undertaking are combined. The PEN conductor,
which is referred to as a combined neutral and earth (CNE or PEN) conductor, is earthed at the
source and extremities of the distribution mains and point in between. Multiple earthing of the
PEN conductor ensures that if the conductor becomes open circuit for any reason (probably cut
or snapped), exposed-conductor parts remain connected to earth, under such conditions the
supply voltage between the installation line and neutral conductor is substantially reduced.

FIG. 4 TN-C-S SYSTEM WITH PROTECTIVE MULTIPLE EARTHING (PME)

6.2 TT Network

Low voltage electricity supply system of electricity suppliers also uses TT network (see Fig.
5). In this system one or more points of the source of energy directly earthed and the exposed
and extraneous conductive parts of the installation are connected to a local earth electrode or
electrodes are electrically independent of the source earth. Every consumer installation shall
be protected with an RCD of not less than 30 mA for earth fault protection at the origin of
installation.
 Fig. 5 TT system
NOTES
1 In TT system RCD is used for earth fault protection at the origin of installation. (TT system shall not be used without RCD at origin
of installation).
2 Methods to limit the temperory over voltage (power frequency stress voltage) at the consumer premise are explained in 2 of Section
13 of this part of the Code. Suitable measures shall be implemented by the electricty supplier to ensure the maximum allowed
temperory over voltages are with in the limits specified in 7.4 and Table 3 of this section.

6.3 IT Network

The IT power system has all live parts isolated from earth or one point connected to earth
through an impedance. The exposed-conductive-parts of the electrical installation are earthed
independently or collectively.

FIG. 6 IT SYSTEM
7 EARTHING OF SYSTEM EXCEEDING 1 kV

7.1 Design of an earthing system can be accomplished as follows:

a) data collection, for example, earth fault current, fault duration and layout;
b) initial design of the earthing system based on the functional requirements;
c) determine if it is part of a global earthing system;
d) if not, determine soil characteristics e.g. specific soil resistivity of layers;
e) determine the current flowing into earth from the earthing system, based on earth fault
current;
f) determine the overall impedance to earth, based on the layout, soil characteristics, and
parallel earthing systems;
g) determine earth potential rise;
h) determine permissible touch voltage; if the earth potential rise is below the permissible
touch voltage and the requirements of Table 3 are met the design is complete;
j) if not, determine if touch voltages inside and in the vicinity of the earthing system are
below the tolerable limits;
k) determine if transferred potentials present a hazard outside or inside the electrical power
installation; if yes, proceed with mitigation at exposed location; and
m) determine if low-voltage equipment is exposed to excessive stress voltage, if yes,
proceed with mitigation measures which can include separation of HV and LV earthing
systems.

7.2 Once the criteria as per 7.1 have been met, the design can be refined, if necessary, by
repeating the above steps. Detailed design is necessary to ensure that all exposed conductive
parts, are earthed. Extraneous conductive parts shall be earthed, if appropriate.
NOTE — Flowchart of this design process is given in Annex D.

7.3 The structural earth electrode shall be bonded and form part of the earthing system. If not
bonded, verification is necessary to ensure that all safety requirements are met. Metallic
structures with cathodic protection may be separated from the earthing system. Precautions,
such as labelling, shall be taken to ensure that when such measures are taken, maintenance
work or modifications will not inadvertently nullify them.

7.4 Protection of low-voltage installations against temporary over-voltages due to earth faults
in the high-voltage system and due to faults in the low-voltage system shall be carried out as
per 4.5.2 of IS 732 so that tolerable limits of touch voltage (between exposed conductive parts
and earth) and power-frequency stress voltage (between exposed conductive part and live
conductor) recommendations in IS 732 are met with.

Table 3 Minimum Requirements for Interconnection of Low-voltage and High-voltage

Earthing Systems Based on EPR Limits
[Clause 7.1 h)]

Sl no. Type of LV System a,b EPR requirements

Touch Stress voltage c
Voltage
Fault Fault
duration duration
 tf < 5 s tf < 5 s

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

i) TT Not EPR < 1200 EPR < 250
applicable V V
ii) TN EPR < F . EPR < 1200 EPR < 250
UTP d e V V
NOTES
1 The typical value for F is 2. Higher values of F may be applied where there are additional connections of the
PEN conductor to earth. For certain soil structures, the value of F may be up to 5. Caution is necessary when
this rule is applied in soils with high resistivity contrast where the top layer has a higher resistivity. The touch
voltage in this case can exceed 50 percent of the EPR.
2 Indices given in the table:
a- For definitions of the type of LV system, see IS 732.
b- For telecommunication equipment, the ITU recommendations should be used.
c- Limit may be increased if appropriate LV equipment is installed or EPR may be replaced by local
potential differences based on measurements or calculations.
d- If the PEN or neutral conductor of the low-voltage system is connected to earth only at the HV
earthing system, the value of F shall be 1.
e- UTp is derived from Fig. 7

FIG. 7 PERMISSIBLE TOUCH VOLTAGE UTP

 ANNEX A
EXAMPLE OF EARTHING ARRANGEMENTS AND PROTECTIVE
CONDUCTORS

Key:
# Name
C Extraneous-Conductive-part
C1 Water pipe, metal from outside
C2 Waste water pipe, metal from outside
C3 Gas pipe with insulating insert, metal from outside
C4 Air-conditioning
C5 Heating system
C6 Water pipe, metal e.g in a bathroom
C7 Waste water pipe, metal e.g in a room
MDB Main Distribution Board
DB Distribution Board
MET Main Earth Terminal
SEBT Supplementary Equipotential Bonding terminal
T1 Concrete-embedded foundation earth electrode or soil-embedded foundation earth electrode
T2 Earth electrode for LPS if necessary
LPS Lightning Protection system (if any)
PE PE terminal(s) in the distribution board
PE/PEN PE/PEN terminal(s) in the main distribution board
M Exposed-conductive part
1 Protective Earthing conductor (PE)
1a Protective Conductor, or PEN conductor, if any, from supplying network
2 Protective bonding conductor for connection to the main earthing terminal
3 Protective bonding conductor for supplementary bonding
4 Down conductor of a lightning protection system (LPS) if any
5 Earthing conductor

FIG. A-1 EXAMPLES OF EARTHING ARRANGEMENTS FOR FOUNDATION EARTH ELECTRODE,

PROTECTIVE CONDUCTORS AND PROTECTIVE BONDING CONDUCTOR
 ANNEX B
MINIMUM SIZE OF COMMONLY USED EARTH ELECTRODES, EMBEDDED IN
SOIL OR CONCRETE USED TO PREVENT CORROSION AND PROVIDE
MECHANICAL STRENGTH

Table B-1 Minimum Size of Commonly Used Earth Electrodes, Embedded in Soil or
Concrete Used to Prevent Corrosion and Provide Mechanical Strength

Sl Material Shape Diameter Cross Thickness Weight Thickness

no. and Surface Sectional of of
Area Coating Coating /
Sheating
mm mm2 mm g/m2
m
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
i) Steel Round wire 10
ii) embedded in Solid tape or 75 3
concrete strip
(bare, hot
galvanized or
stainless)
iii) Steel hot-dip Stripb or 90 3 500 63
c
galvanized shaped
strip/plate –
solid plate –
Lattice plate
iv) Round rod 16 350 45
installed
vertically
v) Round wire 10 350 45
installed
horizontally
vi) Pipe 25 2 350 45
vii) Stranded 70
(embedded
in concrete)
viii) Cross (290) 3
profile
installed
vertically
ix) Steel copper Round rod (15) 2000
sheathed installed
vertically
x) Steel with Round rod 14 250e
electro- installed
deposited vertically
xi) copper Round wire (8) 70
coating installed
horizontally
xii) Strip 90 3 70
installed
horizontally
xiii) Stainless Stripb or 90 3
Steel a shaped
strip/plate
xiv) Round rod 16
installed
vertically
xv) Round wire 10
installed
horizontally
xvi) Pipe 25 2
xvii) copper Strip 50 2
xviii) Round wire (25)d 50
installed
horizontally
xix) Round rod (12) 15
installed
vertically
xx) Stranded 1.7 for (25)d 50
wire individual
strands of
wire
xxi) Pipee 20 2
xxii) Solid plate (1.5) 2
xxiii) Lattice plate 2
NOTES
1 Values in bracket are applicable for protection against electric shock only, while values not in brackets are applicable for lightning protection
and for protection against electric shock.
2 Bare steel is not recommended in soil due to high corrosion.
3 The behaviour of a galvanized layer on steel in concrete is very complicated and can under certain conditions cause damage to the concrete
due to its dissimilar behaviour with steel in concrete. (also see IS 732).

4 Indices used in the table:

a- Chromium ≥16 percent, nickel ≥5 percent, molybdenum ≥2 percent, carbon ≤0.08 percent.
b- As rolled strip or slit strip with rounded edges.
c- The coating shall be smooth, continuous and free from flux stains.
d- Where experience shows that the risk of corrosion and mechanical damage is extremely low, 16 mm² can be used.
e- This thickness is provided to withstand mechanical damage of copper coating during the installation process. It may be reduced to
not less than 100 m where special precautions to avoid mechanical damage of copper during the installation process (for example,
drilling holes or special protective tips) are taken according to the manufacturer’s instruction.
 ANNEX C
ERECTION OF CONCRETE-EMBEDDED FOUNDATION EARTH ELECTRODES
(Clause 4.16)

C-0 CONCRETE-EMBEDDED FOUNDATION EARTH ELECTRODES

C-1 General

Concrete used for the foundations of buildings has a certain conductivity and generally a large
contact area with the soil. Therefore, bare metal electrodes completely embedded in concrete
can be used for earthing purposes, unless the concrete is isolated from the soil by use of a
special thermal insulation or other measures. Due to chemical and physical effects, bare or hot-
dip galvanized steel and other metals embedded in concrete to a depth of more than 5 cm are
highly protected against corrosion, normally for the whole life-time of the building.

Wherever possible, the conductive effects of the reinforcement of the building should also be
used. The production of a concrete-embedded foundation earth electrode during the erection of
the building may be an economical solution to obtain a good earth electrode of long standing
because:

a) it does not necessitate additional excavation works;

b) it is erected at a depth which is normally free from negative influences resulting from
seasonal weather conditions;
c) it provides a good contact with the soil;
d) it extends over practically all of the building’s foundation surface and results in the
minimum earth electrode impedance which can be obtained with this surface;
e) it provides an optimal earthing arrangement for lightning protection system purposes;
and
f) from the beginning of the erection of the building, it can be used as an earth electrode
for the electrical installation of the construction site.

Besides its earthing effect, the concrete-embedded foundation earth electrode provides a good
basis for the main protective bonding.

The following requirements and advice for the erection of a concrete-embedded foundation
earth electrode apply.

C-2 OTHER CONSIDERATIONS REGARDING THE USE OF CONCRETE-

EMBEDDED FOUNDATION EARTH ELECTRODES

If the building foundation is to be completely protected against loss of heat energy by insulating
it using non-conductive materials, or if the foundation is to use certain insulating measures
against water, for example, using plastic sheets of more than 0.5 mm thickness, earthing using
the foundation concrete is not viable. In such cases, the positive effect of metal reinforcement
for protective bonding may be used, and for earthing purposes another earthing arrangement
should be used, e.g. an additional concrete-embedded foundation earth electrode below the
isolated foundation, or an earthing arrangement around the building or a soil-embedded
foundation earth electrode.
C-3 CONSTRUCTION OF CONCRETE-EMBEDDED FOUNDATION EARTH
ELECTRODES

C-3.1 For concrete foundations without metal reinforcement, the concrete-embedded

foundation earth electrodes must be coordinated with the type and dimensions of the
foundation. One or more closed ring(s) or rectangles with dimensions up to 20 m and mutually
connected are preferred.

C-3.2 To avoid embedding of the electrodes in concrete at less than 5 cm depth, suitable means
for the distance of the electrode wiring above the ground should be used. If strips are used as
electrodes, they should be fixed set up on edge to avoid holes without concrete under the strip.
If reinforcement is present, the wiring should be fixed to it at intervals of not more than 5 m.
The connections should be made by exothermic welding, pressure connectors, clamps or other
suitable mechanical connectors. Mechanical connectors shall be installed in accordance with
the manufacturer’s instructions. Where a clamp is used, it shall not damage the electrode or the
earthing conductor. Connection devices or fittings that depend solely on solder shall not be
used independently, as they do not reliably provide adequate mechanical strength. The use of
keyed joints should be avoided.

C-3.3 The wiring of the concrete-embedded foundation earth electrode should have at least one
terminal lug for connection to the electrical system of the building, either leaving the concrete
inside the building to a suitable connection point (for example, to the main earthing terminal)
or ending at a special connection clamp embedded in concrete of a wall at its surface. At the
point of connection, the terminal lug must be accessible for maintenance and measuring
purposes.

For lightning protection and for buildings with special requirements concerning information
technology, more than one terminal lug of the foundation earth electrode, for example, for
lightning protection system down-conductors, may be needed.

For connections needed outside the foundation concrete going through the soil, corrosion
problems for steel wires need to be taken into account (see C-4). For such connections, it is
recommended that they should enter the concrete within the building, or outside at a suitable
level above ground level.

C-3.4 For the minimum cross-sectional area of electrodes including terminal lugs, the values
mentioned in Annex B apply. Connections must be soundly made and electrically satisfactory
(see 4.21).

C-3.5 Metal reinforcement of the foundations of the building may be used as an electrode
provided it is soundly connected according to 4.23. For welded connections the permission of
the responsible person for the structural design and analysis of the construction of the building
is required. Connections made by a wrapped iron wire only are not suitable for protection
purposes, but may be sufficient for EMC purposes for information technology. Prestressed
reinforcement must not be used as an electrode.

C-3.6 The wiring of the electrodes should not go over joints between different parts of larger
foundations. At such places, suitable malleable connectors should be installed outside the
concrete to provide the necessary electrical connections.
C-3.7 Concrete-embedded foundation earth electrodes of single foundations (for example, for
the construction of large halls) should be connected to other parts of the concrete-embedded
foundation earth electrode by using suitable earthing conductors. For embedding such
connections in the soil see C-4.

C-4 POSSIBLE CORROSION PROBLEMS FOR OTHER EARTHED

INSTALLATIONS OUTSIDE CONCRETE-EMBEDDED FOUNDATION EARTH
ELECTRODES

Attention is drawn to the fact that ordinary steel (bare or hot-dip galvanized) embedded in
concrete results in an electrochemical potential equal to that of copper embedded in the soil.
Consequently, there is a danger of electrochemical corrosion occurring to other earthing
arrangements made from steel embedded in the soil near the foundation and being in
connection with a concrete-embedded foundation earth electrode. This effect can also be found
with reinforced foundations of large buildings.

Any steel electrode must not be installed directly from foundation concrete into the soil except
for electrodes made from stainless steel or otherwise well protected by suitable prefabricated
protection against humidity. Hot-dip galvanized covering or protection by painting or other
similar materials later on is not sufficient for such purposes. Additional earthing arrangements
around and near such buildings should be made from other than hot-dip galvanized steel so as
to provide a sufficient life-time for this part of the earthing arrangement.

C-5 COMPLETION OF CONCRETE-EMBEDDED FOUNDATION EARTH

ELECTRODES

C-5.1 After preparing the electrodes and/or the connected reinforcement, but before the
concrete is poured, a survey and documented record of the arrangement should be made by a
skilled person. The documentation should contain a description, plans and photos and should
form a part of the whole documentation for the electrical installation (see IS 732).

C-5.2 Concrete used for the foundation should be made from at least 240 kg cement per m3
concrete. The concrete must have a suitable semi-liquid consistency to fill all holes below the
electrodes.
 ANNEX D

EARTHING SYSTEM DESIGN FLOW CHART FOR VOLTAGE EXCEEDING 1 kV

(Clause 7.2)

FIG. D-1 EARTHING SYS DESIGN FLOW CHART FOR VOLTAGE EXCEEDING 1 kV
 PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS
SECTION 19 LIGHTNING PROTECTION

FOREWORD
For the purposes of the National Electrical Code, the fixed installation for lightning protection
is considered part of the electrical installation design and constitutes a major area where the
installation design engineer has to ensure proper coordination.
This Section covers the essential design and construction details of lightning protective
systems. It is, however, intended to serve only as a guide of general nature on the principles
and practices in the protection of structures against lightning, and account has to be taken of
several other local conditions, such as variations in the architecture, topography of the region,
atmospheric conditions, etc.
Lightning protection of industrial installations which are categorized as hazardous, require
special considerations. These are summarized in Part 7 of the Code.
Assistance has been derived from IS/IEC 62305 standard for “Protection against lightning”.
1 SCOPE
1.1 This (Part 1/Sec 19) of the Code covers guidelines on the basic electrical aspects of
lightning protective systems for buildings and the electrical installation forming part of the
system.
1.2 Additional guidelines if any, for specific occupancies from the point of lightning
protection are covered in respective sections of the Code.

2 REFERENCES
The standards listed below contain provisions, which through reference in this text, constitute
provisions of this standard. At the time of publication, the editions indicated were valid. All
standards are subject to revision, and parties to agreements based on this standard are
encouraged to investigate the possibility of applying the most recent editions of the standards.

IS No. Title
IS/IEC 62305-1 : 2010 Protection against lightning: Part 1 General principles
IS/IEC 62305-2 : 2010 Protection against lightning: Part 2 Risk management
IS/IEC 62305-3 : 2010 Protection against lightning: Part 3 Physical damage to
structures and life hazard
IS/IEC 62305-4 : 2010 Protection against lightning: Part 4 Electrical and electronic
systems within structures

3 TERMINOLOGY
For the purposes of this Section, the following definitions shall apply.
3.1 Air Termination (Lightning Conductor) or Air Termination Network — Those
parts of a lightning protective system that are intended to collect the lightning discharges
from the atmosphere.
3.2 Bonds — Electrical connection between the lightning protective system and other metal
work, and between various portions of the latter.
3.3 Down Conductors — Conductors which connect the air terminations with the earth
terminations.
3.4 Earth Terminations or Earth Terminations Network — Those part of the lightning
protective system which are intended to distribute the lightning discharges into the general
mass of the earth. All parts below the testing point in a down conductor are included in this
term.
3.5 Earth Electrodes — A metal plate, pipe or other conductor or any array of conductors
electrically connected to the general mass of the earth; these include those portions of the
earth terminations that make direct electrical contact with the earth.
3.6 Fasteners — Devices used to fasten the conductors to the structures.
3.7 Isoceraunic Level — It is the number of days in a year on which the thunder is heard in
the particular region averaged over a number of years.
3.8 Joints — The mechanical and electrical junctions between two or more portions of the
lightning protective system or other metal bonded to the system or both.
3.9 Lightning Flash to Earth — Electrical discharge of atmospheric origin between cloud
and earth consisting of one or more strokes
3.10 Downward Flash — Lightning flash initiated by a downward leader from cloud to
earth (A downward flash consists of a first impulse, which can be followed by subsequent
impulses. One or more impulses may be followed by a long stroke).
3.11 Upward Flash — Lightning flash initiated by an upward leader from an earthed
structure to cloud (An upward flash consists of a first long stroke with or without multiple
superimposed impulses. One or more impulses may be followed by a long stroke).
3.12 Short Stroke — Part of the lightning flash which corresponds to an impulse current
(This current has a time T2 to the half peak value on the tail typically less than 2 ms).
3.13 Long stroke—Part of the lightning flash which corresponds to a continuing current
(The duration time TLONG {time from the 10 percent value on the front to the 10 percent
value on the tail} of this continuing current is typically more than 2 ms and less than 1 s).
3.14 Lightning Protective System (LPS) — complete system used to reduce physical
damage due to lightning flashes to a structure (It consists of both external and internal
lightning protection systems).
3.15 Lightning equipotential bonding EB - bonding to the LPS of separated conductive
parts, by direct connections or via surge protective devices, to reduce potential differences
caused by lightning current
3.16 Surge protective device SPD - device intended to limit transient over-voltages and
divert surge currents; contains at least one non-linear component
3.17 Metal-clad Building — A building with sides made of or covered with sheet metal.
3.18 Metal-roofed Building — A building with roof made of or covered with sheet metal.
3.19 Side Flash — A spark occurring between nearby metallic objects or between such
objects and the lightning protective system or to earth.
3.20 Testing Points — Joints in down conductors or in bonds or in earth conductors
connecting earth electrodes, so designed and situated as to enable resistance measurements
to be made.
3.21 Zone of Protection — The space within which the lightning conductor is expected to
provide protection against a direct lightning stroke.

4 EXCHANGE OF INFORMATION

4.1 The architect should exchange information with the engineer concerned when the
building plans are being prepared. The primary object of such an exchange is to obtain
information regarding the architectural features of the structure so that due provision may
be made to retain the aesthetic features of the building while planning the location of the
lightning conductors and down conductors of the lightning protective system. Information
may also be obtained at an early stage regarding other services, such as electrical
installation, gas and water pipes as well as climatic and soil conditions.

4.2 Scale drawings showing plans and elevations of the structure should be obtained, and
the nature, size and position of all the metal component parts of the lightning protective
system should be indicated on them. In addition, a ground plan should show all the tall
objects, such as, buildings, masts, transmission towers, tall trees, etc, within the zone of
protection.

5 CHARACTERISTICS OF LIGHTNING DISCHARGES

5.1 The principal effects of lightning discharge to structure are electrical, thermal and
mechanical. These effects are determined by the current which is discharged into the
structure. These currents are unidirectional and may vary in amplitude from a few hundred
amperes to about 200 kA.
Two basic types of flashes exist:
a) Downward flashes initiated by a downward leader from cloud to earth;
b) Upward flashes initiated by an upward leader from an earthed structure to cloud.

Mostly downward flashes occur in flat territory, and to lower structures, whereas for
exposed and/or higher structures upward flashes become dominant. With effective height,
the probability of a direct strike to the structure increases (see Annex A of IS/IEC 62305-2
: 2010) and the physical conditions change.

A lightning current consists of one or more different strokes:

 a) impulses with duration less than 2 ms; and
b) long strokes with duration longer than 2 ms.

Many lightning discharges consist of a single stroke but some others involve a sequence of
strokes. A complete lightning discharge may thus last a second or even longer. Further
differentiation of strokes comes from their polarity (positive or negative) and from their
position during the flash (first, subsequent, and superimposed).

5.2 Lightning affecting a structure can cause damage to the structure itself and to its
occupants and contents, including failure of internal systems. The damages and failures may
also extend to the surroundings of the structure and even involve the local environment.
The scale of this extension depends on the characteristics of the structure and on the
characteristics of the lightning flash.

5.3 Electrical Effects

The principal electrical effects of a lightning discharge are two-fold.
5.3.1 The lightning current which is discharged to earth through the resistance of the
lightning conductor and earth electrode provided for a lightning protective system, produces a
resistive voltage drop which momentarily raises the potential of the protective system with
respect to the absolute earth potential to a very high value. The lightning current also produces,
around the earth electrode, a high voltage gradient which may be dangerous to persons and
animals.
5.3.2 The lightning current rises steeply to its crest-value and as a first approximation may
be regarded as equivalent to high frequency discharge.
The rate of rise of current in conjunction with the inductance of the discharge path produces
an inductive voltage drop which would be added, with due regard to the time relationship, to
the resistive (ohmic) voltage drop across the earthing system.

5.4 Thermal Effects

The thermal effect of lightning discharge results in rise in temperature of the conductor through
which the lightning current is discharged to the earth. Although the amplitude of the lightning
current may be very high, its duration is so short that the thermal effect on a lightning protective
system is usually negligible. This ignores the fusing or welding effects which occur locally
consequent upon the rupture of a conductor which was previously damaged or was of
inadequate cross-sectional area. In practice the cross-sectional area of a lightning conductor is
determined primarily by mechanical considerations.

5.5 Mechanical Effects

When a high electric current is discharged through parallel conductors which are in close
proximity to each other, these are subjected to large mechanical forces. The lightning
conductors should, therefore, be provided with adequate mechanical fixings.
5.5.1 A different mechanical effect exerted by a lightning discharge is due to the fact that the
air channel, that is, the space between the thunder cloud and the lightning conductor, along
which the discharge is propagated, is suddenly raised to a very high temperature. This results
in a strong air pressure wave which is responsible for damages to buildings and other
structures. It is not possible to provide protection against such an effect.

6 DAMAGE DUE TO LIGHTNING

6.1 Damage to a Structure

Lightning affecting a structure can cause damage to the structure itself and to its occupants and
contents, including failure of internal systems. The damages and failures may also extend to
the surroundings of the structure and even involve the local environment. The scale of this
extension depends on the characteristics of the structure and on the characteristics of the
lightning flash.

6.1.1 Effects of Lightning on a Structure

The main characteristics of structures relevant to lightning effects include:

a) construction (e.g. wood, brick, concrete, reinforced concrete, steel frame
construction);
b) function (dwelling house, office, farm, theatre, hotel, school, hospital, museum,
church, prison, department store, bank, factory, industry plant, sports area);
c) occupants and contents (persons and animals, presence of combustible or non-
combustible materials, explosive or non-explosive materials, electrical and electronic
systems with low or high withstand voltage);
d) connected lines (power lines, telecommunication lines, pipelines);
e) existing or provided protection measures (protection measures to reduce physical
damage and life hazard, protection measures to reduce failure of internal systems);
f) scale of the extension of danger (structure with difficulty of evacuation or structure
where panic may be created, structure dangerous to the surroundings, structure
dangerous to the environment).
Table 1 reports the effects of lightning on various types of structures.
 Table 1 Effects of Lightning on Typical Structures
(Clause 6.1.1)

Sl no. Type of Structure Effects of Lightning

According to Function
and/or Contents
(2) (3)
(1)
i) Dwelling-house c) Puncture of electrical installations, fire
and material damage
d) Damage normally limited to structures
exposed to the point of strike or to the
lightning current path
e) Failure of electrical and electronic
equipment and systems installed (for
example, TV sets, computers, modems,
telephones, etc.)
ii) Farm building f) Primary risk of fire and hazardous step
voltages as well as material damage
g) Secondary risk due to loss of electric
power, and life hazard to livestock due to
failure of electronic control of ventilation
and food supply systems, etc.
iii) Theatre h) Damage to the electrical installations (for
Hotel example, electric lighting) likely to cause
panic
School
j) Failure of fire alarms resulting in delayed
Department store
fire-fighting measures
Sports area
iv) Bank k) As above, plus problems resulting from
Insurance company loss of communication, failure of computers
and loss of data
Commercial company, etc.
v) Hospital m) As above, plus problems of people in
Nursing home intensive care, and the difficulties of
rescuing immobile people
Prison
vi) Industry n) Additional effects depending on the
contents of factories, ranging from minor to
unacceptable damage and loss of production
vii) Museums and p) Loss of irreplaceable cultural heritage
archaeological site
Church
viii) Telecommunication q) Unacceptable loss of services to the
Power plants public
 Sl no. Type of Structure Effects of Lightning
According to Function
and/or Contents
(2) (3)
(1)
ix) Firework factory r) Consequences of fire and explosion to the
Munitions works plant and its surroundings
x) Chemical plant s) Fire and malfunction of the plant with
Refinery detrimental consequences to the local and
global environment
Nuclear plant
Biochemical laboratories
and plants

6.1.2 Sources and Types of Damage to a Structure

The lightning current is the source of damage. The following situations shall be taken
into account, depending on the position of the point of strike relative to the structure
considered:
a) S1: flashes to the structure;
b) S2: flashes near the structure;
c) S3: flashes to the lines connected to the structure;
d) S4: flashes near the lines connected to the structure.
a) Flashes to the structure can cause:
1) immediate mechanical damage, fire and/or explosion due to the hot lightning
plasma arc itself, due to the current resulting in ohmic heating of conductors
(over-heated conductors), or due to the charge resulting in arc erosion (melted
metal);
2) fire and/or explosion triggered by sparks caused by overvoltages resulting from
resistive and inductive coupling and to passage of part of the lightning currents;
3) injury to living beings by electric shock due to step and touch voltages resulting
from resistive and inductive coupling; and
4) failure or malfunction of internal systems due to LEMP.
b) Flashes near the structure can cause:
1) failure or malfunction of internal systems due to LEMP.
c) Flashes to a line connected to the structure can cause:
1) fire and/or explosion triggered by sparks due to overvoltages and lightning
currents transmitted through the connected line;
2) injury to living beings by electric shock due to touch voltages inside the structure
caused by lightning currents transmitted through the connected line ; and
3) failure or malfunction of internal systems due to overvoltages appearing on
connected lines and transmitted to the structure.
d) Flashes near a line connected to the structure can cause:
failure or malfunction of internal systems due to overvoltages induced on connected
lines and transmitted to the structure.

As a result, the lightning can cause three basic type of damage:

1) D1: injury to living beings by electric shock;

2) D2: physical damage (fire, explosion, mechanical destruction, chemical release)
due to lightning current effects, including sparking; and
3) D3: failure of internal systems due to LEMP.

6.2 Types of Loss

Each type of damage relevant to structure to be protected, alone or in combination with
others, may produce different consequential loss. The type of loss that may appear
depends on the characteristics of the structure itself.
The following types of loss, which may appear as consequence of damages relevant to
structure, are considered:
a) L1: loss of human life (including permanent injury);
b) L2#: loss of service to the public;
c) L3: loss of cultural heritage;
d) L4: loss of economic value (structure, its content, and loss of activity).
NOTE — # = only utilities such as gas, water, TV, TLC and power supply are considered service to the public.

Losses of type L1, L2 and L3 may be considered as loss of social values, whereas a loss
of type L4 may be considered as purely an economic loss.
The relationship between source of damage, type of damage and loss is reported in Table
2.
Table 2 Damage and Loss Relevant to a Structure According to
Different Points of Strike of Lightning
(Clause 6.2)

Sl no. Point of strike Source of Type of Type of loss

damage damage
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
i) a
D1 L1 , L4
Structure S1 D2 L1, L2, L3, L4
D3 b
L1 , L2, L4
 Sl no. Point of strike Source of Type of Type of loss
damage damage
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
ii)
b
Near a structure S2 D3 L1 , L2, L4

iii) a
D1 L1, L4
Line connected
S3 D2 L1, L2, L3, L4
to the structure b
D3 L1 , L2, L4

iv)
b
Near a line S4 D3 L1 , L2, L4

NOTES
1 a = Only for properties where animals may be lost.
2 b = Only for structures with risk of explosion and for hospitals or other structures where failure of internal systems
immediately endangers human life.

Types of loss resulting from types of damage and the correspondin g risks are reported
in Fig. 1.

Risk Risk Risk Risk

R1 R2 R3 R4

Loss of Loss of Loss of

Type of Loss of service to cultural economic
loss human life the public heritage values

2)
Injury 1) Injury
Type of to living Failure Failure to living Failure
Physical Physical Physical Physical
beings of internal of internal beings of internal
damage damage damage damage damage
by electric systems systems by electric systems
shock shock

IEC 2613/10
Key:
1 Only for hospitals or other structures where failure of internal systems immediately endanger s human life.
2 Only for properties where animals may be lost.

FIG. 1 TYPES OF LOSS AND CORRESPONDING RISKS RESULTING

FROM DIFFERENT TYPES OF DAMAGE
7 DETERMINATION OF THE NEED FOR LIGHTNING PROTECTION

7.1 Need for Lightning Protection: Risk Assessment

The need for the lightning protection of a structure to be protected in order to reduce the loss
of social values L1, L2 and L3 shall be evaluated.
In order to evaluate whether or not lightning protection of a structure is needed, a risk
assessment in accordance with the procedures contained in IS/IEC 62305-2 shall be made. The
following risks shall be taken into account, corresponding to the types of loss reported above:
a) R1 : risk of loss or permanent injury of human life;
b) R2 : risk of loss of services to the public;
c) R3 : risk of loss of cultural heritage.
NOTE — Risk R 4 : risk of loss of economic values, should be assessed whenever the economic justification of
lightning protection is considered

Protection against lightning is needed if the risk R (R1 to R3 ) is higher than the
tolerable level RT

R  RT

In this case, protection measures shall be adopted in order reduce the risk R (R1 to
R3) to the tolerable level RT

R  RT

If more than one type of loss could appear, the condition R  RT shall be satisfied
for each type of loss (L1, L2 and L3).
The values of tolerable risk R T where lightning could result in the loss of items of
social value should be under the responsibility of a competent national body.
 Identify the structure to be protected

Identify the types of loss relevant to the structure

For each type of loss, identify and calculate the risk

components (R1, R2, R3 )

NO
R > RT Structure protected

YES

Protection needed

Is LPS YES Are SPM YES

installed? installed?
Calculate new values
of NO
risk components
RA+RB +RU NO NO
+RV >RTa

YES
Install an Install adequate Install other
adequate SPM protection
type of LPS measures

Key:
a If R A +R B <R T, a complete LPS is not necessary; in this case SPD(s) according to IEC 62305-3 are sufficient.

FIG. 2 PROCEDURE FOR DECIDING THE NEED OF PROTECTION

AND FOR SELECTING PROTECTION MEASURES

7.2 Economic Justification of Lightning Protection

Besides the need for lightning protection for the structure to be protected, it may be
useful to evaluate the economic benefits of providing protection measures in order to
reduce the economic loss L4.
In this case, the risk R4 of loss of economic values should be assessed. The assessment
of risk R4 allows for the evaluation of the cost of the economic loss with and without
the adopted protection measures.
Lightning protection is cost effective if the sum of the cost C RL of residual loss in the
presence of protection measures and the cost C PM of protection measures is lower than
the cost C L of total loss without protection measures:

C RL + C PM  C L

For Detailed information on the evaluation of economic justification of lightning

protection refer IS/IEC 62305-2.
8 PROTECTION MEASURES
8.1 General
Protection measures may be adopted in order to reduce the risk according to the type of
damage.
8.2 Protection Measures to Reduce Injury of Living Beings by Electric Shock
Possible protection measures include:
a) adequate insulation of exposed conductive parts;
b) equi-potentialization by means of a meshed earthing system;
c) physical restrictions and warning notices; and
d) lightning equipotential bonding (EB).
8.3 Protection Measures to Reduce Physical Damage
Protection is achieved by the lightning protection system (LPS) which includes the
following features:
a) air-termination system;
b) down-conductor system;
c) earth-termination system;
d) lightning equipotential bonding (EB); and
e) electrical insulation (and hence separation distance) against the external
LPS.
8.4 Protection Measures to Reduce Failure of Electrical and Electronic Systems
The electrical and electronic system protection measures (SPM) include:
a) Earthing and bonding measures,
b) Magnetic shielding,
c) Line routing,
d) Isolating interfaces, and
e) Coordinated SPD system.
These measures may be used alone or in combination.
8.5 Protection Measures Selection
The protection measures listed above together form the overall lightning protection.
Selection of the most suitable protection measures shall be made by the designer of the
protection measures and the owner of the structure to be protected according to the type
and the amount of each kind of damage, the technical and economic aspects of th e
different protection measures and the results of risk assessment.
9 CRITERIA FOR PROTECTION OF STRUCTURES
9.1 General
An ideal protection for structures would be to enclose the structure to be protected
within an earthed and perfectly conducting continuous shield of adequate thickness, and
to provide adequate bonding, at the entrance point into the shield, of the lines connected
to the structure. This would prevent the penetration of lightning current and related
electromagnetic field into the structure to be protected and prevent dangerous thermal
and electrodynamic effects of current, as well as dangerous sparkings and overvoltages
for internal systems. In practice, it is often neither possible nor cost effective to go to
such measures to provide such full protection.
Lack of continuity of the shield and/or its inadequate thickness allows the lightning
current to penetrate the shield causing:
a) physical damage and life hazard; and
b) failure of internal systems.
Protection measures, adopted to reduce such damages and relevant consequential loss,
shall be designed for the defined set of lightning current parameters against which
protection is required (lightning protection level).

9.2 Lightning Protection Levels (LPL)

The lightning protection levels are categorised into four levels (I to IV). For each LPL,
a set of maximum and minimum lightning current parameters is fixed.
NOTES
1 Protection against lightning whose maximum and minimum lightning current parameters exceed those relevant
to LPL I needs more efficient measures which should be selected and erected on an individual basis.
2 The probability of occurrence of lightning with minimum or maximum current parameters outside the range of
values defined for LPL I is less than 2 percent.

The maximum values of lightning current parameters relevant to LPL I shall not be
exceeded, with a probability of 99 percent. The maximum values of lightning current
parameters relevant to LPL I are reduced to 75 percent for LPL II and to 50 percent for
LPL III and IV. The time parameters are unchanged.
The maximum values of lightning current parameters for the different lightning
protection levels are given in Table 3 and are used to design lightning protection
components (for example, cross-section of conductors, thickness of metal sheets,
current capability of SPDs, separation distance against dangerous sparking) and to
define test parameters simulating the effects of lightning on such components.
The minimum values of lightning current amplitude for the different LPL are used to
derive the rolling sphere radius in order to define the lightning protection zone LPZ 0B
which cannot be reached by direct strike. The minimum values of lightning current
parameters together with the related rolling sphere radius are given in Table 4. They are
used for positioning of the air-termination system and to define the lightning protection
zone LPZ 0 B.

Table 3 Maximum Values of Lightning Parameters According to LPL

(Clause 9.2)

Sl First positive impulse LPL

no.
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
Current parameters Symbol Unit I II III IV
i) Peak current I kA 200 150 100
ii) Impulse charge Q SHORT C 100 75 50

iii) Specific energy W/R MJ/ 10 5.6 2.5

iv) Time parameters T1 / T2 s / µs 10 / 350

First negative impulse a LPL

Current parameters Symbol Unit I II III
v) Peak current I kA 100 75 50
vi) Average steepness di/dt kA/µs 100 75 50
vii) Time parameters T1 / T2 µs / µs 1 / 200

Subsequent impulse LPL

Current parameters Symbol Unit I II III IV
viii) Peak current I kA 50 37.5 25
ix) Average steepness di/dt kA/µs 200 150 100
x) Time parameters T1 / T2 µs / µs 0.25 / 100

Long stroke LPL

Current parameters Symbol Unit I II III IV
xi) Long stroke charge Q LONG C 200 150 100

xii) Time parameter T LONG s 0.5

Flash LPL
Current parameters Symbol Unit I II III IV
xiii) Flash charge Q FLASH C 300 225 150

a The use of this current shape concerns only calculations and not testing.
 Table 4 Minimum Values of Lightning Parameters
and Related Rolling Sphere Radius Corresponding to LPL
(Clause 9.2)

Sl Interception criteria LPL

no.
Symbol Unit I II III IV
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
i) Minimum peak I kA 3 5 10 16
current
ii) Rolling sphere r m 20 30 45 60
radius

9.3 Lightning Protection Zones (LPZ)

Protection measures such as LPS, shielding wires, magnetic shields and SPD determine
lightning protection zones (LPZ).
LPZ downstream of the protection measure are characterized by significant reduction
of LEMP than that upstream of the LPZ.
With respect to the threat of lightning, the following LPZs are defined (see Fig. 3 and
4):
LPZ 0 A zone where the threat is due to the direct lightning flash and the full
lightning electromagnetic field. The internal systems may be subjected to
full or partial lightning surge current;
LPZ 0 B zone protected against direct lightning flashes but where the threat is the
full lightning electromagnetic field. The internal systems may be
subjected to partial lightning surge currents;
LPZ 1 zone where the surge current is limited by current sharing and by isolating
interfaces and/or SPDs at the boundary. Spatial shielding may attenuate
the lightning electromagnetic field;
LPZ 2, ..., n zone where the surge current may be further limited by current sharing
and by isolating interfaces and/or additional SPDs at the boundary.
Additional spatial shielding may be used to further attenuate the lightning
electromagnetic field.
NOTE — In general, the higher the number of an individual zone, the lower the electromagnetic environment
parameters.

As a general rule for protection, the structure to be protected shall be in an LPZ whose
electromagnetic characteristics are compatible with the capability of the structure to
withstand stress causing the damage to be reduced (physical damage, fai lure of
electrical and electronic systems due to overvoltages).
 S1

LPZ 0A

S3 2
1
5 s
3

SPD
LPZ 1
r
r
s S2
S4

LPZ 0B LPZ 0B

SPD
5

4 IEC 2614/10

Key:
1 Structure S1 flash to the structure
2 air-termination system S2 flash near to the structure
3 down-conductor system S3 flash to a line connected to the structure
4 earth-termination system S4 flash near a line connected to the structure
5 incoming lines r rolling sphere radius
s separation distance against dangerous sparking

ground level
lightning equipotential bonding by means of SPD
LPZ 0 A direct flash, full lightning current

LPZ 0 B no direct flash, partial lightning or induced current

LPZ 1 no direct flash, limited lightning or induced current

protected volume inside LPZ 1 must respect separation distance s

FIG. 3 LPZ DEFINED BY AN LPS (IS/IEC 62305-3)

 S1

LPZ 0A
2

S3
LPZ 0B 1
SPD
6
3

SPD LPZ 1 ds
5

r r
ds
S4 SPD S2
LPZ 2
LPZ 0B SPD LPZ 0B

SPD
6

4
IEC 2615/10

Key:
1 structure (shield of LPZ 1) S1 flash to the structure
2 air-termination system S2 flash near to the structure
3 down-conductor system S3 flash to a line connected to the structure
4 earth-termination system S4 flash near a line connected to the structure
5 room (shield of LPZ 2) r rolling sphere radius
6 lines connected to the structure ds safety distance against too high magnetic field

ground level
lightning equipotential bonding by means of SPD
LPZ 0 A direct flash, full lightning current, full magnetic field

LPZ 0 B no direct flash, partial lightning or induced current, full magnetic field

LPZ 1 no direct flash, limited lightning or induced current, damped magnetic field
LPZ 2 no direct flash, induced currents, further damped magnetic field
protected volumes inside LPZ 1 and LPZ 2 must respect safety distance s d s

FIG. 4 LPZ DEFINED BY AN SPM (IS/IEC 62305-4)

9.4 Protection of Structures

9.4.1 Protection to Reduce Physical Damage and Life Hazard

The structure to be protected shall be inside an LPZ 0 B or higher. This is achieved by
means of a lightning protection system (LPS).
An LPS consists of both external and internal lightning protection systems.
The functions of the external LPS are:
a) to intercept a lightning flash to the structure (with an air-termination
system),
b) to conduct the lightning current safely to earth (with a down -conductor
system), and
c) to disperse it into the earth (with an earth-termination system).
The function of the internal LPS is to prevent dangerous sparking within the struc ture,
using equipotential bonding or a separation distance, s, (and hence electrical isolation)
between the LPS components and other electrically conducting elements internal to the
structure.
Four classes of LPS (I, II, III and IV) are defined as a set of construction rules, based
on the corresponding LPL (see Table 5). Each set includes level-dependent (for
example, rolling sphere radius, mesh width etc.) and level-independent (for example,
cross-sections, materials etc.) construction rules.
Where surface resistivity of the soil outside and of the floor inside the structure is kept
low, life hazard due to touch and step voltages is reduced:
a) outside the structure, by insulation of the exposed conductive parts, by
equipotentialization of the soil by means of a meshed earthing system, by
warning notices and by physical restrictions; and
b) inside the structure, by equipotential bonding of lines at entrance point
into the structure.
The LPS shall comply with the requirements of IS/IEC 62305-3.
Table 5 Relation Between Lightning Protection Levels (LPL)
and Class of LPS

Sl no. LPL Class of LPS

(1) (2) (3)
i) I I
ii) II II
iii) III III
iv) IV IV

9.4.2 Protection to Reduce the Failure of Internal Systems

The protection against LEMP to reduce the risk of failure of internal systems shall limit:
a) surges due to lightning flashes to the structure resulting from resistive and
inductive coupling,
 b) surges due to lightning flashes near the structure resulting from inductive
coupling,
c) surges transmitted by lines connected to the structure due to flashes to or
near the lines, and
d) magnetic field directly coupling with apparatus.
The system to be protected shall be located inside an LPZ 1 or higher. This is achieved
by means of electrical and electronic system protection measures (SPM) con sisting of
magnetic shields attenuating the inducing magnetic field and/or suitable routing of
wiring to reduce the induction loop. Bonding shall be provided at the boundaries of an
LPZ for metal parts and systems crossing the boundaries. This bonding may be
accomplished by means of bonding conductors or, when necessary, by surge protective
devices (SPDs).
The protection measures for any LPZ shall comply with IS/IEC 62305-4.
Effective protection against overvoltages, causing failures of internal systems, ma y also
be achieved by means of isolating interfaces and/or a coordinated SPD system, limiting
overvoltages below the rated impulse withstand voltage of the system to be protected.
Isolating interfaces and SPDs shall be selected and installed according to t he
requirements of IS/IEC 62305-4.

10 MATERIALS AND DIMENSIONS

10.1 Materials
The materials of lightning conductors, down conductors, earth termination network, etc, of the
protective system shall be reliably resistant to corrosion or be adequately protected against
corrosion. The following materials are recommended:
a) Copper — When solid or stranded copper wire or flat copper strips are used, they
shall be of grade ordinarily required for commercial electrical work, generally
designated as being of 98 percent conductivity when annealed. They shall conform
to relevant Indian Standards.
b) Copper-clad Steel or copper coated steel — Where copper-clad steel is used, the
copper covering shall be permanently and effectively welded to the steel core. The
proportion of copper and steel shall be such that the conductance of the material is
not less than 30 percent of the conductance of solid copper of the same total
crosssectional area.
c) Galvanized Steel — If there is any difficulty in the use of copper or aluminium,
galvanized steel may be used. Where steel is used it shall be thoroughly protected
against corrosion by a zinc coating. Galvanized steel may be preferred for some
short life installations, such as exhibitions. Copper is preferred to galvanized iron
where corrosive gases, industrial pollution or saltaden atmospheric conditions are
encountered.
d) Aluminium — Aluminium wire and strips are increasingly finding favour for use
as lightning conductors in view of the fact that aluminium has a conductivity almost
 double that of copper mass for mass. When used, it shall be least 99 percent pure,
of sufficient mechanical strength and effectively protected against corrosion.
e) Alloys — Where alloys of metals are used, they shall be substantially as resistant to
corrosion as copper under similar conditions.

Components of lightning protection system shall be manufactured from the materials listed in
Table 6 or from other materials with equivalent mechanical, electrical and chemical (corrosion)
performance characteristics.
a
Table 6 LPS Materials and Conditions of Use
(Clause 10.1)

Sl Material Use Corrosion

no
.

In open In earth In Resistance Increased May be

air concrete by destroyed by
galvanic
coupling with

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

i) Copper Solid Solid Solid Good in Sulphur
Stranded Stranded Stranded many compound –
As coating As coating environments s
Organic
materials
ii) Hot Solid Solid Solid Acceptable High Copper
galvanize Stranded b
Stranded b in air, in chlorides
d steel c, d, concrete and content
e
in benign
soil
iii) Steel with Solid Solid Solid Good in Sulphur
electro- many compound
deposited environments s
copper
iv) Stainless Solid Solid Solid Good in High –
steel Stranded Stranded Stranded many chlorides
environments content
v) Aluminiu Solid Unsuitable Unsuitable Good in Alkaline Copper
m Stranded atmospheres solutions
containing
low
concentration
s of sulphur
and chloride
 f
vi) Lead Solid Solid Unsuitable Good in Acid soils Copper
As coating As coating atmosphere Stainless steel
with high
concentration
of sulphates
Key:

a This table gives general guidance only. In special circumstances, more careful corrosion immunity considerations are required (see
Annex E of IS/IEC 62305-3)
b Stranded conductors are more vulnerable to corrosion than solid conductors. Stranded conductors are also vulnerable where the y enter
or exit earth/concrete positions. This is the reason why stranded galvanized steel is not recommende d in earth.
c Galvanized steel may be corroded in clay soil or moist soil.
d Galvanized steel in concrete should not extend into the soil due to possible corrosion of the steel just outside the concrete .
e Galvanized steel in contact with reinforcement steel in concrete should not be used in coastal areas where there may be salt in the
ground water.
f Use of lead in the earth is often banned or restricted due to environmental concerns.

10.2 Shapes and Sizes

The recommended shape and minimum sizes of conductors for use above ground and below
ground are given in Table 7 and Table 8 respectively.

Table 7 Material, Configuration and Minimum Cross-sectional Area of Air-

termination Conductors, Air-termination Rods, Earth Lead-in Rods and Down-
conductors
(Clause 10.2)

Sl Material Configuration Cross Sectional

no. Area (in sq.mm)
(1) (2) (3) (4)
i) Solid tape 50
ii) Copper, Solid rounda 50
iii) Tin plated copper Strandeda 50
iv) Solid roundb 176
v) Aluminium Solid tape 70
vi) Solid round 50
vii) Stranded 50
viii) Aluminium Alloy Solid tape 50
ix) Solid round 50
x) Stranded 50
xi) Solid roundb 176
xii) Copper coated aluminium alloy Solid round 50
xiii) Hot dipped galvanized steel Solid tape 50
xiv) Solid round 50
xv) Stranded 50
xvi) Solid roundb 176
xvii) Copper coated steel Solid round 50
xviii) Solid tape 50
xix) Stainless steel Solid tapec 50
xx) Solid roundc 50
 xxi) Stranded 50
xxii) Solid roundb 176
Key:
a 50 mm2 (8 mm diameter) may be reduced to 25 mm2 in certain applications where mechanical strength is not an essential
requirement. Consideration should in this case, be given to reducing the spacing between the fasteners.
b Applicable for air-termination rods and earth lead-in rods. For air-termination rods where mechanical stress such as wind
loading is not critical, a 9.5 mm diameter, 1 m long rod may be used.
c If thermal and mechanical considerations are important then these values should be increased to 75 mm².

Table 8 Material, Configuration and Minimum Dimensions of Earth Electrodes d

(Clause 10.2)
Dimensions
Material Configuration
Sl Earth Rod Earth Earth
no Diameter Conductor Plate
. mm mm 2 mm
(2) (3)
(1) (4) (5) (6)
i) Stranded 50
ii) Solid round 15 50
iii) Copper Solid tape 50
iv) Tin plated copper Pipe 20
v) Solid plate 500  500
vi) Lattice plate b 600  600
vii) Solid round 14 78
viii) Pipe 25
ix) Hot dipped galvanized Solid tape 90
x) steel Solid plate 500  500
xi) Lattice plate b 600  600
c
xii) Profile
xiii) Stranded 70
a
xiv) Bare steel Solid round 78
xv) Solid tape 75
xvi) Copper coated steel Solid round 14 50
xvii) Solid tape 90
xviii) Stainless steel Solid round 15 78
xix) Solid tape 100
Key:
a
Shall be embedded in concrete for a minimum depth of 50 mm.
b
Lattice plate constructed with a minimum total length of the conductor of 4.8 m.
c
Different profiles are permitted with a cross -section of 290 mm 2 and a minimum thickness of 3 mm, e.g. cross profile.
d
In case of a type B arrangement foundation earthing system, the earth electrode shall be correctly connected at least every
5 m with the reinforcement steel.

10.3 Corrosion
Where corrosion due to atmospheric, chemical, electrolytic or other causes is likely to impair
any part of the lightning protective system, suitable precautions should be taken to prevent its
occurrence. The contact of dissimilar metals is likely to initiate and accelerate corrosion unless
the contact surfaces are kept completely dry and protected against the ingress of moisture.

10.3.1 Dissimilar metal contacts can exist where a conductor is held by fixing devices or
against external metal surfaces. Corrosion can arise also where water passing over one metal
comes into contact with another. Run-off water from copper, copper alloys and lead can attack
aluminum alloys and zinc. The metal of the lightning protective system should be compatible
with the metal or metals used externally on the structure over which the system passes or with
which it may make contact.

11 DESIGN OF LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM

11.1 General
Lightning protective systems should be installed with a view to offering technically and
economically optimized design with least impedance to the passage of lightning current
between air-terminals and earth. The lightning protection system consists of both external and
internal lightning protection system. The basic design considerations for lightning protective
systems are given in IS/IEC 62305.
An external lighting protection system consists of following components (attached to structure
or isolated)
a) air terminations,
b) down conductors,
c) joints and bends,
d) testing points,
e) earth terminations,
f) earth electrodes, and
g) fasteners.
On other hand the internal lightning protection is achieved by equipotential bonding or
electrical insulation between the parts (maintaining separation distances).
11.2 Air Terminations
For the purpose of lightning protection, the vertical and horizontal conductors are considered
equivalent and the use of pointed air terminations or vertical finials is, therefore, not regarded
as essential except when dictated by practical considerations. An air termination may consist
of a vertical rod/catenary wires/meshed conductors.
11.2.1 Air termination components installed on a structure shall be located at corners, exposed
points and edges (especially on upper level of any facades) in accordance with one or more of
the following methods:
a) Protection angle method;
b) Rolling sphere method; and
 c) Mesh method.
See Table 9.

11.2.2 Horizontal air terminations should be coursed along contours, such as ridges, parapets
and edges of flat roofs, and where necessary over flat surfaces in such a way as to join each air
termination to the rest and should themselves form a closed network.

11.2.3 On structure taller than 60 m, flashed to the side may occur, especially to the point,
corners and edges of surface. An air-termination system shall be installed to protect the upper
part of tall structures (that is, typically the topmost 20 percent of the height of the structure as
far as this part exceeds 60 m in height) and the equipment installed on it. The rules for
positioning the air-termination systems on these upper parts of a structure shall meet at least
the requirements for LPL IV with emphasis on the location of air-termination devices on
corners, edges, and significant protrusions (such as balconies, viewing platforms, etc).
11.2.4 The layout of the network may be designed to suit the shape of the roof and architectural
features of the buildings.
11.2.5 The air termination network should cover all salient points of the structure.
11.2.6 All metallic finials, chimneys, ducts, vent pipes, railings, gutters and the like, on or
above the main surface of the roof of the structure shall be bonded to, and form part of, the air
termination network. If portions of a structure vary considerably in height, any necessary air
termination or air termination network of the lower portions should, in addition to their own
conductors, be bonded to the down conductors of the taller portions.
11.2.7 All air terminals shall be effectively secured against overturning either by attachment
to the object to be protected or by means of substantial braces and fixings which shall be
permanently and rigidly attached to the building. The method and nature of the fixings should
be simple, solid and permanent, due attention being given to climatic conditions and possible
corrosion.

Table 9 Maximum Values of Rolling Sphere Radius, Mesh Size

and Protection Angle Corresponding to the Class of LPS
(Clause 11.2.1)

Protection Method
Sl Class of LPS Rolling Sphere Mesh Size w m Protection Angle
no. Radius r m °
m (5)
(2) (4)
(1) (3)
i) I 20 55 See Fig.5 below
 ii) II 30 10  10
iii) III 45 15  15
iv) IV 60 20  20

80

70

60

50
Class of
 (°)

LPS
40

30
IV
I II III
20

10

0
0 2 10 20 30 40 50 60

h (m)
IEC 2646/10

FIG. 5 PROTECTION ANGLE CORRESPONDING TO THE CLASS OF LPS

11.3 Down Conductors
The number and spacing of down conductors shall largely depend upon the size and
shape of the building and upon class of LPS (lightning protection system). The
minimum number of down conductors shall be as per 5.3 of IS/IEC 62305-3 and the
distance between the down conductors shall be as per Table 10.
Table 10 Typical Preferred Values of the Distance Between Down-conductors
According to the Class of Lightning Protection System (LPS)
(Clause 11.3)

Sl no. Class of LPS Typical distances

m
(1) (2) (3)
i) I 10
ii) II 10
iii) III 15
iv) IV 20

11.3.1 Down conductors should be distributed round the outside walls of the structure. They
shall preferably be run along the corners and other projections, due consideration being given
to the location of air terminations and earth terminations. Lift shaft shall not be used for fixing
down conductors.
11.3.2 It is very important that the down conductors shall follow the most direct path possible
between the air termination and the earth termination, avoiding sharp bends, upturns and kinks.
Joints shall as far as possible be avoided in down conductors. The formation of loops on the
down conductor shall be avoided or minimum separation distance(s) shall be maintained.
Adequate protection may be provided to the conductors against mechanical damage. Metal
pipes should not be used as protection for the conductors.
11.3.3 Metal pipes leading rainwater from the roof to the ground may be connected to the
down conductors but cannot replace them. Such connections shall have disconnecting joints
for testing purposes.
11.3.4 Where the provision of suitable external routes for down conductors is impracticable or
inadvisable, as in buildings of cantilever construction, from the first floor upwards, down
conductors may be used in an air space provided by a non-metallic non-combustible internal
duct. Any covered recess not smaller than 75 mm × 15 mm or any vertical service duct running
the full height of the building may be used for this purpose, provided it does not contain an
unarmored or non-metal-sheathed cable.
11.3.5 Any extended metal running vertically through the structure should be bonded to the
lightning conductor at the top and the bottom unless the clearance are in accordance with
IS/IEC-62305 (Part 3) for tall structures.
11.3.6 A structure on bare rock should be provided with at least down conductors equally
spaced.
11.3.7 In deciding on the routing of the down conductor, its accessibility for inspection, testing
and maintenance should be taken into account.
11.4 Joints and Bonds
11.4.1 Joints
The lightning protective system shall have as few joints in it as necessary. In the down
conductors below ground level these shall be mechanically and electrically effective and shall
be so made as to exclude moisture completely. The joints may be clamped, screwed, bolted,
crimped, riverted or welded. With overlapping joints the length of the overlap should not be
less than 20 mm for all types of conductors. Contact surfaces should first be cleaned and then
inhibited from oxidation with a suitable non-corrosive compound. Joints of dissimilar metal
should be suitably protected against bimetallic action and corrosion.
a) In general, joints for strips shall be tinned, soldered, welded or brazed and at least
double-riveted, welded or brazed and at least double-riveted. Clamped or bolted joints shall
only be used on test points or on bonds to existing metal, but joints shall only be of the clamped
or screwed type.
11.4.2 Bonds
External metal on or forming part of a structure may have to discharge the full lightning current.
Therefore, the bond to the lightning protective system shall have a cross-sectional area not less
than that employed for the main conductors. On the other hand, internal metal is not so
vulnerable and its associated bonds are, at most, only likely to carry a portion of the total
lightning current, apart from their function of equalizing potential. These latter bonds may,
therefore, be smaller in cross-sectional area than those used for the main conductors. All the
bonds should be suitably protected against corrosion. Bonds shall be as short as possible.
11.5 Testing Points
Each down conductor shall be provided with a testing point in a position convenient for testing
but inaccessible for interference. No connection, other than one direct to an earth electrode,
shall be made below a testing point. Testing points shall be phosphor bronze, gunmetal, copper
or any other suitable material.
11.6 Earth Terminations
Each down conductor shall have an independent earth termination. It should be capable of
isolation for testing purposes. Suitable location for the earth termination shall be selected after
testing and assessing the specific resistivity of the soil and with due regard to reliability of the
sub-soil water to ensure minimum soil moistness.
11.6.1 Water pipe system should not be bonded to the earth termination system. However, if
adequate clearance between the two cannot be obtained, they may be effective bonded and the
bonds should be capable of isolation and testing. The gas pipes, however, should in no case be
bonded to the earth termination system.
11.6.2 It is recommended that all earth terminations should be interconnected. Common
earthing, besides equalizing the voltage at various earth terminations also minimizes any risk
to it of mechanical damage. The condition for limiting earthing resistance given in 11 does not
apply and in such a case no provision need be made for isolation in earth.
11.6.3 A structure standing on bare rock should be equipped with a conductor encircling and
fixed to the structure at ground level and following reasonably closely the contour of the
ground. This conductor should be installed so as to minimize any risk to it of mechanical
damage. The condition for limiting earthing resistance given in 11 does not apply and in such
a case no provision need be made for isolation in earth termination for testing. Where there is
a risk to persons or to valuable equipment, expert advice should be sought.
11.7 Earth Electrodes
Earth electrodes shall be constructed and installed in accordance with 5.4.2 of IS/IEC 62305-
3
11.7.1 Earth electrodes shall consist of rods, strips or plates. Metal sheaths of cables shall not
be used as earth electrodes.
11.7.2 When rods or pipes are used they should be driven into the ground as close as
practicable but outside the circumference of the structure. Long lengths in sections coupled by
screwed connectors or socket joints can be built up where necessary to penetrate the substrate
of low resistivity.
11.7.3 When strips are used, these should be buried in trenches or beneath the structure at a
suitable depth, but not less than 0.5 m deep to avoid damage by building or agricultural
operations. The strips should preferably be laid radially in two or more directions from the
 point of connection to a down conductor. But if this is not possible they may extend in one
direction only. However, if the space restriction requires the strips to be laid in parallel or in
grid formation the distance between two strips should not be less than 2 m.
11.7.4 When plate electrodes are used they shall be buried into the ground so that the top edge
of the plate is at a depth not less than 1.5 m from the surface of the ground. If two plate
electrodes are to be used in parallel the distance between the two shall not be less than 8 m.
11.7.5 In the neighborhood of structure where high temperatures are likely to be the
encountered in the sub-soil, for example brick kilns, the earth electrodes may have to be
installed at such a distance from the structure where the ground is not likely to be dried out.
11.8 Fasteners
Conductors shall be securely attached to the building or other object to be protected by
fasteners which shall be substantial in construction, not subject to breakage, and shall be made
of galvanized steel or other suitable material. If fasteners are made of steel, they should be
galvanized to protect them against corrosion. If they are made of any other material suitable
precautions should be taken to avoid corrosion.
11.9 Earth Resistance
Each earth termination should have a resistance in ohms to earth not exceeding numerically
the product of 10 and the number of earth terminations to be provided. The whole of the
lightning protective system should have a combined resistance to earth not exceeding 10 ohms
before any bonding has been effected to metal in or on the structure or to surface below ground.
12 ISOLATION AND BONDING
When a lightning protective system is struck with a lightning discharge, its electrical potential
with respect to earth is raised, and unless suitable precautions are taken, the discharge may seek
alternative paths to earth by side flashing to other metal in the structure. Side flashing may be
avoided by the following two methods:
a) Isolation, and
b) Bonding.
12.1 Isolation
Isolation requires large clearances between the lightning protective system and other metal
parts in the structure. The approximate clearance i.e separation distance shall be as per 6.3 of
IS/IEC 62305-3.
12.2 Bonding
In structures which contain electrically continuous metal, for example, a roof, wall, floor or
covering, this metal, suitably bonded, may be used as part of the lightning protective system,
provided the amount and arrangement of the metal render it suitable for use in accordance with
11.
12.2.1 If a structure is simply a continuous metal frame without external coverings it may not
require any air termination or down conductors provided:
 a) The electrical continuity between various parts is made durable via brazing, welding,
crimping, seaming, screwing or bolting
b) The thickness of the metal sheet is not less than the value given in Table11.
c) It does not consist of any cladding with insulating material.
Table 11 Minimum Thickness of Metal Sheets or Metal Pipes in Air-termination
Systems
[Clause 12.2.1 a)]

Sl no. Thickness a Thickness b

Class of LPS Material
t t
mm mm
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
i) Lead – 2.0
ii) Steel 4 0.5
(stainless,
galvanized)
iii) I to IV Titanium 4 0.5
iv) Copper 5 0.5
v) Aluminium 7 0.65
vi) Zinc – 0.7
Key:
a
t prevents puncture.
b
t‘ only for metal sheets if it is not important to prevent puncture, hot spot or ignition problems.

12.2.2 Steel reinforcement in steel reinforced concrete structures confirming to 4.3 of IS/IEC
62305-3 may be used as a natural component of LPS. Such natural components must fulfill
requirements of:
a) Down conductors according to 5.3 of IS/IEC 62305-3; and
b) Earth termination networks according to 5.4 of IS/IEC 62305-3.
12.2.3 Where metal exists in a structure as reinforcement which cannot be bonded into a
continuous conducting network, and which is not or cannot be equipped with external earthing
connections, its presence should be discarded. The danger inseparable from the presence of
such metal can be minimized by keeping it entirely isolated from the lightning protective
system.
12.2.4 Where the roof structure is wholly or partly covered by metal, care should be taken that
such metal is provided with a continuous conducting path to earth.
12.2.5 In any structure, metal which is attached to the outer surface or projects through a wall
or a roof and has insufficient clearance from the lightning protective system, and is unsuitable
for use as part of it, should preferably be bonded as directly as possible to the lightning
protectives system. If the metal has considerable length (for example, cables, pipes, gutters,
rain-water pipes, stair-ways, etc) and runs approximately parallel to a down conductor or bond,
it should be bonded at each and but not below the test point. If the metal is in discontinuous
lengths, each portion should be bonded to the lightning protective system; alternatively, where
the clearance permits, the presence of the metal may be disregarded.
12.2.6 Bonding of metal entering or leaving a structure in the form of sheathing or armouring
of cable, electric conduit, telephone, steam, compressed air or other services with earth
termination system, should be avoided. However, if they are required to be bonded, the bonding
should be done as directly as possible to the earth termination at the point of entry or exist
outside the structure on the supply side of the service. The gap pipes should in no case be
bonded with other metal parts. However, water pipes may be bonded to other metal parts, if
isolation and adequate clearance cannot be obtained. In this operation all the statutory rules or
regulations which may be in force should be followed and the competent authority should be
consulted for providing lightning protection in such cases.
12.2.7 Masses of metal in a building, such as bell-frame in a tower, should be bonded to the
nearest down conductor by the most direct route available.
12.2.8 Metal cladding or curtain walling having a continuous conducting path in all directions
may be used as part of a lightning protective system.
12.2.9 In bonding adjacent metalwork to the lightning protective system careful consideration
should be given to the possible effects such bonding would have upon metalwork which may
be cathodically protected.
13 PROTECTION OF SPECIAL STRUCTURES
For guidance on design of lightning protection systems for special structures, reference shall
be made to IS/IEC 62305 series. Guidance for the appropriate authorities shall also be obtained.
14 INSPECTION AND TESTING
14.1 Inspection
All lightning protective systems shall be examined by a competent engineer after completion,
alteration or extensions, in order to verify that they are in accordance with the
recommendations of the Code. A routine inspection shall be made at least once a year.
14.2 Testing
14.2.1 On completion of the installation or of any modification, the resistance of each earth
termination or section thereof, shall, if possible, be measured and the continuity of all
conductors and the efficiency of all bonds and joints shall be verified.
14.2.2 Normally annual measurement of earth resistance shall be carried out but local
circumstances in the light of experience may justify increase or decrease in this interval but it
should not be less than once in two years. In the case of structures housing explosives or
flammable materials, the interval shall be six months.
14.2.3 Earth resistance shall be measured in accordance with Part 1/Section 13 of the Code.
14.2.4 The actual procedure adopted for the test shall be recorded in detail so that future tests
may be carried out under similar conditions. The highest value of resistance measured shall be
noted as the resistance of the soil and details of salting or other soil treatment, should be
recorded.
14.2.5 The record shall also contain particulars of the engineer, contractor or owner
responsible for the installation or upkeep or both of the lightning protective system. Details of
additions or alterations to the system, and dates of testing together with the test results and
reports, shall be carefully recorded.
14.3 Deterioration
If the resistance to earth of a lightning protective system or any section of it exceeds the lowest
value obtained at the first installation by more than 100 percent, appropriate steps shall be taken
to ascertain the causes and to remedy defects, if any.
14.4 Testing Continuity and Efficacy of Conductors and Joints
14.4.1 The ohmic resistance of the lightning protective system complete with air termination,
but without the earth connection should be measured and this should be a fraction of an ohm.
If it exceeds 1 ohm, then there shall be some fault either electrical or mechanical, which shall
be inspected and the defect rectified.
14.4.2 For this system is best divided into convenient sections at testing points by suitable
joints. A continuous current of about 10 A shall be passed through the portion of the system
under test and the resistance verified against its calculated or recorded value. Suitable portable
precision testing sets for this purpose should be used.

ANNEX A
Average Number of Thunderstorm Days

For the purpose of risk assessment, annual thunderstorm days in various places are provided in
the table below read with Fig. A-1.
 FIG. A-1 MAP OF INDIA SHOWING PLACES FOR AVERAGE NUMBER OF
THUNDERSTORM DAYS IN A YEAR
Sl Name of Place Annual Sl Name of Place Annual Sl Name of Place Annual
No. Thunder- No. Thunder- No. Thunder-
storm storm Days storm
Days Days
1 Gilgit 7 62 Sabour 76 123 Akola 20
2 Skardu 5 63 Dumka 63 124 Amraoti 32
3 Gulmarg 53 64 Darjeeling 28 125 Nagpur 45
4 Srinagar 54 65 Jalpaiguri 68 126 Gondia 10
5 Dras 3 66 Malda 59 127 Aurangabad 34
6 Kargil 2 67 Asansol 71 128 Mumbai 16
7 Leh 3 68 Burdwan 39 129 Alibag 12
8 Jammu 26 69 Kharagpur 76 130 Ahmadnagar 10
9 Dharmsala 13 70 Kolkata 70 131 Parbhani 32
10 Amritsar 49 71 Sagar Island 41 132 Pune 22
11 Pathankot 4 72 Dhubri 8 133 Mahabaleshwar 14
12 Mandi 46 73 Tezpur 27 134 Ratnagiri 6
13 Ludhiana 12 74 Dibrugarh 98 135 Sholapur 23
14 Simla 40 75 Sibsagar 103 136 Miraj 25
15 Patiala 26 76 Shillong 75 137 Vengurla 39
16 Ambala 9 77 Cherrapunji 49 138 Nizambad 36
17 Hissar 27 78 Silchar 33 139 Hnamkonda 43
18 Delhi 30 79 Kohima 34 140 Hyderabad 28
19 Bikaner 10 80 Imphal 49 141 Khammam 26
20 Phalodi 14 81 Deesa 7 142 Kalingapatam 20
21 Sikar 17 82 Dwarka 5 143 Vishakapatnam 46
22 Barmer 12 83 Jamnagar 8 144 Rentichintala 42
23 Jodhpur 23 84 Rajkot 12 145 Masulipatam 20
24 Ajmer 26 85 Ahmedabad 11 146 Ongole 25
25 Jaipur 39 86 Dohad 17 147 Kurnool 29
26 Kankroli 36 87 Porbandar 3 148 Anantpur 22
27 Mount Abu 5 88 Veraval 3 149 Nellore 18
28 Udaipur 38 89 Bhavnagar 11 150 Bidar 15
29 Neemuch 28 90 Vadodara 8 151 Gulbarga 34
30 Kota 27 91 Surat 4 152 Bijapur 9
31 Jhalawar 40 92 Gwalior 53 153 Belgaum 31
32 Mussorie 61 93 Guna 33 154 Raichur 17
33 Roorkee 74 94 Nowgong 59 155 Gadag 21
34 Najibabad 36 95 Satna 41 156 Bellary 22
35 Mukteswar 53 96 Sagar 36 157 Karwar 27
36 Meerut ‒ 97 Bhopal 44 158 Honavar 5
37 Bareilly 34 98 Jabalpur 50 159 Chikalthana 24
38 Aligarh 30 99 Umaria 37 160 Mangaluru 36
39 Agra 24 100 Ambikapur 29 161 Hassan 26
40 Mainpuri 23 101 Indore 34 162 Bengaluru 46
41 Bahraich 31 102 Hoshangabad 37 163 Mysuru 44
42 Gonda 22 103 Panchmarhi 30 164 Kozhikode 39
43 Lucknow 18 104 Seoni 51 165 Palghat 35
44 Kanpur 26 105 Pendadah 56 166 Kochi 69
45 Fatehpur 24 106 Raipur 34 167 Alleppey 51
46 Jhansi 20 107 Chhindwara 27 168 Thiruvananthapuram 68
47 Allahabad 51 108 Kanker 37 169 Vellore 25
48 Varanasi 51 109 Jagdalpur 35 170 Chennai 47
49 Azamgarh 1 110 Balasore 81 171 Udhagamandalam 24
50 Gorakhpur 11 111 Chandbali 75 172 Salem 69
51 Katmandu 74 112 Angul 81 173 Cuddalore 37
52 Motihari 38 113 Bhubaneswar 46 175 Trichchirapalli 41
53 Darbhanga 10 114 Puri 33 176 Nagappattinam 15
54 Patna 33 115 Gopalpur 34 177 Kodaikanal 82
55 Gaya 38 116 Jharsuguda 85 178 Madurai 39
56 Daltonganj 73 117 Sambalpur 67 179 Pamban 5
57 Hazaribagh 73 118 Titlagarh 24 180 Tuticorin 14
58 Ranchi 34 119 Rajgangpur 1 181 Cape Comorin 68
59 Chaibasa 70 120 Dahanu 1 182 Port Blair 62
60 Jamshedpur 66 121 Nasik 17 183 Car Nicobar 1 18
61 Purnea 52 122 Malegaon 13 184 Minicoy 1 20
 Part 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS

SECTION 20.1 POWER QUALITY IMPROVEMENT — PF CORRECTION AND

HARMONICS

FOREWORD
The various advantages of maintaining a high power factor of a system reflects on the national economy
of a country. The available resources are utilized to its fullest possible extent. More useful power is
available for transmission and utilization without any extra cost. Moreover, the life of individual
apparatus is considerably increased and the energy losses reduced.
Guidance to the consumers of electrical energy who take supply of low and medium voltage for
improvement of power factor at the installation in their premises is provided in this Section. The
guidelines provided are basically intended for installation operating at voltages below 650 V. For higher
voltage installations, additional or more specific rules apply.
Assistance has been derived from IS 7752 (Part 1) : 1975 ‘Guide for the improvement of power factor
in consumer installations: Part 1 Low and medium supply voltages’.

1 SCOPE
1.1 This Part 1/Section 20.1 of the Code covers causes for low power factor and guidelines for use of
capacitors to improve the same in consumer installations.
1.2 Specific guidelines, if any, for individual installation on improvement of power factor are covered
in the respective sections of the Code.

2 REFERENCE
The standards listed in below contain provisions, which through reference in this text, constitute
provisions of this standard. At the time of publication, the editions indicated were valid. All standards
are subject to revision, and parties to agreements based on this standard are encouraged to investigate
the possibility of applying the most recent editions of the standards.

IS No./Other Title
Publication
7752 (Part 1) : 1975 Guide for the improvement of power factor in consumer installations: Part 1
Low and medium supply voltages
16636 : 2017 Automatic power factor correction (APFC) panels for voltage rating up to
and including 1 000 V
IEEE 519-2014 IEEE Recommended Practice and Requirements for Harmonic Control in
Electric Power Systems
3 GENERAL
3.1 Conditions of supply of electricity boards or licensees stipulate the lower limit of power factor
which is generally 0.85 and consumer is obliged to improve and maintain the power factor of his
installation to conform to these conditions.
3.1.1 When the tariffs of Electricity Boards and the licensees are based on kVA demand or kW demand
with suitable penalty rebate for low high power factor, improvement in the power factor would effect
savings in the energy bills.

3.2 Power factor is dependent largely on consumers’ apparatus and partly on system components, such
as transformers, cables, transmission lines, etc. System components have fixed parameters of
inductance, capacitance and resistance. The choice of these components to bring up the power factor
depends on economics.
3.3 In case of ac supply, the total current taken by almost every item of electrical equipment, except
that of incandescent lighting and most forms of resistance heating, is made up of two parts, namely:
a) in-phase component of the current (active or useful current) which is utilized for doing work
or producing heat; and
b) quadrature component of the current (also called ‘idle’ or ‘reactive’ current) and used for
creating magnetic field in the machinery or apparatus. This component is not convertible into
useful output.

4 POWER FACTOR
The majority of ac electrical machines and equipment draw from the supply an apparent power (kVA)
which exceeds the required useful power (kW). This is due to the reactive power (kVAR) necessary for
alternating magnetic field. The ratio of useful power (kW) to apparent power (kVA) is termed the power
factor of the load. The reactive power is indispensable and constitutes an additional demand on the
system.

The power factor indicates the portion of the current in the system performing useful work. A power
factor of unity (100 percent) denotes 100 percent utilization of the total current for useful work whereas
a power factor of 0.70 shows that only 70 percent of the current is performing useful work.
4.1 Principle Causes of Lower Power Factor
The following electrical equipment and apparatus have a lower power factor:
a) Induction motors of all types particularly when they are underloaded,
b) Power transformers and voltage regulators,
c) Arc welders,
d) Induction furnaces and heating coils,
e) Choke coils and magnetic systems, and
f) Fluorescent and discharge lamps, neon signs, etc.
The principal cause of a low power factor is due to the reactive power flowing in the circuit. The
reactive power depends on the inductance and capacitance of the apparatus.

4.2 Effect of Power Factor to Consumer

4.2.1 The disadvantages of low power factor are as follows:
a) Overloading of cables and transformer,
b) Decreased line voltage at point of application,
c) Inefficient operation of plant, and
d) Penal power rates.
4.2.2 The advantages of high power factor are as follows:
a) Reduction in the current;
b) Reduction in power cost;
c) Reduced losses in the transformers and cables;
d) Lower loading of transformers, switchgears, cables, etc;
e) Increased capability of the ‘power system’ (additional load can be met without
additional equipment);
f) Improvement in voltage conditions and apparatus performance; and
g) Reduction in voltage dips caused by welding and similar equipment.

4.3 Economics of Power Factor Improvement

Static capacitors, also called static condensers, when installed at or near the point of consumption,
provide necessary capacitive reactive power, relieve distribution system before the point of its
installation from carrying the inductive reactive power to that extent.
The use of the static capacitors is an economical way of improving power factor on account of their
comparatively low cost, ease of installation loss maintenance, low losses and the advantage of extension
by addition of requisite units to meet the load growth. Installation of capacitors also improve the voltage
regulation and reduces amperes loading and energy losses in the supply apparatus and lines.
When considering the economics connected with power factor correction, it is most important to
remember that any power factor improving equipment will, in general, compensate for losses and lower
the loadings on supply equipment, that is, cables, transformers, switchgear, generating plant, etc.
The minimum permissible power factor prescribed in the conditions of supply of Electricity Boards or
Licensees and the reduction in charges offered in supply tariffs for further improvement of power factor
shall, along with other considerations such as reduction of losses, etc, determine the kVAR capacity of
the capacitors to be installed.

4.4 In case of two port tariff with kVA demand charged, the value of economic improved power factor
(cos φ2) may be obtained as follows:
Let the tariff be Rs. A per kVA of maximum demand per annum plus Rs. P per kWh.
cos φ1 is the initial power factor,
cos φ2 is the improved power factor after installing the capacitors
The economic power factor cos φ2 is obtained from the expression

cos φ = 1 − B2

A2
Where
 B = total cost per kVAR per year of capacitor installation inclusive of interest, depreciation and
maintenance.
NOTE — The explanation for the derivation of the formula for economic power factor cos f2 is given in Appendix A of IS 7752
(Part 1).

5 USE OF CAPACITORS
In order to improve the power factor, the consumer shall install capacitors where the natural power
factor of this installation is low.
The average values of the power factor for different types of 3 phase electrical installations as measured
by one of major utilities in the country are given in respective Sections of the Code.
Capacitors for power factor improvement may be arranged as described in IS 7752 (Part 1). The
successful operation of power factor improvement depends very largely on the positioning of the
capacitor on the system. Ideal conditions are achieved when the highest power factor is maintained
under all load conditions.

5.1 Individual Compensation

Wherever possible the capacitor should be connected directly across the terminals of the low power
factor appliance or equipment. This ensures the control to be automatic through the same switching
devices of the apparatus of appliance.

5.2 Group Compensation

In industries where a large number of small motors or other appliances and machines are installed and
whose operation is periodical it is economical to dispense with individual installation of capacitors. A
bank of capacitors may be installed to connect them to the distribution centre of main bus-bars of the
group of machines.

5.3 Central Compensation

Capacitors may also be installed at a central point, that is, at the incoming supply or service position.
In order to overcome problems of drawing leading currents on light loads, these capacitors may be
operated manually or automatically as required. The automatic control is preferred as it eliminates
human errors. Automatic operation may be arranged by means of suitable relays in which a contractor
controls the capacitors bank and maintains the correct amount of kVAR in the circuit.

Capacitors shall not be connected directly across motor terminals if solid state starters/soft starters are
used.
Capacitors shall not be connected directly to motor terminals if variable speed drive is adopted.
Capacitors connected to same bus-bars discharge. instantaneously to uncharged capacitors, at the time
of switching on, with high in-rush current. This shall be taken care of while providing central
compensation with automatic power factor correction relay.
Harmonics may reduce life of capacitors.
Switching/controlling devices for capacitors shall have required capacitor switching duty.
5.4 Combined Compensation
Capacitors may be connected directly across the terminals of higher capacity inductive appliances or
equipments, in addition to the capacitors with automatic power factor correction relay for central
Compensation connected at the incoming supply or service position
5.5 The methods of connecting power factor capacitors to supply line and motors are given in Fig. 1
and Fig. 2.

FIG. 1 METHODS OF CONNECTING CAPACITORS TO MOTORS FOR IMPROVEMENT OF

POWER FACTOR

FIG. 2 METHODS OF CONNECTING CAPACITORS TO SUPPLY LINE FOR IMPROVEMENT

OF POWER FACTOR
 6 SELECTION AND INSTALLATION OF CAPACITORS
Capacitor current shall not exceed magnetization current of the motor when directly connected across
motor terminals. Chances of resonating shall be considered. Energy loss/power consumption of
capacitors shall be taken care of. Capacitor banks shall be properly ventilated. Chances of over voltage
shall be looked into.
Resistors shall be provided across capacitor terminals for discharging.

7 POWER FACTOR IMPROVEMENT AND CAPACITOR RATING

For calculating the size of the capacitor for power factor improvement, reference should be made to
Table 1.

Table 1 Capacitor sizes for power factor improvement

(Clause 7)
Sl Existing Improved power factor
no. power 0.80 0.85 0.90 0.91 0.92 0.93 0.94 0.95 0.96 0.97 0.98 0.99 1.00
factor (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15)
(1) (2)
Multiplying factors
i) 0.40 1.537 1.688 1.805 1.832 1.861 1.895 1.924 1.959 1.998 2.037 2.085 2.146 2.288
ii) 0.41 1.474 1.605 1.742 1.769 1.798 1.831 1.860 1.896 1.935 1.973 2.021 2.082 2.225
iii) 0.42 1.413 1.544 1.681 1.709 1.738 1.771 1.800 1.836 1.874 1.913 1.961 2.022 2.164
iv) 0.43 1.356 1.487 1.624 1.651 1.680 1.713 1.742 1.778 1.816 1.855 1.903 1.964 2.107
v) 0.44 1.290 1.421 1.558 1.585 1.614 1.647 1.677 1.712 1.751 1.790 1.837 1.899 2.041
vi) 0.45 1.230 1.360 1.501 1.532 1.561 1.592 1.626 1.659 1.695 1.737 1.784 1.846 1.988
vii) 0.46 1.179 1.309 1.446 1.473 1.502 1.533 1.567 1.600 1.636 1.677 1.725 1.786 1.929
viii) 0.47 1.130 1.260 1.397 1.425 1.454 1.485 1.519 1.552 1.588 1.629 1.667 1.758 1.881
ix) 0.48 1.076 1.206 1.343 1.370 1.400 1.430 1.464 1.497 1.534 1.575 1.623 1.684 1.826
x) 0.49 1.030 1.160 1.297 1.326 1.355 1.386 1.420 1.453 1.489 1.530 1.578 1.639 1.782
xi) 0.50 0.982 1.112 1.248 .276 1.303 1.337 1.369 1.403 1.441 1.481 1.529 1.590 1.732
xii) 0.51 0.936 1.066 1.202 1.230 1.257 1.291 1.323 1.357 1.395 1.435 1.483 1.544 1.686
xiii) 0.52 0.894 1.024 1.160 1.188 1.215 1.149 1.281 1.315 1.353 1.393 1.441 1.502 1.644
xiv) 0.53 0.850 0.980 1.116 1.144 1.171 1.205 1.237 1.271 1.309 1.349 1.379 1.458 1.600
xv) 0.54 0.809 0.939 1.075 1.103 1.130 1.164 1.196 1.230 1.268 1.308 1.356 1.417 1.559
xvi) 0.55 0.769 0.899 1.035 1.063 1.090 1.124 1.136 1.190 1.228 1.268 1.316 1.377 1.519
xvii) 0.56 0.730 0.860 0.996 1.024 1.051 1.085 1.117 1.151 1.189 1.229 1.277 1.338 1.480
xviii) 0.57 0.692 0.822 0.958 0.986 0.1013 1.047 1.079 1.113 1.151 1.191 1.239 1.300 1.442
xix) 0.58 0.655 0.785 0.921 0.949 0.976 1.010 1.042 1.076 1.114 1.154 1.202 1.263 1.405
xx) 0.59 0.618 0.748 0.884 0.912 0.939 0.973 1.005 1.039 1.077 1.117 1.165 1.226 1.368
xxi) 0.60 0.584 0.714 0.849 0.878 0.905 0.939 0.971 1.005 1.043 1.083 1.131 1.192 1.334
xxii) 0.61 0.549 0.679 0.815 0.843 0.870 0.904 0.936 0.970 1.008 1.048 1.096 1.157 1.299

7.1 Automatic Power Factor Correction panels (APFC)

APFC panels are used for automatic power factor correction. These panels have a power factor
controller which takes input from a single or multiple current transformer installed on the mains. Based
on the requirement, it switches ON/OFF the capacitor bank to maintain the power factor as per the set
limit on the controller. Depending on the nature of loads one can choose the switching device for the
capacitor bank. Contactors can be used for slow varying loads whereas Thyristor switching is
recommended for fast varying loads or loads sensitive to transient surges.

Another point a user should consider when installing capacitor bank in the system is presence of
harmonic in electrical system. Harmonics have existed from the earliest days of the industry and were
(and still are) caused by the non-linear magnetizing impedances of transformers, reactors, fluorescent
lamp ballasts, etc. In addition, power electronic devices have become abundant today because of their
capabilities for precise process control and energy savings benefits. However, they also bring
drawbacks to electrical distribution systems: harmonics.
Harmonic currents caused by nonlinear loads connected to the distribution system are flowing through
the system impedances, and in turn distorts the supply voltage. Such loads are increasingly more
abundant in all industrial, commercial, and residential installations and their percentage of the total load
is growing steadily (see Fig. 3).
Capacitors are especially sensitive to harmonic components of the supply voltage due to the fact that
capacitive reactance decreases as the frequency increases. In practice, this means that a relatively small
percentage of harmonic voltage can cause a significant current to flow in the capacitor circuit (see Fig.
4).

Commented [u1]: Figure may be redrawn as Uh, Ih and Vh are not

clearly visible in the figure.

FIG. 3 HARMONIC CURRENT FLOW

Commented [u2]: Figure may be redrawn as Uh, Ih and Vh are not

clearly visible in the figure.

FIG. 4 HARMONIC CURRENT FLOW IN CAPACITOR

The connection of PFC capacitors (without reactors) results in the amplification of harmonic currents
at the busbar level, and an increase of the voltage distortion. Capacitors are linear reactive devices, and
consequently do not generate harmonics. The installation of capacitors in a power system (in which the
impedances are predominantly inductive) can, however, result in total or partial resonance occurring at
one of the harmonic frequencies. Because of harmonics, the current IC circulating through the PFC
capacitors is higher compared to the situation where only the fundamental current I1 is present. If the
natural frequency of the capacitor bank/ power-system reactance combination is close to a particular
harmonic, then partial resonance will occur, with amplified values of voltage and current at the
harmonic frequency concerned. In this particular case, the elevated current will cause overheating of
the capacitor, with degradation of the dielectric, which may result in its eventual failure.
The order h0 of the natural resonant frequency between the system inductance and the capacitor bank is
given by:
ℎ0 = √(𝑆𝑠𝑐/𝑄)
Where,
SSC = the level of system short-circuit power (kVA) at the point of connection of the capacitor;
Q = capacitor bank rating in kvar; and
h0 = the order of the natural frequency f0, that is, f0/50 for a 50 Hz system, or f0/60 for a 60 Hz system.

Possible solution is to use capacitors (heavy duty) with increased current rating if percentage of non-
linear load is less than 20 percent (NLL≤ 20 percent). In order to attenuate the effects of harmonics
(significant increase of capacitor current as well as high current and voltage distortion), reactors should
be associated to capacitors. Reactors and capacitors are configured in a series resonant circuit (see Fig.
5), tuned so that the series resonant frequency is below the lowest harmonic frequency present in the
system. The use of detuned reactors thus prevents harmonic resonance problems, avoids the risk of
overloading the capacitors and helps reduce voltage harmonic distortion in the network.

Commented [u3]: Figure may be redrawn as Uh, Ih and Vh are not

clearly visible in the figure.

FIG. 5 CAPACITOR WITH DETUNED REACTOR

The tuning frequency can be expressed by the relative impedance of the reactor (in percent, relative to
the capacitor impedance), or by the tuning order, or directly in Hz. The most common values of relative
impedance are 5.7, 7 and 14 percent (14 percent is used with high level of 3rd harmonic voltages) (see
Table 2).

Table 2 Correspondence Between Relative Impedance, Tuning Order and Tuning Frequency
(Clause 7.1)

Sl no. Relative Tuning Tuning Tuning

Impedance order frequency frequency
(percent) @50Hz (Hz) @60Hz (Hz)

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

i) 5.7 4.2 210 250
ii) 7 3.8 190 230
iii) 14 2.7 135 150

A significant indicator of harmonic importance is the percentage of non-linear loads NLL, calculated
by the formula:
𝑃𝑜𝑤𝑒𝑟 𝑜𝑓 𝑛𝑜𝑛 − 𝑙𝑖𝑛𝑒𝑎𝑟 𝑙𝑜𝑎𝑑𝑠
𝑁𝐿𝐿( =
𝑝𝑒𝑟𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡) 𝑃𝑜𝑤𝑒𝑟 𝑜𝑓 𝑠𝑢𝑝𝑝𝑙𝑦 𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑛𝑠𝑓𝑜𝑟𝑚𝑒𝑟
While choosing capacitors with detuned reactor care to be taken to use higher rated voltage for
capacitors than the network voltage as shown in the Table 3.

Table 3 Typical Values of Capacitor Rated Voltage

(Clause 7.1)
Sl Capacitor Rated Voltage Un(V) Network Service Voltage Us (V)
no. 50HZ 60HZ
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)

400 690 400 480 600

i) Relative Impedance 5.7 480 830 480 575 690

(percent)
7
ii)
14 480 480

IS 16636 is the Indian Standard for automatic power factor correction panels for voltage rating upto and
including 1 000 V. This standard defines the tests for APFC panels. A completely type tested APFC
panel designed according to this standard shall guarantee reliable product for the end user.

7.2 Effects of Harmonics

a) Affect operation of sensitive equipment like control and monitoring devices.

b) Distortion of telephone signals
c) Harmonics cause additional losses (Joule effect) in conductors and equipment
d) Derating of power sources (generators, transformers and UPSs) means they must
be oversized.
e) Oversizing of Conductors on account of the flow of harmonic currents due to skin effect.
f) Reduced service life of equipment.
g) Nuisance tripping of breakers and installation shutdown

There are multiple ways to reduce the effect of harmonics like using separate source for non-linear
loads, use of reactors, use of transformers with special connections, active harmonic filters (AHF).
Among this active harmonic filter offers a flexible, scalable solution for harmonic mitigation. AHF
sense the current by means of CTs mounted on the mains/load. It calculates the harmonic current
requirement of the load and produce a harmonic current which will be in phase opposition. This way it
will reduce the harmonic current drawn from the utility.

7.3 Harmonic Control Guidelines

IEEE 519 is a guide for recommended practice and requirement of harmonic control in electrical power
systems.
This standard defines the limits of voltage and current harmonics.
The limits in this recommended practice are intended for application at a point of common coupling
(PCC) between the system owner or operator and a user, where the PCC is usually taken as the point in
the power system closest to the user where the system owner or operator could offer service to another
user. Frequently for service to industrial users (that is, manufacturing plants) via a dedicated service
transformer, the PCC is at the HV side of the transformer. For commercial users (office parks, shopping
malls, etc.) supplied through a common service transformer, the PCC is commonly at the LV side of
the service transformer.

It’s a shared responsibility of utility and users to maintain the harmonic control. Utility has to maintain
Voltage distortion to minimum by adjusting the supply system impedance & users to limit harmonic
current to reasonable limits by taking suitable actions.

Harmonic measurements are classified into Short time harmonic measurement (Fsh) and Very short time
harmonic measurement (Fvs), where F represents Voltage or Current rms value.

7.3.1 Very Short Time Harmonic Measurement

Very short time harmonic values are assessed over a 3s interval based on an aggregation of 15
consecutive 12 (10) cycle windows for 60 (50) Hz power systems. Individual frequency components
are aggregated based on an rms calculation.

15
2
1 2
𝐹𝑛,𝑣𝑠 = √ ∑ 𝐹𝑛,𝑖
15
𝑖=1

Where, F represents voltage (V) or current(I), n represents the harmonic order, and i is a simple counter.
The subscript vs is used to denote “very short.”

7.3.2 Short Term Harmonic Measurements

Short time harmonic values are assessed over a 10 min interval based on an aggregation of 200
consecutive very short time values for a specific frequency component. The 200 values are aggregated
based on an rms calculation as shown in Equation (2) where F represents voltage (V) or current (I), n
represents the harmonic order, and i is a simple counter. The subscript sh is used to denote “short.” In
all cases, F represents an rms value.

200
2
1 2
𝐹𝑛,𝑠ℎ = √ ∑ 𝐹(𝑛,𝑠ℎ),𝑖
200
𝑖=1

Very short and short time harmonic values should be accumulated over periods of one day and one
week, respectively. For very short time harmonic measurements, the 99 th percentile value (that is, the
value that is exceeded for 1 percent of the measurement period) should be calculated for each 24 h
period for comparison with the recommend limits. For short time harmonic measurements, the 95 th and
99th percentile values (that is, those values that are exceeded for 5 percent and 1 percent of the
measurement period) should be calculated for each 7 day period for comparison with the recommended
limits in 7.3.2.1. These statistics should be used for both voltage and current harmonics with the
exception that the 99th percentile short time value is not recommended for use with voltage harmonics.

7.3.2.1 Recommended Harmonic Voltage Limits :

At the PCC, system owners or operators should limit line-to-neutral voltage harmonics as follows:
a) Daily 99th percentile very short time (3 s) values should be less than 1.5 times the values given
in Table 4.
b) Weekly 95th percentile short time (10 min) values should be less than the values given in
Table 4.
 Table 4 Voltage Distortion Limits
[Clause 7.3.2.1 a) and b)]
Sl no. Bus voltage V at PCC Individual Total harmonic
Harmonic (percent) Distortion THD
(1) (2) (percent)
(3)
(4)
i) V ≤ 1.0 kV 5.0 8.0
ii) 1 kV < V ≤ 69 kV 3.0 5.0
iii) 69 kV < V ≤ 161 kV 1.5 2.5
iv) 161 kV < V 1.0 1.5ᵃ
NOTE — a = High voltage systems can have up to 2.0 percent THD where the cause is an HVDC terminal whose effect will have
attenuated at point in the network where future users may be connected.

7.3.2.2 Recommended current distortion limits for systems nominally rated 120 V through 69 kV.

The limits in this subclause apply to users connected to systems where the rated voltage at the PCC is
120 V to 69 kV. At the PCC, users should limit their harmonic currents as follows:
a) Daily 99th percentile very short time (3 s) harmonic currents should be less than 2.0 times the values
given in Table 5.
b) Weekly 99th percentile short time (10 min) harmonic currents should be less than 1.5 times the
values given in Table 5.
c) Weekly 95th percentile short time (10 min) harmonic currents should be less than the values given
in Table 5.

Table 5 Current Distortion Limits for Systems Rated 120 V through 69 kV

(Clause 7.3.2.2)
Sl Maximum harmonic current distortion (in percent of IL)
no.
Individual harmonic order (odd harmonics)ᵃ,ᵇ
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
i) Isc/IL 3 ≤ h <11 11 ≤ h <17 17 ≤ h <23 23 ≤ h <35 35 ≤ h <50 TDD
ii) <20c 4.0 2.0 1.5 0.6 0.3 5.0
iii)
iv) 20<50 7.0 3.5 2.5 1.0 0.5 8.0
v) 50<100 10.0 4.5 4.0 1.5 0.7 12.0
vi) 100<1000 12.0 5.5 5.0 2.0 1.0 15.0
vii) >1000 15.0 7.0 6.0 2.5 1.4 20.0
Key:
a
- Even harmonics are limited to 25 percent of the odd harmonic limits above.
b
- Current distortions that result in a d.c. offset; for example, half –wave converters are not allowed.
c
- All power generation equipment is limited to these values of current distortion, regardless of actual ISc/IL
where
Isc – maximum short –circuit current at PCC
IL – maximum demand load current fundamental frequency component) at the PCC under normal load operating condition
 SECTION 20.2 POWER QUALITY IMPROVEMENT — POWER QUALITY
NOTE — Refer 4.5 of IS 732

FOREWORD

Economic growth of any country is directly influenced by Availability of Power and quality of
Power. The demand for power is not limited to manufacturing sector but all the segments. Also,
we must not forget that it has become economic necessity to remain competitive in the market
as the cost of downtime due to Power quality issues affect the profitability of the business. We
had the traditional approach of somehow “Keep the lights on” for a long time and there is a
need to understand the availability of Power issue not in terms of only shedding of loads by
utility companies, but continuity of Power is affected by Unknow abnormal conditions.
India is becoming digital very fast and with the increasing use of power electronics, ratio of
non-linear loads to linear loads has increased multifold.
We experience lot of comfort in utilizing these loads but meanwhile it creates abnormality in
the network in terms of harmonics which we all are aware of. But is it the only issue that we
are worried about? The Global standards have started putting stringent specifications to address
this issue and we see that electronic equipment manufacturers including Server manufacturers
are conforming to these norms.
Although harmonic issue is largely known and addressed, still the crisis of continuity of power
remains and user is not aware of what is happening inside his facility. Hence, we must
understand that there are many other power quality issues which are not known, identified and
addressed.

1 SCOPE
This Indian Standard (Part 1/Sec 20.2) of the Code covers power quality improvement of power
quality.

2 REFERENCE
The standards listed in below contain provisions, which through reference in this text,
constitute provisions of this standard. At the time of publication, the editions indicated were
valid. All standards are subject to revision, and parties to agreements based on this standard
are encouraged to investigate the possibility of applying the most recent editions of the
standards.

IS No./Other Title
Publication
IS 14700/ IEC Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
61000 series
IEC 62586-2 : Power quality measurement in power supply systems — Part 2:
2017 Functional tests and uncertainty requirements
IEC 62586-2 : Power quality measurement in power supply systems: Part 2
2017 Functional tests and uncertainty requirements
IEEE 1159-2019 IEEE Recommended Practice for Monitoring Electric Power Quality
IEEE 519-2014 IEEE Recommended Practice and Requirements for Harmonic Control
in Electric Power Systems
 EN 50160-1999 Voltage Characteristics of Electricity Supplied by Public Distribution
Systems

3 GENERAL

3.1 Global Standards have evolved over period to provide the users to educate on power quality
and IS 14700/IEC 61000, IEEE 1159 and EN 50160 standards have given insights and methods
to mitigate the issues.

FIG. 1 ABNORMAL CONDITIONS AFFECTING POWER QAULITY

Now that we understand that various abnormal conditions (see Fig. 1) need to be detected and
studied, there is a need to measure these and we require not the traditional metering but the
meter which has the capability to measure the abnormal conditions based on measurement
standards.
The European CENELEC Standard EN 50160 defines allowable tolerance ranges for a number
of power characteristics. Compliance to these standards and any related contracts, can be
ensured using PQIs installed on both sides of the customer’s meter. Fig. 2 illustrates such an
installation.

FIG. 2 USE OF A PQI ON THE SUPPLY SIDE AND THE DEMAND SIDE

Table 1 illustrates what to monitor in PQ.

Table 2 gives Suggested logging for Harmonics (as per IEEE 519-2014)
Table 3 gives Recommended logging parameters
Table 4 gives Recommended alarms settings and threshold
 Table 1 Suggested Thresholds for Phase Voltages
(Clause 3.1)
IEEE 1159 suggested thresholds for phase voltages
Sl PQ Events Thresholds Remarks
no.
(2) (3) (4)
(1)
i) Sag 0.9 pu -10 percent of nominal supply voltage
ii) Swell 1.1 pu -10 percent of nominal supply voltage
iii) Transient 2 x Vphase Approx 2 x nominal phase-neutral
voltage
iv) Noise 1 percent x Approx 1 x nominal phase-neutral
Vphase voltage
v) Harmonics 5 percent THD Voltage distortion level at which loads
may be affected
vi) Frequency ± 0.1 Hz -
vii) Phase 2 percent -
imbalance

Table 2 Suggested Logging for Harmonics as per IEEE 519

(Clause 3.1)
Sl no. Measurement Parameter Interval Period
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
Harmonic voltages
i) Very short time THD Voltage 3 Seconds 24- hour
ii) Short time THD voltage 10 Minutes 7- day
Harmonic currents
iii) Very short TDD 3 Seconds 24- hour
time
iv) Short time TDD 10 Minutes 7- day

Table 3 Recommended Logging Parameters

(Clause 3.1)
Sl no. Recommended logging parameters
(1) (2) (3)
i) Instantaneous  Current, voltage, frequency
rms value:  Active, reactive, apparent power- Total and
per phase
 Power factor-Total and per phase
 Power factor- Displacement and per phase
ii) Demand  Current- Present and max, values
Values:
iii) PQ  Harmonic distortion- Current and voltage
Measurement:  Individual harmonic (2nd – 50th order)
 Waveform capture
 Transient
 Flicker
iv) Data Recording:  Min/max of instantaneous values
 Data/event logs
Table  SER (Sequence of event recording) 4
Recommended Alarms Settings and Threshold
(Clause 3.1)
Sl no. Recommended alarms setting and threshold
Transient Threshold magnitude: 2 xVrms
(1) (2) (3)
i) Voltage sag  Pickup: 0.89 pu
 Dropout: 0.91 pu
ii) Voltage swell  Pickup: 1.1 pu
 Dropout: 1.08 pu
iii) Voltage unbalance  Pickup: 2.1 percent
 Dropout: 1.9 percent
iv) Leading power factor  Pickup: 99.5 leading
 Dropout: 1.0
v) Harmonics (THD  Pickup: 5.5 percent
voltage)  Dropout: 5.0 percent

IEC 62586-2 provides testing methods to ensure compliance of measurement functions to IEC
61000-4-30 specifications.
Power quality metering is essential in detecting several abnormalities in the network which will
help user to investigate the real cause of downtime, save his installation from power outage,
avoid untoward fire hazards, increase the efficiency of his process and manpower.
SECTION 20.3 POWER QUALITY IMPROVEMENT — NEUTRAL CONDUCTOR
1.1 The Neutral: A live and Unique Conductor

Paradoxically, although the neutral conductor is a live conductor, current should never be allowed to
circulate in it.
Nevertheless, there has been renewed interest in the neutral conductor in relation to the proliferation of
electronic loads, the circulation of harmonic currents and the risk of overloads. Within this context, the
aim of this document is to describe the current situation regarding typical and recommended installation
rules with respect to breaking, protecting and dimensioning the neutral conductor.

1.2 The Neutral: A live Conductor in Electrical Distribution

1.2.1 General System for Electrical Distribution

The most common system for low-voltage electrical distribution is the three-phase type
system with distributed neutral. This arrangement enables both three-phase loads not connected to
neutral (motors, for example) and single-phase common loads to be supplied with power at the
same time. The most common voltage levels used in Europe are 400 V phase-to-phase and 230 V phase-
to neutral (see Fig. 1 ).
The supply transformer secondary is therefore generally connected in a star or even a zigzag
configuration.
Relevant regulations stipulate that when not also used as a protective earth conductor (PEN, in
which case it should be green/yellow), the neutral conductor should be light blue in colour.

1
4
415V 415V

2
415V 230V

230V
Fig 1
4

FIG. 1 3-PHASE, 4 WIRE CONFIGURATION

1.3 Neutral, But Not Passive

The neutral conductor has specific features in relation to other electrical distribution conductors:

a) It has a specific role to play in the definition of earthing systems;

b)It is generally possible and recommended to earth the neutral;
c) It can be used as a protective earth conductor;
d) The neutral conductor is a live conductor;
e) It provides single-phase loads with power;
f) It supports the circulation of unbalanced currents;
g) It supports the circulation of third harmonic currents from non-linear loads;
h) Fault currents flow through it (insulation faults, overloads, short-circuits);
j) When it is used as a protective earth conductor, capacitive leakage currents flow through the
neutral;
k) A certain number of precautions must be taken when designing an electrical installation;
m) Specific regulations must be observed when dimensioning and protecting the neutral conductor;
n) The continuity of the neutral conductor is imperative when it is used as a protective earth; and
p) The neutral conductor must be disconnected if its voltage in relation to earth increases to a dangerous
level.

2 CROSS SECTION AND PROTECTION OF THE NEUTRAL CONDUCTOR

The cross-section area (c.s.a) and the protection of the neutral conductor, apart from its current-
carrying requirement, depend on several factors, namely:
a) The type of earthing system, TT, TN, etc.;
b) The harmonic currents; and
c) The method of protection against indirect contact hazards according to the methods described
below’
The colour of the neutral conductor is statutorily blue. PEN conductor, when insulated, shall be
marked by one of the following methods:
1) Green-and-yellow throughout its length with, in addition, light blue markings at the terminations,
or
2) Light blue throughout its length with, in addition, green-and-yellow markings at the terminations.

3 SIZING THE NEUTRAL CONDUCTOR

3.1 Influence of the Type of Earthing System

3.1.1 TT and TN-S Schemes

a) Single-phase circuits or those of c.s.a.: 16 mm2 (copper) or 25 mm2 (aluminium): the c.s.a. of
the neutral conductor must be equal to that of the phases.
b) Three-phase circuits of c.s.a. > 16 mm2 copper or 25 mm2 aluminium: the c.s.a.
of the neutral may be chosen to be:
1) Equal to that of the phase conductors, or
2) Smaller, on condition that:
i) The current likely to flow through the neutral in normal conditions is less than
the permitted value Iz. The influence of triplen(1) harmonics must be given
particular consideration; or
ii) The neutral conductor is protected against short-circuit, in accordance with the
following :
The size of the neutral conductor is at least equal to 16 mm2 in copper or 25
mm2 in aluminium.

3.1.2 TN-C Scheme

The same conditions apply in theory as those mentioned above, but in practice, the neutral conductor
must not be open-circuited under any circumstances since it constitutes a PE as well as a neutral
conductor.

3.1.3 IT Scheme

In general, it is not recommended to distribute the neutral conductor, that is, a 3-phase 3-wire scheme
is preferred. When a 3-phase 4-wire installation is necessary, however, the conditions described above
for TT and TN-S schemes are applicable.
3.2 Influence of Harmonic Currents

3.2.1 Effects of Triplen Harmonics

Harmonics are generated by the non-linear loads of the installation (computers, florescent lighting, LED
lighting, rectifiers, power electronic choppers) and can produce high currents in the neutral. In particular
triplen harmonics of the three phases have a tendency to cumulate in the neutral as:
a) Fundamental currents are out-of-phase by 2π/3 so that their sum is zero; and
b) On the other hand, triplen harmonics of the three Phases are always positioned in the same
manner with respect to their own fundamental, and are in phase with each other (see Fig. 2).

FIG. 2 EFFECTS OF TRIPLEN HARMONICS

FIG. 3 LOAD FACTOR OF THE NEUTRAL CONDUCTOR AS A FUNCTION OF THE

PERCENTAGE OF 3RD HARMONIC

Fig. 3 shows the load factor of the neutral conductor as a function of the percentage of 3rd harmonic.
In practice, this maximum load factor cannot exceed 3.

3.3 Reduction Factors for Harmonic Currents in Four-core and Five-core Cables with Four
Cores Carrying Current
The basic calculation of a cable concerns only cables with three loaded conductors that is, there is no
current in the neutral conductor. Because of the third harmonic current, there is a current in the neutral.
As a result, this neutral current creates a hot environment for the 3 phase conductors and for this reason,
a reduction factor for phase conductors is necessary. Reduction factors, applied to the current-carrying
capacity of a cable with three loaded conductors, give the current-carrying capacity of a cable with four
loaded conductors, where the current in the fourth conductor is due to harmonics. The reduction factors
also take the heating effect of the harmonic current in the phase conductors into account:

a) Where the neutral current is expected to be higher than the phase current, then the cable size
should be selected on the basis of the neutral current;
b) Where the cable size selection is based on a neutral current which is not significantly higher
than the phase current, it is necessary to reduce the tabulated current carrying capacity for three
loaded conductors;
c) If the neutral current is more than 135 percent of the phase current and the cable size is selected
based on the neutral current then the three phase conductors will not be fully loaded. The
reduction in heat generated by the phase conductors offsets the heat generated by the neutral
conductor to the extent that it is not necessary to apply any reduction factor to the current
carrying capacity for three loaded conductors; and
d) In order to protect cables, the fuse or circuit breaker must be sized considering the greatest of
the values of the line currents (phase or neutral). However, there are special devices (for
example, the Compact NSX circuit breaker equipped with the OSN tripping unit), that allow
the use of a c.s.a. of the phase conductors smaller than the c.s.a. of the neutral conductor. A big
economic gain can thus be made.

3.4 Reduction Factors for Harmonic Currents in Four-core and Fie-core Cables with Four
Cores Carrying Current

The basic calculation of a cable concerns only cables with three loaded conductors that is, there is no
current in the neutral conductor. Because of the third harmonic current, there is a current in the neutral.
As a result, this neutral current creates a hot environment for the 3 phase conductors and for this reason,
a reduction factor for phase conductors is necessary (see Table 1). Reduction factors, applied to the
current-carrying capacity of a cable with three loaded conductors, give the current-carrying capacity of
a cable with four loaded conductors, where the current in the fourth conductor is due to harmonics. The
reduction factors also take the heating effect of the harmonic current in the phase conductors into
account.

a) Where the neutral current is expected to be higher than the phase current, then
the cable size should be selected based on the neutral current;
b) Where the cable size selection is based on a neutral current which is not significantly higher
than the phase current, it is necessary to reduce the tabulated current carrying capacity for three
loaded conductors;
c) If the neutral current is more than 135 percent of the phase current and the cable size is selected
on the basis of the neutral current then the three phase conductors will not be fully loaded. The
reduction in heat generated by the phase conductors offsets the heat generated by the neutral
conductor to the extent that it is not necessary to apply any reduction factor to the current
carrying capacity for three loaded conductors; and
d) To protect cables, the fuse or circuit breaker has to be sized taking into
account the greatest of the values of the line currents (phase or neutral). However,
there are special devices, that allow the use of a c.s.a. of the phase conductors
smaller than the c.s.a. of the neutral conductor. A big economic gain can thus be
made.
 Table 1 Reduction factors for Harmonic Currents in Four Core and Five Core Cables
(As per IS 732)
(Clause 3.4)
Sl no. Third harmonic Reduction factor
content of phase
Size selection is based on Size Selection is based on
current (percent)
phase current neutral current
(3) (4)
(1) (2)
i) 0-15 1.0 -
ii) 15-33 0.86 -
iii) 33-45 - 0. 86
iv) > 45 - 1.0

Examples:
Consider a three-phase circuit with a design load of 37 A to be installed using four core PVC insulated
cable clipped to a wall, a 6 mm2 cable with copper conductors has a current-carrying capacity of 40 A
and hence is suitable if harmonics are not present in the circuit.

a) If 20 percent third harmonic is present, then a reduction factor of 0.86 is applied and the
design load becomes: 37/0.86 = 43 A. For this load a 10 mm2 cable is necessary.
In this case, the use of a special protective device would allow the use of a 6 mm2 cable for the
phases and of 10 mm2 for the neutral.
b) If 40 percent third harmonic is present, the cable size selection is based on the neutral current
which is: 37 x 0.4 x 3 = 44.4 A and a reduction factor of 0.86 is applied, leading to a design
load of: 44.4/0.86 = 51.6 A. For this load a 10 mm2 cable is suitable.
c) If 50 percent third harmonic is present, the cable size is again selected on the basis of the neutral
current, which is: 37 x 0.5 x 3 = 55.5 A. In this case the rating factor is 1 and a 16 mm2 cable
is required.
In this case, the use of a special protective device would allow the use of a 6 mm2 cable for the
phases and of 10 mm2 for the neutral.

4 PROTECTION OF THE NEUTRAL CONDUCTOR

4.1 Protection Against Overload

If the neutral conductor is correctly sized (including harmonics), no specific protection of the neutral
conductor is required because it is protected by the phase protection. However, in practice, if the c.s.a.
of the neutral conductor is lower than the phase c.s.a, a neutral overload protection must be installed.

4.2 Protection against short-circuit

If the c.s.a. of the neutral conductor is lower than the c.s.a. of the phase conductor, the neutral conductor
must be protected against short-circuit.
If the c.s.a. of the neutral conductor is equal or greater than the c.s.a. of the phase conductor, no specific
protection of the neutral conductor is required because it is protected by the phase protection.

5 BREAKING OF THE NEUTRAL CONDUCTOR

The need to break or not the neutral conductor is related to the protection against indirect contact.

5.1 In TN-C Scheme

The neutral conductor must not be open-circuited under any circumstances since it constitutes a PE as
well as a neutral conductor.

5.2 In TT, TN-S and IT Schemes

In the event of a fault, the circuit breaker will open all poles, including the neutral pole, that is, the
circuit breaker is omni polar.
The action can only be achieved with fuses in an indirect way, in which the operation of one or more
fuses triggers a mechanical trip-out of all poles of an associated series-connected load-break switch.

6 ISOLATION OF THE NEUTRAL CONDUCTOR

It is a good practice that every circuit be provided with the means for its isolation.
 PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS
SECTION 21 ENERGY EFFICIENCY ASPECT
FOREWORD
Efficient use of energy acquires added significance since energy saved is energy generated.

The optimization of electrical energy usage can be facilitated by appropriate design and installation
considerations. An electrical installation can provide the required level of service and safety for
the lowest electrical consumption. This is considered by designers as a general requirement of their
design procedures in order to establish the best use of electrical energy. In addition to the many
parameters taken into account in the design of electrical installations, more importance is
nowadays focused on reducing losses within the system and its use. The design of the whole
installation therefore takes into account inputs from users, suppliers and utilities.

This section of NEC covers existing electrical installations in buildings, in addition to new
installations. It is in the refurbishment of existing buildings that significant overall improvements
in energy efficiency.

The optimization of the use of electricity is based on energy efficiency management which is based
on the price of electricity, electrical consumption and real-time adaptation. Efficiency is checked
by measurement during the whole life of the electrical installation. This helps identify
opportunities for any improvements and corrections. Improvements and corrections may be
implemented through major investment or by an incremental method. The aim is to provide a
design for an efficient electrical installation which allows an energy management process to suit
the user’s needs, and in accordance with an acceptable investment.

The Energy Conservation Act, 2001, also emphasizes the need of energy conservation.

Energy efficiency improvement measures consider the following:

– both the consumption (kWh) and the price of electricity;

– technology;
– environmental impact.

1 SCOPE
This section of the Code covers the aspects to be considered for energy efficient design, selection
of energy efficient equipment to reduce energy consumption, guidance on conducting or carrying
out energy audit, energy efficiency assessment of an electrical installation for minimizing energy
losses, optimizing energy use, and maintaining efficient performance.
Confirmation to IS 16996 – “Low voltage electrical installation: Energy efficiency”, shall be
considered as primary requirement to comply this section.

2 REFERENCES
The standards listed in below contain provisions, which through reference in this text, constitute provisions
of this standard. At the time of publication, the editions indicated were valid. All standards are subject to
revision, and parties to agreements based on this standard are encouraged to investigate the possibility of
applying the most recent editions of the standards.

IS No./Other Title
Publication
732: 2019 Code of practice for electrical wiring installations (fourth revision)
16996:2018 Low-Voltage Electrical Installations - Energy Efficiency
12615: 2018 Line operated three phase a.c. motors (IE CODE) “Efficiency classes
and performance specification”
NBC: 2016 National Building Code (NBC) of India 2016
ECBC: 2017 Energy Conservation Building Code 2017
IEC 60287-3-2 Electric cables - Calculation of the current rating Part 3-2: Sections on
operating conditions - Economic optimization of power cable size
IEC 61557-12: 2018 Electrical safety in low voltage distribution systems up to 1 000 V AC
and 1 500 V DC - Equipment for testing, measuring or monitoring of
protective measures - Part 12: Power metering and monitoring devices
(PMD)

3.0 TERMINOLOGY
3.1 load energy profile: figure representing the energy consumption (Y-axis) within a period of
time (X-axis) based on measurements for a mesh or a group of meshes (eg. Hourly consumption
of energy for a period of a week)

3.2 power demand profile: figure representing the power demand (Y-axis) for a given integration
period within a period of time (X-axis) based on measurements for a mesh or a group of meshes

3.3 electrical energy efficiency (EEE): system approach for optimizing the efficiency of
electricity usage

3.4 mesh one or more circuits of the electrical installation for one or more zones including one or
more services supplying a group of electrical equipment for the purpose of electrical energy
efficiency

3.5 active electrical energy efficiency measure: operational measure, either manually or
automatically controlled, for optimizing the energy efficiency of the electrical installation (eg.
Thermostat control, occupancy lighting control, building optimization control systems).
3.6 passive electrical energy efficiency measure: measure for optimizing the energy efficiency
of the electrical installation by selection and erection of electrical equipment other than control
equipment (eg. Selection and location of transformer, cross section of cables, routing of wiring
system, sub-division of circuits).

3.7 electrical installation efficiency class: defined level of energy efficiency for an electrical
installation

3.8 driving parameter: external factors that affect energy efficiency (eg. Regulation,
environmental conditions, occupancy, energy prices and management requirements, mode of
operation, duty cycle, load curves, state, operating, parameters, indoor temperature, lighting levels,
production volume).

3.9 barycentre method: procedure to optimize the position of energy source(s) and loads in
consideration of energy efficiency

3.10 EE assessment: process to determine the electrical installation efficiency class of an

installation

3.11 electrical energy management system (EEMS): system monitoring, operating, controlling
and managing energy resources and loads of the installations

3.12 load shedding: method(s) of optimizing demand by controlling the electrical loads for
variable periods of time

3.13 demand response: changes in electric usage by end-user customers from their normal
consumption patterns in response to changes in the price of electricity over time, or to incentive
payments designed to induce lower electricity use at times of high wholesale market prices or
when system reliability is jeopardized

3.14 user interface: means that allow the user to monitor and/or control the electrical installation,
locally or remotely (eg. Visual or audible signal, local display, remote display, push button).

3.15 measurement: process of obtaining value(s) that can be attributed to a quantity

3.16 monitoring: continuing procedure for the collection and assessment of pertinent information,
including measurements, for the purpose of identifying deviations and determining the
effectiveness of the plans and procedures.

3.17 power metering and monitoring device (PMD): combination in one or more devices of
several functional modules dedicated to metering and monitoring electrical parameters in energy
distribution systems or electrical installations, used for applications such as energy efficiency,
power monitoring and network performance
4 GENERAL
Energy efficiency aims at eliminating wastage of energy and minimizing losses. The major factors
to be considered in this regard include system design, selection of equipment, operation and
maintenance practices, capacity utilization factors, etc. Improving efficiency typically costs less
than the energy tariffs. To standardize and benchmark the level of efficiency of various electrical
and other energy consuming equipment, the Bureau of Energy Efficiency was instituted in March
2002. Wherever available, the standards and labelling/rating standards for various equipment
proposed by Bureau of Energy Efficiency shall be followed while selecting equipment, with a
preference for higher efficiency equipment to the extent possible. Provisions of the Energy
Conservation Act, 2001 should also be considered, where applicable.

Also, along with energy efficient designing and selection of equipment, active energy efficiency
becomes an important factor as it is not only related to energy saving devices and equipment
installed, but also to ensure that these devices and equipment use only the energy required. It is
this aspect of monitoring and controlling that is critical for achieving the maximum efficiency. It
is the management of energy use through measurement, monitoring and control that effects
sustainable energy efficiency.
IS16696:2018 provides requirements, measures and recommendations for the design, erection and
verification of all types of low-voltage electrical installation including local production and storage
of energy for optimizing the overall efficient use of electricity. This standard is applicable to the
electrical installation of a building or system and does not apply to products.

4.1 Fundamental principles

4.1.1 Safety of the electrical installation

The requirements and recommendations of this part of shall not impair requirements included in
IS732.

4.1.2 Availability of electrical energy and user decision

Energy efficiency management shall not reduce electrical availability and/or services or
operation below the level desired by the user.
The electrical installation shall have provisions for overriding the energy efficiency management
settings according to the user's decision.
EXAMPLE 1 If someone is ill, the user can decide to heat the room to a higher temperature,
even during peak consumption.
EXAMPLE 2 If a company receives an urgent delivery order, there can be a need for the
workshop to operate at an unexpected hour.

4.1.3 Design principles

The design principles of this document take into account the following aspects:

– load energy profile (active and reactive energy);

– availability of local generation (PV, wind turbine, generator, etc.) and storage;
 – reduction of energy losses in the electrical installation;
– the arrangement of the circuits with regard to energy efficiency (meshes, see 7.4);
– the customer's power use distribution over time;
– the tariff structure offered by the supplier of the electrical energy;

maintaining the quality of service and the performance of the electrical installation.
In order to verify the achievement of electrical energy efficiency measures, an overall energy
efficiency assessment should be made.
4.2 Energy efficiency assessment for electrical installations

4.2.1 General
Assessment of installations shall be performed according to Annex B. This assessment shall be
achieved preferably by measurement. It may be also achieved by calculation.

The frequency of periodic inspection of an installation shall be determined having regard to the
type of installation and equipment, its use and operation, the frequency and quality of maintenance,
factors liable to influence energy efficiency and the external influences to which it is subjected.
The results and recommendations of the previous report, if any, shall be taken into account.

The maximum interval for follow-up assessment is recommended to not exceed:

– five years for commercial;

– three years for industrial and infrastructure.

4.2.2 Action plan following an assessment according to Annex B of 16996:2018: Low voltage
electrical installation: Energy efficiency

Where assessment is performed on a new installation and the assessment identified an electrical
installation efficiency class lower than required, the identified variances shall be corrected or other
action shall be taken based on local regulation, if any. Where periodic assessment identifies the
electrical installation efficiency class is lower than the required value performed, an action plan is
typically needed to achieve the required or desired electrical installation efficiency class.

5 DESIGNING NEW INSTALLATIONS

5.1 General

While designing an electrical installation, the following shall be taken into account:
– the load energy profile (active and reactive energy);
– the minimization of energy losses in the electrical installation by means of:
 optimal location of the transformers, local production and switchboard (barycentre),
 location of HV/LV substation,
 reduction of losses in wiring;
– local production and storage.
5.2 Determination of load energy profile
The prospective load energy profile within the installation shall be determined. Synthetic profiles
(typical load energy curves) from loads or load groups may be used from similar applications. If
measurements or synthetic profiles are not available, the main loads (based on equipment rating)
including expected duration of operation should be identified. This consumption could then be
summed to create a load energy profile.

5.3 Determination of the transformer and switchboard location with the barycentre method
Account shall be taken of the building's use, construction and space availability for the best
position to be obtained, but this should be determined with the buildings designers and owners
prior to construction. To keep the wiring losses to a minimum, the main distribution transformers
and switchboards shall be located, taking into consideration the building constraints, in such a way
as to keep distances to main loads to a minimum. The methods used for determining the position
can be used to determine the optimal available site for the distribution equipment and transformers.

The barycentre method is an iterative approach that can be used to determine

– whether the load distribution is uniform, or of localized type,
– whether the loads or other equipment should be relocated, and
– the total load barycentre location.

See examples of calculations in Annex A in IS16996: Low voltage electrical installation: energy
efficiency.

5.4 HV/LV substation

5.4.1 General

To find the optimal solution for the transformer, the following shall be considered:
– the optimum number and location of HV/LV substations;
– the working point of the transformer;
– the efficiency of the transformer;
– the load energy profile.

5.4.2 Optimum number and location of HV/LV substations

Depending on several criteria such as the required power, the building surface area and the load
distribution, the number of HV/LV substations and the distribution layout will have an influence
on the lengths and cross-sectional areas of conductors. If the barycentre is located in one building
side, it is advised to choose one substation close to this barycentre; or if the barycentre is located
in the middle of the building layout, it may not be possible to locate the HV/LV substation near
the load centre. In such cases, it is recommended to split the electrical distribution into several
HV/LV substations located close to their respective barycentres. This facilitates the optimization
of LV conductor lengths and sizes.

5.4.3 Other considerations during design are

 – Working point of the transformer & Efficiency of the transformer:
– Efficiency of local production and local storage
– Losses in the wiring
 Voltage drop,
 Cross-sectional areas of conductors,
 Power factor correction,
 Reduction of the effects of harmonic currents

6.0 Following clauses from IS16996 shall be considered in designing and maintaining an energy
efficient installation:
– Determination of the zones, usages and meshes (ref. cl. 7 IS16996)
– Energy efficiency and load management system (ref. cl. 8 IS16996)
– Maintenance and enhancement of the performance of the installation (ref. cl. 9 IS16996)
– Parameters for implementation of efficiency measures (ref. cl. 9 IS16996)

6 EQUIPMENT SELECTION
The main criterion for equipment selection, from energy efficiency point of view, is that the energy
loss has to be minimized without reducing the desired output. In other words, the operating
efficiency should be high. Proper sizing of equipment is essential to ensure optimum utilization of
energy. It is also necessary to avoid over rating or under rating the equipment. It should be ensured
that operating power factor of equipment is high. Most commonly encountered equipment in
electrical systems are mentioned below:

6.1 Motors
Motors should be energy efficient motors, conforming to IS 12615 (IE2 class or higher) especially
for applications that operate more than 3 000 h per year. In cases where motors are often running
below nominal conditions, variable speed drives should be installed for controlling motors. This
is particularly the case where motors are used in flow systems and where the power needed from
motor depends on its speed. Use of variable speed drives will bring substantial energy saving
wherever different flow conditions/speeds are encountered, especially in the process industry. Use
of variable speed drives is a highly efficient means of achieving flow control etc. as compared to
throttling of valves, dampers etc. or the use of stepped pulleys. Motors with higher operating power
factor shall be considered during selection as this results in lower current and consequently lower
losses.

6.2 Transformers
While procuring transformers, normal loading shall be indicated to optimize transformer efficiency
to be maximum at projected load and for minimizing losses under normal operating conditions.
Losses should be accounted while selecting equipment, by the method of loss capitalization or
specifying the minimum acceptable value for maximum efficiency.
6.3 Cables Equipment
Optimizing cable route/length can best reduce cable losses. Though the losses can also be reduced
by over sizing the conductors, this is not recommended due to the practical problems encountered
with termination of over-sized cables.

6.4 Lighting
An efficient lighting system can substantially reduce the energy consumption. The selection
criteria for lighting shall include, among other factors, light sources of higher luminous efficacy,
such as LED. Street lighting and other tasks where colour rendering properties of light are not of
significance can be achieved more efficiently using sodium vapour lamps compared to mercury
vapour lamps. The use of incandescent lamps should be avoided. Newer technologies such as
building automation systems for optimizing power consumption through natural lighting,
reduction in HVAC load demand using films or glazing with high visible light transmittance and
low heat transfer, lights controlled by sensors which get activated by movement/human presence,
etc., which can significantly optimize the use of electrical energy, should be used.

The design of the electrical lighting system is also important for lighting system efficiency. The
electrical lighting system should be designed using an ambient-task-accent lighting design
approach, using indirect ambient lighting and direct task and accent lighting. Recommended values
of illuminance should be in accordance with the National Building Code of India, 2016, (Part 8,
Section 1, Sub-section 4: Lighting; and Table 4: Recommended Values of Illuminance). Lighting
and controls should be designed and installed in accordance with the Energy Conservation
Building Code, 2017 (Chapter 6: Lighting and Controls).
The selection criteria for luminaires should include minimum harmonic distortion, maintenance of
power factor higher than 0.9, and compatibility with dimming systems. Low loss electronic ballasts
should be employed, where feasible, after taking care that the harmonic distortion is within
permissible limits.

7 ENERGY AUDIT

An energy audit covers the verification, monitoring and analysis of the energy use, including
submission of a technical report containing recommendations for improving energy efficiency,
cost benefit analysis and an action plan to reduce energy consumption. The purpose of an energy
audit broadly includes:
a) Reviewing the level of energy consumption;
b) Creating a data base;
c) Identifying energy conservation potential;
d) Preparation of norms/guidelines for implementation of energy conservation measures; and
e) Recommending the use of energy efficient appliances and of adapted control strategies.
Regarding energy audit, Energy Conservation Act, 2001 has been enacted and the regulations
issued under the said act shall be complied with. Accordingly, designated consumers, as notified
from time to time, shall get the energy audit carried out through an accredited energy auditor/firms
and implement techno-economic viable recommendations/measures. Every designated consumer
shall appoint or designate a certified energy manager, whose responsibility shall be to assist the
designated consumer in complying with the energy consumption norms and standards and other
mandatory provisions.

The recently updated version of the energy conservation building code formulated by the Bureau
of Energy Efficiency and prescribed by the Central Government shall be implemented for new
buildings having connected load of 100 kW and above or contract demand of 120 kVA and above,
once the same or modified version has been notified by the respective State Governments.

8 ENERGY EFFICIENCY ASSESSMENT OF ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS

8.1 Voltage Drop

In the absence of any consideration like start-up time for motors, equipment with high inrush
current, and temporary conditions, such as voltage transients and voltage variation due to abnormal
operation, the voltage drop between the origin of the consumer's installation and the equipment
should be as mentioned in the following Table:

Type of Installation Lighting Other uses

A – Low-voltage installation supplied directly from 3 percent 5 percent
a low-voltage network
B – Low-voltage installation supplied from a private 6 percent 8 percent
network
NOTE — It is recommended that the voltage drop in the terminal circuits should not be greater than the values indicated for type A
installation.
Where the main lines of the installations are more than 100 m long, the voltage drop may be
increased by 0.005 percent per meter of line beyond 100 m, but not exceeding 0.5 percent (refer
IS 732).

8.2 Cross-sectional Area of Conductors

Increasing the cross-sectional area of the conductor reduces the power loss. This decision shall be
made by assessing the savings within a time scale against the additional cost due to over-sizing.
For cables, the size shall be determined considering the cost of losses that will occur during the
working life of the cable against the initial cost of the cable. A calculation method for the same
can be referred from IEC 60287-3-2.
8.3 Power Factor Correction
Power factor correction will lead to reduction of reactive energy consumption, which will improve
electrical energy efficiency since maximum electrical energy will be transformed in active energy.
It will also reduce thermal losses in wiring systems, particularly in the low-voltage public
distribution system. Power factor correction will also reduce the losses in the power to be
transmitted in the transmission and distribution networks and in the customers’ networks and
installations. Capacitor bank can be used to improve the power factor.

There shall be a provision for a permanent power factor measurement at the main incomer. The
acceptable levels of power factor shall be at least 0.9 for medium and large commercial buildings
and 0.95 for industries.

8.4 Reducing the Effects of Harmonic Currents

Harmonic disturbances not only stress equipment due to overheating, but also and mainly generate
additional power losses through the wiring system. Therefore, the measurement of Total Harmonic
Distortion (THD) at the installation level and at the current-using-equipment level for harmonics
is necessary and recommended. Appropriate measurement for inter-harmonic should also be
performed.

The energy meter at the incomer shall be capable of capturing and reporting the harmonic
disturbances. The maximum levels acceptable for THD at installation level should be 5 percent for
all types of facilities, whether commercial buildings or industries.

Active harmonic filters shall be installed at the loads if the THD level is found to be exceeding the
maximum acceptable limits. Increasing the cross-section area of the conductor can also reduce the
harmonics in the system.

8.5 Adapting a Methodology to Minimize Electrical Installation Energy Losses

The Barycenter method or a similar methodology shall be adapted to minimize the energy losses
in the electrical installation. The objective of this method is to install transformer and switchboard
at a location based on relative weighting due to the energy consumption of the loads, so that the
distance to a higher energy consumption load is lower than the distance to a lower energy
consumption load. This method not only improves the energy performance of the installation, but
also reduces the cost of installation by reducing the length of the cables.

8.6 Arrangement and Measurement of the Electrical Circuits to Enhance Energy

Efficiency
Identification of the energy end use for a particular circuit or mesh or zone is needed to enable
accurate measurement and analysis of its energy consumption. Different end uses can be lighting,
HVAC, motors, other specific processes, etc. Similarly, a zone can represent a surface area in m2
or a location where electricity or energy is used, for example, a workshop, a building floor, etc. A
mesh is a circuit or a group of circuits identified with respective energy using equipment, it
determines one or several uses in one or more zones. When similar equipments are operating or
several different equipment are operating at the same time, it’s beneficial to keep all of them under
one circuit, it makes the system more economical and efficient as a particular mesh can be
monitored and controlled as a single unit.

An end use or mesh or zone which accounts for 10 percent or more of the total energy consumption
of the facility shall be measured continuously or shall have a permanently installed energy use
measurement provision.

9 OPTIMIZE ENERGY USE — INSTALLATION OF ENERGY METERS / POWER

MONITORING DEVICES AND ENERGY MONITORING SYSTEM

Installation of energy meters or power monitoring devices (PMD) and an energy monitoring
system can provide guidance on optimizing the energy use, considering the loads and end user
requirements. The energy consumption of a facility can be reduced by 5 percent only through
energy metering and monitoring and by simply understanding the energy end use.

9.1 Energy Meters or Power Monitoring Devices (PMD)

The energy meters or power monitoring devices (PMD) installed should be digital and at least the
main meter at the incomer level shall be capable of two-way communication, from the demand as
well as the supply side. Adequate energy metering and monitoring infrastructure shall be installed
to help monitor operational energy use and costs and to enable continuous energy performance
improvement. Digital energy meters should be installed for the following:
a) Utility grid points,
b) Captive generator sets, and
c) On-site renewable energy system (if installed/operational).
The energy meters installed at the incomer level shall have high accuracy, high sampling rates and
advanced capabilities to measure power quality parameters that is., harmonics, sags, swells,
voltage interruptions, etc.

The electrical distribution shall be designed with adequate load segregation to facilitate cost-
effective sub-metering according to the end uses and functional areas; and documenting the same
through clear single line diagrams. Separate sub meters shall be installed for all energy end uses
and functional areas in the facility that individually account for 10 percent or more of the total
energy consumption. These end uses may be:
a) HVAC including cooling towers, chillers, pumps, AHUs (Air Handling Units), FCUs
(Fan Coil Units), and distributed units for split or window ACs where applicable;
b) Lighting; and
c) Other industry specific processes.
At a minimum, the sub-metering infrastructure should facilitate the aggregation of energy use. All
energy meters installed shall have the capability to communicate energy data for monitoring.

9.2 Energy Monitoring System

Energy monitoring systems that can display the following parameters shall be installed with two-
way communicable smart energy meters or power monitoring devices (PMD):
a) Hourly energy demand and use,
b) Energy breakdown and mix and energy consumption patterns,
c) Demand side power quality analysis,
d) Energy consumption by process, department, building, floor, etc.,
e) Comparison of actual energy use with targets or historical trends and benchmark energy
KPIs, and
f) Reporting on sustainability projects with display of energy efficiency ratings.
The energy monitoring system should have the ability to utilize near-real-time or time-of-use
pricing through integration of smart meters with the monitoring and control system. The system
should be capable of supporting predictive demand for better demand management and proactive
demand control.

The following measurements are recommended to effectively monitor energy performance and to
improve energy efficiency:

Electrical Quantities Symbol Benefits of Measurement

to Measure
Active energy Ea Monitor energy and manage costs more closely, by zone
and/or usage.
Reactive energy Er Monitor energy and manage costs more closely, by zone
and/or usage.
Monitor the operation of reactive loads e.g. motors,
transformers, capacitors.
Power, power demand P Better control the demand in order to optimize the
supply contract.
Power Factor PF, cosφ Optimize power factor to avoid penalties.
Load profiles (energy LP Optimize the supply contract
consumption)
Voltage and current THDu Detect non-positive-sequence harmonics causing
harmonics THDi excessive energy losses in motors or transformers.
Frequent deviations of U Detect devices frequently operating outside their
voltage specified range and over consuming energy.
Voltage unbalance Unb Detect non-positive-sequence components causing
excessive energy losses in motors.
NOTE — One intent of Energy Efficiency is to optimize the supply contract and to avoid penalties
Refer National Building Code (NBC) of India 2016 and IEC 61557-12.

9.3 Use of Building Management Systems

Building Management Systems (BMS) provide for management of building energy consumption
according to the need. Several studies have shown that savings up to 30 percent can be achieved
by modulating the operation to the demand, which may vary based on occupancy, weather, etc.
These figures can be improved if the management of these systems is enabled at room level rather
than at floor level. It is recommended that several applications (lighting control, HVAC control,
presence management) are integrated in the BMS so that control strategy can be optimized
holistically and not focused on one application only.

10 MAINTAINING EFFICIENT PERFORMANCE

Adopting a life-cycle cost methodology can help in maintaining efficient performance of the
facility which includes energy efficient design, selection and installation of high efficiency
equipment, optimizing through energy monitoring and automation, and finally, identifying new
energy efficiency measures through energy audits, to strive for continuous improvement.
PART 1 SECTION 22 SAFETY IN ELECTRICAL b) Electrical fire hazard, and
WORKS
c) Electrical arc flash hazard.
FORWARD

Safety procedures and practices are essential and mandatory in 2 REFERENCES

electrical work. Basic approaches to electrical work from the
point of view of eliminating electrical hazards and ensuring 2.1 Statutory provisions as per Electricity Act, 2003
safety shall be a priority.
a) Central Electricity Authority (measures related to
It is essential that safety should be preached, practiced and Safety and Electrical Supply) Regulations, 2010 as
monitored at all times from the very stage of design to further in amended to date.
installation, use, operation and maintenance. The safety b) Central Electricity Authority (Technical Standards for
instructions shall be implemented as normal routine duty. Construction of Electric Plants and Electric Lines)
Regulations 2010; as amended up to date.
The guidelines, recommendations from the point of view of
safety mentioned in this section are therefore for the use of c) Central Electricity Authority (Safety requirements for
designers; persons involved in use, installation, operation, construction, operation, maintenance of Electric Plants
maintenance, electrical safety audits and also the employers/ and Electric Lines) Regulations, 2011.
owners of electrical installation.
2.2 A list of Standards on safety in electrical work are as
follows:
Important Note:
IS No. Title
A Person who is Owner, Occupier within the meanings
defined under the Act and Regulations is responsible and
732 : 2019 Code of practice for electrical
legally bound to maintain electrical installation in safe wiring installations
condition. IEC 61936-1 Power installation exceeding 1 kV
:2014- — Part 1: Common rules
Employer shall implement safe work practices, establish 2551 : 1982 Specification for danger notice
procedures accordingly and maintain documentation. plates
Employees on other hand shall follow the practices and
procedures laid down while working on electrical installations. 5216 (Part 1) : Recommendations on safety
1982 procedures and practices in
1 SCOPE electrical work: Part 1 General

1.1 This Part I / Section 24 of the Code covers Statutory and IS 5216 (Part2): Recommendations on safety
1982 procedures and practices in
Administrative controls for implementation of safety, guidelines
electrical work: Part 2 Lifesaving
on safety procedures and practices to be observed for techniques
safeguarding property and persons working on / with / in
vicinity of Electrical Installation from the point of view of risk 8923 : 1978 Warning symbol for dangerous
associated with the activities such as installing, testing, voltages
commissioning, inspecting, operating, using, maintaining,
dismantling etc. and also for persons whose exposure to SP31: 1986 Method of treatment of electric
electrical installation is not intentional or involving part of their shock
work / activity.
IS/IEC 62305 : Lightning protection
2010
1.2 Observance of safety is broadly divided into following
stages and tasks o f electrical work: 13503 : 2013 Classification of insulating liquids

a) Design and layout, 16081 : 2013 Specification for unused synthetic

organic esters for electrical
b) Installation,
purpose
c) Working-on,
16659 : 2017 Specification for unused natural
d) Testing and commissioning /energising, esters for transformer and similar
e) Maintenance, and electrical equipment

f) Temporary electrical installation. 3034 : 1993 Fire safety of industrial buildings:

Generating and Distributing
1.3 Electrical hazards and mitigation is divided into three parts: stations
a) Electrical shock hazard,
IEC 61482-1 live working — Protective 3.11 CEA — Central electricity authority, an authority
clothing against the Thermal constituted under sub section (1) of section 70, of Electricity
Hazards of an electric arc — Part Act, 2003 having jurisdiction to make regulations as per section
1 Test methods 177 of the Act.
IEC 61482-2: 2018 Live working — Protective
clothing against thermal hazards of 3.12 CEA Safety Regulations — Central electricity authority
an electric arc — Part 2: (measures related to safety and electric supply) regulations,
Requirements 2010 amended to date, as per section 53 of Electricity Act, 2003.

IEC 60331 Test for electric cable under fire 3.13 Conductor — Any wire, cable, bar, tube, rail, plate used
condition — Circuit integrity for conducting electricity and so arranged as to be electrically
connected to system.
IEEE 1584: 2018 Guide for arc flash hazard
calculations
3.14 Designated Person — A person having certificate of
NFPA 70E 2018 Standard for Electrical safety in competency or work permit issued by an appropriate
Workplace government to carryout work on electrical lines and apparatus
under Regulation 3 of CEA Safety Regulations.

3 TERMINOLOGY 3.15 Earth Electrode — A conducting plate / rod / pipe / object

through which a connection to earth is established.
Definition / interpretation of the terms used in this section are
given below: NOTE — The word ‘ground’ / ‘grounding’ used in place of ‘earth’ /
‘earthing’ has same meaning, purpose, objective in that regard.
3.1 Accessible — Not obstructed / guarded by locked doors,
readily approachable / capable of being physically reached 3.16 Electrical Inspector — An authority having jurisdiction
quickly without use of any appliance or special effort for under section 162 of Electricity Act, 2003 and powers conferred
operation. there under.3.17 Electrical Safety — Identifying hazards
associated with the working on electrical installation, use of
3.2 Apparatus — Electrical apparatus and includes all electrical energy and taking precautions to reduce the risk
machines, fittings, accessories and appliances in which associated with those hazards.
conductors are used.
3.18 Enclosed — A case, housing of apparatus or fence or wall
3.3 Approach Limit — A limited approach boundary at a surrounding the installation to prevent person from
distance from exposed energised electric part from which unintentionally contacting energised parts.
electric shock hazard exist.
3.19 Enclosure — Surrounded by case, housing, fence or wall
3.4 Appropriate Government — Central Government or State that prevents person from unintentionally contacting energised
Government having respective jurisdiction as mentioned under parts and to protect the equipment from physical damage.
section 2 of Electricity Act, 2003.
3.20 Energise — Connecting to electric supply source and
3.5 Approved — Permitted by an authority having jurisdiction. commission / charge.

3.21 Equipment — Any item used for such purposes as

3.6 Arc Flash — Release of energy caused by an electric arc,
generation, conversion, transmission, storage, distribution or
intensity of which is called ‘arc rating. utilization of electrical energy, such as machines, transformers,
apparatus, measuring instruments, protective devices, equipment
3.7 Arc Flash Boundary — An approach limit of a person from for wiring systems, appliances.
arc source at which incident energy equals 1.2 cal/ cm2 or 5
joules / cm2 for 1 s, (exposure to such energy may cause second 3.22 Exposed — (In respect of unguarded conductor or circuit
degree burns); parts) capable of being inadvertently touched or approached
nearer than a safe distance.
3.8 ATPV — Arc thermal protection value (in respect of
3.23 Extraneous Conductive Part — A conductive part liable
protective clothing / garments measured, in kJ/m2 or cal/cm2.
to introduce potential (generally earth potential) and not forming
part of electrical installation.
3.9 Bare — Not covered with insulating material.
3.24 Fault Current — Amount of current passed at a point
3.10 Branch Circuit — A circuit between final circuit breaker
during short circuit condition; available fault current is
protecting the circuit and outlets.
maximum current that could be passed at a point during short
circuit.
3.25 Ground Fault — An un-intentional electrical connection For any electrical work appropriate design and layout forms
between un-grounded electrical current carrying conductor and foundation of safety. It shall be kept in mind that at latter stage
normally non-current carrying conductor, metal enclosure / when the installation is energised and brought in to use, it
equipment having connectivity to earth; becomes very difficult and sometimes impossible to correct the
defects occurred in basic design. Therefore, it is important to
3.26 Guarded — Covered, shielded, fenced or protected by consider following guidelines in respect with design of an
means of suitable casings, barrier, rails, metal screen to remove electrical installation considering aspects of safety.
the possibility of dangerous contact.
4.1 Every electrical installation up to 1 000 V AC and 1 500 V
3.27 Guarding — (In respect of overhead line) an arrangement DC shall be designed, erected and tested as per the rules
provided on overhead electric line to earth the snapped live bare provided in IS 732 : 2019.
conductor and also prevent it from becoming accessible from
ground. 4.2 Safety aspects are integrated under following factors of
design:
3.28 Incident Energy — Amount of thermal energy measured
in cal/cm2, or J/cm2 / kJ/m2 impressed on surface, generated at a) geographical location;
the instance of electric arc.
b) the type of installation based on its utility, viz.
3.29 Limited Approach — An approach limit at a distance domestic dwellings; other structures, buildings, spaces
from an exposed energised electrical conductor within which for commercial, industrial, administrative usages;
shock hazard exists. transmission / distribution systems;

3.30 Notified Voltage — A voltage notified by appropriate c) persons occupying / working in that area;
government for the purpose of self certification.
d) expected level of knowledge and responsibility of
3.31 Outlet — A point on wiring system from which current is
person in regard with probable risk / hazard involving
taken to supply electrical equipment for its utilisation.
out of electrical installation which they are exposed
3.32 PPE — Personal Protective equipment for the protection of to;
persons from electrical hazard while working on live electrical
installations or work within restricted boundary. e) layouts allowing sufficient space / safety clearance to
allow access, operation and maintenance;
3.33 RCD — Residual current device used for protection
against electrical shock due to earth leakage. f) civil construction suitable for installation of
equipment, along with sufficient reinforcement /
3.34 Restricted Approach — A boundary at a distance from arrangement for venting pressures as per necessity and
exposed energised electric part within which there could be also giving consideration to anticipated future
electric shock hazard due to electric arc flash, and beyond which expansion / requirements;
entry is restricted.
g) design of electrical panels / distribution / apparatus and
3.35 Risk Assessment — Process which identifies chances of outage for maintenance; and
injury or damage to health by estimating its potential severity
which help of framing protective measures. h) sustainability.

3.36 Safety Working Clearance — Minimum clearance to be

maintained in air between live part of equipment on one hand The safety aspects under these factors of design shall have
and earth or other piece of equipment or conductor on which it relevance of BIS, IEC standards and shall be in accordance with
is necessary to carryout work on other hand. CEA Safety Regulations, related provisions from central
electricity authority (Technical Standards for Construction of
3.37 Shock Hazard — A possibility of current passing through Electric Plants and Electric Lines) Regulations; as amended up
body causing injury or damage to health. to date

3.38 Sock Hood — A personal protective equipment covering 4.3 All electric supply lines and apparatus shall be of sufficient
neck and head excluding facial area of eyes and nose. mechanical strength, for the duty cycle which they may be
required to perform under environmental conditions of
3.39 Working Distance — Distance between a person’s face,
installation and shall so be constructed, installed.
chest or other body parts and prospective arc source.
4.4 Design shall be based on calculations made in respect of
4 DESIGNS AND LAYOUT
Load, Fault Levels, Touch and Step Potentials, Earthing, loop
impedance etc. It shall be available especially in respect of all
major installation and shall form part of documentation to be 4.9 In order to prevent generation of heat above permissible
maintained as record further updated and kept ready as and limit within conduits, trunking, raceways, the number and size
when required by the authority. of conductors and enclosures shall be designed in accordance
with the standard as mentioned in section for ‘Wiring
4.5 All electrical equipment shall be installed above Mean Sea Installations’.
Level and important part of installation shall be above
maximum flood level. Note — Adequate space factor (space within enclosure,
remaining free after drawing wires) is important in this
4.6 Material to be used on the electrical installation shall regard which also facilitates drawing and withdrawing of
conform relevant Standards, which shall be suitable for use wires without damaging the insulation.
under respective climatic conditions, corrosive environment.
Accordingly it shall also be of such grade, fire rating, quality, 4.10 Following controls of requisite capacity to carry and break
treated / coated to prevent deterioration and sustain under the current shall be placed as near as possible after the
respective indoor / outdoor / concealed in concrete / commencement of supply so as to be readily accessible and
underground / wet locations. capable of being easily operated to completely isolate the supply
to installation.
4.7 Under hazardous zones equipment and apparatus shall
comply requirements of flameproof, dust tight, totally enclosed a) a linked switch with fuse or circuit breaker on consumer
or any other suitable type of electrical fittings as per relevant side for voltage not exceeding 650V.
Standard. And civil construction shall be sustainable to b) a linked switch with fuse or circuit breaker on consumer
withstand blasts as per risk hazard assessment. side for voltage exceeding 650V and up to 33kV having
aggregate installed transformer or apparatus capacity up
4.8 In order to withstand fire situation, wires / cables shall be to 1 000 kVA supplied at or up to 11kV and 2 500 kVA
fire resistant having proper class FR / FRLSH / Fire. Survival at voltage above 11kV and up to 33kV
(FS)1. Design of electrical installation shall recommend proper c) a circuit breaker on consumer side at voltage exceeding
type and class of wire considering following properties of wire: 33kV having aggregate installed transformer capacity
above 1000kVA and supplied at voltage up to 11kV and
a) non propagation of fire – self-extinguishing; above 2500kVA above 11kV and up to 33kV
d) a circuit breaker on consumer side for voltage above
b) low generation of smoke – opaque, impairing visibility
33kV
and suffocation during Fire;
e) In case of every transformer on primary side for
c) toxic fumes / smoke - due to burning of insulation directly transformer a circuit breaker shall be provided.
affecting respiration endangering life, formation of acids However, for capacity below 1 000 kVA a linked switch
after coming into contact with water making adverse with fuse (suitable to carry full load current and break
effects on metal structures including steel embedded in only magnetising current) may be allowed. On
concrete; secondary side circuit breaker shall be provided.

d) withstand high temperature for the required time period2 4.11 Supply for motor/s, apparatus shall be controlled by
and retain integrity of supply to serve emergencies / suitable linked switch with appropriate fuse rating / circuit
critical services; breaker or an emergency tripping device with manual reset
placed in such a position as to readily accessible and easily
NOTE: operatable.

1. FS cable depending on voltage level, shall meet test 4.12 Every switchboard / electrical panel shall comply with
requirement under the different criteria depending on following:
environment, which shall be as per IEC 60331-11-21/23 to
maintain circuit integrity under fire to withstand temperature of a) a clear space of at least 1m in width shall be provided in
7500C for 90+15 min or as per IEC 60331-1/2 at > 8300C for front of switchboard and Switchgears and control panels
15/30/60/90/120 min with mechanical shock every 5 min
shall be provided with insulating floors or matt
2. The time period for example may be like time required for
conforming to IS 15652.
beginning rescue operation / evacuation and completing it. b) if there are any attachments or bare connection at the
back of the switchboard, the space, if any, behind the
3. Use of FS cables shall be made where electric supply switchboard shall either be less than 20cm or more than
integrity is important for example, cabling related to PA 75cm in width measured from farthest protruding part of
system, emergency lighting and luminous signs of escape any attachment or conductor.
routes, Fire Alarm system, operation of Fire Fighting,
c) If the space behind the switch board exceeds 75cm there
Sprinklers system, control cabling of protective devices; and
shall be passageway from either end of the switch board,
may also include installations with high importance involving
security, assets, occupancy. While considering use of FS cable clear to a height of 1.8m
correlated fire risk hazard shall also be considered.
 d) Switchgears on control panels shall be marked with 500 3.65 9.00
identification and purpose on front side as well as on 600 3.98 10.10
rear side of panel board. Danger notice as per IS 2551 800 5.30 11.20
shall be displayed conspicuously.
e) There shall be adequate illumination within all panel NOTES:
1: Above clearances are for bare conductor or live parts of any
rooms to maintain clear visibility. Under National
equipment installed within outdoor sub-station and not for overhead
Lighting Code various factors to be considered for line
calculation of level of illumination have been mentioned. 2: The ground clearances mentioned above are not for equipment
Generally, it shall be 300 lux in the task area and 200 lux installed within fence / building where access is prevented
elsewhere. 3: The pole to Earth clearances are for conductor structure electrode
f) Under dusty environment entry of dust inside the panel configuration using gap factor k=1.35
shall be prevented by fabricating and constructing
electrical panels with appropriate ingress protection class
and if required keeping electrical panel room under 4.14 In case of high-rise building (building having height above
positive pressure of clean air or any other effective 15m from surrounding ground) there shall be an isolating device
means with fuses or a circuit breaker at the point of supply from
g) Under corrosive, humid, hot conditions additional supplier of electricity fixed in a conspicuous position at height
precautions shall be taken to place the panels in the not more than 1.7 m above ground so as to completely isolate
rooms with conditioned air supply within building in case of emergency.

NOTE — It is recommended that ‘complete’ isolation of supply

4.13 Adequate precautions shall be taken so that no live parts
within building shall not mean isolation of supply to emergency
are so exposed as to cause danger and within uns a fe working services where supply integrity matters the evacuation, Fire
distance of a person who is working on live lines so that he Lift, Fire Fighting service, illumination of escape route / sign
does not come in contact with it. In case of bare conductor, boards, public announcement system, Such services shall either
those shall be inaccessible and provided with switchgear be provided with alternate supply arrangement or circuits of
inaccessible position for rendering them dead. While designing these emergency services shall be bifurcated from the switch
controlling supply to the building
layout of installation, safe working clearances shall be
maintained as per the Table 1 and Table 2.
The vertical duct / corridors provided for power cables shall not
be used for any other service and there shall be fire barrier at
Table 1 Safety Working Clearances as per Schedule VII of
each floor crossing / wing of building.
CEA Regulations 2010
(Clause 4.13) 4.15 All non-current carrying metal parts shall be efficiently
Highest System Safety Working connected with earthing system so that the concept of “earthed
Voltage Clearance equipotential bonding and automatic disconnection of supply” is
kV (AC) m
well maintained For installations not exceeding 650V; Earthing
12 2.6
36 2.8 system shall be so designed to have equipotential bonding and
72.5 3.1 capable of carrying prospective earth fault current and a group
145 3.7 of pipes, rods and plate electrodes for dissipating the current to
245 4.3 the general mass of earth without exceeding allowable
420 6.4 temperature limits as per relevant Standards in order to maintain
800 10.3 all non-current carrying metal works reasonably at earth
potential and to avoid dangerous contact potentials being
NOTE — For altitude above 1 000 m and up to 3 000 m a developed on such mental works.
correction factor of 1.25 perceent shall be applied per 100 m for
increase. Size of Earth conductor and number of earth electrodes shall be
so selected that it shall limit earth resistance sufficiently low to
Table 2 Minimum Safety Working Clearances in Substation permit highest estimated upstream fault current to ground and
to be Maintained as per Schedule VIII of CEA Regulations Earth fault loop impedance shall be sufficiently low to operate
2010 protective devices in due time and reduce neutral shifting
(Clause 4.13)
It shall be mechanically strong, withstand corrosion and retain
DC Pole to Ground electrical continuity during the life of installation
Voltage Earth Clearance
kV Distance m 4.16 The supply of electricity to every electrical installation of 1
m kW and above shall be controlled by a residual current device
100 1.17 4.55 whose rated residual operating current shall not exceed 30
200 1.80 5.65
milliamps for every domestic connection and similar application
300 2.45 6.75
for protection against electric shock and one common RCD at
400 3.04 8.00
point of commencement of supply with rated residual operating 4.23 Provision of baffle wall of four hours fire rating shall be
current of 300 milliamps for all installations having load of made between:
more than 10 kW for protection against fire due to leakage
current so as to disconnect the supply on the occurrence of earth a) apparatus having more than 2000 litres of oil, and
fault or leakage of current. There shall be provision of RCD
b) between single phase transformer banks / ICTs
having sensitivity of 30 mAIn case of three phase incoming
supply and single-phase distribution, per phase isolation type
4.24 Provision of oil soak pit shall be made and where there is
distribution boards may be used for provision of RCD on each
more than 9 000 litre of oil in any one tank provision draining
phase. Where it is not possible to achieve a low enough away oil shall be made to prevent spread of fire resulting from
earth fault loop impedance, disconnection may be ignition of oil and adequate arrangement for extinguishing fire
initiated by fitting an RCD of 30 mA rating as specified be made.
in IS732. 4.25 To mitigate risk of fire likely to be initiated in transformer
filled with mineral oil (‘O’ class insulating liquid); alternate use
4.17 Layout of an electrical installation above 650V shall be so
of ‘K’ class insulating liquid classified under IS 13503 having
designed that all live conductors and apparatus are so placed
fire point above 3000C; shall be done with following available
that an access and operation will be done only by designated
options having added advantage of non-toxicity:
person. Table 3 prescribes safe working distances:
a) Synthetic Organic Esters as per IS 16081 : 2013 / IEC
Table 3 Safe Working Distances as per Schedule III, of CEA
Regulations 2010 61099 : 2010, having specifications as per Transformer
(Clause 4.17) esters Type – T1.
Voltage Safe Working Distance
kV M b)) Natural esters as per IS 16659:2017 / IEC 62770:2013;
11 0.61 as per the specifications mentioned there under.
33 0.71
66 0.91 NOTES:
110 1.02
132 1.07 1. IS 16659 : 2017 / IEC 62770:2013 Do not recommend use of
220 1.52 Natural Esters in respect of equipment exposed to atmosphere
400 2.13 owing to its susceptibility to oxidation leading to formation of
sludge. Hence, its use shall be restricted to non breathing
(Sealed) Transformers only. It shall not be used for breathing
4.18 Electricity Supplier’s installation such as apparatus, transformers (transformers having breather)
metering for supply above 650V, shall be in separate building or
2. Synthetic Esters as per IS 16081: 2013 / IEC 61099 : 2010
a locked weatherproof and fireproof enclosure to have an
may be used both for sealed as well as breathing transformers.
independent access anytime. If there is any difficulty in
providing separate building segregation shall be provided 4.26 Within residential or commercial building only dry type
between supplier’s and consumer’s installation. transformer shall be used.

4.19 Layout of every installation shall be such as to maintain NOTES:

safety clearances for electrical apparatus as per the standards so
that sufficient space is available for easy operation and The condition mentioned in 4.25 above is as per CEA Reg. 44
maintenance without any hazard to the operating and (2) (vii) (e). State Government has powers to deviate the
provisions of CEA Regulations. So where state government has
maintenance personnel working near the equipment.
allowed by notification, use of liquid filled transformer with
insulating liquid as mentioned under # 4.24 may be done in
4.20 Electrical equipment which requires natural air circulation
place of dry type transformer.
and depends on convection principles for cooling, shall be
provided with adequate ventilation and room air flow shall not 4.27 At the locations which are sensitive, where risk and
be prevented any wall or adjacent equipment. Under dusty and potential of damages / losses due to fire are likely to be high,
corrosive environment refer guidelines under 4.12 d) transformers with K3 class insulating liquid having low heat
value less than 32 kJ shall be done.
4.21 Suitable provision shall be made so that the circuit at
lower voltage is guarded against danger of becoming accidently 4.28 Transformers of 10MVA or above capacity or having oil
charged above its normal voltage. above 2 000 ltr shall be provided with fire-fighting system as
per IS 3034 or with Nitrogen Injection Fire protection system.
4.22 Sub-station or switching station with an apparatus having
more than 2000 litres of oil shall not be located at basement 4.29 For a sub-station or switching station where its installation
where proper oil draining arrangement cannot be provided. on ground floor is not possible, then under such unavoidable
condition installation shall not be below 1st basement. There
shall not be seepage or leakage of water. If required adequate c) alarm and tripping where oil, winding temperature
automatic dewatering system shall be provided. limit exceeds;
d) differential protection against incipient faults;
4.30 Entrance doors of the sub-stations, switching stations e) high speed bus bar differential protection along with
located at basement, shall have 2 h fire rating. Opening of the local breaker backup for 132kV and above sub
door shall be outside. A curb / sill of suitable height shall be stations, receiving station, generating stations
provided to prevent flow of oil outside the room. Surrounding connected with grid;
walls shall be lined with fire bricks. f) protection against overvoltage; and
g) protection against leakages / shock.
4.31 Cables under such conditions shall be FRLS and sealing
shall be done along the routes at all floor levels. Cable trenches NOTE — Selection of circuit protection for over-current, short-circuit
inside substation or switching station be filled with sand, current and other characteristics shall be done considering total
pebbles or covered with non-inflammable material slabs. impedance of respective circuit and coordinated with the protective
device to clear fault without excessive damage to the electrical
4.32 All buildings shall have lightning protection as per IS/IEC component of circuit, assuming fault between two or more conductors or
62305-3, installed based on the risk assessment explained in between circuit conductor and ground conductor / metal enclosure.
IS/IEC 62305-2. All Apparatus up to 1000 VAC and 1500 VDC
4.36 All industrial and commercial installations shall be
shall have SPD’s confirming to IS 16463 series, installed based
provided with TN-S earthing system and an earth matt which
on the zonal concept of IS/IEC62305-4 or IS732 : 2019. Down
shall follow IS 3043 to:
conductors shall not be routed through enclosed shafts or ducts.
Apparatus above 1000 VAC shall also be protected against a) limit touch and step potential to tolerable values;
switching surges as per IEC 60099 series.
b) limit ground potential rise to tolerable values so as to
4.33 Power distribution shall be so designed in sections as to prevent danger due to transfer potential through
isolate only that section / part of electrical installation where ground, earth wires, cable sheath, fences, pipe lines,
persons will be working on for maintenance, repairs. etc.;

4.34 Interlocking shall be provided so that: c) maintain earth resistance to such a value that
operation of protective device will be effective; and
a) in case of Isolators and controlling circuit breakers the
isolators cannot be operated unless the corresponding d) all non-current carrying metal parts associated with
breaker is in open position; the electrical installation, cable armouring, shall be
effectively connected to earthing system.
b) in case of earthing switch, it cannot be closed unless and
until the corresponding isolator is in open position; 4.37 In case of star connected system with earthed neutral or
delta connected system with artificial neutral:
c) the breakers of two or more supplies cannot in switched
ON, where they are not intended to be operated in a) the neutral point of every generator and transformer shall
parallel; be connected to earthing system as per IS3043. In case of
multi-source system neutral switching may be resorted to,
d) all gates / doors which give access to live parts cannot be
for limiting neutral current circulation; and
opened unless live parts are made dead and proper
discharging and earthing is done; and
b) In case of installations above 33kV, system neutral earthing
e) where two or more generators operate in parallel and and protective frame earthing may be integrated subject to
neutral switching is adopted, generator breaker cannot be limit step and touch potential within permissible value.
closed unless one of Neutral is connected to the earthing
system. 4.38 Fire Protection arrangements shall be provided as per
norms prescribed in NBC / relevant standards and CEA
4.35 Adequate protections shall be provided to automatically Regulations. In case where inflammable material including
disconnect supply under abnormal conditions; gases chemicals are produced, handled or stored, electrical
installation, equipment and apparatus shall comply with the
a) over-current protection to disconnect the supply equipment of flameproof dust tight, totally enclosed fittings
within the time- in coordination with the designed depending on hazardous zones as per relevant standards
withstand capacity of equipment, cable etc.;
b) earth fault or earth leakage protection to disconnect 4.39 In case of overhead lines all conductors of overhead lines
the supply if fault current exceeds the set limit of shall have minimum breaking strength 350 kg. There shall not
current for keeping contact potential within reasonable be more than one joint in a span and this joint shall have
safe values; electrical conductivity as per relevant Standard.
4.40 Design considerations for Load, permissible stresses and 1. * Horizontal clearance shall be measured when the line is at
factor of safety of structures, conductors of overhead lines shall maximum deflection
be as per Standards, CEA Reg. 57, whichever is stringent. 2. Line shall not be constructed / cross over any building. The
vertical clearance mentioned in above table shall be observed only
in case of existing situation for a temporary period till the line is
4.41 Clearances of lowest over head line conductor above
removed. The conductor under such conditions shall be adequately
ground, shall not be less than that mentioned in Table 4 and
insulated and attached with bare earthed bearer conductor having
Table 5. breaking strength 350 kg and supported at suitable intervals.
3. ** Vertical clearance shall be considered with maximum sag of
Table 4 Minimum Ground Clearance of AC OH line as per conductor
CEA Reg. 58 4. For line with voltages above 33kV add 0.3m for every 33kV or
(Clause 4.41) part thereof
OH line Clearance Clearance Clearance
System across the along the elsewhere Table: 7 Minimum Clearance of DC OH Line from Building
Voltage in street in m street in m as per CEA Regulation 61(4)
kV (Clause 4.42)
Less than 5.8 5.5 4.6*
0.65
Above 0.65 6.1 5.8 4.6*
DC Line Vertical Clearance Horizontal Clearance
and up to 11
Voltage in m in m
Above 11 6.1 5.8 5.2 100kV 4.6 2.9
and up to 33
200kV 5.8 4.1
300kV 7.0 5.3
400kV 7.9 6.2
NOTES:
500kV 9.1 7.4
1 *in case of insulated service line clearance may be 4.0m
600kV 10.3 8.6
2 For lines exceeding 33kV add 0.3m for every 33kV or part thereof 800kV 12.4 10.7
NOTES:
Table: 5 Minimum ground Clearance of DC OH line as per
1. * Horizontal clearance shall be measured when the line is at
CEA Reg. 58
maximum deflection
(Clause 4.41)
2. Line shall not be constructed / cross over any building. The
vertical clearance mentioned in above table shall be observed only
DC Voltage in kV Ground Clearance
in case of existing situation for a temporary period till the line is
of OH line in m
removed. The conductor under such conditions shall be adequately
100 6.1
insulated and attached with bare earthed bearer conductor having
200 7.3
breaking strength 350 kg and supported at suitable intervals.
300 8.5
3. ** Vertical clearance shall be considered with maximum sag of
400 9.4
conductor
500 10.6
600 11.8
4.43 Maximum span of overhead lines shall not be more the
800 13.9
guidelines given under Table 7 for 66kV and above lines and as
under Reg.96 for lines below 66kV of CEA Regulations in
4.42 Clearances of over head line conductor from building / regard of Technical Standards for Electric Plants and Lines
structure whether permanent or temporary, shall not be less than
4.44 Where conductors of different voltages are erected on the
that mentioned in Table 6 and Table 7.
same supports adequate provision shall be made to maintain
Table: 6 Minimum Clearance of AC OH line from building required clearances and guard the conductor of lower voltage
as per CEA Regulation 61(2) being charged above its normal working voltage by adopting
suitable method of construction
(Clause 4.42)
Particulars of OH Line Horizontal Vertical 4.45 Before commencing any construction activity of any
(AC) Clearance* Clearance** building / structure or storage near / under / over existing
in m in m electrical line (overhead or underground) or construction of any
Up to 650V 1.2 2.5 electrical line (overhead or underground) in vicinity of existing
Above 650V and up to 1.2 3.7 building / structure whether temporary or permanent, CEA
11kV Regulation 63 must be strictly observed.
Above 11kV and up to 2.0 3.7
33kV
4.46 While erecting cables underground required depths
depending on the location, protocols of maintaining clearances
NOTES: between other underground utility services and demarking the
routes must be observed. System shall be well planned
considering future requirements also.
4.47 Utility companies shall carry out work of laying / erecting Note — *Under 4.5 above, in case of installations belonging to or under
lines under intimation and in coordination with the local bodies. control of central government the authority shall be treated as central
The updated drawings, GPS mapping of underground lines with government instead of state government.
sections showing depth shall be maintained and made available
5.6 Designating Electrical Safety Officer having certain
to authority, local body and public on demand.
qualifications is mandatory for Generation, Transmission,
5 STATUTORY CONTROLS FOR IMPLEMENTATION Distribution companies and also for a registered factory having
OF SAFETY more than 250 kW electric load, for continuous monitoring of
Electrical safety, interpret Rule, Regulations, observe
Statutory provisions for safety are mandatory which recommend compliance.
conforming BIS / IEC standards. In case of any inconsistency it
has been mentioned that provisions of regulations will prevail. 6 ADMINISTRATIVE CONTROLS TO IMPLEMENT
This section gives eligibility criteria for persons to work on / SAFETY AT WORK PLACES
execute works of, Electrical Installations and prior permission
Setting norms, documenting, monitoring, creating awareness,
from the authorities, to commence supply of newly constructed
scheduling trainings, creating and maintaining records,
Electrical Installation or re-commence electrical supply after
maintaining inventory of safety and personal protection related
disconnection for 6 months or more.
equipment are parts of safety management which can be
5.1 The safety regulations made under the Electricity Act, achieved by administrative controls. This section gives
prohibits person to undertake electrical work of installation, guidelines to implement safety through administrative controls.
additions, alterations, repairs except such replacement of lamps,
6.1 At work places the employer / owner of electrical
fans, fuses, switches, domestic appliances / fittings of voltage
installation shall document and implement electrical safety
not exceeding 250V; unless he is holding license of an Electrical
programme which shall include:
Contractor; within the meaning and mandate of CEA
Regulations 2010. a) carrying out initial inspection before
installation is brought in use, to verify newly installed
5.2 No person can operate or carryout the duties incidental to
electrical equipment / system complies standards;
generation, transmission, conversion, distribution, or use of
electricity and work on electrical lines, apparatus unless he has b) scheduling protective / preventive and
been designated in that behalf. routine maintenance norms, its periodicity, following
manufacturer’s recommendations in that regard and
4.3 No person shall be designated unless he is .having certificate
lay down procedures for monitoring further which
of competency or holding permit issued, recognised by the
shall include routine inspection;
government, and his name is recorded in the register by the
concerned. c) laying down procedure to be adopted while
working on electrical installation for various tasks by
4.4 Engineers, Supervisors, Technicians working on electric
assessing Electrical Hazards of shock, arc flash; which
plants, operation and maintenance of transmission distribution
may arise under the particular task and work
system shall possess qualifications and shall have undergone the
environment and shall include Human Error;
training prescribed under CEA Regulations.
d) identifying PPE based on risk assessment and
4.5 Under following cases before energising electrical
evaluation of potential of Electrical Hazard related to
installation where statutory permission is obligatory as per CEA
task;
Regulations 2010 (amended to date), with any deviation if so
allowed by state government*, same shall be complied with; e) creating awareness amongst the persons
working on, by explaining them the probable exposure
a) Reg. 43: inspection and permission from Electrical to the potential of Electrical Hazard and its aftermath
Inspector to energise installation above Notified effects related to task, before they undertake or which
Voltage, or from Chartered Electrical Safety Engineer they may have to undertake;
for voltages up to Notified Voltage;
f) creating self discipline amongst persons
b) Reg. 32: inspection and permission from Electrical working on to use PPE before undertaking any task
Inspector to energise installation of generating unit depending on the potential of electrical hazard which
above certain capacity as decided by state they may be exposed to;
government; and
g) making provision of the team with required
c) Reg. 36: inspection and permission from Electrical number of persons qualified in that respect to handle
Inspector to commence Electrical supply for building the task having required experience;
above 15 m height having connected load and voltage
above certain limit as decided by state government.
h) keeping provision of required safe tools as t) maintaining updated records and keeping it
per requirement of work task; maintain such tools in ready as and when required by the authority in respect
good condition and readily available replacing after of Electrical Design comprising Drawings,
expiry of useful life and keeping such record; Calculation Sheets, equipment manufacturer’s
Manuals / Instructions, Inspection and Safety Audit
j) keeping provision of PPE related to the task Reports, routine and other Test Reports; and
and its potential hazard; maintain such PPE in good
condition and readily available and replacing such u) keeping adequate financial
equipment in due time before expiry and keeping such provisions/budget to attend maintenance needs
record; pointed out by technical team so that delay in
attending shall not lead to a possible disaster.
k) keeping provision of testing instruments
complying to standards making them available as and 6.2 The employer / owner of electrical installation shall
when necessary and keeping the record; undertake training programmes for Electrical Safety and
Survival Training based on IS/IEC standards comprising class
m) keeping provision of lock out / tag out room, on field with simulations, case studies, for the persons
devices, making them available as and when working on and exposed to electrical hazards which shall
necessary and keeping the record; include:

n) assigning duty / fixing responsibility for a) to handle the work task for which the person
monitoring compulsory use of PPE by the persons is authorised in accordance with the list of designated
involved in work task; persons;

p) scheduling periodical safety audit not b) permit to work system, sequence procedures
exceeding 3 years and as a part of it verify the to be followed, lock out / tag out programme, its
procedures laid down under programmes are followed significance, knowledge about lockout / tag out
and are in compliance as per the updated needs; devices, their installation, duties involved and
responsibilities;
NOTE — For periodical safety audits refer part 1,
section 17 of this standard. c) reading single line diagram, knowledge
about construction, safe operation of equipment /
q) maintaining updated list of designated persons system which a person is required to handle, care to be
showing tasks which they are authorised to undertake taken while switching on /off supply;
depending on their qualification, training and
experience; getting such document signed by the d) possible electrical hazards that might be
person authorising and person authorised as a token of present or arise in respect of that equipment / system
mutual understanding; and and avoid them;

r) assigning the duties Electrical Safety e) procedures and techniques to handle

Officer, keeping a check on performance; emergency if arose while in operation / during work;

NOTES: f) significance and inevitable use of proper

tools, insulating, shielding / PPE required in various
1: It is very important to designate only the eligible tasks as per the policies decided and procedures laid
person having required skills and experience for the down;
task to be handed over to him. It shall be impressed
on his mind that a small mistake, overlooking, g) knowledge to check, select and use tools,
connivance may endanger his or colleagues’ life and PPE, testing equipment which are correct and in sound
his responsibilities in such case. condition to perform specific duty;

2. It is mandatory to designate Electrical Safety officer for h) knowledge about limited and restricted
Generation, Transmission, Distribution, Electric Supply
approach boundary / distances and precautions to be
companies and factories within the meaning of Factory Act,
taken accordingly:
having electrical connected load more than 250 kW to
monitor provisions of Electrical Safety Regulations.
j) awareness for unqualified persons whose
s) in case of contract employees, they shall be possible exposure to the electrical hazard is
made aware of all possible hazards and made them unintentional;
follow safety related policies under the supervision of
k) response / survival in case of emergency
qualified person;
occurred due to shock, contact release;
 m) first few minutes are vital for the person services, so that no safety issues occur due to lack of
suffering from electrical shock, Immediate treatment coordination, conflicts thereof within different agencies working
after contact release is life saving. Hence training of on the project.
quick and appropriate First Aid treatment comprising
correct positioning of victim, preliminary checks of 7.4 Especially in respect of new and major works / projects a bar
consciousness, pulse, breathing, and further decision chart showing integration of all detailed activities of different
to provide cardio pulmonary resuscitation (CPR), use works shall be prepared and followed for safer working
of automated external defibrillator (AED), are most environment and coordinated activities.
important;
7.5 In respect of physical clearances to be maintained from the
Important Note: since persons responsible for first other services, norms shall be strictly followed. Approach
responding to medical emergency are not likely to be boundaries, arc flash boundaries shall be marked in front of
medical professionals, the training shall be conducted by a panel boards / equipment / apparatus.
person having medical background only. Incorrect
positioning, decision / method to give CPR / AED may turn 7.6 If there is existing overhead or underground line on work
out to be dangerous. Particularly for such emergency, site, necessary compliance as per CEA regulation 63, shall be
frequency of such training shall therefore be more and as
checked to maintain required mandatory clearances and prior
suggested by certifying body.
approvals shall be taken before commencing work.
n) scheduling refresher courses at intervals not
7.7 Where actual site conditions and the drawing differs, or if
exceeding 3 years where period is not mentioned
there is discrepancy in drawing such case shall be immediately
specifically; such courses shall include updated
brought to the notice and got resolved from concerned design
IS/IEC standards and new / modern technologies;
providers.
p) retraining of safety related practices shall be
7.8 Work must be executed strictly under supervision of the
taken up as and when required, if it is noticed that
competent person licensed in that regard and it will be the
there is a revision in the standard, the employees are
responsibility competent person to check the compliance with
not following the safety policy or such practices are
all standards, norms and statutory provisions. He shall watch the
not normally used or very rarely used during regular
workmen are using proper tools, tackles and safety devices
work tasks; and
while on work. He shall supervise proper integration and
q) training programme shall be documented coordination with other work activities so that no unsafe
mentioning all course details, attendees, and dates. condition will occur for the persons working on site.

6.3 The employer / owner of electrical installation shall ensure 7.9 Site Layouts of electrical distribution, circuit diagrams shall
that the safety audits as per IS 732 are carried out with in the be displayed at main and other major electrical panel board. All
prescribed time of this code and electrical engineers are aware control switchgears shall be properly marked. Stand-by
of the safety requirements in the latest IS/IEC standards. arrangement which is not connected to the supply whether
apparatus or cable shall be identifiable with proper marking.
7 INSTALLATION Instruction to be followed during emergency shall be marked in
conspicuous location.
The guidelines under this section generally apply for the safety
and precautions to be taken in new installation work or 7.10 All electrical panel boards, switchgears shall be provided
installation undergoing major modification / augmentation with ‘DANGER’ sign as per IS 2551 shown in sample figure
which is to be brought in to use after completion. The below:
supervision / strict vigil during progress of work, with special
attentions over hidden work are very important.

7.1 Electrical work shall be undertaken in conformation with the

statutory safety requirements and the guidelines,
recommendations given under this section. Work and
workmanship shall follow relevant Standards, Codes and
approved method of constructions.

7.2 Work shall be executed as per the approved drawing and

design. Any deviation which may arise due to actual worksite
conditions shall be got approved from concerned authority.
Record of such occurrences be maintained for future reference.

7.3 Proper planning of electrical work shall be done from the

point of view of coordination with the works relating to other
 8.4 In case of work in electric plant, transmission, distribution
system the person working-on should have undergone specific
training as per schedule I/II of CEA Regulations.

8.5 Under unavoidable conditions, when it is required to work

on live electrical installation persons working-on shall be
provided with required and well maintained tools, and
protective, safety devices such as gloves, rubber shoes, suitable
to respective voltage level; safety belts, ladders, platforms etc.,
to secure position while working, and depending on risk
assessment, PPE meeting requirements as per mentioned under
‘Electrical Hazards’ (see 14) and schedule III of CEA
regulations 2010.

8.6 Person working-on shall not take-up the work in hand

without proper tools, tackles and PPE. Also they shall not work
for which they are not designated.
FIG. 1 DANGER SIGN BOARD 8.7 Person supervising the work shall confirm that the workmen
are using the proper tools and PPE as per 8.5.
NOTE — It shall be noted that such sign somewhere creates
psychological effect and automatically sets an alarm in mind about
8.8 Warning boards / Tags shall be attached on or placed
the impending danger.
adjacent to the live apparatus and at the limits of the zone in
7.10 For availing and using electrical supply for construction which work may be carried out.
purpose safety instructions mentioned under 13 (13.1) shall be
followed. 8.9 While work is on, the observance of approach boundaries
shall be monitored strictly in respect of person working-on and
7.11 Before energising any installation for testing, other persons in vicinity.
commissioning adequate precautions shall be followed as
mentioned under 11 (11.1 thru 11.9) and CEA Reg. 45. 8.10 When dead mains are connected to live mains, al1
connections to the live parts shall be made last and in all cases
8 WORKING ON ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS phase sequence shall be checked to ensure that only like phases
are connected together before switching ON supply.
Guidelines under this section primarily apply for the works to be
taken in hand having nature of routine, predictive, preventive, 8.11 Designated persons shall be competent to apply the
break down maintenance / modification of the electrical instructions as per IS 5216-2; the chart for resuscitation of
installations which are already energised and are in use. person suffering from electric shock and he shall be available to
Following points give general guidelines for establishing safe attend emergency.
working conditions.
8.12 Care shall be taken that while carrying / moving ladders or
8.1 Before starting any work on line, adequate precaution shall any material, tools from one place to another the flashover
be taken so that lines and apparatus to be worked upon are distance / vertical clearance from overhead line is well
isolated from all sources of supply, proved discharged, dead, maintained and no material is stored / stacked below overhead
earthed and short-circuited. Measures shall be taken against, the line.
accidental / inadvertent energizing of the mains and apparatus
and also the adjacent line / conductor / apparatus in close 8.13 Before making trenches for cables care shall be taken to
vicinity, on which the person is going to work . check existing cable route markers. In absence of cable route
markers information shall be gathered from the concerned utility
8.2 Only competent, person having experience of the particular / local body about existence of any underground cables so that
task having qualifications as per statutory requirements and those do not get damaged and cause any flashover due to hitting
authorized / designated for the purpose, meeting requirements of digging tool leading to an accident. Cutting of soil within ten
mentioned under 4, shall work or assist the work on live mains meters of 132kV and above tower shall not be done without
and apparatus, written permission from the owner of tower.

8.3 Depending on task and required skill of operation, ADDITIONAL INSTRUCTIONS FOR WORKING ON
maintenance persons working-on shall have undergone INSTALLATIONS OF VOLTAGES 650V AND ABOVE
respective training as per the guidelines under 6.2. He shall be
able to read and understand single line diagram, identify main 8.14 Al1mains and apparatus shall be regarded as live and a
and alternative sources of electrical supply, interlocks, back- source of danger and treated accordingly.
feeds, standby arrangement.
8.15 No person shall work within the minimum working persons selected to work-on the task shall ensure and understand
distance from the exposed live mains and apparatus. The their responsibility that the portion of the installation where the
minimum working distance shall be in reference with the Table3 work is to be carried out is rendered dead and safe for working.
under # 4.17. It does not apply to operations carried out on
mains and apparatus which are so constructed as to permit safe 9.3 If more than one team is working on different tasks on the
operation within these distances. Exposed live equipment in the same line or apparatus, a permit-to-work should be issued by the
vicinity shall be cordoned off so that it does not hinder the issuing person to the person-in-charge of each team.
movement of the maintenance personnel.
9.4 For the purpose of saving life or time in the event of an
8.16 Persons authorised to work-on shall be thoroughly emergency, it may become necessary to start the work without
conversant with the complete power distribution system / being able to obtain the necessary permit-to-work; in such cases
network. Such person shall know location of disconnecting the action taken shall be reported to the person-in-charge of
devices, sources of electrical energy, sources of stored energy issuing permit at the instance and arrangement of mechanical
and possible hazards associated with the work to be undertaken. locking or physical presence of person at the switching location
shall be done so that nobody will switch-on supply till the work
8.17 Before any major work is undertaken complete plan shall under emergency is completed.
be prepared in respect of persons to be employed for job. They
NOTE — The words 'permit-to-work' and 'permit' for the purpose of
shall be briefed about task, possible hazards, arrangement to
this Section are synonymous.
handle emergency, job safety plan, responsibilities, sequence of
operation, time schedule and notification shall be sent to all 9.5 The circuit opening devices shall be locked in open position
concerned. Permit to Work (see clause 8) shall be taken, (see locking out / tagging out under point 9) before the work on
locking-out / tagging-out (see clause point No. 9) protocol shall the mains and apparatus is commenced.
be followed.
9.6 On completion of the work for which the permit- to-work is
8.18 No person shall work on electrical installation, test it
issued the locking devices shall be removed only by a competent
unless he is designated and has been issued a permit-to-work in
person and not until the work has been completed, short-
that respect and received instructions to proceed with the
circuiting and earthing removed and the concerned person-in-
work from supervisor who has confirmed the mains dead.
charge of the maintenance staff / team leader of the work task
8.19 The electrical circuits shall be broken only by designated should return the permit duly discharged to the issuing authority
persons by disconnecting switches, isolating links, unbolting who shall cancel it.
connections or racking out breakers. Where possible, the
isolation should be visibly checked. The re-closure of isolating 9.7 In all cases, the issue and return of permits shall be recorded
devices by unauthorised persons shall be prevented by adequate in a special register provided for that purpose. The permits shall
means by following Lock-out / Tag-out system. be issued for work adjacent to live electrical mains or apparatus
if so required.
8.20 The operations of proving dead shall be carried out by
short circuiting and earthing all phases which shall be done at 9.8 A model form of permit-to-work certificate is given in IS
both ends / sides of the point of working location. This 5216 (Part1).
arrangement shall be of adequate capacity to carry short circuit
NOTES:
current for such a time to operate protective device. This work
shall be done under the instructions and supervision of the 1 The permit is to be prepared in duplicate by the person-in-
person-in-charge of maintenance / team leader; charge of operation on the basis of message duly logged from
the person-in-charge of the work.
8.21 Persons working-on and persons not working on but in
vicinity of live lines shall be aware of and observe restricted 2 The original permit will be issued to the person-in-charge of
approach boundary / limited approach boundary (see 14) and work and the duplicate will be retained in the permit book. For
take care accordingly. further allocation of work by the permit receiving officer,
tokens may be issued to the workers authorizing them
individually to carry out the prescribed work.
9 PERMIT TO WORK
3 On completion of the work original shall be returned to the
Permit to work is important procedure to establish safe working
issuing officer duly discharged for cancellation.
condition following guideline shall be followed in this regard.
9.9 Permit books should be treated as important records. All
9.1 Working-on in respect of electrically charged major
sheets in the permit books and the books themselves should be
electrical installations, shall be carried out under ‘permit-to-
serially numbered. No page should be detached or used for any
work’ system. other except bonafide work. If any sheet is detached, a dated and
initiated statement shall then and there be recorded in the book
9.2 The permit-to-work certificate from the person-in-charge of
by the person responsible for it.
issuing the permit to the person-in-charge / Team leader of the
 9 . 1 0 Permit books shall be kept only by the person-in-charge spares and other material used for the job;
of operation who shall maintain a record of the receipts and c) notify all concerned the programme is over, clear
issues made by him. themselves from electrical installation to be re-energised
beyond approach boundary;
10 LOCKOUT / TAGOUT SYSTEM d) remove shorting links and grounding devices deployed
for the task;
This is important procedural part for the safety of persons e) perform necessary tests to confirm work undertaken has
working on electrical installation for maintenance, repairs and been completed satisfactorily;
allied work where de-energising of electrical supply for that f) remove lockout / tagout devices;
particular section is a must. This procedure shall be in g) notify all concerned supply is being restored; and
coordination with and be a part of ‘permit to work’. Under this it h) re-energise the section of installation on which work was
is ensured that the part / section /conductor /circuit of the undertaken through a designated person, watch for some
electrical installation single or in multiple, under which the time that the operations are normal before leaving the
work/s is/are to be carried out is are disconnected from electrical place.
source, locked, tagged, relieved of stored energy from springs /
capacitors mechanism secured to prevent from re-energising and 11 TESTING, COMMISSIONING / CHARGING /
tested before the work begins. ENERGISING AND HANDING OVER ELECTRICAL
INSTALLATION
10.1 It is necessary to prepare proper system and sequence of
operation for implementation of lock out / tag out system.
Pre-commissioning check points, safety precautions are given
Following points are important in this regard:
under section 18. It is important to follow the guidelines before
a) availability of current single line diagram in detail putting the installation in regular beneficial use.
showing flow of electrical energy from its original
source alternative source / back feeds, interlocks, 11.1 Before commissioning or charging any electrical
couplers; installation it must be confirmed that all pre-commissioning
b) tags, signs, labels identifying points and locations in line tests have been conducted as per section 18 of this standard on
with the single line diagram; site and the results are documented.
c) estimating time required for the task, if work is to be
continued in more than one shift, making appropriate 11.2 Certificates of satisfactory routine tests from manufacturer
arrangement to hand over responsibilities to the persons and under certain cases type and acceptance test from accredited
taking over task in the next shift by giving them status of laboratory in respect of equipment as may be necessary shall be
current work, balance work, role of person in-charge is available. Documentation of such test report / certificates duly
most important in this case, who shall design plan in signed by competent person are received which are to be
detail and get it executed properly; preserved as record.
d) arrangement for power to be interrupted by physical
break and not through de-energising by circuit interlock 11.3 In case of charging the installation after returning permit
from all available sources of electrical energy; and on completion of work, removal of the earthing and short-
e) test facility to verify disconnection of supply with proper circuiting devices shall be carried out in the reverse order to that
instrument; adopted for placing them, that is, the end of the earthing device
f) knowledge about possibility of induced energy; attached to the conductors of the earthed mains or apparatus
g) notifying all concerned about the programme before shall be removed first and the other and connected to earths
implementation of programme; shall be removed last. The conductor shall not be touched after
h) de-energising by designated person; the earthing device has been removed from it.
j) as far as possible, visual confirmation of opening of contact
blades; 11.4 Settings of all relays, protection devices shall be done
k) locking out further operation on control-gears and properly with respect to designed load, fault current, correlated
confirming, tagging with the mention of work undergoing, short circuit withstand capacity, tripping time with desired
names and contact details of the persons involved in the coordination. Simulation shall be done for testing and certificate
programme; from the appropriate person, agency; mentioning all details and
m) install grounding device on phase conductors rated for schedule of settings, coordination shall be preserved as record.
required fault duty;
11.5 In case of cables above 650V ‘high pot’ testing shall be
10.1 Restoring supply after completion of work: carried out before charging. After testing, care shall be taken to
discharge cable properly owing to the dielectric absorption
a) person in-charge shall satisfy himself that the work is which is particularly prominent in DC voltage testing.
complete in all respect from the team workers assigned
for the task and by confirming physically as well;
b) remove all tools and tackles used for the work along with
 11.6 It shall be checked that inspection has been carried out, c) predictive maintenance; which is to be attended as and
and there are no objectionable points / remarks in the Inspection when abnormality indicative of future breakdown
Reports (refer schedule IV, Forms I/II/III from CEA Safety hazardous condition is noticed in visual inspection or in
Regulations 2010). Any statutory permission / approval if the routine tests.
required under CEA safety regulations 2010 (see clause 5.5)
shall be complied with before testing / energising the 12.3 Maintenance schedules of routine and preventive shall be
installation. prepared depending on installation. To assess conditions of
installation, observations in periodical inspections comprising
11.7 Supplier of electricity shall observe obligations mentioned visual check and routine tests shall be recorded in standard
under CEA Regulation 16- Earth terminal at consumer’s forms / checklists. The defects noticed shall be attended on
premises, Reg. 31- Testing of Consumer’s installation and priority wise depending on the hazard.
Reg.33-Precautions against leakage before connection in respect
of release of supply. 12.4 Maintenance schedule in respect of electrical equipment /
apparatus shall be followed as per the recommendations of
11.8 No person shall apply test voltage to any mains unless he manufacturer and relevant code of practice.
is designated in that respect, has fulfilled conditions of permit-
to-work system and has warned all persons working on the NOTE — Delays, connivance in attending defects due to lack of
mains of the proposed application of test voltage. If any part financial provision or otherwise often leads to possible disaster. Under
the circumstances if it is seen that operation / function of such
which will thus become alive is exposed, the person-in-charge
component of system, apparatus is risky, adequate alternative shall be
of the test shall take due precautions to ensure that the exposed chosen and use of same shall be stopped by keeping it isolated.
live portion does not constitute danger to any person and limited
approach boundary is protected .It should also be ensured before 12.5 As per provision under Reg. 30 of CEA Safety
the application of test voltage, that no other permit-to-work has Regulations, installation shall be got self-certified / inspected
been issued for working on these mains /lines. from Chartered Electrical Safety Engineer or an Electrical
Inspector as per the mandate of state government depending on
11.9 Post commissioning check sheets, as-built / record Notified Voltage level.
drawings of completed work shall be prepared showing all
details like layout, distribution diagrams, capacities of NOTES:
switchgears, their protections, cables etc. This shall form part of
documentation to be preserved and handed over to the further 1. Under CEA Safety Regulations for Inspection Reports, Forms I / II
care taker. This record shall be readily available for persons / III have been specified under schedule IV of the regulations
depending on voltage level.
maintaining electrical installation, concerned authorities
whenever called for. 2. Installations in domestic dwellings and small commercial
establishments shall be got inspected at least once in five years. It
12 MAINTENANCE OF ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION is recommended that inspections in industrial and large
commercial establishments, public entertainment places shall be
For assuring continuous safety observing and complying with done annually.
the schedules of maintenance is most important. Owner of
electrical installation is responsible to maintain it safe. Routine, 12.6 Installations where designating Electrical Safety Officer is
Preventive, Predictive maintenance will keep installation safe, necessary as per 4.6 above, it shall his responsibility to interpret
avoid break-down maintenance; mitigate hazards like electric and comply statutory safety provisions, monitor the
shock, electric arc flash and electrical fires which results into maintenance activities including periodical inspections of
loss of human life and loss of livestock in thousands, besides installation, get it tested at least once in year, check further
huge loss and damages to property. This section covers compliance regarding defects noticed.
guidelines on the aspect of safety related electrical maintenance:
12.7 In case of supplier’s installation within the premises of
12.1 Every maintenance activity in a low voltage installation consumer, supplier of electricity shall maintain the installation
shall be followed by the necessary tests recommended in 6 of in safe condition up to the point of commencement of supply.
IS732 : 2019.
NOTE — As per the definition given under Reg. 16 of CEA
12.2 Maintenance can be divided broadly into three types: Safety Regulations ‘point of commencement of supply’ shall
mean the point at the incoming terminal of switchgear installed
a) routine maintenance; which is of general nature, period by consumer (immediate after energy meter).
and frequency of which shall be decided based on actual
use, work conditions, site environment; 12.8 Maintaining resistance value of the earthing system /
b) preventive maintenance; which shall cover protections, equipotential bonding, considering loop impedance within
useful and safe working life of apparatus, equipment, permissible limits is very important and shall be a priority. To
component of system and recommended replacement in check and assess disconnection of supply with in the stipulated
due time after expiry of that period; and time, earth fault loop impedance test shall be taken at least once
in a year. If vertical earth electrodes (such as rods/pipes/plates)
are provided, resistance of these electrodes shall be tested. when found necessary from the expertise. Changes if required in
Continuity of earth conductor shall be checked and maintained settings shall be done. Such record shall be preserved.
intact. Connections at earth terminal shall be cleaned and
tightened. Especially under the corrosive atmosphere these 12.15 Tests related with harmonics shall be conducted
points shall be of more importance. especially where non-linear loads exist. Corrective action to
mitigate effects and bring the values within permissible limit as
12.9 It shall be checked that illumination level is required in per IEEE: 519 be taken immediately.
respect of operation and maintenance of apparatus, equipment,
system is up to the mark as per standards. Any depreciation in 12.16 Electric panel / switchgear room, meter room, ducts for
lux level if noticed shall be reinstated. electrical cables shall be for specific use only and always be
maintained clean, no encroachment shall be allowed within, and
12.10 Under visual inspection surface wiring and cable work easy access to same shall be maintained without any obstacles
shall be checked whether it is rigid and intact. There shall not be on its way.
any loose wiring, open joints. Insulation shall be checked for
damages and reasons, causing such damages due to contact with 12.17 Raceways installed below ground / false flooring shall be
sharp edges, heat, rodents. Necessary preventive action shall be maintained clean and free from entry of rodents, water or other
taken. things which may cause damages to the cables.

12.11 All electrical panels shall be checked from inside from 12.18 Locations where access is restricted, it shall be checked
the point of view of ingress. Door gaskets shall be replaced that appropriate system to prevent entry of an authorised persons
wherever necessary. Especially under dusty environment this is existing and is in proper condition.
check will be of high importance. Smooth mechanical operation
of panels like door opening / closing, racking in and out, locking 12.19 Wherever sub-stations, panel rooms are located in
system shall be checked. Identification marking of all basement, seepages / leakages and working of de-watering
switchgears and circuits is adequate. Insulating mats, marking of system its automation shall be checked periodically and
approach boundaries (see Fig. 2) are in place and intact. particularly in rainy season action. Necessary action shall be
taken if found not in order.

12.20 Necessary precaution in respect with oil filled

transformer is taken in respect with insulating properties,
moisture content, oxidation and sludge, acidity, DDF, DGA,
leakages if any and oil level to be maintained.

12.21 Overhead lines shall be checked periodically and

maintained in respect with permissible sag, allowable joints,
guarding arrangement, interference of trees, creepers,
construction of unauthorised structures / storage below
endangering clearances, encroachment on right of way. ,
interference of other overhead services of LV systems, like
cables of TVs, internet, telephones using overhead line
structures / crossing electric lines with unsafe clearances.
FIG. 2 APPROACH BOUNDARIES
12.22 Condition of poles shall be checked especially metal
12.12 It shall be checked that covers of switchgears, DBs, fuse
tubular poles which are susceptible to corrosion and mostly
cut out boxes are in place, door of electrical panels are closed /
occurs at the bottom portion, often due to missing pole caps
locked so that no live parts shall be left exposed.
leading to accumulation of water within.
12.13 Points of terminations, joints shall be inspected, loose
12.23 Earthing of poles / OH line structures and other
contacts, corrosion occurring at those points and heating due to
accessories shall be checked and tested. Counterpoise earthing is
such condition is most common cause of electrical trouble. Such
not exposed and is at required depth.
points shall be cleaned and tightened. Wherever necessary, use
of bimetallic lugs shall be done. Continuity of conductors 12.24 Necessary repainting with anti corrosive paint shall be
testing as specified in 6.2.3.2 of IS 732 : 2019 shall be done to the overhead line poles / structures, as per necessity.
conducted in all final circuits. In case of major installations, hot
spots in electrical panels / system shall be checked by thermal 12.25 Required fencing / entry barriers in respect with
camera, and needful action be taken if required. distribution transformer centres, switching stations, sub stations
existing especially in public places shall be well maintained.
12.14 All protective devices shall be calibrated, tested, proper
coordination be verified at least once in two years or as and 12.26 Operation of required and mandatory fire protection
devices and systems shall be checked. It shall be well
maintained. Class of fire extinguishers shall be verified and e) Cables of apparatus and portable electrical tools shall be
refilled in due time. Fire drill be conducted as per schedule and double insulated with one core for earth. Extension of
record be preserved. Periodical training sessions in respect of wires / cables shall be with proper electrical accessories
operating staff shall be conducted to handle the situation in case
of fire emergency. 13.2 Temporary electrical installation in temporarily erected
sheds for exhibition, function, ceremonies etc.:
12.27 In case of maintenance of underground cable work after
locating fault and attending it by jointing, record shall be a) At most of such places generator is a source of supply.
maintained along with geographical location and date of Though the installation of generator is temporary, its
attending the fault. earthing for neutral and body shall be done with
appropriate care. Load on it shall be kept balanced and
12.28 Any change occurred due to civil work in respect of neutral current shall be watched. In case of more than
required minimum depth of cable shall be got corrected / one source of supply care shall be taken that no back
adequate preventive measures be taken. feeding will occur. To limit excess current due to
inductive load e.g. tube lights with conventional ballasts,
12.29 Checking of strain relief arrangement of cables whether use of capacitor banks may be judiciously.
in place and not causing any load on terminals shall be done.
b) Under such sheds where cloth curtaining is major part,
12.30 Special care and watch round the year for street feeder all light sources shall be erected away from such curtains
boxes shall be taken to keep the doors closed and locked. so that heat generated in the light fitting will not lead to
Earthing is intact, termination within are proper. cause any fire.

12.31 It shall be checked that all tools, tackles, PPE are in c) In such type of installation mains are tied at upper level.
place, well maintained and in safe usable condition and Such mains and wires shall not be bunched. The mains
sufficient in number. Visual checks and tests shall be carried out shall be run with proper separation between each phase
for confirmation. Storage place and arrangement shall be proper and neutral. These mains shall not touch directly to any
so that no damages caused because of lack of such facility. metal part / structure / cloth laden wooden supports;
without strong insulation base.
12.32 Batteries shall be maintained as per the schedule and
checked if there is any swelling. Under normal conditions d) Number of taps on wire mains are taken to provide
batteries shall be replaced before expiry of recommended useful electric supply for light, fan or any power outlet. This is
life. Battery rooms are kept clean and are well ventilated. done by opening insulation of mains. Utmost care shall
be taken so that all taps / joints are covered with proper
13 TEMPORARY ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS insulation.

Temporary electrical installations are vulnerable to electrical e) In open spaces swinging of loose hanging wires occurs
accidents and fire. Following additional care for temporary due wind. There are chances that they may come in
electrical installation is important from the point of safety: contact with sharp edges of metal sheets / sections used
in the temporary shed and cause damage to the
13.1 Temporary installation at construction sites:
insulation. This can lead to leakages in metal structure
a) Wiring of temporary electrical installation shall be endangering human life. A special care shall be taken to
erected and protected in such a way that no possible totally avoid such situations.
mechanical damage will occur due to construction
14 ELECTRICAL HAZARDS INVOLVING IN USE /
activity.
OPERATION AND WORKING ON ELECTRICAL
b) Water is a major hazard on construction site; hence INSTALLATION
locations of panel board and other apparatus shall be
General
protected in such way that use of water on construction
site will not will not come in contact and endanger the Domestic users, workers and even persons whose association
safety of installation and persons working on site. with electricity is not intentional but are in vicinity of electrical
installation, have been found to be victims of electrical
c) Electrical panels installed in open spaces shall be
accidents. Three basic hazards which emphasize need of safe
protected from rain, dust and other adverse climatic
conditions for using / operating / working-on and safety
conditions. Double insulated panels with higher degree
precautions to be adopted depending on Risk Assessment are:
of ingress protection (eg IP65/66) are preferred.
A) Electrical shock ( 14.1 to 14.4);
d) At the point of power outlet earth leakage protection
shall be provided. B) Electric Arc Flash ( 14.5 to 14.13)
 C) Electric Fire ( 14.14 to 14.26) NOTE — The recommended design aspects in respect of
clearances to be maintained, safe working distances have
Following points will give guidelines to deal with the electrical been mentioned under 4.12, 4.13, 4.17 and 4.19. These
hazards. precautions generally apply and shall especially be
observed for workplaces and other public places.
A) ELECTRIC SHOCK HAZARD
14.3.2 Protection under Fault Condition arising out of indirect
14.1 Electric shock is physiological effect resulting from electric contact and failure of basic insulation and including accidental
current through human or animal body. If current exceeding 30 contact with live electric part which shall comprise:
mA passes near the heart of human body and is not interrupted
within very short time, it could turn out to be dangerous. The a) automatic disconnection of power supply; to the
burns caused by path of current passing through body may be circuit / equipment in which fault has occurred; within
less superficial but are deep and penetrating, hence very restricted time and limit of prospective touch potential
complex and serious. To avoid such instance, it is therefore between exposed conductive parts of installation and other
important that hazardous live electrical parts shall not be extraneous conductive parts. This safety measure is called
accessible and under fault condition, accessible conductive as protective equipotential bonding and automatic
parts, not forming part of any electric circuit, shall not turn out disconnection of supply. Protective device shall be
to be hazardous. selected taking in to account the characteristics of fault
current, fault loop impedance of that particular circuit /
14.2 Shock Risk hazard assessment shall comprise following equipment / section.
points:
b) automatic disconnection of supply by means with
a) system voltage level, RCD as per IS 12640 (Part 1) : 2016, in case of leakage
current exceeding threshold of safe limit. Selection of
b) possibility of shock and its potential,
RCD shall be made judiciously depending on
c) condition of installation, applicability, characteristics of residual current which
correlates with type of load, linear / nonlinear (refer 4.16,
d) Protections provided in case of TNC-S system RCD will work as an additional
protection against electrical shock).
e) persons handling the task,
c) precise design, installation and maintenance of
f) persons not related with the task but in vicinity, protective earthing viz. resistance of protective conductors
approach boundaries*, and and joint resistances, earth fault loop continuity to ensure
operation circuit protective device to disconnect the
g) requirement of PPE. supply in the event of a fault and limit the rise in potential,
of any exposed conductive parts during the fault more
NOTE* — Approach Boundaries may be referred from than 32 volt is necessary.
NFPA 70E 2018 Table 130.4(D)(a) and (b).
d) provisions to eliminate hazards arising out of transfer of
14.3 Protections required can be categorised in two parts: potential, ground potential rise during the fault in sub-
stations / lightning strike by strict observation of restricted
(a) Basic protection; and
entry zones, carpeting the probable affecting area with
layer of stone metal to reduce step / touch potential and
(b) Protection under fault condition.
continuous maintenance of earthing system comprising
14.3.1 Basic protection shall comprise adopting measures for earth mat to keep earth grid impedance sufficiently below
prevention of direct contact with a conductor which is normally the designed value.
live and shall include:
e) Protective equipotential bonding required to minimise
a) basic insulation, (of hazardous live parts); any potential difference between exposed conductive parts
and extraneous conductive parts during a fault;
b) barriers, (an arrangement which prevents access from
any usual direction against direct contact with live part); NOTES

c) enclosures, (an arrangement surrounding hazardous 1. Extraneous conductive part shall be judiciously identified
internal live parts of an equipment, to prevent access); else could turn out to be hazardous. It generally is
hazardous; accessible and in contact with general mass of earth,
for example, metal pipelines in building, its
d) marking of approach boundaries; and resistance between conductive part and MET is low
enough to limit dangerous touch voltage to human
e) use of PPE. beings.
 2. Also check provisions under Reg. 41(vii) (x) of NOTE* — Methodology for calculating Incident Energy can be
CEA safety Regulations. referred from latest version of IEEE 1584: Guide for Performing Arc
Flash Hazard Calculations. This will help determine Incident Energy
14.4 For domestic dwellings, care shall be taken in respect of potential and Arc Flash Boundary.
positioning of power outlets, keeping it out of reach of children,
14.10 The Arc Flash Hazard shall be handled at three levels:
use of shuttered sockets and proper location of distribution
boxes with doors / covers in place, appliances / gadgets /
a) eliminate chances of occurrence (see 14.11);
equipment with class II insulation, conformity with Standards
and provided with heavily insulated cords, plug tops with earth b) mitigate hazard /incident energy (see 14.12);
pin, efficient earthing system etc. It shall be important to
mitigate chances of occurrences of hazards by observing these c) use of PPE (see 14.13).
points considering very limited knowledge level of the domestic
users. 14.11 Following factors shall be taken care of towards
eliminating chances of arc flash hazard:
B) ARC FLASH HAZARD
a) de-energise the section of installation before taking up
14.5 Arc Flash which is rapid release of energy in the form of work in hand with all due care mentioned under clause
hot plasma, metal vapours of arcing electrodes, ionised gases No. 8 and 9;
forming conductive path between phases, neutral or ground
through a dielectric medium / air; creating severe thermal effect, b) strict observance and monitoring of maintenance
intense light, UV emissions, volumetric expansion / blast with schedules is most important, all protective equipment
creation of toxic gases, metal vapours, shrapnel / splinters and shall always be maintained in safe, reliable working
high sound waves, causing most serious effects on persons condition;
around and collateral damages to the assets. It could be difficult
to predict direction of Arc Flash due to magnetic field created c) adequate measures shall be taken to restrict entry of
by short circuit current and hence resulting movements of Arc rodents, reptiles by continuous checking of condition of
Plasma. Arc may track path through body from surface of body ingress protection during maintenance and taking
to earth in case of HV systems. needful action to keep the equipment vermin proof;

14.6 Quantifying the hazard of arc flash events in the form of d) take care while using tools within work area and after
radiation, convection, metal splash, and plasma jets; during completion of work, be vigilant to remove all of them
handling energized electrical equipment and steps to mitigate at from within. Forgotten tools inside the enclosure / near
different levels are therefore important. exposed conductive parts have been one of the causes of
flashovers;
14.7 Arc Flash Risk Assessment shall be carried out from the
point of view of possibility of occurrence, potential severity of e) use precise protections with fastest tripping time;
injury, damage to health and collateral damages to system /
f) marking / labelling on the equipment and observing
assets.
precautions for Restricted Approach Boundary, Limited
14.8 Important factors to assess likelihood of hazard are; work Approach Boundary Arc Flash Boundary; necessary
task*, state of installation, condition of maintenance, visible PPE as per the classification when working while live.
deterioration, loose contacts, overheating, history of arcing, and See sample below:
any incident reported in that connection; protections provided
for example, against over current and operating time, other
devices to mitigate arc energy. WARNING
NOTE* — Possibility of occurrence also relates to the work ARC FLASH AND SHOCK HAZARD
task to be performed. Reference may be taken from 2 APPROPRIATE PPE REQUIRED 2
Table 130.5 (C) of NFPA 70E 2018 ‘Possibilities of
occurrence of Arc Flash Incident’ depending on
ARC FLASH PPE LEVEL 2 TASK REQUIRING PPE
various work tasks 1. Work on energised conductor /
Working Distance > 45 cm
Arc Rating of PPE 8cal/cm2 min. circuit
14.9 Severity of Arc Flash Hazard depends on incident energy* 2. Removing covers / opening
Arc Flash Boundary 1.8m
which is proportional to the magnitude of fault current, arc doors
clearing time, and distance from the arc electrode, which further 3. Racking in / out
results in irreversible damages to skin / body due to burns of
various degrees, damages ears / hearing eyes / optical system SHOCK PROTECTION – 415 V AC
and mental trauma. Insulating glove: class O

Limited Approach Boundary --------------- 1.0 m

Restricted Approach Boundary ------------- 0.3 m boundaries; person authorising and supervising
such work and job completion report.
CAUTION Only designated persons to work on
Follow all safety procedures 2. Works may be carried out outside the restricted
Use proper PPE boundary for the task like visual inspection,
Thremography for which above documentation is
Location Panel details not necessary.

FIG.3 LABELING RISK HAZARD AND PPE b) depending on risk assessment switchgears and enclosures
shall conform IEC 62271-200 to pass arc test and IAC
NOTES: classification (internal arc classified).

1. Routine operation within Limited Approach Boundary c) reducing the arcing time is very important; it results in
may be allowed when the installation and its reducing the PPE level requirements and limiting both
maintenance is carried out in conformation with the direct and collateral damage to equipment, therefore
safety norms and guidelines of the equipment over current protections shall have shortest possible
manufacturer with certification wherever required. operating time.

2. Approach Boundaries may be referred from Table d) to reduce fault levels, making use of fault limiting device,
130.4(D) (a) and (b) of NFPA 70 E 2018. use of precise fuses to limit let through fault current, use
of circuit breakers with adjustable trip settings to allow
3. References for Arc Flash Boundaries may be shaping of device tripping curve in accordance with the
taken from Table 130.7(C)(15)(a) and (b) of NFPA arc flash level; may be considered.
70 E 2018.
e) use of Arc eliminators / ultra fast Earth Switching may be
g) no work shall be undertaken in insufficient light or considered.
obstructed view of work area and inadequate clearances.
f) use of Optical Relays, triggering operation with the flash
h) when the circuit is disconnected by current limiting of light associated with the arc flash.
protective device, it shall not be manually re-energised
unless it is confirmed it was because of overload and not g) remote operation of switches outside the arc flash
because of fault. Repetitive reclosing of switching boundary will reduce hazard as incident energy level
devices without confirmation of clearing fault may turn drops off exponentially with increase in working
out to be dangerous distance.

14.12 Mitigation of Arc Flash Hazard NOTE — Many flashover incidences occur while racking-
in or racking-out of the equipment. So, controlling such
Under the circumstances where working on / in vicinity of live operation remotely through distant operating switches,
installation could not be avoided, following points shall be taken push buttons, HMI screens or over networking through
into consideration toward mitigation of arc flash hazard: SCADA system etc., is effective for handling hazard.

a) work on energised installation within restricted boundary 14.13 Protective Clothing, PPE
shall be permitted with proper documentation* and only
under emergency situations where alternative Level 1 and 2 measures mentioned above are initial important
arrangement does not exist and when de-energising is steps towards mitigating danger of electrical hazards. However,
likely to cause / impose increased risk like interruption when risk associated with the hazard is not adequately brought
of life support, emergency alarm systems, ventilation under control use of protective clothing and/or PPE is inevitable
systems and where task to be handled is not possible while working under restricted boundary and within arc flash
under de-energised state. boundary as per classification depending on Risk Assessment.

NOTE*: 14.13.1 PPE is meant to provide thermal resistance as well as

limit incident energy of Arc Flash to the non-dangerous degree,
1. Documentation shall comprise reason for working on without exceeding threshold to second degree burns as per the
energised installation, task to be handled with stoll curve*. Appropriate selection of PPE shall be based on risk
anticipated time period, related to the task, risk assessment and potential exposure to incident energy.
assessment based on incident energy; approach
boundaries and actual working distance; PPE NOTE* — Stoll curve shows human tissue tolerance to
depending on risk assessment, provisions to restrict heat, to predict onset of second-degree burn injury.
entry of unauthorised person within approach
14.13.2 Product may be evaluated depending on needs, chosen respective to risk assessment. Table 8
estimated incident energy and accordingly appropriate level of mentions level of protection with respect to incident
clothing, garments, sock-hood / face sheets / visor, gloves energy.
having arc thermal resistance; flame retardant behaviour should
be selected. Table: 8 Classification as per IEC 61482-1-2

14.13.3 Protective Clothing Class 1 (basic protection) ATPV 4 cal/cm2 (16.75 J/cm2
Test level 158 kJ to 24 cal/cm2 (99.78 J/cm2)
It is important that all parts of a garment (upper and lower
body), the fabric, stitching material and other assemblies shall Class 2 (increased ATPV > 24 cal/cm2 (99.78
have arc thermal resistance and flame retardant behaviour. protection) Test level 318 kJ J/cm2)
There shall not be exposed metal parts / accessories on clothing.

14.13.4 Care shall be taken to check the characteristics of the

clothing (including under garments) to be worn and its coverage NOTE — Under NFPA 70E 2018, Arc Flash PPE have been
classified in to 4 categories; 1, 2, 3, and 4 ranging from 4
over all parts body within arc flash limit. Fabric itself shall not
cal/cm2 to 40 cal/cm2. Table 130.7(C)(15)(a) and (b) specifies
cause injury or aggravate risk to person wearing it, since it has
Arc Flash PPE categories for various types of equipment with
tendency to burn to extent depending on the material. respect to voltage level, fault current, clearing time, working
distance for AC and Dc respectively. Table 130.7(C)(15)(c)
14.13.5 Characteristics can be checked on how it reacts when recommends Arc rated clothing and PPE as per Arc Flash
exposed to an arc, catching flames, cease burning time after Category. References from these tables may be taken for
flame, break-open / hole formation, melting, charring, shrinking, selecting Clothing and PPE
dripping, embrittlement, debris formation and limit Incident
Energy to non dangerous degree. It shall pass test mentioned 14.13.9 PPE Product to be used shall be labelled with:
under IEC 61482-1-1 (for open arc) / IEC 61482-1-2 (Box test)
depending on the type of exposure for assessing respective a) name of manufacturer;
characteristics of protective clothing, PPE.
b) production details for example, batch No., date, expiry;
NOTE — Under open Arc heat transfer is in all directions and
specimen is mainly exposed to heat radiation. In box test heat c) conformity with Standard;
transfer is focussed and specimen in addition to radiation; is
exposed to convection, metal splash. Therefore selection shall be d) arc rating and applicability / classification / category; and
specific
e) instructions for users regarding care, maintenance and
14.13.6 The product to be evaluated for thermal resistance as usable life.
per IEC 61482-1-1 and be assigned ATPV (or break open) value
and heat attenuation Factor or as per IEC 61482-1-2 and 14.13.10 Depending on assessed values of arc energy, direct
categorised under class 1 or class 2, shall be tested in exposure incident energy, arc rated clothing alone does not
accordance with IS 15758 (Part 4) : 2020 / ISO 15025 assure full protection. It has been observed that most severely
(Protective clothing- protection against flame- Method of test affected part of body during arc flash incidence were hands,
for limited flame spread) and classified according to ISO 14116 forearms, head and neck. Therefore, selection of following PPE,
(protective clothing- protection against heat and flame. Limited tested and certified as per standards, shall be made as per
flame spread materials, material assemblies and clothing) in necessity to limit transmitted incident energy below the limits in
respect with restricted flaming period and further spread. reference with stoll curve:

14.13.7 In line with test procedures as above, product claiming a) Arc rated flash suit;
compliance with the IEC 61482-2 shall be selected
b) Arc rated flash suit hood / face mask / sock hood
appropriately depending on classification / type of exposure and
/balaclava;
risk assessment.
c) Arc rated gloves;
14.13.8 Hazard Risk Classification as per IEC 61482-1-1 and
61482-1-2 is based on type of exposure as below:
d) Safety glasses / goggles;
a) In respect with open arc hazard, the assessed ATPV /
e) Hearing protection for ear canals;
Break Open value 4 cal/cm2 (167.5 kJ/m2) shall be a
baseline of arc thermal resistance in respect of f) Leather footwear; and
protective clothing / PPE.
(vii) Hard hat liner.
b) In respect with an arc in limited volume / enclosed box
the product tested and classified as below shall be C) ELECTRIC FIRE HAZARD
14.14 It has been observed in many fire cases electrical short the rated capacity, resulting into Heating of conductor
circuit / flashover is recorded as cause of fire. Overall and gradually deteriorating insulation and ultimately
percentage of such cases has been seen to be remarkable. giving way to break down at some point;
Overhead conductor line faults / snapping; failures in
transformers, lightning also have been found as causes of fire NOTE — Accidental damage to insulation usually becomes known
and can be repaired but gradual deterioration of insulation may
Fires result in huge loss of assets, properties and irreversible
remain unnoticed and hence is very risky.
damages to health and sometime loss of life every year. It is
therefore important to look and act on this issue seriously and on B) inadequate size of earth conductor, less than the
priority. capacity required to carry prospective fault current
safely to earth without heating for such a time period
NOTES:
to operate protective device within that time, resulting
1. Automatic disconnection supply within the specified into heating damaging / melting self (if earth wire is
time in IS 732 / IS 3043, provide protection against insulated) and adjacent wire’s insulation;
thermal effects and fire to an extent.
c) poor workman ship, wrong method of construction /
2. In order to ensure safety in L.V system, Tests installation, number of wires and their enclosures
prescribed in this document section 18 shall be carried (conduits / trunkings) not correlating to maintain
out during erection and commissioning and adequate space factor resulting into overcrowding
periodically. wires within enclosures; leading to heating;

14.15 Protection against Fire Caused by Electrical d) sub-standard material, defective workmanship while
Equipment installing / damaging insulating while drawing wires
through conduits;
14.15.1 Persons, livestock and property shall be protected
against damage or injury caused by heat or fire which may be e) defaults in maintenance schedules, extended use after
generated or propagated in electrical installations by taking into expiry of life;
account the requirements of this standard and the instructions of
equipment manufacturers. The heat generated by electrical f) additions and alteration carried out by unqualified
equipment shall not cause danger or harmful effects to adjacent person which occur many times during interior work;
fixed material or to material which may foreseeable be in
g) inadequate load distribution and circuits design;
proximity to such equipment. Electrical equipment shall not
present a fire hazard to adjacent materials.
h) over rating of MCBs / MCCBs / fuses, not correlating
safe current carrying capacity of wires or under rating
NOTE: of short circuit withstand capacity;
Damage, injury or ignition may be caused by effects, such as:
j) improper terminations, loose contacts;
a) heat accumulation, heat radiation, hot elements;
b) reduction of the safe function of electrical equipment, k) missing covers, open doors of DBs / panels leading to
for example, protective devices such as protective entry of vermin;
switchgear, thermostats, temperature limiters, seals of
cable penetrations and wiring systems; m) inadequate ventilation;
c) overcurrent;
d) insulation faults and/or arcs causing interference; n) outlived batteries of UPS;
e) harmonic currents;
f) lightning strikes; p) heat dissipating luminaries or their ancillaries in close
g) overvoltages; and
contact with wooden material, drapery, for example,
h) inappropriate selection or erection of equipment.
halogen / incandescent lamps, control gear boxes,
14.16 In fire triangle heat is one of the three components. Faults drivers of LED lights;
/ defects in electrical installation are very much likely to result
in generation of heat, failure of insulation which further leads to q) development of faults in equipment, for example,
sparking / arcing. Second component Fuel in any form interiors, failure of thermostat in heating equipment, bursting of
papers, drapery etc. meets third component oxygen which is capacitor of air-conditioning unit;
easily available and initiates fire.
r) prolonged / continuous use of equipment not designed
14.17 Cause / causes leading to fire in buildings are: for continuous rating; and

a) initial wrong design like undersize cross section of s) accumulation of trash, use of space near electrical
wires with respect to load characteristics, short circuit panels as store-room.
with stand capacity or subsequent overloading beyond
14.18 Causes leading to fire out of flashovers on electrical lines f) lapses in regular maintenance of transformer, carrying
and equipment: out routine tests to check, watch and act upon to keep
all parameters and within permissible limits (see
For causes leading to arc flash reference may be taken from arc 12.19);
flash hazard (see 14.8 and Note below).
g) failure in complying safety regulations related to oil
14.19 Cause / causes of fire due to overhead lines are (see 4.22, 4.23, 4.24); and
summarised as below:
h) transformer bushing failure.
a) snapping of conductors due to improper stringing /
defective joints or exceeding limit of allowable joints 14.22 Lightning may also lead to fire in buildings, electrical
in OH conductor; sub-stations if:

b) non provision of Guarding, leading snapping / a) adequate protection as applicable and specified in IS
snapped live conductor coming in contact with the 62305: 2010, Reg. of 44(3) and 74 CEA Safety
flammable material stored below or crops (usually dry Regulations is not provided;
at the time of harvesting);
b) system not designed properly;
c) inadequate spans leading to sag endangering
requirement of vertical clearances; c) Installation methods and procedures of Lightning
protection system are not followed strictly; and
d) growth of trees below electrical lines or branches of
adjacent trees interfering OH line; and d) earth resistance not maintained below the required
limit.
e) inadequate setting of relays and rating of correlating
CTs in sub-station, leading to non tripping or delayed 14.23 General guidelines for prevention, remedial measures to
tripping of lines; avoid aggravation / mitigate chances of fire:

14.20 Transformer Fires a) As mentioned under 4 correct initial design is foundation

of safety, reference may be taken from the points
Transformer fires differ from fires occurred due to short circuit mentioned there under ( for example, see 4.8, 4.9,
in wiring installations. It has an added component transformer 4.16). Therefore, electrical design of new project shall
oil (usually mineral oil) within equipment, which works as fuel. be precise and validated.
Third component oxygen is available outside the transformer.
Hence once fault gets generated within transformer, partial NOTE — IS 732 : 2019 — 300 milliamps RCD is recommended
to prevent fire due to leakage current in the building.
discharge occurs. It affects dielectric properties of insulating
material and oil, arc generated. This leads to formation of hot
b) In case of existing installations subsequent remedial
vapours composed of hydrocarbon gases, pressure rises
action in respect with design may be difficult but shall
resulting into rupture of tank. Once these hot vapours come in
not be avoided. Till then at locations vulnerable to
contact with the oxygen in atmosphere Fire / Explosion takes
fire, warning notices in respect of hazard risk shall be
place.
displayed for extra attention and vigilance.
14.21 Causes leading to and factors aggravating transformer fire
c) Strict observation and monitoring of scheduled tests and
risk are:
maintenance will eliminate most of issues
endangering safety and occurrences of fire (see
a) Contamination of moisture and oxidation of oil,
maintenance of electrical installation under 12)
sludge formation leading to degradation of oil,
resulting in loss of insulating properties;
d) As per norms adequate provisions related to fire fighting
and detection, routine fire audit and further
b) ageing leading to degradation of oil and insulating
compliance will mitigate chances of fire, control
material;
aggravation and limit devastation (see 4.7, 4.38).
c) partial discharge, generation of hot spots in winding;
14.24 Additional / specific guidelines for prevention, remedial
d) overloading, resulting into acceleration of ageing measures to avoid aggravation / mitigate chances of Fire in
process due to heating and leading to deterioration of buildings:
oil and insulating material;
a) use of FR / FRLSH / FS cables may be made (see
e) inadequate ventilation affecting dissipation of heat 4.8);
leading to fast ageing of oil and insulating material;
 b) Overloading shall be brought in to control by a) Reference may be taken from arc flash hazard (see
replacing wires of suitable higher size / diverting load 14.10); and
on other circuits having spare capacity / installing
additional circuits / reducing load on circuits; b) care shall be taken to keep space within arc flash
boundary clean without any storage of material prone
c) undersize earth conductor shall be replaced with to fire.
adequate size or installing additional conductor of
same material and size. Earthing shall be got tested; 14.26 Additional guidelines for prevention, remedial measures
to avoid aggravation / mitigate chances of transformer fire.
d) to maintain space factor in wire enclosures, number of
wires shall be reduced and reinstalled in separate IEC 61936-1 (8.7) gives categorical approach in 2 parts:
additional conduit / trunking;
a) Precaution to fire victim:
e) to avoid damage to wire insulation during installation, 1) space separation from origin of fire;
bushes shall be used at ends of conduits while drawing
wires, burr at the end of metal conduits shall be 2) flame propagation prevention:
removed; i) physical layout of sub-station,
f) over current protective devices of higher ratings and / ii) liquid containment,
or not having variable setting to suit requirement shall
iii) fire barriers, and
be replaced with precise rating / setting facility in
correlation with safe limit of current carrying capacity iv) extinguishing system.
of wire. This point assessed periodically (see 4.35);
b) Precaution to fire origin:
g) installation shall be checked periodically, and points 1) electrical protection;
related to lose contacts or any sign of heating shall be
attended (see 12.13); 2) thermal protection;

3) pressure protection; and

h) standby power supply arrangement shall be under
surveillance (see 12.32); 4) fire resistant material.

j) all heat dissipating luminaries shall be so installed that 14.26.1 Under the category a) the points mentioned are from the
there shall be sufficient space / ventilation for heat point of view of occurrence of fire. At that stage saving human
dissipation, and shall not be installed on such material life and restricting hazard potential so as to minimise loss,
or in vicinity which may catch fire; damages and devastation shall be first priority. This can be
achieved through:
k) equipment shall comply standards, be suitable for
required duty cycle, maintained carefully, any fault a) provision of space for separation from origin of fire,
defect especially in respect of abnormal heating if
noticed, be got attained immediately and shall be b) prevention of flame propagation which shall be achieved
discarded after useful life. by proper design of layouts so as to restrict fire in
limited area and eliminate chances of spread of fire.
m) spaces surrounding electrical panels / switchgears /
DBs shall always be maintained clean and any c) Compliance of statutory requirements relating to
material which may catch fire shall not be stored in containment of oil, in respect with location, doors
vicinity; with fire rating, oil draining arrangement, oil spillage
restriction - curb / sill, oil soak pit, fire rated baffle
n) every work of additions / alteration / modification walls, etc. (Refer Reg. 44 (2) (vi), (vii), (x) of CEA
subsequent to original installation shall be done safety regulations) (also see 4.22, 4.23, 4.24).
carefully studying existing system, its capacity and
work be carried out by competent person (see 5.1); NOTES:
and
1. In transformer fire cases, it shall be noted that Mineral
p) provision of fireman’s switch shall be made in high- oil used in transformer is main risk factor raising
rise buildings (see 4.13). potential of hazard and its severity. So, all measures
related to oil are important.
14.25 Additional guidelines for prevention, remedial measures
to avoid aggravation / mitigate chances of fire arising out of arc 2. Most of this work requires civil construction,
flash: therefore shall form and be executed as coordinated
activity.
 c) As per Reg. 27 of CEA safety regulations fire buckets REF (Restricted Earth Fault Relay) Stage 1
with clean dry sand, provision of gas masks,
extinguishers, adequate fire fighting system Thermal relay (oil temperature, winding Stage 1
complying IS 3034, nitrogen injection system / deluge temperature)
sprinkler / water mist system be provided, maintained
and operated by trained personnel. Differential protection Stage 1

14.26.2 Category b) mentions points related to the prohibition of Oil surge relay Stage 2
occurrence of fire at origin. To achieve these following
measures shall be taken: Pressure relief valve Stage 2

a) Carryout scheduled tests which are very important to Buchholz relay Stage 2
assess condition of oil, bushings as Table 9.
Depending on test results needful action shall be taken Explosion vent Stage 2

Table 9 Routine Tests for Transformer Oil, Bushings and

Parameters to be Watched During Maintenance
[Clause 14.26.2 a)] 14.26.4 Very commonly seen and noticed point during visual
inspection is leakage of oil from transformer body, loss of oil
Oil Test Results / Indication level from conservator. Sometimes thermometer shows
abnormal high temperature. Such points are indicative of
DGA (Dissolved Gas H2 – Partial Discharge ensuing fault / danger and hence shall be attended on top
Analysis) priority with corrective measures. Schedule of filtration,
C2H4 – Thermal Fault in Oil replacement of silica gel from breather shall be maintained.
After losing minimum safety parameters, oil shall be replaced.
CO – Thermal fault in
Cellulose 14.26.5 Oil type transformer shall not be installed within
residential or commercial building (see 4.26 and note below it
C2H2 – Arcing
for an alternative to dry type transformer).
PD (Partial discharge) Ageing

BDV (Break down Voltage) Insulation Property 14.26.6 ‘K’ class oil as per IEC having flash point above 2500C
and Fire point above 3000C may be opted in place of mineral oil
T/F Bushings / Cable test Results / Indications
having flash point 1400C (IS 335 : 1993) (see 4.24) and further
to mitigate risk of Fire K3 class oil (classified as per IS 13503 :
Tan Delta (Dissipation Factor) Dissipation, Health of
2013 having low heat value less than 32 kJ may be used (see
Bushings
4.27)
.
15 ACTION TO BE TAKEN IN CASE OF AN
14.26.3 Protections to prevent fire at various stages shown in ELECTRICAL ACCIDENT
Table 10 shall be provided, maintained and regularly tested to
Electrical accident is most unfortunate part, under such
prevent fire. Refer Reg. 45 (2) of CEA safety Regulations (see
emergency quick actions and correct decisions are very
4.35):
important which will save life and reduce extent of damages to
Table 10 Protections which Prevent Fire at Stage 1 and property. Following points cover actions to be taken under the
Stage 2 to be Checked Maintained Operative circumstances:
(Clause 14.26.3)
15.1 Immediate action of switching off electrical supply of
Protection Preventive
respective circuit shall be taken. Person suffering from electrical
Stage
shock shall be removed with proper non conducting tackles
Over-current Stage 1 only, where there are chances of return supply or there is no 100
percent confirmation about supply being dead. Supply under
Short-circuit Stage 1 such circumstances supply shall not be switched on again before
investigation is complete and defects if any are eliminated. This
Earth-fault Stage 1 is important to avoid recurrence.

Magnetic oil gauge (MOG) Stage 1 NOTE — It shall be noted here that electrical circuitry of critical and
emergency services rescuing arrangement, fire fighting, PA system,
surveillance, illumination of escape routes shall be distinct so that when
supply is required to be disconnected under electrical accident situation,
these emergency services will not affect. Or if required to be
disconnected to save the victim, its supply can subsequently be restored
immediately after rescuing victim.

15.2 Person suffering from electrical shock shall be safely

moved away and positioned properly. Condition of person
conscious / unconscious, breathing, pulse; shall be checked.
Depending on the condition action to resuscitate shall be taken
on top priority by trained persons till the medical help arrives.

NOTE — Training sessions for handling situation to treat the person

suffering from electrical shock shall be regularly conducted under the
guidance from the experts. Immediate action of manual or artificial
resuscitating is life saving however it needs to be done in proper way.
Hence periodical training is important.

15.3 It is obligatory to give an intimation of accident to

Electrical Inspector within 24 h of occurrence of incident. For
proper investigation site shall be maintained as it was at the time
of an accident.

15.4 In house scrutiny shall be done. Causes leading o accident

due to system of working shall be identified, noted and made
known to all concerned, group discussions shall be carried out to
increase awareness towards safety. Corrective action shall be
taken.